■■^^^ISif^^?^ 


RK501  Bzf  ^^°^224/ 

._  Practical  dentistry, 


RECAP 


V3  v^,^  .. 

Columbia  ^nibcrsfitp 

in  tfje  Citp  of  i^etn  gork^'^v^ ' 

^cfjool  of  ©ental  anb  0tal  ^urgerp 


l^eference  ^.ibrarp 


)ONATi:D  bV 


^.i4iiJi:^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 

Open  Knowledge  Commons 


http://www.archive.org/details/practicaldentistOObroo 


PRACTICAL  DENTISTRY 


BY 


PRACTICAL   DENTISTS 


Compiled  and  Edited  by 

I.  Norman  Broomell,  D.D.S. 

Dean  of  the  Dental  Department  of  The  Medico-Chirurgical  College,  Philadelphia ; 

Associate  Editor  of  The  Dental  Brief;    Author  of  "Anatomy  and 

Histology  of  the  Mouth  and  Teeth,"  etc.,  etc. 


The  L.  D.  Caulk  Co. 

Publishers  of  The  Dental  Brief 

Publishers 

Philadelphia,  1908 


Copyright,  1908,  The  L.  D.  Caulk  Co. 


CONTENTS 


PART  I 
OPERATIVE  DENTISTRY 


Chapter  I. 

PAGE 

Preparation  of  Cavities,  Filling  Teeth  and  Associated  Subjects. 

Gold   Fillings    i 

Amalgam  Fillings    8 

Cement  Fillings    I7 

Tin-Foil  Fillings    23 

Gutta-Percha   Fillings    25 

Preparation  of  Cavities,  Cavity  Linings,  Etc 28 

Filling  Teeth — General  Remarks   36 

Conservative  Treatment  of  the  Pulp  46 

The  Rubber  Dam    50 

Separating  Methods    56 


Chapter  II. 
Treatment  and  Filling  Teeth  of  Young  Children   61 

Chapter  III. 
Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays   71 

Chapter  IV. 
Local  Anaesthesia — Treatment  of  Hypersensitive  Dentin 95 

Chapter  V. 
Special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases ■ 129 

Chapter  VI. 

Antisepsis — Prophylaxis,    Sterilization,    Etc 141 

Hi 


iv  Contents. 

Chapter  VII. 

PAGE 

Oral    Surgery — Antral    Affections,    Alveolar    Abscess,    Extract- 
ing,  Etc 175 

Chapter  VIII. 

Pulp  Devitalization — Root  Canal  Treatment,  Filling,  Etc 207 

Pulp    Removal    210 

Treatment  of  Root  Canals   218 

Root  Canal  Fillings    229 

Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Root  Canal,  Miscellaneous 245 

Root  Canal  Treatment  in  Deciduous  Teeth  258 

Chapter  IX. 
Pyorrhea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions  267 

Chapter  X. 
Operative  Dentistry — Miscellaneous    285 


PART  II 
PROSTHETIC  DENTISTRY 


Chapter  I. 

PAGE 

Construction  of  Dentures,  Entire,  Full  and  Partial. 

Miscellaneous   Information — Impressions    303 

Plaster  Cast — Articulating  Models    310 

Partial    Impressions    315 

Vulcanite   Dentures    316 

Repairing  Vulcanite   Dentures    328 

Dies  and  Counter  Dies— Swaging 335 

Solders  and  Soldering  337 

Manipulation  of  Plaster  of  Paris  342 

Prosthetic   Dentistry — Miscellaneous    346 

Chapter  II. 

Crown  and  Bridge  Work  373 

Chapter  III. 

Orthodontia    417 

Chapter  IV. 

General   Information    435 


PREFACE 


We  may  not  speak  of  dentistry  as  an  art  or  a  science, 
but  rather  as  numerous  arts  and  sciences  in  combination, 
applied  to  a  particular  end.  It  has  to  do  with  medicine, 
surgery  and  mechanics.  It  delves  into  chemistry  and  metal- 
lurgy and  in  its  highest  phases  exemplifies  the  fine  arts. 

It  is  not  surprising,  then,  that  a  vast  amount  of  litera- 
ture should  have  sprung  out  of  the  investigations  and  ex- 
periences of  the  members  of  this  youthful  profession.  Dental 
libraries  contain  a  great  deal,  much  of  v^hich  is  author- 
itative and  exact,  and  there  are  many  volumes  treating 
branches  upon  which  the  last  word  is  yet  to  be  spoken. 

But  a  wealth  of  material,  much  of  it  of  great  practical 
value,  the  result  of  the  experiences  of  the  active  members 
of  the  profession  has  an  ephemeral  existence,  appearing 
perhaps  in  a  society  paper,  filling  the  pages  of  professional 
journals,  quoted  in  the  form  of  condensed  paragraphs,  and 
then  lost  in  the  files  that  are  stored  in  the  attic,  or  destroyed 
and  forgotten. 

This  material  has  a  value  beyond  estimation ;  and  since 
pro fessionar  learning  has  become  so  vast  and  complex  that 
even  the  greatest  student  cannot  master  it  all,  but  requires 
only  to  be  able  to  find  it,  the  need  of  the  careful  compiler  is 
evident. 

There  is  no  conflict  between  theory  and  practice  if 
both  are  right.  The  theorist  may  overlook  the  details  of 
the  application  of  his  principles,  or  fail  to  note  their  limita- 
tions. But  the  man  in  practice  who  attempts  to  illustrate 
theories  emphasizes,  elaborates  or  qualifies  in  details,  and 
thus  brings  principles  and  their  application  into  complete 
harmony. 

Therefore  from  those  who  have  devoted  a  portion 
of  their  busy  lives  to  investigation  and  research  we  ex- 


vi  Preface. 

pect  and  have  received  much,  and  their  opinions  are  ever 
required  to  guide  the  profession  in  its  perpetual  advance. 
But  the  humbler  brother,  who  toils  in  office  or  laboratory 
from  day  to  day  with  an  idea  primarily  of  efficient  service 
and  not  of  publicity,  meets  with  problems  which  his  skill 
and  ingenuity  must  overcome;  and  oftentimes  he  finds  a 
solution  along  new  lines  or  discovers  a  shorter  path  than 
the  beaten  track.  He,  too,  has  something  of  value  to  con- 
tribute to  dental  learning. 

Occasionally  he  appears  before  his  society  and  a  terse 
account  of  his  experiences  finds  its  way  into  print;  and  the 
professional  journals  throughout  the  old  files  that  repose 
on  dusty  shelves  are  sprinkled  with  such  hints  and  sug- 
gestions ;  but  who  was  the  author  ?  What  was  the  volume 
and  page?    And  where  is  the  volume  we  require? 

The  compiler  assumed  the  task  of  gleaner.  He  has 
attempted  to  gather  from  dental  literature  of  the  last  decade 
and  to  present  in  brief  paragraphs  that  which  is  suggestive 
and  helpful,  expressed  tersely.  He  acknowledges  his  in- 
debtedness to  the  several  journals  as  well  as  to  the  numerous 
authors  who  have  been  placed  under  contribution. 

Not  all  that  is  contained  in  this  volume  has  unqualified 
editorial  indorsement.  There  are  suggestions  which  will  be 
regarded  as  of  practical  value  by  some  but  to  others  will 
hold  only  historical  interest,  marking  the  milestones  of 
professional  progress  and  shedding  light  upon  present-day 
theories  or  methods.  In  either  case  it  is  believed  that  their 
insertion  is  justified.  Selections  have  been  made  in  many 
instances  because  of  their  suggestiveness  or  because  they 
offer  to  the  busy  man  a  hint  or  a  choice  of  methods.  As 
far  as  possible  duplications  have  been  avoided.  Credit  has 
been  given  wherever  possible ;  but  for  the  good  of  the  pro- 
fession it  is  more  vital  that  that  which  is  helpful  shall  be 
included  than  that  individual  honors  shall  be  bestowed. 
Elmerson's  idea  might  be  applied  here : 

"Thought  is  the  property  of  him  who  can  conceive  it 
and  who  can  adequately  place  it." 

Could  one  condense  all  the  ideas  which  have  appeared 


Preface.  vii 

in  our  dental  journals  for  the  past  decade,  he  would  have 
an  epitome  of  dentistry,  not  the  product  of  a  few,  but  practi- 
cally the  product  of  the  whole  profession,  covering  its 
science,  its  art,  its  theory  and  its  practice. 

That,  within  necessary  limits,  has  been  the  object  in 
the  preparation  of  this  book,  and  in  a  measure,  has  been 
carried  out. 

These  paragraphs,  the  product  of  hundreds  of  writers, 
appearing  in  the  several  dental  journals,  have  been  gathered, 
condensed  and  classified ;  and  it  is  believed  that  the  result 
is  a  book  that  will  throw  a  flood  of  light  on  many  a  per- 
plexing problem  which  the  student  may  confront,  and  prove 
a  valued  assistant  to  the  busy  man  in  practice. 

I.  Norman  Broomell. 
"The  Flanders,"  1908, 

Fifteenth  and  Walnut  Streets, 

Philadelphia. 


PART    ONE 

CHAPTER     I 


OPERATIVE  DENTISTRY 

Preparation  of  Cavities,  Filling  Teeth  and  Associated  Subjects 


GOLD  FILLINGS 

A  Water-tight  Gold  Filling. — Prepare  cavity  as  for  an 
inlay  and  then  give  a  retention  form  either  by  grooves  or 
dovetails.  Dry  the  cavity  and  line  with  thin  cement.  Cut 
a  piece  of  No.  30  or  No.  40  gold  foil  as  though  for  taking 
an  impression  for  an  inlay  and  put  it  down  in  the  cavity 
in  the  usual  impression  method.  This  gives  a  cavity  lined 
with  gold,  with  cement  in  every  possible  irregularity.  Fill 
with  any  cohesive  gold  which  the  operator  is  in  the  habit  of 
using,  beginning  first  with  the  undercuts  where  the  lining 
may  be  split,  condensing  thoroughly  with  hand  pluggers 
and  finishing  in  the  usual  way. — W.  Thompson  Madin, 
British  Dental  Journal. 

Starting  Gald  Fillings  with  Cement. — Using  a  quantity 
not  too  large  of  a  cement  setting  with  moderate  quickness, 
there  is  a  ready  and  positive  fixation  of  the  first  pieces  of 
gold.  There  is  no  rocking  or  tipping.  The  pulp,  when 
nearly  exposed,  is  protected,  weak  walls  are  strengthened, 
gold  is  prevented  from  showing  through  thin  walls,  and 
with  skilled  manipulation  positive  anchorage  is  obtained  in 
cavities  in  which  it  would  be  extremely  difficult  to  pack  or 
retain  the  gold  in  any  other  way. — C.  A.  Brackett,  Dental 
Brief. 

The  Adhesive  Gold  Filling. — For  the  insertion  of  an 
adhesive  gold  filling,  moss-fibre  gold  should  be  annealed 
and  placed  near  at  hand.     Some  creamy  oxyphosphate  of 


2  Gold  Filliiii^s. 

zinc  should  be  dropped  into  the  bottom  of  the  cavity  and 
the  gold  pressed  upon  it  in  all  directions,  down  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  cavity  and  up  to  the  edges,  so  that  but  a  thin 
layer  of  cement  will  remain  and  all  of  the  walls  be  covered 
by  the  adhesive  layer  of  gold.  Then  press  more  gold  firmlv 
upon  the  bottom  of  the  cavity  and  allow  the  cement  to  set. 
Then  condense  the  gold  thoroughly  and  add  more  sponge 
gold,  condensing  until  a  thick,  solid  mass  is  obtained  in 
the  bottom  of  the  cavity  and  the  edges  cleansed  of  all  ad- 
hering cement.  Then  finish  with  gold  leaf  or  pellets  as 
desired. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Digest. 

Tin  and  Gold;  Coloration. — Fillings  of  mixed  tin  and 
gold — one  of  tin  to  six  of  gold — will  retain  permanently  the 
color  of  Roman  gold — a  pale  greenish  tint — laying  a  sheet 
of  tin  on  three  of  gold  and  covering  with  three  more  of  gold  ; 
Non-cohesive  gold  No.  4  and  tin  foil  No.  4  cut  in  four 
or  five  strips,  and  then,  in  suitable  lengths,  rolling  between 
the  fingers  to  form  cylinders  and  avoiding  exposure  of 
the  tin.  In  finishing  the  filling  burnishers  must  not  be 
used,  or  the  color  of  the  tin  will  be  brought  out. — A.  Hugen- 
scHMiDT,  Revue  de  Stomatologie. 

Combination  Filling;  Gold  and  Tin  Foil. — That  the  tin 
may  be  equally  distributed  throughout  the  gold,  and  in  the 
proportion  of  about  one  to  six,  fold  a  sheet  of  soft  gold 
over  twice,  giving  four  layers,  then  place  on  the  folded 
gold  a  strip  of  tin  foil  of  the  same  length  as  the  gold,  but 
somewhat  narrower.  Fold  the  gold  over  the  tin  a  sufficient 
number  of  times  to  make  the  strip  the  required  width.  By 
this  combination  we  get  greater  softness,  toughness,  more 
certainty  in  the  welding,  greater  solidity,  and  stronger  mar- 
gins.— Benjamin  Lord,  Internatinal  Dental  Journal. 

Tin-and-Gold  Cylinders. — Keep  ready  rolled  two  or 
three  books  of  diiTerent  sized  cylinders  of  (a)  gold, 
one  part;  tin,  one  part;  {b)  gold,  five  parts;  tin,  one 
part;  ic)  gold,  eleven  parts;  tin,  one  part,  respectively. 
The  first  packs  almost  like  amalgam,  will  unite  very  quickly 


operative  Dentistry.  3 

by  electrolysis,  and  gets  almost  as  dark  as  amalgam  in  most 
cases.  The  second  packs  less  readily,  unites  almost  as 
quickly  by  electrolysis,  and  keeps  a  dark,  mottled  gold  color. 
The  third  packs  almost  like,  but  more  firmly  than,  soft  gold, 
does  not  unite  as  quickly  as  the  others,  and  keeps  a  color 
closely  resembling  that  of  pure  gold. — Dr.  Von  Beust, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Care  of  Gold  Foil  in  Pellets. — In  the  same  drawer  with 
the  open  box  or  bottle  containing  the  pellets,  place  a  small 
porcelain  receptacle  containing  a  pledget  of  cotton  satu- 
rated with  aqua  ammonia.  The  escaping  gas  will  render 
the  pellets  uniformly  soft,  velvety  and  manageable,  and 
absolutely  non-cohesive.  When  about  to  use,  transfer  the 
pellets  to  the  electric  annealer,  and  turn  on  the  current ;  the 
result  will  be  a  series  of  pellets,  each  in  its  behavior  pecu- 
liarly like  its  fellows,  and  capable  of  perfect  cohesion  and 
density  under  the  impact  of  the  plugger. — C.  N.  Johnson, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Ideal  Gold  Filling. — The  ideal  gold  filling  will  have 
its  margins  carried  into  the  region  of  comparative  immun- 
ity; will  be  perfectly  adapted  to  the  walls  of  the  cavity, 
making  an  absolutely  water-tight  filling;  will  be  so  dense 
that  its  specific  gravity  shall  be  close  to  that  of  cast  gold; 
so  contoured  that  it  will  preserve  the  interproximal  space; 
so  antagonize  the  occluding  teeth  that  it  will  have  the  great- 
est usefulness  consistent  with  safety ;  and  finally,  will  be 
finished  and  polished  like  a  mirror. — J.  V.  Conzett,  Dental 
Review. 

A  Combination  Filling. — Pure  gold  built  into  a  layer  of 
soft  cement,  first  using  soft  gold,  then  cohesive  foil,  and 
where  subject  to  abrasion  finishing  with  gold-platinum  foil, 
forms  a  combination  magnifying  the  good  qualities  and 
minimizing  the  faults  of  each  of  the  ingredients.  The  ce- 
ment is  adhesive,  the  soft  gold  gives  close  adaptation  to 
cavity  walls  and  margins,  the  cohesive  gold  resists  lateral 
stress  in  contour,  and  the  alloy  of  gold  and  platinum  resists 
abrasion. — Clyde  Davis,  Dental  Summary. 


4  Gold  Fillings. 

Tin  and  Gold;  Annealing  the  Tin. — Put  into  the  cavity 
as  many  tin  cylinders  as  will  fill  it  when  consolidated.  Heat 
a  small  plugger  in  an  alcohol  flame  and  force  it  into  the 
mass,  thus  annealing  the  tin  in  the  cavity.  Repeat  until  the 
tin  shows  a  decided  change  in  the  relation  of  its  molecules 
by  its  resistance  under  the  plugger.  The  degree  of  heat  is 
immaterial,  provided  it  is  done  with  care,  bearing  in  mind 
that  tin  is  a  low  conductor  of  heat  and  cold,  while  the  teeth 
respond  very  quickly  to  thermal  changes. — T.  D.  Shumway, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Tin  and  Gold. — It  has  always  been  taught  that  tin  must 
go  next  to  the  cervical  border,  the  weak  point,  but  for 
eighteen  months  I  have  reversed  the  practice,  and  I  believe 
there  is  something  in  it.  Tin  next  to  the  cervical  margin 
turns  black  and  looks  like  a  line  of  black  caries.  There  is 
not  this  trouble  when  the  gold  is  put  next  to  the  border  and 
the  tin  in  the  middle. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 

Mat  Gold. — Use  mat  gold  judiciously,  study  your  teeth 
and  its  manipulation,  and  you  will  never  regret  adopting  it. 
No  retaining  pits  are  needed ;  for  conformity  and  adaptation 
to  cavities  nothing  can  equal  it.  At  the  cervical  margin 
it  is  equal  to  tin  as  a  tooth-saver.  When  properly  treated 
it  is  soft  and  cohesive.  For  good  color  electro-mat  takes 
precedence,  but  in  other  respects  all  the  mat  golds  appear 
alike. — E.  N.  Stump,  Dental  Digest. 

Mat  of  Gold  at  Cervix. — A  mat  of  gold  at  the  cervical 
margins,  especially  in  bicuspids  and  molars,  makes  not  only 
an  excellent  foundation  for  the  first  layers  of  the  filling  but 
it  also  holds  the  matrix  from  the  margins  to  a  degree  afford- 
ing abundance  of  material  for  contouring  and  fine  finishing. 
The  mat  should  consist  of  several  layers  and  extend  far 
enough  into  the  proximal  space  to  fold  a  little  gumwards. — 
Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Combination  Gold  and  Cement  Fillings. — Solila  gold  is 
non-tipping:  the  plugger  perforates  it  and  presses  the  par- 
ticles into  the  soft  cement  which,  after  hardening,  can  be 


operative  Dentistry.  5 

built  on  with  any  kind  of  gold  desired;  the  cement  should 
be  a  very  thin  layer  of  a  creamy  mix,  so  that  the  gold  will 
be  almost  in  contact  with  the  walls.  Pressure  gives  greater 
adhesion  and  causes  it  to  set  more  rapidly. — J.  J.  Reed, 
Dental  Review. 

Why  Some  Gold  Fillings  Become  Loose. — When  a  gold 
filling  is  subjected  to  the  impact  of  mastication  for  a  time 
it  will  undoubtedly  change  its  shape,  so  that  the  fillings  in 
a  good  many  teeth  will  become  loose — ^not  because  they  are 
improperly  shaped,  not  because  the  tooth  has  been  im- 
properly filled,  but  because  of  the  impact  brought  to  bear 
upon  the  gold.  In  time  it  is  forced  from  position  by  means 
of  a  change  in  its  shape. — W.  H.  Trueman,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Packing  Non-cohesive  Gold. — Place  a  very  large  piece 
of  non-cohesive  gold  in  the  cavity,  following  with  a  large 
ball  of  bibulous  paper  which  is  then  packed  with  a  large 
plugger,  carrying  before  it  the  soft  gold  which  is  thus  car- 
ried safely  to  the  floor  of  the  cavity,  not  punctured  or  cut 
through  with  the  plugger  point.  Condense  without  the 
mallet  until  two  or  three  such  layers  have  been  made, 
when  it  may  be  malleted  ad  libitum. — S.  G.  Perry, 
Dental  Era. 

Adhesive  Gold  Fillings. — The  use  of  soft  cement  under 
a  gold  filling  prevents  thermal  shock  to  a  certain  extent 
and  obviates  the  necessity  for  cutting  grooves  or  anchor 
pits  in  very  sensitive  teeth,  to  the  great  relief  of  the  patient. 
Before  inserting  the  cement  apply  oil  of  cloves,  wiping 
out  the  excess ;  |this  prevents  injury  to  the  pulp  by  the  phos- 
phoric acid,  and  prevents  recurrence  of  decay  to  a  greater 
or  less  extent. — J.  L.  Sutphin,  Dental  Digest 

To  Cut  Gold  Foil  in  the  Form  of  Ribbons. — Lay  a  sheet 
of  gold  on  a  sheet  of  white  writing  paper;  cover  with  an- 
other sheet  of  paper  and  a  piece  of  gold  on  that,  and  so  on, 
until  there  are  as  many  sheets  of  gold  as  required.  Fold 
the  whole  over  twice,  as  in  folding  a  letter,  and  cut  through 


6  Gold  Fillings. 

gold  and  paper.  There  will  be  no  torn  edg-es,  and  the  gold 
will  not  come  in  contact  with  the  hands. — Henry  Barnes, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Combination  Gold  and  Amalgam  Filling. — With  a  thin 
coating  of  varnish  spread  upon  the  dentinal  walls  and  gingi- 
val margins,  a  layer  of  amalgam  can  be  quickly  burnished 
on,  forming  a  base  on  which  to  build  gold  that  will  remain 
an  absolute  bar  to  oral  fluids.  The  cohesion  of  gold  to 
amalgam,  and  of  amalgam  to  dentin,  add  very  largely  to  sta- 
bility and  preservation,  while  much  less  time  is  required  to 
insert  a  filling  in  this  way. — Dr.  Hewitt,  The  Bur. 

Failure  of  Gold  Fillings. — The  condition  of  the  peri- 
dental membrane  is  at  times  the  most  serious  handicap 
to  the  insertion  of  gold  fiUings  with  the  force  necessary 
to  get  the  best  results  in  occluso-proximal  cavities.  The 
peridental  membrane  is  very  often  so  sensitive  to  pressure 
as  to  make  the  force  required  unbearable,  though  the  teeth 
in  themselves  are  abundantly  strong  to  withstand  such 
force. — Wm.  L.  Ellerbeck,  International  Dental  Journal. 

So-called  "Annealing"  Gold  Foil. — A  pellet  of  cohesive 
gold  may  be  made  non-cohesive  by  exposing  it  to  the  in- 
fluence of  ammonia  fumes,  and  the  pellets  so  made  non- 
cohesive  may  be  made  cohesive  again  by  driving  off  the 
ammonia  gas  with  heat,  and  this  is  what  we  do  with  our  non- 
cohesive  foil  wdien  we  heat  it ;  but  this  is  not  analogous  to 
the  "annealing"  of  gold  plate,  and  it  is  not  intended  to 
anneal  the  non-cohesive  gold. — M.  L.  Ward,  Dental  Digest. 

Gold  and  Platinum. — Gold  and  platinum  should  be  cm- 
ployed  to  a  greater  extent  than  it  is  to-day,  for  while  its 
manipulation  is  somewhat  more  exacting  than  that  of  gold, 
its  intelligent  use  will  lead  to  artistic  results  unattainable 
with  gold  alone,  and  its  superior  density  adds  greater  perma- 
nence to  the  surfaces  of  all  fillings  which  are  in  any  way 
subject  to  attrition. — C.  N.  Johnson,  International  Dental 
Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  7 

Moss-fibre  Gold. — The  advantages  offered  by  the  use  of 
moss-fibre  gold,  in  contour  work,  are  its  extreme  softness 
and  adaptabiHty,  which  make  malleting  unnecessary,  even 
extremely  heavy  hand-pressure  not  being  required  to 
make  the  filling  sufficiently  hard  and  strong,  the  operation 
being  consequently  much  less  fatiguing  to  the  patient. — 
R.  G.  Hutchinson,  Jr.,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Non-cohesive  Gold. — The  preparation  of  absolutely  lion- 
cohesive  gold  is  more  or  less  a  secret  process,  but  it  is  as- 
sumed that  the  beaten  foil  is  placed  in  a  furnace  between 
sheets  of  paper  and  allowed  to  remain  in  the  muffle  until  the 
paper  is  incinerated.  Absolutely  non-cohesive  gold  does  not 
regain  cohesive  properties  by  annealing,  even  if  heated  to 
cherry  redness. — John  I.  Hart,  The  Dentist's  Magazine. 

Sponge  Gold. — Line  the  cavity  with  a  creamy  mix  of 
zinc  oxyphosphate,  then  pack  a  thin  layer  of  sponge  gold 
over  this  and  allow  the  cement  to  set;  then  pack  the  gold 
up  to  the  coronal  edges,  being  certain  that  the  edges  are 
perfect,  and  we  have  the  ideal  gold  filling — an  adhesive  gold 
filling  the  most  perfect  that  has  ever  been  given  to  the  den- 
tist to  make. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Gold  Fillings  Patched  with  Amalgam. — The  cavity  ex- 
tending beyond  the  filling  must  be  properly  sterilized,  but 
it  is  a  great  mistake  to  try  to  sterilize  them  with  substances 
that  are  not  absolutely  soluble  in  water;  therefore  sterilize 
them  with  bichlorid,  or  with  formalin  or  something  of  that 
nature  rather  than  with  creosote,  carbolic  acid,  etc. — A.  W. 
Harlan,  Items  of  Interest. 

Starting  Cohesive  Gold  Fillings. — In  hypersensitive 
dentin,  where  excavation  is  almost  intolerable,  make  the 
cavity  only  retentive  in  form.  Place  a  large  pellet  of  soft 
foil  in  the  cervical  region,  drive  cohesive  foil  into  its  centre, 
and  the  desired  start  is  easily  made.  Soft  foil  thus  used 
becomes  a  most  powerful  assistant. — D.  E.  Sheehan.  Den- 
tal Register. 


8  Amalgam  Fillings. 

Combination  Cohesive  and  Non-cohesive  Gold  Fillings. — 

The  combination  of  cohesive  and  non-cohesive  gold,  using 
the  good  qualities  of  both,  and  eliminating  as  much  as 
possible  their  bad  qualities,  saves  time,  energy  and  nerves, 
in  filling  cavities  in  the  approximo-occlusal  surfaces  of 
bicuspids  and  molars. — J.  V.  Conzett,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Platinum-Gold. — With  a  platinum-gold  filling  in  a  front 
tooth  there  is  no  display  or  glitter  of  gold;  it  is  simply  a 
restoration  of  contour,  perfect  in  color  and  which  will  with- 
stand any  wear  that  may  be  put  upon  it  in  mastication.  You 
can  use  platinum-gold  and  do  yourselves,  your  profession, 
and  your  patients  the  greatest  good. — H.  J.  McKellops. 


AMALGAM    FILLINGS 

Amalgam   Fillings   in   Adjacent   Proximal    Cavities. — 

When  both  cavities  involve  the  morsal  surface,  with  the 
gingival  margins  at  or  near  the  gum,  prepare  the  cavities 
as  for  porcelain  inlays,  making  round,  smooth,  well-defined 
edges.  Make  a  gold  matrix  for  one  cavity  and  fill  with  a 
quick-setting  amalgam,  building  with  contour  slightly  in 
excess.  Remove  the  matrix  with  the  filling  and  set  it  aside 
while  the  second  cavity  is  similarly  treated.  Fill  the  cavities 
with  gutta-percha  and  dismiss  the  patient  until  second 
sitting.  Drop  each  matrix  with  its  contained  amalgam  fill- 
ing upon  a  small  pile  of  freshly  mixed  plaster  and  trim  to 
satisfactory  form  for  handling.  When  set,  trim  the  amal- 
gam to  shape  and  polish,  the  gold  serving  as  guide  to  cavity 
margins,  the  gingival  margains  being  thus  easily  polished. 
At  next  sitting  place  the  dam  and  treat  each  filling  as  an 
inlay. — R.  Ottolengui,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Amalgam  Fillings. — Apply  a  thermo-cau- 
tery  point  to  the  surface  of  the  filling.  When  globules  ©f 
mercury  appear  on  the  surface  of  the  filling,  force  the  point 
further  into  the  filling,  which  will  be  softened  in  a  few 


operative  Dentistry.  9 

seconds.  The  amalgam  can  then  be  readily  removed  with 
an  excavator.  If  there  is  an  adjacent  filling,  which  it  is 
desired  to  preserve,  a  non-conductor  should  be  inserted  be- 
tween the  teeth — a  piece  of  visiting  card  will  be  found  suffi- 
cient.— H.  RoDiER,  Revue  de  Stomatologie. 

An  Amalgam  Crown. — In  the  case  of  a  molar  too  badly 
broken  down  to  warrant  filling,  remove  all  the  enamel  that  is 
not  pretty  well  supported  with  dentin  and  shape  to  receive 
band  of  German  silver,  made  to  articulate  with  the  occluding 
teeth.  With  band  in  place  fill  the  root-canals  and  ream  out 
the  pulp-chamber  for  anchorage  of  a  quick-setting  alloy. 
At  a  subsequent  sitting  remove  the  band  and  finish  up  the 
case,  grinding  up  the  cusps  or  protecting  the  surfaces. 
— B.  F.  Bruce,  Dental  Hints. 

Preparation  of  Amalgam. — When  the  alloy  is  ready  for 
the  cavity,  place  the  mass  on  a  slab  and  pound  it  thoroughly, 
using  a  mandrel  with  head  the  size  of  a  pea,  and  hand 
mallet.  Pound  it  until  it  works  tough  and  sharp.  Then  place 
it  in  the  cavity  in  little  smooth  blocks  and  pack  with  smooth 
burnishers,  removing  excess  of  mercury  from  each  piece. 
Pluggers  do  not  condense  or  pack  the  alloy,  but  rather  cut 
up  and  push  about -that  which  has  been  placed  in  position. 
More  alloy  and  less  mercury  remains  in  the  filling  by  this 
method. — I.  R.  Sims,  Dental  World. 

Amalgam  and  Oxyphosphate — A  New  Combination  Fill- 
ing.— Heat  an  amalgam  button  and  mix  the  cement  simul- 
taneously and  immediately  incorporate  the  amalgam  with 
the  cement  mass,  giving  a  gray  mass  which  retains  the  ad- 
hesiveness of  the  cement,  sets  hard  in  the  same  time  as 
the  cement  alone,  and  within  ten  minutes  of  its  intro- 
duction can  be  varnished  to  a  fine  metallic  lustre.  The 
fillings  wear  well.  Vary  the  proportions  according  to  the 
masticating  strength  the  filling  will  require.  Absolute 
dryness  is  essential  to  success. — William  Guy,  Dental 
Record. 

2 


lo  Amalgam  Fillings. 

Amalgam  Restoration  of  Crown. — The  entire  crown 
being  gone,  the  roots  were  filled,  a  heavy  gold  screw  inserted 
in  each  root,  cut  off  to  about  the  level  of  the  adjoining 
teeth.  A  platinum-lined  gold  band,  32-gauge,  is  slightly  con- 
toured and  pressed  down  over  the  remnants  of  the  root  and 
filled  with  amalgam,  bitten  into  by  the  opposing  teeth  to  give 
the  occlusion.  The  amalgam  engaging  in  the  threads  of  the 
screws  and  the  contour  of  the  band  makes  a  solid  crown. 
Finish  by  absorbing  surplus  mercury  with  pellets  of  gold. — 
E.  A.  BoGUE,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Mixing  Amalgam. — Proper  amalgamation  is  essential 
to  the  best  results,  and  proper  amalgamation  is  to  be  ob- 
tained just  as  you  would  get  the  best  results  in  mixing 
oxyphosphate  cement;  that  is,  first  put  in  the  mortar  all 
the  mercury  required  for  that  mix,  add  but  a  small  portion 
of  alloy  and  pestle  it  out  of  sight,  and  gradually  add  other 
portions  of  alloy  until  the  mass  is  the  right  consistence 
without  squeezing  out  any  of  the  mercury. — W.  W.  Coon, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Hasten  the  Setting  of  Amalgam. — Precipitated 
silver  is  a  very  effective  and  convenient  agent  for  harden- 
ing amalgam  fillings  and  absorbing  the  surplus  mer- 
cury pressed  to  the  surface  in  packing.  Its  affinity  for 
mercury  is  as  great  as  that  of  freshly  annealed  crystal  gold. 
Apply  to  fillings  in  lower  teeth  with  tweezers  or  a  small 
scoop;  carry  to  place  in  upper  teeth  on  the  point  of 
the  finger.  Make  the  filling  more  than  flush,  and  burnish 
down  to  secure  the  best  results. — J.  Morgan  Howe,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Amalgam  as  a  Filling  Material. — One  objection  to 
amalgam  is  that  it  is  productive  of  pulp  stones,  one  of  the 
most  annoying  things  a  dentist  has  to  contend  with.  There 
is  no  doubt  but  that  all  metals  employed  in  filling  teeth  are 
more  or  less  responsible  for  the  production  of  pulp  stones, 
but  it  is  especially  true  of  amalgam. — J-  V.  Crawford, 
Items  of  Interest. 


operative  Dentistry.  ii 

Gold  Amalgam. — The  addition  of  a  small  percentage 
of  gold  to  the  alloy  is  an  advantage,  dissolving  the  gold  in 
the  mercury.  One  grain  of  Watt's  crystal  gold  dissolved  in 
four  hundred  grains  of  mercury  gives  a  solution  of  one- 
fourth  of  one  per  cent.  Eight  grains  gives  a  two  per  cent, 
solution.  A  small  percentage  of  gold  makes  the  amalgam 
tougher,  gives  it  a  better  color,  and  renders  it  more  satisfac- 
tory altogether.  Dissolving  the  gold  in  the  mercury  insures 
perfect  distribution  throughout  the  mass. — W.  W.  Coon, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Mixing  Amalgams. — When  an  alloy  is  amalgamated 
and  the  excess  of  mercury  removed  by  squeezing,  an  un- 
known quantity  of  the  constituents  of  the  alloy  is  removed 
by  the  mercury,  depending  upon  the  solubility  of  the  metals 
in  mercury.  To  obtain  the  best  results  they  should  be  mixed 
with  a  definite  quantity  of  mercury,  and  under  no  conditions 
must  excess  of  mercury  be  used. — F.  J.  Brislee.  Dental 
Record. 

Why  Some  Amalgam  Fillings  are  Failures. — Upon  the 
assumption  that  amalgam  is  a  cheap  material,  all  of  the 
steps  in  the  operation  are  made  too  cheap ;  a  fundamental 
error,  because  cavity-preparation,  contouring,  and  subse- 
quent finishing  are  all  fixed  factors  in  tooth-filling,  regard- 
less of  material.  Imperfect  preparation,  hasty  and  sloppy 
packing,  and  failure  to  dress  to  perfect  margins  are  simply 
malpractice. — H.  H.  Burchard,  The  Stomatologist. 

Polishing  Amalgm  Fillings. — The  surface  of  an  amal- 
gam filling  should  be  made  smooth  with  fine  pumice  and 
moose  hide  discs,  followed  by  whiting  and  a  fine  brush 
wheel;  this  will  produce  a  surface  like  burnished  silver. 
These  fillings,  of  course,  tarnish,  but  at  each  sitting  for 
cleansing  the  lustre  is  quickly  restored  with  the  polishing 
brush. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  Interest. 

Combination  Filling,  Alloy  Fillings  and  Oxyphosphate. — 

(i)  With   the   average   oxyphosphate   powder   mix   thor- 
oughly an  equal  part  of  fine-cut  alloy  fillings,  and  prepare 


12  Amalgam  nUings. 

as  usual  by  mixing  with  phosphoric  acid.  After  inserting, 
continue  pressure  until  crystallization  is  well  advanced. 
Resists  attrition,  and  there  is  never  any  discoloration. 
The  lasting  qualities  are  much  improved  by  the  com- 
bination.— C.  B.  Parker. 

Repairing  Amalgam  Fillings. — When  it  is  desired  to 
add  to  an  old  amalgam  filling,  clean  the  surface  with  a  cross- 
cut bur,  wipe  the  cleaned  part  of  the  amalgam  with  a  piece 
of  cotton  wool  moistened  with  concentrated  phosphoric  acid 
and  pack  on  the  new  amalgam  which  will  adhere  with  no 
trouble ;  the  joint  has  about  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  strength 
of  the  amalgam  used. — Stanley  Read,  British  Dental 
Journal. 

Removal  of  Surplus  Mercury. — The  surplus  mercury 
can  be  squeezed  out  of  amalgam  if  every  part  of  the  mass 
is  squeezed  simultaneously,  just  as  water  can  be  squeezed 
out  to  the  utmost  extent  from  a  sponge  if  the  sponge  be  en- 
tirely enclosed  in  the  hands.  To  effect  the  entire  compres- 
sion of  the  amalgam  in  the  cavity,  use  a  matrix  and  squeeze 
powerfully  over  the  whole  free  surface  with  a  closely  fitted 
pad. — Harry  Baldwin,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Adherent  Amalgam  Fillings. — Prepare  the  cavity  with 
sharp,  smooth  edges  and  mix  the  alloy  to  the  consistency 
of  soft  wax.  Place  a  few  drops  of  creamy  oxyphosphate 
of  zinc  in  the  cavity  and  squeeze  it  out  with  amalgam 
pressed  firmly  against  it.  Allow  the  cement  to  set,  scrape 
and  cleanse  the  edges,  and  finish  with  amalgam  squeezed 
dry.  This  gives  a  dense  adhesive  filling  that  will  not  dis- 
color.— Joseph  Head,  Dental  Digest. 

Packing  Amalgam. — Pressure  on  any  one  portion  of  a 
large  amalgam  filling  should  be  very  light,  as  heavy  press- 
ure on  one  part  springs  or  bends  the  amalgam  away  from 
another  part  where  it  may  pass  unobserved.  If  this  theory 
is  correct,  the  filling  will  surely  be  disturbed  many  times  by 
the  occluding  tooth  striking  it  before  it  has  hardened. — 
J.  N.  Crouse,  Dental  Digest. 


operative  Dentistry.  13 

Removal  of  Amalgam  Fillings. — Hold  a  heated  instru- 
ment on  the  filling  until  the  heat  is  felt  in  the  tooth.     Bur 

out  at  once,  when  it  can  be  cut  like  cheese.  Use  an  in- 
strument having  a  very  slender  shank  with  a  bulbous  end, 
one  of  the  old  "Wood's  Metal"  fillers  of  forty  years  ago. 
The  slender  shank  prevents  the  heat  from  radiating  too 
rapidly. — A.  H.  Brockway,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Finishing  Amalgam  Fillings. — As  a  rule  it  is  far  more 
difficult  to  finish  properly  an  amalgam  filling  than  one  made 
of  any  other  material.  It  always  takes  me  a  longer  time  to 
finish  an  amalgam  filling  made  in  the  proximal  surface  of 
a  tooth  that  has  an  adjoining  tooth  in  position  than  it  does 
to  prepare  the  cavity  and  make  the  filling. — E.  K.  Wedel- 
STAEDT,  Dental  Review. 

Durability  of  Amalgam. — I  have  two  amalgam  filings 
in  my  mouth  that  were  put  in  49  years  ago,  before  the  days 
of  rubber-dam,  absorbent  cotton,  or  anything  of  that  kind. 
The  cavities  were  simply  cleaned  out  by  hand,  and  wiped 
out  with  commercial  cotton.  The  fillings  are  good  yet,  and 
will  last  to  the  end  of  my  days,  I  have  no  doubt. — J.  A. 
Watling,  Dental  Register. 

Amalgam  Fillings;  the  Matrix. — When  two  proximal 
fillings  are  together  put  in  one  at  a  time  and  wait  until  the 
amalgam  has  thoroughly  set  before  inserting  the  other. 
But  if  time  does  not  permit  of  this,  put  in  a  double  matrix 
and  insert  a  Dickinson  wedge,  forcing  the  bands  closely  to 
the  neck  of  the  tooth.  When  the  wedge  is  removed  the 
two  bands  fall  together  and  are  not  troublesome  to  remove. 
— Geo.  E.  Hardy,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Contour  Amalgam. — In  contouring  with  amalgam  a 
matrix  should  always  be  used  for  any  cavity  involving  the 
occlusal  and  proximal  surfaces ;  and  in  these  days  of  quick- 
setting  amalgam  the  filling  oftentimes  may  be  inserted  and 
practically  finished  at  one  sitting.  A  matrix,  wherever  ap- 
plicable, is  of  the  greatest  benefit. — James  M,  Magee,  Den- 
tal Brief. 


14  Amalgam  Fillings. 

Amalgam  Cement  Fillings. — In  amalgamating  the  alloy, 
bring  to  ordinary  plastic  consistency  and  then,  when  a  very 
small  quantity  of  cement  has  been  brought  to  a  creamy, 
sticky  consistency,  thoroughly  incorporate  plastic  mass,  and 
hasten  to  cavity.  Coat  with  the  amalgam,  if  practicable, 
though  without  this  finish  it  will  do  better  service  than 
cement  alone. — A.  J.  Flanagan,  Dental  Digest. 

Amalgam  Kestorations. — For  molars  or  even  bicuspids, 
with  extensive  destruction  of  crown  area,  amalgam  restora- 
tions are  strong,  permanent,  hygienic  and  serviceable  oper- 
ations. They  fill  a  place  in  practice  that  cannot  be  filled  by 
crown  or  inlay  because  of  either  hygienic  or  economical 
reasons. — Geo.  R.  Warner,  Items  of  Interest. 

Mixed  Amalgam  and  Gold  Fillings. — For  frail-walled 
cavities  half  fill  the  cavity  with  soft  amalgam  and  complete 
with  that  which  has  been  thoroughly  squeezed.  Then  lay 
on  crystalloid  gold  or  pellets  until  the  mercury  disappears, 
leaving  the  appearance  of  a  complete  gold  filling. — F.  Rob- 
inson, Dental  Cosmos. 

A  Place  for  Copper  Amalgam. — In  hypersensitive  cavi- 
ties along  the  buccal  surface  of  molars,  where  it  is  almost 
impossible  to  properly  prepare  them  thoroughly  for  filling, 
dry  them  out  as  well  as  you  can,  and  by  filling  with  copper 
amalgam  you  save  the  teeth  with  less  preparation  than  with 
any  other  material  ever  used. — J.  A.  Libbey,  Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Collect  Spilled  Mercury. — If  mercury  is  accidentally 
spilled  on  table  or  floor,  make  a  wet  ring  around  it;  it 
will  be  found  that  the  globules  of  mercury  cannot  readily 
cross  this  ring,  and  the  mercury  can  be  collected  without 
difficulty  in  a  small  shovel  made  from  a  piece  of  thin  card 
or  even  in  an  ordinary  envelope. — British  Dental  Journal. 

Anchorage  for  Alloy  Fillings. — Double-headed  rivets 
made  in  assorted  lengths  from  gold-plated  brass  wire  about 
No.  23  or  a  trifle  smaller  afford  positive  anchorage  for  large 
alloy  fillings  in  badly  decayed  molars  and  bicuspids. — W.  S. 
Payson,  Items  of  Interest. 


operative  Dentistry.  15 

Failure  of  Amalgam  Fillings. — In  proximal  cavities  it 
is  impossible  to  make  a  perfect  filling  without  the  aid  of 
the  matrix.  You  cannot  have  success  without  pressure,  and 
you  cannot  have  pressure  without  a  matrix.  Another  source 
of  failure  is  neglect  to  place  cement  under  the  amalgam. — 
J.  P.  Root,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Amalgam  Fillings. — With  a  spear-pointed 
drill,  made  sharp  for  the  purpose,  drill  into  the  filling  at  the 
median  line  and  move  the  drill  back  and  forth,  making  a 
slit  until  the  filling  is  divided  in  halves,  when  it  is  easily  re- 
moved in  two  pieces  by  pressing  each  piece  inward  toward 
the  centre,  thus  dislodging  it. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Amalgam  Fillings  and  the  Rubber-dam. — Many  amal- 
gam fillings  that  have  failed  would  be  perfect  to-day  had 
they  been  put  in  as  they  should  have  been.  To  willfully 
neglect  the  application  of  the  rubber-dam  is  unpardonable. 
This  vulnerable  point  should  not  be  passed  over  lightly. — 
Geo.  Zederbaum,  Dental  Register. 

Amalgam  Fillings:  Overhanging  Edges. — A  good  deal 
of  trouble  originates  from  rough,  overhanging  edges  up 
under  the  gum  line.  A  little  strip  of  rubber  drawn  tightly 
up  under  the  gum  around  the  margin  of  the  cavity  will 
give  good  results;  it  will  burnish  a  hard  amalgam. — A.  T. 
White,  Dental  Summary. 

Removal  of  Old  Amalgam  Fillings. — The  galvanic  cur- 
rent will  eliminate  the  mercury  from  an  old  filling.  Remove 
the  mercury  as  it  sweats  from  the  metal,  and  there  will  only 
remain  so  much  powder  or  alloy,  which  is  readily  removed 
with  chip-blower  and  spoons. — B.  J.  Cigrand,  Dental 
Digest. 

Amalgam  Fillings. — Don't  use  the  same  mix  of  amal- 
gam for  the  whole  of  a  large  cavity,  or  the  filling  will  be 
softer  on  the  surface  than  beneath,  thus  inducing  a  shrink- 
age that  will  destroy  the  adaptation  of  the  filling  to  the 
cavity  margin. — Harold  Clark,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


l6  Amalgam  Fillings. 

Alloy  and  Phosphate  Filings. — Mix  dry  phosphate  pow- 
der with  the  fine  filings  of  an  alloy.  Use  in  connection  with 
the  liquid  of  the  phosphate  powder.  After  two  or  three 
days  polish  with  a  smooth  stone  in  the  engine.  Recom- 
mended especially  for  teeth  of  children. — R.  Ottolengui, 
Dental  Headlight. 

Mixing  Amalgam. — Place  mercury  and  alloy  on  a  piece 
of  rubber-dam  in  the  palm  of  the  hand.  Gather  up  the 
corners  and  edges  and  twist  them  together ;  place  the  bulb- 
ous portion  against  a  flat,  smooth  surface  and  roll  vigor- 
ously. The  advantages  are  obvious. — R.  L.  Graber,  Dental 
Review. 

The  Best  Tooth-saving  Alloys. — The  amalgam  that 
blackens  saves  teeth  the  best,  but  no  matter  what  kind  is 
used,  always,  if  possible,  thoroughly  dry  the  cavity;  line 
with  a  good  varnish  or  oxychlorid.  If  dryness  cannot  be 
obtained,  put  in  an  alloy  containing  copper. — Dental  Hints. 

Amalgam  Repairs  in  Defective  Gold  Fillings. — Often- 
times gold  fillings,  instead  of  being  cut  out,  can  be  patched 
very  satisfactorily  by  the  use  of  amalgam  where  one  can 
make  a  little  undercut  above  the  filling. — C.  N.  Pierce, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

In  Using  Amalgam. — Weigh  the  alloy  and  mercury; 
usually  I  of  mercury  to  3  of  the  alloy  by  weight  will  make 
a  homogeneous  mass  under  strong  pressure  without  pressing 
out  surplus  mercury. — J.  D.  Patterson,  Kansas  City  Dental 
Journal. 

Finishing  Amalgam  Fillings. — After  filling  is  trimmed 
to  shape  and  contour,  burnish  all  over  with  warm  (not  hot) 
burnishers.  The  result  will  be  surprising  to  those  who  had 
not  tried  this  method. — W.  Mitchell,  Dental  Review. 

The  Addition  of  Gold  to  Amalgam. — Amalgam  is  ma- 
terially improved  by  the  addition  of  gold ;  it  gives  additional 
edge  strength  and  adds  materially  to  the  quality  and  also 
to  the  setting  of  the  alloy. — F.  E.  Howard,  Dental  Cosmos. 


operative  Dentistrv.  17 

Amalgam  Repairs. — Fresh  amalgam  can  be  made  to 
adhere  to  an  old  amalgam  filling,  merely  coating  the  freshly 
exposed  surface  of  the  latter  with  chlorhydric  acid. — Dr. 
Beebee. 

Amalgam  Fillings  in  Opposite  Proximal  Cavities. — Fill 
one  cavity  at  the  first  sitting.  Polish  it  at  the  next  sitting 
before  filling  the  opposite  cavity. — R.  Ottolengui,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Gold-shell  Crown  versus  Amalgam  Filling. — So  long 
as  the  roots  of  a  molar  are  intact  and  in  such  a  state  of 
health  as  to  warrant  their  retention,  it  may  be  restored  to 
usefulness  by  a  contour  amalgam  filling. — C.  E.  Pearson, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Combined  Amalgam  and  Cement  Fillings. — If  you  bur- 
nish the  mercury  to  the  surface,  these  fillings  will  last  three 
years  longer  than  the  ordinary  plastic  filling.  Burnishhig 
is  the  great  point. — Dr.  Burt,  Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Place  for  Amalgam. — Perhaps  the  most  general 
rule  that  can  be  given  for  amalgam  is  this :  "Keep  it  out 
of  sight." — A.  G.  Bennett,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

To  Improve  the  Color  of  Amalgam. — Dissolve  gold  foil 
in  the  mercury — from  one  to  four  sheets  of  No.  4  foil  to  one 
ounce  of  mercury. — A.  O.  Osgood,  Dental  Cosmos. 

CEMENT  FILLINGS 

"Enamel  Cement" — Amalgam  and  Oxyphosphate  Fill- 
ings.— To  the  alloy  selected  add  enough  mercury  to  make 
a  mass  that  will  not  crumble  if  pressed  between  the  fingers. 
When  thoroughly  mixed,  add  about  one-third  in  bulk  of 
oxyphosphate  powder,  mixing  all  together.  Place  on  the 
mixing  tablet  a  quantity  of  the  liquid  sufficient  for  the 
powder,  and  incorporate  the  mass  to  a  putty-Hke  consis- 
tency; insert  in  cavity  as  expeditiously  as  possible,  with 
pressure,  using  a  matrix  in  proximal  cavities. — C.  W. 
Strang,  International  Dental  Journal. 


1 8  Cement  Fillings. 

Cement  Fillings. — Cement  fillings  should  be  absolutely 
dry  before  allowing  contact  with  the  fluids  of  the  mouth, 
otherwise  they  will  absorb  moisture,  will  not  become  thor- 
oughly hardened,  and  will  act  as  a  constant  menace  to  the 
life  of  the  tooth  instead  of  as  a  barrier  against  the  ingress 
and  development  of  microorganisms.  The  simplest  method 
for  the  protection  of  the  filling  is  a  coating  of  collodion, 
which,  after  evaporation,  leaves  a  film  which  excludes  the 
buccal  secretions  and  does  not  deteriorate  until  long  after 
the  filling  has  become  thoroughly  hardened. — Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Combination  Filling,  Oxyphosphate  and  Gutta-percha. — 
In  bicuspids,  and  sometimes  in  molars,  where  the  cavities 
extend  well  below  the  gum  line,  particularly  on  the  ap- 
proximate surfaces,  in  teeth  of  soft  and  chalk-like  structure, 
coat  the  floor  of  the  cavity  with  chloro-balsam  and  fill  with 
gutta-percha  to  about  one-sixteenth  inch  above  the  gum  line ; 
the  rest  of  the  filling  to  be  made  of  cement.  This  filling 
has  the  advantage  of  cement  in  strength  for  contour,  ad- 
hesion for  anchorage,  without  the  disadvantage  of  washing 
out  at  margin — the  defective  point  of  all  cement  fillings. — 
F.  T.  Van  Woert. 

Tin  Cement. — This  new  filling  material  is  a  mixture  of 
zinc  oxid  and  precipitated  tin,  forming  a  light  gray  powder, 
and  may  be  mixed  with  any  good  cement  liquid,  using  all 
the  powder  the  liquid  will  take  up,  bringing  it,  by  kneading 
more  powder  in  with  the  fingers,  to  the  consistency  of  very 
thick  putty.  It  is  very  adhesive,  and  the  instruments  used 
should  be  coated  with  vaseline,  which  only  seems  to  make 
the  cement  more  impervious. — F.  C.  Brush,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Mixing  Cement. — Too  often  cement  does  not  receive 
sufficient  careful  spatulation,  yet  it  can  be  utterly  ruined  by 
overspatulation.  Too  little  spatulation  gives  a  quick-setting, 
granular  result ;  overspatulation  gives  cement  which  will 
never  properly  crystallize, — W.  V.  B,  Ames,  The  Dental 
Summary. 


operative  Dentistry.  19 

Cement  and  Amalgam. — As  cement  does  not  discolor, 
does  not  shrink  nor  expand,  and  does  not  flow  nor  spread 
under  pressure,  all  of  which  constitute  serious  objections  to 
amalgam,  yet  as  cement  does  not  resist  the  oral  secretions 
when  exposed  to  their  action,  an  advantage  possessed  by 
amalgam,  the  ideal  filling  would  seem  to  be  one  of  which 
two-thirds  is  cement,  with  a  veneer  of  amalgam.  Dryness 
being  an  important  consideration,  cleanse  the  cavity  with 
peroxid  of  hydrogen  and  alcohol,  which  puts  it  in  good 
condition  to  receive  the  cement. — G.  L.  Ambrose,  Western 
Den.  Jour. 

Cement  Lining  under  Amalgam  Fillings. — When  the 
loss  of  dentin  leaves  a  section  of  translucent  enamel,  a  lining 
of  cement  is  desirable  when  amalgam  is  to  be  used.  Having 
the  amalgam  mixed  and  ready,  cover  the  cavity  walls  with 
cement  and  crowd  the  amalgam  in  so  as  to  force  out  the  sur- 
plus cement,  clearing  the  margins  so  that  no  line  of  cement 
is  exposed.  This  should  be  done  with  some  rapidity  to  force 
out  surplus  cement  before  crystallization  begins,  especially 
at  obscure  margins. — R.  B.  Tuller,  American  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

To  Insure  a  Smooth  Hard  Cement  Filling  in  Proximal 
Surfaces. — When  the  labial  and  lingual  walls  are  to  be 
restored,  pass  a  thin  piece  of  slightly  oiled  mica  or  celluloid 
between  the  teeth.  After  introducing  the  cement  press 
this  matrix  firmly  over  the  cavity  and  hold  for  a  few 
minutes.  The  pressure  makes  a  more  solid  filling,  the  oil 
prevents  the  cement  from  sticking  to  the  matrix  and  the 
matrix  gives  the  proper  space  between  the  teeth. — British 
Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

The  Ideal  Cement  Slab. — A  glazed  tile,  such  as  the  or- 
namental tiles  used  around  fireplace  mantels,  makes  the 
best  cement  slab,  and  can  be  obtained  from  any  dealer  in 
builders'  supplies  for  a  few  cents.  Scraping  does  not 
scratch  them  as  it  does  a  glass  slab,  and  they  are  easily  made 
absolutely  clean, — H,  B.  Denton,  Dental  Review. 


20  Cement  Fillings. 

Cement  and  Amalgam. — If  a  cavity  with  very  frail 
walls  is  nearly  filled  with  cement,  and  a  veneer  of  amalgam 
well  burnished  in,  the  cement  will  cling  to  the  frail  walls 
and  add  materially  to  their  strength,  while  the  amalgam 
will  form  a  strong  union  with  the  cement  and  seldom  break 
away.  The  tubuli  of  the  dentin  are  better  filled  and  the 
teeth  will  be  less  affected  by  thermal  changes. — G.  L.  Am- 
brose, Western  Den.  Jour. 

Cement  Anchorage  or  Fillings. — Dr.  Wedelstadt  has 
found  that  cement  is  very  unreliable  for  holding  fillings 
built  into  it  while  in  a  plastic  state,  not  because  of  its  inabil- 
ity to  hold  the  filling  but  because  of  its  continually  changing 
of  form  for  days  and  weeks,  many  of  the  cements  expand- 
ing very  materially,  making  it  impossible  to  maintain  the 
close  contact  necessary  between  the  cavity  margin  and  the 
filling. — I.  F.  Wallace,  Dental  Era. 

Cement  Linings. — The  right  quantity  of  cement,  mixed 
to  a  proper  consistency,  placed  beneath  gold  foil  in  a  cavity 
and  subjected  to  the  pressure  required  to  weld  the  gold,  will 
so  perfectly  seal  the  dental  tubuli  that  we  may  entirely  pre- 
vent the  black  line  of  discoloration  always  present  between 
cohesive  gold  and  the  tooth  substance  where  the  cavity  is 
unlined. — F.  S.  Trickey,  Dental  Review. 

Cement  Cavity  Lining. — Cement  as  a  cavity  lining 
serves  as  anchorage ;  to  secure  perfect  adaptation ;  as  a  non- 
conductor ;  to  strengthen  frail  walls ;  to  prevent  discoloration 
from  amalgam ;  to  avoid  cutting  in  sensitive  dentin ;  to  pre- 
vent shrinkage  of  amalgam  from  cavity  walls,  and  to  save 
time  for  both  patient  and  operator. — I.  I.  Reed,  Dental 
Record. 

Mixing  Cement. — Always  shake  the  cement  liquid  be- 
fore using.  The  ingredients  of  which  the  liquid  is  com- 
posed vary  slightly  in  specific  gravity  and  the  bottle  should 
be  shaken  each  time  before  using  to  secure  uniform  mixes. — 
Dental  Brief. 


operative  Dentistry.  21 

A  Hickory  Spatula. — The  glaze  of  a  glass  cement  slab 
being  removed,  giving  a  slightly  roughened  surface,  the  fine 
fibre  of  a  hickory  spatula  permits  a  mill-stone  grind  to  the 
mixture  of  powder  and  liquid,  insuring  the  breaking  apart 
and  turning  over  and  around  of  all  cement  particles,  giving 
a  more  even  mixture  and  securing  a  more  perfect  chemical 
union,  with  no  discoloration. — D.  R,  Phillips,  Northwest- 
ern Dental  Journal. 

Oxyphosphate  of  Copper  Cement. — We  frequently  find 
children's  teeth  so  sensitive  that  it  is  almost  impossible  to 
clean  out  the  decay  at  all.  You  can  manage  these  cases  with 
this  cement.  It  is  not  necessary  for  the  cavity  to  be  per- 
fectly dry,  for  the  cement  will  adhere  to  the  walls  of  the 
cavity  and  become  very  hard. — G.  A.  Maxfield,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Mixing  Cement. — Having  lined  the  cavity-walls  with  a 
thick,  creamy  mix,  the  balance  is  to  be  made  as  stiff  as  it  can 
be  properly  spatulated.  This  proper  stiffness  of  mix  is  indi- 
cated by  the  cement  rolling  up  after  the  spatula  instead  of 
remaining  on  the  slab  as  a  smooth  film, — W.  V.  B.  Ames, 
Dental  Summary. 

Cement-Amalgam  Combination. — The  best  way  of  using 
cement  in  combination  with  amalgam  is  to  press  the  cement 
in  with  amalgam,  by  which  it  acquires  a  close  apposition 
and  stronger  adhesion  to  the  tooth  than  when  the  cement 
is  put  in  alone,  being  driven  in  under  greater  compression 
and  not  pulled  away  again  by  adhesion  to  the  instrument. — 
Harry  Baldwin,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Durable  Cement  Filling. — Burnish  the  enamel  powder 
into  the  surface  of  the  filling  before  it  is  perfectly  hard. 
This  prolongs  its  insolubility. — Med.  Brief. 

Protection  of  Cement  Fillings. — Paraffin  and  resin 
melted  together  in  equal  parts  make  an  excellent  coating  for 
cement  fillings. — Walter  F.  Lewis,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazet. 


22  Cement  Fillings. 

Matrix  for  Cement  Fillings. — For  adjacent  proximal 
fillings  place  a  piece  of  rubber-dam  between  the  teeth,  draw- 
ing it  taut  around  the  tooth  to  be  first  filled,  then  around 
the  other.  When  finished  cut  the  rubber  away,  leaving  a 
small  piece  between  the  fillings  to  be  removed  at  the  next 
sitting. — Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Cement  for  Cavities  in  Occlusal  Surface. — If  a  little 
porcelain  dust  (made  by  pounding  old  porcelain  teeth  very 
fine)  is  incorporated  with  the  usual  cement  it  will  make  a 
very  dense  filling  with  a  hard  flint-like  surface,  especially 
useful  on  masticating  surfaces. — Dr.  Dunn,  Am.  Dental 
Weekly. 

Cement  Linings  for  Amalgam  Fillings. — Cement  fills 
the  porous  dentin  and  prevents  chemical  action  upon  the 
enamel.  In  deep  cavities  make  the  body  of  the  filling  of 
cement.  When  set,  add  a  thin  mixture  of  cement,  and  at 
once  finish  with  amalgam  or  gold — S.  B.  Palmer,  Inter- 
national Dental  Jonnial. 

Protection  of  Cement  while  Setting. — In  cases  where 
moisture  can  be  excluded  from  a  cement  filling  but  a  short 
time,  press  a  piece  of  tin-foil  over  the  fresh  cement.  It  will 
adhere  and  protect  the  surface  until  hard. — M.  G.  McEl- 
HiNNEY,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Amalgam-cement  Filling. — The  best  filling  for  tempo- 
rary teeth  is  a  combination  of  amalgam  and  cement,  using 
about  two-thirds  filings  to  one-third  cement,  mixing  with 
the  spatula  in  the  ordinary  way  of  mixing  cement. — Dr. 
McKee,  Dental  World. 

The  Setting  of  Cement. — The  addition  of  a  very  little 
finely  powdered  borax  to  the  powder  of  a  cement  will  change 
it  from  a  rapidly-setting  to  a  slow-setting  one.  On  the 
other  hand,  a  drop  of  hydrochloric  acid  will  make  the 
cement  set  rapidly. — Vierteljahrschrift. 


operative  Dentistry.  23 

Paraform  Cement  Filling. — The  addition  of  a  small 
proportion  of  paraform  to  cement,  in  addition  to  its  germi- 
cidal qualities,  gives  added  strength,  as  it  is  comparatively 
insoluble  in  water;  it  also  makes  the  cement  more  sticky. — 
A.  A.  Fowler,  Pacific  Med.  D.  Gazette. 

Cement  and  Amalgam  Filling. — Place  cement  in  the 
cavity,  press  a  little  amalgam  in  it  and  wait  until  the  mass 
hardens.  Then  complete  the  filling  with  amalgam. — Geo. 
Elliott,  Ohio  Den.  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  of  Very  Soft  Cement  to  Instru- 
ment.— Smear  the  instrument  with  phosphoric  acid  before 
allowing  it  to  come  in  contact  with  the  cement. — A.  M. 
Waas,  Dental  Review. 

Aseptic  Cement. — Mix  iodoform  or  aristol  with  the 
powder  of  cement  in  placing  crowns,  bridges,  or  in 
substrata  under  cement  fillings.  Destroys  septic  germs 
from  the  fluids  of  the  mouth. — B.  H.  Teague,  Dental  Hints. 

Antiseptic  Cement. — Mix  with  the  powder  of  the  cement 
about  one-tenth  by  bulk  of  hydronaphthol.  This  keeps  the 
cement  aseptic  and  does  not  affect  the  strength  of  the  cement 
in  the  slightest  degree. — John  Gird  wood.  Dental  Cosmos. 


TIN  FOIL  FILLINGS 

The  Gingival  Margin. — Many  old  fillings  demonstrate 
that  gingival  margins  resist  decay  much  better  when  cov- 
ered with  pure  tin  than  with  gold  or  amalgam.  The  tin 
when  used  alone  does  not  satisfactorily  resist  the  stress  of 
mastication,  hence  the  combination  filling,  covering  the  base 
of  the  cavity,  and  particularly  the  gingival  margin,  with 
pure  crystal  tin,  finishing  with  gold,  or  even  amalgam,  as 
the  case  may  demand. — Clyde  Davis,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 


24  Tin-Foil  Fillings. 

Sponge  Tin. — Sponge  tin  is  an  interesting  new  filling 
material.  For  its  use  no  undercutting  is  necessary;  its  co- 
hesion increases  in  proportion  to  pressure,  uniting  in  large 
pieces  and  compressing  with  a  broad  solid  gold  packed  by 
hand  pressure.  When  well  condensed,  finish  with  a  corru- 
gated ball  burnisher,  followed  by  a  smooth  burnisher. — F.  C. 
Brush,  Items  of  Interest. 

Tin  at  the  Cervical  Margin  in  Gold  Fillings. — Gold, 
by  induction,  imparts  to  tin  in  contact  a  preserving  prop- 
erty; that  is,  there  is  an  interchange  of  atoms  which  forms 
an  alloy  of  gold  and  tin  which  is  insoluble.  This  alloy  is 
only  about  the  thickness  of  one  layer  of  tinfoil.  *  *  * 
Tin  in  case  of  two  or  three  leaves  does  not  enter  into  com- 
bination, and  it  is  subjected  to  galvanic  action  produced  by 
the  gold,  and  softening  is  the  result.  Do  not  risk  gold 
and  tin  rolled  together  into  a  rope,  but  would  feel  safe 
with  gold  and  tin  placed  together  in  alternate  leaves  and 
cut  with  scissors,  provided  the  gold  was  placed  against  the 
dentin.  An  excess  of  tin  will  unbalance  the  alloy  and 
allow  disintegration. — S.  B.  Palmer,  International  Den. 
Jour. 

Tin  as  a  Filling  Material. — Tin  possesses  antiseptic 
properties  which  do  not  pertain  to  gold  for  arresting  caries 
in  imperfect  teeth,  and  owing  to  its  therapeutic  quality,  and 
being  a  rather  poor  conductor,  there  is  a  strong  probability 
of  calcification  taking  place  under  it;  in  fact,  many  clinical 
cases  have  shown  that  under  tin  there  is  often  a  deposit  of 
lime  salts  from  the  contents  of  the  dentinal  tubuli;  this  is 
called  progressive  calcification. — H.  L.  Ambler,  The  Den- 
tists' Magazine. 

Silver-foil. — In  teeth  of  faulty  development,  or  in  senile 
decay,  where  a  non-conductor  is  desired,  prepare  the  cavity 
as  for  any  other  metallic  filling  and  place  a  good,  thick 
covering  of  silver-foil  in  the  bottom  of  the  cavity,  filling 
the  balance  as  judgment  may  indicate. — L.  S.  Chilcott, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  25 

Sponge  Tin  and  Cement  as  Filling  Material. — Pulverized 
sponge  tin  and  cement  powder,  mixed  with  the  cement 
liquid,  becomes  hard  and  polishes  with  a  metallic  surface. — 
Dr.  Schourer,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Tin-foil  Filling. — Tin,  when  thoroughly  condensed,  has 
nearly  the  wearing  qualities  of  gold.  It  can  be  worked  very 
quickly,  and  moisture  is  not  as  fatal  as  to  a  gold  filling.  It 
is  peculiarly  congenial  to  tooth-tissue,  and  exercises  a  de- 
cided therapeutic  influence  upon  it.  The  best  way  to  insert 
tin  is  to  use  it  in  the  form  of  cylinders,  after  the  old  method 
of  using  soft  gold. — Franklin  Bernard,  Dental  Hints. 

Tin  and  Gold. — Having  filled  the  cavity  with  tin  cylin- 
ders, consolidated  with  hot  pluggers,  make  the  surface  bright 
by  cutting  it  smooth,  removing  only  enough  to  allow  the  gold 
to  cover  and  conceal  the  tin.  Take  a  single  thickness  of 
cohesive  gold-foil  No.  2,  anneal  it,  and  it  will  unite  with  the 
tin  by  simple  contact.  No  amount  of  forcing  will  do  any 
good. — T.  D.  Shumway^  Items  of  Interest. 


GUTTA-PERCHA  FILLINGS 

Sticky  Gutta-percha  Fillings. — Touch  warmed  gutta- 
percha, on  its  way  to  the  cavity,  with  oil  of  cajuput.  On  ac- 
count of  the  increased  stickiness  of  the  gutta-percha  so 
treated,  the  filling  actually  cements  itself  to  the  walls  of  the 
cavity.  It  can  even  be  applied  wet,  and  so  is  of  real  value 
in  treating  a  patient  ill  in  bed,  etc. — J.  F.  P.  Hodgson_,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Gutta-perclia  Fillings. — If  shallow  or  saucer-shaped 
cavities  are  moistened  with  oil  of  cajuput,  warm  gutta- 
percha will  adhere  with  special  tenacity;  the  oil  of  cajuput 
is  possessed  of  equal  antiseptic  qualities  with  the  oil  of 
eucalyptus,  and  is  better  for  the  above  purposes. — Garrett 
Newkirk,  Dental  Review. 
3 


26  Gutta-Percha  Fillings. 

Why  Recurrent  Decay  is  Less  Frequent  with  Gutta- 
percha Fillings. —  (i)  Gutta-percha  fillings  do  not,  as  a  rule, 
remain  as  long  in  position  as  gold  or  amalgam.  (2)  There 
is  less  shock  transmitted,  in  mastication,  to  the  walls  of  the 
cavity,  with  consequent  disintegration  at  weak  points  in  the 
margin,  than  with  a  perfectly  rigid  filling  as  amalgam  or 
gold.  (3)  The  effect  of  mastication  is  to  keep  a  gutta-per- 
cha filling  pressed  tightly  against  the  walls  of  the  cavity, 
especially  at  the  cervical  wall,  even  obliterating  the  space 
produced  by  the  recurrence  of  caries. — W.  D.  Miller, 
Dental  Cosmos, 

Evans's  Gutta-percha  Cement. — There  is  no  question 
but  that  this  is  the  cement  par  excellence  for  setting  crowns. 
The  ease  with  which  it  is  manipulated,  and  the  accuracy 
with  which  you  can  adjust  either  a  crown  or  bridge,  make  it 
one  of  the  most  delightful  adjuncts  to  our  dental  cabinet. 
For  the  final  setting  there  is  a  varnish  with  which  the  root 
and  surrounding  parts  are  coated,  and  unless  sufficient  heat 
is  used  it  is  almost  impossible  to  dislodge  it. — Dr.  Van 
WoERT,  Items  of  Interest. 

Gutta-percha  Cotton. — Cotton  saturated  with  gutta- 
percha by  dipping  in  chloro-percha  and  evaporating  the 
chloroform,  vvhen  cut  up  into  different  pieces,  will  be  found 
valuable  for  many  purposes.  For  placing  over  arsenical  ap- 
plications a  piece  may  be  warmed  and  dipped  in  chloroform 
to  soften.  It  may  be  used  to  give  a  close  adaptation  of 
matrices  to  the  walls  at  cervical  margin,  etc.,  etc. — A.  T. 
CoucHER,  Jour.  Br.  Den.  Asso. 

Gutta-percha  Fillings. — Evaporate  the  solvent  from 
Canada  balsam  and  moisten  it  with  chloroform  and  line  the 
cavity  with  this  solution.  Fill  with  gutta-percha,  finishing 
the  filling  with  tape  moistened  with  chloroform.  This  makes 
a  filling  which  will  not  leak,  and  which  holds  so  fast  to  the 
cavity  that  it  cannot  be  pried  off. — A.  M.  Holmes,  Atlanta 
Dental  Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  27 

The  Place  of  Gutta-percha. — Gutta-percha  undoubtedly 
has  great  tooth-saving  properties — properties  not  equaled 
by  any  other  material.  Its  chief  disadvantage  is  that  it 
has  not  the  hardness  necessary  to  resist  abrasion,  but  on 
protected  surfaces,  leaving  out  all  esthetic  considerations,  it 
certainly  has  better  tooth-saving  qualities  than  any  other 
substance. — W.  F.  Litch,  Dental  Brief. 

Moisture-tight  Gutta-percha  Fillings. — Dry  the  cavity 
well,  insert  a  pellet  of  cotton  saturated  with  absolute 
alcohol,  remove  and  with  warm-air  syringe,  evaporate 
the  alcohol  and  varnish  with  a  solution  of  common  resin  in 
chloroform.  Warm  the  gutta-percha  and  pack  with  a  cold 
instrument.  Heat  a  thin-bladed  instrument  and  pare  off 
surplus.     Polish  with  oil  of  cajuput. — Dental  Century.   ■ 

Gutta-percha  as  a  Separating  Material. — Gutta-percha 
expands  in  all  directions,  and  care  must  be  taken  that  it  does 
not  impinge  upon  the  gum  or  it  may  cause  absorption.  Do 
not  let  it  go  too  long. — Dr.  Crandall,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Handling  Gutta-percha  Points. — Pinch  the  larger  ends 
of  gutta-percha  canal  points  with  a  pair  of  flat-nosed  pliers. 
You  can  then  handle  them  without  difficulty  with  the  oper- 
ating pliers  for  inserting  them  in  the  canal. — A.  W.  Thorn- 
ton, Dental  Review. 

White  Gutta-percha  for  Fillings. — Dissolve  gutta-percha 
in  chloroform,  then  make  a  solution  of  chlorid  of  lime, 
in  which  let  it  stand  for  a  week.  Filter,  and  expose 
to  the  sun  for  a  week,  and  you  will  have  a  pure  white  gutta- 
percha.— Max  Sichel,  Pacific  Gazette. 

Gutta-percha  Fillings. — After  drying  the  cavity,  satu- 
rate it  with  common  resin,  cut  in  chloroform,  and  press  in 
heated  gutta-percha.  It  adheres  to  the  walls  like  cement, 
and  does  not  pull  away. — Prof.  Gray,  British  Jour.  Den. 
Science. 


28  Gutta-Percha  fillings. 

Finishing  Gutta-percha  Fillings. — Hot  vaseline  is  a 
solvent  of  gutta-percha,  and  is  useful  in  trimming  gutta- 
percha fillings.  Apply  the  vaseline  and  use  a  warmed  burn- 
isher.— L.  Van  Orden,  Items  of  Interest. 

Gutta-Percha  Points. — Do  not  leave  your  gutta-percha 
points  lying  loose  in  the  cabinet.  Keep  them  in  boracic 
acid ;  either  the  crystals  or  in  solution.— Dr.  Gansby, 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  of  Gutta-percha. — To  prevent  ad- 
hesion of  gutta-percha  or  cement  to  instruments  dip  the 
point  in  talcum  or  powdered  soapstone. — R.   B.  Tuller, 

Dental  Revieiv. 

Gutta-percha  used  for  filling  is  easily  spoiled  by  keeping 
it  in  too  warm  a  place.  If  Icept  in  a  solution  of  table  salt  it 
will  keep  for  years. — Dominion  Journal. 


PREPARATION  OF  CAVITIES,  CAVITY 
LININGS,  ETC. 

Cavity  Lining  Under  Gold  Filling. — Having  prepared 

the  cavity,  dry  with  hot  air,  relieving  the  dentin  of  sen- 
sitiveness ;  coat  with  varnish,  which  prevents  the  return  of 
moisture  and  also  of  sensitiveness.  Remove  excess  of 
varnish  with  small  pieces  of  rubber-dam,  which  leaves  no 
lint  behind.  While  the  varnish  is  tacky  start  the  filling  with 
a  piece  of  Watt's  crystal  gold  No.  i,  cut  in  slices  of  about 
17  plate  gauge,  and  in  pieces  of  size  to  cover  cavity.  A]n- 
neal  upon  mica.  Upon  this  foundation  build  up  the  filling, 
using  foil  in  tape  form,  folded  in  flat  layers. — S.  B.  Palmer, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Painless  Excavating. — Inject  a  dosage  of  cocain  with 
adrenalin  right  at  the  very  apex  of  the  tooth,  producing 
after  a  few  moments  perfect  anaesthesia  of  the  nerve  fibre. 
Especially  valuable  for  the  immediate  extraction  of  a  live 
pulp. — Wm.  Hirschfield,  Dental  Review. 


operative  Dentistry.  29 

Exposing  the  Cervical  Margins. — Get  as  full  an  expos- 
ure of  the  cervical  margins  as  possible  before  operating-  by 
packing  the  cavity  and  against  the  gum  with  gutta-percha, 
with  the  surface  moistened  with  oil  of  cajeput  to  make  it 
stick,  leaving  it  for  a  day  or  two.  The  gutta-percha  may 
be  made  to  stay  in  place,  if  other  methods  are  inadequate, 
by  tying  floss  silk  across  the  tooth  and  over  the  filling. — 
J.  F.  P.  HoDSON,  International  Dental  Journal 

Preparation  of  Occlusal  Cavities. — The  depth  of  the 
cavity  pulpally  is  governed  in  the  carious  portions  by  the 
extent  of  decay  and  in  the  fissured  portion  by  the  depth  of 
the  fissure.  Just  when  the  bottom  of  the  fissure  is  reached 
is  sometimes  uncertain,  on  account  of  the  fine  particles  of 
tooth-tissue  from  the  drill  hiding  it  from  view.  This  may 
be  overcome  by  flooding  the  cavity  with  one  of  the  essential 
oils,  which  will  cause  the  fissure  to  show  up  dark,  presenting 
its  entire  outline. — C.  N.  Johnson^  Cosmos. 

Benefits  of  Cavity  Lining  with  Cement. — (i)  It  retains 
the  filling;  (2)  it  preserves  the  color  of  the  tooth ;  (3)  it  pre- 
vents the  metal  from  transmitting  sensations  of  heat  and  cold 
to  the  pulp ;  (4)  by  its  use  we  save  valuable  tooth  structure, 
as  there  is  less  cutting  for  anchorage;  (5)  if  caries  should 
occur  in  any  part  of  the  tooth  near  the  filling,  it  progresses 
less  rapidly  than  if  no  cement  had  been  used. — Jas.  M. 
Magee,  Items  of  Interest. 

Proximal  Cavities;  the  Gingival  Seat.— A  flat  gingival 
seat  is  not  only  advisable,  but  it  is  absolutely  necessary  in 
proximal  cavities  in  bicuspids  and  molars  subjected  to 
normal  occlusal  stress.  It  not  only  adds  very  largely  to  the 
stability  of  the  filling,  but  enters  very  materially  into  the 
convenience,  form,  and  method  of  extension  for  prevention 
at  the  gingivo-lingual  and  labial  angles,  which  are  most 
prone  to  recurrence  of  decay. — J.  F.  Wallace,  Dental  Era. 

"Extension  for  Prevention." — Extension  for  prevention 
has  come  to  stay.  We  have  learned  that  we  must  anticipate 
what  may  occur  in  the  future.  We  no  longer  merely  remove 


30  Cavity  Preparation. 

the  actual  decay;  we  penetrate  the  dentin — not  to  obtain 
andercuts,  but  to  prevent  recurrence  of  decay.  We  know 
what  portions  of  the  tooth  are  Hable  to  be  imperfect  in 
structure,  and  where  future  decay  should  be  provided 
against.  Extension  is  for  prevention,  not  for  retention. — 
H.  W.  Morgan. 

Cavity  Lining. — The  requisites  for  a  cavity  lining^  are 
hardness,  non-conductivity  and  slightly  antiseptic  qualities. 
Zinc  oxychlorid  cement  is  without  doubt  the  best  barrier 
to  bacteria  of  all  the  materials  at  our  command.  As  a  cav- 
ity lining  it  should  be  preceded  with  a  thin  coat  of  some 
resinous  varnish  to  prevent  the  escharotic  action  of  the 
cement  fluid  on  the  pulp. — B.  L.  Thorpe,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

A  Source  of  Failure  in  Proximal  Fillings. — The  removal 
of  unsupported  enamel  is  an  absolute  necessity,  whether 
upon  the  occlusal  surface,  upon  the  buccal  or  lingual  walls, 
or  upon  the  gingival  margin ;  not  only  because  it  has  not 
sufficient  strength  to  withstand  the  stress  of  mastication,  but 
because  it  does  not  possess  sufficient  strength  to  build  and 
condense  gold  against  without  fracturing  or  breaking  under 
the  force  of  condensation. — I.  F.  Wallace,  Dental  Era. 

Forming  Cavities. — For  permanent  fillings  with  gold, 
after  obtaining  separation,  the  outline  form,  the  resistance 
form,  the  retention  form,  the  convenience  form  and  the 
marginal  form  must  all  be  carefully  studied  before  and  dur- 
ing the  preparation  of  the  cavity,  when  physical  conditions 
are  such  as  to  warrant  the  expectation  of  permanency. — E. 
K.  ^''edelstaedt.  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cavity  Preparation. — In  preparing  a  cavity  for  the 
insertion  of  a  gold  filling,  the  vibration  which  causes  such 
unpleasant  sensations  to  the  patient  can  be  prevented  by 
holding  the  tooth  firmly  in  a  pair  of  forceps,  or  by  placing  a 
solid  piece  of  metal  against  the  tooth.  Your  patients  will  be 
grateful  if  you  will  try  this  on  them. — G.  A.  Kennedy,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  31 

Dehydrating  a  Tooth. — While  absolute  alcohol  and  hot 
air  afford  not  unsatisfactory  methods  of  dehydrating  a 
tooth,  the  usual  chip  blower  is  not  free  from  objection.  In 
the  first  place  the  heat  is  unequal ;  it  is  so  easy  to  have  it  too 
hot,  and  so  cause  pain  to  the  patient,  and  again,  it  is  im- 
possible to  keep  it  thoroughly  aseptic,  its  expiratory  and  in- 
spiratory orifice  being  at  the  same  point,  while  hosts  of 
bacteria  must  be  drawn  into  the  bulb.  The  electric  hot-air 
blast  is  a  great  improvement,  but  there  is  room  for  still 
greater  improvement. — Wm.  Simms,  Dental  Record. 

Cavity  Formation. — The  adaptation  of  filling  to  cavity 
is  destroyed  as  thoroughly,  if  not  as  often,  by  a  filling 
turning  within  the  cavity  as  by  its  being  forced  out  of  it. 
While  this  may  often  be  caused  by  the  inability  of  the  filling 
material  to  withstand  the  stress  placed  upon  it,  it  is  often 
due  to  faulty  cavity  formation,  and  should  be  carefully 
guarded  against. — J.  F.  Wallace,  Dental  Era. 

Cavity  Preparation. — We  should  do  all  we  can  to 
modify  pain  in  all  operations.  In  cavity  preparation,  for 
sensitive  dentin  use  the  ether  solution  of  cocain  called 
"Vapo-cocain"  with  gratifying  results.  Do  not  vaporize 
it,  but  place  it  in  the  cavity  without  thoroughly  drying  it  and 
wait  five  minutes,  sometimes  reapplying  it. — B.  H.  Lee, 
Dental  Register. 

Lining  Cavities  Under  Amalgam. — Lining  cavities  under 
amalgam  with  tin  is  good  practice.  It  presents  an  amalgam 
largely  composed  of  tin,  which,  like  tin,  arrests  caries.  It 
also  blends  the  elements  in  the  alloy  which  always  exist  in 
amalgam,  caused  by  cuttings  not  fully  amalgamated. — S.  B. 
Palmer,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Make  Smooth  Cavity  Margins. — Take  an  ordinary 
fine-cut  plug-finishing  bur  of  suitable  size,  dip  in  water 
and  then  in  coarse  carborundum  powder.  Use  in  the  usual 
way,  dipping  it  in  the  water  and  powder  as  often  as  neces- 
sary. Faster  and  better  than  any  diamond  burs. — W.  C. 
Graystock,  Items  of  Interest, 


32  Cavity  Preparation. 

Cavity  Preparation. — The  easiest  method,  the  quickest 
method,  the  most  successful  method.  Six  rules:  i,  obtain 
the  outline  form;  2,  obtain  the  resistance  form;  3,  obtain  the 
retention  form;  4,  obtain  the  convenience  form;  5,  remove 
any  remaining  decay ;  6.  trim  enamel  margins  in  relation  to 
enamel  prisms ;  bevel  the  cavo-surface-angles,  and  make  the 
toilet  of  the  cavity. — G.  V.  Black,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cavity  Desiccation. — In  dr}-ing  out  sensitive  cavities 
with  alcohol  it  is  well  to  carry  the  pledget  of  cotton  through 
the  flame  of  a  lamp,  permitting  the  alcohol  to  burn  for  a 
second ;  then  blow  out  the  flame,  and  apply  to  cavity.  Fol- 
low immediately  with  a  pledget  of  dry  cotton  to  absorb  ex- 
cess and  prevent  too  rapid  evaporation. — W.  G.  Ebersole, 
Dentists'  Magadne. 

Good  Cavity  Lining  to  be  Used  Under  Metallic  Fillings 
in  Shallow  Cavities. — Copal  in  equal  parts  of  chloroform 
and  alcohol.  To  this  add  an  equal  volume  of  hydronapthol. 
If  the  cavity  is  very  sensitive  fill  it  with  a  paste  made  of 
zinc  oxid  and  eugenol.  Allow  this  to  remain  in  the  cavity 
several  days.  You  will  find  in  applying  that  it  will  harden 
under  moisture,  which  makes  it  especially  applicable  in  the 
class  of  cases  referred  to. — Dental  Brief. 

The  Final  Finish  of  Cavity  Surface. — Bathing  the  cavity 
with  alcohol  is  not  the  proper  final  step  when  cement  is  to 
be  used,  the  action  of  alcohol  leaving  a  slight  film  which 
will  prevent  a  perfect  attachment.  Therefore  after  using 
alcohol  renew  the  cavity  surface  with  either  burs  or  hand 
instruments,  avoiding  the  margins. — C.  X.  John.son,  Dental 
Revieii'. 

Preparing  Sensitive  Cavities. — A  comparatively  painless 
method  of  cutting  away  a  large  body  of  sensitive  dentin  is 
to  have  the  stones  or  burs  run  in  water.  I  am  able  to  do 
so-called  heroic  cutting  with  the  stones  run  in  water,  so 
that  the  water  is  almost  a  running  stream  upon  the  bur  or 
stone,  and  it  can  be  run  at  a  high  rate  of  speed. — E.  J. 
Perrv,  Dental  Revieiv. 


operative  Dentistry.  33 

Painless  Excavation. — If  the  preparation  of  a  cavity 
is  perfectly  painless,  look  on  it  with  suspicion.  Do  not  fill 
with  anything  more  than  temporary  gutta-percha.  You 
may  be  sure  your  patient  will  return  howHng.  Such  cases 
invariably  point  to  dead  pulp.  Better  to  open  into  the  pulp- 
chamber  at  once,  than  to  fill  without  doing  so. — Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory. 

"Extension  for  Prevention" — Extending  the  Cervical 
Wall  Beneath  the  Gum.— The  question  is,  first,  whether  we 
are  justified  in  doing  the  cutting,  and  secondly,  whether 
the  patient  will  submit  to  it.  Again,  the  patient  may  think 
that,  instead  of  practicing  "extension  for  prevention,"  we 
are  practicing  extension  for  remuneration,  and  be  dissatis- 
fied.— S.  H.  Guilford,  International  Dental  Journal. 

An  Aseptic  Cavity. — If  the  cavity  be  thoroughly  dry, 
an  application  of  absolute  alcohol  for  a  minute,  followed  by 
one  of  the  essential  oils,  such  as  cloves  or  cedar,  for  two 
minutes,  is  all  that  is  necessary.  The  oil  will  rapidly  replace 
the  alcohol,  and  though  its  antiseptic  power  is  small,  it  is 
kept  in  place  by  the  filling  for  so  long  a  time  that  it  is 
efficient. — W.  J.  Law,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Cavity  Preparation :  Inlays  and  Fillings. — The  one  dis- 
tinctive feature  to  bear  in  mind  always  is  that  a  cavity  for 
a  filling  should  be  of  such  a  form  that  the  filling  when  in- 
serted cannot  be  lifted  out  of  it,  while  the  requisite  of  a 
cavity  for  an  inlay  is  that  the  completed  inlay  may  be  in- 
serted and  removed  at  will. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Cavity  Preparation:  Cutting  Grooves. — In  cutting 
grooves  in  the  buccal  or  lingual  walls,  the  cutting  goes 
through  the  dentin  and  the  enamel  has  not  the  support  it 
ought  to  have.  Another  point:  the  canals  of  the  dentin 
should  never  be  cut  across ;  the  conservation  of  nutrient 
substance  is  a  very  important  factor  in  the  preparation  of 
a  cavity. — J.  Taft,  Dental  Summary. 


34  Cavity  Preparation. 

Cavity  Lining. — A  good  clear  varnish  for  lining  the 
bottom  of  cavities  is  made  by  dissolving  pure  clear  copal 
gum  in  equal  parts  of  alcohol  and  ether.  To  protect  the 
pulp  from  thermal  changes  place  a  thin  pad  of  asbestos 
paper  on  the  bottom  of  the  cavity  while  the  varnish  is  still 
soft. — A.  M.  Jackson,  Dental  World. 

Preparation  of  Cavity  Margins. — All  cavity  margins 
should  be  so  shaped  that,  without  leaving  feather  edges  of 
filling-material  all  cut,  enamel  rods  should  be  covered  with 
the  filling  and  all  margins  bevelled,  but  not  rounded,  and 
that  there  are  no  angles  or  corners  left. — J.  W.  Eggleston, 
Dental  Summary. 

Enamel  Margins. — The  rule  for  enamel  line  finish  must 
vary  with  the  plasticity  of  the  filling  material.  "As  plasticity 
of  filling  material  increases,  so  increase  the  property  of 
adaptability,  and  as  we  approach  the  unyielding  in  filling 
material,  so  must  we  smooth  or  polish  our  margins." — 
Clyde  Davis,  Dental  Summary. 

Opening  Tip  a  Tender  Tooth. — In  cases  where  a  tooth 
was  so  tender  that  it  was  practically  impossible  to  work  on 
it,  excellent  success  may  be  had  by  applying  a  separator, 
thus  holding  it  firm.  I  wish  to  commend  the  use  of  hot 
water,  thoroughly  washing  the  tooth  with  it. — Dr.  Brock- 
ivay,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Cavity  Lining. — When  necessary  to  leave  a  portion  of 
partially  decayed  dentin,  to  avoid  exposing  the  pulp,  com- 
bine equal  parts  iodoform  and  zinc  oxid  and  mix  with  the 
phosphoric  acid.  I  have  never,  to  my  knowledge,  had  a  pulp 
to  die  under  a  filling  when  the  cavity  was  lined  in  this  way. — 
T.  B.  HiNMAN,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Carbolic  Acid  in  the  Preparation  of  Cavities. — Wiping 
a  cavity  with  an  alcohol-saturated  solution  of  carbolic  acid 
will  show  very  clearly  whether  all  carious  tissue  has  been  ex- 
cavated, and  will  bring  out  in  relief,  so  to  speak,  some  crev- 
ice that  might  otherwise  possibly  be  overlooked. — Dentists' 
Magazine. 


operative  Dentistry.  35 

Cavity  Lining  and  Amalgam. — To  prevent  discoloration 
of  tooth  tissue  from  an  amalgam  filling,  burnish  to  place  a 
mat  of  gold  and  platinum  foil,  having  first  varnished  the 
side  of  the  mat  that  comes  in  contact  with  the  tooth  wall. 
Asbestos-felt  can  be  employed  in  the  same  manner. — B.  L. 
Thorpe,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Cavity  Varnish. — Dissolve  some  copal  in  equal  parts 
alcohol  and  chloroform;  add  an  equal  volume  of  hydro- 
napthol.  This  forms  a  very  adhesive  and  sticky  antiseptic 
varnish,  free  from  all  caustic  properties. — The  Stomatolo- 
gist. 

Preparing  Sensitive  Cavities. — The  first  application  of 
the  bur  can  be  made  absolutely  painless  in  the  most  highly 
sensitive  cavity  by  simply  taking  ethyl  chlorid  on  the  bur 
point  and  bringing  it  quickly  into  contact  with  the  tooth. — 
J.  M,  Gale,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Preparation  of  Canada  Balsam  for  Lining  Cavities. — 
Place  the  balsam  in  a  porcelain  dish  and  expose  to  low  heat 
for  several  hours,  so  that  when  cool  it  will  be  hard  and 
friable.  Place  in  a  small  bottle  and  add  chloroform  until 
you  have  a  thin  fluid. — A.  Osgood,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Principles  of  Cavity  Preparation. — First,  establish 
cavity  outlines ;  second,  remove  softened  dentin ;  third,  give 
cavity  proper  shape;  fourth,  trim  and  smooth  enamel  mar- 
gins; fifth,  the  cavity  toilet, — Dental  Pedagogics. 

Varnishing  Cavities. — After  varnishing  a  cavity,  and 
before  introducing  the  fillings,  remove  excess  of  varnish 
by  using  small  pieces  of  rubber-dam.  It  takes  up  the  var- 
nish and  leaves  no  lint  behind. — J.  L.,  Australian  Journal  of 
Dentistry. 

An  Antiseptic  Cavity  Varnish. — Select  gum  copal,  one- 
half  ounce;  ether,  one  ounce.  Dissolve  and  filter  through 
paper.  Add  hydronapththol,  fifty  grains,  and  add  enough 
ether  to  make  the  whole  measure  one  ounce.  Keep  in  well- 
stopped  bottle. — Dental  Era. 


36  General  Remarks. 

Cavity  Cleansing;  Hydronapthol. — For  cleansing  a  cav- 
ity previous  to  the  introduction  of  a  fillin;^  use  a  solution 
of  seven  grains  hydronapthol  to  an  ounce  of  alcohol. — G. 
Monroe,  Dental  Rcviezv. 

To  Open  Fissures. — To  make  a  rapid  cutting  drill  to 

open  fissures  with  take  a  round  bur  (No.  3  to  No.  6)  and 

grind  it  to  a  three-cornered   shape  point. — F.   C.   Noyes, 
Dental  Brief. 

Quick  Method  of  Drying  Cavities. — Apply  a  small  pellet 
of  paraldehyd  and  allow  it  to  remain  a  minute  or  two. 
Evaporate  with  hot  air.  Paraldehyd  is  more  volatile  than 
absolute  alcohol,  and  dries  quickly. — W.  H.  Schoening. 

FILLING  TEETH-GENERAL  REMARKS 

Filling  of  Distal  Cavities  in  Bicuspids  and  Molars. — 
These  cavities,  more  frequently  than  others,  are  im- 
properly filled  on  account  of  insufficient  working  room ; 
and  on  this  account  also,  these  fillings  are  improperly  shaped 
and  imperfectly  finished.  It  is  desirable,  whenever  possible, 
that  the  filling  should  completely  close  the  interdental  space 
at  its  occlusal  margin  so  as  to  prevent  food  wedging  between 
the  teeth  during  mastication;  it  is  also  important  that  the 
surface  of  the  filling,  while  fully  flush,  should  not  extend 
beyond  the  surface  of  the  tooth,  or,  as  we  term  it  technically, 
"overhang." — D.   Lin  ley   Palmer,   Dental   Brief. 

Contouring  the  Interproximal  Space. — After  filling  a 
mesio-occlusal  cavity  in  an  upper  second  bicuspid,  we  may 
know  if  the  inter-proximal  space  is  contoured  properly  by 
drawing  the  cheek  to  one  side  and  then  asking  the  patient 
to  close  the  mouth  and  then  raise  the  tongue  against  the 
bicuspids.  If  the  saliva  runs  through  the  gingival  space 
the  work  has  been  properly  made.  Contouring  properly 
the  inter-proximal  space  is  not  a  theory,  as  so  many  seem 
to  think,  but  it  is  a  condition  which  must  receive  much  con- 
sideration from  all  who  tlesire  to  make  the  highest  grade 
of  dental  work. — E.  K.  Wedelstaedt,  Dental  World. 


operative  Dentistry.  37 

Polishing  Fillings. — One  of  the  most  difficult  things 
we  have  to  do  is  to  polish  fillings  in  molars  and  bicuspids. 
You  can  not  be  positively  certain  that  you  polish  the 
margin  at  the  concavity  of  the  filling  if  you  fill  the  entire 
cavity  before  you  polish  there.  Fill  it  about  one-third  the 
way ;  then  take  a  chisel  or  something  and  thoroughly  remove 
all  excess  of  gold  from  the  margin.  Then  take  a  right-angle 
disk-carrier,  and  with  an  instrument  press  the  disk  at  the 
concavity,  and,  letting  the  edge  of  the  disk  extend  up  under 
the  gum,  you  can  polish  it  more  nicely.  Polish  the  upper 
margin  before  you  complete  the  operation,  to  make  a  good 
filling. — Frank  Holland,  Dental  World. 

Full  Contour. — If  we  fail  to  restore  the  tooth  to  its 
full  normal  contour,  and  the  teeth  fail  to  fall  together,  thus 
not  closing  the  space,  this  open  space  is  continually  inviting 
the  entrance  of  fibrous  foods,  which,  when  forced  upon  the 
gum  septum  in  the  process  of  mastication,  produces  great 
annoyance  and  often  severe  pain,  resulting  in  the  absorp- 
tion of  the  gum  septum  and  often  of  the  alveolar  process ; 
then,  pockets  are  formed  in  which  food  decomposes,  often 
resulting  in  the  destruction  of  tooth  structure  at  these 
points.  This  is  one  of  the  very  important  reasons  for 
restoring  the  tooth  to  full  normal  form. — I.  F.  Wallace, 
Dental  Era. 

Burnishing  Fillings. — In  burnishing  gold  fillings,  an- 
chored with  cement,  it  is  better  to  keep  the  instrument  warm 
— the  heat  of  the  instrument  has  a  tendency  to  hasten  the 
hardening  of  the  cement,  so  that  you  seldom  wait  for  that. 
*  *  *  *  Burnishing  gold  on  the  cement  allows  you  to  work 
on  walls  that  you  would  not  think  of  working  on  with  a 
mallet,  and  you  can  work  with  much  less  room  than  you  can 
with  a  mallet. — W.  I.  Brigham,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Polishing  Fillingps. — Keep  a  cake  of  calcined  magnesia 
in  the  cabinet  and  when  the  last  disc  of  fine  cuttle-fish  is  to 
be  used,  touch  it  to  the  magnesia  and  you  will  give  the  gold 
a  brilliant  polish. — Dental  Hints. 


38  General  Remarks. 

The  Interproximal  Space. — A  tooth  should  never  be  filled 
before  sufficient  space  has  been  obtained  to  normally  contour 
the  tooth  and  properly  reproduce  the  interproximal  space. 
Flat  fillings  with  broad  contact  surfaces  and  little  or  no  inter- 
proximal space  cause  constant  annoyance  to  the  patient  from 
food  crowding  in  between  the  teeth,  producing  finally  an 
active  gingivitis,  pyorrhea  ending  the  life  of  the  tooth. — J. 
V.  CoNZETT,  The  Dentist's  Magazine. 

The  Final  Finish  of  Gold  Fillings. — In  putting  on  the 
final  poUsh  use  a  tnin  cuttle-fish  disc,  and  lastly  crown 
paper  disc.  There  is  a  chamois  disc,  with  a  celluloid  back, 
which  is  the  best  thing  for  places  where  it  can  be  used, 
as  it  takes  out  the  slight  scratches  of  crown  paper,  polishing 
so  smooth  that  even  with  a  magnifying  glass  you  can  dis- 
tinguish nothing  but  a  smooth  surface. — W.  M.  Megginson, 
Ohio  Denal  Journal. 

Polishing  a  Filling. — A  filling  must  be  polished,  not  for 
aesthetic  reasons  only,  but  for  hygienic  reasons  as  well.  The 
debris  of  food  will  not  collect  upon  a  polished  surface,  nor 
will  the  masses  of  bacteria  as  easily  find  a  resting  place 
there.  After  the  coarser  discs  use  cuttle  and  crocus  discs, 
followed  by  rubbers  or  felt  with  pumice  and  whiting. — ]. 
V.  CoNZETT,  Dental  Review. 

To  Finish  and  Polish  Occlusal  Fillings. — A  rubber  disc 
will  cut  faster,  is  more  easily  handled,  and  will  polish  just  as 
smooth  as  the  best  moose-hide  points  that  can  be  bought. 
The  rubber  disc  is  cut  out  of  rubber  packing  having  a  layer 
of  rubber  on  the  outside  of  a  piece  of  canvas.  It  will  hold 
the  pumice  and  cut  faster  than  anything  else  you  can  get. — 
W.  M.  Megginson,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 

Restoration  of  Contour. — In  restoration  by  fillings 
round  them  out,  even  if  you  have  to  round  them  out  abnor- 
mally, or  to  an  extra  amount.  If  this  is  not  permitted  on 
account  of  overlapped  teeth  the  teeth  had  better  be  cut  oflf 
and  crowned  with  teeth  that  will  not  so  overlap. — C.  L. 
Hungerford,  Western  Dental  Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  39 

Proximal  Cavities :  The  Contact  Point. — When  the  tooth 
settles  back  to  its  original  position,  after  separating  and  fill- 
ing a  proximal  cavity,  the  contact  point  will  be  subject  to  the 
same  accumulation  of  bacteria  that  caused  decay  in  the  first 
instance,  and  unless  we  extend  the  margins  to  where  they 
are  cleaned  by  the  friction  of  the  tongue,  cheeks,  brush,  or 
by  the  food  in  the  process  of  mastication,  we  can  expect 
nothing  but  a  recurrence  of  decay, — J.  F.  Wallace,  Dental 
Era. 

Filling  Deep  Cavities. — When  decay  has  so  encroached 
upon  the  pulp  that  its  death  would  almost  surely  follow  the 
insertion  of  a  metallic  filling,  porcelain  will  give  almost 
absolute  security.  The  pulp  will  remain  alive  and  the  tooth 
comfortable.  Clinical  experience  has  taught  us  that  porce- 
lain is  the  best  non-conductor  of  thermal  changes  and 
practically  restores  the  tooth  to  as  nearly  normal  a  condition 
as  though  decay  had  never  occurred. — W.  T.  Reeves,  Dental 
Summary. 

The  Adhesive  Filling. — Practically,  gold  has  such  a 
tendency  to  bridge  that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  avoid 
infinitesimal  air-spaces  between  the  tooth  and  filling,  but  by 
having  a  soft  cement  lining  into  which  the  gold  is  squeezed 
all  of  the  dangerous  air-spaces  are  avoided  and  when  in- 
fection does  attack  the  cavity-margin  it  cannot  penetrate  to 
the  dentin.  While  the  final  hanmiering  may  possibly  fract- 
ure the  enamel  rods  on  its  edge,  and  microscopic  decay 
start,  when  it  becomes  apparent  we  can  repair  it  with  a  firm 
assurance  that  this  defective  margin  does  not  connect  with 
any  leak  by  which  infection  may  have  started  to  undermine 
the  foundations  of  the  filling. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Immunized  Carious  Dentin. — To  render  immune  to  any 
further  action  of  bacteria  the  layer  of  decomposed  dentin 
over  the  pulp,  dehydrate  thoroughly  with  bibulous  paper, 
chloroform  and  hot  air;  apply  bicarbonate  of  soda  and  de- 
hydrate again;  apply  as  antiseptic  a  concentrated  carbolic 


40  General  Remarks. 

acid — trichloric  acid — lo  per  cent,  solution  of  formaldehyd. 
When  thoroughly  saturated  fill  temporarily  with  oxysul- 
phate.  After  24  to  48  hours  renew  the  antiseptic  treat- 
ment, place  in  a  layer  of  medicated  cement  (preferably 
thymol),  cover  with  gutta-percha,  fill  with  oxyphosphate, 
and  complete  with  metallic  filling. — R.  H.  Hofheintz,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Proximal  Filling  in  the  Upper  Anterior  Teeth. — Ap- 
proach from  the  lingual  side  seems  to  combine  more  ad- 
vantages and  to  have  less  objection  than  any  other  method. 
Disfiguring  is  more  certainly  avoided  and  durability  in- 
creased. Access  is  more  readily  and  completely  secured  and 
needless  pain  prevented. 

The  operator  works  with  the  mouth-mirror  throughout, 
thereby  seeing  all  parts  and  saving  both  himself  and  the 
patient  the  strain  of  an  uncomfortable  position. — E.  S. 
Hathaway,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Restoration  of  Bicuspids. — When  the  palatal  wall  has 
broken  away,  the  tooth  being  pulpless,  the  contour  can  be 
restored  as  follows :  Cement  into  the  root  a  strong  metal 
pin,  leaving  it  nearly  as  long  as  the  finished  palatal  surface 
is  to  be.  Cut  away  all  soft  and  frail  edges  and  place  around 
the  tooth  a  temporary  matrix,  which  fill  carefully  and  solidly 
with  amalgam,  using  it  very  plastic  about  the  pin  and 
broken  walls  but  hard  and  dry  in  completing  the  operation. 
When  perfectly  hard  remove  matrix  and  shape  and  polish 
the  amalgam. — E.  L.  Davenport,  International  Den.  Jour. 

The   Choice   of   Filling  Materials   other   than   Gold. — 

( I )  Use  cement  in  such  teeth  as  are  so  wasted  that  sufficient 
anchorage  cannot  be  obtained  for  a  filling  lacking  adhesive 
qualities.  (2)  Gutta-percha  in  obscure  and  inaccessible  cavi- 
ties ;  in  teeth  of  soft  structure ;  in  buccal  cavities  at  gum  mar- 
gin, and  in  deciduous  teeth.  (3)  Amalgam  in  posterior  teeth, 
when  cavities  are  so  large  that  strong  walls  cannot  be  ob- 
tainable without  devitalization  of  pulps,  and  where  pocket- 
book  will  not  permit  extensive  operations  in  gold. — F.  T. 
Van  Woert. 


operative  Dentistry.  41 

Formaldehyd  in  the  Prevention  of  Decay. — With  the 
rubber-dam  so  applied  as  to  perfectly  protect  the  soft  tissues, 
the  surface  of  the  teeth  is  first  cleaned  with  3  per  cent,  py- 
rozone.  P'ormaldehyd,  varying  from  2  to  40  per  cent, 
strength,  according  to  the  surface,  is  then  applied  to  cavi- 
ties, carious  surfaces,  and  healthy  portions.  After  several 
applications  of  formaldehyd,  dry  the  surface  and  coat  with 
a  saturate  solution  of  paraform  in  chloroform,  to  which  has 
been  added  sufficient  hard  Canada  balsam  to  make  the  solu- 
tion a  thin  varnish.  When  the  varnish  has  nearly  dried, 
cavities  may  be  filled  with  amalgam,  gold,  gutta-percha,  or 
cement. — A.  C.  Hart,  Pacific  Med.  Den.  Gazette. 

Recurrence  of  Caries  Under  Good  Fillings. — When  caries 
recurs  under  fillings  which  have  been  in  place  for  ten, 
fifteen  or  even  twenty  years,  about  the  walls  of  which  no 
leakage  has  occurred,  and  yet  under  which  is  found  soft- 
ened, discolored  dentin,  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  cause 
is  an  internal  one,  developed  as  the  consequence  of  the 
presence  of  microorganisms  in  the  tubuli  of  an  area  of 
dentin,  which  appeared  to  the  eye  and  touch,  healthy. — 
H.  A.  Smith,  Dental  Digest. 

Filings  for  Weak  Teeth.— Try  in  weak  teeth  a  com- 
pound filling  of  copper  amalgam  underneath  and  another 
amalgam  on  the  surface.  This  succeeds  if  the  copper  amal- 
gam is  allowed  to  set  hard  before  the  facing  amalgam  is 
added.  If  put  in  at  the  same  sitting  the  latter  does  not  set 
properly,  probably  from  excess  of  mercury  absorbed  from 
the  copper  amalgam. — R.  Stanway  Purvis,  Journal  of  the 
British  Dental  Association. 

Filling  Materials.— The  teeth  are  living  organs,  and 
when  attacked  by  disease  their  treatment  demands  that  any 
material,  placed  in  contact  with  an  exposed  surface,  shall 
not  obstruct  Nature's  process  of  repair.  The  internal  struct- 
ure should  be  therapeutic,  with  a  covering  for  protection. 
Tin,  by  reason  of  its  peculiar  physical  characteristics,  meets 
this  demand  better  than  any  other  material  known  at  pres- 
ent.— T.  D.  Shumway,  Items  of  Interest. 


42  General  Remarks. 

Fillings:  Causes  of  Failure. — Unless  we  study  the 
causes  of  our  failures  and  the  best  methods  of  controlling 
and  overcoming  them,  and  make  such  changes  as  are  neces- 
sary to  accomplish  these  results,  we  cannot  hope  to  gain 
that  degree  of  perfection  for  which  we  are  striving.  It  be- 
hooves us  to  use  the  utmost  care  in  every  detail  up  to  the 
finished  filling,  that  It  may  fulfill  its  mission  of  saving  the 
tooth  for  future  usefulness. — J.  F.  Wallace,  Dental  Era. 

The  Arrest  of  Decay  by  Fillings. — The  metallic  salts 
furnished  from  amalgam  enter  into  the  dentin  and,  with 
the  organic  portion  of  the  tooth,  form  an  insoluble  lining 
which  arrests  further  decay.  Tin  is  better  than  amalgam, 
because  the  stannic  oxid  is  white  and  does  not  discolor 
dentin.  Copper,  as  an  element  in  alloys,  furnishes  these 
properties  more  perfectly  than  silver  or  tin. — S.  B.  Palmer^ 
Dental  Digest. 

A  Combination  Filling. — In  the  use  of  soft  gold  built 
into  a  layer  of  soft  cement,  followed  by  cohesive  foil  and, 
when  subject  to  abrasion,  finishing  with  gold  platinum  foil, 
the  good  qualities  of  each  ingredient  are  magnified,  and  the 
faults  of  each  minimized. — Clyde  Davis,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Recurrence  of  Decay. — No  tooth  may  be  considered  safe 
from  recurrence  of  decay  around  proximal  fillings  unless 
the  cervical  wall  has  been  carried  sufficiently  rootwise  to 
bring  that  portion  of  the  filling  under  the  gum,  and  the 
cervico-labial  and  cervico-lingual  angles  extended  to  a 
point  where  these  margins  of  the  filling  are  kept  clean  by 
friction. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Securing  Certainty  in  Covering  Cervical  Margins. — 
Between  matrix  and  tooth  place  a  mat  of  tin  and  gold  and 
wedge  firmly  to  place.  The  portion  of  the  mat  which  ex- 
tends into  the  cavity  is  then  laid  against  the  cervical  wall, 
and  forms  the  first  layer  of  the  filling.  Also  overcomes 
any  danger  of  checking  the  margins  in  applying  matrix. — 
F.  W.  Stephan,  Dental  Review. 


operative  Dentistry.  43 

Filling  Material. — The  cause  of  decay  is  external,  the 
recuperative  force  is  from  within;  the  operation  of  fiUing 
should  be  based  upon  a  recognition  of  these  processes  of 
nature,  and  the  material  placed  in  contact  with  the  dentin 
be  one  in  correspondence  with  the  amorphous  substance 
with  which  the  tubes  are  filled.  Of  all  materials  which  can 
be  employed,  tin  most  nearly  meets  these  conditions,  and 
its  use  is  based  on  a  theory  of  practice  scientifically  cor- 
rect.— T.  D.  Shumway,  Dental  Digest. 

Temporary  Filling. — Absorbent  cotton  saturated  with 
cement  mixed  to  a  creamy  consistency  makes  an  excellent 
temporary  filling  material  which  will  last  for  months.  If 
required  for  only  a  short  time  nearly  fill  the  cavity  with  dry 
cotton  before  inserting  the  above.  This  will  facilitate  the 
subsequent  removal  of  the  filling. — R.  E.  Sparks^  Inter- 
national Denial  Journal. 

Becalcified  Dentin  Left  Under  Fillings. — It  has  in  large 
part  been  disorganized;  it  is  packed  with  microorganisms, 
and  infiltrated  with  poison ;  a  mass  of  dead  microorganisms 
is  by  no  means  inert ;  from  their  dead  bodies  come  the  most 
virulent  poisons.  It  would  seem  to  be  a  fruitful  field  of 
research  to  determine  the  kind  of  agent  required  to  destroy 
the  microorganisms  and  at  the  same  time  neutralize  the 
poison. — C.  N.  Johnson^  Dental  Cosmos. 

"Fixation  Work." — If  it  is  wanted  to  fix  a  post  or  set- 
pin  in  a  funnel-shaped  cavity  or  any  kind  of  fixation  work 
in  a  confined  space,  and  when  great  strength  is  required,  fix 
the  pin,  or  whatever  it  is,  with  cement,  and  while 
the  cement  is  still  soft  force  into  it  some  amalgam  and  finish 
it  off  with  an  entire  surface  of  amalgam.  This  will  give  the 
most  perfect  result  attainable  as  regards  permanence  and 
strength. — Harry  Baldwin,  British  Dental  Journal. 

"White  Decay. — If  white  spots  of  decay  on  front  teeth 
are  treated  by  burnishing  with  a  steel  burnisher,  moistened 
with  pyrozone,  it  will  prevent  recurrence  of  decay  and  save 
the  teeth  without  filling. — Percy  D.  Greene,  Dental  Cosmos. 


44  General  Remarks. 

Superficial  Becay. — In  cases  of  superficial  decay  near  the 
gum  margin — only  a  white  streak — rub  nitrate  of  silver  on 
the  spots  and  play  hot  air  on  it  from  the  syringe.  Paint 
the  gum  with  tincture  of  iodin,  which  will  form  iodid  of 
silver,  and  prevent  the  spreading  of  the  silver  nitrate. — Dr. 
Van  Orden,  Pacific  Gazette. 

Treatment  of  Decalcified  Dentin  in  Bottom  of  Cavity. — 
Apply  sufficient  oil  of  cassia  to  permeate  all  the  softened 
dentin.  Dry  the  surface  with  chloroform ;  fill  with  aristol 
and  chloro-percha,  which  becomes  hard  and  glassy  when  the 
chloroform  has  evaporated.  Finish  with  cement. — R.  H. 
Cool,  Pacific  Gazette. 

Filling  from  the  Lingual  Surface  of  Upper  Incisors. — 
Crystal  mat  gold  offers  great  advantages  from  the  ten- 
dency of  the  pieces  to  stay  where  they  are  put,  instead  of 
falling,  rolling  and  tipping,  as  in  the  use  of  gold  foils.  Use 
round-pointed  pluggers  with  a  rolling  motion,  spreading  the 
gold  like  a  paste,  thus  giving  a  uniform  surface. — N.  H. 
Bishop,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Arrest  of  Decay. — In  permanent  teeth,  too  tender  or 
too  infected  for  excavation,  powdered  nitrate  of  silver 
rubbed  into  the  cavity  before  filling  has  been  very  effective, 
one  case  having  been  under  observation  for  five  years  and 
still  satisfactory. — Mr.  Wallis,  British  Dental  Journal. 

When  Caries  Extends  to  the  Bifurcation  of  the  Roots. — 

Make  a  mat  of  two  or  three  layers  of  tin  foil,  place  it  at 
the  bifurcation  and  use  it  as  a  base  for  filling  the  rest  of  the 
cavity  with  amalgam. — H.  L.  Ambler,  Pacific  Gazette. 

Protection  of  Coronal  Borders. — When  the  cavities  are 
not  exposed  to  view,  a  50  per  cent,  solution  silver  nitrate 
may  be  applied  to  the  cervical  borders  of  mesial  and  distal 
cavities  in  molars  and  bicuspids,  and  will  do  much  toward 
preventing  decay  at  that  point.  By  means  of  a  few  shreds 
of  cotton  on  a  broach  it  may  be  applied  without  retaining 
other  portions  of  the  tooth. — T.  B.  Hinman,  OJiio  Dental 
Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  45 

A  Tight  Filling. — The  chief  object  is  to  make  a  tight 
filling;  a  filling  that  will  not  leak,  and  without  loose  places 
around  it ;  that  can  be  done  with  amalgam  in  many  cases 
when  it  cannot  be  done  with  gold  or  anything  else. — S.  C. 
G.  Watkins,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Prevent  Recurrence  of  Decay. — When  the  cavity  is 
ready  for  the  filling  apply  formalin  (forty  per  cent.)  for 
five  minutes.  Then  dry  and  coat  with  varnish  of  Canada 
balsam  containing  two  per  cent,  of  formalin.  Then  fill  as 
usual. — A.  C.  Hart^  Items  of  Interest. 

Air  in  Fillings. — I  may  surprise  some  of  you  when  I 
say  that  most  of  your  amalgam  fillings  are  from  12  to  16 
per  cent.  air.  The  same  is  true  of  your  gold  fillings,  but 
with  amalgam  it  is  almost  impossible  to  get  the  air  out. — G. 
V.  Black,  Dental  Review. 

Failure  of  Fillings. — From  both  observation  and  ex- 
perience, I  will  say  that  the  lack  of  proper  preparation  of 
a  cavity  is  responsible  for  more  failures  than  is  the 
material  with  which  it  is  filled. — John  Campbell,  Dental 
Era. 

Immunity  from  Caries. — We  can  secure  immunity  from 
decay  of  the  teeth,  but  it  must  be  by  local  applications,  local 
care  and  treatment.  We  must  destroy  the  toxins  which 
cause  the  disease. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 

A  Cause  of  Failure. — Many  a  filling  that  would  other- 
wise be  a  failure  can  be  saved  by  grinding  down  an  oppos- 
ing cusp.  This  is  a  little  point,  but  it  can  save  many  a  fill- 
ing.— F.  F.  Fletcher,  Dental  Era. 

Recurrence  of  Decay. — The  blame  for  recurrence  of 
decay  lies  with  both  operator  and  patient.  The  patient's 
blame  lies  in  the  fact  that  not  one  in  fifty  brushes  his  or  her 
teeth  thoroughly,  and  decay  recurs  more  frequently  because 
of  dirty  teeth  than  from  any  other  one  cause. — J.  N.  Crouse, 
Dental  Digest. 


46  Pulp  Capping. 

CONSERVATIVE  TREATMENT  OF  THE  PULP 

Softened  Dentin  Over  the  Pulp. — The  superficial  layers 
of  softened  dentin  are  filled  with  bacterial  forms.  The 
deeper  layers  are  not  infected,  the  decalcification  precedes 
the  invasion  of  the  bacteria  within  the  dentinal  tubuli. 
Such  dentin  has  evidently  not  lost  its  entire  vitality ;  it  is 
often  hypersensitive.  A  thin  layer  of  such  dentin,  if  left 
over  the  pulp,  impregnated  with  some  strong  antiseptic,  will 
not  cause  recurrence  of  decay. — H.  Printz,  Dental  Re- 
vietv. 

Pulp  Capping. — Dry  the  cavity  thoroughly,  insert  a 
little  thin  chloro-percha,  distributing  to  all  the  walls. 
Wipe  out  excess,  leaving  only  a  thin  coat,  from  which  the 
chloroform  should  be  thoroughly  evaporated.  Then  flow 
in  some  thin  oxyphosphate  cement  and  let  it  harden.  By 
this  method  no  pressure  is  made  upon  the  pulp  and  the 
oxyphosphate  cement  is  not  brought  into  contact  with  thin 
dentin.  Any  inflammation  of  the  pulp  should  be  reduced 
previous  to  insertion  of  filling.— G.  H.  Kittell,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 

Formagen  Cement  for  Pulp  Capping. — Formagen  con- 
sists of  a  powder,  principally  calcium  carbonate,  as  a  me- 
dium and  liquid — carbolic  acid  and  eugenol,  each  saturated 
with  formaldehyd  vapor,  which  is  gradually  given  off  when 
the  two  are  mixed  together.  Remove  all  carious  tissue  from 
over  the  pulp ;  place  cement  in  a  concave  disk  and  apply 
over  the  pulp.  Cover  with  oxyphosphate  cement  and  fill 
permanently. — H.  F.  Brooks,  Journal  B.  D.  A. 

Pulp  Capping. — In  many  cases  the  capping  of  the 
dental  pulp  is  good  theory  but  poor  practice.  When  the 
pulp  is  exposed  from  caries,  and  inflamed,  the  safest  cap- 
ping, as  a  rule,  is  a  devitalizing  agent  left  long  enough  that 
the  pulp's  life  is  destroyed,  followed  by  its  removal  and 
proper  replacement  with  some  substance  possessing  both 
antiseptic  and  homogeneous  properties. — Burton  Lee 
Thorpe,  La  Odento-Stoniatolo^ia. 


operative  Dentistry.  47 

Pulp  Capping. — When  a  healthy  pulp  is  exposed  in 
excavating,  attempt  should  always  be  made  to  save  it;  ster- 
ilize and  cap  immediately,  preventing  infection  through  ac- 
cess of  saliva,  and  do  not  allow  the  surface  to  dry  by  long 
exposure  to  the  air.  I  invariably  use  oxysulphate  of  zinc, 
in  thin  paste,  placing  it  in  contact  with  the  surface  of  the 
pulp.  A  small  quantity  of  finely  pulverized  thymol,  mixed 
in  the  cement,  will  secure  slight  permanent  antiseptic  action. 
Cover  the  oxysulphate  with  oxyphosphate.  Allow  a  year  to 
elapse  before  permanent  filling. — W.  J.  Miller,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Protection  of  Pulp  from  Thermal  Changes  in  Deep  Cav- 
ity.— ^Thoroughly  dry  with  absolute  alcohol,  then  coat  with 
common  rosin,  dissolved  in  chloroform.  Cut  thin  pieces  of 
asbestos  felt,,  just  large  enough  to  cover  bottom  of  cavity. 
Moisten  with  wood  creosote  or  campho-phenique,  and  cover 
one  side  with  a  mixture  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  iodol,  and  vase- 
lin  or  albolin.  Place  over  bottom  of  cavity.  Fill  as  de- 
sired.— J.  G.  Templeton,  Dental  Review. 

Discs  for  Pulp  Capping. — With  the  rubber-dam  punch 
and  No.  60  tinfoil  a  disc  can  be  punched  out  that  is  admir- 
able for  capping  slight  exposures.  It  punches  out  a  small 
cone,  and  by  taking  hold  of  the  cone  at  the  apex  with  pliers 
you  can  insert  chloro-percha,  and  being  in  the  form  of  a 
tiny  cap,  can  be  readily  placed  just  where  it  is  wanted,  with- 
out making  pressure  upon  the  exposed  pulp. — E.  B.  Lodge, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Successful  Pulp  Capping. — Pulp  exposure  in  occlusal 
cavity  capped  in  1866;  cap  of  heavy  gold  foil  filled  with  a 
paste  of  hypophosphite  of  lime  and  glycerin,  covered  with 
gutta-percha;  cavity  filled  with  amalgam.  Opened  in  1872; 
exposure  obliterated  and  adjacent  dentin  normally  sensitive. 
In  January,  1897,  pulp  exposure  from  caries  on  proximal 
surface  at  the  cervix ;  no  indication  of  pulp  degeneration. — 
Louis  Jack,  International  Den.  Jour. 


48  Pulp  Capping. 

Hydronapthol  as  a  Pulp  Capping. — To  avoid  the  removal 
of  the  layer  of  softened  dentin,  which,  if  removed,  would 
probably  necessitate  the  removal  of  the  pulp,  mix  equal 
quantities  of  hydronapthol  and  cement  and  place  as  a  cap- 
ping for  the  layer  of  softened  dentin,  allowing  it  to  set. 
Then  proceed  with  the  filling.  The  hydronapthol  arrests 
the  action  of  putrefaction  germs. — A.  W.  McCall,  Federal 
Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Capping. — A  pulp  cap  must  be  a  disinfectant;  an 
antiseptic ;  an  antiphlogistic,  and  a  non-conductor  of  thermal 
changes.  To  secure  the  combination  apply  rubber-dam ;  re- 
move all  debris ;  saturate  cavity  with  creosote  and  wipe  dry ; 
introduce  iodoform,  followed  by  copal-ether  varnish  a  little 
thicker  than  cream.  Cut  asbestos  paper  to  cover;  press 
gently  down  and  varnish  over.  Oxyphosphate  of  zinc  over 
this. — W.  A.  Lee,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 

A  Successful  Filling  Over  an  Exposed  Pulp. — In  a  case 

in  which  the  pulp  was  so  clearly  exposed  that  the  pulsations 
could  be  seen  an  application  of  lacto-phosphate  of  lime  was 
made,  and  an  oxychlorid  filling  over  tliat.  Two  years 
later  the  filling  was  removed  and  the  pulp  found  covered 
with  secondary  dentin,  when  a  gold  filling  was  malleted  in. 
That  was  years  ago,  and  the  tooth  is  still  alive. — Dr. 
Andrews,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Protection. — Oxysulphate  of  zinc  is  one  of  the 
best  pulp  protectors ;  easy  of  adaptation,  non-irritating  alike 
to  sensitive  dentin  and  to  the  pulp.  When  the  pulp  is 
nearly  exposed,  place  a  small  amount  of  thinly  mixed  oxy- 
sulphate over  the  bottom  of  the  cavity,  allowing  a  few  min- 
utes for  it  to  set,  and  cover  with  oxyphosphate  of  zinc. — G. 
F.  Cheney,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Capping. — There  is  an  old  rule  laid  down  in  one 
of  the  text-books,  which,  if  followed,  would  save  a  lot  of 
time  and  trouble,  viz.,  cap  only  where  the  exposure  is  small, 
the  dentin  healthy,  and  the  patient  robust. — W.  R.  Birkett, 
Journal  British  Dental  Association. 


operative  Dentistry.  49 

Pulp  Protection  IJnder  Gold  Fillings. — Where  the 
tooth  contains  a  vital  pulp  needing  more  protection  than 
cement  alone  would  afford,  it  is  advisable  to  put  in  a  wafer 
of  gfutta-percha  coated  on  the  under  surface  with  a  good 
cavity  varnish,  having  made  with  a  ball  burnisher  a  con- 
cavity in  the  under  surface  of  the  wafer. — Ira  J.  Coe,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Cavity  Lining  for  Pulp  Protection. — Gum  sandarac, 
dissolved  in  alcohol,  used  quite  thin,  leaves  a  semi-opaque 
film  upon  the  cavity  walls,  which  is  non-conducting,  non- 
irritating,  insoluble,  and  more  in  harmony  with  dentin  than 
any  metallic  substance.  Allow  five  or  ten  minutes  for  harden- 
ing, which  may  be  hastened  by  hot  air. — G.  F.  Cheney, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

For  Exposed  Aching  Pulps,  Mentho-phenol. — One  part 

phenol  crystals  to  three  parts  menthol,  melted  together,  dis- 
solves readily  in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform  and  most  oils, 
and  is  a  solvent  of  iodoform  and  aristol.  Possesses  decided 
analgesic  qualities.  If  applied  to  an  aching  pulp  the  pain 
will  subside  promptly. — Wm.  Shaeffer,  M.D.,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Capping. — ^Adjust  rubber-dam,  cleanse  cavity  thor- 
oughly with  warm  water  and  4  per  cent,  solution  formalin, 
gently  press  over  exposure  small  cutting  iodoform  gauze 
dipped  in  carbolic  acid,  flow  over  gauze  paste  of  carbolic 
acid  and  aristol,  seal  up  with  non-irritating  cement,  and  fill 
to  suit  case. — J.  A.  Richards. 

Pulp-capping. — Place  a  little  iodoform  and  glycerin 
over  a  tender  pulp,  and  a  little  asbestos  paper  over  that; 
then  place  in  oxyphosphate  and  let  it  set.  Over  that  you 
can  put  in  any  filHng  you  choose,  and  it  will  not  irritate 
the  pulp. — H.  J.  McKellops,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Protection  Under  Oxyphosphate  Fillings. — Line  the 
cavity  with  Canada  balsam  and  tin  foil,  pressing  the  tin  foil 
to  place  with  cotton  till  a  good  adaptation  is  obtained. — 
W.  W.  Smith,  Dental  Cosmos. 


50  The  Rubber-Dam. 

Pulp  Protection. — A  paste  of  hydronapthol  with  oxid 
powder  and  a  couple  of  drops  of  oil  of  cloves  and  creosote 
is  excellent  practice  to  prevent  consequent  irritation  that 
might  otherwise  follow  the  insertion  of  a  filling  over  nearly 
exposed  pulp. — Grafton  Monroe,  The  Bur. 

Pulp  Protection  Under  Oxyphosphate  Fillings. — Oxy- 
phosphate  will  destroy  the  life  of  the  pulp  when  placed  in  a 
deep  cavity.  To  prevent  this  line  the  entire  cavity  with 
gold  foil. — E.  D.  Downs,  Dental  Cosmos. 


THE  RUBBER-DAM 

Compound  Cavities:  The  Matrix. — When  the  ravages 
of  caries  demand  that  a  filling  shall  be  carried  far  beneath 
the  gum,  the  demand  is  for  amalgam,  because  it  can  be 
quickly  and  accurately  packed  into  such  places,  but  it  is  so 
easily  displaced  before  hardened  that  it  is  safer  and  wiser 
always  to  use  a  matrix.  For  a  continuous  tight  matrix  I  use 
the  band  material  familiar  to  orthodontists,  and  solder  with 
soft  solder.  This  may  reassure  the  operator  against  dis- 
turbance during  the  setting  of  the  material,  as  it  can  be  left 
in  position  without  discomfort. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Preparation  for  Adjustment  of  Rubber-dam. — The  tis- 
sues against  which  the  dam  is  to  rest  should  be  rendered 
as  surgically  clean  as  possible,  through  washing  with  warm 
sterilized  water ;  any  debris  in  the  interproximal  spaces  or  on 
the  crowns  of  the  teeth  should  be  removed ;  the  dam  should 
be  washed  with  soap  and  water  and  after  drying  rolled  in 
antiseptic  French  chalk ;  the  lips,  if  cracked,  and  any  sores 
on  the  face  covered  with  a  salve  of  some  kind — vaselin, 
cold  cream,  resinol,  etc.,  according  to  conditions,  and  nap- 
kins or  other  means  used  to  protect  the  face  from  contact 
with  the  dam  and  holders  and  to  secure  it  in  place. — E.  K. 
Wedelstaedt,  The  Dentists'  Magazine. 


operative  Dentistry.  51 

Rubber-dam  Matrix. — When  adjacent  cavities  are  to  be 
filled  with  cement,  a  neat  matrix  is  found  in  a  narrow  rib- 
bon of  rubber-dam  drawn  taut  over  the  adjacent  tooth  until 
the  cavity  is  filled — then  reversed  over  the  new  fill- 
ing until  the  second  cavity  is  filled — using  one  mix 
of  cement  for  the  two  cavities.  With  a  little  tension  the 
strip  may  be  trimmed  quite  close,  leaving  what  remains  as 
a  separator  until  the  next  day,  when  there  will  be  no  trouble 
in  properly  finishing  the  fillings. — J.  T.  Danforth,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Holding  Rubber-dam  in  Place. — Instead  of  ligating  the 
teeth  to  prevent  the  dam  from  sliding  toward  the  occlusal 
surfaces,  use  rubber  wedges  of  suitable  size,  carrying  them 
into  the  proximal  spaces  and  against  the  gingival  borders. 
The  rubber  will  thus  be  held  in  position,  moisture  will  be 
prevented  from  oozing,  and  the  teeth  will  be  slightly  sepa- 
rated, sufficient  to  allow  of  properly  finishing  the  filling, 
if  mesial  or  distal. — Hermann  Burdach,  (Trans.)  Dental 
Cosmos. 

The  Rubber-dam. — The  average  dentist  should  have 
the  dam  applied  to  his  own  teeth  by  some  careless  man  at 
least  once  a  week.  He  would  then  use  care  in  applying  it 
for  others.  If  in  cold  weather  you  would  warm  the  clamp 
your  patient  would  bless  you.  If  in  carrying  the  ligature 
between  the  teeth  you  are  careful  not  to  let  it  strike  the  gum 
suddenly,  your  patient  will  appreciate  it. — F.  M.  Smith, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Application  of  Rubber-dam. — In  a  proximal  cavity 
reaching  below  the  gum  margin,  place  a  piece  of  asbestos 
paper  moistened  with  oil  of  cloves  on  the  pulp;  then  a 
small  piece  of  cotton  moistened  slightly  with  carbolic  acid 
is  applied  against  the  gum,  and  over  this  a  larger  piece  of 
cotton  saturated  with  a  thick  solution  of  tincture  of  ben- 
zoin, packing  it  tightly.  This  will  force  out  the  gum  in 
twenty-four  hours,  with  no  pain  to  the  pulp. — W.  A. 
Spring,  Dental  Review. 


52  The  Rubbcr-Daiii. 

Repairing  a  Leak  in  Rubber-dam. — Place  a  wad  of  bibu- 
lous paper  underneath  the  torn  place,  paint  a  piece  of  thin 
vulcanizable  rubber  with  amber  cement,  and  apply  to  the 
torn  surface  of  the  dam,  to  which  it  adheres  perfectly, 
without  any  curling  up  of  the  sticky  edges  so  annoying 
when  an  attempt  is  made  to  use  rubber-dam  in  this  manner. 
— W.  E.  Walker. 

Wire  Rubber-dam  Ligatures. — To  force  the  dam  and 
gum  out  of  cavities  extending  deeply  under  the  gum,  not 
always  successfully  accomplished  by  the  ordinary  clamps, 
try  using  a  fine  soft  wire,  doubled  and  tightly  twisted,  as  a 
ligature.  Wax  the  wire  to  make  the  dam  stick  to  it.  Force 
dam  and  wire  above  cavity  margin  with  a  small  chisel. — 
Wm.  Mitchell,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Correct  the  Unpleasant  Odor  and  Feeling  of  Rubber- 
dam. — Wipe  it  perfectly  clean  with  a  damp  napkin  or 
sponge ;  dry  thoroughly ;  dust  with  borated  talcum  powder. 
Rub  it  over  lightly  with  the  fingers  and  )-ou  have  a  smooth, 
slightly-scented  satin  surface,  which  will  readily  pass  into 
the  closest  spaces  without  soap  or  cosmolin. — J.  C.  Cary, 
Dental  Headlight. 

To  Facilitate  the  Passage  of  Rubber-dam  Between  the 
Teeth. — When  the  teeth  are  very  close  together,  smear  a 
little  glycerin  around  the  holes  in  the  dam.  This  answers 
the  same  purpose  as  the  soap  usually  recommended,  and 
has  not  the  unpleasant  taste  of  the  latter  if  it  comes  in  con- 
tact with  the  tongue. — R.  E.  Sparks,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Application  of  Clamp. — In  case  of  cavities  extending 
under  the  gum.  a  little  powdered  orthoform  will  relieve  the 
pain  caused  by  applying  the  clamp. — C.  H.  Blackburn, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Application  of  Rubber-dam  and  Clamp. — If  vapocain 
is  rubbed  back  and  forth  on  the  gum,  the  clamp  may  be 
applied  with  little  or  no  pain. — C.  F.  Gorham.  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  53 

Adjusting  the  Rubber-dam. — If  the  gums  are  washed 
with  oil  of  cloves  immediately  before  adjusting  the  rubber- 
dam,  the  pain  incident  to  the  application  of  clamps  or  liga- 
tures is  very  greatly  minimized. — E.  K.  Wedelsteadt,  The 
Dentists'  Magazine. 

"Punching*"  the  Rubber-dam. — In  a  clinic  given  by  Dr. 
G.  D.  Moyer  before  the  National  Dental  Association,  the 
rubber--dam  was  first  marked  with  blue  pencil  and  the  holes 
burned  through  the  dam,  an  improvement  on  the  dam  punch, 
each  hole  being  reinforced  with  a  rim  of  melted  rubber. — 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Rubber-dam  and  the  Ligature. — The  fact  that  the  liga- 
ture may  give  pain  should  influence  the  operator  to  dis- 
pense with  it  whenever  possible.  If  the  dam  is  of  proper 
weight  and  skillfully  adjusted  it  is  the  exception  rather 
than  the  rule  for  a  ligature  to  be  required. — C.  N.  John- 
son, Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Apply  Rubber-dam  to  Lower  Incisor  Teeth. — First 
tie  a  ligature  around  the  teeth  on  which  you  desire  to  put 
the  dam;  then  apply  the  dam  and  ligate  in  the  usual  way. 
This  prevents  the  stretching  of  the  dam  over  the  ligature 
from  pressure  of  the  lower  lip,  as  the  dam  is  held  firmly 
between  the  two  ligatures. — J.  C.  Montgomery. 

To  Adjust  the  Ligature  around  the  tooth  when  the  rub- 
ber-dam is  applied,  a  narrow  foot-plugger  makes  an  excel- 
lent carrier;  the  serrations  of  the  plugger  prevent  the  slip- 
ping of  the  ligature  while  being  carried  to  place. — Dental 

News. 

The  Rubber-dam. — A  large  field  for  operations  should 
be  provided  for  in  the  adjustment  of  the  dam.  Thoroughly 
desensitize  the  gum  tissue  and  the  rest  is  easy,  both  for  the 
patient  and  operator. — W.  J.  Jackman,  The  Dentists'  Mag- 
azine. 


54  The  Rubber-Dam. 

Protection  of  the  Gums  in  the  Application  of  Clamps. — 
In  a  great  majority  of  cases  soreness  of  the  gums  from  the 
application  of  an  ill-fitting  clamp  may  be  prevented  by 
brushing  the  gum  around  the  neck  of  the  tooth  with  tincture 
of  calendula,  which  has  the  valuable  properties  of  prevent- 
ing soreness  and  suppuration  and  of  inducing  the  rapid  de- 
velopment of  healthy  granulation. — Dental  Cosmos. 

Application  of  Eubber-dam  Clamp. — If,  when  applying 
the  dam  clamp,  you  fold  two  little  pieces  of  muslin  and 
lay  them  between  the  clamp  and  cheek,  your  patient  will 
appreciate  it. — F.  Milton  Smith,  Dental  Era. 

The  Use  of  Clamps. — A  right  and  left  clamp  for  the 
molars,  when  used  with  napkins  folded  under  them,  will 
keep  the  teeth  dry  long  enough  for  almost  any  operation, 
except  a  large  gold  filing.  They  leave  both  hands  free, 
and  for  dressing  root-canals  and  inserting  plastic  fillings 
they  are  invaluable. — Howard  T.   Stewart. 

To  Prevent  Irritation  of  the  Gum  by  Clamps,  etc. — The 

transparent  oiled  silk  of  the  drug  stores  is  a  very  serviceable 
material  to  put  between  the  gum  and  irritating  regulating 
fixtures,  rubber-dam  clamps,  etc. — B.  H.  Teague,  Am.  Den. 
Weekly. 

Securing  the  Rubber-dam. — When  the  rubber-dam  will 
not  stay  where  we  want  it  under  the  gum,  use  fine  copper 
wire,  and  it  will  readily  adapt  itself  just  where  you  desire  it 
to  stay. — L.  W.  Jordan,  Dental  Summary. 

To  Secure  Rubber-dam  Clamp  on  Conically-shaped 
Tooth. — Sandaric  varnish  on  the  tooth  will  give  a  surface 
over  which  the  clamp  will  not  slip. — J.  A.  McClain,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Punctured  Rubber-dam. — Put  a  pellet  of  cotton  wool 
in  the  hole  and  cover  it  with  sandarac  or  cover  the  hole  with 
a  piece  of  surgeon's  plaster. — R.  H.  Manning,  British  Den- 
tal Journal. 


operative  Dentistry.  55 

THE  MATRIX 

The  Matrix  for  Plastic  Fillings. — Plastic  fillings  must 
have  surrounding  walls  to  resist  the  pressure  necessary  in 
packing.  When  missing  an  "all-around"  matrix  is  best  for 
badly  broken-down  teeth,  letting  it  remain  until  the  next 
day  if  amalgam  is  used  in  restoration.  Thirty-four  to 
thirty-six  gauge  German  silver  is  the  most  satisfactory  ma- 
terial; its  rigidity  is  sufficient,  yet  can  be  readily  bent  to 
contour. — Western  Dental  Journal. 

Adaptation  of  Matrix  to  Cavity. — Press  the  matrix  ma- 
terial to  general  form  of  cavity ;  then  stretch  loosely  over  it 
a  strip  of  thin  rubber-dam  and  lay  on  it,  over  the  cavity,  a 
small  quantity  of  ordinary  putty,  rather  stiff.  Press  into 
the  cavity  carrying  it  to  the  bottom,  and  with  considerable 
force  carry  it  into  every  part.  Release  the  pressure  and 
the  elasticity  of  the  rubber  will  lift  the  putty  from  the  cavity 
and  leave  the  matrix  in  position. — W.  Hallow  ay.  Items  of 
Interest, 

Covering  Cavity  Margins  When  Using  Matrix. — Fold 
over  the  matrix,  before  placing  in  position,  several  layers  of 
non-cohesive  gold,  having  sufficient  space  to  slip  it  between 
the  teeth,  but  tightly  wedged  in.  Then  insert  an  instrument 
between  the  gold  and  the  matrix,  about  the  centre,  and  force 
the  gold  carefully  back  into  the  cavity  so  as  to  cover  the  floor 
and  walls  as  far  as  it  will  go.  The  gold  is  thus  carried  be- 
yond all  margins,  which  are  safely  covered. — R.  B.  Tuller, 
Dental  Review. 

The  Band  Matrix. — Many  cases  of  extensive  decay  in 
molars  and  bicuspids  can  be  most  perfectly  filled  with  amal- 
gam with  the  aid  of  a  continuous  band  matrix,  retained  in 
position  for  several  hours  after  completion  of  the  filling, 
or  until  the  amalgam  has  thoroughly  set. — C.  P.  Pruyn, 
Dental  Century. 


56  Separoti)ig  Methods. 

The  Copper  Matrix. — The  copper  should  be  very  care- 
fully annealed  before  it  is  used.  Cooling  it  in  alcohol  gives 
the  copper  a  beautifully  clean  surface  with  a  lead-like  con- 
sistency. This  matrix  enables  us  to  perform  operations  that 
absolutely  restore  normality  to  tooth  and  gums. — H.  C. 
Register,  Dental  Cosmos. 

SEPARATING  METHODS 

Cotton  an  Ideal  Separator. — Cotton  more  nearly  ap- 
proaches the  ideal  separator,  inasmuch  as  it  has  more  of  the 
advantages  and  less  of  the  disadvantages  of  the  other 
materials.  Its  greatest  disadvantage  is  that  it  becomes 
offensive,  though  this  can  be  overcome  by  dipping  the 
cotton  or  swabbing  the  separator  after  it  is  in  place  with 
chloro-percha.  It  takes  bi:t  a  few  minutes  for  the  chloro- 
form to  evaporate,  which  leaves  a  rubber  covering  which  is 
practically  impervious.  Increased  pressure  can  be  obtained 
with  this  method  of  separating  by  making  a  surgeon's  knot 
and  placing  it  between  the  teeth,  then  packing  in  the  cotton 
— as  much  as  the  space  will  admit — then  tie  at  the  cutting 
edge  of  the  tooth.  This  makes  a  knot  at  the  cervical  margin 
and  at  the  cutting  edge,  which  forces  the  cotton  into  a 
smaller  space,  thus  increasing  the  pressure. — J.  C.  Salvas, 
Dental  Brief. 

A  Re-enforced  Wedge. — This  wedge  is  particularlv  ap- 
plicable for  cases  wherein  it  becomes  necessary  to  wedge 
across  wide  spaces,  as  in  regaining  the  space  of  a  missing 
tooth.  It  consists  of  the  usual  piece  of  cottonwood  which 
has  been  compressed  with  the  pliers  or  vise,  and  carved  to 
the  desired  size  and  shape.  Through  the  wedge  thus  pre- 
pared a  hole  is  drilled,  and  into  it  is  threaded  and  com- 
pressed a  large  piece  of  ordinary  separating  rubber.  The 
principle  of  it  is,  that  after  the  wood  has  expanded  to  its 
limit  it  will  relieve  the  pressure  on  the  rubber,  which  will 
attempt  to  resume  its  original  shape,  thus  forcing  the  sides 
of  the  wedge  further  apart. — Frederick  Crosby  Brush, 
Dental  Brief. 


operative  Dentistry.  57 

The  "Fish-line"  Method  of  Wedging. — When  the  teeth 
are  snugly  in  contact  at  the  masticating  surface  with  a  V- 
shaped  space  at  the  gum,  pass  a  piece  of  doubled  waxed 
floss  silk  between  the  teeth,  leaving  the  loop  sticking  out. 
Into  this  loop  the  fish  line  (grass  line)  of  the  size  decided 
upon  is  threaded  and  drawn  through.  The  two  ends  of  the 
line  are  then  tied  with  a  square  knot  a  little  to  one  side  of 
the  masticating  surface.  Sufficient  space  for  filling  may 
often  be  gained  in  twelve  hours  with  but  little  soreness,  but 
the  line  will  continue  swelling  for  two  or  three  days,  when 
extensive  wedging  is  needed. — S.  E.  Davenport,  Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 

Obtaining  Separation. — To  obtain  separation  for  the 
placing  of  bands  in  tooth  regulation  force  over  the  teeth 
to  be  banded  unannealed  German  silver  bands  made  from 
seamless  tubing  of  gauge  36,  allowing  them  to  remain  until 
the  following  sitting  will  provide  sufficient  space  painlessly 
for  placing  in  position  annealed  bands  of  the  same  size  fitted 
over  the  teeth  on  the  plastic  model  in  the  construction  of 
the  appliance. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Items  of  Interest. 

Separation  by  Means  of  Gutta-percha. — In  obtaining 
separation  through  the  expansion  of  gutta-percha  in  proxi- 
mal cavities  the  cavity  should  be  prepared  as  thoroughly  as 
possible  before  placing  the  gutta-percha,  as  the  tooth  be- 
comes very  sensitive  and  it  is  almost  impossible  to  carry  on 
any  further  operations  on  account  of  the  hypersensitiveness 
of  the  cavity  when  the  gutta-percha  is  taken  out. — Dr. 
Woodbury,  American  Dental  Journal. 

The  Bonwill  Separation  for  Plus-contour  Fillings. — 
Remove  the  caries  and  fill  the  cavities  and  intervening 
space  with  pink  gutta-p'ercha.  Dismiss  for  from  three  to 
six  months  when,  through  mastication  upon  the  gutta- 
percha, the  teeth  will  be  found  somewhat  separated,  the 
gum  pressed  away  from  the  gingival  border  so  that  perma- 
nent fillings  can  be  inserted  under  the  most  favorable  con- 
ditions.— E.  T.  Darby,  Dental  Cosmos. 


58  Separating  Methods. 

Separating  Tape. — Soak  linen  tape  in  thin  chloro 
percha  till  it  becomes  saturated.  The  chloroform  evaporates 
and  leaves  a  gutta-percha  tape,  the  very  toughest  and  most 
efifective  material  that  has  ever  been  suggested.  It  does  not 
disintegrate  like  the  plain  linen;  it  remains  perfectly  in 
place  and  does  not  cause  irritation  to  the  soft  tissues.  Its 
action,  while  very  effectual,  is  so  gradual  that  patients 
seldom  or  never  complain  of  discomfort. — Dental  Reviezv. 

Separating  Rubber. — There  is  a  great  tendency  in  rub- 
ber to  follow  the  sloping  surfaces  of  the  teeth  and  insinuate 
itself  into  the  interproximate  space,  forcing  the  gum  tissue 
out  and  injuring  it  seriously.  The  gum  should  be  protected 
by  building  a  bridge  of  gutta-percha  or  cement,  extending 
from  the  gingival  portion  of  the  cavity  across  the  interprox- 
imate space,  against  the  next  tooth. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Den- 
tal Reviezv. 

Separating  the  Teeth. — When  a  great  deal  of  separa- 
tion is  needed,  partially  excavate  the  cavity  and  pack  very 
firmly  with  cotton  saturated  with  chloro-percha.  It  may 
remain  two  or  three  weeks  if  needed.  The  teeth  will  be 
well  separated,  the  cavity  easy  of  access,  and  perfectly  pro- 
tected for  the  time  being  by  the  chloro-percha,  while  the 
cotton  cannot  become  foul. — C.  O.  Hood,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Separation  for  Space  in  Which  to  Work. — It  is  not 

necessary  to  have  a  very  large  space.  Any  one  who  can  fill 
solidly  against  a  matrix  can  fill  equally  well  against  the  op- 
posing surface  of  a  proximal  cavity,  when  a  thin  burnisher 
passed  between  will  give  a  good  surface  to  the  finish,  with 
no  violence  done  to  nature  by  a  wide  separation. — Tiios. 
FiLLEBROWN,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Gutta-percha  for  Separating. — If,  when  using  gutta- 
percha for  separating,  the  material  is  softened,  it  is  often 
difficult  to  fix  it  tightly  between  the  teeth.  Cut  a  piece  and 
press  it  to  place  cold;  then  trim  into  shape  with  warm 
burnishers. — R.  Ottolengui,  American  Dentist. 


operative  Dentistry.  59 

Separation  with  Cotton. — It  is  important  that  the  space 
should  be  thoroughly  dry  when  the  cotton  is  inserted.  The 
action  of  the  cotton  is  caused  by  the  fibres  swelling  as  they 
become  saturated  with  moisture,  but  if  they  are  saturated 
when  put  in  place  there  will  be  little  more  expansion.  If 
rubber  is  used  the  gum  should  be  protected  with  cotton 
saturated  with  benzoin. — R.  H.  Hofheinz^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Separation. — Where  there  is  no  separation  at  all  and 
the  teeth  are  very  tightly  fixed  together,  silk  can  be  passed 
through  the  interproximal  space  and  tied  very  tight  up 
and  over  the  occlusal;  in  two  or  three  days  two  or  three 
strands  of  silk  can  be  gotten  in,  and  you  will  soon  be  able 
to  get  quite  a  separation. — Dr.  Black,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Separating  for  Filling. — Using  Japanese  grass  line,  put 
a  loop  between  two  teeth,  drawing  it  through  at  the  gum 
margin  with  a  piece  of  floss-silk ;  then  tie  the  two  free  ends 
into  the  loop  with  two  or  three  knots  and  leave  it  for  two, 
three,  or  four  days. — Dr.  Bogue,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

The  Separator. — A  properly-constructed  separator 
should  be  placed  between  the  teeth  during  the  packing  of 
gold  in  proximal  cavities ;  it  is  needed  to  steady  the  tooth 
being  filled  and  assists  in  giving  a  clearer  view  and  a 
freer  operating  space. — I.  L.  Sweetnam,  Dental  Register. 

To  Prevent  Separating  Rubber  from  Injuring  the  Gums. 

— Protect  the  gum  tissue  in  the  interproximate  space  by 
building  a  bridge  of  gutta-percha  or  cement  from  the  gingi- 
val portion  of  the  cavity  across  to  the  next  tooth. — C.  N. 
Johnson^  Den.  Review. 

To  Get  Between  the  Teeth. — Whether  for  examination 
or  for  cleaning  purposes,  waxed  silk,  linen  thread,  or  rubber 
bands  may  be  made  to  pass  between  the  teeth  readily  by 
first  soaping  them. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 


CHAPTER  II 


TREATMENT    AND    FILLING   TEETH    OF 
YOUNG  CHILDREN 


Pulp  Devitalization  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — It  is  ex- 
tremely hazardous,  dangerous,  and  unjustifiable  to  use 
arsenic  for  destroying  pulp  of  decidous  teeth.  This  is 
doubtless  the  cause  of  the  non-eruption  of  many  permanent 
teeth. — A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  in  Difficult  Tooth.  Eruption. — In  the 

eruption  of  the  temporary  teeth,  and  of  the  third  molar,  ex- 
cept when  the  anatomical  conditions  indicate  surgical  inter- 
ference, painting  the  red  and  congested  gums  with  the 
caustic  pencil,  or  with  a  pellet  of  moistened  cotton  rubbed 
against  the  silver  nitrate  pencil,  is  of  great  value  through  its 
astringent  and  antiseptic  powers.  For  the  third  molars  the 
pellet  of  cotton  may  be  introduced  under  the  overlying  gum 
and  gently  passed  all  around  the  crown.  Two  applications 
are  usually  sufficient,  but  may  be  repeated  as  indicated. — 
H.  Prinz,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Proximal  Cavities  in  Anterior  Deciduous  Teeth. — Re- 
move all  caries,  which  is  mostly  of  the  brown,  leathery 
character  and  easily  removed.  Reconstruct  with  high-heat 
gutta-percha  after  having  chloro-perchaed  the  base  of  the 
cavity.  This  serves  a  double  purpose ;  it  cements  the  filling 
to  the  tooth-walls  and  insures  perfect  adaptation  of  the 
material  used  for  filling;  also  reduces  the  sensibility  of  the 
patient  to  the  temperature  of  the  gutta-percha. — Louis  C. 
LeRoy,  Dental  Cosmos. 

6i 


62  Practical  Dentistry. 

Proximal  Cavities  in  the  Deciduous  Molars. — When  the 
cavities  face  each  other  and  are  too  sensitive  to  permit  of 
obtaining  sufficient  anchorage  for  contouring,  to  prevent  the 
wedging  of  food  between  the  teeth  desperate  cases  may  be 
bridged  across  in  one  sohd  falHng  of  gutta-percha  preced- 
ing the  fining,  by  placing  a  metal  guard  across  the  interprox- 
imal space,  the  ends  resting  on  the  gingival  walls  of  the  op- 
posing" cavities.  The  guard  may  be  cut  from  thick  clasp 
metal  or  German  silver. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Items  of  Interest. 

Preservation  of  Deciduous  Molars. — When  proximal  cav- 
ities of  decay  extend  to  the  gum,  and  the  inflamed  gum  has 
encroached  upon  it,  strangulate  the  gum  by  first  cauterizing 
with  carbolic  acid  and  then  forcing  a  pledget  of  cotton  sat- 
urated with  chloro-percha  into  the  cavity.  The  chloroform 
will  evaporate,  leaving  a  filling  which  will  permit  mastica- 
tion for  a  few  days,  or  weeks  if  necessary,  when  it  can  be 
removed  and  the  cavity  treated  as  indicated. — G.  E.  Adams, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Treatment  of  Pulpless  Deciduous  Teeth. — Open  pulp 
chamber ;  allay  soreness  by  dressings  of  old  wood  creosote ; 
fill  pulp  chamber  half  full  of  cotton  moistened  and  rolled 
in  pulverized  nitrate  silver ;  cover  with  temporary  stopping 
for  ten  days.  Remove  the  dressing;  excavate  the  crown 
cavity;  syringe  carefully  with  Pasteurine;  bathe  with  creo- 
sote ;  fill  cavity  with  amalgam,  making  no  efifort  to  cleanse  or 
fill  the  pulp  canals. — L.  G.  Noel. 

Filling-  Cavities  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — When  the  timidity 
or  nervousness  of  the  little  patient — or  extreme  sensitive- 
ness of  the  tooth — prevents  thorough  preparation,  the  use 
of  a  solution  of  alcohol,  resin,  and  silver  nitrate  will  prove 
of  great  value.  Dry  the  cavity ;  flood  with  carbolic  acid  or 
oil  of  cloves,  place  the  above  solution  on  a  pellet  of  asbestos 
felt,  over  the  soft  decay,  and  fill  over  this  with  cement,  or, 
if  the  cavity  will  retain  it,  with  gutta-percha. — F.  J.  Woou- 
woRTH,  Cosmos. 


Treatment  and  Filling  Teeth  of  Young  Children.     63 

Treatment  of  the  Permanent  Teeth  in  Young  Children. — 
When  the  pulp  is  nearly  or  partially  exposed  carefully  ex- 
cavate all  non-sensitive  (or  literally  dead)  tissue,  and  bathe 
the  cavity  v.'ith  5  per  cent,  alcoholic  solution  of  hydro- 
napthol.  The  alcohol  penetrates  all  soft,  moist  tissue,  carry- 
ing with  it  the  healing  antiseptic  hydronapthol,  which  Is  left 
in  the  tissues  as  the  alcohol  is  drawn  off  by  evaporation. 
Dry  the  cavity,  and  fill  with  Stowell's  hydronapthol  cement, 
and  the  sensitive  dentin  will  be  recalcified,  and  the  most 
threatened  pulp  saved  alive,  the  value  of  which,  in  a  young 
subject,  cannot  be  too  highly  estimated. — S.  S.  Stowell, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Decay  in  Deciduous  Second  Molar. — Cavities  upon  the 
distal  wall  of  deciduous  second  molars  require  our  eternal 
vigilance,  as  the  erupting  first  molar  has  a  tendency  to  crowd 
into  the  carious  area,  reducing  the  space  for  the  future  bicus- 
pids. Give  these  cavities  a  retentive  form  and  insert  an 
amalgam  filling  having  an  exaggerated  and  rounded  con- 
tour. Only  as  a  last  resort  cut  away  the  decayed  surface, 
leaving  a  shoulder-like  projection  at  the  neck. — D.  H. 
ZiEGLER_,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Filling  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — Cavities  in  children's 
teeth  should  be  filled  as  soon  as  they  appear,  in  order  to 
prevent  pain,  to  preserve  a  proper  masticating  surface,  to 
secure  retention  of  the  temporary  teeth  until  the  time  for 
their  exfoliation,  so  as  to  bring  about  a  proper  development 
of  the  maxillary  bones,  so  that  the  permanent  teeth,  when 
they  appear,  will  have  sufficient  room  to  erupt  in  their 
proper  positions. — F.  L.  Goldsmith,  Dental  Record. 

Preserving  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — For  the  posterior 
teeth  use  copper  amalgam  almost  exclusively.  It  does  not 
disintegrate  in  the  mouths  of  children,  but  maintains  its  in- 
tegrity indefinitely.  It  prevents  extension  or  recurrence  of 
decay  absolutely,  being  antiseptic  and  non-shrinking.  It 
may  be  placed  in  close  proximity  to  the  pulp,  being  non- 
irritating. — J.  J.  Burke,  Dental  Cosmos. 


64  Practical  Dentistry. 

Filling  Materials  for  Deciduous  Teeth. — For  the  tem- 
porary molars  the  first  material  in  importance  and  value  is 
amalgam.  Cement  is  the  best  preserver  of  tooth-sub- 
stance so  long-  as  it  escapes  the  wear  of  mastication  and  the 
solvent  power  of  the  oral  fluids.  It  closes  the  tubuli  and 
prevents  exudation  of  fluids  about  the  filling,  which,  by 
decomposition,  lead  to  caries  about  other  materials. — ^A. 
H.  Thompson,,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Filling  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — Gutta-percha  not  only 
serves  the  purpose  of  saving  the  teeth,  but  it  also  aids  in 
the  expansion  of  the  jaws  for  the  reception  of  the  second 
set.  For  the  permanent  teeth,  if  the  teeth  are  too  sensitive 
or  the  little  patient  too  refractory  or  too  nervous  for  ex- 
tensive operations,  pink  gutta-percha  should  be  used  until 
conditions  make  gold  possible. — A.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Hypersensitive  Carious  Spots  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — Keep 
the  parts  to  be  operated  upon  as  free  from  moisture  as  pos- 
sible. Treat  with  a  strong  solution  of  silver  nitrate,  50 
per  cent.,  or  by  deliquescing  the  crystals  in  the  cavity, 
absorbing  all  excess  that  remains  after  a  half  minute  or  so. 
If  the  discoloration  is  very  disfiguring,  a  shell  of  very  thin 
platinum  may  be  adjusted  with  ease  and  rapidity,  and  is 
much  less  conspicuous. — Louis  C.  LeRoy,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Temporary  Stopping  for  Deciduous  Teeth. — Fletcher's 
carbolized  resin  is  one  of  the  best  preparations  "for  the  de- 
ciduous teeth.  It  acts  as  an  anodyne,  and  will  withstand 
mastication  for  several  days.  ]\Iixed  with  zinc  oxid  it  hard- 
ens under  moisture,  and  will  last  for  several  weeks. — D.  H. 
ZiEGLER,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Filling  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — For  the  anterior  decidu- 
ous teeth,  oxyphosphate  of  zinc  is  preeminently  the  best 
material,  as  it  can  be  inserted  with  a  minimum  amount  of 
excavating,  thereby  favoring  the  little  ones  all  that  is  pos- 
sible during  their  tenderest  years. — S.  S.  Stowell^  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Treatment  and  Filling  Teeth  of  Young  Children.     65 

Saving  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — Badly  decayed,  broken- 
down  baby-molars  can  often  be  crowned  to  great  advantage, 
the  deciduous  teeth  being  more  regular,  less  crowded,  and 
of  shape  to  receive  crowns  with  but  little  grinding.  In 
durability  this  is  vastly  superior  to  the  best  fillings  that  can 
be  made  in  these  teeth.  There  is  no  reason  why  this  method 
should  not  prove  a  blessing  to  the  little  ones. — J.  R.  Lowe, 
Western  Den.  Jour. 

Exposed,   Inflamed  Pulps  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — It   is 

often  impossible  to  treat  with  ordinary  methods  the  teeth 
of  young  children  in  which  the  pulp  is  exposed  and  inflamed. 
Gratifying  results  follow  calling  in  the  family  physician  to 
administer  a  general  anaesthetic  and  thoroughly  removing 
the  pulp  while  the  little  patient  is  unconscious. — A.  H. 
Peck,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Abscessed  Deciduous  Teeth. — Force  oil  of  cloves  through 
the  sinus,  then  flood  the  cavity  with  a  solution  of  gutta- 
percha in  eucalyptol,  and  force  slightly  warmed  temporary 
stopping  into  each  canal  until  the  eucalyptol  appears  at  the 
opening  of  the  fistula.  Fill  the  cavity,  and  they  will  rarely 
give  further  trouble. — C.  N.  Johnson. 

Amalgam  Fillings  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — The  pulp  of  de- 
ciduous teeth  being  very  large  compared  with  the  size  of 
the  tooth,  anchorage  for  amalgam  fillings  is  difficult  to 
secure.  This  difficulty  may  be  overcome  by  taking  advan- 
tage of  the  adhesiveness  of  cement.  Prepare  the  amalgam 
as  usual  and  mix  with  cement  in  the  mortar. — Dr.  Rosen- 
thal, Dental  Cosmos. 

Sterilizing  Partially  Disorganized  Dentin  in  Deciduous 
Teeth. — After  securing  immunity  from  invasion  of  moisture, 
sterilize  with  wood  creosote,  carbolic  acid  or  a  eugenol 
solution  of  iodoform — preferably  the  latter.  Apply  a  bit 
of  asbestos  paper  saturated  with  the  sterilizing  solution, 
and  over  this  an  oxysulphate  filling. — L.  L.  Dunbar,  Paci- 
Hc  Dent.  Gazette. 


66  Practical  Dentistry. 

Broken-down  Deciduous  Molars. — The  pulp  should  be 
conserved  when  possible.  If  exposed,  cap  it.  It  is  well  to 
counterirritate  the  gitm  over  the  tooth.  When  the  crown  is 
badly  broken  down  the  tooth  may  still  be  raised  for  masticat- 
ing purposes  by  crowning,  using  platinum,  which  can  be 
rolled  thinner  than  gold  and  is  easily  crimped  into  position. 
— G.  P.  Mendell,  Dental  Rez-iew. 

Filling  the  Temporary  Teeth:  Copper  Amalgam, — Cop- 
per amalgam,  if  not  abused  in  its  use,  makes  an  excellent  fill- 
ing for  temporary  teeth,  the  salts  of  copper  having  a  stim- 
ulating effect  on  tooth  structure  and  pulp.  It  is  especially 
valuable  for  fragile  teeth. — H.  L.  Belcher,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Amalgam  Fillings  in  the  Deciduous  Molars. — In  com- 
pound cavities,  in  cases  of  near  proximity  to  the  pulp,  or 
in  extra  resistive  dentin,  carbolize  the  cavity,  varnish,  fill 
half  full  with  cement,  and  follow  with  amalgam,  pressing 
firmly  to  displace  the  cement,  except  a  mere  lining. — Gar- 
KETT  Newkirk,  Dental  Review. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  for  Children's  Teeth. — The  tooth  hav- 
ing been  dried  as  much  as  possible  and  the  softened  decay 
removed,  Dubois,  of  Paris,  applies  nitrate  of  silver  in  a  spe- 
cial gutta-percha  prepared  as  follows :  Gutta-percha,  5  parts ; 
zinc  oxid,  20  parts;  silver  nitrate,  2  parts. — Hermann 
Prinz,  Dental  Era. 

Deciduous  Teeth  with  Dead  Pulps. — Remove  all  disor- 
ganized tissue ;  sterilize  cavity  and  root-canal  with  two  per 
cent,  pyrozone ;  treat  with  oil  of  cassia  or  other  good  an- 
tiseptic, and  allow  period  of  rest. .  Fill  canals  with  a  paste  of 
iodoform  and  carbolic  acid.  Fill  cavity  as  desired. — W.  J. 
Taylor,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Abscessed  Deciduous  Teeth. — Clean  out  the  cavity  by 
mechanical  means  and  pack  with  cotton  saturated  with  oil 
of  cloves;  then  make  pressure  by  means  of  unvulcanized 
rubber,  filling  the  cavity  until  the  oil  of  cloves  comes  out  of 
the  fistulous  opening.    Then  fill  the  cavity. — C.  N.  Johnson. 


Treatment  and  Filling  Teeth  of  Young  Children.     67 

Exposed  Pulp  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — It  is  the  easiest 
thing-  in  the  world  to  get  rid  of  an  exposed  pulp  in  a  child's 
tooth.  Don't  us  arsenic,  as  carbolic  acid  or  oxychlorid  of 
zinc  answers  the  purpose.  The  latter  agent  may  be  left 
in  until  absorption  takes  place. — J.  N.  Crouse^  Dental 
Review. 

Filling  Deciduous  Teeth. — Hard  gutta-percha  will  ren- 
der very  good  service  in  the  anterior  teeth  if  dipped  in  a 
solution  of  rosin  in  chloroform  just  before  insertion.  Ab- 
solute dryness  is  necessary. — C.  L.  Thomas,  Pacific  Dental 
Gazette. 

Filling  Material  for  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — Gutta- 
percha, into  which  has  been  incorporated  dry  powdered 
Portland  cement,  makes  a  hard  filling,  which  seals  the  cavity 
perfectly  and  stands  wear  well. — G.  J.  Siddell,  Dental  Reg- 
ister. 

Exposed  Pulp  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — Exposed  pulps  in 
the  teeth  of  children  can  often  be  saved  by  simply  covering 
with  a  mixture  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  oil  of  cloves. — Dr. 
Wheeler   International  Dental  Journal. 

Devitalized  Deciduous  Molars. — Clean  the  canals  as  well 
as  possible,  sterilize  with  carbolic  acid^  and  inject  full  of 
liquid  paraffin  (liquefied  in  a  hypodermic  syringe  under  hot 
water). — J.  W.  Cowan,  Dental  Cosmos, 

Filling  Materials  for  Children's  Teeth. — For  the  anterior 
teeth  we  regard  gutta-percha  as  a  sine  qua  non.  Even 
when  the  cavities  are  saucer-shaped,  by  wiping  them  out 
with  eucalyptus  oil  and  taking  a  piece  of  pink  gutta-percha 
the  size  of  the  cavity,  the  solvent  action  of  the  oil  will 
cause  it  to  adhere.  The  application  of  silver  nitrate  is 
often  sufficient,  without  any  filling  material.  The  drug 
nemtralizes  the  decay.  If  common  salt  is  rubbed  over  the 
nitrate  of  silver  it  forms  a  silver  chlorid  and  leaves  a 
polisiied,  though  blackened  surface. — Theo.  F.  Chupein, 
Dental  Cosmos. 


68  Practical  Dentistry. 

Permanent  Fillings  in  Young  Teeth. — While  the  normal 
development  of  dentin  has  not  been  completed,  the  entire 
external  portion  of  the  tooth  has  been  fully  formed.  Con- 
tinued development  produces  changes  in  amount,  not  in  char- 
acter. The  calcified  dentin  does  not  change  perceptibly 
after  it  is  once  formed.  At  a  certain  period  the  dentin  may 
be  only  one-half  as  thick  as  it  will  be  later  on,  but  that  which 
is  formed  is  perfectly  formed,  and  as  capable  of  holding  a 
gold  filling,  or  any  other  filling,  as  it  will  ever  be. — F.  B. 
NoYES,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Proximal  Cavities  in  Young  Front  Teeth. — Gutta-percha, 
if  of  good  quality  and  not  overheated,  will,  when  carefully 
introduced  and  well  protected  by  the  enamel  margins, 
sometimes  last  ten  years  in  proximal  cavities  in  the  front 
teeth,  and  as  it  has,  of  all  the  materials  yet  employed,  the 
least  power  of  conducting  heat  and  electric  currents,  it  is 
perhaps  the  best  agent  we  have  for  proximal  cavities  in 
the  incisors  and  cuspids  of  very  young  patients. — L.  G. 
Noel,  Dental  Digest. 

Filling  Materials  for  Children's  Teeth. — While  the 
cements  are  frequently  not  as  durable  as  we  might  wish, 
that  is  more  than  outweighed  by  the  saving  of  tooth  struc- 
ture, vital  energy,  and  temper  of  the  patient.  It  is  possible 
to  do  greater  good  with  less  suffering,  to  accomplish  more 
with  less  wear  and  tear  to  both  patient  and  operator,  with 
the  cements  than  with  any  other  material  in  a  wide  range 
of  cases. — Chas.  A.  Van  Duzee,  Dental  Summary. 

Permanent  Fillings  in  Young  Teeth. — The  pulps  in 
young  teeth  have  much  more  vitality  before  their  function 
is  completed  than  they  have  later,  and  consequently  will 
tolerate  metal  fillings  which  are  separated  from  them  by 
only  a  thin  layer  of  dentin  better  than  they  will  after  the 
normal  formation  of  dentin  is  completed,  the  new  formation 
rapidly  interposes  a  non-conductor  of  natural  origin. — F.  B. 
NoYES,  Dental  Cosmos. 


Treatment  and  Filling  Teeth  of  Young  Children.     69 

Filling  Children's  Teeth. — -For  children's  teeth  or  other 

wholly  or  partially  submarine  work,  the  following  is  recom- 
mended :  No.  10  gold  and  No.  10  tin,  equal  parts,  folded 
and  cut  in  strips.  No  amalgam  will  work  easier,  and  no 
filling,  of  any  material  whatsoever,  will  approach  it  as  a 
tooth  saver  under  like  conditions. — J.  R.  Callahan^  Dental 
Review. 

Fillings  in  Children's  Teeth. — In  children's  teeth  never 
place  amalgam  in  proximal  cavities  in  bicuspids,  but  use 
instead  oxyphosphate  or  gutta-percha,  according  to  condi- 
tions. This  prevents  any  possible  staining  of  the  tooth- 
structure,  and  will  save  the  tooth,  so  that  in  the  future  you 
will  be  able  to  place  a  suitable  and  enduring  permanent 
filling. — H.  S.  SuTPHEN,  Items  of  Interest. 

Pink  Gutta-percha  for  Children's  Teeth. — Pink  gutta- 
percha is  considered  the  most  reliable  of  all  materials  for 
temporary  fillings ;  first,  because  it  excludes  caries,  and, 
second,  because  of  its  temporary  character,  which  causes 
the  early  return  of  the  patient  for  the  final  operation  with 
gold. — R.  Ottolengui. 

Operating  for  Children.— Every  kind  word  and  act, 
every  lost  moment,  and  every  self-sacrifice,  if  judiciously  ex- 
pended, in  our  dealings  with  our  child  patients  will  surely  re- 
turn to  us  like  bread  cast  upon  the  waters,  and  will  insure 
everything  that  is  desirable  in  the  later  years  of  practice. — 
Chas.  a.  Van  Duzee,  Dental  Surgery. 

Proximal  Cavities  in  Young  Teeth. — In -proximal  cavi- 
ties infringing  upon  the  gums,  two  cavities  in  the  same  in- 
terproximal space.  Fill  with  gutta-percha  and  span  across 
with  a  piece  of  metal  to  prevent  the  gutta-percha  from 
infringing  on  the  gums. — Dr.  Wenker,  Dental  Summary. 

Gold  Fillings  in  Children's  Teeth. — If  I  can  secure  the 
proper  conditions  in  the  mouth,  and  if  I  can  so  control  the 
patient  that  I  can  secure  a  perfect  mechanical  operation  with 
gold  without  jeopardizing  the  nervous  condition  of  the 
child,  or  creating  a  dread  of  dental  operations,  I  will  put  in 
gold  every  time. — G.  V.  Black,  Dental  Review. 


70  Practical  Dentistry. 

Deep  Cavities  in  the  Permanent  Teeth  of  Young  Chil- 
dren.— Excavate  conservatively,  removing"  all  the  non-sen- 
sitive tissue,  with  the  assurance  that  if  properly  aided  nature 
will  recalcify  all  softened  dentin  when  sensitive  living  fibre 
remains.  As  these  fibres  were  the  original  tooth-forming 
organs,  so  they  are  still  able  to  rebuild  the  broken-down 
dentin  under  favorable  conditions. — S.  S.  Stowell,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Sensitive  Cavities  in  Children's  Teeth. — Some  of  the 
softened  dentin  is  first  excavated  and  then  a  mixture  of 
equal  proportions  of  Fletcher's  dentin  and  nitrate  of  silver  is 
placed  in  the  cavity,  which  has  been  previously  dried.  At 
the  next  visit  it  is  quite  easy  to  excavate  the  cavity. — H.  W. 
N.,  Dental  Record. 

The  "Arthur  Method." — When  caries  appears  on  the 
proximal  surface  of  the  six  anterior  teeth  soon  after  their 
eruption,  the  practice  of  cutting  away  the  proximo-lingual 
surface  is  very  beneficial.  I  do  not  call  to  mind  a  single 
case  where  decay  has  recurred  after  this  treatment,  even 
in  the  most  extreme  cases. — J.  N.  Crouse. 

Care  of  Children's  Teeth. — For  the  health  of  the  indi- 
vidual, for  the  comfort  of  the  family,  for  the  welfare  of  the 
State,  treat  the  children's  teeth  early  and  imbue  them  with 
the  belief  that  clean  teeth  do  not  decay. — Geo.  Cunning- 
HAM_,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Laneing  the  Gums. — To  be  of  service  to  the  erupting 
tooth  or  teeth  the  incision  should  be  deep  and  made  through 
that  part  of  the  tissue  where  the  greatest  tension  is  observed. 
The  point  of  the  bistoury  should  be  reintroduced  and  semi- 
circular sweeps  made  to  free  the  presenting  part  of  the 
tooth  from  the  integument. — Wm.  J.  Manning,  Dental 
Digest. 

Filling  Large  Cavities  in  Undeveloped  Teeth. — Paraf- 
fin is  well  tolerated  by  the  soft  tissues.  Dr.  Traumer,  of  my 
city,  has  used  paraffin  in  filling  large  cavities  in  teeth  with 
open  foramen,  and  he  has  had  good  success. — Hans 
PiEHLER,  International  Dental  Journal. 


CHAPTER  III 


PORCELAIN  INLAYS— GOLD  INLAYS 


Practical  Points  in  Inlay  Work. — For  low-fusing  body 
proceed  as  follows :  Apply  the  dam  to  give  a  clear  work- 
ing space ;  use  rolled  gold  No.  30  unannealed  for  the  matrix. 
In  getting  the  impression  use  wet  cotton  pellets  for  packing 
instead  of  chamois  discs,  as  the  cotton  will,  when  wet,  re- 
main where  it  is  placed,  thus  overcoming  the  tendency  to 
slip  when  the  matrix  is  being  burnished  to  the  cavity  edge. 
Remove  the  matrix  by  means  of  the  chip  blower.  After 
the  inlay  is  baked,  cover  the  outer  surface  with  a  thick  coat- 
ing of  paraffin,  letting  it  run  down  on  the  gold  as  well. 
When  cold  peel  the  gold  from  the  paraffin  and  inlay  with 
the  pliers  and  cover  the  exposed  surface  of  the  inlay  with 
hydrofluoric  acid.  Let  stand  until  the  acid  has  exhausted  its 
strength.  Hold  the  paraffin  in  cold  water  and  chip  it  from 
the  inlay,  leaving  it  ready  for  inspection. — R.  B.  Gentle^ 
Dental  Brief. 

Porcelain  Inlays — The  Matrix. — To  obtain  a  model  of 
tooth  and  cavity  from  which  to  make  the  matrix  either  wet 
the  cavity  or  oil  it,  and  then  take  an  impression  with  red 
impression  material.  Take  it  out  and  oil  it  thoroughly,  and 
then  work  around  the  little  protuberance  the  oxyphosphate 
of  zinc  in  proper  consistence,  letting  it  harden,  and  you 
have  an  exact  duplicate  of  the  natural  tooth  in  oxyphos- 
phate. Into  the  little  cavity,  which  is  quite  clearly  defined, 
you  can  burnish  your  matrix  of  platinum,  and  do  your 
baking  without  trying  it  in  the  mouth  at  all. — S.  G.  Perry, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

71 


72  Practical  Dentistry. 

Natural  Tooth  Enamel  for  Inlays. — Advantages:  (i) 
the  natural  color  assumed  in  from  three  days  to  two  weeks 
after  the  operation;  (2)  the  natural  contour  of  the  tooth 
restored;  (3)  strength,  non-friability;  (4)  tlie  artistic  value 
when  perfectly  done.  Cut  the  inlay  from  a  tooth  of  same 
size  and  shape  as  the  one  to  be  operated  on.  Give  it  a  bath 
of  iodin  to  cleanse  it ;  place  in  a  solution  of  bichlorid  of  mer- 
cury, 1-2000,  for  twelve  hours.  Grind  to  proximately  the. 
size  required.  Mount  with  shellac  to  an  instrument  so  as  to 
give  access  to  cavity.  Smear  the  cavity  with  rouge  and 
oil,  press  the  inlay  in,  and  grind  to  fit.  Wash  out  cavity 
with  soap  and  warm  water  to  remove  oil.  Dry  thoroughly, 
and  set  inlay  with  best  cement. — A.  H.  Wallace,  Pacific 
Stoin.  Ga::ctte. 

Treatment  of  Plaster  Cast,  for  Porcelain  Inlay  Work. — 
Take  impression  in  modeling  compound  and  make  a  small 
cast.  Dry  the  cast  and  immerse  in  melted  stearin,  allow- 
ing to  remain  about  a  minute  and  a  half.  As  soon  as  with- 
drawn blow  vigorously  upon  that  part  representing  the 
cavity,  to  prevent  the  stearin  from  settling  in  the  cavity. 
It  will  cool  in  a  few  minutes  and  will  be  of  sufficient  hard- 
ness to  permit  burnishing  a  platinum  matrix  without 
breaking  the  margins  of  the  cavity. — W.  D.  Tracy,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Indications  for  Inlay  Work. — The  undue  tax  on  the 
patient  in  the  insertion  of  large  gold  fillings,  particularly 
in  molars  and  bicuspids,  is  an  indication  for  inlay  work. 
It  is  here  that  they  may  be  made  to  answer  the  most  use- 
ful service,  saving  the  patient  from  the  tedium  of  pro- 
tracted filling  operations.  This  method  closes  the  gap 
between  filling  and  crowning,  the  best  interests  of  the 
patient  being  secured  by  deferring  crown-work  as  long  as 
possible. — C.  N.  Johnson. 

Matrix  for  Inlay  Work. — Prepare  the  cavity  so  that 
an  impression  will  readily  draw.  Take  an  impression  in 
modeling  compound  and  outline  the  matrix  over  it,  having 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  73 

ample  margins.  With  cotton  pellets  and  burnishers  thor- 
oughly form  the  matrix  to  cavity;  then  remove  the  cotton 
and  having  slightly  oiled  the  modeling  compound  impres- 
sion force  it  into  the  cavity  over  the  matrix  and  firmly  swage 
it  with  the  fingers  or  suitable  appliances.  Remove  the  im- 
pression and  matrix  together  and  invert  in  three  parts 
powdered  inlay  to  one  of  plaster,  mixed  with  water. — F.  S. 
Morrison,  Dental  Summary. 

The  Gold  Inlay. — The  inlay  offers  greater  immunity 
to  recurrent  caries  by  virtue  of  its  sealed,  cemented  joint 
between  filling  and  cavity  wall.  In  the  plugger-made  filling, 
no  matter  how  skilled  and  conscientious  the  operator,  how 
perfectly  the  cavity  formed,  how  far  extension  for  preven- 
tion is  carried,  how  well  the  gold  is  condensed  and  adapted, 
what  time  and  labor  are  spent,  there  is  always  a  filling 
without  adhesion,  an  open  joint  between  gold  and  tooth 
structure,  a  space  between  cavity  wall  and  filling,  which  is 
a  constant  menace. — I.  W.  Wassall,  Items  of  Interest. 

Gold  Filling  versus  Porcelain  Inlay. — With  restorations 
done  in  porcelain  we  have  something  that  adheres  to  the 
walls  of  the  cavity  and  braces  up  where  gold  does  not  lend 
much  of  its  strength.  Frail  corners  will  not  break  away 
from  cement,  where  they  would  from  gold  crowded  up 
against  them,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  conserve  more  tooth- 
structure  in  using  inlay,  for  there  is  union  of  inlay,  cement 
and  tooth. — R.  B.  Tuller,  American  Dental  loitrnal. 

Repairing  Chipped  Inlays. — In  molars  or  bicuspids, 
where  a  slight  line  of  metal  will  not  be  objectionable,  a 
chipped  margin  is  easily  repaired  as  follows :  Cut  out  the 
edge  with  a  fine  fissure  bur;  wash  with  alcohol  and  dry; 
place  a  small  quantity  of  oxyphosphate  of  zinc  in  the  fissure 
and  squeeze  it  out  with  pieces  of  sponge  gold.  Let  the 
cement  harden,  cleanse  the  margins,  condense  the  sponge 
gold,  and  finish  in  the  usual  way.  Amalgam  instead  of 
sponge  gold  may  be  used  in  the  same  way. — Jos.  Head, 
Dental  Summary. 
6 


74  Practical  Dentistry. 

Inlays:  Fitting  Matrix  to  Cast. — My  method  is  to  take 
an  impression  in  modeling  compound,  filling  in  that  part 
where  the  inlay  is  to  be  made  with  enough  oxyphosphate  to 
fill  a  little  more  than  the  cavity  impression.  Then  pour 
plaster  in  the  rest  of  the  impression  and  the  result  is  a 
plaster  cast  with  that  of  the  tooth  in  much  harder  substance. 
The  cast  of  the  tooth  can  be  removed  from  the  main  model, 
which  is  a  great  convenience,  especially  in  proximal  cavities. 
— C.  W.  F.  HoLBROOK,  Items  of  Interest. 

Backing  Porcelain-faced  Crowns. — Having  ground  the 
tooth  at  the  back  to  the  desired  shape,  dust  it  with  French 
chalk  and  press  it  firmly  with  Mellotte's  moldine.  Draw 
away  the  tooth  and  insert  in  the  pin  holes  pieces  of  steel, 
iron  or  copper  wire  about  the  same  gauge  as  the  platinum 
tooth  pins ;  pour  the  fusible  metal,  draw  away  the  die ; 
dust  with  French  chalk  and  take  counter  die.  You  can 
then  strike  up  the  backing  without  fear  of  breaking  the 
tooth.— W.  B.  R.,  Elliott's  Quarterly. 

Porcelain  Inlays. — Prepare  cavity  as  for  gold,  fill  un- 
dercuts with  wax  to  facilitate  removal  of  matrix.  Form 
matrix  of  60  or  80  gold  foil,  first  pressed  into  the  cavity 
with  firm  wad  of  cotton  and  then  burnished  in.  I  use 
Meyer's  prepared  glass  powder,  which  flows  to  the  surface 
of  the  gold  as  though  it  were  solder,  and  makes  a  hard  fill- 
ing which  has  a  surface  like  that  of  an  English  tooth. — 
A.  V.  Elliot,  Florence,  Italy. 

Bubbles  in  Porcelain. — The  reason  why  we  have  so 
many  bubbles  in  porcelain  bridge-work  is  on  account  of 
using  too  large  quantities  of  porcelain  at  one  time  over  a 
rigid  framework.  The  first  bake  should  never  cover  the 
pins,  or  even  touch  them ;  if  it  does,  on  shrinking  it  leaves  an 
air  space  beneath,  which  later  means  a  bubble.  Apply  and 
bake  several  times,  until  the  framework  is  covered,  bring- 
ing to  a  low  glaze  each  time,  and  you  will  have  porcelain 
free  from  bubbles. — A.  W.  Starbuck,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  75 

Adaptation  of  Inlay-matrix  in  Very  Deep  Cavities. — The 

stability  of  an  inlay  is  much  enhanced  by  the  depth  to 
which  it  may  be  introduced  into  the  cavity.  To  avoid  tear- 
ing the  foil,  Dr.  Emil  Schreier  suggests  the  use  of  what  is 
known  as  goldbeater's  skin.  This  is  to  be  placed  on  the 
underside  of  the  foil,  and  therefore  next  to  the  cavity 
walls.  With  ordinary  care  the  gold  can  thus  be  forced 
to  a  very  considerable  depth  without  tearing.  The  gold- 
beater's skin  acts  as  a  cradle  to  support  the  matrix  while  it 
is  being  carried  to  place. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Inlays:  the  Gold  Matrix. — It  has  been  suggested  that 
the  matrix  be  formed  of  No.  36  gold  plate,  and  that  the  por- 
tion which  comes  in  contact  with  the  margins,  and  for  a 
considerable  distance  below,  be  left  upon  the  inlay.  After 
the  cement  is  thoroughly  hardened  the  surplus  gold  that 
overhangs  the  margins  is  to  be  cut  off  and  the  remaining 
gold  burnished  to  cover  up  the  line  of  cement.  The  ad- 
vantages are  that  the  gold  is  so  heavy  that  it  will  not  pull 
in  fusing  the  porcelain,  and  it  makes  a  more  perfect  union 
between  the  inlay  and  the  tooth. — F.  T,  Van  Woert,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Vulcanite  Inlays. — For  occlusal  surfaces  inlays  of  gray 
or  white  vulcanizable  rubber  are  readily  made  at  but  little 
cost,  the  appearance  of  the  finished  work  being  excellent. 
The  cavity  is  prepared  without  undercuts,  swabbed  with 
vaselin,  and  an  impression '' taken  with  moldable  wax. 
White  or  gray  rubber  is  packed  into  the  plaster  mold  and 
the  case  vulcanized.  Finish  up  well,  poli-sh  and  cement  to 
place.  Gold  or  platinum  foil  may  be  used  as  a  matrix, 
thus  insuring  a  perfect  fit. — Translated  for  Dental  Digest, 

by   B.    J.    CiGRAND. 

Bruhn's  Impression  Dies  for  Inlay  Work. — Select  from 
the  outfit  a  die  of  approximate  size  and  shape  and  form  the 
matrix  by  pressing  the  die  upon  the  foil  on  a  rubber  pad ; 
then  burnish  into  the  cavity  in  the  usual  way.     The  possi- 


yd  Practical  Dentistry. 

bility  of  tearing  the  matrix  is  reduced  to  a  minimum  while 
the  foil,  being  partially  swaged  by  the  stamp,  stays  in  posi- 
tion better  on  first  insertion,  and  the  annoyance  of  finding 
the  impression  too  short  at  the  cervical  edge  is  entirely  done 
away  with. — Dental  Record. 

Inlays:  Fusing  the  Porcelain. — Have  a  little  square 
platinum  pan  which  can  be  handled  from  any  of  its  four 
corners,  the  bottom  of  which  is  perforated.  By  placing 
this  pan  on  a  piece  of  lead  and  driving  a  broken  excavator 
through  it  with  a  small  hammer,  forming  a  burr  or  pro- 
jection around  each  hole,  so  that  when  the  asbestos  paste 
is  put  in  it,  and  the  matrix  adjusted  to  position,  it  can  be 
placed  upon  the  hottest  furnace  without  danger  of  blowing 
out  the  investment  by  the  formation  of  steam. — F.  T.  Van 
WoERT,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Treatment  of  Minute  Cracks  in  Porcelain  Facings. — 
Minute  cracks,  sufficient  to  ruin  the  artistic  effect,  yet  not 
enough  to  materially  weaken  the  crown,  may  be  effaced  by 
drying  the  crown  thoroughly  with  alcohol;  then  dropping 
it  in  liquid  albolene,  allowing  it  to  remain  about  five  min- 
utes. Remove,  wash  with  soap  and  water,  dry  with  alcohol, 
and  the  crack  will  not  be  perceptible.  Under  the  moist 
conditions  of  the  mouth  the  albolene  which  has  penetrated 
the  crevice  will  never  be  evaporated. — ^J.  E.  Hyman,  Den- 
tal Digest. 

Gold  Inlays :  the  Matrix. — For  the  matrix  pure  gold,  at 
least  No.  36,  Brown  and  Sharpe's  gauge,  is  preferred.  Cut  a 
piece  large  enough  to  line  the  cavity  with  plenty  to  extend 
beyond  the  margins  in  all  directions ;  place  this  over  the 
cavity,  and  Vv'ith  a  good-sized  piece  of  spunk  push  the  gold 
to  the  bottom  and  hold  it  in  place  by  pressing  on  the  spunk 
with  a  broad-faced  instrument,  while  with  a  burnisher  the 
gold  is  worked  against  the  margins  and  any  wrinkles 
worked  out.  Remove,  anneal,  return  to  cavity,  and  burnish 
until  perfectly  fitted  to  cavity. — E.  H.  Allen^  Dental  Digest. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  yy 

Taking  Impression  of  Cavity  for  Inlay  Work. — If  the 
edges  of  the  cavity  be  dusted  with  soapstone,  and  soap- 
stone  be  mixed  in  the  cement,  when  the  material  is  placed 
in  the  cavity  it  will  become  exceedingly  hard,  and,  being 
so  loaded  with  soapstone,  it  comes  out  readily,  so  that  it 
forms  a  hard,  dense  impression,  the  exact  size,  shape,  and 
form  of  the  cavity,  which  can  be  invested,  and  on  which 
platinum  can  be  swaged. — George  H.  Wilson,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

The  Porcelain  Jacket-crown. — For  a  porcelain  jacket- 
crown  the  tooth  should  be  trimmed  to  a  taper,  with  a  well- 
defined  shoulder  at  the  gingivo-labial  cervix  only,  one-forti- 
eth of  an  inch  beyond  the  gum's  free  margin.  The  trim- 
ming can  be  made  painless  by  the  use  of  dentinal-tubuli 
pressure  anaesthesia.  Before  placing  the  crown  cauterize 
the  stump  with  silver  nitrate.  The  crown  should  be  set  with 
gutta-percha,  thus  protecting  and  preserving  the  pulp. — J. 
J.  Sarrazui,  The  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Swaged  Matrix  for  Porcelain  Inlay. — With  special  swag- 
ing device  the  matrix  of  35-  or  36-gauge  pure  gold  is 
swaged  upon  a  cavity  impression  taken  with  archite.  After 
the  first  swaging  the  gold  is  separated  from  the  impression, 
annealed  thoroughly,  and  reswaged  with  the  addition  of  suf- 
ficient non-fibre  gold  to  fill  all  torn  places  and  make  a  heavy 
matrix  which  will  not  warp.  Pack  with  low-fusing  body 
and  bake  in  the  flame  of  a  Bunsen  burner. — Alexander 
Jameson,  Dental  Summary. 

Alcohol  in  Porcelain  Work. — The  best  liquid  to  use  for 
moistening  porcelain  bodies  is  alcohol.  From  its  rapid 
evaporation  it  does  not  form  steam  as  is  the  case  with 
water.  It  can  be  burned  out  of  the  body  by  holding  it  close 
to  a  flame,  without  dislodging  the  porcelain  body.  Denser 
pieces  are  secured,  and  more  correct  shade,  because  of  fewer 
bubbles.  Where  there  are  bubbles  in  the  porcelain  the  shade 
is  thrown  off  more  or  less. — I.  L.  Helmer,  Items  of  Interest. 


78  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Platinum  Matrix. — Commercial  platinum  is  sup- 
posed to  be  I-2000  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  Anneal,  oil  and 
fold  this  together  and  with  a  good  set  of  rolls  reduce  it  to 
about  one-half  its  thickness.  Platinum  so  prepared  is  glazed 
on  the  surface  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  steel  roller, 
while  the  other  side  has  a  frosty  or  velvety  surface.  Put 
the  frosted  surface  in  contact  with  the  tooth,  the  glazed  side 
in  contact  with  the  porcelain,  as  it  strips  off  more  easily. — 
Western  Dental  Joiirnal. 

The  Inlay  Matrix. — A  heavy  matrix  should  not  be 
burnished  to  the  cavity,  for  as  the  outside  of  the  matrix 
represents  the  inside  of  the  cavity  the  inlay  will  in  the  thick- 
ness of  the  matrix  be  too  small  for  the  cavity.  In  such  cases 
the  matrix  should  be  swaged  to  a  sharp  and  perfect  impres- 
sion of  the  cavity,  and  the  inside  of  the  matrix  will  then 
represent  the  inside  of  the  cavity,  and  the  inlay  with  matrix 
pulled  off  will  fit  the  cavity  perfectly. — R.  N.  LeCron, 
Dental  Record. 

The  Gold  Inlay. — For  the  repair  of  bicuspids  and  mo- 
lars in  which  there  has  been  serious  loss  of  tissue,  but  in 
which  the  dernier  ressort  of  crowning  is  not  yet  called  for, 
the  gold  inlay  has  been  extremely  satisfactory,  serving  as 
an  intermediary  operation  between  the  small,  easily  made 
gold  filling  and  the  badly  broken  crown  demanding  ex- 
cision. It  avoids  the  effects  of  the  band  beneath  the  gin- 
givae, and  can  be  constructed  and  cemented  to  place  with- 
out the  application  of  the  dam,  so  commending  it  especially 
for  cavities  extending  far  beneath  the  gum  line. — W,  V.- 
B.  Ames. 

A  Gold  Inlay. — After  placing  matrix  of  gold  roughly, 
pack  it  full  of  moss-fibre  gold,  and,  removing  the  mass, 
flow  solder  over  the  gold.  Then  replace-the  inlay,  readapt 
to  the  margins  with  burnishers,  and  flow  on  solder  to  proper 
contour.  With  due  care  investment  is  unnecessary. — W.  O. 
FiLLMAN,  Northzvestern  Dental  Journal. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  79 

The  Use  of  Chamois  Leather  in  Taking  Impressions  for 
Inlays. — The  method  of  using  is  to  fill  the  impression  in 
the  ordinary  way  with  amadon;  then  remove  the  amadon 
and  fill  with  small  pieces  of  chamois,  using  pressure  in  the 
same  way  as  with  the  amadon.  It  seems  to  produce  a 
sharper  outline  and  permits  of  the  foil  being  carried  over 
the  edges  with  less  danger  of  tearing. — Thompson  Madin, 
Journal  British  Dental  Association. 

Gold  Inlays:  The  Matrix. — Matrices  should  always  be 
thickened  with  22-karat  solder,  as  thickening  stiffens  the 
matrix  and  prevents  change  of  form  during  removal  from 
the  mouth.  Care  should  be  taken  to  prevent  the  solder 
from  running  over  the  margins.  Cavity  margins  should 
be  carefully  polished  before  attempting  to  make  a  matrix, 
as  the  gold  is  liable  to  be  torn  if  any  sharp  corners  are 
left. — Thos.  p.  Hinman,  Items  of  Interest. 

A  Point  in  Inlay  Work. — To  overcome  the  tendency 
of  Jenkins  bodies  to  globulate  in  fusing  in  the  electric 
furnace,  make  an  extra  muffie  of  thirty-gauge  platinum 
plate,  bent  into  the  form  of  an  inverted  letter  U  or  half 
circle,  which  nicely  covers  the  inlay  and  most  of  the  tray, 
thus  causing  it  tO'  heat  through  more  evenly.  Fuse  to 
perfect  glaze  the  last  time  only. — W.  H.  Streeter,  Boston, 
Mass. 

Gum  Camphor  in  Matrices. — Results  are  not  always  sat- 
isfactory in  the  use  of  gum  camphor  to  facilitate  the 
removal  of  inlay  matrices  without  bending.  This  is  fre- 
quently due  to  the  fact  that  American  refined  gum  camphor 
is  used  instead  of  the  Japanese  refined,  which  is  far  less, 
friable  and  works  particularly  well  when  slightly  warmed 
and  packed  into  place  with  warmed  instruments. — L.  A. 
Jenkins,  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Matrix  in  Porcelain  Inlay  Work. — Gum  camphor 
combined  with  paraffin  seems  to  make  the  best  material  for 
packing  the  matrix  before  removing  it  from  the  cavity.  Use 
the  paraffin  first,  following  it  with  pieces  of  gum  camphor 


8o  Practical  Dentistry. 

crowded  in  upon  it.  The  paraffin  is  more  adhesive,  while 
the  camphor  gives  stability.  Both  can  be  burned  away  with- 
out leaving  any  perceptible  residuum. — E.  Howard  Bab- 
cocK_,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Porcelain  Inlay  vs.  Gold  Filling. — An  average  porcelain 
inlay,  set  with  good  cement,  under  favorable  conditions,  is 
far  superior  to  any  average  gold  filling,  for  the  reason  that 
an  average  filling  is  not  a  good  filling.  An  average  filling 
generally  stays  in  a  while  and  may  or  may  not  check  decay, 
and  sooner  or  later  has  to  be  done  over.  The  average  inlay 
stays  in  well  and  preserves  the  tooth  and  does  not  offend 
the  aesthetic  eye. — R.  B.  Tuller,  American  Dental  Journal. 

Porcelain  Inlays :  Adhesion. — It  has  been  demonstrated 
time  and  again  that  cement  will  not  adhere  to  a  glazed  sur- 
face as  well  as  to  an  etched  surface.  In  all  cases  where  an 
inlay  has  dropped  out  of  a  cavity  you  will  find  that  the 
cement  adhered  to  the  surface  of  the  tooth,  and  not  to  the 
inlay  itself.  Do  not  attempt  to  groove  inlays  on  account  of 
the  danger  of  serious  damage,  and  it  is  not  necessary. — 
J.  E.  Nyhan,  Dental  Summary. 

Three  Mistakes  in  Taking  Cavity  Impressions. — First, 
having  the  piece  of  foil  so  large  as  to  overlap  the  cavity; 
second,  endeavoring  to  make  exact  impression  of  bottom  of 
cavity,  which  is  undersirable  because  space  is  needed  for 
cement;  third,  the  use  of  ball  burnishers  to  burnish  foil 
against  walls  of  cavity;  use  chamois  skin  and  sponge  to 
press  the  foil  to  place. — Alfr.  Kasbitz,  International  Den- 
tal Journal. 

Setting  Inlays;  Washing  out  of  Cement. — Extended  ob- 
servation seems  to  indicate  that  we  have  little  to  fear  from 
this,  particularly  with  gold  inlays  and  a  high-grade  quality 
of  cement.  It  would  seem  impossible  to  doubt  that  when 
due  care  has  been  exercised  in  the  adaptation  of  the  inlay, 
and  a  good  grade  of  cement  used,  little  fear  need  be  had 
as  to  any  serious  washing  out  of  the  cement. — C.  N.  John- 
son. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  8i 

The  Matrix  for  Porcelain  Inlay. — Platinum  is  prefer- 
able to  gold  for  making  the  matrix.  Burnishing  to  the 
cavity  walls  makes  it  stiff  and  springy  so  that  it  can  be  re- 
moved without  distortion.  It  is  tougher  than  gold,  and 
quite  as  ductile,  and  is  capable  of  standing  any  temperature 
desired,  a  vital  point,  as  high  fusing  bodies  are  stronger 
and  more  easily  contoured  than  those  which  melt  at  2,000 
degrees  or  under.  Their  shades  also  vary  less  in  the  bur- 
nishing.— Joseph  Head,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Dislodging  Matrix  from  Cavity. — Fill  the  matrix  with 
yellow  beeswax,  pressing  it  in  with  the  ball  of  the  finger; 
when  the  finger  is  removed  the  matrix  will  be  found  cling- 
ing tightly  to  the  wax  and  the  wax  to  the  finger.  Remove 
the  wax  from  the  matrix  by  dipping  it  in  boiling  water  or 
holding  it  for  a  minute  in  the  flame.  Great  care  must  be 
taken  to  have  the  matrix  left  perfectly  clean,  as  any  wax 
remaining  will  discolor  the  porcelain. — T.  P.  Hinman,  Den- 
tal Headlight. 

Contour  Porcelain  Inlays. — Contour  in  porcelain  inlays 
is  made  by  fusing  sufficient  body  in  the  deeper  portion 
of  the  matrix  to  give  a  flat  surface.  A  core  of  high-fus- 
ing porcelain  of  suitable  size  and  color  is  set  in  place  and 
tacked  with  a  little  fluid  body.  When  fused,  the  core  does 
not  move,  and  the  filling  is  rapidly  completed  by  covering 
core  with  porcelain  of  the  color  indicated.  Any  desired 
contours  can  be  obtained  with  ease  and  certainty. — W. 
Francis  Mellerish,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Box-inlays. —  (i)  Prepare  cavity  with  clean-cut  mar- 
gins and  fill  all  undercuts,  so  that  impression  can  be  easily 
withdrawn.  (2)  Burnish  under  shell  into  the  cavity,  and 
fill  or  contour  with  wax,  in  the  mouth.  Strike  up  the  outer 
shell ;  place  the  two  together  with  bits  of  solder  around  the 
margins.  Heat  in  Bunsen  flame  till  solder  flows ;  trim  edges 
and  polish.  (3)  File  through  the  under  shell  and  fill  with 
cement,  with  excess  or  under  surface,  and  press  to  place. — 
Geo.  S.  AllaNj  International  Dental  Journal. 


82  Practical  Dentistry. 

Gold  Inlay. — In  the  method  demonstrated  by  W.  Fran- 
cis Mellersh  before  the  British  Dental  Association,  the 
cavity  was  prepared  without  undercuts  and  the  walls  made 
parallel ;  an  impression  was  taken  and  a  cast  made ;  the  re- 
sulting model  was  lined  with  thin  platinum  and  the  cavity 
filled  with  pure  gold  fused  under  the  blow  pipe.  The  plug 
was  then  trimmed,  undercut  and  cemented  to  place,  the 
edges  being  sealed  with  sponge  gold  welded  on  with  hand- 
pressure  instruments. — Dental  Record. 

Supporting   Matrices,   Etc.,   While   in  the   Furnace. — 

Broken  clay-pipe  bowls  make  good  trays  for  support  of 
matrices  and  their  contents,  facings  that  are  being  backed 
with  porcelain,  whole  crowns,  etc.,  during  the  baking  proc- 
ess. For  very  small  inlays,  fragments  of  the  stem  are 
ideal.  For  crowns  with  pin,  the  hole  through  the  stem 
supplies  the  means  of  keeping  the  work  upright. — OMce 
and  Laboratory. 

A  Place  for  the  Porcelain  Inlay. — Use  the  inlay  in  the 
first  half  or  two-thirds  of  a  proximal  cavity,  never  bringing 
it  to  the  grinding  surface,  anchoring  it  with  cement  and  then 
filling  the  remainder  of  the  cavity  with  gold,  burnishing  it 
over  the  inlay,  leaving  the  foil  filling  as  the  masticating  sur- 
face of  the  tooth.  These  operations  are  admirable,  espe- 
cially when  the  walls  are  frail,  as  the  cement  strengthens 
the  wall,  while  burnishing  up  the  wall  from  without  holds 
the  inlay  admirably;  the  foil  filling  for  the  surface  being 
less  easily  displaced  than  the  inlay,  is  very  satisfactory. — 
C.  S.  Butler,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Especial  Value  of  the  Inlay. — The  most  valuable  aid 
that  the  inlay  has  given  to  dentistry  has  been  its  tending 
to  do  away  with  much  of  the  radical  crowning  of  teeth, 
enabling  us  to  save  more  of  the  vital  part  of  the  tooth, 
namely,  the  root  itself,  which  is  the  mainstay  of  the  tooth, 
whether  it  contains  a  pulp  or  not. — M.  L,  Rhein,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  83 

Inlay  Work. — Make  the  walls  of  the  inlay  slightly 
tapering,  and  remove  with  sandpaper  disk  the  gloss  from  the 
parts  of  the  inlay  that  fit  into  the  cavity.  You  will  then  have, 
when  cemented,  an  inlay  flush  with  the  surface  of  the  tooth 
without  grinding  it,  the  cement  occupying  the  space  which 
was  filled  with  that  which  you  removed  with  the  sandpaper 
disk. — E.  M.  Fernandez,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Setting  Inlays. — When  the  cavity  extends  below  the 
gum  margin,  it  is  best  to  place  a  piece  of  cotton  saturated 
with  adrenalin  well  down  between  the  teeth  and  against  the 
gums,  allowing  it  to  remain  several  minutes.  This  not  only 
prevents  the  gums  from  bleeding  or  marking  but  causes  the 
tissues  to  shrink  temporarily. — Thos.  P.  Hinman,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Advantages  of  Porcelain. — In  the  porcelain  inlay  we 
are  using  the  best  tooth  preserver  at  our  command.  We  are 
using  a  material  that  will  protect  the  enamel  from  fracture, 
the  dentin  from  decay  and  the  pulp  from  irritation.  It  is 
compatible  with  tooth  structure,  durable,  a  non-conductor  of 
thermal  changes,  no  electro-chemical  action  on  dentin,  and 
artistic  in  effect. — J.  AIllen  Smith^  Items  of  Interest. 

Etching  Porcelain  Inlays. — Hydrofluoric  acid  makes  a 
smooth  etch ;  white  acid  makes  a  frosted  etch,  to  which  the 
cement  will  tightly  adhere.  It  is  prepared  by  making  a 
saturated  solution  of  ammonium  carbonate  in  hydrofluoric 
acid,  using  a  lead  dish ;  evaporate  to  one-half  its  bulk ;  add 
hydrofluoric  acid  up  to  original  bulk,  and  evaporate  again 
to  one-half.  Keep  it  in  a  gutta-percha  bottle. — ^Joseph 
Head,  Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Etch  the  Surface  of  a  Gold  Inlay. — When  the  inlay 
is  ready  to  set,  coat  the  surface  you  want  cement  to  adhere 
to  with  mercury,  spreading  the  mercury  around  with  the 
aid  of  a  pellet  of  moist  cotton  and  a  pair  of  pliers.  Then 
hold  over  an  alcohol  flame  and  slowly  drive  ofif  the  mercury, 
leaving  a  rough  crystalline  surface,  to  which  cement  will 
adhere. — C.  J.  Hadley,  Dental  Review. 


84  Practical  Dentistry. 

Setting  an  Inlay. — See  that  the  cement  covers  everj'^ 
wall,  is  in  the  seat  and  over  the  margins.  Insert  the  inlay, 
and  with  tape  between  the  teeth  force  the  inlay  to  place 
with  a  drawing  motion  that  will  press  it  into  the  resistance 
seat  and  hold  it  for  ten  minutes.  The  tape  gives  equal 
pressure  on  all  parts  of  the  inlay  and  wipes  the  joints  free 
of  excess  cement,  allowing  the  cement  to  harden  with  the 
natural  gloss  to  protect  it.  When  the  tape  is  removed  var- 
nish the  joints.  Architect's  cloth,  which  is  thin  and  strong, 
can  be  used  in  place  of  tape. — G.  F.  Woodbury,  Dental 
Summary. 

Matrix  for  Porcelain  Inlay. — Use  gold  for  matrices ; 
pack  the  matrix  full  of  cotton  (tight),  and  then  drop  melted 
wax  on  the  cotton  and  pull  it  out  wath  a  hooked  instrument. 
Invest  in  asbestos  and  burn  out  the  wax  and  cotton ;  the  lit- 
tle ash  that  will  be  left  you  can  blow  out  with  a  puff  of  the 
breath,  with  nothing  left  to  cause  trouble. — Dr.  Barker, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Etching"  an  Inlay. — If,  after  treatment  with  hydroflu- 
oric acid,  the  inlay  is  immersed  in  alcohol,  the  etching  seems 
to  be  increased,  and  after  the  resultant  powder  has  been  re- 
moved, using  a  small  mandrel  brush  in  the  hand-piece  un- 
der moderate  speed,  a  surface  is  obtained  to  which  cement 
adheres  very  strongly. — Dr.  Nyman,  Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Porcelain  Crown. — Use  25  per  cent,  platinum  solder 
when  attaching  the  floor  to  the  band  and  the  dowel  to  the 
floor,  especially  is  using  a  high-fusing  body.  If  the  dowel 
can  be  raised  up  a  little  above  the  floor  it  is  stronger  as  re- 
gards the  possibility  of  the  crown  tipping  on  the  dowel. — 
F.  H.  BERRY,Dental  Reviezv. 

The  Gold  Matrix:  Protection  from  Fusing. — It  is  not 
necessary  that  any  matrix  be  invested ;  when  gold  is  used  it 
is  protected  from  fusing  by  coating  it,  preferably  with  rouge 
because  of  its  great  fineness  and  affinity  for  a  smooth  sur- 
face. The  rouge  is  bought  in  powder  and  spatulated  with 
alcohol  and  water. — W.  A.  Capon,  Items  of  Interest. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  85 

A  Handy  Appliance  for  Electric  Furnace  Work. — Get  a 

clay  pipe,  just  the  common  penny  kind,  and  cut  the  stem  in 
pieces  about  half  an  inch  long.  In  making  a  crown  set  the 
post  in  the  hole  in  the  piece  of  stem.  The  pieces  will  stand 
the  highest  heat  required  in  every  case. — G.  B.  Speee, 
Dental  Brief. 

Undercuts  in  Porcelain  Inlays. — Solder  to  an  old  bur 
a  piece  of  copper  plate,  and  turn  down  to  about  three-six- 
teenths of  an  inch  in  diameter.  Moisten  this  with  a  mixt- 
ure of  carborundum  powder  and  glycerin.  With  this  un- 
dercuts may  be  made  in  the  inlay,  shaping  it  similar  to  a 
collar-button,  avoiding  all  acute  angles. — R.  M.  Hill,  Brit- 
ish Dental  Journal. 

Large  Porcelain  Fillings:  the  Matrix. — Very  large 
porcelain  fillings  in  bicuspids  or  molars  are  more  difficult  to 
make  because  of  the  distortion  of  the  matrix.  As  the 
esthetic  is  largely  eliminated  from  these  fillings  it  has 
been  suggested  that  the  matrix  be  formed  of  No.  36 
gold  plate,  and  that  the  portion  which  comes  in  con- 
tact with  the  margins  and  below  be  left  upon  the  inlay. 
After  the  cement  is  thoroughly  hardened  the  surplus  gold 
that  overhangs  the  edges  is  to  be  cut  off  and  the  remaining 
gold  burnished  so  as  to  cover  up  the  line  of  cement. — F.  T. 
Van  Woert^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Soldering  with  the  Electric  Furnace. — A  nice  way  to 
solder  a  Richmond  crown  or  a  small  bridge  is  to  use  a 
miniature  furnace;  this  puts  the  blaze  on  the  under  side 
of  the  investment,  thus  causing  the  solder  to  flow  nicely 
around  the  facings. — F.  B.  Wiesner,  D.D.S. 

The  Porcelain  Inlay. — It  is  possible  to  consume  more 
tooth  structure  in  using  the  inlay,  than  with  the  gold  filling 
for  there  is  union  of  inlay,  cement,  and  tooth.  The  inlay 
braces  up  whereas  gold  does  not  lend  strength,  perhaps 
really  weakens.  Frail  corners  will  not  break  away  from 
cement  as  they  would  from  gold  malleted  against  them. — 
R.  B.  Tuller,  American  Dental  Journal. 


86  Practical  Dentistry. 

Retention  of  Corner  Inlays. — To  retain  a  small  corner 
or  an  incisor  it  is  sometimes  advisable  to  form  a  groove  at 
the  base  of  the  cavity,  pushing  a  staple  of  platinum  wire 
through  the  bottom  of  the  matrix,  held  in  position  with  a 
little  dampened  body,  the  whole  withdrawn  from  the  cavity 
and  baked.  If  something  of  this  kind  is  not  done  tlie  corner 
is  liable  to  become  dislodged  from  a  very  slight  strain. — F. 
J.  Capon^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Porcelain  Inlays:  the  Three  Essentials. — Deep  cavity. 
Good  margins.  Thorough  adaptation  of  matrix  to  interior 
as  well  as  margins  of  cavity. 

First  of  all  is  a  good,  deep  seat  for  the  filling.  The  mar- 
gins should  be  as  thick  as  possible  and  should  not  be  bevelled 
externally.  Strip  the  matrix  from  the  margins  to  the  centre, 
taking  great  care  not  to  injure  the  margins. — B.  Bridge- 
forth,  Dental  Summary. 

The  TJnder-surface  of  Porcelain  Inlays. — If  an  inlay  is 
embedded  face  down  in  base-wax  and  the  exposed  portion 
covered  with  hydrofluoric  acid  for  five  or  ten  minutes,  the 
etched  surface  will  add  greatly  to  the  strength  of  the  setting 
because  of  the  strong  adhesion  of  cement  to  such  a  surface. 
— F.  T.  Van  Woert. 

Adjusting  an  Inlay. — Before  adjusting  an  inlay  the 
cavity  should  be  dried  and  wiped  with  cement  liquid.  The 
inlay  should  be  treated  in  the  same  way  and  the  surplus 
liquid  wiped  ofif.  This  will  produce  a  stronger  adhesion 
when  the  inlay  is  cemented. — W.  H.  Upjohn,  Dental 
Summary. 

Porcelain  Inlays:  Preparation  of  Cavity. — In  the  prep- 
aration of  the  cavity  all  inside  angles  and  corners  should  be 
slightly  rounded  to  make  it  easier  of  access  to  get  a  more 
accurate  matrix.  It  is  extremely  difficult  to  obtain  one  from 
a  cavity  full  of  sharp  right  angles. — W.  H.  Upjohn,  Dental 
Summary. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  87 

Annealing  Matrix  Metals. — This  is  best  accomplished 
by  grasping  the  small  piece  of  metal  at  one  corner  with  a 
pair  of  old  plugging  pliers  and  holding  it  in  a  Bunsen  or 
alcoholic  flame  until  it  nears  the  melting  point,  then  plunge 
into  cold  water.  This  gives  a  very  soft  pliable  matrix  metal. 
— Thos.  p.  Hinman^  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Inlay  Matrix. — For  large  fillings  in  molars  and 
bicuspids  a  valuable  method  consists  in  forming  the  matrix 
of  heavy  gold,  say  36  heavy  plate  pure  gold,  having  it  on 
the  inlay  when  inserted;  after  finishing  it  down  it  leaves 
a  thin  line  of  gold  which  can  be  burnished,  and  practically 
covers  the  cement  line. — F.  T.  Van  Woert,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Adherence  of  Porcelain  Inlays. — Hydrofluoric  acid  will 
remove  the  glaze  and  leave  a  roughened  surface  that  cement 
will  adhere  to.  Do  not  try  to  neutralize  the  acid,  but  remove 
mechanically  with  water  and  a  stiff  brush  the  flne  powder 
resulting  from  the  action  of  the  acid. — W.  T.  Reeves,  Den- 
tal Sum,mary. 

Setting  Porcelain  Inlays. — When  set  with  cement,  a 
trace  of  the  liquid,  without  powder,  should  be  placed  in  this 
surface.  This  will  give  an  adhesion  which  is  of  great  ad- 
vantage.— B.  Holly  Smith^  International  Dental  Journal. 

Plaster  Impressions  for  Inlay  Work. — If  you  will  mix 
your  plaster  first  with  kaolin,  about  equal  parts  by  weight, 
which  will  give  you  more  plaster  than  kaolin,  and  then  use 
rice  gluten  instead  of  water  in  mixing,  it  will  not  shrink  or 
lose  its  weight  and  you  will  have  an  intensely  smooth  sur- 
face. The  inlays  will  come  away  very  clean, — D.  Genese, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Porcelain  Inlay. — The  fact  that  porcelain  has  a 
greater  range  of  application,  is  more  permanent,  more  com- 
patible, harmonizes  in  color  better,  is  more  sanitary,  and  re- 
quires less  physical  exertion  upon  the  part  of  both  patient 
and  operator  than  any  other  material,  will  force  its  universal 
adoption  in  time. — F.  E.  Roach,  Dental  Digest. 


88  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Gold  Inlay;  Protecting  the  Cement  Joint. — Pro- 
tecting the  cement  joint  by  beveling  fully  and  carrying  the 
gold  over  the  bevel  is  the  vital  principle  of  the  gold  inlay. 
The  impracticability  of  extending  porcelain  in  the  edges  is 
often  against  the  use  of  the  porcelain  inlay. — W.  V.  B. 
Ames,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Gold  versus  Porcelain  Inlay. — The  gold  inlay,  save 
color,  possesses  all  the  virtues  of  porcelain  and  many  pe- 
culiar to  itself,  and  as  the  conditions  demanding  a  gold 
inlay  in  the  anterior  teeth  are  usually  found  in  men  of  middle 
age,  the  objection  to  color  is  insignificant.  — J.  D.  White- 
man,  Dental  Summary. 

Removal  of  Trays  from  Muffle. — Coarse  silex  sprinkled 
over  the  floor  of  the  muffle  will  prevent  adhesion  of  trays, 
whether  of  clay  or  platinum.  No  attempt  should  be  made  at 
any  time  to  remove  the  silex;  most  of  it  becomes  a  fixture 
and  serves  a  good  purpose. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Fusing  the  Jenkins  Porcelain  Body. — It  would  be  possi- 
ble for  one  to  use  the  ordinary  gas  furnace,  *  *  *  or 
one  need  not  have  a  furnace.  You  can  take  some  of 
Teague's  Compound,  make  a  little  muffle,  place  it  over  char- 
coal, and  apply  a  blow-pipe  flame  to  the  bottom  of  the  muf- 
fle.— Dr.  Deems,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Retention  Groove  for  Matrices. — Use  thin  copper  plate 
for  inlay  matrix.  Place  a  fold  of  small  copper  wire  in  bot- 
tom of  matrix  and  run  up  with  gold  solder,  using  plenty  of 
flux.  Just  before  setting  drop  the  inlay  into  nitric  acid  to 
remove  the  copper.  The  removal  of  the  copper  wire  leaves 
a  good  retaining  groove. — J.  B.  Newell,  Dental  Review. 

Investment  for  Inlay  Work. — A  bottle  of  powdered 
asbestos  and  water,  of  creamy  consistency,  can  be  kept  in 
the  cabinet,  near  the  chair,  ready  for  use  at  any  moment, 
and  will  be  found  much  cleaner  and  neater  to  handle  than 
mixing  for  each  case. — F.  T.  Van  Woert,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  89 

Porcelain  Inlays,  Cutting  the  Grooves. — When  Dr. 
Jenkins  cuts  his  grooves  he  endeavored,  if  possible,  to  get 
a  filling  that  would  be  in  the  shape  of  a  collar-button,  the 
groove  being  cut  around  the  circumference  of  the  filling, 
and  in  antagonism  to  the  undercuts  in  the  tooth. — R.  Otto- 
LENGUi,  Items  of  Interest. 

Setting-  a  Porcelain  Inlay. — When  ready  to  set  the  inlay, 
roughen  the  cavity,  and  grind  the  under  side  of  the  inlay 
with  a  three-sixteenths  inch  fissure  diamond  disc,  so  as  to 
engage  the  cement.  The  inlay  should  be  kept  wet  while 
grinding  to  prevent  darkening. — A.  E.  Peck,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 

The  Gold  Inlay. — The  gold  inlay  has  one  marked  ad- 
vantage over  the  porcelain,  in  that  the  matrix  becomes  a 
part  of  the  inlay,  giving  it  an  exact  fit  to  the  cavity,  there- 
fore requiring  the  minimum  of  cement. — Joseph  W.  Was- 
SALL,  Items  of  Interest. 

Inlays. — Cavities  filled  with  inlays,  owing  to  the  ad- 
hesive setting  of  cement,  are  less  liable  to  suffer  fracture, 
and  for  that  reason  are  practical  in  teeth  of  poor  structure, 
something  not  particularly  true  of  anchored  fillings. — C.  N. 
Thompson,  American  Dental  lournal. 

Gutta-percha  in  Setting"  Inlays. — Wherever  an  inlay 
can  be  placed  in  a  tooth,  the  pulp  of  which  has  been  de- 
stroyed— and  it  is  possible  to  get  a  pin  to  go  into  the  root — 
use  gutta-percha  always. — F.  N.  Brown,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Porcelain  Inlays  in  Proximal  Surfaces  in  Front  Teeth. — 

It  is  an  easy  matter,  after  the  cavity  is  prepared,  to  fill  with 
oxyphosphate,  using  the  porcelain  only  as  a  thin  veneer. 
Then  the  teeth  need  not  be  wedged  so  far  apart,  and  scarcely 
any  undercut  is  required. — S.  G.  Perry,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Inlays:  The  Cavity  Margins. — The  ordinary  round  bur 
leaves  a  sufficiently  smooth  margin  for  all  purposes  and  has 
the  advantage  of  holding  the  cement  better  than  a  highly- 
polished  surface. — Edw.  Eggleston,  Dental  Summary. 
7 


90  Practical  Dentistry. 

Setting  an  Inlay. — Don't  set  an  inlay  without  putting 
on  the  rubber  dam,  and  don't  remove  the  excess  of  cement 
before  removing  the  dam.  After  the  saliva  has  bathed  the 
tooth  the  cement  will  come  off  easily  without  danger  of  dis- 
lodging the  inlay. — W.  T.  Reeves,  Dental  Summary. 

Impression  for  Inlay  Work. — A  piece  of  dental 
lac,  warmed  and  pressed  into  the  cavity  and  cooled  with  a 
jet  of  water  before  removing,  will  give  a  rigid  and  perfect 
impression,  more  quickly  taken  than  with  gutta-percha. — 
Percy  St.  C.  Smith,  Dental  Rcviciv. 

The  Gold  Inlay. — The  gold  inlay  offers  greater  immu- 
nity to  recurrent  caries  by  virtue  of  its  sealed  cemented 
joint  between  filling  and  cavity  wall.  The  space  between 
cavity  wall  and  a  filling  without  adhesion  is  a  constant 
menace. — Dr.  Wassall,  Items  of  Interest. 

Porcelain  Inlay  Work. — "Porcelain  work  is  no  lazy 
man's  task.  Go  at  it  with  all  your  might,  and  when  you  be- 
gin to  be  satisfied  with  the  results  it  will  be  time  for  you  to 
die,  but  you  can  die  with  the  feeling  that  you  have  tried  to 
be  an  up-to-date  dentist." — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Record. 

Cast  Gold  Fillings. — Cut  out  the  decayed  dentin  thor- 
oughly ;  fill  the  undercuts  with  gutta-percha ;  make  a  matrix 
of  gold-foil  as  if  for  a  porcelain  inlay.  Fill  this  with  gold 
solder  and  cement  to  place  with  gutta-percha. — C.  L. 
Alexander,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Canada  Balsam  for  Fixing  Inlays. — Inlays  of  porcelain 
treated  with  Canada  balsam  dissolved  in  benzol  are  much 
more  durably  fixed  in  position  than  when  bedded  in  a  film 
of  oxyphosphate,  provided  an  accurate  fit  has  been  ob- 
tained.— W.  Booth  Pearsoll,  Dental  Reviezv. 

A  Place  for  Inlays. — For  large  proximal  cavities  in 
bicuspids  which  would  support  only  a  phosphate  filling,  pro- 
tect the  surface  with  a  porcelain  inlay.  It  will  last  five  or 
ten  times  longer  than  the  cement  alone. — I.  N.  Broomell, 
Dental  Cosmos. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  91 

Removal  of  Matrix  from  Cavity. — After  the  matrix  has 
been  burnished  to  fit  the  cavity  perfectly,  pour  hard,  sticky 
wax  into  it  while  in  place  and  then  heat  a  small  ball  burn- 
isher, work  it  into  the  wax  and  chill  with  cold  water.  The 
matrix  can  now  be  lifted  from  the  cavity  without  marring 
it. — W.  O.  Fellman,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Removal  of  an  Inlay  Matrix. — After  the  matrix  is  per- 
fectly formed,  if  it  is  filled  with  beeswax  just  flush,  it  can 
be  removed  from  the  cavity  with  a  sharp  pointed  excava- 
tor without  any  danger  of  changing  its  shape. — L.  M. 
Matthews,  Items  of  Interest. 

Porcelain  Facing;  Changing  Color. — If,  before  they  are 
backed  ready  for  investing  porcelain  facings  are  boiled  for 
a  minute  in  sulphuric  acid  and  water,  equal  parts,  and  then 
backed  with  pure  gold,  there  will  be  very  little  trouble 
with  their  changing  color. — D.  W.  Stanton. 

Porcelain  Inlays.  Selection  of  Color. — Selecting  the 
color  after  the  tooth  has  been  dried  under  the  rubber-dam 
is  always  misleading.  The  color  must  correspond  with  that 
of  the  tooth  in  its  natural  moist  condition. — N.  S.  Jenkins, 
National  Dental  Association,  1899. 

Inlay  Impressions. — Substitute  dental  lac  for  gutta- 
percha and  you  will  have  a  quicker,  more  rigid,  and 
perfect  impression.  Warm  a  piece  of  the  dental  lac,  a 
little  larger  than  the  cavity,  press  to  place,  cool  with  a  jet 
of  water,  and  remove. — Dental  Review. 

Oxyphosphate  for  Inlay  Impressions. — Dust  the  cavity 
with  pulverized  soapstone  and  insert  a  pellet  of  quick-setting 
oxyphosphate,  letting  it  extend  over  the  edges  of  the  cavity. 
When  set  remove,  dust  the  surface  with  soapstone,  and  make 
a  mold  of  the  same  material. — Dental  Cosmos. 

Setting  Inlays. — Inlays  set  with  Canada  balsam  dis- 
solved in  benzole  are  much  more  durably  fixed  than  when 
embedded  in  oxyphosphate,  provided  an  accurate  fit  has  been 
obtained. — W.  Booth  Pearsall,  Ash's  Quarterly. 


92  Practical  Dentistry. 

Inlay  Adhesion. — Before  adjusting  an  inlay  the  cavity 
should  be  dried  and  wiped  with  cement  liquid;  the  inlay 
should  be  treated  in  the  same  way  and  the  surplus  liquid 
wiped  off.  This  will  produce  a  stronger  adhesion  when  the 
inlay  is  cemented. — W.  H.  Upjohn,  Dental  Summary. 

Posterior  Porcelain  Crowns. — Dr.  Jenkins  uses  ordinary 
English  teeth,  such  as  are  used  for  rubber  plates,  soldering 
the  point  to  the  dowel  pin  or  pins,  finishing  the  contour 
with  his  prosthetic  porcelain. — W.  A.  Coston,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 

Matrix  for  Inlay  Work. — The  less  the  matrix  is  bur- 
nished in  the  deep  parts  of  the  cavity,  and  the  more  it  is 
thinned  out  at  or  near  the  margins,  the  more  nearly  will 
the  margins  of  filling  and  cavity  meet. — C.  N.  Thompson, 
Dental  Digest. 

Gold  Inlays. — Filling  with  inlays  does  away  with  the 
long  and  tedious  sittings  which  are  necessary  when  re- 
storing large  portions  of  tooth  structure  with  cohesive  gold 
or  its  combinations.  In  many  instances  these  long  sittings 
have  precluded  the  use  of  gold  entirely,  because  of  the 
physical  inability  of  the  patient  to  endure  such  trying  opera- 
tions, while  the  fearful  strain  on  the  operator  has  been 
such  in  some  cases  as  to  deter  him  from  attempting  exten- 
sive restorations. — Tiios.  P.  Hinman,  Dental  Brief. 

The  Porcelain  Inlay. — It  is  safe  to  adopt  the  rule  that 
where  utility  and  durability  are  of  first  importance  no  at- 
tempt should  be  made  to  use  porcelain,  but  where  the  cos- 
metic effect  is  the  principal  consideration  do  not  fail  to  use 
porcelain. — W.  A.  Caston,  Kansas  City  Dental  Journal. 

Porcelain  Inlays;  The  Matrix. — The  metal  should 
never  be  annealed  and  the  matrix  introduced  into  the  cavity 
after  the  final  burnishing,  as  it  is  too  easy  a  matter  to  dis- 
tort the  matrix  in  so  doing. — Craig  M.  Work,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 


Porcelain  Inlays — Gold  Inlays.  93 

Anchoring-  Porcelain  Inlays. — Porcelain  sections  and 
inlays  may  be  securely  anchored  by  means  of  platinum 
wire  secured  as  pins  are  secured  in  porcelain  teeth,  the  wire 
insuring  a  more  secure  hold  in  the  cement. — W.  A.  Capon, 
Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Porcelain  Inlays:  Where  not  indicated. — Is  there  any 
sharp,  definable  line  that  marks  the  limits  of  the  field  of  the 
porcelain  inlay  ?  Yes ;  exposure  of  the  margins  to  the 
stress  of  mastication. — J.  E.  Nyman,  Dental  Summary. 

Impression  for  Porcelain  Inlay. — In  taking-  a  cavity  im- 
pression use  albolin  or  some  other  lubricant,  and  take 
impression  with  archite.  It  sets  very  quickly  and  is  very 
hard. — Dental  Summary. 

Baking  Crowns. — Cut  clay  pipe-stems  into  one-half  inch 
lengths  and  use  them  to  support  pin  crowns  when  baking 
in  the  furnace.  They  will  stand  the  heat  of  any  furnace. — 
G.  B.  Speer,  Dental  Summary. 

Wedging  Inlays  into  Place. — The  soft  wood  of  matches 
is  preferable  to  orange-wood  in  wedging  inlays  into  place, 
as  the  latter  is  liable  to  exert  too  much  force  upon  frail 
edges. — C.  N.  Thompson,  American  Jotcrnal. 

The  Strength  of  Porcelain. — Any  of  the  standard 
porcelains  on  the  market  are  strong  enough  if  they  do  not 
receive  the  full  force  of  mastication,  and  none  of  them  are 
strong  enough  if  they  do. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Cosmos. 

How  to   Observe  the   Baking-point   of   Porcelain. — By 

throwing  the  light  of  a  mirror  into  the  furnace,  the  flow  of 
porcelain  can  readily  be  detected. — C.  J.  Lange,  Dental 
Brief. 

Inlay  Retention. — I  do  not  believe  in  baking  pins  into 
inlays,  as  they  weaken  the  porcelain  more  than  they  give  re- 
tentive security. — W.  T.  Reeves,  Dental  Register. 


94 


Practical  Dcutistrx. 


The  Fusing-point  of  Porcelain  Bodies. — Ash's  and 
Close's  high  heat,  about  2600°  F.  ConsoHdated,  about  2500° 
F.  Ash's  low-heat,  about  2400°  F.  Downie's,  about  1800°  F. 

Gold  Inlays. — A  dull  finish,  such  as  is  imparted  by 
pumice,  is  the  best  for  gold  inlays. — T.  P.  Hinman,  Items 
of  Interest. 


CHAPTER  IV 


LOCAL    ANESTHESIA  — TREATMENT    OF 
HYPERSENSITIVE  DENTIN 


Eucain  in  Painless  Pulp  Extirpation. — Moisten  with 
alcohol  and  touch  to  finely  powdered  eucain  hydrochlorate 
a  bit  of  spunk  the  size  to  nicely  cover  the  floor  of  the 
cavity.  Place  in  the  cavity  so  that  the  eucain  is  in  contact 
with  the  exposed  pulp.  Fill  the  rest  of  the  cavity  with  un- 
vulcanized  rubber,  and  apply  light  pressure  with  a  ball 
burnisher  as  large  as  can  be  made  to  enter  the  cavity. 
Gradually,  as  it  can  be  borne  without  pain,  increase  the 
pressure  until  considerable  force  is  exerted.  Remove  rub- 
ber and  spunk  at  the  end  of  from  three  to  four  minutes, 
and  usually  the  broach  may  then  be  inserted  and  the  pulp 
removed  without  pain. — Items  of  Interest. 

To  Minimize  Pain  in  the  Setting  of  Crowns  with 
Cement. — The  cement-liquid  coming  in  contact  with  hyper- 
sensitive gum-tissue  frequently  causes  a  severe  spasm  of 
pain.  Paint  the  inner  surface  of  the  finished  crown  with 
carbolic  acid.  Dry  the  tooth,  place  the  crown  in  position, 
and  allow  it  to  remain  a  short  time ;  the  small  quantity  of 
carbolic  acid  which  will  escape  under  the  gingival  edge  will 
anaesthetize  the  gum,  when  the  crown  may  be  set  with 
cement  without  causing  pain.  Alcohol  should  be  at  hand 
to  overcome  any  possible  cauterizing  efifect  as  soon  as  the 
operation  is  completed,  but  will  not  be  necessary  with  a  well- 
fitting  crown. — F.  W.  Stephan,  Items  of  Interest. 

95 


96  Practical  Dentistry. 

High  Pressure  Anaesthesia. — The  advantage  of  this 
method  over  cataphoresis  is  the  saving  of  time.  The  dis- 
advantage is  that  it  is  not  always  possible  to  drill  the  pit 
into  the  cavity  but  manage  to  drill  into  a  healthy  part  of 
the  tooth  and  if  drilled  through  the  enamel  it  must  be  en- 
larged so  that  the  sides  of  the  enamel  will  not  press  on  the 
enamel  margin,  as  I  have  seen  the  enamel  checked  clear 
across  the  buccal  surface  in  trying  to  make  contact  in  this 
manner.  On  the  other  hand  there  is  danger  of  carrying 
infection  into  the  pulp  unless  the  pit  is  drilled  into  healthy 
dentin. — D.  H.  Ziegler,  Dental  Summary. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — By  adding  just  sufficient  carbolic 
crystals  to  cocain  hydrochlorate,  and  rubbing  together  with 
a  spatula  until  the  cocain  is  dissolved,  a  thick  syrup  is  ob- 
tained which  is  escharotic,  antiseptic,  obtundent.  With 
this  we  often  obtain  most  gratifying  results  in  the  treatment 
of  sensitive  dentin  in  cavities  of  decay.  It  should  be  used 
with  the  rubber-dam,  dryness  to  the  verge  of  desiccation 
secured,  applied  warm,  and  treated  in  situ  with  the  hot-air 
syringe,  as  hot  as  can  be  borne,  and  again  dried  before  ex- 
cavating.— C.  B.  RoHLAND,  in  Dental  Brief. 

Painless  Pulp  Extirpation. — Use  the  hydrochlorate  of 
cocain  and  sulphuric  acid — saturated  solution.  The  broken- 
down  pulp  tissue,  resulting  from  the  pricking  of  the  sul- 
phuric acid  and  cocain  into  its  substance,  is  reduced  by 
sodium-potassium  into  a  soapy  material,  which  is  readily 
removed  from  the  pulp  chamber  and  root-canals.  The  action 
of  the  sulphuric  acid  seems  to  devitalize  the  tissue  im- 
mediately and  allows  a  forward  progress  continuously  until 
all  the  pulp  is  broken  down  into  fine  threads. — John  I. 
Hart,  Cosmos. 

Arsenical  Pulp  Devitalization  with  Pressure. — Imme- 
diate pulp  extirpation  by  pressure  anaesthesia  is  not  always 
practicable,  especially  if  the  canals  are  fine  and  tortuous. 
In  such  cases  secure  cocain  anaesthesia  by  pressure;  then 
place  in  the  cavity  arsenical  cotton  saturated  with  clove  oil. 


Local  AncBsthesia.  97 

Apply  pressure,  repeating  five  or  six  times  in  about  ten 
minutes.  While  the  cocain  anaesthesia  continues  the  pulp 
absorbs  sufficient  arsenic  to  produce  loss  of  vitality,  and  in 
a  few  hours,  or  the  following  day,  the  pulp  can  be  removed 
and  the  canals  filled. — Jamie  D.  Lorade,  Dental  Summary 
(Trans,  from  L' Odontalgia). 

Care  of  the  Hypodermic  Needle. — To  keep  the  syringe  in 
good  order  and  the  needle  from  corroding,  make  a  solution 
of  90  parts  glycerin  and  10  parts  carbolic  acid;  pour  into 
a  three  or  four  ounce  wide-necked  bottle  just  sufficient  of 
the  solution  to  cover  the  whole  of  the  needle  when  the  two 
flanges  of  the  syringe  are  resting  over  the  top  of  the  bottle, 
the  barrel  of  the  syringe  being  suspended  in  the  center  of  the 
bottle. — Federal  Dental  Journal. 

Alarming  Symptoms  in  Anaesthesia. — Even  when  alarm- 
ing symptoms  occur  during  anaesthesia  the  result  is  rarely 
disastrous,  because  the  first  bad  symptom  noticed  is  stopping 
of  respiration,  and  in  experiments  with  animals  death  has 
always  occurred  from  paralysis  of  the  respiratory  function, 
and  whenever  the  breathing  stops,  if  immediate  artificial 
respiration  be  resorted  to  your  patient  will  respond  in  a 
short  time.  You  may  ask,  how  is  this  done?  In  the  first 
place  see  that  the  air-passages  are  open  and  free  and  that 
the  tongue  is  drawn  well  forward  and  kept  there.  Then 
lower  the  head  so  that  the  respiratory  center  will  be  kept 
well  supplied  with  blood.  And  follow  this  up  with  the 
movements  of  artificial  respiration  known  as  Sylvester's 
method. — James  F.  Hasbrouck,  Dental  Brief. 

Anaesthetics. — There  never  has  been  a  patient  anaes- 
thetized to  a  state  of  complete  anaesthesia  who  has  not  been 
placed  in  a  dangerous  condition.  I  have  lived  with  anaes- 
thetics most  of  my  life.  I  have  administered  them  thousands 
of  times,  and  yet,  the  older  I  grow,  and  the  more  I  do  in  the 
use  of  them,  the  more  I  feel  the  responsibility,  and  I  never 
administer  an  anaesthetic  without  a  feeling  that  this  is  the 
patient  that  may  go. — T.  W.  Brophy^  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 


98  Practical  Dentistry. 

Somnoforme. — As  compared  with  other  anaesthetics, 
with  somnoforme  the  period  of  induction  is  a  very  short 
one,  averaging  about  thirty  seconds.  Under  ordinary  con- 
ditions the  patient  goes  to  sleep  without  the  least  excite- 
ment, seeming  apparently  to  fall  into  a  quiet,  natural  sleep, 
the  period  of  complete  anaesthesia  averaging  about  ninety 
seconds.  The  elimination  of  the  drug  is  very  rapid,  the 
patient  awakening  in  the  most  natural  manner  and  with- 
out unpleasant  after  effects.  There  is  no  trace  of  asphyxia 
or  cyanosis. — B.  F.  Enay,  Items  of  Interest. 

Narcotile. — As  a  general  anaesthetic  in  dental  practice, 
narcotile,  a  constant  and  unchanging  chemical  product,  offers 
the  advantages  of  being  rapidly  assimilated  by  the  respira- 
tory organs  and  quickly  eliminated  from  the  body,  with 
freedom  from  bad  after-effects.  Its  general  effects  are 
similar  to  those  of  sulphuric  ether,  but  more  rapid  than 
chloroform  or  nitrous  oxid.  During  complete  anaesthesia 
the  action  of  the  heart  remains  unchanged.  Cyanosis  never 
occurs  and  rigidity  is  not  at  all  prominent. — F.  A,  Weed, 
Dental  Digest. 

Hyperesthesia  in  Erosion. — The  chemical  caustics  like 
silver  nitrate  and  gold  chlorid  are  not  very  powerful,  and 
discolor  the  teeth.  I  have  used  antimony  chlorid  with  ad- 
vantage, but  as  the  caustic  power  of  this  salt  is  extreme 
the  greatest  care  is  required  in  its  use.  Such  therapeutic  use 
of  it,  however,  is  efficacious  and  free  from  inconvenience, 
with  proper  precautions,  and  it  does  not  discolor  the  teeth. 
Protect  the  lip  with  a  roll  of  cotton.  Protect  the  application 
and  retain  it  several  seconds ;  rinse  the  mouth  with  a  soda 
solution — four  grains  of  bicarbonate  to  the  litre  of  water. 
Usually  one  treatment  is  enough,  but  may  repeat  if  neces- 
sary.— M.  Michaels,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — In  the  treatment  of  sensitive  dentin 
the  ethyl  chlorid  spray  gives  very  gratifying  results  if 
properly  managed.  It  is  by  no  means  painless  in  its  appli- 
cation, but  is  appreciably  less  so  if  a  blast  of  cold  air  is  first 
directed  against  the  tooth,  making  the  change  of  tempera- 


Local  AncBsthesia.  99 

ture  less  sudden.  A  pledget  of  cotton  saturated  with  the 
liquid  should  then  be  gently  brought  into  contact  with  the 
tooth  or  cavity  and  then  removed,  repeating  it  frequently, 
until  it  can  be  left  in  the  tooth  without  excessive  pain,  when 
the  tooth  may  be  sprayed  direct. — Geo.  Gow,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Erythrophlein  chlorid  is  the  agent 
par  excellence  for  the  treatment  of  sensitive  dentin.  It  has 
no  caustic  action,  its  effect  being  merely  one  of  intense  vaso- 
constriction. The  insertion  of  the  gutta-percha  sealing  is 
followed  by  no  discomfort,  the  symptoms  of  pericementitis 
which  may  occasionally  develop  being  very  slight.  Its  abso- 
lute inocuousness  makes  it  especially  applicable  to  the  devi- 
talization of  the  pulps  of  deciduous  teeth.  A  dressing  of 
erythrophlein  chlorid  permits  of  painlessly  excavating  hyper- 
sensitive cavities.  Remove  at  the  expiration  of  twenty-four 
and  not  more  than  forty-eight  hours. — M.  Andy,  L'Odon- 
tologie. 

■-  Hypersensitive  Dentin. — I  know  of  no  better  local  treat- 
ment than  the  old-fashioned  carbonate  of  potassium  in 
glycerin  (saturated  solution).  I  have  used  that  remedy, 
both  with  and  without  the  rubber-dam,  with  as  much  com- 
fort as  could  possibly  be  obtained  with  any  other  remedy. 
It  is  applied  on  a  small  pellet  of  cotton ;  if  necessary  it  may 
be  sealed  in  the  cavity,  renewing  it  every  day  or  two.  It  is 
effective  even  when  dentin  is  so  excessively  sensitive  that 
the  touch  of  an  explorer  causes  excruciating  agony. — C.  A. 
Jeffries,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — It  should  be  borne  in  mind,  in  re- 
moving decay,  that  the  most  sensitive  portion  is  at  the  pe- 
riphery of  the  dentin  just  beneath  the  enamel,  and  that  the 
fibrillge  have  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  surface  of  the 
tooth.  Much  pain  may  therefore  be  saved  if  at  the  outset 
of  the  operation  a  few  bold  sweeps  of  the  excavator  be  made 
around  the  circumference  of  the  cavity,  and  that  all  subse- 
quent cuts  as  far  as  possible  follow  a  line  from  the  center 
to  the  periphery. — Ralph  W.  Stewart,  Dental  Review. 


lOO  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cocain  Anaesthesia. — IMeans  says  that  Reclns,  who  re- 
ports 7,000  operations  under  cocain  ansesthesia  without  a 
death,  insists  on  the  observance  of  the  following  rules:  (i) 
Never  use  a  stronger  solution  than  5  per  cent,  externally, 
or  I  per  cent,  hypodermically.  (2)  Always  have  the  pa- 
tient recline  during  the  administration  of  the  anaesthetic  and 
not  get  up  for  half  an  hour  after.  (3)  Always  have  the 
patient  eat  and  drink  something  before  rising. — Dental 
Brief. 

Guaiacol  in  the  Extraction  of  Teeth. — 

Guaiacol  (chem.  pure),  i  gramme: 

Olive  oil  (sterilized  and  neutralized),  q.s.  to  make  10  c.c 
For  hypodermic  injection,  for  tooth  extraction,  the 
effect  of  guaiacol  is  at  least  equal  to  that  of  cocain,  and  in 
certain  cases  in  which  the  cocain  does  not  produce  the  de- 
sired eftect,  as  in  periostitis,  pure  alveolar  abscess,  and 
radicular  cysts,  guaiacol  produces  perfect  analgesia.  Be- 
ing entirely  non-toxic  and  not  caustic  its  use  as  an  agent 
for  the  painless  extraction  of  teeth  should  become  very 
general. — B.  Marechal,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia  in  Pulp  Devitalization. — To  confine 
the  medicament  closely,  fasten  to  the  end  of  the  instrument 
a  piece  of  soft  rubber  in  which  has  been  fashioned  a  small 
chamber.  Place  in  this  a  pellet  of  cotton  saturated  with  the 
anaesthetic  agent ;  warm  to  prevent  thermal  shock  and  place 
the  opening  over  the  exposure.  By  simple  contact  the  pulp 
takes  up  enough  cocain  to  soon  permit  of  slight  pressure, 
which  must  be  gradually  increased  to  a  very  considerable 
force. — R.  B.  Tuller,  Dental  Summary. 

Cataphoresis — Painless  Extirpation  of  Living  Pulps. — 
For  the  negative  electrode  I  use  the  sponge  dipped  in  warm 
water,  containing  20  per  cent,  salt;  the  positive  electrode,  a 
pin  bent  into  suitable  shape,  laid  on  a  pellet  of  cotton  satu- 
rated with  a  20  per  cent,  aqueous  solution  of  cocain,  contain- 
ing one  or  two  drops  of  Calvert's  carbolic  acid  (which  pre- 
serves the  solution  for  weeks).  Living  pulp  extracted  with- 
out pain  to  the  patient. — V.  Al.  Murr,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 


Local  AncFsthesia.  loi 

Extracting  when  the  Hypodermic  Needle  is  Employed. — 
Three  fundamental  rules  which  must  be  followed  in  order 
to  ensure  the  desired  results :  First,  render  the  area  of 
tissue  to  be  injected  asceptic;  second,  positively  sterilise 
vour  needle  before  injecting;  third,  remove  all  deposits  about 
the  tooth  involved,  otherwise  infectious  calculus  will  be 
crushed  into  the  tissues  by  the  beaks  of  forceps  during  the 
process  of  extraction. — L.  O.  Greex,  Dental  Brief. 

Where  Pressure  Anaesthesia  Fails. — Teeth  of  old  per- 
sons ;  teeth  of  inveterate  tobacco  chewers ;  worn,  abraded, 
and  eroded  teeth;  teeth  with  extensive  secondary  calcific 
deposits ;  teeth  whose  pulp  canals  are  obstructed  by  pulp 
nodules ;  teeth  with  metallic  oxids  in  tubules ;  teeth  with 
leaky  old  fillings ;  badly  calcified  teeth — mainly  all  from  one 
and  the  same  cause ;  namely,  clogged  tubuli.  In  most  of 
such  cases  no  amount  of  persistent  pressure  will  prove  suc- 
cessful.— Geo.  Zederbaum,  Dental  Register. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — If  a  pulp  is  to  be  desensitized 
by  the  introduction  of  cocain  under  pressure  the  iirst  step 
is  a  thorough  opening,  so  that  pressure  may  be  applied 
directly  over  the  pulp;  second,  the  removal  of  all  carious 
dentin;  third,  to  so  shape  the  cavity  (with  temporary  cement 
walls  if  necessary)  that  the  solution  can  be  confined  under 
pressure;  fourth,  thorough  sterilization  of  the  cavity. — F.  G. 
WoRTHLEY,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Cataphoresis — Painless  Pulp  Eemoval. — ^A  crystal  of 
cocain  hydrochlorid  on  the  exposed  pulp,  a  drop  of  water, 
and  the  positive  pole  (ball  point  electrode)  will  make  the 
living  pulp  non-sensitive  in  four  or  five  minutes.  Then  ex- 
change ball  point  for  a  very  fine  platinum  broach;  dry  out 
the  cavity,  reverse  the  current  and  insert  the  broach  in  the 
anaesthetized  pulp,  which  will  be  entirely  decomposed  and  can 
be  removed  and  the  canals  filled  at  once.  A  few  grains  of 
common  salt  wall  hasten  the  decomposition  of  the  pulp. — N. 
F.  WiNEMAN,  Dental  Cosmos. 


I02  Practical  Doitistry. 

Pulp  Removal :  Pressure  Anaesthesia. — If  the  apical  for- 
amen is  small  and  a  free  opening  made  before  attempting 
removal,  if  the  broach  is  gentl\-  slipped  to  the  very  apex 
and  the  pulp  heroically  removed,  there  will  be  very  little 
bleeding,  and  what  may  occur  will  soon  cease  of  its  own 
accord,  and  then  by  washing  out  canals  with  alcohol  and 
drying  we  approach  nearer  the  ideal  condition  than  can 
be  attained  by  any  other  method. — R.  A.  Adams.  Dental 
Summary. 

Tooth  Extraction — Local  Anaesthetics. — Eucain  in  ten 
per  cent,  solution,  injecting  about  five  drops. — O.  N.  Heise. 

Five  grains  cocain,  one-tenth  grain  atropia,  ten  drops 
carbolic  acid,  one  ounce  water. — W.  D.  Snyder. 

Cocain  cataphoretically  applied  to  the  gum,  using  a 
two  per  cent,  solution  with  from  five  to  ten  volts  of  current, 
as  the  patient  bears  it. — W.  H.  Todd. 

Ether  and  chloroform,  if  used  carefully,  are  safer  than 
these  injections.  Nitrous  oxid  is  better  still. — C.  R.  But- 
ler, Dental  Cosmos. 

Cataphoresis — Cocain  Solutions. — We  have  tried  guaia- 
cocain,  electro-cocain,  and  ordinary  aqueous  solutions  of  the 
cocain  hydrochlorid,  and  think  we  get  as  good  results  from 
a  twenty  to  thirty  or  perhaps  fifty  per  cent,  solution  cocain 
hydrochl.  in  "meditrina"  as  with  any  other  preparation.  Most 
operators  favor  a  strong  solution  of  the  cocain;  some  using 
it  saturated. — Committee  Report,  Den.  Soc.,  State  of  N.  Y., 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Cataphoresis — Sensitive  Dentin — Failures  in  Production 
of  Anaesthesia. — In  the  class  of  teeth  where  there  is  evidence 
of  the  deposit  of  secondary  dentin  of  dense  quality,  the  ir- 
regularity of  its  structure  seems  in  some  cases  to  prove  an 
insurmountable  barrier  to  the  passage  of  sufficient  current 
to  produce  the  anaesthetic  efifect  of  cataphoresis.  In  such 
cases  it  seems  very  doubtful  if  any  length  of  application  will 
succeed. — H.  W.  Gillett,  Dental  Cosmos. 


Local  AncBsthesia.  103 

Cocain  and  Adrenalin  Chlorid:  Caution. — Reaction  de- 
pends very  largely  upon  the  amount  of  disturbance  produced 
in  the  blood-supply.  So  powerful  an  astringent  as  adrenalin 
chlorid  makes  a  bloodless  operation  a  possibility,  but  it  also 
increases  the  dangers  from  secondary  hemorrhage  and  other 
serious  complications.  In  one  case  erysipelas  was  the  com- 
plication, brought  about,  undoubtedly,  through  the  profound 
debility  produced  in  the  tissue  cells,  rendering  the  parts 
more  susceptible  to  infection. — E.  T.  Loeffler,  Dental 
Register. 

Cocain  Solutions. — Employ  four  solutions — one  with 
alcohol,  one  with  chloroform,  one  with  alcohol  and  chloro- 
form mixed,  and  one  with  fifty  per  cent,  solution  sulphuric 
acid.  Cocain  mixed  with  all  of  these  acts  very  beautiful. 
With  the  fifty  per  cent,  sulphuric  acid  it  makes  a  very  oily- 
looking  mixture,  and  is  one  of  the  best  means  for  the  re- 
duction of  hypersensitiveness  of  dentin.  The  sulphuric  acid 
solution  should  be  neutralized  before  fillings. — Dental 
Register. 

Cataphoresis — For  Sensitive  Dentin. — The  most  favor- 
able cases,  as  regards  quick  results,  are  in  children,  and  in 
the  teeth  usually  described  as  "soft."  Cavities  which  have 
not  been  previously  filled  yield  more  easily;  this  may  not 
hold  good  when  there  is  a  good  deal  of  new  decay  under  a 
filling.  Teeth  that  cut  "hard"  and  that  have  had  fairly  tight 
fillings  in  them  for  some  time  present  most  difficulty  and  re- 
quire most  time. — H.  W.  Gillett,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cataphoresis — Salt  Water  Cocain  Solutions. — Make  the 
cocain  solution  with  water  which  contains  half  a  teaspoonful 
of  salt  to  a  two-ounce  bottle  of  water.  With  the  same 
voltage,  the  resistance  seems  to  be  very  much  less  than 
when  guaiacol  was  used.  Use  three  grains  of  cocain  to 
twelve  drops  of  the  salt  water,  holding  the  cocain  over  an 
alcohol  lamp  to  dissolve  it.  There  is  never  any  precipitation. 
— S.  L.  Strickland,  Pacific  Stomatological  Gazette. 


I04  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painless  Pulp  Kemoval. — Apply  to  cavity  one  drop  of 
adrenalin,  a  one-sixth  grain  tablet  of  cocain,  and  a  fraction 
of  a  drop  of  formaldehyd.  Produce  pressure,  lightly  and 
steadily,  gradually  increasing  until  pulp  is  thoroughly  in- 
jected. Then  wipe  cavity  dry  to  remove  surplus  formalde- 
hyd and  make  complete  exposure ;  remove  contents  of  pulp 
chamber.  Repeat  the  adrenalin  and  cocain  application  and 
apply  pressure  sufficient  to  eject  the  solution  through  the 
foramen,  when  the  pulp  can  be  removed  without  hemor- 
rhage.— Clyde  Davis,  Items  of  Interest. 

Sensitive  Necks  of  Teeth. — Nitrate  of  silver,  the  usual 
remedy  for  extreme  sensitiveness  of  the  necks  of  the  teeth, 
is  objectionable  for  the  anterior  teeth  because  of  the  discol- 
oration produced.  Tannic  acid  is  free  from  this  objection 
and  has  been  used  with  great  success,  placing  a  drop  or  two 
of  glycerin  on  a  slab  and  mixing  it  with  tannic  acid.  Apply 
by  means  of  a  stick  fashioned  to  a  blunt  point,  rubbing  it 
in  very  gently  at  first,  gradually  increasing  the  pressure  until 
no  pain  is  produced  by  li,ard  rubbing. — S.  F.  Rowland, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Aqueous  Treatment  of  Sensitive  Dentin. — This  con- 
sists in  causing  a  continuous  stream  of  water — brought  to 
the  temperature  which  experience  has  shown  to  give  the 
best  results — to  flow  into  the  cavity  while  the  excavation 
is  being  performed.  This  causes  a  remarkable  diminution, 
if  not  com])lete  loss  of  sensitiveness  in  the  dentin.  Water 
at  blood  temperature  will  give  better  results  than  105°  F., 
probabably  because  the  latter  causes  a  dilatation  of  the  capil- 
laries.— A.  E.  Sykes,  Pa.  Den.  Gazette. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Two  doses  of  chloral  hydrate,  of  10 
to  15  grains  each,  taken  one  the  evening  before  on  retiring, 
and  the  other  next  morning  before  operation  begins,  is  better 
than  cataphoresis  or  anything  else  I  have  ever  tried. — John 
T.  Crews,  Dental  Headlight. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  105 

Sensitive  Dentin. — We  have  one  reliable  standby — good 
sharp  instruments  and  careful  manipulation.  Whatever 
bur  is  used  should  be  selected  with  as  little  frictional  sur- 
face as  possible.  A  wheel  bur  will  cut  as  much,  with  less 
pain,  as  a  round  bur,  but  a  few  sizes  of  round  burs  will 
answer  the  purpose,  run  at  proper  speed.  I  believe  the 
only  reliable  thing  for  the  use  of  the  general  practitioner  is 
good  sharp  instruments,  a  steady  hand  and  a  little  bit  of 
sensible  talk  to  the  patient,  if  nervous. — F.  T.  Van  Woert, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid  as  an  Adjunct  to  Cocain. — Use  cocain 
with  adrenalin  as  a  solvent,  in  doses  varying  from  one-sixth 
to  one  and  one-half  grains,  when  the  physiological  effects  of 
cocain  have  not  appeared  and  the  patients  have  felt  little  or 
no  pain.  The  best  results  are  obtained  from  a  cocain  tablet 
which  has  no  dilutant  and  is  very  finely  divided  before  com- 
pression by  long  trituration. — Clyde  Davis  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Local  Anaesthetic:  Peroxid  of  Hydrogen. — Injected 
under  the  epidermis,  peroxid  of  hydrogen  produces  an  im- 
mediate and  complete  anaesthesia  of  the  whole  skin.  I  have 
used  it  for  over  a  year  in  opening  abscesses.  *  *  *  x 
do  not  think  any  absorption  takes  place,  as  the  intercellular 
influction  from  the  gas  generated  seems  to  produce  such 
pressure  that  the  skin  cuts  like  frozen  tissue. — H.  E.  Ken- 
dall, Med.  Record. 

Hypodermic  Injections  In  the  Gums. — A  ten  or  twenty 
per  cent,  solution  of  chloretone  in  75  per  cent,  alcohol  is 
valuable  as  a  topical  application  previous  to  the  use  of  the 
hypodermic  needle  in  the  gums.  The  alcohol  cuts  the  mucus 
and  leaves  the  membrane  absolutely  clean  with  resulting 
sterilization  of  the  field  of  operation;  the  anaesthetic  action 
of  the  chloretone  insures  the  minimum  of  pain. — T.  A. 
GoRMLEY,  Dental  Register. 


io6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia:  Sensitive  Dentin. — The  use  of 
pressure  with  obtundents  marks  a  new  era  in  the  treatment 
of  sensitive  dentin.  Carbohc  acid,  chlorid  of  zinc  or  tri- 
chloracetic acid,  in  full-strength  solutions,  applied  to  the 
desiccated  and  protected  cavity,  on  a  pledget  of  cotton 
wool,  is  covered  over  with  a  thick  layer  of  unvulcanized 
rubber,  and  pressure  applied  by  means  of  a  flat-ended  in- 
strument for  a  minute  or  two,  when  an  area  of  insensitive 
dentin  will  ordinarily  be  found  to  have  been  secured.  A 
second  application  may  be  required  at  greater  depth  of  ex- 
cavation.— Wm.  Simms,  The  Dental  Record. 

Ethyl  Chlorid. — There  is  a  special  field,  for  ethyl 
chlorid  in  cases  of  short  operations  upon  persons  who 
are  not  good  subjects  for  nitrous  oxid.  As  far  as  my  own 
experience  goes,  it  is  in  the  cases  of  alcoholics  and  of  the 
muscular,  high-colored,  thick-necked  men  that  ethyl  chlorid 
is  particularly  valuable.  In  such  cases,  I  believe,  if  the 
dose  is  properly  regulated,  it  can  be  perfectly  safely  given 
in  the  sitting  position. — J.  Blumfield,  The  Lancet. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid:  Caution. — Neugebauer  reports  that 
he  has  seen  several  cases  of  localized  gangrene  following 
the  use  of  solutions  to  which  adrenalin  had  been  added 
for  the  infiltration  method  of  local  anaesthesia.  Elderly 
persons  were  especially  liable  to  this  and  he  therefore 
cautions  against  the  use  of  adrenalin  for  old  persons. — M.  I. 
WiLBERT,  American  Journal  of  Pharmacy. 

Painless  Pulp  Removal. — Wind  a  few  fibres  of  cotton 
around  the  point  of  a  thick  nerve-broach ;  dip  in  a  mixture 
of  carbolic  acid  and  caustic  potash  (Robinson's  Remedy), 
and  apply  upon  the  exposed  area,  gradually  increasing  pres- 
sure. In  two  minutes  the  entire  contents  of  the  pulp-canal 
should  be  saponified.  Enlarge  the  opening  freely  with  large 
rose  burs,  and  remove  the  pulp  with  a  stiff,  barbed  broach. 
— Hermann  Muller,  Archiv  filr  Zahnheilkunde. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  107 

Hypersensitive  Dentin. — Hypersensitiveness  of  dentin 
is  the  result  of  pericemental  irritation  far  more  than  of  pulp 
irritation.  The  pericemental  life  of  the  tooth  is  markedly 
influenced  by  the  irritative  infection  found  always  at  the 
necks  of  untreated  teeth.  Removal  of  this  infection  is  the 
removal  of  much  of  the  cause  of  the  undue  sensitiveness  of 
dental  tissue. — D.  D.  Smith,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

For  Hypersensitive  Shallow  Cervical  Cavities. — Dry  the 
cavity  and  apply  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  deliquesced 
caustic  soda  and  carbolic  acid.  The  caustic  soda  must  have 
deliquesced  in  the  open  air  without  the  addition  of  water. 
Carefully  protect  the  soft  parts,  and  wash  off  the  tooth 
after  the  application  has  been  made. — Robert  Huey,  Penn- 
sylvania Dental  Journal. 

For  Sensitive  Dentin. — Add  carbolic  crystals  to  cocain 
hydrochlorate,  and  rub  together  till  a  thick  syrup  is  obtained 
— escharotic,  antiseptic  and  obtundent,  giving  gratifying  re- 
sults in  the  treatment  of  sensitive  dentin.  Use  rubber-dam, 
dry  almost  to  desiccation,  apply  syrup  as  above  and  dry  with 
hot  air  syringe. — C.  B.  Rohland,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Hot  carbolic  acid  applied  to  sensi- 
tive dentin  will  in  most  cases  act  as  a  satisfactory  obtundent. 
Apply  rubber-dam ;  with  pliers  dip  a  pellet  of  cotton  in 
carbolic  acid  and  hold  over  an  alcohol  flame  until  the  acid 
fries ;  then  bathe  cavity  with  it.  Repeat  when  sensitive  den- 
tin is  again  reached.  Causes  comparatively  no  pain. — G.  B. 
Stewart. 

The  Avoidance  of  Pain  in  Dental  Operations. — The  wise 
dentist  will  not  err  on  the  side  of  undue  economy  in  the 
use  of  burs.  Burs  should  be  so  used  as  to  bring  the  least 
pressure  to  bear  upon  the  exposed  dentinal  fibrils  in  carious 
cavities.  If  the  bur  is  as  large  as  the  orifice  of  the  cavity 
pressure  on  the  enclosed  air  will  cause  pain,  quite  absent  if 
a  smaller  bur  is  first  used. — ^Wm.  Simms,  Dental  Record. 


io8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cocain  Solutions  for  Extraction. — It  is  both  reckless 
and  careless  to  use  anything  higher  than  a  two  per  cent, 
sohition  for  hypodermic  injection  for  the  extraction  of  teeth, 
and  I  would  favor  no  more  than  five  grains  to  the  ounce, 
which  would  be  a  one  per  cent,  solution.  With  this  one 
gets  all  but  the  toxic  effect,  and  that  he  does  not  want. — 
D.  G.  Morrow,  Dental  Era. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — Moisten  the  cavity  freely 
and  place  in  it  a  bit  of  solid  sodium  dioxid,  allowing  a  drop 
of  water  to  fall  upon  it.  A  brief  moment  of  pain  follows, 
after  which  the  excavation  may  be  proceeded  with  almost 
painlessly.  For  deeper  work  a  second  application  may  be 
necessary. — E.  M.  Soule,  Items  of  Interest. 

Chlorid  of  Ethyl  for  Sensitive  Cavities. — Chlorid  of 
ethyl,  carefully  sprayed,  first  placing  a  pledget  of  cotton 
wool  in  the  cavity,  will  nearly  always  permit  the  preparation 
of  a  cavity  without  giving  any  pain  at  all.  It  affords  a 
rapid  method  of  getting  over  a  sensitive  operation  and  if 
carefully  applied  is  extremely  useful. — H.  W.  P.  Bennette, 
The  Dental  Record. 

Cocain  Solutions. — The  toxic  effects  of  cocain  depend 
not  only  on  the  quantity  of  the  alkaloid  injected,  but  like- 
wise, and  to  a  great  extent,  upon  the  strength  of  the  solu- 
tion. Reclus,  starting  with  a  20  per  cent,  solution,  has  grad- 
ually decreased  the  percentage  until  at  the  present  time  he 
employs  solutions  of  from  3^  to  i  per  cent.,  the  maximum, 
with  results  all  that  could  be  desired. — J.  E.,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Administration  of  Gas. — Gas  does  not  act  well  where 
liquor  and  stimulants  have  been  taken.  Some  people  have 
the  mistaken  idea  that  they  must  "brace  up"  to  have  a  tooth 
out.  When  they  come  to  me  with  too  much  of  that  I  tell 
them  to  go  away  and  sober  up  before  they  can  have  gas 
at  my  hands.  Tobacco  and  liquor  contra-indicate  the  use 
of  gas. — Dr.  Straight,  Dental  Re^^ister. 


Local  AncEsthesia.  109 

The  Administration  of  Anaesthetics. — No  one  man  has 
the  right  to  operate  and  administer  an  anaesthetic  at  the 
same  time. — E.  T.  Darby. 

Caution. — If  an  accident  should  happen  in  the  case  of 
a  physician  he  is  granted  the  privilege  of  signing  a  death 
certificate  reading  "death  by  shock."  The  dentist  cannot 
do  this;  he  must  call  in  a  coroner,  which  gives  publicity, 
and  he  cannot  afford  to  take  that  risk. — Dr.  Bartlett, 
Dental  Era. 

Chloretone  and  Nitrous  Oxid  G-as. — In  using  chloretone 
in  connection  with  nitrous  oxid  gas,  as  a  general  anaesthetic, 
I  begin  by  administering  five  grains  of  chloretone  half  an 
hour  before  administering  gas,  and  find  its  action  very  ef- 
fective. It  is  much  easier  to  anaesthetize  a  patient  who  has 
had  a  dose  of  chloretone,  and  only  one-half  to  two-thirds  the 
usual  amount  of  gas  is  necessary  to  produce  complete  in- 
sensibility.— C.  H.  Oakman,  Dental  Reviezu. 

Dentinal  Anaesthesia — Dr.  Thiesing  recommends  the 
use  of  ammonia  solution  for  dentinal  anaesthesia.  The  ob- 
jectionable properties  of  solutions  of  ammonia  salts,  which 
preclude  their  being  used  hypodermically,  disappear  com- 
pletely when  used  to  obtund  sensitive  dentin.  Ammonium 
carbonate,  in  solutions  of  five  to  twenty  per  cent.,  causes  no 
pain  and  gives  complete  anaesthesia  after  five  to  ten  min- 
utes.— Dental  Register. 

Narcotile  Anaesthesia. — The  beauty  about  narcotile 
anaesthesia  is  its  pleasantness.  Patients  are  insensible  to 
pain  long  before  they  are  past  talking,  I  can  go  ahead 
and  operate,  the  patient  being  almost  entirely  conscious 
but  feeling  slight  or  no  pain.  I  have  given  narcotile  and 
removed  temporary  abscessed  teeth  for  almost  babies 
who  would  find  no  objection  save  that  "that  stuff  made 
their  ears  roar."  The  patient  always  recovers  completely 
in  about  five  minutes  and  there  are  no  after-effects. — W. 
H.  Reaben,  Trans-Miss.  Den.  Assn. 


no  Practical  Dentistry. 

Anaesthesia. — The  tendency  to  vomit,  with  the  adminis- 
tration of  ether,  can  be  decreased,  and  vomiting  checked  in 
many  cases,  by  the  use  of  vinegar,  or  dilute  acetic  acid, 
poured  on  a  piece  of  gauze  and  held  before  the  patient's  face 
so  that  the  vapor  is  inhaled. — J.  E.  Wilkinson,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Relief  of  Nausea  after  Anaesthetics. — Good  results  fol- 
low the  use  of  drop  doses  of  nux  vomica  every  ten  minutes. 
However,  if  blood  is  present  in  the  stomach  we  must  use 
means  to  get  rid  of  it. — C.  N.  Abbott,  Dominion  Dental 
.Journal. 

Cocain  and  Adrenalin. — The  addition  of  three  to  four 
drops  of  adrenalin  to  lOO  ccm.  of  a  o.oi  per  cent,  cocain 
solution  makes  the  latter  more  efficient  than  a  o.i  to  0.2  per 
cent,  solution  without  the  addition.  For  tooth  extraction 
Braun  (Berl.  Klin.)  employs  a  solution  of  i  to  i^^  eg. 
cocain  in  i  to  2  ccm.  salt  solution,  with  the  addition  of  two 
or  three  drops  of  adrenalin;  half  injected  in  front  of  and 
half  behind  the  tooth  to  be  extracted,  at  the  level  of  the  root 
as  near  the  periosteum  as  possible. — British  Medical  Journal. 

Local  Anaesthesia. — Insensibility  of  the  mucous  mem- 
brane is  easily  produced  by  the  external  application  of  a 
beta-eucain  solution.  The  injection  of  a  one  per  cent,  solu- 
tion (to  which  eight-tenths  of  a  one  per  cent,  solution 
sodium  chlorid  has  been  added),  at  body  temperature,  is 
absolutely  painless  and  effects  thorough  anaesthesia,  lasting 
twenty-five  or  thirty  minutes. — Items  of  Jntcrest. 

Quinine  Sulphate  for  Sensitive  Dentin. — A  very  nervous 
lady  had  tried  five  different  dentists  in  Paris  to  have  her 
teeth  filled,  but  the  dentin  was  so  highly  sensitive  that  she 
could  not  submit  to  the  operation.  Schwarz  gave  her  three 
powders  of  quinin,  eight  grains  each,  to  be  taken  at  inter- 
vals of  forty-eight  hours.  The  sensitiveness  of  the  dentin 
was  entirely  lost,  and  he  filled  three  cavities  at  the  first 
sitting. — L'Odontologie. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  iii 

Cocainizing  Through  the  Nose. — Dissolve  one  of  Mul- 
ford's  tablets,  each  of  which  contains  one  one-hundreth 
grain  adrenalin  and  one-quarter  grain  cocain,  in  a  quarter- 
teaspoon  of  boiled  water.  Into  this  dip  a  cotton  plug  the 
size  of  a  lead-pencil  and  about  an  inch  long.  Place  this  in 
the  nostril  over  the  roots  of  the  teeth  to  be  operated  upon. 
— Frank  W.  Lord,  Oifice  and  Laboratory. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — In  all  pressure  anaesthesia  cases 
we  have  a  pulp-stump  which  is  vital  and  in  a  short  time 
will  be  liable  to  post-extirpation  pains.  This  may  be  avoided 
if  a  temporary  dressing  is  used  in  which  one  of  the  in- 
gredients is  carbolic  acid,  or  a  thorough  cauterization  with 
carbolic  acid  made  before  dressing  root-canals. — Clyde 
Davis,  Denial  Summary. 

The  Hypodermic  Syringe. — If  one  with  leather  pack- 
ing is  used,  a  little  glycerin  drawn  into  the  barrel,  after 
each  operation,  will  keep  the  leather  soft  and  make  the 
plunger  work  smoothly.  Before  using  the  glycerin  should 
be  forced  out  and  the  barrel  drawn  full  of  alcohol  a  couple 
of  times  to  sterilize  it. — Charles  A.  Tuller,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

A  Local  Obtundent. — Melt  together  in  a  test-tube  equal 
parts  of  menthol  and  cocain  hydrochlorate  and  add  an  equal 
amount  of  carbolic  acid.  Keep  in  a  well-stoppered  bottle. 
Before  applying  the  heated  solution  to  the  dentin  wash  the 
cavity  with  a  warm  alkaline  solution  and  dry  with  alcohol 
and  hot  air.  Also  useful  in  reducing  pain  in  fitting  bands 
and  removing  deposits  from  roots. — Dental  Era. 

Shallow  Erosion  Cavities. — In  sensitive  superficial  cavi- 
ties, due  to  erosion  or  abrasion,  a  warm  solution  of  tri- 
chloracetic acid  in  full  strength,  applied  two  or  three  times, 
the  cavity  being  dried  between  applications,  will  often  enable 
one  to  penetrate  to  sound  non-sensitive  dentin,  when  the 
cavity  may  be  prepared  as  desired. — Geo.  Gow,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 


1 12  Practical  Dentistry. 

Gum  Recession  with  Extreme  Sensitiveness. — Very  often 
the  removal  of  the  pulp  gives  not  merely  immediate  and 
complete  relief  from  pain,  but  actually  prolongs  the  useful- 
ness of  the  tooth,  for  the  reason  that  when  it  is  no  longer 
painful  cleansing  is  more  thorough,  and  the  life  of  the  teeth 
consequently  prolonged. — J.  G.  Palmer,  Items  of  Interest. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — In  cavities  where  the  dentin  is  sensi- 
tive take  a  pledget  of  cotton,  thrust  it  into  the  spirit  lamp 
and  let  it  ignite,  and  while  hot  place  it  in  the  cavity  and  leave 
it  there.  You  can  cut  sensitive  dentin  very  much  better 
after  this  treatment. — Dr.  Austin,  Dental  Era. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — A  special  remedy  is  a  combina- 
tion of  chloroform,  ether  and  menthol,  applied  with  a  hot- 
air  syringe.  This  has  seldom  failed,  even  in  the  most  ex- 
treme cases,  it  makes  the  operation  at  least  bearable. — R. 
C.  Maclaughlin,  Dominion  Den.  lour. 

Management  of  Sensitive  Dentin. — The  whole  ques- 
tion, except  in  rare  instances,  resolves  itself  into  the  follow- 
ing summar}^ :  Manipulative  skill  on  the  part  of  the  opera- 
tor; knowing  how  to  control  the  different  temperaments 
among  our  patients ;  the  invariable  use  of  the  keenest,  sharp- 
est instruments. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Exposed  Necks  of  Teeth. — When  the  gums  are  re- 
tracted, and  the  tooth  sensitive  about  the  neck,  rub  a  little 
bicarbonate  of  soda  along  the  edge  of  the  gum  with  the 
finger,  or  dissolve  about  a  teaspoonful  of  the  soda  in  half 
a  glass  of  water  and  rinse  the  mouth  thoroughly  with  this. 
— L.  Brewster,  Dental  Summary. 

Sensitive  Teeth  and  Dental  Operations. — Advise  your 
patient  to  avoid  acids  and  to  use  an  alkaline  wash  for  a 
couple  of  weeks  before  and  while  undergoing  dental  opera- 
tions, and  they  will  suffer  much  less  from  sensitive  dentin. — 
C.  C.  Harris^  Dental  Cosmos. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  113 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — In  cases  of  extreme  and 
abnormal  sensitiveness  apply  the  rubber  dam  and  place  a 
bit  of  solid  NaoOo  in  the  cavity  and  allow  a  drop  of  water 
to  fall  upon  it.  Dry  the  cavity  and  the  excavation  may  be 
proceeded  with  almost  painlessly.  For  deeper  work  a 
second  application  may  be  necessary.  Wash  the  cavity  well 
before  inserting  the  filling. — Edwin  M.  Soule,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Chloretone  for  Painless  Pulp  Removal. — For  the  re- 
moval of  pulps  in  simple  exposure  or  superficial  pulpitis 
a  saturated  solution  of  chloretone  in  ether  par  excel- 
lence. Apply  the  rubber  dam  and  force  the  saturated  solu- 
tion into  the  pulp  with  hypodermic  syringe.  Having  anti- 
septic qualities  it  causes  no  injury  to  the  root-canals. — D. 
W.  Babcock,  Dental  Register. 

Local  Ansesthesia  for  Extraction. — The  pain  of  extrac- 
tion is  caused  by  the  tearing  of  the  alveolo-dental  ligament ; 
therefore,  if  anaesthesia  by  cocain  is  to  be  effective  it  must 
act  on  the  nerve  termini  of  this  ligament.  To  insure  the 
efficacy  of  the  injection  it  must  be  made  at  the  level  of  the 
mucous  membrane,  which  adheres  closely  to  the  periosteum 
and  consequently  not  too  near  the  neck. — E.  Sauvez, 
British  Dental  Journal. 

Cataphoresis — Sensitive  Dentin. — ^The  larger  the  surface 
covered  by  the  positive  pole,  the  greater  will  be  the  surface 
obtunded.  By  using  a  disk  of  metal  over  the  saturated  cot- 
ton, and  then  placing  the  platinum  point  upon  the  disk,  a 
larger  surface  is  covered  and  better  results  obtained. — L. 
L.  Barber^  in  Cosmos. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — An  apparatus  for  ob- 
tunding sensitive  dentin  by  means  of  a  stream  of  hot  water 
directed  into  the  cavity  at  the  point  of  the  bur,  under  pres- 
sure of  compressed  air,  has  the  advantage  over  cata- 
phoresis in  that  the  effect  is  most  instantaneous. — F.  C. 
Collins,  Dental  Register. 


1 14  Practical  Dentistry. 

Eucain. — I  find  eucain  acts  upon  the  gums  much  quicker 
than  cocain,  in  fact  in  using  it  by  the  hypodermic  syringe 
for  the  purpose  of  dissecting  away  a  thick  cap  of  the  gum, 
together  with  a  portion  of  muscular  tissue,  over  a  half 
erupted  wisdom  tooth  it  has  acted  instantaneously  and 
rendered  the  operation  absolutely  painless. — Charles  A. 
Nash. 

Pulp  Extirpation. — When  you  have  removed  a  pulp,  if 
a  particle  of  nerve  is  left  the  electric  current  will  find  it  out. 
The  induction  current  can  be  applied  by  using  a  little  dry 
battery,  such  as  in  one  of  the  "ever-ready"  lamps,  using  the 
secondary  coil  pulled  out  to  its  fullest  degree  and  gradually 
pushed  in  until  response  is  had.  Solder  to  one  end  of  a  piece 
of  German  silver  wire  a  little  tube  to  hold  a  little  cotton; 
wet  the  cotton  and  apply  it  to  the  tooth,  the  negative  being 
held  in  the  patient's  hand.  It  is  a  better  test,  in  pulp  diag- 
nosis, than  heat,  cold,  or  light. — Dr.  Greevert.  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Hypersensitive  Dentin;  Local  Obtundent. — Melt  to- 
gether, in  a  test  tube,  equal  parts  menthol  and  cocain  hy- 
drochlorate  and  add  an  equal  amount  carbolic  acid.  Keep 
in  well-stoppered  colored  bottle.  Before  applying  wash  the 
cavity  with  a  warm  alkaline  solution  and  dry  with  alcohol 
and  hot  air.  Heat  the  solution  before  applying. — Dental 
Era. 

Painless  Pulp  Extirpation. — The  pulp  can  be  painlessly 
removed  by  saturating  a  small  piece  of  sponge  with  one 
part  formalin  and  four  parts  alcohol,  and  applying  imme- 
diately over  the  pulp.  Press  it  tightly  against  the  tissue 
with  a  small  piece  of  rubber.  The  pulp  will  be  completely 
anaesthetized. — Denial  Digest. 

Obtundent  for  Sensitive  Dentin. — Sharp  burs,  in  a  true 
handpiece,  turned  by  an  electric  motor  or  good  fast  engine, 
are  the  best  all-round  obtundents  of  sensitive  dentin  extant. 
— Thomas  P.  Williams,  Texas  Dental  Journal. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  115 

Pressure  Anaesthesia  in  Inaccessible  Cavities. — There  are 
many  cavities  between  the  teeth  where  pressure  anaesthesia 
can  only  be  apphed  by  drilHng  in  at  a  more  accessible  point. 
Are  we  not  justified  in  many  cases  in  proceeding  in  this 
manner?  Of  course  the  pit  would  be  repaired  by  filling. — 
R.  B.  TuLLER,  Dental  Summary. 

Formaldehyd  for  Eelief  of  Sensitiveness  at  Cervical 
Border  of  Molars. — From  personal  experience  I  can  say  that 
from  Yz  to  y2  per  cent,  of  the  40  per  cent,  solution  of  for- 
maldehyd, in  a  mouth  wash,  greatly  relieves  sensitiveness  at 
the  cervical  borders  of  the  molars.  If  its  use  is  omitted  for  a 
few    weeks,    however,    the    sensitiveness    returns. — L.    M. 

COWARDIN. 

Hypersensitive  Dentin. — In  the  use  of  zinc  chlorid  for 
hypersensitive  dentin  if  an  alcoholic  chloroform  solution  is 
used  instead  of  an  aqueous  solution  the  pain  is  greatly 
lessened  and  action  is  more  rapid  owing  to  the  desiccating 
and  obtunding  efifect  of  the  chloroform  and  alcohol. — Dr. 
HoFHEiNZ,  Dental  Cosmos. 

High-pressure  Anaesthesia. — Why  "try  and  plough  with 
a  crooked  stick,"  by  applying  cocain  on  cotton  and  then  try- 
ing to  force  it  through  the  tubuli  by  pressing  soft  rubber 
into  the  cavity,  when  by  drilling  a  pit  with  a  one-half  bur 
the  high-pressure  does  the  work  in  a  few  seconds? — S.  M. 
Weaver,  Dental  Register. 

Cataphoresis — Cocain  Solution. — Use  the  solution  of 
cocain  in  electrozone — twenty  per  cent. — it  is  reliable  and 
satisfactory ;  make  it  fresh  every  day.  A  twenty  per  cent, 
solution  of  cocain  hydrochlo.  has  been  most  frequently 
used,  but  I  now  prefer  the  solution  in  electrozone. — J,  O. 
Ely,  in  Digest. 

Obtundent  for  Sensitive  Dentin. — ^A  saturated  solution 
of  trichloracetic  acid  in  water  has  proved  most  successful. 
It  is  a  powerful  caustic  and  needs  using  with  care.  Avoid 
using  it  in  close  proximity  to  the  pulp. — Wm.  Simms,  Den- 
tal Record. 


1 1 6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painless  Pulp  Removal. — Equal  parts  of  chloroform  and 
carbolic  acid.  Using  a  French  syringe  (glass  barrel,  with 
glass  piston,  without  needle,  simply  a  canula),  pack  gutta- 
percha around  the  nozzle  to  prevent  escape,  and  inject, 
forcing  the  piston  down.  The  pulp  can  be  immediately 
twisted  out,  blanched  perfectly  white,  and  insensible  to 
pain. — E.  T.  Darby,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Formalin  in  Pulp  Removal. — Saturate  a  very  small  piece 
of  punk  with  a  solution  containing  i  part  formalin  and  4 
parts  alcohol.  Place  on  this  some  powdered  cocain  crystals, 
and  place  in  cavity  and  cover  with  unvulcanized  rubber. 
Press  gently  on  rubber  with  ball  burnisher  until  pulp  is  anaes- 
thetized.— A.  E.  Mann,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — Cocain  is  not  always  safe  when 
used  either  hypodermically  or  injected  into  a  tooth-pulp,  as 
it  will  sometimes  cause  permanent  absence  of  sensation  in 
the  parts  surrounding.  Even  the  most  minute  quantity,  car- 
ried into  the  tissues,  may  cause  very  unpleasant  results. — 
Truman  W.  Brophy,  Dental  Review. 

Pulp  Anaesthesia. — Prepare  the  cavity  as  usual.  Place 
a  pledget  of  cotton,  saturated  with  cocain,  directly  over 
the  pulp  and  fill  the  remainder  of  the  cavity  with  a  piece 
of  vulcanite.  Fit  in  the  cavity,  as  prepared,  a  short  piece 
of  orange  wood  and  direct  the  patient  to  bite  down  on  this 
with  increasing  force. — E.  T.  Loeffler,  Dental  Summary. 

Cataphoresis — Securing  Electrode  in  Cavity. — Wrap  a 
No.  30  platinum  wire  around  a  pledget  of  cotton  and  force 
same  tightly  into  cavity,  holding  wire  in  place  by  imbedding 
in  a  drop  of  sticky  wax  on  an  adjoining  tooth  or  clamp.  We 
must  have  perfect  insulation  and  perfect  contact. — J.  O.  Ely, 
Dental  Reviezv. 

Cocain  Injection. — Before  injecting  cocain  paint  the 
gum  with  campho-phenique,  full  strength,  to  prevent  push- 
ing septic  matter  into  the  gum  with  the  needle.  The  cam- 
pho-phenique by  benumbing  the  gums  aids  in  the  anaes- 
thesia.— L.  W.  JoRDON,  Dental  Summary. 


Local  Ancesthesia.  117 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Isolate  the  tooth  and  wash  out  the 
cavity  with  absolute  alcohol,  evaporating  with  hot-air  syr- 
inge. Then  apply  campho-phenique,  allowing  it  to  remain 
one  or  two  minutes.  Evaporate,  and  the  cavity  can  usu- 
ally be  cleaned  without  abnormal  sensitiveness. — I.  D.  Rey- 
nolds^ Dental  World. 

Hypersensitive  Dentin. — Fill  the  cavity  with  a  paste 
made  by  mixing  together  zinc  oxid  and  eugenol.  This  paste 
hardens  in  the  presence  of  moisture,  and  when  allowed  to 
remain  in  the  sensitive  cavity  for  eight,  fifteen,  or  more 
days  causes  the  disappearance  of  all  sensitivity. — Dr. 
Fayoux,  L'Odontologie. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — The  use  of  a  solution  of 
cocain  on  the  bur  while  excavating  a  cavity,  running  the 
bur  very  slowly,  produces  a  very  satisfactory  degree  of 
anaesthesia  in  advance  of  the  bur,  the  solution  being  forced 
into  the  tubuli  of  the  dentin. — I.  Edw.  Line,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — In  shallow  cavities  good  results 
come  from  applying  a  few  crystals  of  menthol,  dissolving 
it  in  the  cavity  with  a  drop  or  two  of  absolute  alcohol  and 
then  throwing  a  steady  but  small  stream  of  compressed  air 
into  the  cavity  until  it  is  dry. — Geo.  Zederbaum,  Dental 
Register. 

Sensitive  Cervical  Margins. — If  bicarbonate  of  soda  is 
incorporated  in  the  tooth  powder  used  by  the  patient,  sensi- 
tiveness will  be  relieved  and  be  enabled  to  thoroughly  masti- 
cate, bringing  about  a  normal  condition  of  the  saliva,  a.nd 
alkaline  powder  will  not  be  long  required. — D.  Spalding, 
Dental  Register. 

Varnish  for  Sensitive  Cavities. — "Fiddle-bow  rosin," 
two  drachms, .  dissolved  in  one  drachm  absolute  alcohol, 
makes  a  varnish  which  gives  excellent  results  in  sensitive 
cavities.  It  is  antiseptic,  makes  a  hard  glossy  coating,  and 
acts  as  an  instant  insulator. — B.  L.  Thorpe,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 


ii8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sensitive  Labial  or  Buccal  Cavities. — Erosions  at  the 
gum  margin  can  be  prepared  for  the  insertion  of  fxlHng, 
with  but  Httle  pain  to  the  patient,  by  applying  dry  tannic 
acid.  This  will  not  produce  any  bad  after-effects. — I. 
Nelson  Platt,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Sensitive  Cavities  at  the  Necks  of  Teeth. — The  shallow 
cavities  at  necks  of  teeth  are  usually  highly  sensitive,  but 
this  can  be  quickly  obliterated  by  pressure-anaesthesia  treat- 
ment when  we  wish  to  fill  them. — R.  B.  Tuller,  Dental 
Summary. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin:  A  Suggestion. — Chlorid 
of  sodium  being  used  in  the  animal  economy  to  promote 
endosmosis,  why  would  it  not,  in  solution  with  cocain,  aid 
in  conducting  the  latter  through  the  dentin? — N.  C. 
Leonard,  Dental  Headlight. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid. — To  obtain  the  best  results  from 
this  powerful  vaso-constrictor  for  arresting  hemorrhage 
after  pulp  extirpation,  it  must  be  used  freely  and  per- 
sistently. It  forms  no  blood-clot,  is  non-poisonous  and  non- 
irritating. — F.  P.  Cronkill. 

A  Convenient  Anaesthetic  Agent. — Powdered  ice,  two 
parts,  and  common  salt,  one  part,  enclosed  in  a  net  of  some 
thin  material  and  laid  directly  on  the  part  for  five  or  six 
minutes  will  produce  total  insensibility.  This  agent  has  the 
advantage  of  being  usually  at  hand  anywhere. — W.  J.  King, 
The  Critique. 

Dentin  Obtundent. — Solution  of  ammonium  carbonate. 
Preparation:  Sublimation  of  one  part  of  ammonium  chlor- 
ate and  two  parts  of  chalk,  and  solution  in  four  parts  cold 
water.  The  liquor  is  volatile  and  has  only  a  faint  ammoni- 
acal  odor.  To  to  applied  in  five  to  twenty  per  cent,  soluton ; 
acts  in  five  to  ten  minutes.  Cannot  be  used  for  hypodermic 
injection,  but  the  anaesthesia  produced  is  very  efficient. — 
Dr.  Thiersing,  Dental  Register. 


Local  Ancssthesia.  119 

Local  Anaesthetic — Chloral  Camphor. — Hydrate  of  chlo- 
ral and  camphor,  equal  parts,  rubbed  up  and  made  in  form 
of  solution,  can  be  advantageously  used  in  extracting  roots, 
lancing  abscesses,  and  toothache.  It  is  a  valuable  anaes- 
thetic, anodyne  and  soporific. — C.  R.  Taylor,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Gagging  or  Vomiting  after  the  Hypodermic  Injection 
of  Cocain. — This  vomiting  can  be  instantly  arrested  by  ad- 
ministering oxalate  of  cerium  in  one  grain  doses,  or  by  the 
aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia,  one-half  to  two  drams  in  an 
ounce  or  more  of  water. — J.  R.  Megraw,  Dental  Digest. 

Painless  Pulp  Devitalization. — Arsenic  fibre,  dipped  in 
carbolic  acid  and  cocain  crystals,  applied  to  an  exposed 
pulp,  and  properly  sealed,  will  destroy  a  pulp  with  little 
or  no  pain.  Allow  the  preparation  to  remain  two  or  three 
days  only. — H.  C.  Webb,  Items  of  Interest. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — For  obtunding  sensitive 
dentin  I  use  only  dehydration  with  alcohol  and  hot  air,  and 
such  anodynes  as  chloroform,  menthol,  creosote,  oil  of 
cloves  or  carbolic  acid,  and  in  conjunction  with  a  sharp 
bur. — Hart  J.  Goslee,  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Cataphoric  Anaesthesia. — With  cotton  and  the  alter- 
nating current  you  can  produce  a  local  anaesthesia  of  the 
tooth,  tetanizing  the  nerve  through  fatigue  of  the  muscle. — 
Prof.  Neiswanger. 

No  medicament  is  required,  the  current  itself  contract- 
ing the  muscles  of  the  blood-vessels  and  producing  anaemia 
of  the  parts. — Jno.  S.  Marshall. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Carbolic  acid  crystals  and  cocain 
hydrochlorate  rubbed  together  with  a  spatula  until  the  co- 
cain is  dissolved,  forms  a  thick  syrup  which  is  escharotic, 
antiseptic  and  obtundent,  and  gives  the  most  gratifying  re- 
sults in  the  treatment  of  sensitive  dentin. — C.  B.  Rohland. 


120  Practical  Dentistry. 

A  Local  Obtundent. — Melt  together  in  a  test  tube  equal 
parts  of  menthol  and  cocain  hydrochlorate  and  add  an  equal 
amount  of  liquid  carbolic  acid.  Keep  in  well-stoppered  bot- 
tles. Before  applying  the  heated  solution  to  the  dentin, 
wash  the  cavity  with  a  warm  alkaline  solution  and  dry  with 
alcohol  and  hot  air. — Dental  Era. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — When  pressure  anaesthesia  is  re- 
sorted to  in  the  removal  of  pulps  every  possible  antiseptic 
precaution  ought  to  be  taken  to  avoid  forcing  septic  matter 
into  the  apical  space.  Immediate  root-filling  should  not  be 
resorted  to,  but  two  to  five  days  should  be  allowed  for  a 
restoration  of  the  equilibrium  of  the  circulation  in  the  sur- 
rounding tissues. — E.  T.  Loeffler,  Dental  Summary. 

Chlorid  of  Ethyl. — The  use  of  chlorid  of  ethyl  is  very 
effective  in  all  cases.  Whether  used  for  the  extraction  of  a 
tooth  or  the  opening  of  an  abscess,  it  is  not  attended  with 
the  possible  embarrassing  results  of  a  cocain  solution. — 
P.  B.  McCuLLOUGH^  Dental  Brief. 

Local  Anaesthesia. — Insensibility  of  the  mucous  mem- 
brane is  easily  produced  by  the  external  application  of  a 
beta-eucain  solution.  The  injection  of  a  one  per  cent,  solu- 
tion (to  which  eight-tenths  of  a  one  per  cent,  solution 
sodium  chlorid  has  been  added)  at  body  temperature,  is 
absolutely  painless  and  effects  thorough  anaesthesia  lasting 
twenty-five  or  thirty  minutes. — Hermann  Thiersing, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — In  the  treatment  of  hypersensitive 
dentin,  zinc  chlorid,  as  an  obtunder,  acts  more  rapidly  in  an 
alcoholic  chloroform  solution,  owing  to  the  desiccating  and 
obtunding  effect  of  the  chloroform.  Pain  is  also  greatly 
reduced. — R.  H.  Hofheinz,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cocain  Injections. — To  avoid  hemorrhage  use  in  the 
cocain  solution  adrenalin.  It  is  of  great  value  where  injec- 
tions are  made  for  the  preparation  of  roots  for  crowns,  there 
being  much  less  bleeding  from  the  gums. — A.  N.  Gaylord, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


Local  An(zsthesia.  121 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Many  times  when  not  able  to  pre- 
pare cavities  in  sensitive  teeth  take  a  drop  or  two  of  some 
perfume  and  put  it  in  the  tooth;  the  odor  being  diffused 
may  soothe  the  mind  of  the  patient  and  you  can  go  on  with 
the  work  the  same  as  if  you  had  used  the  cataphoric  outfit. 
— A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

Obtunding  Sensitive  Dentin. — After  the  dam  is  in  po- 
sition and  the  cavity  dried  out  as  well  as  can  be  with  cotton 
and  spunk,  dip  a  piece  of  spunk  in  carbolic  acid  and  place 
in  cavity;  then  heat  a  burnisher  or  ball-headed  plugger  and 
apply  to  spunk,  gently  at  first  and  then  with  pressure,  and 
repeat  till  all  sensation  is  gone. — Y.  T.  Coghlan,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 

Filling  the  Hypodermic  Syringe. — Drop  a  small  piece 
of  absorbent  cotton  into  the  fluid  to  be  drawn  into  the  syr- 
inge. Press  the  syringe  against  the  cotton,  thus  filtering  the 
solution ;  there  will  be  no  specks  to  stop  the  syringe  and  less 
risk  of  after-irritation. — Welch's  Dental  Magazine. 

Pulp  Eemoval;  Pressure  Anaesthesia. — Cocain  is  un- 
necessary. The  anaesthesia  is  from  the  pressure  alone  and 
not  from  the  cocain.  It  can  be  done  with  absolute  alcohol 
also.  Simply  make  pressure. — J.  H.  Gaskill,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Sensitive  Dentin — Vapocain. — I  have  used  vapocain 
with  a  great  deal  of  success.  By  placing  it  in  a  cavity  and 
tying  rubber-dam  around  it,  leaving  it  there  for  the  heat  to 
expand,  I  have  had  better  success  than  in  leaving  it  ex- 
posed to  the  air. — Dr.  Van  Vleck-,  Cosmos. 

To  Prevent  Formation  of  Rust  in  Hypodermic  Needle 
Points. — Put  the  needles  in  a  bottle,  cover  with  pure  gaso- 
lin,  and  cork  tightly.  When  wanted  for  use,  blow  through 
the  needle  and  dip  in  alcohol,  and  the  odor  will  disappear. — 
H.  L.  Pratt,  Dental  World. 
9 


122  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — In  handling  as  delicate  an  organ 
as  the  pulp  we  should  use  a  solution  not  to  exceed  i  or  2  per 
cent. ;  if  we  can  produce  an  effect  at  all  by  careful  manipula- 
tion we  get  it  with  less  danger  to  the  pulp. — E.  T.  Loef- 
FLER,  Dental  Register. 

Local  Anaesthetic,  Chloretone  Formula. — To  a  saturated 
solution  of  chloretone  add  sodium  chlorid,  one  per  cent. ; 
cocain  crystals,  one  per  cent. ;  sulphate  of  atropin,  one-six- 
teenth grain  of  fluid  ounce. — P.  J.  Woolsey,  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

Pulp  Extirpation,  Pressure  Method. — Carbolic  acid  is 
preferable  to  alcohol  for  taking  up  the  cocain,  as  it  is  in 
itself  a  local  anaesthetic,  and  is  also  a  styptic ;  thermal 
changes  are  also  less  noticeable. — A.  B.  Kelly,  Dental 
Clippings. 

Peroxide  Hypodermic  Anaesthesia. — As  an  anaesthetic 
in  tooth  extraction  the  use  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen  hypo- 
dermically  is  very  much  better  than  cocain.  You  cannot 
get  a  bad  effect,  and  the  anaesthesia  is  very  pleasing. — 
Frank  N.  Brown,  Dental  Reineiv. 

Hypodermic  Injections. — All  hypodermic  injections  are 
rendered  less  painful,  and  will  be  nmrc  readily  absorbed, 
if  the  active  substance  is  dissolved  in  saline  solution  instead 
of  plain  water. — International  Jour,  of  Surgery. 

A  Local  Obtundent. — Chloreton  dissulved  in  chloroform 
is  a  convenient  obtundent  in  preparing  cavities  for  filling 
or  roots  for  crowning ;  it  is  also  a  germicide.  It  cannot  lie 
safely  used  hypodermicaWy.— International  Dental  Journal. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — In  pressure  anaesthesia  amadou 
is  superior  to  rubber  for  a  covering,  as  it  takes  up,  instead 
of  allowing  to  escape,  the  adrenalin  and  cocain. — Mr.  Hey, 
British  Dental  Journal. 


Local  Anaesthesia.  123 

Chloreton. — A  ten  or  twenty  per  cent,  solution  of 
chloreton  in  75  per  cent,  alcohol  is  valuable  as  a  topical 
application  previous  to  the  use  of  the  hypodermic  needle 
in  the  gums. — T.  A.  Gormley,  Dental  Register. 

The  Hypodermic  Syringe. — Use  a  thin  lead  washer  in 
the  needle  point  of  your  syringe ;  it  will  make  a  water-tight 
and  aseptic  joint  and  does  not  have  to  be  removed  for  a  long 
time. — Dental  Hints. 

Sterilizing  of  the  Mouth-mirror. — Sodium  peroxid  is 
an  immediate  and  perfect  sterilizer,  applicable  to  almost 
anything,  and  especially  the  mouth-mirror  and  other  things 
which  cannot  be  boiled. — C.  J.  Peters,  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Hypodermic  Needle. — Before  inserting  the  needle 
apply  a  drop  of  chloroform  to  the  skin ;  it  is  antiseptic  and 
anaesthetic. — Frank  Pollard,  American  lournal  of  Clini- 
cal Medicine. 

The  Hypodermic  Syringe. — Placing  the  hypodermic 
syringe  in  boiling  hot  water  before  using  will  prevent  sore 
and  inflamed  gums  after  extractions. — Dr.  Isham,  Dental 
Forum. 

Local  Anaesthesia. — Dissolve  in  eighty  drops  of  a  one- 
per-cent.  solution  suprarenal  extract,  one-twentieth  grain 
hydrochlorate  of  tropo  cocain,  and  one-thirtieth  grain  chlorid 
of  sodium.    Inject  thirty  to  fifty  drops. — Merck's  Annual. 

Local  Anaesthesia. — In  minor  surgical  operations  the 
pressure  induced  by  the  hypodermic  injection  of  sterilized 
water  is  often  successful  in  producing  local  anaesthesia. — 
F.  P.  Beadler,  Dental  Hints. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — A  twenty  per  cent,  solution  of  cocain 
with  carbolic  acid  as  the  solvent,  applied  hot,  will  often  make 
excavating  sensitive  dentin  quite  bearable. — N.  S.  Jenkins, 
Dental  Cosmos. 


124  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Two  parts  oil  of  cloves,  with  one 
part  carbolic  acid,  sealed  up  in  a  sensitive  cavity  for  several 
days,  possesses  great  value. — E.  Schieholm,  Dental  Review. 

Pressure  Anaesthesia. — Never  use  an  essential  oil  in  the 
cavity  before  applying  the  cocain ;  it  simply  retards  the  ef- 
fect of  the  cocain. — Dr.  James,  Dental  Summary. 

Cocain  Solutions. — In  making  cocain  solutions,  employ 
distilled  water,  to  which  phenic,  salicylic  or  boric  acid  is  to 
be  added. — C.  A.  Dund.\re,  in  Med.  and  Surg.  Reparter. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid. — This  is  a  drug  which  deteriorates 
very  rapidly  and  should  be  used  within  a  short  time  after  the 
bottle  is  opened,  else  it  becomes  acid  and  very  irritating. — 
Dr.  Sheedy,  International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Hypodermic  Needle. — Before  inserting  the  needle 
apply  a  drop  of  chloroform  to  the  skin ;  it  is  antiseptic  and 
anaesthetic. — Frank  Pollard,  Am.  Jour.  Clin.  Medicine. 

Nirvanin. — Nirvanin  must  be  boiled  to  make  it  a  stable 
solution  for  hypodermic  use.  Two  to  four  per  cent,  solu- 
tions are  be^t. — Dental  Review. 

Warm  Cocain  Solutions. — If  the  solution  of  cocain  is 
warmed  before  using,  its  anaesthetic  effect  is  more  rapid, 
more  intense,  and  more  lasting.- — I^ancet  Critic. 

Sensitiveness  at  the  Necks  of  the  Teeth. — A  saturated 
solution  of  carbonate  of  potassium  in  glycerin,  applied  to 
the  points  of  sensitiveness,  will  counteract  the  action  of  fer- 
ments and  allay  hypersensitiveness. — A.  C.  Hart,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Relief  of  Surface  Sensitiveness  in  Shallow  Cavities. — 
Carbolic  acid,  followed  by  alcohol,  evaporated  with  warm 
air,  seems  to  give  the  best  results  with  the  least  accompany- 
ing discomfort. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cervical  Sensitiveness. — Dry  the  tooth,  heat  a  burnisher 
quite  hot  and  burnish  the  sensitive  part. — Dr.  Holt,  Am. 
Den.  Weekly. 


Local  AncBsthesia.  125 

Hypersensitive  Dentin. — In  acute  hypersesthesia  nervo- 
cidin  surprises  by  its  effects,  suppressing  in  a  few  hours  all 
sensitivity  during  excavating  and  without  affecting  the 
vitality  of  the  pulp. — F.  Aguilar,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Jarring  the  tooth  with  an  automatic 
mallet,  having  a  blunt-point  planer  in  the  cavity,  aids  mate- 
rially in  inducing  the  penetration  of  fluids  into  the  dentin. — 
N.  C  Leonard,  Dental  Headlight. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — For  sensitive  places  at  the  gingival 
margins  rub  with  a  soft  stick  of  wood  dipped  in  a  solution 
of  tannin  in  glycerin.^-DR.  Rowland,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — 

Menthol    gr.xx 

Etheris    f^ss 

Chlorof ormi    f 5j 

This  will  not  completely  desensitize  all  dentin  but  it  will 
give  you  aid  in  the  painless  preparation  of  sensitive  cavities, 
especially  when  an  extensive  area  is  involved.  Adjust  the 
rubber  dam,  dip  a  pellet  of  cotton  in  the  mixture  and  place 
it  in  the  cavity.  By  the  time  your  instruments  are  ready 
the  normal  heat  of  the  tooth  will  have  volatilized  the  liquids, 
driving  the  menthol  into  the  tooth. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental 
Digest. 

Local  Anaesthesia  with  Orthoform.— 

'^.     Orthoform  neutral. 

Orthoform  muriate aa  o.i 

Aqua  distil 40 

Dissolve  the  muriate  in  the  distilled  water,  warm 
slightly  and  add  the  neutral  orthoform.  It  meets  all  the 
requirements  for  a  local  anaesthetic;  the  anaesthesia  lasts 
longer  than  cocain;  there  are  no  bad  after-effects,  as  swell- 
ing or  sloughing;  the  solutions  are  non-toxic,  and  several 
injections  can  be  made  at  one  sitting.  There  is  very  little 
hemorrhage,  and  the  wound  heals  quickly. — H.  Prinz,  in 
Ohio.  Den.  Jour. 


126  Formidcc. 

Cocain  Solution. — 

Cocain  hydrochlorate  4  grs. 

Solution  trinitrin   ( i  per  cent.) lo  minims 

Spirit  thymol  comp 34  fluid  ounce 

Distilled  water  q.  s add  i  fluid  ounce 

The  spirit  thymol  comp.  is  composed  of  benzo-boric 
acid,  thymol,  eucalyptol,  oil  of  wintergreen,  oil  of  pepper- 
mint, with  extract  of  witch-hazel,  alcohol,  and  distilled 
water. — William  T.  Wvckoff,  Denial  Brief. 

Cocain:  Formula  for  Local  Anaesthetic. — 

I^.     Cocain    hydrochl    gr.v 

Atropin   sulphate    gr.  2-5 

Boracic  acid  gr.v 

Distilled  water 5i 

Of  this  mixture  one  can  use  twenty  minims  and  only 
have  one-fourth  grain  cocain.  The  atropin  counteracts  any 
dangerous  symptoms  and  the  boric  acid  acts  as  an  anti- 
septic.— D.  G.  Morrow,  Dental  Era. 

Adrenalin-cocain. — An  adrenalin  solution  of  cocain,  on 
a  roll  of  cotton,  on  the  floor  of  the  nose  opposite  the  ends 
of  the  roots  of  the  superior  incisors  and  cuspids,  makes 
possible  the  painless  extraction,  or  cavity  preparation,  of  all 
the  anterior  teeth.    As  a  working  formula : 

IJ.    Acidi  borici    gr.  iv 

Cocain  hydrochlor gr.  xxiv 

Adrenalin  chlor gtt.  xxiv 

Aquae  dest q.  s.  oz.  ss. 

— O.  A.  La  Grone,  Dental  Oifice  and  Laboratory. 
A  Local  Anaesthetic. — 

IJ.    Cocain  hydrochlorate 

Carbolic  acid aa  gr.   x 

Atropin gr.    1-5 

One  per  cent,  solution  nitroglycerin min.  Ix 

Water f  5  ii 

Almost  perfection  in  the  way  of  a  local  anaesthetic. 
No  sloughing  of  gums ;  no  heart  trouble. — A.  N.  Gaylord, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


Local  AncEstliesia.  127 

Local  Anaesthetic. — 

Cocain 9  grains 

Antipyrin,   2  grains 

Distilled   water    •  • i  ounce 

Adrenalin  chlorid   (i-ioo  solution),   i  fluidrachm 

This  can  be  safely  used  in  all  cases,  the  adrenalm  aid- 
ing in  rapidly  anaesthetizing  tissue  locally.  It  retards  the 
absorption  of  the  cocain  by  reducing  the  amount  necessary 
and  also  by  virtue  of  its  action  as  a  cardiac  stimulant. — 
B.  B.  Atchison,  Dental  Register. 

Local  Anaesthetic. — 

n.     Gelat.  puri 3-0  gm- 

Natrii  chlorat 0.6  gm. 

Acid,  carbol.  cryst o.i  gm. 

Tropacocain    S-O  gm- 

Aquse  dest ad  loo.o  gm. 

With  the  use  of  gelatin,  as  above,  very  little,  or 
practically  no,  bleeding  accompanies  the  operation,  and 
the  danger  of  post-operative  hemorrhage  is  absolutely 
eliminated. — Fritz  Hartwig,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cocain  Combination  Formula. — Parke,  Davis  &  Co., 
soluble  tablets.  One  tablet  in  25  m.  water  gives  2  per  cent 
solution  cocain. 

IJ     Cocain    gr.54 

Sulphate    morphia    gr.% 

Sulphate    atropin    gr. 

Sterilized    water*    gtts.xxx 

Sig. — Inject  hypodermically  gtts.v  to  xv.  M. 

N.  S.  HoFF,  Ohio  Den.  Journal. 

*Sterilized  water— distilled  water  containing  8  percent,  listerin  or  enthymol. 

Obtundent  for  Sensitive  Dentin. — The  following  for- 
mula is  recommended  by  Dr.  C.  N.  Peirce: 

Cocain     gr-  v 

Carbolic   acid     gr.  xx 

Chloroform 3ss 

Muriatic  acid   min.  x 

Alcohol    3ij 

— Dental  Brief. 


126  Formulce. 

An  Anaesthetic  Free  from  Toxic  Effects. — 

I^.    Cacain  mur grs.  v 

Boracic   acid    grs.  viii 

Ext.  hamamelis 

Aquae  dest aa  3  i 

Will  not  cause  sloughing. — Items  of  Interest. 

Pulp  Removal. — Cataphoresis. 

Cocain    grs.xviij 

Aconitin    gr.o.i 

Thymol   sol    q.  s.5-j 

Adjust  rubber-dam  and  place  in  the  cavity  a  pellet  of 
cotton  saturated  with  the  above.  Apply  positive  current 
and  turn  on  15  or  18  volts.  When  the  pulp  is  anaesthetized 
(a  second  application  may  be  necessary)  remove  im- 
mediately.— W.  W.  MOOREHEAD,  OMo  DcH.  JoUV. 

Local  Anaesthetic. — 

Cocain    grs.  xv 

Glycerin 3  v 

Sulphate  of  morphia  and  atropia  gf-  j 

Carbolic   acid    gtt.  iij 

Distilled  water  q.  s.  to  make    ij  5 

— Clyde  Payne,  Pacific  Gazette. 

An  Efficient  Anaesthetic. — 

I^.    Cocain    hydrochl    grs.  ij 

Carbolic  acid gtts.  x 

Glycerin     3  i 

Listerin    5  ' 

Aqua,  dist.,  add  q.  e 5  iJ  M. 

W.  D.  Dalrymple,  International  Den.  Jour. 


CHAPTER  V 


SPECIAL   DRUGS    FOR  SPECIAL   CASES 


Orthoform  Cotton. — -Saturate  cotton  with  a  saturated 
solution  of  orthoform  in  cotton.  Dry  and  keep  in  conveni- 
ent bottle.  Very  useful  for  packing  the  alveoli  after  extrac- 
tion, to  prevent  pain ;  also  other  wounds  liable  to  be  painful, 
such  as  pyorrhoea  pockets,  exposed  pulps,  lacerated  gums 
after  extraction  of  impacted  third  molars,  etc. — Dental 
Register. 

Trichloracetic  Acid. — Trichloracetic  acid  in  dental 
practice  has  a  wider  range  of  application  than  any  other 
single  preparation.  First,  it  is  most  excellent  in  the  treat- 
ment of  pyorrhoea,  arresting  the  accumulation  of  pus  in 
very  short  order.  In  the  treatment  of  putrescent  pulp-canals 
it  acts  like  a  charm;  carefully  applied  to  spongy  gums  it 
gives  better  results  than  anything  else;  in  pericementitis 
arising  from  calcis  deposits  it  is  excellent.  It  is  both 
escharotic  and  astringent,  and  it  destroys  abnormal  surface 
tissue  and  purifies  the  same  in  a  few  moments  after  being 
applied. — H.  C.  McK.,  Dental  Brief. 

Neurocain. — I  have  found  the  preparation  called  "Neu- 
rocain"  most  useful.  It  is  pure  cocain  hydrochlorate  in 
little  pellets  %  inch  long,  weighing  i-i2th  gr.  Its  chief 
advantage  is  its  easy  solubility.  One  of  these  pellets,  or  a 
portion  of  one,  can  be  taken  up  in  the  dressing  forceps  and 
placed  exactly  over  the  exposure  and  moistened  with  a  very 
small  quantity  of  adrenalin-chlorid ;  in  a  few  seconds  you 
have  a  concentrated  solution  ready  for  pressure. — J.  A. 
FoTHERGiLL,  British  Dental  Journal. 

129 


130  Medicinal. 

Disinfection  of  Ulcerated  Surfaces. — To  prevent  the 
superficial  coagulation  of  an  ulcerated  surface  in  the  mouth, 
while  disinfecting  with  bichlorid  solution  ( i :  2000,  as  hot  as 
can  be  borne),  it  is  always  well  to  add  three  minims  of  acetic 
acid  to  every  two  ounces  of  the  bichlorid  solution.  Or  the 
surface  of  an  ulcer  on  the  gum  may  be  washed  and  disin- 
fected with  ten  per  cent,  argyrol  instead  of  the  bichlorid. — 
A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Oil  of  Cloves. — Oil  of  cloves  is  essentially  non-irritating, 
and  imparts  a  cjuieting  and  soothing  effect  not  obtained 
by  any  of  the  other  oils.  As  an  antiseptic  it  is  sufficiently 
potent  to  destroy  most  forms  of  bacteria  found  in  the  treat- 
ment of  pulpless  teeth.  The  combination  of  these  two 
qualities  makes  it  especially  desirable  in  treating  teeth 
where  infection  has  passed  through  the  apex  and  set  up  in- 
flammation in  the  surrounding  tissues. — J.  R.  Shannon, 
D€ntal  Digest. 

Cocain  Antidote. — Oppose  the  only  unpleasant  feature 
about  cocain — the  contraction  of  the  blood-vessels.  If 
you  will  exhibit  with  it,  say,  one-fiftieth  of  a  grain  of  glo- 
noin,  which  you  can  get  in  hypodermic  tablet  triturates,  you 
will  have  no  bad  results  unless  the  patient  absorbs  at  least 
a  grain  or  so  of  cocain. — R.  H.  M.  Dawbarn,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Cocain  Poisoning — Rapid  and  feeble  pulse;  irregular 
respiration  ;  dizziness ;  cold  perspiration ;  pallor  or  cyanosis 
of  the  skin  and  mucous  membrane,  and  a  tendency  to  syn- 
cope. Whiskey,  brandy,  or  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia 
should  be  given  to  combat  the  condition.  Amyl  nitrate, 
five  to  ten  minims,  by  inhalation,  is  also  indicated. — Dental 
Brief. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  Antidote. — The  use  of  a  solution  of 
sodium  chlorid  after  the  application  of  silver  nitrate  to 
any  of  the  mucous  membranes  will  do  away  with  the  great 
discomfort  to  the  patient  resulting  from  the  application 
of  this  drug. — Walter  Griess,  Therapeutic  Gazette. 


special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases.  131 

Test  for  Peroxid  of  Hydrogen. — If  there  is  any  reason 
to  doubt  the  strength  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  drop  a  crystal 
of  permanganate  of  potash  into  the  doubtful  fluid.  The 
violence  or  otherwise  of  the  reaction  will  gauge  how  nearly 
the  solution  is  up  to  the  standard. — G.  F.  Bush,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Haemophilia. — -Perhaps  the  administration  of  calcium 
chlorid  is  tlie  most  scientific  treatment.  Cases  are  cited 
where  this  drug  has  been  used  with  wonderful  success.  On 
a  man  of  20— alveolar  abscess — incision  }i  inch  long;  pro- 
fuse hemorrhage  in  spite  of  pressure  and  styptics.  He  had 
several  times  bled  until  he  fainted.  Calcium  chlorid  was 
given  in  grain  doses  every  two  hours ;  after  three  doses  the 
blood  formed  a  firm  clot.  Worthy  of  trial,  though  in  some 
cases  no  benefit  resulted. — Chas.  A.  Porter^  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Camphor  Powder. — Moisten  camphor  with  alcohol,  and 
it  can  be  rubbed  into  an  almost  impalpable  powder. — Dental 
Summary. 

Oil  of  Cassia. — While  the  most  potent  of  the  essential 
oils  as  an  antiseptic,  it  is  also  a  most  powerful  irritant,  and 
the  places  are  few  where  it  can  be  used  successfully.  If 
left  in  contact  with  the  soft  tissues  it  will  form  a  blister 
in  twenty-four  hours. — C.  H.  Walsh,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Alcohol  Injections  in  Neuralgia. — Oswalt  injects  i  or 
1.5  c.c.  of  80  per  cent,  alcohol,  to  which  .01  gm.  of  cocain  or 
stovain  has  been  added,  making  the  injection  along  the 
trunk  of  each  of  the  branches  afifected,  at  the  point  where 
they  emerge  from  the  bone.  He  has  never  had  the  slightest 
mishap  or  unpleasant  by-efifect.  The  pain  was  arrested  at 
once.  In  at  least  90  per  cent,  of  the  cases  the  neuralgia 
was  cured  by  the  procedure. — Journal  of  the  American 
Medical  Association. 


132  Medicinal. 

Adrenalin-cocain. — Congested  pulps  are  difficult  to  de- 
stroy, the  congested  condition  preventing  the  absorption  of 
the  agent  used.  Because  of  its  constricting  influence,  the 
use  of  adrenalin-chlorid  will  relieve  this  congestion  and  put 
the  pulp  in  condition  to  absorb  the  cocain  and  bring  about 
the  desired  result.  Therefore  the  use  of  this  combination 
of  the  two  drugs  is  most  useful  and  helpful. — C.  C.  Harris, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Acute  Pericemental  Inflammation;  Leeches. — In  a  case 
of  severe  pericemental  inflammation,  due  to  having  drilled 
too  close  to  the  pulp,  with  a  very  small  drill  in  the  hand- 
piece perforate  the  process  to  as  near  the  apex  of  root  as 
possible;  then  apply  leech  after  leech  until  six  are  well 
filled. — Dr.  U.  Smith,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Silver  Nitrate. — See  that  all  the  teeth  back  of  the  ca- 
nines are  given  a  good  treatment  with  a  saturated  solution 
of  silver  nitrate  as  soon  as  possible  after  eruption.  Apply 
it  with  a  small  swab,  letting  it  stay  a  minute  and  pushing  it 
with  an  explorer  down  into  the  sulci.  The  staining  is  only 
superficial  and  caries  is  generally  prevented,  and  if  it  oc- 
curs it  is  greatly  retarded. — H.  F.  Hamilton,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Formaldehyd  in  Blind  Abscess. — Secure  free  access  to 
root-canals,  open  as  far  as  possible,  using  sulphuric  acid, 
50  per  cent.,  and  follow  with  hydrozone.  Dry  as  thoroughly 
as  possible,  and  place  in  each  canal  a  wisp  of  cotton  sat- 
urated with  formaldehyd,  and  seal  with  gutta-percha  stop- 
ping for  a  week  or  ten  days.  Should  formaldehyd  drop 
on  tongue,  cheek  or  lips,  swab  with  cotton  dipped  in  grain 
alcohol. — J.  H.  Hanning,  Dental  Headlight. 

A  Substitute  for  Iodoform. — Where  iodoform  is  used 
to  any  great  extent,  and  the  odor  is  objectionable,  an  ex- 
cellent substitute  will  be  found  in  carvacrol  iodid,  the  germ- 
destroying  qualities  of  which  will  be  found  far  superior  to 
those  of  iodoform. — Items  of  Interest. 


special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases.  133 

Dormant  Abscess. — Apply  the  dam,  thoroughly  sterilize 
the  field,  remove  as  much  caries  as  possible  without  opening 
into  the  chamber  (or,  if  in  cavity,  drill  as  far  into  the  dentin 
as  safe,  without  reaching  the  chamber),  and  seal  in  a  paste 
of  paroform,  oil  of  cloves,  and  trikresol ;  leave  it  from  two  to 
four  days.  This  will  penetrate  through  the  tubuli  and  dis- 
infect well  up  into  the  root,  so  that  at  the  next  sitting  the 
chamber  can  be  opened  and  treatment  proceeded  with  with- 
out danger  of  stirring  up  a  hornets'  nest. — Elgin  Mawhin- 
NEY,  Dental  Review. 

Hydrogen  Dioxid. — A  great  many  cases  of  necrosis 
of  the  thin  margins  of  the  alveolar  process  are  brought 
about  by  the  injudicious  use  of  hydrogen  dioxid.  The  prep- 
arations have  to  be  preserved  at  all  temperatures  about 
60°  with  acids,  and  its  injudicous  use  will  result  in  a  great 
deal  of  destruction. — A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Thymocamphene. — As  a  disinfectant  canal  dressing  to 
two  drachms  each  of  thymol  and  phenol  one  drachm  of  cam- 
phor gum  is  added.  Mixed  in  a  dry  test  tube  and  fused 
with  low  heat,  the  camphor  thoroughly  dissolves  and  the 
result  is  a  stable  liquid  at  ordinary  temperatures. — Dental 
Register. 

For  Erosion. — A  paste  of  milk  of  magnesia  and  pre- 
pared chalk,  applied  around  the  necks  of  the  teeth  before 
retiring,  will  remain  longer  than  any  preparation  yet  tried. 
Spread  on  a  piece  of  thin  muslin  and  placed  under  the  lip  at 
night  it  will  be  found  efficient  in  very  wet  mouths. — Dental 
Summary. 

Adrenalin  the  Antidote  to  Cocain. — Adrenalin  is  the 
ideal  antidote  for  cocain  poisoning,  and  when  combined 
with  that  drug  neutralizes  all  toxic  effects.  I  have  never 
seen  any  untoward  results,  though  I  use  a  grain  or  a  grain 
and  a  half  in  operations  about  the  face. — Clyde  Davis,  Items 
of  Interest. 


134  Medicinal. 

Odontalgia. — For  the  relief  of  local  odontalgia  caused 
by  inflammation  of  the  pulps  use  acetate  of  morphia  and 
clove  oil,  applied  on  cotton  and  sealed  in  for  a  day  or  two, 
then  use  arsenic  for  devitalization,  sealed  in  with  gutta- 
percha.— K.  P.  xA.SHLEY,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Sozoiodole. — Prophylactic  in  threatened  periostitis  and 
gingivitis.  Apply  to  the  gum  directly  over  the  root  of  the 
affected  tooth.  Apply  at  night  on  cotton  tampon ;  through 
the  day  apply  by  means  of  moistened  finger  tips. — Du. 
BucKEiSEN,  Pacific  Stom.  Gaset. 

Hydrogen  Peroxid;  Precaution. — Hydrogen  peroxid  is 
a  very  far-reaching  agent,  carrying  destruction  to  the 
media  in  which  bacteria  are  growing,  yet  it  is  very  harm- 
ful in  the  presence  of  granulations.  A  sinus  which  would 
naturally  heal  very  quickly  as  soon  as  granulations  are 
well  formed  may  be  kept  open  for  months  by  the  im- 
proper use  of  this  most  valuable  agent. — Robert  T.  Morris, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Adrenalin-cocain  Solution. — (i)  In  a  small  glass  dish 
(as  a  salt  cellar)  place  one  or  two  drops  of  water;  (2)  add 
one-sixth  grain  compressed  tablet  cocain  (Wyeth's)  and 
stir  until  it  makes  a  clear  solution;  (3)  add  four  to  six 
drops  adrenalin  chlorid ;  (4)  add  witch-hazel,  quantity  suf- 
ficient to  fill  hypodermic  syringe. — Clyde  Davis,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Gingivitis. — In  simple  gingivitis  nothing  is  better  than 
painting  the  whole  gum  with  a  saturated  solution  of  po- 
tassium iodid  (it  matters  not  if  the  patient  swallow  a 
little).  Do  this  daily  for  four  or  five  days.  Then  give 
sozoiodol  internally  (gr,  iii)  three  time  daily,  after  meals. — 
Dental  Revieiv. 

The  Use  of  Alkalies  in  Relieving  Pain. — Bicarbonate 
of  soda,  mixed  with  laudanum  or  cocain,  applied  on  cotton 
in  the  cavity  of  an  aching  tooth,  will  often  relieve  pain. — 
L.  Brewster,  Dental  Snmmary. 


special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases.  135 

Formaldehyd  in  the  Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess. — 

From  one  to  three  drops  formaldehyd,  placed  with  minim 
syringe,  will  cause  granulation  in  alveolar  fistula.  Applied 
at  time  of  root  dressing  it  will  hasten  cure,  generally  mak- 
ing short  work  of  abscesses  with  fistulous  opening. — J.  H. 
Hanning,  Dental  Headlight. 

Odontalgia. — A  mixture  of  equal  parts  chloral  hydrate 
and  camphorated  water  is  a  valuable  anodyn,  when  applied 
locally  for  odontalgia,  saturating  a  small  quantity  of  cotton 
with  the  mixture  and  placing  it  in  the  cavity ;  also  for  peri- 
odontitis, applying  it  to  the  gum  over  the  affected  tooth. — 
C.  R.  Baldwin,  Dental  Summary. 

Creosoted  Charcoal  Points  for  Alveolar  Abscess. — Dry 

out  root-canals,  dress  with  oil  of  cassia;  insert  a  creosoted 
charcoal  point  and  seal  with  chloro-percha  and  cement.  A 
week  later  an  upper  lateral  so  treated  received  a  large  gold 
filling  with  no  subsequent  trouble. — E.  R.  Tait,  Pacific 
Medical  Dental  Gazette. 

Mentho-phenol. — Melt  together  three  parts  menthol 
crystals  with  one  part  phenol  crystals.  This  is  useful  as  an 
analgesic,  applied  to  an  aching  pulp  or  to  painful  tissues 
of  socket  after  tooth  extraction.  It  has  marked  antiseptic 
properties,  but  is  not  disinfectant  in  the  degree  required 
for  treatment  of  putrescent  conditions. — J.  Morgan  Howe, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

For  Periostitis. — To  a  saturated  solution  of  iodin  crys- 
tals in  absolute  alcohol  add  one  part  of  tincture  of  aconite 
and  one  part  chloroform. — British  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

Iodoform. — While  iodoform  may  not  be  in  itself  anti- 
septic, yet  when  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  tissues  some- 
thing is  evolved  which  inhibits  the  growth  of  microorgan- 
isms, and  at  the  same  time  stimulates  the  parts  to  healthy 
granulation. — Thos.  L.  Gilmer,  Dental  Digest. 


1 36  Medicinal. 

Treatment  of  Abscesses. — Thymol  dissolves  in  oil  of 
eucalyptus  and  forms  a  valuable  agent  in  the  treatment  of 
alveolar  abscesses,  especially  the  mild  forms  of  chronic  blind 
abscesses. — Geo.  W.  Cooke,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Haemophilia. — Very  little  can  be  done  for  this  disease 
except  to  improve  the  general  constitution.  Local  hemor- 
rhages are  best  controlled  with  compression,  gelatin,  and 
adrenalin,  but  the  latter  two  should  never  be  injected  sub- 
cutaneously. — H.  Sahli,  Medical  News. 

Odontalgia:  Treatment  with  Chloral  Hydrate. — Use  a 
solution  of  fifteen  parts  of  chloral  hydrate  in  one  hundred  of 
glycerin.  A  pellet  of  cotton  is  saturated  with  the  solution 
and  carefully  introduced  into  the  cavity.  The  pain  ceases  at 
once. — Le  Monde  Dentaire. 

Antral  Medication. — Harm  may  be  done  in  antral  work 
by  using  caustic  and  irritant  drugs.  A  ten  per  cent,  solu- 
tion of  chinasol  is  effective  for  disinfection,  and  is  stimulat- 
ing without  producing  irritation. — W.  A.  Cook,  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

Facial  Neuralgia. — Dr.  Tourtelot  discussed  the  subject 
of  facial  neuralgia  and  reported  four  severe  cases  cured  in 
three  or  four  days  by  injections  of  alcohol  at  60°,  after 
having  exhausted  the  long  list  of  therapeutic  agents  usually 
available  in  cases  of  this  sort. — Revue  de  Stomatologic. 

Iodoform. — There  are  several  substitutes  for  iodoform 
which  act  much  in  the  same  way  and  have  not  its  objection- 
able odor.  The  best  of  these  is  iodol  which  contains  90  per 
cent,  iodin. — H.  Leonard  Darrell,  Dental  Record. 

Protargol  for  Suppuration, — Protargol  is  an  excellent 
remedy  in  all  cases  of  suppuration.  From  ten  to  fifteen  per 
cent,  solution  seems  to  act  best.  It  does  not  stain  like  silver 
nitrate,  and  is  not  caustic.  — Dental  Review. 


special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases.  137 

For  Neuralgia. — Equal  parts  of  benzoin  and  peppermint 
oil,  rubbed  on  the  affected  part  or  sprinkled  on  a  cloth 
wrung  out  of  hot  water,  acts  like  a  charm  in  many  cases. — 
Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 

Neuralgic  or  Muscular  Pain. — Guaiacol  mixed  with 
equal  parts  of  glycerin  and  applied  over  the  seat  of 
neuralgic  or  muscular  pain  will  always  give  quick  relief. — 
Medical  Summary. 

Reflex  Pain  from  Nodules,  Pulpitis,  etc. — When  a  pulp 
cannot  be  immediately  devitalized,  on  account  of  some 
obstacle  or  other,  the  following  combination  proves,  in  a 
majority  of  cases,  a  happy  one: 

R.    Acetanilid gr.  viii 

Phenacetin gr.  xv 

Caffein  citrate  gr.  xv 

Misce  et  ft.  pulv.  no viii 

Sig. — One  to  be  taken  every  two  hours. 

— Leo  Greenbaum,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 
Chloroform  Liniment. — 

Chloroform 3ii 

Ether 3ii 

Alcohol 5i 

Gum  camphor  3i. 

This  is  especially  useful  in  painful  conditions  following 
an  arsenical  application,  insertion  of  crown  or  bridge,  and 
after-pains  of  extraction,  opening  alveolar  abscess,  etc. 
Apply  to  the  gum  on  a  tuft  of  cotton  saturated  with  the 
liniment. — Wm.  H,  Trueman,  International  Dental  Journal. 

A  Hemostatic. — 

5.    Common  resin,  pulv    3  iv. 

Carbolic  acid,  95  per  cent 3  iij. 

Chloroform    5  iij .  M. 

Make  a  short  thick  cotton  rope,  larger  than  the  wound 
to  be  treated.     Moisten  the  end  well  with  the  compound, 
and  plug  the  cavity  tightly.     The  bleeding  will  cease  almost 
as  if  by  magic. — J.  V.  Wicks,  Items  of  Interest. 
10 


138  Formula:. 

Pericementitis. — Tie  a  strong  cord  around  the  root  and 
make  traction  :  then  paint  the  gingival  margin  of  the  gum 
with  two  or  three  heavy  coats  of  compound  tincture  of 
iodin ;  then  give  the  tooth  a  rest. — Dental  Reviezv. 

Ptyalism. — For  tender,  bleecHng  gums,  from  any  cause, 
associated  with  fetid  breath : 

Formaldehyd  (40  per  cent.)    3i 

Thymol   gr.x 

Tincture  Benzoini  Comp 3ij 

Alcoholis q.  s.  ad  $\\] 

Teaspoonful  in  a  glass  of  water  as  mouth  wash,  every 
three  hours. — Medical  Ne^es. 

Inflamed  and  Spongy  Gums. — When  a  patient  com- 
plains of  bleeding  gums  on  brushing  the  teeth,  I  prescribe 
the  following: 

I5L.    Plumb,   acetat    gr.x 

Tinct.   opii    5i 

Aqua    rose    q.s.ad^i     M. 

Sig. — Apply  on  cotton  two  or  three  times  a  day.  Shake  well 
before  using. 

— J.  R.  Megraw,  Dental  Digest. 

Painful  Erosion. — The  following  application  to  eroded 

.spots  that  are  painful  will  be  found  tiseful : 

5-    Gum  mastich  (powder) 3i 

Zinci   chloridi    min.  v 

Chloroformi  5ss 

To  be  used  as  a  paint. — J.  Roystox,  Dental  Record. 

Treatment  of  Painful  Eroded  Spots. — 

li.    Gum  mastic   (powder)    3  i 

Chloroform 3  ss 

Zinc  chlorid gtt.  v 

To  be  used  as  a  paint. 

This  will  be  found  useful,  used  by  the  patient  with  in- 
structions to  dry  the  tooth  and  paint  on  the  solution,  allow- 
ing it  to  harden  while  the  tooth  is  kept  dry. — J.  Royston, 
Dental  Record. 


special  Drugs  for  Special  Cases.  139 

For  Soothing  Irritated  and  Lacerated  G-ums. — 

IJ.    Boro-glycerin min.  x 

Resorcin    gr.  x 

Eau  de  Botot min.  v 

Water   (io5°F.)    min.  xc.     M 

Sig. — Inject  between  gum  and  root.     Have  patient  hold  in  moulli 
two  minutes  or  longer. 

— Dental  Reviezv. 


Pericementitis. — If,    instead   of   using   equal   parts    of 
aconite,  iodin  and  chloroform,  you  use  this  prescription : 

5^     Tine.  Aconiti   (rad.) f^i 

Chloroformi     f^iv 

Menthol    gr.xx 

you   will   get    excellent    results. — J.    P.    Buckley,    Dental 
Digest. 

Smoker's  Gingivitis. — 

Salol   I  part 

Tine,  catechu   4  parts 

Spts.  menth.  pip 120  parts 

Teaspoonful  in  half  a  glass  of  tepid  water,  as  a  mouth-wash. 

— Indian  Medical  Journal. 


CHAPTER  VI 


ANTISEPSIS,  PROPHYLAXIS,  STERILIZATION, 

ETC. 


Aseptic  Broach-holder. — Take  a  spring  tempered  brass 
wire,  size  of  wire  B  &  S  gauge  No.  ii,  and  drill  a  hole 
about  one-half  to  three-fourths  of  an  inch  with  a  drill  about 
the  same  size  as  the  universal  broach.  Then  cut  ofif,  making 
it  three  and  one-half  inches  long.  Take  any  barb  broach, 
seizing  it  with  a  flat  nose  plier,  and  bend  the  shank  about 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  at  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees  and 
force  it  into  the  socket  in  the  handle,  and  you  have  a  broach- 
holder  that  will  be  a  pleasure  to  use,  as  it  is  aseptic.  Have 
the  holders  nickel-plated.  Any  size  of  wire  that  suits  can 
be  used. — C.  B.  Powell,  Dental  Brief. 

Oral  Prophylaxis. — Cleanliness  is  the  essential  thing 
in  oral  prophylaxis,  but  its  accomplishment  is  not  such  a 
simple  matter  as  ordinarily  considered.  Carbolic  acid  and 
bichlorid  solutions,  held  in  the  mouth,  come  in  contact  with 
only  those  germs  that  are  superficially  located  and  destroy 
them.  When  hydrogen  dioxid  is  used  it  oxidizes  the  or- 
ganic deposits  about  the  teeth,  loosens  up  the  secretions 
about  the  gums,  and  sets  free  germs  that  were  at  first  in- 
accessible to  the  action  of  carbolic  acid  or  bichlorid  solu- 
tions. If,  after  the  germs  are  thus  set  free,  carbolic  acid 
or  bichlorid  solutions,  or  further  quantities  of  hydrogen 
dioxid  be  used,  the  most  desirable  state  of  asepsis  is  ob- 
tained.— G.  V.  I.  Brown,  Dental  Digest. 

141 


142  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Use  of  Mouth-washes. — Enough  of  a  mouth-wash 
should  be  taken  in  to  thoroughly  bathe  the  parts  when  the 
cheeks  and  lips  are  distended,  forcibly  swishing  it  about  in 
the  mouth,  keeping  this  up  for  at  least  five  minutes,  or,  bet- 
ter still,  ten.  The  distention  of  the  space  with  the  mouth- 
wash not  only  cleanses  the  parts,  but  it  begets  a  habit  of 
movement  of  the  surrounding  muscles,  so  that  these  spaces 
do  not  collect  material  that  becomes  foul  and  infects  the 
whole  buccal  cavity. — W.  J.  Turner   Dental  Cosmos. 

Cleansing  the  Teeth. — For  cleansing  teeth  I  use  a 
germicidal  agent  that  is  made  of  iodol,  salol,  dissolved  in 
chloroform  and  alcohol,  to  which  is  added  a  small  quantity 
of  oil  of  cinnamon  or  oil  of  cloves.  I  apply  this  with  a 
camel's  hair .  brush,  or  bibulous  paper,  to  the  dry  teeth. 
Allow  it  to  remain  a  minute  or  two,  and  follow  with  a  mix- 
ture of  iodin  and  chloroform,  equal  parts,  allowing  this  to 
dry. — H.  C.  Register,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Bromo-chloron  as  a  Disinfectant. — Bear'ing  in  mind 
that  bacteria  cannot  live  in  its  presence,  it  seems  to  me 
there  is  a  wide  range  of  usefulness  for  this  agent.  It  is 
non-irritant,  non-escharotic,  and  non-toxic ;  colorless, 
almost  odorless,  and  tasteless.  Its  action  is  confined  to  dead 
matter;  it  will  not  attack  the  tooth  substance  nor  anything 
living  and  animal.  It  destroys  bacteria  and  burns  up  all 
sorts  of  dead  material.  It  has  many  advantages  over  all 
the  other  reagents,  without  any  of  their  obvious  disad- 
vantages.— D.  W.  Barker,  Items  of  Interest. 

Silver  Nitrate:  Precaution. — After  cleansing  the  teeth, 
and  in  all  infectious  conditions  of  the  gums  and  oral  cavit>, 
I  use  very  frequently  a  10  per  cent,  silver  nitrate  solution 
applied  on  a  small  swab.  To  prevent  and  neutralize  the 
escharotic  effects  first  apply  tincture  of  iodin  liberally  over 
the  gums  and  about  the  teeth  (but  not  in  the  cavities,  as  the 
teeth  would  discolor).  Also  follow  the  silver  nitrate  with 
more  iodin,  which  prevents  any  free  silver  nitrate  remaining. 
— Otto  Hollinger,  Dental  Review. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  143 

Antiseptic  Fillings. — An  antiseptic,  incorporated  in 
oxyphosphate  of  zinc,  gives  a  good  foundation  for  a  metal 
filling  and  has  sufficient  strength  to  protect  the  pulp  from 
pressure.  Hydronapthol  is  a  powerful  antiseptic  and  at  the 
same  time  non-toxic  and  non-irritant,  and  has  no  disagree- 
able odor.  For  convenience  in  using  keep  hydronapthol 
mixed  with  cement  powder  in  different  proportions,  mixing 
by  weight,  ranging  from  i  to  i  to  i  to  5  for  cavities  so 
deep  that  all  the  infected  dentin  cannot  be  removed,  to  i  to 
20  under  gold,  or  i  to  100  for  setting  an  inlay. — E.  M. 
Roger,  Dental  Brief. 

Sterilizing  the  Mouth. — Dr.  H.  C.  Register  says  that 
he  has  a  number  of  patients  who  visit  him  every  ten  days 
for  treatment  of  the  mouth.  He  uses  a  germicidal  wash  that 
is  colored,  so  that  it  will  stain  any  mucoid  deposits  on  the 
teeth.  He  uses  it  as  a  spray,  with  high  pressure  of  con- 
densed air,  and  blows  it  in  between  the  teeth  and  into  al- 
veolar pockets.  If  any  of  the  teeth  are  not  cleaned  by  it,  the 
coloring  material  will  indicate  the  places  where  hand  polish- 
ing with  abrasives  should  be  used  to  completely  free  the 
teeth  from  any  deposit  that  is  likely  to  set  up  caries,  or  to 
serve  as  a  focus  of  infection. — Brief. 

Nitrate  of  Silver. — See  that  all  the  teeth  are  given  a 
good  treatment  with  a  saturated  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
as  soon  as  possible  after  eruption.  Simply  dry  off  the  sur- 
faces and  put  on  the  solution  with  a  small  swab,  letting  it 
stay  a  minute,  during  which  time  push  it  with  an  ex- 
plorer down  into  the  sulci.  This  is  an  invariable  rule, 
carried  out  with  great  success  for  the  above  length  of  time. 
Decay  is  generally  prevented,  or  when  it  does  occur  is 
greatly  delayed. — Harry  F.  Hamilton,  International  Den- 
tal Journal. 

Sterilization  of  Broaches,  Burs,  etc. — Immediately  after 
using,  scrub  thoroughly  with  a  good  bristle  brush  and  an 
abundant  lather  of  some  good  detergent  soap,  rinse  lender 


144  Practical  Dentistry. 

a  stream  of  very  hot  water,  dry  each  one  carefully,  and  lay 
between  the  folds  of  a  sterilized  towel.  Just  before  using 
dip  in  absolute  alcohol  and  pass  it  over  a  flame.  The  mi- 
nute adherent  quantity  of  alcohol  will  be  burned  off  without 
injury  to  the  temper  of  the  finest  instrument. — S.  E. 
Knowles,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Prophylaxis. — That  oral  prophylaxis  has  come  to  be  a 
recognized  factor  in  saving  the  teeth  and  health  of  our  pa- 
tients, no  one  can  deny.  By  the  use  of  this  term,  prophy- 
laxis, we  imply  a  much  broader  meaning  than  is  given  by 
many  who  know  so  little  of  the  word  as  to  construe  it  as 
the  simple  cleaning  of  the  teeth.  It  is  "the  surgical  or  manip- 
ulative treatment  for  the  preservation  of  health"  and  implies 
all  forms  of  service  which  have  for  their  results  the  im- 
provement or  maintaining  of  health. — Levi  C.  Taylor,  Den- 
tal Brief. 

Bleaching  Enamel  with  Sodium  Dioxid. — When  sodium 
dioxid  is  melted  on  ice  a  thick  paste  of  the  undischarged 
sodium  dioxid  can  be  obtained  which,  when  placed  upon 
the  dried  enamel  and  heated  with  a  hot  instrument,  will 
give  up  a  tremendous  quantity  of  nascent  oxygen.  This 
will  bleach  the  stained  enamel  of  a  tooth  in  which  the  pulp 
is  alive.  It  should  be  carefully  washed  off  with  water,  and 
neutralized  with  a  weak  acid. 

— J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  Perfect  Dental  Antiseptic. — Solidified  formaldehyd 
possesses  all  the  qualifications  necessary  to  a  perfect  dental 
antiseptic.  It  is  the  most  penetrating  antiseptic  ever  known ; 
it  is  soluble  in  water;  it  does  not  produce  a  coagulum, 
thereby  shutting  itself  out.  Its  toxic-escharotic  effect  is  nil, 
and  pain  seldom  or  never  follows  its  application,  except  in 
dead  teeth,  when  there  is  some  pain  and  soreness,  both  of 
which  invariably  subside  within  a  few  hours. — F.  B.  Law- 
rence, Dental  Register. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  145 

Nitrate  of  Silver  as  a  Tooth  Stimulant. — The  external 
use  of  nitrate  of  silver  on  the  tooth  surfaces  acts  as  a 
stimulant  to  the  odontoblasts  to  build  up  secondary  dentin 
and  to  deposit  lime-salts  in  weak  parts  of  defective  teeth 
and  to  strengthen  sound  teeth,  at  the  same  time  that  it  de- 
posits an  antiseptic  layer  or  coating  of  silver  salts  on  the 
surfaces  of  the  teeth  and  coagulates  the  albumin  in  the 
tubuli,  thus  making  an  impassable  and  insoluble  barrier 
where  it  is  most  needed. — L.  Q.  Byram,  Dental  Review. 

Oxygen-producing  Tooth  Powders. — The  addition  of 
calcum  peroxid  to  a  tooth  powder  base  of  ordinary  com- 
position, with  a  view  to  the  disinfection  of  the  oral  cavity 
through  the  release  of  oxygen,  has  the  disadvantage  of  be- 
ing prone  to  produce  gingival  inflammation.  From  a  thera- 
peutic standpoint  the  addition  of  2  per  cent,  of  sodium  per- 
borate to  a  suitable  base  furnishes  the  ideal  tooth  powder, 
the  perborate  producing  free  oxygen  and  harmless  borax. — 
Hermann  Prinz,  Dental  Era. 

Disinfection  of  the  Mouth. — Fifty  per  cent,  alcohol  is 
not  only  powerfully  bactericidal,  but  has  a  specific  healing 
effect  on  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth,  producing  an 
arterial  fluxion  under  the  influence  of  which  the  venous 
stasis  of  the  diseased  gums  disappears,  and  they  return 
gradually  to  normal.  Because  of  smarting  it  is  impossible 
to  rinse  effectually,  but  the  gums  being  less  sensitive,  it  can 
be  applied  by  means  of  a  soft  tooth  brush  dipped  in  the 
alcohol. — C.  RoESE,  Muench.  Med.  Woch. 

Prevention  of  Decay. — When  the  family  history,  etc., 
indicates  teeth  of  weak  structure,  freely  bathe  the  newly 
erupted  teeth  with  forty  or  fifty  per  cent,  nitrate  of  silver, 
drying  it  off  until  only  pure  crystals  are  deposited  on  the 
surface  of  the  teeth  and  in  the  invisible  defects  or  com- 
mencements of  decay,  keeping  the  teeth  dry  under  the  rub- 
ber-dam until  this  has  been  repeated  several  times.  Then 
brush  with  pumice  to  prevent  discoloration. — L.  Q.  Byram, 
Dental  Review. 


146  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sterilizing  the  Hands. — The   hands  may  be   rendered 

practically  sterile  by  the  use  of  permanganate  of  potash,  or, 
better  still,  a  new  preparation  called  Suhlamin,  which  is 
about  as  powerful  as  the  corrosive  sublimate,  but  does  not 
irritate  the  hands.  It  dissolves  well  in  water,  can  be  used 
with  soapsuds,  penetrates  deeper,  and  leaves  the  hands 
smooth.     S.  A.  Hopkins,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Recurrent  Sepsis  in  Root-canals. — Cleanse 
and  sterilize  canal,  dip  a  small  wisp  of  cotton  wrapped  on  a 
suitable  broach  in  tincture  of  iodin  and  then  into  finely- 
powdered  tannic  acid  and  introduce  to  the  apical  end  of  the 
affected  canal.  Absorb  any  excess  iodin  with  cotton,  wipe 
the  canal  with  absolute  alcohol,  and  fill  with  preferred 
material.  It  is  the  exception  and  not  the  rule  for  teeth  so 
treated  to  give  any  further  trouble. — D.  Sheehan,  Dental 
Record. 

Oral  Hygfiene. — No  greater  service  can  be  rendered  the 
average  man,  woman  or  child  than,  at  least,  regular  semi- 
annual visits  to  the  dentist,  who  should  remove  the  salivary 
deposits,  thoroughly  polish  all  surfaces  of  the  teeth,  treat  and 
cure  hypertrophied  gums  and  repair  all  defects  resulting 
from  caries,  and  give  instructions  as  to  when  and  how  to 
brush  the  teeth  and  gums,  and  prescribe  a  proper  tooth 
brush  and  antiseptic  mouth-wash. — Burton  Lee  Thorpe^ 
The  Medical  Brief. 

Oral  Sepsis. — In  a  healthy  mouth  pathogenic  organisms 
may  meet  with  a  peaceful  end ;  in  the  diseased  mouth  prop- 
agation is  provided  for  and  a  larger  dose  is  prepared  for 
entrance  to  the  body  by  the  lungs,  the  stomach  or  the  lym- 
phatics. *  *  *  There  seem  to  be  two  dangers  which 
may  arise  in  connection  with  a  septic  mouth.  First,  infec- 
tion, sometimes  by  direct  extension;  secondly,  systemic 
poisoning  by  absorption  and  anti-intoxication. — Sidney 
Spokes,  The  Dental  Record. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilization,  etc.  147 

The  Use  of  Antiseptics  in  Cavities. — To  be  perfect,  a 
filling  should  be  built  against  the  clean,  fresh-cut  cavity  wall, 
whether  a  cohesive  or  a  non-cohesive  filling.  There  is  no 
objection  to  the  use  of  antiseptics,  but  they  should  be  used 
before  the  preparation  of  the  cavity  is  complete.  After 
the  application  of  carbolic  acid  or  even  alcohol  you  cannot 
get  the  walls  in  condition  to  receive  a  filling  except  by  re- 
trimming  them. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Digest. 

Sterilization  of  Instruments. — When  it  is  not  desirable 
to  use  boiling  water,  put  about  a  teaspoonful  and  a  half  of 
forty  per  cent,  formaldehyd  to  a  pint  of  cold  water  and  add 
about  two  teaspoonfuls  of  sodium  carbonate  to  prevent 
rusting.  Allow  the  instruments  to  remain  in  this  solution 
at  least  half  an  hour.  It  thoroughly  disinfects,  cleans,  and 
polishes  them  if  they  are  washed  off  in  boiling  water  and 
carefully  wiped  dry. — E.  T.  Darby,  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  New  Dentifrice. — The  chemical  and  therapeutical 
qualities  of  the  newly  discovered  peroxids  of  the  alkali 
earths  have  been  applied  to  the  manufacture  of  a  new  denti- 
frice compound  in  which  a  calcium  peroxid  is  used.  In  con- 
tact with  the  moisture  of  the  mouth  this  is  resolved  into 
milk  of  lime,  hydrogen  dioxid,  and  water,  the  dioxid  being 
in  turn  split  up,  liberating  free  oxygen  at  desired  points  and 
securing  an  alkaline  action  from  the  milk  of  lime. — Dental 
Cosmos. 

Alcohol  as  a  Disinfectant. — Recent  researches  seem  to 
show  that  absolute  alcohol  is  devoid  of  all  disinfectant 
properties.  Proof  spirit  (50  per  cent.)  gives  more  tangible 
results  in  this  direction  than  either  stronger  or  weaker  solu- 
tions. Antiseptic  substances,  which  in  aqueous  solution  are 
more  or  less  active  germicides,  entirely  lose  this  property 
when  dissolved  in  strong  alcohol.  But  on  the  other  hand 
corrosive  sublimate,  carbolic  acid,  lysol  and  thymol  dissolved 
in  a  50  per  cent,  solution  alcohol  disinfect  better  than 
aqueous  solutions  of  the  same  strength. — Medical  Press  and 
Circular. 


148  Practical  Dentistry. 

Rubber  Tubing  for  Cleansing  Teeth. — Instead  of  using 
rubber  cup,  stretch  tubing  over  a  brush  mandrel,  or  a  "barrel 
stone,"  allowing  about  three-sixteenths  inch  free  end.  The 
stretching  of  the  rubber  gives  considerable  pressure  not 
obtained  from  the  cup.  Used  in  engine  same  as  cup.  It 
will  spread  out  and  follow  shape  of  teeth,  going  between 
them  as  the  cup  will  not  do. — C.  P.  Lennox,  Dominion  Den. 
Jour. 

Prevention  of  Recurrent  Decay. — To  secure  complete 
sterilization,  not  only  of  softened  dentin,  but  of  the  dentin 
covering  the  pulp,  (i)  cleanse  the  cavity  mechanically;  (2) 
dehydrate  with  cool  air,  followed  by  alcohol  of  different 
strengths;  (3)  dry  with  hot  air  and  apply  a  mixture  of 
alcohol,  xylol,  geranium  essence,  and  hydronapthol.  If  a 
small  cavity,  fill  immediately ;  if  large,  leave  the  above  mix- 
ture in  the  cavity  for  twenty-four  hours,  covering  with 
gutta-percha  or  wax.  Do  not  permit  access  of  saliva  or 
moisture. — J.  Choquet,  Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Asso- 
ciation. 

Prevention  of  Decay. — There  is  no  factor  so  potent  in 
the  prevention  of  decay  as  cleanliness.  It  exerts  an  influence 
which  is  not  only  seen  but  felt.  The  one  great  barrier  to 
successful  dentistry  to-day  is  the  absence  of  cleanliness. 
It  should  be  taught  and  talked  to  our  patients.  It  should 
be  the  subject  of  at  least  one  lecture  in  every  public  school 
during  each  session.  Until  more  systematic  measures  are 
brought  to  bear  we  cannot  hope  to  secure  the  best  results. — 
Geo.  C.  Clements,  Transactions  of  the  Mississippi  Dental 
Association. 

Preventive  Treatment:  Nitrate  of  Silver. — It  is  safe 
to  say  that  the  nitrate  of  silver  leads  to  the  formation  of 
secondary  dentin  in  as  far  as  it  converts  the  acute  with  the 
chronic  form  of  decay.  The  medicament  consequently  has 
a  double  action,  in  that  it  renders  the  decalcified  dentin  more 
or  less  impenetrable  to  acids,  and  also  facilitates  the  interpo- 
sition of  a  layer  of  secondary  dentin  as  the  part  of  the  living 
pulp. — W.  D.  Miller,  British  Dental  Journal. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  149 

The  Dental  Toilet  and  the  Prevention  of  Caries. — All 
the  minutse  of  the  dental  toilet,  the  cleansing  of  tooth  sur- 
faces and  the  mucosa  of  the  oral  cavity,  are  efficacious 
only  in  proportion  as  they  eliminate  bacteria  and  food 
debris,  two  essential  factors  of  the  carious  process.  The 
use  of  buccal  antiseptics  is  a  tacit  recognition  of  the  belief 
that  some  element  inimical  to  the  functional  activity  of 
caries-producing  fungi  may  be  introduced  into  the  oral 
cavity  and  thus  prevent  the  result  which  they  are  known 
to  produce  if  permitted  to  develop  unmolested. — E.  C. 
Kirk,  Dental  Register. 

Silver  Nitrate. — Bryan  of  Basel  has  inaugurated  a 
system  of  dental  prophylaxis,  in  which  he  strongly  advocates 
the  application  of  a  40  per  cent,  nitrate  of  silver  solution 
upon  tooth  surfaces  slightly  affected  by  the  earlier  stages  of 
caries.  With  intervals  of  three  months  this  process  is  to  be 
repeated.  He  is  very  enthusiastic  about  his  results,  believ- 
ing that  the  stimulating  effect  of  the  application  causes  the 
pulp  to  retract  by  depositing  secondary  dentin  in  the  crown 
chamber. — Hermann  Prinz,  Dental  Digest. 

Sterilization  of  Dental  Instruments. — Boil  for  a  few 
minutes  in  a  one  per  cent,  solution  of  washing  soda  in 
water.  If  they  are  dried  while  still  hot  from  the  water, 
no  moisture  will  remain  in  cracks  or  crevices  to  invite  rust. 
The  idea  that  boiling,  as  here  advocated,  can  possibly  spoil 
the  temper  of  the  tools,  is  incorrect. — R.  H.  M.  Dawbarn, 
Items  of  Interest, 

Lactate  of  Silver  a  Non-poisonous  Antiseptic. — Lactate 
of  silver  is  a  white,  odorless,  almost  tasteless  powder,  solu- 
ble in  15  parts  of  water.  Its  destructive  action  on  bacteria 
life  is  four  times  as  great  as  corrosive  sublimate.  It  prevents 
the  growth  of  bacteria  without  destroying  the  cellular  tissue, 
the  solution  permeating  the  tissues  layer  by  layer.  It  has  no 
corrosive  action  on  wounds,  though  in  sensitive  cases  it 
causes  some  burning. — B.  Crede,  in  International  Dental 
Journal. 


150  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cleansing  the  Teeth. — After  removal  of  all  tartar,  finish- 
ing one  tooth  before  going  to  the  next,  polish  the  teeth  with 
fine  pumice  carried  on  rubber  wheel  discs  and  brush  wheels ; 
draw  dental  fibre  hack  and  forth  between  the  teeth  to  clean 
proximal  surfaces ;  spray  the  mouth  with  three  per  cent. 
solution  pyrozone  and  interest  patient  to  use  brush,  floss 
silk  and  quill  toothpick,  and  to  rinse  the  mouth  with  a  weak 
solution  of  sodium  chlorid  to  allay  inflammation. — F.  Mes- 
SERSCHMIT,  Dental  Digest. 

Treatment  of  Erosion. — There  is  nothing  better  than 
silver  nitrate  for  touching  the  erosion,  but  to  reach  the 
cause  it  is  especially  important  to  apply  it  to  the  mucous 
glands  of  the  gums,  and  particularly  of  the  lips  and  cheek, 
and  destroy  them.  This  will  not  only  retard  the  erosion, 
but  cure  it.  For  actual  erosion  of  the  front  teeth  substitute 
potassa  cum  calce  or  zinc  chlorid,  but  touch  the  gum  and  lip 
mucous  follicles  with  silver  nitrate  and  insist  upon  a  thor- 
ough application  of  milk  of  magnesia  the  last  thing  at  night. 
— J.  RoYSTON,  Dental  Record. 

Prophylactic  Treatment  of  the  Teeth. — This  includes 
the  absolute  and  positive  removal  of  the  unseen  but  real 
bacterial  plaques  present  in  some  situations  in  every  un- 
treated set  of  teeth,  as  well  as  the  removal,  at  frequent  inter- 
vals, of  gum  exudation,  heretofore  unsuspected  and  un- 
touched, and  the  frequent  and  perfect  polishing,  by  hand- 
methods,  of  all  exposed  tooth-surfaces.  The  feasibility  of 
this  has  been  fully  demonstrated. — D.  D.  Smith,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Hygiene  and  Dental  Caries. — Whether  the  teeth  are 
what  is  called  "hard"  or  "soft,"  by  proper  treatment  they  can 
be  saved.  If  we  can  get  the  mouth  in  a  healthy  condition, 
and  if  the  patient  will  second  our  efforts  with  the  proper  use 
of  the  brush  and  floss  and  antiseptics,  then  we  can  fill  the  so- 
called  "soft"  teeth  with  justifiable  anticipations  of  perma- 
nent good  results,  provided  the  cavities  are  properly  cut  and 
the  fillings  properly  contoured. — Laurf:nce  Leonard. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  151 

Tooth-powders. — In  the  use  of  tooth-powder  the  first 
dash  with  stiff  brush  and  fresh  powder  should  always  be 
on  the  crown  portion  of  the  molars  where  the  enamel  is 
thick  and  will  not  be  injured  by  the  rubbing.  It  is  well  not 
to  form  the  habit  of  always  starting  the  work  in  the  same 
quarter  of  the  mouth,  as  the  brush  is  always  harder  when 
first  put  into  the  mouth,  and  the  first  grit  of  the  powder, 
always  in  the  same  place,  is  to  the  gum  and  teeth  what 
the  constant  dripping  of  water  is  to  the  rock. — F.  H.  Skin- 
ner, Dental  Reviezv. 

Oral  Prophylaxis. —  (i)  When  a  tooth,  bad  or  good, 
hard  or  soft,  is  removed  from  its  environments — the  men- 
struum of  the  mouth — decay  is  at  once  arrested.  (2)  En- 
forced and  systematic  change  in  the  environment  of  the 
teeth  in  the  month  will  prevent  decay.  (3)  This  complete 
change  of  environment  consists  in  thorough  removal,  at 
frequent  and  regular  intervals,  of  all  accumulations, 
whether  solids,  inspissated  exudations,  semi-solids,  or  bac- 
terial formations,  from  all  the  exposed  surfaces  of  the 
teeth,  leaving  them  thoroughly  polished. — D.  D.  Smith, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Prophylaxis. — When  we  shall  continually  and  persist- 
ently remind  our  patients  that  cleanliness  in  the  mouth,  from 
the  cradle  to  the  grave,  is  one  of  the  great  secrets  and  neces- 
sities in  the  preservation  of  the  teeth ;  that  plain,  wholesome 
food  is  another ;  that  the  teeth  require  vigorous  exercise  like 
all  other  organs  of  the  body,  for  their  well-being;  that  the 
gums  require  brushing  as  well  as  the  teeth — then,  and  not 
till  then,  will  all  begin  to  see  the  light. — Fred.  H.  Metcalf, 
Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Mouth-washes. — Do  not  recommend  mouth-washes 
without  knowing  what  they  are  composed  of.  Hydrogen 
dioxid  is  a  good  wash,  but  in  some  mouths  it  acts  as  an 
irritant;  this  we  can  control  by  using  an  equal  quantity  of 
milk  of  magnesia  with  it;  this  makes  a  very  pleasant  and 
beneficial  mouth-wash. — Dr.  'Maxfield,  Dental  Cosmos. 


152  Practical  Dentistry. 

Chinosol. — Chinosol  is  far  more  antiseptic  than  bichlo- 
rid  of  mercury.  A  piece  of  gauze  saturated  in  a  ten  per 
cent,  solution  will  give  much  pleasanter  results,  and  granu- 
lation will  proceed  quite  as  rapidly  as  when  iodoform  and 
other  irritating  agents  are  employed.  It  is  especially  valu- 
able because  it  does  not  possess  the  irritating  qualities  com- 
mon to  the  ordinary  antiseptic  solutions. — G.  W.  Cook,  Den- 
tal Digest. 

Cleansing  the  Mouth. — To  cleanse  the  teeth  and  gums 
use  hydrogen  dioxid,  applied  with  a  ball  of  cotton  in  the 
pliers,  and  carrying  a  little  fine  powder  to  scrub  the  gums 
and  teeth,  followed  with  an  antiseptic  solution  from  a  com- 
pressed-air atomizer,  to  wash  out  tlie  interproximal  spaces. 
The  mouth  should  be  thoroughly  flooded,  depending  as 
much  on  the  mechanical  cleansing  as  on  the  antiseptic  char- 
acter of  the  wash. — Elgin  Mawiiinney,  Dental  Summary. 

Hand  Sterilization. — Absolute  alcohol  has  but  a  slight 
germicidal  power,  but  the  diluted  fluid  (seventy  per  cent.) 
has  a  far  greater  action  than  a  watery  solution  of  birchlorid 
or  biniodid  of  mercury  (i  in  looo)  or  a  saturated  solution 
of  permanganate  of  potash.  Prolonged  use  of  alcohol,  how- 
ever, will  cause  pain,  roughen  the  skin,  and  may  produce 
eczema. — I.  C.  Webster,  Cyclopedia  of  Practical  Medicine. 

Oral  Hygiene. — The  continued  use  of  many  of  the 
preparations  that  are  vigorously  pushed,  or  of  the  perox- 
ids,  will  cause  the  enamel  to  grow  pitted  and  rough ;  a 
similar  use  of  phenol  sodique,  which  is  both  antiseptic  and 
germicidal,  will  stimulate  the  enamel  to  a  hardening  with 
a  bright  and  glossy  surface  which  we  see  only  in  cases 
treated  by  this  stimulant. — Levi  C.  Taylor,  Dental  Cosmos. 

An  Antiseptic  Mouth-wash. — A  good  antiseptic  mouth- 
wash should  be,  for  the  mucous  membrane,  non-caustic ;  for 
the  teeth,  non-decalcifying;  for  the  entire  organism,  non- 
poisonous;  and  should  have  sufficient  antiseptic  action,  and 
good  taste  and  odor.  A  physiologic  salt  solution,  of  body 
temperature,  or  a  two  per  cent,  solution  of  bicarbonate  of 
soda,  can  be  recommended. — C.  Rose,  Dental  Era. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  153 

Mechanical  Cleansing  of  the  Teeth. — While  mouth- 
washes may  inhibit  bacterial  growth  temporarily,  they  do 
not  remove  the  mass  of  infection.  After  one  per  cent.,  or 
even  three  per  cent.,  peroxide  has  been  held  in  the  mouth 
for  from  three  to  five  minutes  the  viscid  bacterial  masses 
around  the  necks  of  the  teeth  will  still  be  present,  affording 
abundant  supply  of  food  for  further  infection. — Joseph 
HeaDj  Items  of  Interest. 

Tooth  Desiccation. — Previous  to  the  application  of 
medicaments  to  be  absorbed  by  the  dentin,  the  tubuli  are 
well  dried  out  by  successive  appHcations  of  alcohol,  begin- 
ning with  a  fifty  per  cent,  solution,  increasing  the  strength 
ten  per  c&nt.  every  time  and  drying,  until  absolute  alcohol 
is  used  the  last  time.  It  leaves  vacant  every  space  and  the 
dentin  dried  out  as  absolutely  as  can  be  done  by  the  use  of 
any  preparation. — Dr.  Weaver,  Dental  World. 

Compressed  Air  in  Cleaning  the  Teeth. — Having  a  tube 
containing  about  an  ounce  of  peroxid,  full  strength,  an 
air-pressure  of  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  pounds  will  so 
divide  the  solution,  sending  it  into  every  nook  and  corner, 
that  stains  and  debris  that  it  would  otherwise  take  half  an 
hour  to  remove  will  melt  away  as  by  magic. — W.  H.  Pow- 
ell, Dental  Cosmos. 

Medicated  Dentifrices. — When  teeth  and  gums  are  in  a 
comparatively  normal  state  it  is  unwise  to  recommend  the 
daily  or  weekly  use  of  medicated  dentifrices.  Too  much 
treatment  often  proves  injurious. — B.  F.  Arrington,  Dental 
O-ffice  and  Laboratory. 

Cleansing  the  Teeth. — When  a  person  is  in  health,  and 
the  mouth  in  a  normal  condition,  a  soft  brush  and  plenty 
of  water  is  all  that  is  needed  for  cleansing  the  teeth.  But 
when  the  patient  is  sick  the  condition  of  the  mouth  is  ab- 
normal, and  treatment  to  suit  the  individual  case  should  be 
carried  out  under  the  eye  of  a  competent  dentist  or 
physician. — J.  Seal,  Dental  Cosmos. 
11 


154  Practical  Dentistry. 

Instrument  Sterilization. — Keep  the  instruments  which 
have  been  used  separate  from  the  clean  ones,  thus  avoiding 
the  necessity  of  sterilizing  all  the  instruments.  For  exca- 
vators a  deep,  narrow^  bowl  containing  a  soap  solution  with 
about  two  per  cent,  formaldehyd.  After  brushing  with 
stiff  brush  in  soap  and  water,  place  in  the  formaldehyd 
solution  for  a  few  minutes,  or  as  long  as  possible,  and  wipe 
off  with  a  towel  that  has  been  boiled. — C.  B.  Colson,  Dental 
World. 

The  Tooth-brush. — Have  always  in  use  four  extra-hard 
tooth-brushes,  to  be  used  alternately,  because  the  employ- 
ment of  one  brush  only  means  its  rapid  softening,  by  be- 
coming water-soaked,  defeating  the  object  we  aim  to  ac- 
complish. Use  at  bedtime,  and  in  the  morning  after  rising, 
thoroughly  for  four  minutes  at  each  cleaning. — J.  W.  Was- 
SALL,  Dental  Cosmos. 

An  Effective  Dentifrice. — Add  one-half  drachm  bicar- 
bonate of  soda  to  a  three -ounce  bottle  of  listerin.  Spong- 
iness  of  the  gums,  ulcerations,  canker,  etc.,  are  speedily 
cured  by  the  systematic  use  of  this  combination.  It  neu- 
tralizes acid  conditions,  stops  fermentation  and  putrefac- 
tion, and  tones  up  weak  tissues. — J,  J.  Lawrence,  Medical 
Brief. 

Hygiene  of  the  Mouth. — Make  it  a  special  point  that 
the  gingival  tissues  covering  the  roots  of  the  teeth  to  the 
entire  limits  of  the  alveolar  processes,  both  internally  and 
externally,  rather  than  the  teeth,  must  receive  brush-friction. 
If  this  portion  of  the  mouth  is  brushed  the  teeth  themselves 
will  receive  their  ample  share. — J.  W.  Wassall.  Dental 
Review. 

Steam  Sterilization  of  Instruments. — The  temper  of  in- 
struments is  not  affected  by  steam  sterilization.  Carbonate 
of  soda  minimizes  the  danger  of  rust,  though  very  rapid 
evaporation  of  moisture  occurs  on  heated  steel.  A  sterilized 
gritty  elastic  rubber  eraser  does  the  shining. — J.  J.  Sar- 
razin,  American  Dental  Journal. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilization,  etc.  155 

Cleansing  and  Polishing  the  Teeth. — After  the  use  of 
scalers  for  the  removal  of  all  solid  deposits  and  mucous  con- 
cretions, the  teeth  should  be  thoroughly  polished  on  all  ex- 
posed surfaces.  This  is  best  done  with  orange-wood  sticks 
charged  with  powdered  pumice,  carried  to  position  by  means 
of  a  porte-polisher,  the  friction  applied  by  hand.  This 
seems  to  stimulate  the  vital-  forces  of  the  tooth  to  increased 
activity  in  the  removal  of  waste  and  the  deposit  of  new  and 
better  material. — D.  D.  Smith,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Action  of  Formaldehyd  on  Soft  Tissues — Antidote. — 

If  discovered  immediately  apply  a  little  weak  water  of  am- 
monia, followed  by  a  10  per  cent.  sol.  trichloracetic  acid.  If 
patient  returns  with  slough,  cleanse  with  3  per  cent,  pyro- 
zone ;  apply  campho-phenique  to  relieve  pain ;  dry  surface 
and  coat  several  times  with  comp.  tinct.  benzoin. — A.  C. 
Hart,  Pacific  M.  D.  Gazette. 

Mentho-phenol  Mouth  Wash. — Melt  together  one  part 
phenol  crystals  and  three  parts  menthol  crystals.  Soluble 
in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform,  or  the  essential  oils.  A  three 
per  cent,  aqueous  solution  makes  a  good  mouth  wash  for 
infections  or  ulcerative  affections  of  the  mouth. — William 
ScHAEFFER,  Mcdicol  Joumal. 

Formalin  an  Ideal  Antiseptic  and  Disinfectant. — With 
the  facts  before  us,  we  feel  that  at  last  an  ideal  antiseptic 
and  disinfectant  has  been  found,  in  the  use  of  formalin  in 
place  of  heat,  steam,  carbolic  acid,  and  bichlorid  of  mercury, 
in  all  places  where  complete  disinfection  is  desired. — Car- 
roll O.  Southard,  Sou.  PaciHc  Med.  Jour. 

Cleansing  the  Teeth. — The  teeth  ought  to  be  cleaned 
after  each  meal,  by  any  proceeding  which  will  do  it  the  most 
effectually.  As  a  rule,  disinfectant  mouth-washes  are  pref- 
erable to  powders,  as  they  keep  the  mouth  sterile  and  pre- 
vent decay.  The  teeth  need  exercise  too. — A.  W.  Harlan, 
Dental  Register. 


156  Practical  Dentistry. 

Dentifrices. — While  the  gums  are  in  a  healthy  condi- 
tion there  is  no  need  of  medicine,  and  we  should  not  pre- 
scribe for  a  pathological  condition  of  the  mouth  until  the 
necessity  arises.  When  there  is  an  abnormal  condition,  it 
requires  professional  treatment. — A.  J.  Wolfert,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Mouth  Washes. — It  has  always  seemed  to  me  an  unwise 
thing  to  advise  the  use  of  stimulating  washes  daily ;  any 
member  that  is  over-stimulated  becomes  abnormal.  Asep- 
sis of  the  mouth  would  be  much  better  attained  by  use  of 
the  brush  and  mechanical  cleansing  than  by  the  use  of  an- 
tiseptics.— Mary  V.  Hartzell,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Buccal  Antiseptics. — The  application  of  buccal  antisep- 
tics is  defective,  in  that  their  action  is  temporary,  while  the 
persistence  of  bacterial  influence  is  a  constant  factor,  which 
must  produce  its  results  when  combated  only  by  the  neces- 
sarily intermittent  use  of  local  hygienic  and  antiseptic 
means ;  the  degree  of  success  of  the  latter  being  relative 
only  to  its  persistency. — E.  C.  Kirk,  Dental  Headlight. 

For  Cleaning  the  Teeth. — The  addition  of  a  small  por- 
tion of  Euthymol  tooth  paste  to  pumice  stone  for  cleansing 
teeth  at  the  dental  chair  offers  a  valuable  adjunct  to  treat- 
ment. It  imparts  an  agreeable  flavor,  is  cooling  and  stim- 
;lating  to  the  mucous  membrane,  prevents  the  pumice  stone 
from  being  thrown  about,  and  is  gratefully  received  by  the 
patient. — Goodman  A.  Miller,  D.D.S.,  Chicago,  111. 

A  Prophylactic  Mouth-wash. — Peroxid  of  hydrogen  oxi- 
dizes the  organic  deposits  about  the  teeth,  loosens  up  the 
secretions  about  the  gums,  and  sets  free  germs  that  are  in- 
accessible to  the  action  of  carbolic  acid  or  bichlorid  of 
mercury.  After  the  germs  are  thus  set  free,  the  latter  so- 
lutions will  bring  about  a  most  desirable  state  of  asepsis. — 
G.  V.  I.  Brown,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Immune  to  Caries. — The  mouths  which  become  inmiune 
to  decay  are  chiefly  those  which  are  used  vigorously,  and 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilization,  etc.  157 

the  worst  mouths  we  have  to  deal  with  are  the  ones  in 
which  the  food  is  simply  patted  about  and  then  swallowed 
The  importance  of  training  patients  to  use  their  teeth  can- 
not be  too  strictly  emphasized. — Fred  B.  Noyes,  Dental 
Review. 

Formaldehyd. — Prof.  Ernest  thinks  that  if  instruments 
having  no  grooves  are  washed  clean  in  a  i-ioo  solution, 
and  put  in  a  case  in  which  is  kept  a  piece  of  cotton  saturated 
with  the  formalin,  it  is  abundantly  sufficient  to  destroy  all 
the  germs  on  them.  It  being  so  easily  used  I  think  it  is  a 
very  valuable  thing. — Ttios.  Fillibrown,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Sterilizing^  a  Cavity. — Recently  I  have  been  using  Dr. 
M.  L.  Rhein's  solution:  i^  grains  of  bichlorid  of  mercury 
dissolved  in  two  ounces  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  making 
approximately  a  1-500  solution.  This  will  afiford  a  nearly 
chemical  sterilization  of  the  dentin. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Den- 
tal Digest. 

A  Substitute  for  the  Engine-brush  or  Rubber-cups  for 
Cleaning  the  Teeth. — A  bit  of  rubber  tubing  slipped  over  a 
mandrel  made  with  a  shoulder  to  prevent  the  tubing  from 
going  on  too  far,  carries  polishing  satisfactorily,  and  costs 
next  to  nothing. — Dr.  McNaughton,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Disinfection  of  Instruments. — As  the  result  of  a  series 
of  experiments  in  which  the  essential  oils,  carbolic  acid, 
creosote,  bichlorid  of  mercury,  hydronapthol,  etc.,  were 
used  in  the  tests,  I  recommend  sublamin,  i  in  200,  for 
steel  instruments,  and  chinosol,  ten  per  cent.,  for  other 
metals. — Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Summary, 

For  the  Hands. — While  the  hands  are  still  wet  after 
washing,  before  and  after  dental  operation,  if  a  few  drops 
of  campho-phenique  are  dropped  into  the  palms  and  rubbed 
over,  you  will  get  the  comfort  of  an  antiseptic  and  deo- 
dorant, leaving  the  hands  soft  and  clean. — ^J.  D.  Reynolds, 
Dental  World. 


158  Practical  Dentistry. 

Tooth-powders. — It  is  not  possible  by  the  use  of  tooth- 
powder  even  three  times  a  day  to  keep  the  mouth  entirely 
alkaline  or  neutral  so  that  we  must  end  by  regarding  tooth- 
powders,  even  the  best  of  them,  as  agents  for  removing 
stains  from  the  teeth  merely  for  aesthetic  reasons. — Stanley 
Read,  Dental  Record. 

The  Sterilization  of  Dentures. — Sulphurous  acid  will 
absolutely  deodorize  and  disinfect  a  denture  and  not  merely 
cover  the  odor  of  a  plate  that  has  been  worn  in  the  mouth. 
Put  a  few  drops  in  a  little  water  and  put  the  case  in  this 
at  night.  Cleanse  with  soap  and  brush  in  the  morning. — I. 
Kennerly  Ridley,  Journal  British  Dental  Association. 

The  Teeth  of  Young  Children. — A  great  deal  of  satis- 
faction comes  from  the  use  of  an  agent  similar  to  nitrate 
of  silver ;  that  is,  the  chlorid  of  gold,  and  if  any  who  favors 
the  use  of  nitrate  of  silver  will  try  the  chlorid  of  gold  he  will 
have  no  further  use  for  the  nitrate  of  silver. — W.  V.  B. 
Ames,  Dental  Review. 

A  Germicidal  Dentifrice. — Use  a  dentifrice  in  which 
hydronapthol  and  oil  of  cassia  are  the  principal  germicides. 
With  patients  who  use  this  freely  and  faithfully  the  results 
have  often  been  astonishing.  Decay  has  in  many  instances 
been  almost  entirely  arrested. — J.  Leon  Williams,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Cleansing  the  Mouth, — Cakes  of  magnesia  saturated 
with  pyrozone,  3  per  cent.,  form  excellent  cleansers  for  the 
mouth,  night  and  morning  use,  and  are  particularly  well- 
adapted  to  control  the  irritating  effects  of  acid  mucous  upon 
the  cervical  margins  of  the  teeth. — J.  F.  P.  Hodson,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Sterilizing  Cutting  Instruments. — Immersion  in  a  so- 
lution of  five  parts  camphor-phenol  in  95  per  cent,  alcohol 
affords  the  safest  method  of  sterilizing  cutting  instruments, 
having  least  effect  in  dulling  the  edges  of  instruments  which 
would  be  ruined  by  the  ordinary  process  of  boiling. — S.  P. 
Barboza.  Chem.  Med.  Record. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  159 

An  Antiseptic  Mouth  Wash. — As  the  result  of  numer- 
ous tests  and  chemical  analyses  it  is  found  that  sanitol  is 
antiseptic  in  the  proportion  of  i  to  38  parts.  It  is  neutral 
in  reaction,  and  contains  no  mineral  acids  or  other  ingre- 
dients that  might  prove  baneful  to  the  soft  tissues.  Its 
therapeutic  action  is  that  of  a  mild  stimulant. — A.  H.  Peck. 
Dental  Digest. 

Formaldehyd  as  a  Disinfectant  for  Instruments. — In- 
fected dental  instruments  can  be  disinfected,  without  injury, 
in  a  closed  space  of  less  than  one  cubic  foot,  by  an  exposure 
of  fifteen  minutes  to  formaldehyd  gas,  generated  from  a 
pastel  containing  five  grains  of  paraform,  by  heating  the 
pastel  over  a  proper  alcohol  lamp. — Elmer  G.  Horton^  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

Oral  Hygiene:  Phenol  Sodique. — Phenol  sodique  as  a 
daily  mouth-wash  prevents  fermentation  of  food  debris  and 
keeps  the  buccal  cavity  in  a  cleanly  and  aseptic  condition; 
as  a  local  application  to  the  pus  pockets  in  pyorrhea  it  gives 
most  satisfactory  returns;  in  hemorrhage  after  extraction 
it  can  be  relied  upon  to  answer  every  purpose. — The  Dental 
Era. 

Cleaning  the  Teeth. — In  many  cases  tafifeta  ribbon  will 
be  found  very  useful.  It  is  a  very  thin  ribbon  without  any 
extra  thickness  at  the  selvage,  called  lutestring  or  tafifeta 
ribbon.  It  is  not  very  strong  and  in  many  places  tears,  but 
when  it  does  go  in,  and  with  tooth-powder,  it  does  its  work 
quickly  and  well. — Harry  F.  Hamilton,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Brushing  the  Gums. — If  the  gums  are  well  brushed,  the 
teeth  will  take  care  of  themselves.  The  brush  may  cause 
bleeding  and  develop  sore  spots  on  the  mucous  membrane 
for  a  few  days,  but  a  persistent  brushing  of  the  tender  or 
bleeding  places  will  soon  harden  and  cure  them. — J.  W. 
Wassall,  Dental  Review. 


i6o  Practical  Dentistry. 

Chloretone;  Strength  of  Solutions. — An  aqueous  solu- 
tion of  0.8  to  I  per  cent,  of  chloretone  has  approximately 
the  same  anaesthetic  effect  as  a  2  per  cent,  sokition  of  cocain. 
The  sokitions  keep  indefinitely ;  it  is  not  even  necessary  to 
use  boiled  water  to  make  a  sterile  solution.  It  is  itself  a 
powerful  antiseptic  and  destroys  germs. — Therapeutic  Notes. 

Ethyl  Chlorid  for  Sensitive  Dentin. — Place  quite  a 
large  piece  of  cotton  loosely  in  the  cavity  and  apply  and 
remove,  alternately,  the  stream  of  ethyl  chlorid  to  the  cotton 
for  two  or  three  seconds.  This  secures  painless  excavation 
except  in  the  posterior  teeth. — Geo.  S.  Allan,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Acetanilid  as  a  Mouth-wash. — One  and  a  half  drachms 
of  acetanilid  to  an  ounce  of  alcohol,  made  agreeable,  as  well 
as  having  its  antiseptic  properties  increased  by  the  addition 
of  one  or  more  of  the  essential  oils,  makes  a  mouth-wash 
that  gives  very  satisfactory  results. — M.  E.  Le  Galley, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Formaldehyd. — In  cases  where  the  crown  portion  of 

the  pulp  is  dead  but  that  in  the  roots  highly  sensitive,  forty 
per  cent,  formaldehyd  with  a  little  cocain  added  will  often 
bring  about  most  happy  results.  In  cases  of  the  most  ag- 
gravated toothache  the  pain  will  be  overcome  in  a  very  few 
minutes. — E.  H.  Ewald,  Dental  Summary. 

Disinfection  of  the  Clinical  Thermometer. — A  few  drops 
of  formalin  on  a  wad  of  cotton  placed  in  the  end  of  the 
thermometer  case  is  advocated  by  F.  P.  Denny  as  an  effi- 
cient disinfectant.  The  convenience  and  efficacy  of  this 
method  should  insure  its  general  use. — Boston  Medical  and 
Surgical  Journal. 

Septic  Infection. — In  cases  of  septic  infection  quinin 
bisulphate,  grs.  iv.  to  viii.,  every  two  hours,  and  calcium 
sulphate,  gr.  y^^,  every  ten  minutes  until  ten  doses  have 
been  taken,  will  generally  arrest  the  poison.  The  quinin  may 
be  discontinued  after  the  second  or  third  dose.  Give  a  saline 
cathartic  also. — Dental  Review. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  i6i 

Argonin, — This  comparatively  new  silver  preparation 
is  highly  antiseptic,  and  exerts  a  positive  and  decided  effect 
on  suppurative  process.  It  is  readily  soluble  in  warm  water, 
non-irritating,  and  forms  no  slough  on  contact  with  mu- 
cous membrane. — C.  H.  Blackburn,  Items  of  Interest. 

Sterilization  of  Aluminum  Instruments:   Caution. — The 

ordinary  washing  soda  solution  (sodium  carbonate)  in 
which  instruments  are  boiled  will  entirely  ruin  aluminum, 
and  hence  should  not  be  used  for  sterilizing  them. — Inter- 
national lonrnal  of  Surgery. 

Sterilization  of  Cutting  Instruments. — Knives  can  be 
safely  sterilized  by  chemical  and  mechanical  means  without 
the  use  of  heat  in  any  form.  Immersion  in  95  per  cent, 
alcohol  has  the  least,  and  boiling  the  most,  effect  in  dulling 
the  edge  of  a  knife — H.  A.  Rogster,  Western  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

Recurring  Caries. — As  a  preventive  of  recurring  caries, 
due  to  fracture  of  enamel  prisms  at  cavity  margins,  some 
form  of  cement  or  varnish  should  he  used.  After  the  edges 
are  protected,  Canada  balsam  in  xylol  is  a  useful  material 
for  this  purpose. — K.  Goadby,  Journal  of  the  British  Dental 
Association. 

Oral  Hygiene. — Collections  on  the  teeth  are  an  irritant 
to  the  gums,  causing  them  to  bleed  easily.  If  they  bleed, 
brush  the  harder  and  the  deposits  will  be  removed  and  the 
gums  will  become  more  firm  and  healthy.  Brush  away  from 
the  gums  on  to  the  teeth,  not  across  the  teeth.  Great  benefit 
to  the  gums  is  derived  from  friction  if  not  too  severe. — V. 
H.  Jackson,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Sterilization  of  Dentin. — (i)  Mechanical  cleansing ;  (2) 
dehydration  by  cool  air,  adding  the  energetic  action  of 
alcohol  of  different  strengths;  (3)  dry  with  hot  air,  sub- 
stituting a  mixture  of  alcohol,  xylol,  geranium  essence,  and 
hydronapthol  for  the  pure  alcohol.  Fill  at  once,  or  after 
twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours. — J.  Choouet,  Journal  of 
the  British  Dental  Association. 


i62  Practical  Dentistry. 

Eepairing  an  Old  Gold  Filling. — When  it  is  desired  to 
repair  a  gold  filling  with  gold,  clean  the  tooth  with  luke- 
warm water,  wash  it  with  sulphuric  ether,  go  over  the  fill- 
ing with  alcohol,  and  dry  with  warm  air.  Unroll  a  gold 
cylinder  to  one  thickness,  or  take  foil  No.  4,  and  anneal 
carefully;  apply  and  go  over  the  entire  surface  with  a  very 
fine-pointed  plugger,  first  with  hand-pressure,  then  mallet 
it  well;  then  go  over  it  with  a  convex  plugger,  applying 
force  at  a  direct  right  angle  to  the  surface  worked  upon. 
When  two  layers  have  been  applied  in  this  manner  you 
can  go  ahead  as  usual. — X.  Dodel. 

Oral  Antisepsis. — In  relation  to  the  whole  group  of  in- 
ternal conditions  caused  by  pyogenic  organisms  there  is 
a  wide  field  of  preventive  medicine  open  by  the  exercise  of 
oral  antisepsis ;  a  field  that  can  be  worked  in,  with  the 
most  surprisingly  satisfactory  results,  alike  by  the  physician, 
surgeon,  dental  surgeon,  and  patient. — Wm.  Hunter,  Brit- 
ish Medical  Journal. 

Tooth  Extraction:  Sterilization. — No  thoughtful  oper- 
ator will  permit  himself  to  seize  upon  a  tooth  until  first 
it  has  been  bathed,  nay,  cleaned,  with  a  swab  most  vigorously 
all  about  the  gingival  border  of  the  gum  surrounding  it, 
and  this  with  the  most  concentrated  antiseptic  that  the  tis- 
sues of  the  oral  cavity  can  tolerate. — Frank  W.  Low,  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

Tooth  Polishing. — As  a  polisher  the  tooth  brush  is  ut- 
terly inadequate  because,  even  with  the  use  of  a  good  pow- 
der it  fails  to  entirely  remove  the  adhesive  deposits  which 
are  so  prevalent  and  so  mischievous  to  the  teeth,  and  there 
are  too  many  places  inaccessible  to  the  brush.  The  patient 
must  rely  on  the  stick. — Chas.  B.  Roiiland,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Disinfection  of  Instruments. — I  have  been  using  a  2  per 
cent,  solution  formalin  as  an  antiseptic  for  my  instruments 
for  the  last  three  months,  and  like  it  very  much.  It  does 
not  blacken  or  corrode  them. — A.  S.  Eschleman,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilization,  etc.  163 

Oral  Hygiene. — The  placing  of  the  teeth  and  adjacent 
parts  in  a  perfectly  clean  and  healthy  condition  requires 
more  real  skill  and  practical  knowledge  than  the  placing  in 
of  a  filling.  It  means  not  only  an  expert  ability  in  the  use  of 
instruments,  but  a  quite  thorough  knowledge  of  special 
pathology  and  therapeutics,  and  can  only  be  acquired  by  long 
months,  and  it  may  be  years,  of  learning. — International 
Dental  Journal. 

Asepsis:  Antisepsis — The  spirit  of  the  times  points  to 
a  practice  of  asepsis,  rather  than  antisepsis ;  avoiding  in- 
fection rather  than  disinfecting;  preventing  disease  rather 
than  treating  it.  Any  remedy,  therefore,  whether  old  or 
new,  that  will  accomplish  the  above  purpose,  is  ideal. — E. 
T.  LoEFFLER_,  The  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Absolute  Alcohol  as  a  Disinfectant. — From  experiments 
conducted  in  the  Johns  Hopkins  hospital,  it  appears  that 
Squibb's  absolute  alcohol  is  a  valuable  disinfectant  for  in- 
struments liable  to  infection  under  the  conditions  which 
ordinarily  surround  us.  It  is  the  best  substitute  for  heat, 
which,  both  moist  and  dry,  dulls  the  edge  of  cutting  instru- 
ments.— Dental  Register. 

Sterilizing  the  Forceps. — The  forceps,  including  the 
handles,  are  boiled  in  a  solution  of  common  washing  soda, 
about  a  quart  of  water  to  a  piece  of  soda  the  size  of  a  wal- 
nut, and  there  is  no  rust,  A  mixture  of  vaselin  and  car- 
bolic acid  is  rubbed  on  the  joints  while  they  are  hot,  which 
keeps  them  as  good  as  new. — F.  E.  Garner^  British  Dental 
Journal. 

Brushing  the  Teeth. — It  is  remarkable  how  difficult 
it  is  for  some  people  to  learn  the  proper  method  of  brush- 
ing the  teeth  and  gums ;  they  can  frequently  be  materially 
aided  by  instructing  them  to  do  the  work  in  front  of  a 
mirror,  so  that  they  may  see  for  themselves  that  it  is  prop- 
erly performed. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental  Era. 


164  Practical  Dentistry. 

Formalin  Gelatin. — This  is  a  firm  resistant,  stony-hard, 
transparent  substance,  which,  when  enclosed  within  the  sys- 
tem, gradually  dissolves,  giving  up  its  formalin,  thus  setting 
up  a  continued  state  of  asepsis  in  its  neighborhood,  being 
finally  replaced  by  connective  tissue.  When  heated,  it  can 
be  molded  to  any  form.  Impregnated  with  lime-salts,  it  has 
proved  itself  capable  of  replacing  pieces  of  bone  removed 
in  course  of  resection. — Dr.  Schleich,  in  Therapeutische 
Monatschrift. 

Mouth  Sterilization. — While  it  is  undoubtedly  true  that 
it  is  practically  impossible  to  sterilize  the  mouth,  it  is  also 
true  that  the  mouth  bacteria  may  be  so  thoroughly  sub- 
jugated in  a  few  minutes  as  to  result  in  great  practical  benefit 
to  the  patient  undergoing  operations  in  the  mouth. — H.  W. 
GiLLETT,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Silver  Nitrate  and  Cement  Fillings. — A  filling  of  oxy- 
phosphate  of  zinc,  placed  upon  a  surface  treated  with  nitrate 
of  silver,  will  last  a  great  deal  longer,  and  be  a  great  deal 
better  mass  than  the  same  mass  not  having  the  peculiar 
effect  it  gets  from  this  film  of  silver  albuminate. — W.  V.  B. 
Ames,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Oral  Hygiene. — The  chief  instruction  the  public  need 
is  how,  zvhen,  and  where  to  clean  their  teeth,  and  it  cannot 
be  too  strongly  impressed  on  them  that  their  first  line  of 
defence  against  caries  and  oral  sepsis  is  a  stiff  tooth-brush 
systematically  and  effectively  used. — William  Hern^  Brit- 
ish Dental  Journal. 

Clean  Hands. — When  washing  the  hands,  before  and 
after  dental  operations,  if  a  few  drops  of  campho-phenique 
are  dropped  in  the  palm  of  the  hand  while  wet,  and  rubbed 
over  the  hands,  you  get  the  benefit  of  an  antiseptic  and 
deodorant,  leaving  the  hands  soft  and  clean. — J.  D.  Rey- 
nolds, Dental  World. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  165 

To  Clean  Burs. — Half  fill  a  small  glass  vessel  with  a 
saturated  solution  of  washing-soda,  into  which  drop  the 
burs  after  using.  Soak  for  an  hour  or  two  and  remove 
debris  with  a  suitable  brush. — Journal  of  the  British  Dental 
Association. 

Oral  Hygiene. — To  prevent  fermentation  of  food  debris 
and  to  keep  the  buccal  cavity  in  a  cleanly  and  aseptic  condi- 
tion, prescribe  phenol  sodique  as  a  daily  mouth  wash.  It 
also  gives  most  satisfactory  returns  as  a  local  application 
to  pus  pockets  in  pyorrhea  treatment. — The  Dental  Era. 

An  Antiseptic  Mouth  Lamp. — The  lamp  consists  of  an 
electric  mouth  lamp  surrounded  by  a  glass  tube ;  it  can  be 
easily  taken  apart  and  cleansed.  The  double  glass  also  has 
the  advantage  of  taking  up  the  heat  from  the  lamp. — S. 
Freeman,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Sterilizing  Dental  Instruments. — Make  a  saturated 
solution  of  borax  in  a  twenty  per  cent,  solution  of  formalin. 
This  is  practically  instantaneous  in  its  action  as  a  germicide 
and  instruments  may  be  left  for  weeks  in  it  without  rusting 
— J.  Leon  Williams,  Dental  OfUce  and  Laboratory. 

Crede  Silver  Salts. — Lactate  of  silver  immediately  de- 
stroys all  bacterial  life  in  putrescent  pulps,  and  puts  the 
canals  of  dead  teeth  into  perfectly  antiseptic  condition.  I 
ase  it  in  canals  in  powder;  for  injections,  in  solution. — Chas. 
A.  Nash,  Items  of  Interest. 

Oral  Hygiene. — No  labor  performed  for  a  patient  is 
more  valuable  nor  worth  a  greater  price  than  the  time  given 
to  properly  impressing  and  teaching  in  every  detail  the 
routine  of  ordinary  oral  hygiene. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Hypodermic  Needle  Sterilization. — Place  pure  alcohol  in 
hypodermic  needle,  then  pass  the  needle  through  an  alcohol 
flame.  The  alcohol  in  needle  will  burn,  causing  the  needle 
to  become  aseptic  and  dry. — A.  W.  Gruebbel,  Dental  Brief. 


1 66  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sterilization  of  Cavities. — In  the  sterilization  of  cavi- 
ties, preparatory  to  filling,  phenol  sodique  is  unsurpassed.  It 
does  not  injure  the  dentin,  and  being-  employed  undiluted 
is  prompt  in  action  and  always  ready  for  immediate  use. — 
Dental  Brief. 

Clean  Teeth. — Keeping  the  teeth  perfectly  clean  pre- 
vents decay;  preventing  decay  prevents  the  necessity  of 
fillings;  preventing  painful  fillings  makes  extracting  need- 
less; with  no  extractions  there  is  no  necessity  for  plates  or 
bridges. — Lucian  H.  Arnold,  Dental  Review. 

Clean  Teeth  Never  Decay. — Smooth  and  polished  enamel 
surface  is  nearly  immune  to  the  action  of  bacteria,  because 
the  starchy  food  and  bacteria  placques  cannot  become 
adherent  to  a  polished  surface,  which  is  readily  kept  clean 
by  the  tongue  and  cheeks. — A.  C.  Hart,  Items  of  Interest. 

Prevention  of  Decay  in  Children's  Teeth. — Absolute 
cleanliness  and  mild,  pleasant  antiseptics  are  almost  specific 
against  decay.  Formaldehyd  and  silver  nitrate,  when  prop- 
erly applied,  will  arrest  decay  and  obviate  the  filling  of 
deciduous  teeth. — Clark  R.  Rowley,  Dental  Register. 

Instrument  Sterilization. — The  ordinary  washing  soda 
solution  in  which  instruments  are  boiled  will  absolutely 
ruin  aluminum  and  hence  it  should  not  be  used  for  steriliz- 
ing anything  made  of  aluminum. — International  Journal  of 
Surgery. 

Removal  of  Green  Stain. — Apply  iodin  to  the  stained 
surface,  followed  by  weak  aqua  ammonia,  repeating  until 
the  stain  disappears.  Recurrence  will  be  proportioned  to  the 
subsequent  care  given  the  teeth. — S.  B.  Palmer,  Ohio  Den. 
Jour. 

Oral  Hygiene. — As  an  especially  efifective  wash  to  de- 
crease the  ravages  of  caries,  mercuric  chlorid  in  the  strength 
of  one  to  twenty-five  hundred  forms  a  valuable  constituent 
of  the  prophylactic  dentist's  armamentarium. — Geo.  E. 
Hunt,  Dental  Digest. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  167 

Treatment  of  General  Septicemia. — The  treatment  of 

general  septicemia  is  by  hypodermic  injections  of  creosote. 
The  creosote  is  mixed  with  equal  parts  of  camphorated  oil, 
and  20  minims  of  the  solution  are  injected  three  times  a 
day. — Dental  Brief. 

Antiseptic  Mouth  Wash. — Sanitol  is  an  effective  anti- 
septic and  deodorant,  both  as  a  mouth  wash  and  for  cleans- 
ing the  teeth.  It  is  especially  efficient  in  hardening  the 
gums,  when  they  bleed  readily  when  brushing  the  teeth. — 

C.    LiNDSLEY. 

Antiseptic  Mouth-wash. — In  case  of  abscess  with  ne- 
crosis of  maxilla,  use  as  mouth-wash  a  one-per-cent  solution 
of  chloral,  to  which  a  few  drops  of  essence  of  peppermint 
have  been  added. — Bulletin  Medical. 

To  Sterilize  Stones. — Brush  the  stones,  whether  grind- 
ing or  polishing  stones,  clean  with  a  brush  and  soap  and 
water,  then  dip  in  a  five  per  cent,  solution  of  formalin  in 
alcohol. — Tri-State  Dental  Record. 

A  Deodorizer. — In  case  of  disagreeable  odors  in  the 
operating  room,  burn  oil  of  cassia,  on  a  whisk  of  cotton, 
over  the  alcohol  lamp. — J.  A,  Chapple,  Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

Instrument  Sterilization. — Instruments  kept  immersed 
in  a  twenty  per  cent,  solution  of  formalin,  with  borax  to 
excess,  will  not  oxidize  and  asepsis  will  be  maintained. — 
A.  H.  Merritt,  Dental  Era. 

Sterilization  of  Cutting  Instruments. — Immersion  in  95 
per  cent,  alcohol  has  the  least  effect  in  dulling  the  edge  of 
a  knife;  boiling  has  the  most  e^tct.— Western  Dental 
Journal. 

A  Clean  Aseptic  Dressing. — Dip  a  piece  of  cotton  in  an 
alcoholic  solution  of  boric  acid;  burn  the  alcohol  out. — 
Dr.  Hugenschmidt,  Dental  Cosmos. 

An  Astringent  Mouth-wash. — One  ounce  of  Listerine 
will  take  up  one  ounce  of  tannic  acid,  making  a  very  strong 
astringent  mouth-wash. — Dr.  Grady,  Dental  Cosmos. 


i68  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sterilizing  Instruments. — Boil  them  for  five  minutes  in 
a  one  per  cent,  solution  of  carbonate  of  soda.  This  not 
only  renders  them  aseptic  but  preserves  them  from  oxi- 
dation.— Wm.  Ernest  Walker,  S.  Br.  Ntl.  Den.  Asso. 

A  Pleasant  Antiseptic. — Add  a  teaspoonful  of  pasteur- 
ine  to  the  water  used  for  syringing  out  cavities.  It  is 
pleasant  to  the  patient,  and  has  excellent  antiseptic  proper- 
ties.— J.  A.  Chapple,  Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

The  Disinfection  of  Instruments. — Our  only  sure  depend- 
ence is  heat — say  i6o°  C.  (320°  F.)  for  ten  minutes.  Within 
this  limit  their  temper  and  ours  will  be  safe. — Garrett 
Newkirk,  Dental  Review. 

Mouth  Washes. — I  think  the  chief  value  of  the  prepa- 
rations we  have  been  advocating  as  antiseptic  mouth  washes 
is  in  persuading  agents  to  induce  our  patients  to  keep  their 
mouths  clean. — IT.  B.  Tii.eston,  Dental  Summary. 

Soap  as  an  Antiseptic. — As  the  result  of  a  series  of 
investigations,  Prof.  Rodet  concludes  that  common  soap, 
apart  from  its  value  as  a  cleansing  agent,  is  an  antiseptic  not 
to  be  disregarded. — Revue  de  Stoniatologie. 

Sterilizing  Instruments. — Dipping  in  alcohol  and  burn- 
ing off  the  alcohol  effectually  destroys  all  virus  or  germs. 
The  heat  reaches  the  whole  surface  of  the  instrument. — 
Faneuil  D.  Weisse,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Prophylaxis. — Pits  and  grooves,  showing  interruption 
of  development  of  the  enamel,  when  ground  out  and  pol- 
ished are  easier  to  clean,  and  beautifies  the  teeth. — A.  C. 
Hart,  Items  of  Interest. 

Polishing  Proximal  Surfaces. — Pulverized  pumice  stone 
and  full-strength  dioxogen,  using  rubber  bands  as  carriers, 
may  be  used  effectively  for  cleaning  and  ]X)lishing  proximal 
surfaces  difficult  of  access  otherwise. — W.  A.  Mills,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  169 

Bad  Breath. — To  remove  offensive  odors  from  the 
breath  there  is  nothing  better  than  one  part  dioxygen  in 
five  parts  rosewater. — E.  J.  Kempf^  Indiana  Medical  Jour- 
nal. 

Neutral  Liquid  Dentifrice. — Oil  of  cinnamon,  i ;  oil  of 
clove,  I ;  oil  of  peppermint,  6 ;  thymol,  i ;  saccharin,  i ; 
alcohol  (ninety  per  cent.),  400;  tincture  of  rhatany,  10. — 
Bull.  gen.  de  Titer ap. 

Borate  of  Cassia. — In  cases  of  extensive  pus  formation, 
borate  of  cassia  is  a  cleansing  preparation  and  a  good  germi- 
cide for  use  before  the  application  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen. 
— Dr.  Pruyn. 

After  Extraction. — Phenol  sodique  gives  almost  magic 
relief  from  the  sickening  after-pains  and  soreness  follow- 
ing extraction.  It  also  controls  hemorrhage  and  promotes 
healing  and  hardening  of  the  gums. 

The  Best  Germicide. — The  best  germicide  is  the  flame. 
Dip  small  points  in  alcohol  and  ignite.  As  soon  as  the  alco- 
hol is  burnt  off  all  bacteria  will  be  killed. — Western  Dental 
Journal. 

An  Efficient  Deodorizer. — If  an  old  crown,  piece  of 
bridge  work,  or  any  similar  piece  of  repair  work  is  dipped 
into  electrozone,  the  offensive  odor  is  instantaneously  de- 
stroyed.— A.  H.  Peck^  Dental  Review. 

TJrotropin. — Aminoform,  or  urotropin,  a  combination 
of  ammonia  and  formaldehyde  gas,  is  a  very  valuable  anti- 
septic.— E.  T.  Leffler,  The  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Sterilizing  Cavities. — Cavities  of  decay  can  be  thor- 
oughly sterilized,  previous  to  the  insertion  of  filling,  with 
caustic  pyrozone. — Dental  News. 

Sterilizing  Mouth  Mirrors. — Place  the  mirrors  in  alco- 
hol until  needed  for  use.     Then  wash  in  clean  water  and 
dry  with  a  sterile  napkin. — E.  M.  Kaptan,  Dental  Review. 
12 


170  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sterilizing  the  Syringe. — Use  a  glass  syringe  which 
has  a  plunger  made  of  asbestos,  which  can  be  sterilized  by 
heating. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  Interest. 

Fetid  Breath. — When  fetid  breath  is  due  to  disease  of 
the  stomach  the  following  will  be  found  of  great  benefit : 

I^.    Carbo  ligni 

Pepsin  sacchar aa  3  ii 

Hydrarg.  chlorid.   mite     gr.  vi.     M. 

Divide  in  capsules  No.  24. 

Sig.^ — One  capsule  three  times  a  day,  two  hours  after  meals. 

Two  teaspoonfuls  of  glycothymolin  in  a  little  water, 
or  Seller's  solution  in  equal  parts  water,  twice  a  day,  will 
also  be  of  benefit. — J.  R.  Megraw,  Dental  Digest. 

Mercuric  Chlorid  Mouth-wash. — 

R.    Mercuric  chlorid    0.4  gm. 

Thymol    o.i  gm. 

Menthol    0.33  gm. 

Oil  eucalyptus  o.i  gm. 

Glycerin     50  gms. 

Alcohol    50  gms. 

Aq.    gaultheria    q.  s.  ad  1000  gms. 

This  combination  overcomes  the  disagreeable  metallic 
taste  and  gives  a  pleasant  and  refreshing  mouth-wash.  Fif- 
teen Cc.  of  this  solution  contains  only  i-ii  gr.  HgCL,  so 
that  if  accidentally  swallowed  it  would  do  no  injury,  while 
when  used  as  a  wash  the  amount  absorbed  would  be  so 
small  as  to  be  harmless. — C.  R.  Jackson,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 

Saccharin  Mouthwash. —  (For  infectious  gingivitis.)  — 
G.  G.  CuMSTON,  International  Den.  Jour. 

B.    Saccharine, 

Natrii  bicarb  aa  1  part. 

Acid  salicylat    4  parts. 

Alcoholis    150  parts. 

Aq.  menth.   pip    50  parts.           M. 

Half  teaspoonful  to  a  glass  of  tepid  water  as  a  mouth- 
wash. 


Antisepsis,  Prophylaxis,  Sterilisation,  etc.  171 

Mouth  Wash  after  Eemoval  of  Calculus. — Use  a  hot 
boracic  acid  solution,  about  i  to  600. — Dental  Review. 

Antiseptic  Paste. — 
'^.    Cocain  hydrochlorate, 

Thymol    aa  gr.  15 

Mix  thoroughly  and  add 

Formaldehyd    ••..... gtt.  10 

Oxid  of  zinc    gr.  30 

Make  a  paste. 

Keep  in  ground-glass  covered  bottle,  oiling  the  joint 
both  to  exclude  air  and  to  keep  the  paste  from  cementing 
cover  to  bottle.  This  paste  hardens  to  the  consistency  of 
half-dried  putty,  and  is  non-absorbent. — J.  H.  Beebee,  Den- 
tal Digest. 

Sterilizing  Instruments. — The  coating  which  sometimes 
forms  on  instruments  when  boiling  may  be  removed  with  the 
following  solution : 

Prepared  chalk   2  oz. 

Ammonia    2   oz. 

Alcohol 2  oz. 

Water  4  oz. 

Rub  the  instruments  with  cloth  saturated  with  the  solu- 
tion, then  wipe  them  with  a  dry  cloth. — J.  Q.  Byram, 
Dental  Revieiv. 

Mouth  Wash  for  Fetid  Breath. — 

!^.    Borate  of  sodium 15  grs. 

Alcohol  ^  drachm. 

Water    i  pint. 

Thymol    7  grs. 

— Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Tonic  and  Antiseptic  Mouth  Wash. — 

5.  Thymol    7    grs. 

Borax   15    grs. 

Water    i]^  oz. 

— P.  J.  David,  Medical  News. 


172  Practical  Dentistry. 

Antiseptic  Mouth-wash. — Among-  the  many  new  articles 
added  to  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  (eighth  edition)  is  an 
antiseptic  mouth-wash,  "Liquor  Antisepticus,"  containing 
2  per  cent,  boric  acid,  o.i  per  cent,  each  benzoic  acid  and 
thymol,  25  per  cent,  alcohol  and  other  antiseptics  and  aro- 
matics.    In  prescribing,  write  the  official  title  : 

^.    Liquoris  antiseptici  f5xij 

Sig. — Use  as  mouth-wash. 

— J.  P.  Buckley,  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Formol  for  Surgical  Antisepsis. — The  disagreeable  odor 
of  formol  is  disguised  if  prepared  as  follows : 

^.  Alco.  sol.  formol  40  per  cent 25  grams. 

Tine.  Eucalyptus    5  grams. 

Ethyl  Alcohol,  q.  s.  to  make 200  c.c. 

Each  teaspoonful  contains  25  centigrams  of  formic 
alcohol.  Add  one  to  four  teaspoonfuls  to  a  liter  of  water. 
— Semaine  Medicalc. 

Antiseptic  Mouth-wash  (Miller). — 

R.     Thymic  acid,  25  centigrammes  (314  grains)  ; 
Benzoic  acid,  3  gramines   (45  grains)  ; 
Essence  of  peppermint,  75  centigrammes  (10  minims)  ; 
Tincture  of  eucalyptus,  15  grammes   (4V2  drachms)  ; 
Alcohol,  100  grammes   (3  ounces). 
M.     Put  sufficient  in  a  glass  of  water  to  render  latter  milky. 

Mouth-wash  for  Fetid  Breath. — 

R.     Tinct.    myrrh    5  ij 

Kennedy's   dark  pinus — Canadensis    5  i 

Sod'i  borates     grs.  xij 

Listerin    (Lambert's)     5  iij 

Aqua  dist    5  iJ 

Use  as  mouth-wash  three  times  daily. — Med.  Brief. 


CHAPTER  VII 


ORAL    SURGERY  — ANTRAL    AFFECTIONS 
ALVEOLAR  ABSCESS— EXTRACT- 
ING, ETC. 


Extracting  and  Replanting  for  Cure  of  Abscess. — Hav- 
ing extracted  the  tooth,  give  it  an  immediate  bath  of 
peroxid  of  hydrogen.  With  a  stone  remove  all  necrosed 
bone,  cutting  the  end  off  flat;  if  necessary,  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  will  do  no  harm.  Wash  the  socket  with  tepid 
water  and  place  absorbent  cotton  with  eucain,  as  far  up 
as  it  will  go  without  pain.  Open  the  root-canal  clear 
through  and  fill  with  cement,  except  the  apical  end,  which 
fill  with  gutta-percha.  If  it  is  a  superior  incisor  grind  down 
the  lingual  surface  quite  appreciably,  so  that  the  antagoniz- 
ing teeth  will  not  strike.  Chisel  cavity  back  to  solid  walls 
and  fill  with  cement.  When  set  immerse  in  carbolic  solu- 
tion. Remove  eucain  cotton  from  socket  and  renew  with 
dry  cotton  on  top,  using  gentle  but  increasing  pressure. 
Remove,  set  the  tooth  to  exact  position  and  shove  to  place 
with  a  sharp  plunge.  Ligate  to  adjoining  teeth  well  up  to 
the  necks  to  insure  upward  pressure.  Later  replace  cement 
with  gold. — W.  D.  Cowan,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Opening  Acute  Alveolar  Abscesses. — When  an  alveolar 
abscess  is  to  be  opened  and  the  patient  cannot  stand 
the  pain  of  the  operation  it  is  best  to  have  recourse  to  the 
use  of  nitrous  oxid.  It  is  quite  unnecessary  in  such  cases 
to  resort  to  ether  or  chloroform,  and  it  is  inadvisable  for 
obvious  reasons  to  employ  cocain  or  the  chlorid  of  ethyl. 
When  no  anaesthetic  is  used  the  operator  is  apt  to  improp- 

^73 


174  Practical  Dentistry. 

erly  perform  the  work  on  account  of  the  anxiety  of  the 
patient ;  he  may  fail  to  reach  the  pus  or  may  make  an  open- 
ing too  small  to  adequately  drain  the  abscess.  Ofttimes  the 
most  painful  period  of  an  acute  apical  abscess  occurs  prior 
to  its  perforation  of  the  alveolus.  This  is  the  time  when 
under  nitrous  oxid  the  penetration  of  the  abscess  by  means 
of  a  spear-pointed  drill  going  through  the  gum  and  exter- 
nal alveolus  averts  a  more  extensive  involvement  of  both 
the  soft  and  hard  tissues  and  relieves  the  patient  almost  im- 
mediately.—M.  I.  ScHAMBERG,  Dental  Brief. 

Chronic  Alveolar  Abscess. — If  an  abscess  fails  to  heal 
readily  from  treatment  through  root-canal,  fill  the  canal, 
make  a  generous  opening,  and  pack  the  pocket  with 
cotton  saturated  with  cocain,  placing  loose  cotton  around 
the  opening  to  absorb  any  cocain  exuding.  After  about 
five  minutes  remove  the  cotton  and  curette  the  pocket 
thoroughly,  scraping  all  rough  or  dead  bone,  rather  taking 
more  than  necessary  than  not  enough,  and  flooding  with 
cassia  water  while  scraping,  to  keep  it  clean  and  allow  of 
seeing  what  is  being  done. — Elgin  MaWhinney,  Dental 
Reviezv. 

Drainage  of  Abscesses. — There  is  no  place  in  the  human 
body  where  care  in  securing  beyond  question  the  complete 
drainage  of  abscesses  is  so  important  as  in  the  mucous  tis- 
sues of  the  mouth.  The  blood  supply  is  so  rich  in  this 
region  that  cuts  close  in  a  surprisingly  short  time  and  the 
formation  of  pus  is  often  profuse  and  rapid.  Hence  we 
must  insist  upon  the  necessity  of  keeping  up  the  drainage 
for  a  sufificient  time  for  the  complete  cleaning  of  the  ab- 
scess. In  all  cases  of  the  drainage  of  abscesses  in  the 
membranes  of  the  mouth  use  a  95  per  cent,  carbolic 
acid  in  the  tent.  A  very  small  amount  retained  in  the 
gauze  or  cotton  is  sufficient  to  cauterize  the  lips  of  the 
incision,  making  the  opening  freer,  promoting  the  egress  of 
pus  and  presenting  a  barrier  to  the  ingress  of  new  infective 
material. — G.  V.  Black,  Northwestern  Dental  Journal. 


Oral  Surgery.  175 

Surgical  Treatment  of  Alveolar  and  Pericemental 
Abscesses. — Pus  left  to  itself  will  do  more  harm  than  the 
knife  of  the  surgeon  judiciously  used.  After  cleansing 
and  filling  the  root-canals,  with  a  small,  sharp,  clean  knife 
expose  the  bone,  gaining  free  access,  and  amputate  the  de- 
nuded end  of  the  root  smooth  with  the  side  of  the  cavity, 
and  curette  all  diseased  tissue,  no  matter  how  far  it  ex- 
tends. Syringe  out  the  cavity  with  hot  water  and  some 
mild  antiseptic,  not  escharotic,  in  order  to  preserve  the 
fresh  blood-clot,  which  will  form  new  tissue  in  less  time 
than  to  have  it  fill  in  from  the  sides.  By  relief  of  tension, 
destruction  of  diseased  tissue,  and  changing  a  chronic  into 
a  fresh  wound,  success  is  insured. — R,  B,  Adair^  Dental 
World. 

Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess. — First  anaesthetize  the 
part  or  patient ;  next  antisepticize  the  parts ;  then  raise  a 
periosteal  flap  from  the  external  alveolar  plate,  the  bone 
being  exposed.  Then,  with  a  clean  bur  of  sufficient  size 
{Y^  io  %  inch  in  diameter)  in  the  surgical  engine,  drill  di- 
rectly into  the  alveolar  abscess  and  completely  remove  its 
contents,  all  of  the  accumulated  debris  and  the  necrotic 
extremity  of  the  root  should  that  be  the  condition.  Steril- 
ize the  pulp  canals  and  fill.  Pack  the  abscess  cavity  with 
iodoform  gauze  or  other  dressing,  leaving  the  opening 
through  the  external  alveolar  plate  lightly  covered  by  the 
pendant  fold  formed  by  the  periosteal  flap. — H.  C.  Boen- 
NiNG,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Camphoroxol  in  the  Treatment  of  Chronic  Alveolar  Ab- 
scess.— The  design  being  to  deodorize  and  disinfect  and  to 
oxidize  and  destroy  degenerate  tissue,  the  chemical  changes 
in  the  compound  incident  to  oxidation  free  the  camphor 
and  leave  it  within  the  diseased  area  as  a  preventive  of  re- 
infection. The  action  upon  necrosed  tissue  is  prompt  and 
satisfactory,  and  we  have  in  this  combination — peroxid  of 
hydrogen  three  per  cent,  combined  with  camphor,  using  a 
fifty  per  cent,  solution  in  warm  water — a  valuable  medica- 
ment for  local  use. — L.  L.  Dunbar,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 


iy6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sponge-grafting  for  Roots  Absorbed,  Perforated,  or  In- 
completely Developed. — Bits  of  the  finest  Turkey  sponge, 
perfectly  free  from  sand  and  thoroughly  washed,  are  steril- 
ized in  phenate  of  soda  and  kept  ready  for  use  in  sealed  glass 
tubes.  A  small  portion  sufificiently  large  to  fill  the  extremity 
of  the  absorbed  root,  and  sufficiently  small,  on  pressure,  to 
be  passed  through  the  apical  opening  of  the  canal,  is  passed 
through,  the  root  having  been  first  made  aseptic.  The 
fibrous  tissue  of  the  human  economy  unites  with  the  fibres  of 
the  sponge  and  forms  a  graft,  which  completely  fills  the 
space  due  to  absorption  and  arrests  its  further  progress. 
— G.  Brunton,  British  Dental  Journal. 

A  New  Method  of  Closing  Incised  Wounds. — Cleanse 
the  wound  and  dry  thoroughly.  Apply  a  piece  of  adhesive 
plaster  on  either  side  of  the  wound,  of  size  to  give  ample 
area  for  adhesion,  and  not  nearer  the  edge  of  the  wound 
than  one-quarter  of  an  inch.  Insert  interrupted  sutures 
through  the  edge  of  the  plaster,  draw  together,  and  tie. 
This  coaptates  the  edges  of  the  wound  better  than  stitches 
through  the  skin  and  avoids  that  painful  process.  It  also 
does  away  with  the  possibility  of  stitch-hole  abscesses,  or  of 
i:)articles  of  suture  being  left  in  the  wound.  It  prevents 
stitch-mark  scars,  and  there  is  no  tearing  out  of  the  stitches 
through  the  bruised  tissues. — Therapeutic  Gazette. 

Asepsis  in  Tooth  Extraction. — The  extraction  of  a 
tooth  is  a  surgical  procedure,  and  as  such  should  be  con- 
ducted under  strict  asepsis,  or  as  nearly  so  as  can  be  ob- 
tained in  the  mouth  by  the  use  of  harmless  germicides.  It 
is  just  as  important  that  the  mouth  be  thoroughly  rinsed 
with  an  antiseptic  wash  immediately  before  extraction  as  it 
is  after  it.  Unfortunately,  most  patients  are  only  impressed 
with  the  need  for  rinsing  the  mouth  to  get  rid  of  the  blood 
which  accumulates  there  after  a  tooth  is  drawn.  They 
should  be  made  to  know  the  value  of  oral  antisepsis  prior 
and  subsequent  to  any  surgical  work  about  the  mouth. — 
M.  I.  SciiAMBERG,  Dental  Brief. 


Oral  Surgery.  ■         177 

Chronic  Alveolar  Abscess. — Persons  suffering  from 
chronic  alveolar  abscesses  are  always  more  or  less  liable 
to  some  constitutional  disturbances  in  which  it  would  be 
difficult  to  trace  the  initial  cause  to  this  almost  unrecog- 
nizable condition.  From  the  fistulous  opening  broken- 
down  cells  are  discharged  into  the  oral  cavity  and  become 
constituents  of  the  fluids  of  the  mouth,  contaminating  the 
secretions  in  such  a  way  as  to  prevent  its  physiological 
action  on  the  food  that  is  introduced  into  the  stomach  and 
intestines  to  compensate  for  the  waste  that  goes  on  in  the 
body. — Geo.  W.  Cook,  Dental  Digest. 

Abscess  without  Fistulous  Opening. — To  make  a  fistula, 
dip  a  serrated  plugger  point  in  a  95  per  cent,  carbolic  acid 
solution.  Dry  gum  over  apex,  and  touch  the  instrument  to 
the  spot  where  fistula  is  desired,  forming  an  eschar  which 
can  be  removed  with  serrations  of  plugger  point.  Dip  again 
in  the  acid  and  repeat  until  abscess  cavity  at  apex  of  root 
is  reached.  With  large  round  bur  cut  away  ragged  edges 
of  process  and  tooth,  wash  out  cavity  with  boiled  water 
two  parts,  and  antiseptic  mouth-wash  one  part.  Fill,  and 
polish  end  of  root ;  treat  canal  same  as  in  case  of  chronic 
abscess. — H.  H.  Sullivan,  Dental  Digest. 

Elevating  an  Impacted  Third  Molar. — A  vulcanite  cap 
was  fitted  to  cover  two  molars  and  the  second  bicuspid, 
carrying  a  gold  arm  bent  so  as  to  project  over  the  tooth  to 
be  lifted.  The  gum  was  cut  away  on  both  sides  of  the 
buried  tooth  sufficiently  to  expose  enough  of  the  lingual 
and  buccal  sides  to  drill  holes,  in  which  were  inserted  the 
two  bent  ends  of  a  gold  wire  staple.  A  piece  of  rubber 
tubing  connecting  the  staple  and  projecting  arm  raised  the 
tooth  sufficiently  in  ten  days  to  permit  its  extraction,  re- 
lieving a  severe  otalgia,  from  which  the  patient  had  suf- 
fered for  weeks. — J.  W.  Foreman,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Solidified  Formaldehyd  in  the  Treatment  of  Blind  Ab- 
scess.— The  ability  of  this  gas  to  work  beyond  the  apex 
of  the  root ;  to  follow  the  tubuli  of  the  dentin  to  the  cemen- 


178  Practical  Dentistry. 

turn;  its  ease  of  application  (in  the  pulp  chamber)  ;  the  ab- 
sence of  strangling  fumes  as  with  the  aqueous  solution,  and 
my  success  with  every  tooth  so  treated,  compel  me  to  be- 
lieve that  in  solidified  formaldehyd  is  found  the  most 
effective  agent  for  the  treatment  of  pulpless  teeth  in  all 
stages  and  in  all  environments. — F.  B.  Lawrence,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 

The  Use  of  Alveolar  Forceps. — When  it  is  necessary  to 
remove  a  number  of  broken-down  teeth  and  buried  roots, 
the  jagged  margins  of  the  alveolar  process  and  the  numer- 
ous septa  cause  suffering,  prolonged  sometimes  for  weeks 
and  months  as  the  scar-tissue  of  the  healing  soft  tissues  is 
drawn  taut  across  the  projecting  points  of  bone.  It  is  a 
humane  operation  to  present — by  means  of  a  surgical  oper- 
ation— to  the  torn  and  mangled  gums,  a  smoothly-trimmed, 
rounded  surface,  over  which  they  heal  rapidly  by  first  inten- 
tion.— J.  Y.  Crawford. 

Treatment  of  Socket  After  Extraction  of  Abscessed 
Teeth. — \\"ipe  out  the  socket  thoroughly  with  concentrated 
carbolic  acid  ;  both  in  acute  and  chronic  abscesses,  not  merely 
as  a  pain  reliever,  but  because  it  thoroughly  breaks  up  the 
sac,  if  any.  or  the  remaining  portions  of  it,  and  by  its  stimu- 
lating effect  rapidly  assists  the  healing  process.  The  ano- 
dyne and  anaesthetic  effect  is  almost  instantaneous. — C.  P. 
HuBLEY.  Items  of  Interest. 

Conservative  Methods  in  Antrum  Treatment. — The 
opening  through  a  root-canal  is  often  sufficiently  large  for 
treatment  and  drainage  of  the  antrum.  In  a  case  in  which 
the  second  molar  was  involved  the  buccal  roots  were  cleaned 
and  filled.  A  platinum  cylinder  was  cemented  into  the  pal- 
atine root-canal,  the  pulp  chamber  and  cavity  being  filled 
with  amalgam  around  the  cylinder.  The  diseased  antrum 
was  successfully  treated  by  injections  through  the  cylinder 
in  the  root-canal,  and  a  cure  effected  in  two  weeks,  the 
treatment  having  been  kept  up  by  the  patient  at  home. — J. 

P.   CORLEY. 


Oral  Surgery.  179 

Treatment  of  Dry  Socket. — In  a  case  of  extreme  pain 
subsequent  to  extraction  of  a  third  molar,  the  alveolus  was 
found  to  be  devoid  of  the  usual  coagulum  and  the  bone  bare. 
A  stifif,  dough-like  paste,  similar  to  a  suppository,  was  made 
of  orthoform  combined  with  oil  of  sesame  and  glycerin. 
With  this  the  socket  was  filled,  which  gave  protection  to  the 
exposed  tissue  and  almost  immediate  relief  through  the  an- 
algesic properties  of  the  orthoform. — International  Dental 
Journal. 

Safe  Painless  Extraction. — Put  in  a  small  dish  three  or 
four  drops  of  adrenalin  and  a  one-fifth  grain  soluble  tablet 
o£  cocain.  Add  to  this  twenty  drops  of  hamamelis;  this 
will  fill  an  ordinary  syringe  and  makes  a  pure,  fresh  antiseptic 
solution  antagonistic  to  inflammation.  Inject  and  you  are 
ready  to  extract  in  two  minutes.  Adrenalin  is  the  most 
powerful  antidote  known  for  cocain  poisoning  and  is  used 
hypodermatically  for  all  symptoms  that  manifest  in  cocain 
poisoning. — W.  Clyde  Davis,  Items  of  Interest. 

Exostosis:  Symptoms. — A  heavy,  dark  redness  of  the 
gum  extending  well  into  the  lip,  which  fails  to  yield  to  treat- 
ment, may  indicate  a  local  crowding  of  the  teeth,  and  develop 
into  acute  facial  neuralgia,  with  darting  pains  passing  to  the 
temples,  when  we  may  be  quite  sure  that  the  teeth  are  be- 
coming exostosed.  The  destruction  of  the  nerve  will  be 
necessary,  and  sometimes  a  drill  opening  will  be  advisable, 
as  the  tooth  can  be  made  comfortable  for  many  years,  at 
least,  by  frequent  applications  of  a  hot  instrument  forced  up 
the  opening. — Levi  G.  Taylor^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Treatment  of  Incipient  Abscess. — Drill  through  the 
alveoli  to  the  apex  of  the  root  and  make  an  escape  for  the 
inflammatory  products.  To  do  this  with  the  least  pain,  in- 
ject into  the  gum  a  solution  of  cocain  and  atropin  in  car- 
bolized  water.  Then  slit  the  gum  and  drill  through  the  an- 
terior plate  and  inject  the  anaesthetic  into  the  canalculi  and 
tissues  around  the  apex. — L.  West,  in  Dental  Digest. 


i8o  Practical  Dentistry. 

Arrest  of  Hemorrhage  After  Tooth  Extraction. — Remove 
all  the  external  stringy  coagulated  blood ;  then  place  a  small 
amount  of  cotton  over  (not  in)  the  bleeding  cavity  and 
exert  gentle  pressure  for  one  or  two  minutes;  then  allow 
the  air,  essential  to  coagulation,  to  reach  the  cavity  for  a 
second  and  return  the  pressure.  Repeat  until  the  cavity  is 
filled  with  a  natural  coagulated  mass.  No  drug  is  neces- 
sary.— W.  D.  Cowan,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Adenoids. — The  operation  should  not  be 
performed  if  virulent  septic  infection  of  the  pharynx  or  adja- 
cent cavities  already  exists.  In  cases  of  middle  ear  sup- 
puration where  adenoids  are  present,  for  some  weeks  before 
operating  for  the  removal  of  the  adenoids  use  of  the  follow- 
ing ear-drops :  Biniodide  of  mercury  in  dilute  alcohol 
(Hydrarg.  lod.  Rub.,  gr.  >^  to  >^  ;  Potass.  lod.,  gr.  ^/^  ; 
Alcohol,  drms.  4,  and  water,  drms.  4)  or  zinc  chlorid  in 
dilute  alcohol  (Zinc  Chlor.,  grs.  4;  Glycerin,  drms  2;  Alco- 
hol, drms.  2  to  4 ;  water  to  an  ounce). — Dental  Era. 

Radical  Treatment  of  Persistent  Abscess. — Fill  the  root- 
canal  permanently,  then  lance  the  gum  over  the  seat  of  the 
disease ;  drill  through  the  process  to  the  root  apex,  and  with 
a  round  bur  of  sufficient  size  cut  off  the  apical  end  of  the 
root,  and  remove  as  much  of  the  adjacent  alveolar  tissue 
as  may  seem  to  be  afifected.  Wash  the  cavity  well  to  remove 
all  debris,  pack  with  iodoform  gauze,  and  leave  the  result  to 
the  kind  hand  of  nature. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Stomatologist. 

Carbolic  Acid  in  the  Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess. — 

With  a  small  amount  of  carbolic  acid  in  the  putrescent  canal 
use  a  piece  of  soft  rubber  and  apply  pressure,  filling  the  cav- 
ity with  the  rubber  and  forcing  the  carbolic  acid  up  into  and 
through  the  canal.  To  guard  against  the  escharotic  effect  of 
the  carbolic  acid  as  it  comes  through  the  fistulous  opening, 
first  dry  off  the  gum  thoroughly  and  then  paint  glycerin  over 
the  surface  of  the  gum,  so  that  the  glycerin  may  immediately 
take  up  the  overflow  of  acid. — Dr.  Austin,  Dental  Era. 


Oral  Surgery.  i8i 

Chronic  Apical  Abscess. — Use  deliquesced  zinc  chlorid, 
on  a  cotton  twist,  for  the  serous  discharges  of  an  inflamed 
surface  (chronic  apical  abscess  without  fistula).  It  acts 
like  a  charm  in  promptly  checking  the  discharges  of  blood 
and  serum,  and  with  no  ill  results,  as  a  rule.  Occasionally 
a  little  tenderness  supervenes,  but  that  follows  as  fre- 
quently, if  not  more  so,  in  cases  of  this  kind  where  the 
drug  is  not  used. — Otto  E.  Ixglis,  Dental  Digest. 

Suppurative  Affections:  Abortive  Treatment. — The  in- 
termittent application  of  cold  compresses  or  the  ice-ba^ 
has  proved  to  be  of  considerable  value  in  reducing  inflam- 
matory swelling  about  the  face  and  neck,  and  has  frequently 
prevented  the  breaking  externally  of  abscesses  in  these  re- 
gions. While  a  cold  application  to  the  face  does  not  afford 
the  comfort  or  relief  from  pain  that  heat  does,  its  tending 
is  to  prevent  rather  than  to  encourage  suppuration. — M.  I. 
ScHAMBERG,  Joiimal  American  Medical  Association. 

Nerve  Pain  after  Extracting. — If  the  pain  is  severe  and 
continuous,  resisting  the  action  of  anodynes  and  antisep- 
tics, it  is  presumably  caused  by  the  pinching  of  nerve  fila- 
ments in  the  bone  surrounding  the  socket,  and  in  several 
cases  the  pain  has  ceased  at  once  and  forever  upon  cutting 
the  bone  at  the  apex  of  the  socket  with  a  sharp  and  rapid- 
running  bur. — Henry  D.  Hatch,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Treatment  of  Abscessed  Teeth. — The  rubber-dam  should 
be  adjusted  and  the  teeth  which  are  included  sterilized, 
especially  the  cavity  in  the  affected  tooth,  after  which  the 
pulp-chamber  should  be  opened  into  with  a  suitable  round 
bit.  Usually  the  pus  flows  freely;  it  should  be  the  effort 
at  each  sitting  to  mechanically  evacuate  as  much  of  the 
pus  as  possible.  When  this  has  been  done,  cleanse  the 
canals  and  seal  in  hermetically  the  following:  Tricresol, 
two  fluidrachms ;  formalin,  one  fluidrachm.  Change  every 
day  until  no  more  pus  flows  from  the  canals. — J.  P. 
Buckley,  Dental  Review. 


1 82  Practical  Dentistry. 

Treatment  of  an  Epulis  with  Injections  of  Arsenic. — 
An  Epulis  which  developed  between  an  upper  cuspid  and 
first  bicuspid,  spreading  from  the  buccal  to  the  lingual  side 
of  the  mouth  and  bleeding  freely  whenever  touched,  grad- 
ually dried  up  and  disappeared  without  surgical  operation, 
the  treatment  having  consisted  in  the  injection  of  a  i  per 
cent,  solution  of  white  arsenic  in  water.  A  few  drops  were 
injected,  at  first  every  day,  and  later  every  day  for  several 
weeks,  using  an  ordinary  hypodermic  syringe  with  a  freshly 
sterilized  needle  having  a  short  point. — H.  J.  Moore,  Dental 
Reiiezv. 

Abscessed  Teeth:  Extraction. — It  is  not  putting  it  too 
strongly  to  say  that  to  extract  teeth  the  seat  of  abscesses, 
without  careful  washing  previously  and  vigorous  after-treat- 
ment, is  well-nigh  criminal  negligence.  Under  such  condi- 
tions everything  is  favorable  for  serious  complications.  The 
dental  surgeon's  work  should  not  end  with  the  mere  ex- 
traction of  the  tooth  with  an  abscessed  pericementum; 
swab  the  oral  cavity  thoroughly,  before  and  after,  making 
sure  to  carry  the  antiseptic  solution  into  the  wound. — D.  J. 
Brown,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Checking  Alveolar  Hemorrhage. — Five  grains  of  tannic 
acid  are  dissolved  in  as  much  glycerin  as  will  take  up  this 
quantity;  then  one-fourth  of  a  tumbler  of  water  is  added. 
Two  tablespoonfuls  of  this  are  to  be  taken  every  half  hour 
until  three  doses  are  consumed.  Very  efficacious  when  the 
bleeding  is  very  profuse  and  continued  for  several  hours. — 
Chas.  p.  Chupein,  Items  of  Interest. 

Pain  Following  Extraction. — In  some  cases  it  may  be 
necessary  to  use  heat  in  order  to  lessen  the  tension,  but  it 
is  only  logical  to  apply  the  heat  directly  to  the  parts  affected, 
using  pledgets  of  cotton  steeped  in  hot  water;  one  or  two 
per  cent,  solution  of  carbolic  acid  has  been  suggested,  or  a 
hot  infusion  of  camomile  flowers. — Chas.  B.  Isaacson, 
Dental  Digest. 


Oral  Surgery.  183 

After-pains  of  Extraction. — The  pain  after  extraction, 
or,  more  correctly,  neuritis  of  the  alveolus,  will  most  gener- 
ally be  found  in  an  inflammation  of  the  continuation  of  the 
alveolus.  The  rending  of  the  periosteal  nerves,  the  pull- 
ing and  expansion  of  the  osseous  walls,  a  scarcely  apparent 
fracture,  may  all  contribute  to  torture  the  patient  for  days. 
If  in  these  cases  every  part  of  the  socket  is  thoroughly 
wiped  with  concentrated  carbolic  acid,  pain  will  cease  at 
once,  with  no  subsequent  ill  effects. — Arthur  Schneur, 
Prager  Med.  Woch. 

Extraction  of  First  Molars. — Extraction  of  the  first 
permanent  molars  before  the  eruption  of  the  second  molars 
will  many  times  shorten  the  bite,  allowing  the  jaws  to  come 
closer  together;  the  bicuspids  not  being  allowed  to  erupt 
fully,  the  under  pressure  on  the  upper  anterior  teeth  caus- 
ing their  protrusion  and  the  lower  to  come  in  contact  with 
the  gums.  The  second  molars  not  infrequently  tilt  forward 
into  the  space,  not  only  forming  lodging  places  for  food, 
but  causing  serious  malocclusion. — H.  A.  Pullen,  Domin- 
ion Dental  Journal. 

Alveolar  Abscesses. — Operations  of  filling  with  gold, 
or  fitting  bands  for  crowns,  etc.,  should  be  postponed  for  at 
least  two  or  three  weeks  after  a  severe  acute,  or  even  a 
chronic,  alveolar  abscess  has  been  restored  to  a  normal 
physiological  condition.  The  parts  should  be  allowed  to 
rest  for  a  sufficient  length  of  time  for  the  tissues  to  readjust 
themselves  to  a  normal  mechanical  resistance  to  irritating 
agents  that  are  not  infectious  in  character. — Geo.  W.  Cook, 
Dental  Digest. 

Hemorrhage  after  Tooth  Extraction. — Prolonged  bleed- 
ing after  extraction  may  be  caused  by  the  dental  artery 
becoming  entangled  in  the  ragged  edges  of  the  alveolus  and 
its  mouth  being  held  open.  In  this  case  the  bleeding  would 
be  red  blood,  spurting  in  jets.  A  drill  run  down  into  the 
cavity  would  disentangle  the  artery  and  stop  the  bleeding. — 
H.  E.  Belden,  Dental  Digest. 


184  Practical  Dentistry. 

Treatment  of  Pain  Following  Extractions. — The  use  of 
adrenalin  as  an  adjunct  to  cocain  has  its  decided  merits, 
but  as  it  increases  arterial  tension,  in  weak  hearts  it  is 
very  apt  to  produce  syncope,  especially  in  diabetes  and 
Bright's  disease,  though  while  the  sequelae  from  the  use 
of  this  drug  might  be  alarming,  in  my  experience  so  far 
they  had  not  proved  fatal. — Charles  B.  Isaacson,  Dental 
Digest. 

Impacted  Temporary  Molars. — When  a  temporary  molar 
has  been  allowed  to  remain  in  place  until  the  first  molar 
and  the  bicuspid  have  grown  up  and  over,  wedging  the 
deciduous  tooth  tightly  in  place,  my  method  is  to  divide  the 
tooth  from  the  lingual  to  the  buccal  side  down  to  the  bifur- 
cation of  the  roots,  using  a  No.  3  or  4  cross-cut  bur  in  the 
engine.  When  the  tooth  is  thus  divided  the  removal  of  the 
portions  is  easily  done  with  an  elevator. — J.  C.  McCoy, 
Pacific  Dental  Gaactte. 

After  Tooth  Extraction. — Place  in  the  socket  a  pledget 
of  cotton  immersed  in  a  hot  aqueous  chloreton  solution, 
especially  if  there  be  any  pain  after  extraction,  and  more 
especially  when  there  has  been  an  acute  abscess  or  after  re- 
moval of  necrosed  bone.  The  operator  need  have  no  fear  in 
permitting  his  patient  to  leave  the  office  with  the  chloreton 
in  the  tooth  socket,  while  we  cannot  have  the  same  sense  of 
security  after  the  use  of  cocain. — C.  H.  Oakman,  Dental 
Rez'iezv. 

Pain  after  Extraction. — Curette  and  thoroughly  cleanse 
the  alveolus  and  irrigate  copiously  with  hot  water.  Apply 
two  drops  of  pure  carbolic  acid  and  pack  loosely  with 
sterilized  gauze.  If  the  pain  does  not  cease  saturate  a  small 
pellet  of  cotton  with  campho-phenique,  take  up  with  it  a 
small  amount  of  morphin-acetate  and  carry  to  the  bottom  of 
the  socket.  The  morphin-campho-phenique  dressing  pro- 
duces most  remarkable  results,  the  pain  disappearing  almost 
instantaneously. — J.  Endleman,  Dental  Register. 


Oral  Surgery.  185 

Treatment  of  Abscess. — Don't  forget  that  good  old- 
fashioned  beechwood  creosote,  if  properly  used,  will  do  more 
to  cure  an  abscess  than  any  other  remedy.  It  breaks  up 
the  walls  of  the  pus  sac  and  fistula  and  promotes  granulation. 
Discard  the  syringe  and  pump  the  creosote  through  the  canal 
of  the  tooth  until  it  appears  at  the  fistulous  opening.  Use 
a  napkin  to  protect  the  mucous  membrane. — M.  W.  Spar- 
row, Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Carbonized  Cotton  After  Extraction. — Carbonized  cotton 
gives  most  satisfactory  results.  It  is  perfectly  aseptic,  ab- 
sorbs a  great  quantity  of  coagulating  remedies,  remains 
sweet  a  long  time,  leaving  the  wound  sweet  and  clean.  Used 
with  a  three  per  cent,  solution  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen  it  will 
check  the  most  obstinate  cases  of  bleeding.  Hold  the  fingei 
on  the  dressing  until  the  frothing  ceases  or  the  soft  cotton 
may  be  ejected  from  the  wound. — A.  Jessel,  Dental  Review. 

Saie  Painless  Extraction. — Put  in  a  small  dish  three  or 
four  drops  of  adrenalin  and  a  one-fifth  grain  soluble  tablet 
of  cocain.  Add  to  this  twenty  drops  of  hamamelis ;  this  will 
fill  an  ordinary  syringe  and  makes  a  pure,  fresh,  antiseptic 
solution  antagonistic  to  inflammation.  Inject  and  you  are 
ready  to  extract  in  two  minutes.  Adrenalin  is  the  most 
powerful  antidote  known  for  cocain  poisoning  and  is  used 
hypodermatically  for  all  symptoms  that  manifest  in  cocain 
poisoning. — W.  Clyde  Davis,  Items  of  Interest. 

Extraction  for  the  Cure  of  Abscess. — "What  is  our  busi- 
ness in  life?  To  take  out  an  inefficient  organ  which  is  suf- 
fering for  a  moment  with  a  passing  disease  ?  An  abscessed 
tooth  is  very  easily  curable;  then  why  in  heaven's  name 
should  we  extract  it?  The  extraction  of  teeth,  it  seems  to 
me,  is  the  practice  of  the  inefficient  man.  The  curing  of  an 
abscess  is  an  extremely  simple  thing  in  almost  every  case 
and  the  preservation  of  an  abscessed  tooth  is  the  simple  duty 
of  the  accomplished  dentist. — N,  S.  Jenkins,  Items  of 
Interest. 
13 


i86  Practical  Dentistry. 

Impacted  Third  Molar  Teeth:  Diagnosis. — Note  the 
thickness  of  the  tissues;  the  amount  of  process  involved; 
the  presence  of  any  foreign  body ;  the  direction  in  which 
the  tooth  hes ;  its  relation  to  the  second  molar,  and  the 
duration  and  magnitude  of  the  disturbance.  The  diagnosis 
of  a  partial  impaction  can  be  made  in  the  majority  of  cases 
with  an  explorer ;  the  tissue  is  retracted,  the  size  of  the 
crown  noted  and  the  direction  of  the  roots  ascertained. — 
Geo.  W.  Winter,  The  Dental  Era. 

Cataphoresis — Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess. — Fuse  a 
small  elongated  bulb  of  zinc  on  to  a  platinum  wire  for  posi- 
tive electrode.  Coat  the  zinc  bulb  with  mercury  and  insert 
into  fistula  or  incision.  The  electrolytic  action  of  the  current 
dissolves  a  small  portion  of  the  zinc  bulb  and  deposits  within 
the  abscess  cavity  the  chlorid  of  mercury  and  zinc.  If  pain- 
ful, use  a  few  drops  of  cocain  on  the  zinc  electrode,  com- 
bining anaesthesia  with  electrolysis. — John  M.  Fogg,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Hemorrhage  After  Tooth  Extraction. — The  problem  is 
simply  that  of  plugging  up  the  hole  out  of  which  the  blood 
flows.  *  *  *  What  better  fitting  plug  can  be  found  than 
the  extracted  tooth?  Dip  its  roots  in  tannin  or  powdered 
alum  and  press  it  back  to  place.  It  can  be  removed  later 
when  all  danger  of  hemorrhage  is  past,  or  if  necessary  it 
might  be  allowed  to  remain  on  the  principle  that  a  live  man 
with  a  bad  tooth  is  better  than  a  dead  man  without  a  tooth. 
— Dental  Cosmos. 

Tooth  Extraction. — After  injecting  local  anaesthetics, 
with  a  No.  5  bur  carefully  drill  the  process  away  so  that 
your  instrument  may  reach  the  bifurcation  of  a  molar.  If  a 
single  rooted  tooth,  cut  process  away  until  you  are  sure  of 
your  hold.  Explain  the  reason  for  this  to  the  patient  and 
you  not  only  avoid  fractures,  but  establish  a  reputation  for 
skill  and  carefulness. — Fred.  H.  Metcalf,  Pacific  Dental 
Gazette. 


Oral  Surgery.  187 

In  Case  of  Accidental  Opening  into  a  Healthy  Antrum 
in  Tooth  Extraction. — It  is  altogether  unnecessary  to  treat 
antral  cavities  that  have  been  accidentally  opened,  for  the 
reason  that  soon  after  the  extraction  the  blood  from  the 
alveolus  becomes  coagulated  and  closes  up  the  opening. 
Should  the  opening  be  larger,  however,  means  must  be  em- 
ployed to  close  it. — Dr.  Szabo,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Hemorrhage  after  Tooth  Extraction. — Pack  the  alveoli 
with  iodoform  gauze  covered  by  a  ball  of  cotton  retained 
in  position  by  rubber  dam  secured  with  ligatures  to  the 
neighboring  teeth.  Cut  away  the  redundant  portion  of  the 
rubber  dam.  This  permits  irrigation  of  the  mouth  and  the 
taking  of  food.  The  slight  periostitis  that  may  ensue  helps 
towards  recovery  by  stimulating  granulation. — Johann 
Franck^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Root  Amputation. — If  the  root  has  lost  its  membrane, 
cut  it  away  as  far  as  this  is  the  case.  If  we  wish  to  effect 
a  permanent  cure  we  must  get  cementum  and  a  new  peri- 
dental membrane  over  the  end  of  the  root.  In  some  cases 
we  do  not  get  it,  and  in  a  year  or  two,  maybe  in  less,  we  will 
have  a  new  alveolar  abscess,  or  you  may  get  absorption  of 
the  end  of  the  root  as  a  result  of  this  operation. — G.  V. 
Black,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Antral  Troubles:  Over-treatment. — In  many  cases  of 
long  standing  my  advice  has  been  to  try  letting  alone  for 
awhile.  Many  of  the  cases  have  healed  without  further 
treatment.  In  many  cases  the  mistake  is  made  of  over- 
treatment.  The  treatment  is  the  cause  of  the  continuance 
of  the  trouble,  and  not  any  diseased  condition. — B.  N. 
Strout. 

Antral  Operations. — In  opening  into  the  antrum  use 
a  local  ansesthetic,  consisting  of  a  mixture  of  cocain  and 
chloretone.  Make  a  liberal  opening  and  immediately  place 
a  large  plug  of  cotton,  saturated  in  a  hot  aqueous  solution 
of  chloretone^  near  the  floor  of  the  antrum,  completely  filling 
the  wound. — C.  H.  Oakman,  Dental  Review. 


i88  Practical  Dentistry. 

Diagnosis  of  Diseased  Antrum. — A  test  that  is  simple, 
painless,  and  which  will  give  a  fair  amount  of  positive 
evidence,  consists  in  using  a  tuning-fork  over  the  antrum 
and  the  teeth,  the  first  and  second  molars  preferred.  If 
the  antrum  is  free  and  clean  the  tuning-fork  will  be  heard 
with  equal  distinctness  and  of  like  character,  over  each 
side  and  in  either  location.  If  one  antrum  contains  fluid, 
it  will  not  be  heard  so  distinctly;  perhaps  very  faintly; 
perhaps  not  at  all. — Therapeutic  Gazette. 

Persistent  Alveolar  Abscess;  Treatment  by  Extraction 
and  Replantation. — This  method  is  indicated  (i)  when  the 
ends  of  the  roots  have  become  necrosed;  (2)  when  a  broach 
protrudes  through  the  apex  and  cannot  be  removed;  (3) 
teeth  in  which  calcification  has  taken  place  rendering  other 
treatment  doubtful;  (4)  perforation  of  the  cementum ;  (5) 
when  canals  are  too  tortuous  to  permit  of  proper  cleansing. — 
Joseph  E.  Wilkinson,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Persistent  Hemorrhage  after  Tooth  Extraction. — Wash 
the  cavity  with  hot  water  and  insert  a  plug  of  cotton  filled 
with  the  subsulphate  of  iron,  or  dust  the  socket  well  with  the 
subsulphate  and  insert  a  plug  of  softened  gutta-percha  pressed 
firmly  down  into  the  socket,  ligating  it  down  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  secure  pressure.  Instruct  the  patient  to  maintain 
an  upright  position,  thus  securing  the  benefits  of  gravity. — 
Truman  W.  Brophy,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Indurated  Abscess. — When  an  alveolar  abscess  assumes 
a  condition  of  induration  instead  of  the  softened  pufifiness 
pending  the  formation  of  external  fistula,  adjust  rubber- 
dam  and  fill  the  root-canal  with  a  paste  composed  of  chalk 
combined  with  a  little  carbolic  acid  and  glycerin,  with 
crystals  of  iodin  added.  Mix  the  paste  fresh  each  time 
if  necessary  to  repeat. — Office  and  Laboratory. 

Formaldehyd  in  the  Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess. — 
Clean  the  canal,  drop  in  formaldehyd,  close  with  cement  to 
prevent  the  gas  from  coming  out  compelling  it  to  go  the 


Oral  Surgery.  189 

other  way.  It  will  follow  the  canal  where  the  pus  has  bur- 
rowed, absolutely  and  completely  sterilizing,  as  if  it  had 
passed  through  fire.  This  will  close  up  in  a  few  hours  and 
it  is  gone. — Dr.  Lawrence,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Hemorrhage  After  Tooth  Extraction. — If 
there  is  a  suspicion  that  the  patient  is  hemorrhagic,  replace 
the  tooth  after  cutting  off  half  or  a  third  of  the  tooth.  The 
tooth  invariably  gets  loose  after  a  short  time,  and  is  removed 
by  the  fingers.  I  have  used  it  several  times,  and  it  has 
always  proved  efficacious. — Beadwell  Gill,  Journal  British 
Dental  Ass'n. 

Antral  Troubles. — Boracic  acid  solution,  four  per  cent, 
is,  in  my  judgment,  the  best  of  all  washes,  but  other  similar 
remedies  will  produce  good  results.  Active  germicides,  as 
bichlorid  of  mercury  and  carbolic  acid,  are  too  irritating 
except  in  case  of  deep  ulcerative  points,  while  strong  car- 
bolic acid  applied  once  a  week,  in  addition  to  ordinary  irri- 
gation, will  produce  the  best  of  results. — Thos.  Fille- 
BROWN,  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Best  Way  to  Inject  an  Abscess. — The  best  way, 
ordinarily,  to  inject  an  abscess,  is  to  pack  the  canal  lightly 
with  cotton  saturated  with  the  medicament,  and  to  force 
down  on  it  a  piece  of  unvulcanized  rubber.  When  the  medi- 
cament appears  at  the  fistulous  opening,  if  of  recent  oc- 
currence, the  cavity  may  at  once  be  sealed. — W.  J.  Morgan, 
Dental  Digest. 

Flushing  the  Antrum. — An  ordinary  fountain  syringe, 
holding  a  quart  or  more,  is  the  most  effective  apparatus  for 
irrigating  the  antrum,  the  patient's  head  being  lowered  to 
a  point  that  will  prevent  any  of  the  fluid  running  into  the 
throat,  using  a  slightly  saline  or  alkaline  solution.  The 
patient  can  use  this  and  irrigate  as  often  as  the  conditions 
require,  ordinarily  from  two  to  half  a  dozen  times  a  day. — E. 
L.  TowNSEND_,  Pacific  Stomatological  Gazette. 


190  Practical  Dentistry. 

Extraction  of  Third  Molars. — There  is  one  condition 
wherein  it  is  not  well  to  extract  the  third  molars,  viz. :  when 
the  added  diameters  of  the  teeth  do  not  equal  the  space  in 
the  jaw  allotted  to  the  teeth  and  therefore  they  have  a 
tendency  to  separate.  Such  teeth  are  not  apt  to  decay,  and 
the  third  molars  may  help  to  hold  them  in  their  original 
positions. — Horace  Warren,  Dental  Sniiniiary. 

Hemorrhage   After  Tooth   Extraction;    Picric  Acid. — 

Place  a  drop  of  creosote,  or  carbolic  acid,  and  a  drop  of 
nitric  acid  side  by  side  on  the  top  of  an  inverted  glass.  Now 
take  a  pledget  of  cotton  and  dip  it  first  in  one  and  then  the 
other,  and  after  waiting  a  moment  pack  securely  in  the 
alveolus.  The  union  of  the  creosote,  nitric  acid  and  cotton 
forms  a  violently  explosive  compound,  and  must  be  handled 
with  care.— G.  T.  Baker,  Iiitcniational  Dental  Journal. 

Lactate  of  Silver  in  the  Treatment  of  Chronic  Abscess. — 
I  have  experienced  much  benefit  from  lactate  of  silver  in 
the  treatment  of  chronic  abscesses  at  the  roots  of  teeth,  suc- 
ceeding with  it  wlicre  other  remedies  have  failed.  Use  one 
part  of  the  powder  to  500  of  water,  injecting  with  hypo- 
dermic syringe  through  the  fistulous  opening  well  into  the 
abscess. — H.  W,  Moore,  Dental  Digest. 

Antrum  Treatment  Through  a  Root-canal. — I  would 
rather  devitalize  a  sound  tooth,  if  necessary,  and  treat 
through  the  canal,  than  remove  a  bad  tooth  and  treat 
through  the  socket.  There  is  always  more  or  less  shrinkage 
and  absorption  after  tooth  extraction,  and  to  preserve  the 
opening  and  prevent  food  from  opening  it  may  be  necessary 
for  the  patient  to  wear  a  plate. — J.  P.  Corley. 

Drainage  of  Abscesses. — In  all  cases  of  abscesses  in  the 
mucous  tissues  of  the  mouth  I  insist  on  the  use  of  95  per 
cent,  carbolic  acid  on  the  tent.  A  very  small  amount  retained 
in  the  gauze  or  cotton  is  sufficient  to  cauterize  the  lips  of 
the  incision,  making  the  opening  free,  promoting  the  egress 
of  pus  and  preventing  the  ingress  of  new  infective  material. 
— G.  V.  Black,  Northwestern  Dental  Journal. 


Oral  Surgery.  191 

Pyrozone  as  a  Styptic. — In  the  bleeding  of  the  gums  so 
troublesome  in  crown-  and  bridge-work,  a  25  per  cent,  solu- 
tion pyrozone  applied  to  the  gum  acts  as  a  styptic,  and  in 
my  hands  has  never  resulted  unhappily.  Use  in  the  same 
manner  for  the  insertion  of  gold  fillings  at  cervical  margins, 
one  or  two  applications  rendering  the  gum  perfectly  dry  for 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes. — Dr.  Wittlander,  Dental  Practi- 
tioner. 

Severe  Hemorrhage. — In  the  case  of  a  bad  bleeder, 
suffering  from  anaemia,  and  for  whom  it  was  necessary 
to  remove  some  bad  roots,  treatment  for  three  or  four 
days  beforehand  with  thirty-grain  doses  of  calcium 
chlorid  had  a  perfectly  marvelous  eflfect,  the  bleeding 
being  quite  under  the  normal. — Mr.  R.  H.  Bates,  Dental 
Record. 

For  Relief  of  Nausea  and  Headache  After  Nitrous  Oxid 
Anaesthesia. — Give  a  tablet  containing  cocain  hydrochlorate 
1-12  grain,  bismuth  subnitrate  2  grains,  oxalate  of  cerium  2 
grains.  Headache  can  be  corrected  by  5  grains  antikamnia, 
or  a  teaspoonful  of  hydrobromate  of  caffine  in  a  half  glass  of 
water;  to  be  taken  during  effervescence, — A.  E.  Mann, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Hemorrhage  from  Socket  After  Tooth.  Extraction. — 
When  there  is  a  tooth  standing  on  each  side  of  the  bleed- 
ing socket,  it  is  easy  to  tie  a  silk  ligature  round  each  of 
these  teeth,  and  by  tying  across  the  opening  retain  firmly 
any  plug  used  as  a  hemostatic. — M.  Woodhouse,  Journal 
Brit.  Den.  Ass'n. 

Antrum  Treatment. — If  you  use  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  be 
careful  with  it,  for  almost  all  peroxid  is  strongly  acid  in 
reaction,  and  it  smarts.  Add,  just  before  using,  limewater 
or  sodium  bicarbonate  and  test  it  with  litmus  paper  until 
neutral  in  reaction,  and  you  will  find  it  is  no  longer  painful. 
I  neutralize  it  and  then  use  it  full  strength. — R.  H.  M.  Daw- 
born,  Dental  Cosmos. 


tg2  Practical  Dentistry. 

Orthoform  After  Tooth  Extraction. — Pack  the  socket 
lightly  with  moist  cotton  dipped  in  orthoform ;  absolute  ces- 
sation of  pain  follows. — H.  G.  Kahlo,  Indiana  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

Extraction  of  Difficult  Roots. — If  a  hole  is  drilled  in  the 
root  and  a  thread  cut  with  a  tap,  a  screw  may  be  turned, 
in  which  can  be  firmly  grasped  with  a  pair  of  pliers,  and  by 
a  slight  lateral  motion  the  root  loosened,  and  brought  away 
without  injury  to  the  alveolus. — T.  M.  Hunter,  Items  of 
Interest. 

After-pains  of  Extraction. — Apply  orthoform  after 
every  extraction,  completely  filling  the  wounds  with  the 
pain-allaying  antiseptic ;  even  though,  as  after  the  extraction 
of  many  teeth,  the  wounds  are  numerous,  this  can  be  done 
without  fear,  as  orthoform  is  absolutely  non-poisonous. — 
Wm.  Rotenberger,  Therapeutic  Progress. 

Arrest  of  Hemorrhage  After  Extraction. — Wash  the 
alveolus  forcibly  by  a  jet  from  the  water  syringe  to  remove 
all  the  blood  clot.  Plug  immediately  with  iodoform  gauze, 
bringing  it  into  direct  contact  with  the  bleeding  wound. 
Press  the  plug  in  as  tight  as  possible,  and  press  the  alveolus 
laterally  with  the  fingers. —  (Translation)  H.  Printz,  Ohio 
Den.  Jour. 

Paraffin  in  Oral  Surgery. — Paraffin  injected  beneath 
the  mucous  membrane  lining  the  alveolar  sockets  of  teeth, 
immediately  after  extracting  and  stopping  of  hemorrhage, 
will  prevent  the  entire  absorption  of  the  bone.  This  is  of 
great  importance,  especially  in  the  preservation  of  the  cuspid 
eminence,  retaining  the  facial  contour. — Rudolph  Beck, 
Dental  Digest. 

Paraffin  in  Oral  Surgery. — Use  paraffin  in  the  treatment 
of  long-standing  chronic  abscess.  In  cases  when  nothing  will 
avail  but  burring  away  necrosed  bone,  smooth  the  apex  of 
the  root  and  fill  the  cavity  thus  created  with  paraffin,  care 
being  taken  to  close  the  field  of  operation  with  a  stitch  or 
two  in  the  gum  tissue. — C.  T.  Gramm,  Dental  Digest. 


Oral  Surgery.  193 

Alveolar  Hemorrhage. — In  a  case  where  other  well- 
known  methods  had  failed  and  the  patient  was  becoming 
alarmingly  weak  from  loss  of  blood,  sulphuric  acid  dropped 
in  the  socket,  after  washing  the  mouth  out  with  warm  water, 
caused  the  flow  to  cease  within  three  minutes,  and  there 
was  no  subsequent  return. — R.  W.  Turner,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Extracting  Difficult  Roots. — Drill  into  canal  with  B  size 
Howe  twist  drill  in  the  engine.  Tap  with  same  size  Howe 
screw  tap.  Screw  in  bright  metal  post,  following  with  the 
chuck,  till  it  nearly  or  quite  touches  the  root.  With  forceps 
grasp  chuck  and  extract  with  as  straight  a  pull  as  possible. 
Avoids  all  laceration  of  gums  by  injury  to  alveolar  process. 
— A.  J.  Butler,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Alveolar  Hemorrhage. — Roll  a  pellet  of  cotton  the  size 
and  shape  of  the  socket  and  saturate  the  end  with  nutgalls. 
Force  up  into  socket,  following  with  other  pellets,  until  the 
outer  margin  of  the  gum  is  reached ;  then  place  a  pellet  the 
size  of  a  walnut  to  antagonize  the  opposing  teeth,  and 
bandage  the  head,  holding  the  jaws  firmly  together. — H. 
H.  Benjamin^  Items  of  Interest. 

For  Removing  Loose  Roots,  Spiculae,  etc. — A  pair  of 
artery  forceps  will  be  found  a  very  useful  instrument  for 
removing  loose  roots,  spiculse  of  bone,  etc.  You  can  get 
them  at  any  surgical  supply  house  for  forty  or  fifty  cents 
per  pair.  There  are  many  varieties,  but  a  strong  pair  with 
slightly  pointed  beak  is  most  suitable. — W.  H.  Albright, 
Dental  Summary. 

Harelip. — When  operating  on  cases  that  have  teeth  the 
greatest  care  should  be  taken  to  see  that  the  teeth  are  sound. 
Offending  teeth  should  be  extracted  or  filled,  as  seems  best 
to  the  dentist,  for  he  must  be  called  in  as  an  ally.  If  an 
operation  is  performed  and  the  teeth  are  carious,  great  risk 
of  infecting  the  wound  will  be  run. — J.  E.  Thompson, 
Texas  Medical  News. 


194  Practical  Dentistry. 

Extracting  Roots. — When  a  root  is  broken  off  below 
the  margin  of  the  alveolar  process,  inject  cocain,  and  with  a 
sharp  bur  remove  the  process  on  either  side  of  the  root 
as  far  as  desired,  or  until  the  root  can  be  grasped  with  the 
forceps.  With  local  aneesthesia  the  operation  is  a  painless 
one. — D.  D.  Atkinson,  Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

Care  of  the  Mouth  after  Tooth  Extraction. — Instruct 
the  patient  to  keep  the  socket  free  of  all  food,  and  after 
each  meal  to  use  a  mouth-wash  composed  of  one  part 
listerin  and  three  parts  warm  water.  This  w^ill  keep  the 
sockets  clean  and  antiseptic,  and  nature  will  perform  the 
necessary  repairs. — Harry  L.  King,  Ohio  Dental  Jonrnal. 

Opening  into  the  Antrum. — The  opening  should  never 
be  made  witli  a  chisel.  Drive  a  chisel  through  a  thin  board 
with  a  hammer  and  you  will  find  the  opposite  side  all  splin- 
tered. This  is  a  fair  illustration  of  the  condition  of  the 
inner  side  of  the  antrum  wall  after  a  chisel  has  been  used. — 
T.  L.  GiLMORE,  Dental  Digest. 

Extracting  Upper  Cuspids. — Sometimes  the  upper  ca- 
nines are  very  difficult  to  extract.  When  extracting  the 
upper  teeth  for  a  plate,  remove  the  teeth  on  each  side  of 
the  canine  and  grasp  it  at  the  sides.  The  sides  being  more 
flat,  the  forceps  will  not  slip,  and  the  tooth  can  be  easily 
rotated. — Otis  Trotter. 

After  a  Major  Case  of  Extraction. — To  bridge  the  inter- 
val between  retraction  for  a  full  upper  denture  and  in- 
sertion of  plate,  make  a  wax  base-plate  to  be  worn  during 
the  interval,  to  be  removed  of  course  when  eating.  This 
will  afford  great  relief  to  the  lacerated  tissues  and  pre- 
vent inflammation. — W.  D.  Cowan,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

The  Electric  Current  in  Tooth  Extraction. — Limit  the 
field  to  the  tooth  to  be  extracted  by  means  of  a  gutta-percha 
cap  lined  with  gold  leaf,  and  apply  an  electric  current  of 
high  frequency.  Perfect  analgesia  is  obtained  in  a  few  min- 
utes.— Cyclopcsdia  of  Medicine. 


Oral  Surgery.  195 

Hemorrhage  after  Extraction. — Dissolve  antipyrin  in 
camphophenique,  making  a  saturated  solution.  Make  a 
saturated  solution.  Make  a  pledget  of  cotton  to  conform  to 
socket,  saturate  with  the  solution,  and  pack  into  the  socket. 
Apply  compress  if  necessary. — P.  S.  Turner,  Texas  Dental 
Journal. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid  as  a  Haemostatic. — Saturate  a  pledget 
of  cotton  with  the  solution,  place  it  over  the  surface  to  be 
affected,  press  the  nozzle  of  a  chipblower  firmly  against  the 
cotton  and  force  air  through  it  a  few  times. — S.  Preston, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Alveolar  Hemorrhage. — In  a  case  where  other  remedies 
had  failed  and  the  patient  was  becoming  alarmingly  weak 
from  loss  of  blood,  sulphuric  acid  dropped  in  the  socket 
(after  washing  the  mouth  out  with  warm  water)  caused 
the  flow  to  cease  within  three  minutes,  and  there  was  no 
subsequent  return. — R.  W.  Turner,  Items  of  Interest. 

Eoot  Amputation. — When  a  pyorrheal  condition  has 
been  complicated  with  abscess,  the  palatal  roots  of-  lower 
molars  will  often  be  found  entirely  denuded.  It  takes  but  a 
few  revolutions  of  the  bur  to  amputate  close  to  the  crown, 
filling  the  end  of  the  stump  with  amalgam,  subsequently 
polishing. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Items  of  Interest. 

Chronic  Inflammation  of  the  Antrum. — Irrigate  the  an- 
trum with  hydrogen  dioxid  and  with  potassium  perman- 
ganate or  potassium  chlorid.  At  the  stage  of  vegetation 
chromic  acid  followed  by  irrigations,  and  at  the  stage  of 
necrosis,  lactic  acid  followed  by  non-irritant  antiseptic 
washes. — Oscar  Amoido,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Painful  Eruption  of  Third  Molar. — Dip  a  small  piece 
of  cotton-wool  in  melted  crystals  of  carbolic  acid  and  a 
little  cocain  and  pack  between  the  erupting  tooth  and  the 
gum,  also  touching  the  surface  of  the  gum  with  it.  Better 
than  lancing  the  gum,  which  leaves  a  tough  cicatrix ;  or  than 
excising  the  gum,  which  is  very  painful. — A.  T.  Coucher, 
Jour.  Brit.  Assn. 


196  Practical  Dentistry. 

Alveolar  Abscess :  Extraction. — When  once  the  decision 
is  reached  that  a  tooth  will  be  of  no  further  service  to  the 
patient,  or  that  its  removal  is  essential  to  the  cure  of  an 
abscess,  no  time  should  be  lost  in  relieving  the  patient  of 
the  offending  member.  The  antiquated  method  of  awaiting 
the  passing  of  the  acute  stage  is  without  justification,  and 
this  practice  should  be  condemned  as  obsolete  and  per- 
nicious.— M.  I.  ScHAMBERG,  Dental  Digest. 

Extraction  of  Abscessed  Tooth. — There  is  no  more 
reason  why  an  abscessed  tooth  should  be  retained  in  the 
jaw  simply  because  the  face  is  swollen  than  there  would  be 
to  allow  a  splinter  of  wood  to  remain  in  the  hand,  a  piece 
of  glass  in  the  foot,  or  a  piece  of  steel  in  the  eye,  until  the 
inflammatory  symptoms  have  subsided  before  attempting 
to  remove  it,  since  the  forms  of  pathology  are  identical. — 
Items  of  Interest. 

Surgical  Operations  on  the  Face. — The  wrinkles  on  the 
face  are  always  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the  mus- 
cular fibres,  and  this  should  be  remembered  when  incisions 
are  made.  Have  the  patient  to  wrinkle  the  part,  and  note 
the  normal  wrinkles ;  make  your  incision  parallel  with  such 
wrinkles,  and  the  resulting  scar  will  be  but  little  noticed. — 
H.  C.  BoENNiNG,  Stomatologist. 

Extracting  Frail  Koots. — If  a  frail  root  is  filled  with  a 
quick-setting  cement  just  before  extracting,  but  allowing 
time  for  the  cement  to  set  of  course,  the  danger  of  crushing 
with  the  forceps  is  lessened.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to 
force  the  cement  beyond  the  apex. — M.  A,  Waas,  Dental 
Reviezv. 

Pain  Following  Tooth  Extraction. — Fill  the  alveolus 
with  a  cotton  tampon  saturated  in  a  solution  of  equal  parts 
chloral  hydrate,  glacial  phosphoric  acid,  and  glycerin,  and 
the  pain  will  disappear.  Besides  its  pain-relieving  proper- 
ties this  dressing  is  a  powerful  antiseptic. — Review  de  Dental 
Appliquee. 


Oral  Surgery.  197 

Eemoval  of  Gum  Tissue  Over  Impacted  Third  Molars. — 

Use  a  pair  of  sharp  scissors,  which  crushes  the  vessels  to- 
gether and  causes  less  bleeding  than  the  knife.  The  use  of 
scissors  also  lessens  the  danger  of  sepsis  by  preventing  pus 
and  clots  from  being  carried  into  the  vessels. — G.  Lenox 
Curtis,  Dental  Reziezv. 

Removal  of  Adenoids. — The  poor  results  obtained  from 
this  operation  are  usually  due  to  the  lack  of  supplemen- 
tary treatment  following  the  operation.  The  removal  of 
obstructions  will  not  be  followed  by  nasal  breathing  ex- 
cept through  the  proper  training  of  the  child  in  overcom- 
ing the  habit.  The  second  step  should  be  the  correction 
of  dental  deformities. — Cincinnati  Lancet. 

Fracture  of  the  Maxilla  in  Tooth  Extraction. — This  is 
most  liable  in  mouths  that  have  had  suppurative  conditions 
about  the  teeth,  for  in  such  cases  ankylosis  of  the  tooth  to 
the  bone  usually  follows  if  the  pathological  condition  has 
extended  down  in  the  socket  for  any  distance. — S.  L.  Mc- 
CuRDY,  Dental  Summary. 

Tooth  Extraction. — 'The  extraction  of  teeth  for  the  in- 
sertion of  artificial  dentures  is  a  much  graver  crime  than 
the  average  dentist  realizes,  for  it  is  a  fact  that  the  physi- 
ological action  of  the  saliva  and  mucous  membrane  is  very 
different  in  a  mouth  wearing  a  denture  from  one  with  the 
natural  teeth. — J.  B.  Dicus,  Dental  Digest. 

After-pains  of  Extraction. — Relief  may  be  given  in  a 
short  time  by  inserting  in  the  socket  a  pellet  of  absorbent 
cotton  dipped  in  chloroform;  place  in  each  root  socket, 
leaving  it  there  a  minute  or  two.  In  extreme  cases  repeat. 
Relief  is  sure  to  follow. — H.  A.  Cross,  Dental  Review. 

Arrest  of  Hemorrhage  After  Tooth-extraction. — AVith 
hypodermic  syringe  inject  a  few  drops  of  a  three  per  cent, 
solution  of  pyrozone,  or  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  in  the  apex 
of  each  alveolar  socket  and  around  the  gum  margin.  The 
instantaneous  expansion  stops  all  hemorrhage  immediately. 
— W.  M.  Barnett,  Dental  Digest. 


198  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Kill  an  Abscess. — After  lancing  an  abscess  it  is  often 
desirable  to  leave  a  cone  of  medicated  cotton  in  the  open- 
ing. Dip  a  gutta-percha  point  in  chloro-percha,  and  while 
still  sticky  wrap  it  with  cotton  to  make  a  cone.  Dip  the  tip 
end  in  the  medicated  solution  and  it  will  go  to  the  bottom 
every  time. — G.  A.  Bronson,  Dental  Digest. 

Opening  an  Abscess. — If  the  reverse  end  of  a  match  be 
dipped  in  a  saturated  solution  of  carbolic  acid  and  cocain 
and  applied  prior  to  the  injection  of  cocain,  with  gradually 
increasing  pressure  at  the  point  of  the  gum  where  the  needle 
is  to  be  inserted,  it  will  render  the  operation  painless. — B. 
Holly  Smith,  Dental  Digest. 

Hemorrhage  after  Extraction. — In  a  case  of  any  severe 
continued  bleeding  where  other  remedies  failed,  a  plug  of 
cotton  wool  dipped  in  adrenalin  and  then  in  tannin  stopped 
the  bleeding  completely  in  ten  minutes.  It  forms  a  pasty 
mass  and  seems  to  stick  the  gum  down. — J.  S.  Dickin,  Den- 
tal Record. 

Fractured  Edentulous  Jaw. — In  edentulous  cases  of 
fracture  there  is  usually  a  plate  that  was  worn  at  the  time 
of  the  accident.  This  makes  a  beautiful  interdental  splint 
and  solves  the  difficulty  of  adjusting  the  parts  and  the  delay 
of  making  a  splint  for  the  case. — J.  D.  Patterson,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

The  Best  Styptic. — For  hemorrhage  after  extraction, 
or  from  the  gums  of  the  grinding  roots  for  band  fitting,  the 
suprarenal  extract  is  the  best  styptic,  clean  in  use  and 
prompt  in  action.  When  an  anaesthetic  is  needed,  add 
chloreton  to  the  suprarenal  extract  and  wipe  the  gum  with 
the  mixture. — F.  H.  Lee,  Dental  Digest. 

Chronic  Alveolar  Abscess. — Cleanse  the  root-canal  and 
insert  a  dressing  of  cotton  saturated  with  a  saturated  alco- 
holic solution  of  thymol  crj'stals.  Seal  tight  with  gutta- 
percha and  leave  in  place  for  four  or  five  days.  Repeat  if 
necessary. — W.  H.  Hersh,  Dental  Review. 


Oral  Surgery.  199 

Fracture  of  the  Alveolar  Walls. — In  case  of  fracture  of 
the  alveolar  process  in  the  extraction  of  teeth,  the  plates  of 
bone  should  be  forced  back  into  position  with  the  fingers 
or  thumb,  forcing  the  borders  into  place.  This  is  important 
to  the  adaptation  of  a  plate  when  the  process  has  healed. — 
H.  J.  GosLEE,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Uses  of  Pyrozone. — Where  alveolus  has  been  perforated 
by  the  progress  of  suppuration,  and  the  soft  tissues  have 
not  got  sloughed,  I  advise  free  lancing  over  the  congested 
parts  and  the  insertion  of  a  pledget  of  cotton  saturated 
with  a  25  per  cent,  solution  of  pyrozone,  which  should  be 
allowed  to  remain  for  a  few  moments. — Dr.  Wittlander, 
Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 

Treatment  of  Chronic  Abscess. — In  all  forms  of  chronic 
abscess  there  is  present  caries  of  the  outer  periphery  of 
the  end  of  the  root,  as  well  as  of  the  alveolar  plate  in  which 
the  root  is  imbedded.  Als  long  as  any  of  the  necrotic  tissue 
is  allowed  to  remain  it  will  be  impossible  to  effect  a  perma- 
nent cure.  Surgical  interference  is  logically  the  only  re- 
source at  our  command. — M.  L.  Rhein,  in  Dental  Cosmos. 

After-Pains  of  Extraction. — Clean  out  the  socket  and 
dust  with  crthoform,  seal  loosely  with  cotton.  Gives  re- 
lief for  from  six  to  twenty-four  hours.  More  than  two 
applications  rarely  necessary. — A.  D.  Keyser,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Treatment  of  Abscesses. — Thymol  is  very  insoluble 
under  ordinary  circumstances,  but  it  dissolves  in  oil  of 
eucalyptus,  when  it  becomes  a  valuable  agent  in  the  treat- 
ment of  abscesses,  especially  the  mild  form  of  chronic  blind 
abscesses. — Geo.  W.  Cook,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

After-pains  of  Extraction. — If  a  5-grain  tablet  of  anti- 
kamnia  be  crushed  to  a  powder  and — on  a  moistened  pledget 
of  cotton — placed  into  the  socket  of  the  tooth  giving  pain, 
the  pain  will  be  promptly  relieved. — T.  F.  Chupein,  Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory. 


200  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Syringe  for  Antrum  Treatment. — Use  an  ordinary 
large  water  syringe,  but  solder  the  end  and  drill  a  number 
of  fine  holes  around  the  point,  which  thus  forces  the  wash 
against  the  sides  of  the  cavity.  Use  a  solution  of  boracic 
acid  in  hydrogen  dioxid. — B.  J.  Carr,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

To  Extract  a  Badly  Broken-down  Molar. — Divide  it  in 
a  line  between  the  lingual  and  buccal  roots,  using  large- 
sized  spear-point  and  fissure  drills  in  the  engine.  Then  in- 
sert one  beak  of  the  forceps  in  the  place  drilled  and  remove 
the  roots  separately. — Scott  Thomas,  Dental  Hints. 

Arrest  of  Dental  Hemorrhage. — From  5  to  lo  parts 
gelatin  are  to  be  dissolved  in  100  parts  sodium  chlorid 
solution.  Liquefy  in  hot  water,  saturate  a  cotton  or  gauze 
plug  and  insert  in  the  alveolus. — Trans.,  H.  Prinz,  in  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Hemorrhage  after  Extraction. — In  a  case  of  profuse 
bleeding  from  the  socket  after  extraction,  after  twice  placing 
a  pellet  of  cotton  filled  with  suprarenal  powder  in  the 
socket  the  bleeding  stopped  almost  instantly. — E.  H.  Ray- 
mond, International  Dental  Journal. 

Protection  for  Slight  Wounds. — Collodion  and  balsam 
of  Peru  l-io  give  excellent  results;  will  remain  intact  for 
days ;  washing  with  soap  and  warm  water  does  not  disturb 
it. — B.  J.  CiGRAND,  Dental  Digest. 

Chronic  Alveolar  Abscesses. — Carbolic  acid  is  simply  a 
specific  for  the  treatment  of  chronic  alveolar  abscesses.  My 
records  for  the  past  three  years  show  over  ninety  per  cent, 
of  such  cases  cured  with  this  agent. — G.  B.  Squires,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Fractures  of  the  Inferior  Maxilla. — In  all  cases  where 
it  has  been  necessary  to  insert  wire  sections  I  have  wired 
from  the  inside  to  avoid  lacerating  the  face,  and  in  all  case.s 
have  wired  the  fragments  to  the  splint,  instead  of  to  each 
other. — F.  T.  Van  Woert,  Items  of  Interest. 


Oral  Surgery.  201 

Mouth-wash  for  Use  After  Implantation. — Have  the  pa- 
tient use,  several  times  daily,  a  wash  composed  of  boracic 
acid  dissolved  in  equal  parts  cassia  and  peppermint  water. 
By  adding  one  drachm  of  chloroform  water  to  a  pint  of 
the  above  it  becomes  quite  agreeable. — Dental  Review. 

Antral  Treatment. — When  it  is  a  question  between 
saving  a  tooth  and  being  embarrassed  by  the  presence  of  the 
tooth,  it  is  better  to  sacrifice  even  a  good  tooth,  if  that  will 
give  assurance  of  satisfactory  results. — L.  G.  Noel. 

Extracting  Badly  Decayed  and  Broken  Off  Tipper  Mo- 
lars.— Cut  through  with  a  bur,  separating  the  lingual  from 
the  buccal  roots,  which  can  then  be  removed  singly. — G. 
H.  KiTTELL,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

A  Hint  on  Extracting". — After  extracting  abscessed 
teeth,  always  syringe  the  sockets  with  hot  water  and  an 
antiseptic,  especially  in  the  lower  jaw,  where  pus  may  re- 
main in  a  socket  after  extraction. — Dom.  Den.  Jour. 

Necrosis:  Treatment  of  Wound. — For  irrigation  of 
wound,  after  removal  of  necrosed  bone,  add  one  drop  of  oil 
of  cassia  to  two  ounces  of  a  saturated  solution  of  boracic 
acid. — Arthur  D.  Black,  Dental  Review. 

Hemorrhage  After  Tooth  Extraction. — Excellent  re- 
sults have  been  obtained  from  a  mixture  of  one  part  chloro- 
form with  fifty  parts  water,  in  rapidly  arresting  hemor- 
rhage after  tooth  extraction. — D.  Spaak,  Jour.  Med.  Paris. 

To  Arrest  Hemorrhage  after  Pulp  Extraction. — Pack  the 
canal  with  solution  of  adrenalin  chlorid,  which  is  one  of 
the  best  agents  for  stopping  hemorrhages  at  any  point. — 
C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Digest. 

To  Relieve  Pain  in  a  Socket  after  an  Extraction. — A 

small  quantity  of  powdered  borax  with  very  warm  water  is 
often  all  that  is  required  to  give  relief. — C.  L.  Tool,  Dental 
World. 
14 


202  Practical  Dentistry. 

Chloroform  as  a  Styptic. — Excellent  results  have  been 
obtained  from  a  mixture  of  i  part  chloroform  with  50 
parts  water,  in  rapidly  arresting  hemorrhage  after  tooth 
extraction. — Dr.  Spaak,  Journal  de  Medicine  de  Paris. 

Hemorrhage  after  Extraction. — In  case  of  hemorrhage 
after  tooth  extraction,  phenol  sodique  can  be  reUed  upon  to 
answer  every  purpose. — Dental  Era. 

Adrenalin  and  Cocain. — Use  adrenalin  in  combination 
with  cocain,  to  prevent  pain  and  hemorrhage  in  small  opera- 
tions.— H.  Mynter,  Medical  Nezus. 

Aborting  Alveolar  Abscess. — A  prolific  source  of  septic 
pericementitis  is  escaping  micro-organisms  and  ptomaines 
from  putrescent  root-canals,  but  in  many  instances  abscesses 
may  be  prevented  by  the  use  of  proper  remedies  at  the 
proper  time.  The  first  duty  is  to  open  the  canal  and  let  the 
confined  gases  escape.  Both  the  tooth  and  the  infected 
peridental  membrane  requires  treatment.  To  aid  nature  in 
readjusting  the  abnormal  condition  the  following  prescrip- 
tion will  prove  useful : 

IJ.    Potassii  iodidi   3i 

Syrupi  sarsaparillae  comp f  3iii.     M. 

Sig. — ^Take  a  teaspoonful  three  times  a  day  after  meals. 
The  teaspoonful  may  be  added  to  half  a  wineglassful 
of  water  to  further  dilute  the  potassium  iodid. — ^J.  P.  Buck- 
ley, Dental  Rcvieiv. 

Hemorrhage  after  Tooth  Extraction. — 
R.     Rosin 

Carbolic  acid  95  per  cent. 

Chloroform  aa  3  iv 

Successful  in  a  case  of  secondary  hemorrhage  com- 
mencing to  bleed  four  days  after  the  extraction  of  two  wis- 
dom teeth — one  upper  and  one  lower,  which  resisted  tannin, 
persulphate  of  iron,  etc. — N.  B.  Sibley,  American  Den- 
tist. 


Oral  Surgery.  203 

Adrenalin  Chlorid. — For  controlling  hemorrhage  in 
minor  surgery,  and  in  dental  operations  about  the  gingivae, 
there  is  nothing  to  equal  it.  I  would  not  practice  a  day 
without  it. — H.  H.  Johnson,  Dental  Clippings. 

Traumatic  Alveolitis. — In  traumatic  alveolitis  relief  can 
be  obtained  by  a  thorough  curetting  of  the  irregular  edges, 
cleaning  of  the  socket,  obtaining  as  smooth  a  surface  as 
possible,  irrigating  carefully  and  packing  with  iodoform  or 
aseptic  gauze  dipped  in  orthoform  or  nosophen.  For  swollen 
glands  I  have  used  the  following  ointment : 

^.    Ichthyolis 

Ung.  Hydrarg.  Ammon   aa  3j 

Potassii   lodidi    3ij 

Ung.  Zinci  Oxidi    BJ 

This  ointment  has  a  decided  healing  effect. — Chas.  B. 
Isaacson,  Dental  Digest. 

Acute  Abscess. — Whether  incipient  or  advanced,  admin- 
ister sulphid  of  calcium  in  ^4 -grain  doses  every  three  hours. 
Given  early  enough  it  prevents  the  formation  of  pus.  If 
suppuration  has  commenced,  it  limits  its  extent  and  favors 
early  and  complete  evacuation.  To  relieve  the  pain,  pre- 
scribe at  the  same  time : 

Tinct.  opii    m.  xxx 

Aqua  cinnamonii     ad  5    viij 

Teaspoonful  every  half  hour  through  the  day. — J.  W. 
Van  Doarn,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

After  Pains  of  Extraction. — 

R.     Menthol     3i. 

Chloral  hydrate   3i. 

Camphor   gum    3ss. 

Alcohol  fl  Si. 

Wash  out  the  socket  with  warm  carbolized  water  and 
introduce  cotton  saturated  with  the  above. — I.  Henry 
Morgan,  Atlanta  Dental  Journal. 


204  Practical  Dentistry. 

Impacted  Third  Molars. — Paint  the  inflamed  tissues 
with  the  following  combination : 

'^.    Zinc  iodid dr.  iii 

Distilled  water  •  • oz.  i 

Tinct.  iodin dr.  v 

Glycerin  to  make oz.  iv 

(Prinz.) 

After  the  swelling  and  pain  have  subsided  the  iin- 
pacted  tooth  should  be  removed. — F.  K.  Ream^  Dental 
Digest. 

Alveolar  Abscess. — Quite  frequently  after  the  formation 
of  pus  has  been  checked  we  have  a  weeping  of  serum  from 
the  canals.  The  following  formula  affords  an  excellent 
remedy  to  use  in  this  case : 

Ijt     Eucalyptol  3j 

Thymol    gr.x 

M. 

— J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Cosmos. 
Abortive  Treatment  in  Forming  Alveolar  Abscess. — 

B.    Tine,  aconite   gtt..x 

Tine,  echanacea   gtt.  xx 

Liquor  calcis  3ii 

Aqua    q.s.  f  .^iv 

Teaspoonful  every  hour. — W.  Clyde  Dairs,  Items  of 
Interest. 


CHAPTER   VIII 


PULP    DEVITALIZATION— ROOT    CANAL 
TREATMENT,  FILLING,   ETC. 


Pulp  Devitalization. — Notwithstanding  the  advantages 
of  pressure  anesthesia,  there  are  still  cases  where  arsenic 
can  be  employed.  Satisfactory  results  are  obtained  from 
the  following  modified  formula  of  Dr.  A.  W.  Harlan : 

IJ.    Acidi  arsenosi   3i 

Cocainse  hydrochloratis  gr.  xx 

Menthol    gr.  v 

Lanolini    q.  s.  ft.  stiff  paste.     M. 

Sig. — Apply  in  the  usual  manner. 

Very  little  lanolin  is  required  and  the  least  used  the  better 
will  be  the  result. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

Pulp  Devitalization;  Arsenic. — Though  contrary  to  ac- 
cepted teachings  and  practice,  the  arsenical  paste — white 
arsenic,  morphia  acetas  of  each  equal  parts,  creosote  q.  s. — 
should  never  be  placed  in  contact  with  pulp  tissue ;  the  ap- 
plication should  always  be  made  to  intervening  vital  dentin. 
The  application  may  be  made  in  a  cavity  remote  from  the 
pulp — a  drill-pit  made  for  the  purpose  if  necessary — with 
perfect  assurance,  provided  it  is  secured  there  in  contact 
with  sensitive  dentin. — D.  D.  Smith,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Pulp  Devitalization, — My  method  is  to  apply  arsenic 
fibre  to  the  exposed  pulp,  if  not  inflamed,  for  from  twenty- 
four  to  forty-eight  hours,  and  then  under  aseptic  precautions 

205 


2o6  Practical  Dentistry. 

to  remove  the  bulbous  portion  of  the  pulp  and  place  in  con- 
tact with  the  stump  a  5  per  cent,  solution  of  formalin.  This 
is  left  in  contact  sealed  in  for  three  days,  when  we  find  the 
pulp  of  the  consistence  of  catgut  and  readily  removed  with 
the  pliers. — J.  I.  Hart,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Devitalization. — When  the  pulp  must  be  destroyed, 
it  is  almost  if  not  quite  criminal  to  use  so  dangerous  a 
method  of  poisoning  with  arsenious  acid  when  we  have  at 
command  such  methods  as  the  chlorid  of  ethyl  spray,  cocain 
in  crystals  or  solution  applied  to  the  pulp,  or  injected  into  it, 
or  cataphoresis  to  anaesthetize  it,  when  it  may  be  removed 
with  as  little  pain  as  you  would  remove  a  shred  of  gum 
tissue. — J.  Taft,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Devitalization. — Make  a  paste  of  arsenic,  acetate 
of  morphia  and  cocain.  Place  a  small  particle  of  the  paste 
on  a  slab,  and  with  spatula  work  it  into  a  small  pellet  of 
cotton.  Make  a  concave  cap  of  air-chamber  metal,  smear 
the  concavity  with  Canada  balsam,  to  which  the  pellet  will 
adhere.  The  application  is  thus  easily  managed.  Seal  in 
with  cotton  saturated  with  sandarac  varnish. — S.  Eschel- 
MAN,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Arsenical  Dressings. — Cement  should  be  used  for  seal- 
ing an  arsenical  dressing  in  a  cavity,  as  by  its  use  pressure 
upon  the  exposed  pulp  can  be  better  avoided,  and  its  use 
also  prevents  the  patient  from  removing  the  dressing  in  case 
the  tooth  aches.  Allow  it  to  remain  in  place  from  two  to 
seven  days,  according  to  the  location  of  the  tooth,  the  depth 
of  the  cavity,  the  health  and  age  of  the  patient,  etc. — J.  P. 
Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

Arsenical  Applications. — In  making  an  arsenical  appli- 
cation rinse  out  the  cavity  with  a  warm  antiseptic  solution 
for  a  minute  or  more,  using  compressed  air  as  the  force,  and 
dry  the  cavity  by  means  of  hot  compressed  air  and  alcohol. 
Always  use  freshly  mixed  paste,  and  except  in  case  of  a 
dying  pulp  or  pulp-stones,  no  pain  follows. — W.  A.  Heck- 
ARD,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 


Pulp  Devitalization.  207 

Arsenical  Applications. — In  the  case  of  posterior  teeth 
in  the  mouth  of  an  adult,  if  there  is  no  possibihty  of  the 
arsenic  reaching  the  gum  tissues^  I  do  not  care  to  see  the 
patient  in  less  than  three  or  four  days.  In  the  anterior  teeth 
remove  the  pulp  in  thirty-six  to  forty-eight  hours,  as 
there  would  be  less  liability  of  discoloration  of  the  dentin. — 
K.  P.  Ashley,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Arsenical  Pulp  Devitalization. — 

Acidi  arsenosi   (finely  powdered) 5i 

Cocain   hydrochlor grs.   ii 

Acidi  tannici grs.  vi 

Carmine q.  s.  (gr.  i) 

Then  soak  a  piece  of  bibulous  paper  in  creosote  and 
take  a  portion  from  the  base  of  the  bottle.  The  creosote 
causes  the  drug  to  penetrate  more  deeply  into  the  pulp  tissue 
— Frederick  Lonnon^  British  Dental  Journal. 

Arsenical  Applications. — Arsenic  cannot  act  if  the  ave- 
nues of  penetration  are  obstructed  with  disorganized  mat- 
ter. In  order  to  obtain  perfect  results  from  an  appHcation 
of  arsenous  acid,  the  cavity  in  which  it  is  placed  should  be 
perfectly  dry  and  clean ;  otherwise  it  will  simply  act  as 
an  irritant  and  will  cause  much  suffering. — Dental  Register. 

Pulp  Devitalizaton. — Use  a  seventy-five  per  cent,  solu- 
tion of  nitrate  of  silver,  holding  it  against  the  exposed  por- 
tion for  a  few  seconds.  It  is  a  strong  coagulant  and  will 
enter  the  pulp  some  distance,  when  cocain  can  be  injected 
hypodermically. — H.  C.  Register,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Pulp  Devitalization  with  Arsenic. — When  pulp  exposure 
occurs  in  a  cavity  extending  far  under  the  gum,  mix  cot- 
ton with  arsenic,  cloves,  morphin,  and  oil  of  cinnamon; 
cut  the  cotton  into  fine  pieces,  apply  a  little  bit,  and  cover 
with  gutta-percha  and  wax.  This  cannot  ooze. — E.  A. 
Bggue,  International  Dental  Journal. 


2o8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulp  Paste. — It  has  been  suggested  to  add  to  nerve 
paste,  so  called,  or  devitalizing  paste,  adrenalin,  in  order  to 
control  the  tendency  to  swelling  of  the  pulp,  which  causes 
the  pain  usually  experienced  from  applications  of  arsenic. — 
Dentist's  Magazine. 

Hemorrhage  and  Pressure  Anaesthesia  in  Pulp  Devi- 
talization.— When  a  pulp  is  devitalized  by  pressure  anaes- 
thesia the  hemorrhage  should  not  be  checked  until  it  ceases 
entirely  or  inflammation  of  the  periapical  tissues  will  re- 
sult.— I.  W.  Beach,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Devitalization. — Dip  a  pledget  of  cotton  in  car- 
bolic acid;  with  it  take  up  the  arsenic,  and  lastly  crystals 
of  chloretone,  and  apply  to  the  exposure,  sealing  in  as  de- 
sired. The  patient  will  be  comfortable  while  the  devitali- 
zation process  is  going  on. — J.  T.  Degel,  Dental  Review. 

Devitalization  of  Inflamed  Pulp. — Wash  out  the  cavity 
and  seal  it  lightly  over  a  dressing  of  oil  of  cloves.  At  the 
end  of  twenty-four  hours  you  will  find  the  inflammation  has 
subsided  and  the  pulp  ready  for  the  devitalizing  agent. — S. 
B.  Lewis,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Devitalization. — Induce  anaesthesia  by  the  use 
of  cocain  and  suprarenalin,  mixing  and  u?ing  any  dilutant, 
as  water,  chloroform,  or  oil  of  cloves. — T.  E.  Purcell, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 


PULP  EXTIRPATION 

Opening  into  a  Putrescent  Tooth. — Don't  go  into  a 
p'utrescent  tooth  with  any  instrument,  without  first  making 
the  tooth,  cavity  and  the  instrument  sterile  with  medi- 
cation, without  attempting  any  mechanical  work  other 
than  to  enter  the  pulp-chamber.  Apply  the  rubber-dam 
and  dry  the  cavity  and  then  cover  the  pulp-chamber  with 
forty  per  cent,  formalin  on  a  bit  of  cotton ;  seal  hermetic- 
ally with  the  best  cement  and  leave  it  for  twenty-four  hours. 


Pulp  Extirpation.  209 

Even  though  the  tooth  is  sore  to  the  touch,  such  a  treatment 
will  take  care  of  it  and  in  eighty  per  cent,  of  cases  will  give 
a  pulp-chamber  free  from  odor,  and  freedom  from  bacilli. — 
Dr.  Ferris,  Items  of  Interest. 

Pulp  Extirpation. — Where  the  canals  of  molars  are 
likely  to  be  small,  or  flat,  or  tortuous,  desensitize  the  pulp  by 
means  of  cocain,  usually  by  pressure,  remove  a  little  of  it 
and  apply  devitalizing  fibre  moistened  with  oil  of  cloves, 
placing  a  few  small  crystals  of  cocain  on  the  complete  ex- 
posure, and  cover  without  pressure.  The  result  is  univer- 
sally devitalization  without  discomfort.  Follow  by  a  dress- 
ing of  tannic  acid  in  glycerin,  which  so  hardens  the  pulp 
that  it  can  be  drawn  out  from  a  canal  from  which  it  could 
not  be  removed  were  cocain  alone  used. — W.  A.  Price, 
Dentists'  Magazine. 

Removal  of  Live  Pulps. — Use  a  solution  of  cocain 
hydrochlorate  in  alcohol  and  ether.  This  solution,  owing, 
perhaps,  to  an  increased  capilliarity  over  the  fluid  in  the 
dentinal  tubuli,  obtunds  thin  layers  of  dentin  so  that  they 
may  be  removed  or  drilled  through.  Apply  the  solution 
again  as  soon  as  the  slightest  sensation  appears,  until  the 
pulp  is  reached  without  pain.  After  gaining  access  to  the 
pulp,  a  few  cocain  crystals  dissolved  in  the  blood  that  follows 
puncture,  and  carefully  pumped  into  the  canal  with  a  broach, 
obtunds  the  remaining  fibres. — P.  M.  Williams. 

Painless  Pulp  Extirpation. — In  that  stage  between  nor- 
mal and  dead  pulp  when  the  pulp  is  devoid  of  blood  but  the 
nerve  functions  still  persist,  semi-putrescence  existing,  the 
pulp  must  first  be  thoroughly  antisepticized.  Then  apply  a 
minute  quantity  of  paste  of  one  part  arsenic  and  three  parts 
cocain,  moistened  with  creosote.  After  twenty-four  or  thirty- 
six  hours  remove  the  dressing,  saponify  with  sodium  dioxid 
all  fatty  ducts  in  canals;  wash  and  dry  with  alcohol  and 
warm  air.  If  there  still  remains  any  vital  tissue  in  the 
apical  region,  apply  cocain  and  adrenalin. — Clyde  Davis, 
Dental  Summary. 


2IO  Practical  Dentistry. 

Punctured  Roots. — Curet  the  canal  well  of  all  gum; 
make  the  entire  canal  straight  and  conical,  and  while  it  is  wet 
press  in  a  plug  of  warmed  high-fusing  gutta-percha  until  it 
absolutely  conforms  to  the  shape  of  the  canal.  Remove  the 
plug,  wash  it  in  alcohol,  wash  the  canal  thoroughly  with 
peroxid  of  hydrogen,  and  dry.  Place  a  little  iodoform  or 
aristol  paste  in  the  tip,  slightly  moisten  the  sides  of  the 
gutta-percha  plug  with  oil  of  cajuput  and  press  it  firmly  into 
the  canal.  The  paste  will  close  the  apical  foramen,  and  the 
hard  gutta-percha  will  seal  the  opening  of  the  puncture 
without  any  tendency  to  protrude  through  into  the  perice- 
mentum.— Joseph  Head,  Dental  Digest. 

Painless  Pulp  Removal. — Living  pulp  possessing  all  its 
physiological  functions,  and  not  having  previously  received 
escharotic  treatment,  may  be  painlessly  removed  as  follows : 
Apply  to  the  pulp  a  pellet  of  cotton  saturated  with  hydro- 
chlorate  of  cocain  in  90  per  cent,  alcohol.  Absorb  excess  of 
alcohol,  dry  with  hot-air  current  and  stop  the  cavity  with 
gutta-percha,  compressing  the  cotton  upon  the  pulp.  After 
ten  minutes  the  anaesthetized  pulp  may  be  painlessly  re- 
moved.— H.  RoDiER,  La  Revue  de  Stomatologie. 

Guides  to  the  Entrance  of  Root-canals. — Without  rub- 
ber-dam, excavate  cavity,  flushing  freely  with  medicated 
water,  finding  and  opening  entrance  to  canals.  Adjust  rub- 
ber-dam, dry  cavity,  and  force  copper  or  wood  points  into 
the  entrance  of  canals.  With  pegs  in  place,  insert  temporary 
stopping,  filling  the  cavity.  Remove  the  pegs,  thus  leaving 
a  funnel  guide  to  the  root-canals.  After  each  subsequent 
treatment,  close  entrance  to  guides  with  small  piece  of  tem- 
porary stopping. — J.  Austin  Dunn,  in  Dental  Review. 

Gaining  Access  to  Pulp. — Grind  away  the  overhanging 
walls  with  sharp,  keen-grit  carborundum  points  kept  wet 
with  water.  Mold  them  as  needed  from  new  carborundum, 
softening  a  small  piece  and  placing  it  on  a  mandrel  and 
passing  it  through  the  flame  of  the  spirit  lamp  till  the  shellac 
is  partially  melted;  then  mold  it  deftly  between  thumb  and 


Pulp  Extirpation.  211 

finger,  and  while  yet  soft,  place  in  hand-piece  and  revolve 
under  light  pressure  to  true  up.  Such  a  carborundum  point 
does  not  heat  or  jar  the  tooth  as  much  as  the  steel  bur,  and 
grinds  enamel  faster  than  a  bur  will  chip  it. — C.  H.  Tillot- 
SON,  Dental  Digest. 

Opening  Up  a  Dead  Tooth. — Do  not  attempt  to  remove 
all  of  the  debris  at  the  first  treatment,  but  only  suffi- 
cient to  permit  placing  a  piece  of  cotton  saturated  with  a 
mixture  of  iodin  and  creosote,  sealing  it  in  for  twenty-four 
hours.  The  ammonia  and  the  alkaloids  always  present  in 
decaying  animal  matter  will  both  be  decomposed  by  the 
iodin,  the  presence  of  the  creosote  preventing  further  de- 
composition.— Thos.  L.  Gilmer,  Dental  Review. 

Removing  a  Congested  Pulp. — A  congested  pulp  in  an 
anterior  tooth  is  best  removed  by  using  crystals  of  cocain. 
Dry  the  cavity  thoroughly  and  partially  fill  with  powdered 
cocain.  Then  puncture  the  pulp  with  a  sharp  instrument, 
letting  the  serum  saturate  the  cocain.  Force  this  back  into 
the  pulp  tissue,  anaesthetizing  it,  so  that  it  can  always  be 
removed  without  the  least  pain.  If  hemorrhage  is  not  too 
profuse,  fill  at  once. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

Removal  of  Pulp  wth  Calcific  Formations. — In  case  of 
failure  to  anaesthetize  a  pulp  with  cocain  and  pressure  anaes- 
thesia, due  to  calcific  formation  in  the  pulp,  I  have  obtained 
good  results  by  the  application  of  sulphuric  acid.  Make 
the  application  for  a  few  minutes,  then  wipe  out  the  cavity 
with  sodium  carbonate  and  many  times  you  will  then  be 
able  to  anaesthetize  the  pulp. — Geo.  W.  Cook,  Dental 
Review. 

Pulp  Removal. — In  cases  of  pulp  removal  by  pressure 
anaesthesia,  where  there  is  the  slightest  doubt  about  the 
complete  removal  (the  parts  being  insensible  and  conse- 
quently no  painful  sensation  as  a  guide),  use  the  Schreier 
paste,  sodium  and  potassium,  which  not  only  acts  as  a  dis- 
infectant, but  will  destroy  any  remnant  of  pulp. — R.  Otto- 
LENGUi,  Dental  Digest. 


212  Practical  Dentistry. 

Removal  of  Devitalized  Pulp. — If  there  is  reason  to  be- 
lieve that  minute  fragments  of  pulp-tissue  remain  near  the 
apex,  dry  the  canal  and  fill  with  a  twenty-five  per  cent,  so- 
lution of  hydronaphthol  in  alcohol,  and  with  unvulcanized 
rubber  exert  enough  pressue  to  saturate  the  remaining  tis- 
sue. Then  dry  the  canal,  moisten  with  eucalyptus,  and  fill 
with  gutta-percha  points. — Harold  Clark,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Removal. — To  harden  the  contents  of  root-canals 
and  facilitate  their  removal  after  disintegration  with  arsenic, 
saturate  a  piece  of  cotton  or  spunk  with  a  five  per  cent,  solu- 
tion of  formalin  and  place  over  the  stump  after  removal  of 
the  bulbous  portion  of  the  pulp,  being  careful  in  multirooted 
teeth  to  have  the  cotton  large  enough  to  cover  all  of  the 
stumps.  Over  the  cotton  place  a  Teague  disk  and  place 
temporary  stopping  or  cement  over  the  disk.  Three  days 
will  effect  complete  devitalization  and  hardening. — John  I. 
Hart,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Root  Perforation. — If  the  perforation  is  accessible,  the 
opening  may  be  closed  by  first  thoroughly  drying  the  cavity, 
then  placing  over  it  a  small  piece  of  moistened  court-plaster. 
Holding  this  in  place  with  a  pledget  of  cotton  until  it  is  dry 
and  has  adhered,  the  canal  can  be  filled  with  zinc  phosphate 
without  danger  of  disturbing  the  patch  or  of  forcing  the 
cement  through  the  opening. — S.  H.  Guilford. 

To  Open  Up  Teeth  in  Pericementitis. — With  small  stone 
grind  a  pit  at  the  point  at  which  you  wish  to  enter  with 
drill.  The  latter  will  then  run  smoothly  and  penetrate  more 
easily,  avoiding  the  shock  caused  by  the  revolutions  of  the 
drill.  Keep  point  of  drill  well  lubricated  with  oil  of  turpen- 
tine or  glycerin. — R.  E.  Sparks,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Alcohol  in  Putrescent  Root-canal  Treatment. — Alcoho' 
has  a  solvent  action  upon  the  putrescent  material  in  root- 
canals  as  well  as  a  decided  restraining  influence  on  the  de- 
velopment process  of  bacteria. — Geo.  W.  Cook,  American 
Dental  Journal. 


Pulp  Extirpation.  213 

Pulp  Kemoval. — Dip  a  small  piece  of  spunk  into  a 
mixture  of  5  parts  alcohol  and  i  part  formaldehyd,  then 
into  finely  pulverized  cocain.  Place  over  the  exposed  pulp 
and  press  gently  with  a  ball  burnisher  over  a  piece  of  un- 
vulcanized  rubber.  The  formaldehyd  toughens  the  tissues 
causing  the  pulp  to  shrink,  making  its  removal  easier. — Dr. 
Wessels,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Removal. — The  important  point  to  remember  in 
opening  of  a  cavity  in  a  tooth  containing  a  dead  pulp  is 
the  danger  of  forcing  infected  pulp  detritus  through  the  end 
of  the  root ;  consequently  it  is  important  to  bathe  the  interior 
of  the  pulp-chamber  with  a  10  per  cent,  solution  of  for- 
maldehyd before  instrumentation  is  begun. — M.  L.  Rhein, 
Dental  Digest. 

Mechanical  Root-canal  Cleansing. — Apply  rubber-dam; 
drill  used  only  to  open  mouth  canals.  Soak  up  liquid 
contents  of  canal;  flood  with  20  vol.  solution  hydrogen 
peroxid,  and  gently  rake  upward  with  bristle,  avoiding 
piston  action.  Bubbles  of  gas  form  and  bring  debris  to 
surface.  Dry  out,  and  repeat  until  gas  ceases  to  come 
away. — John  Ackery^  Dental  Record. 

Sensitive  Pulp  Remnants. — When  sensitive  tissue  is 
found  in  root-canals  after  removal  of  pulp,  insert  the  point 
of  any  fine  hypodermic  needle  and  force  in  a  few  drops  of 
chloroform.  The  tissue  can  then  be  extracted  without  pain, 
though  previously  the  sensitiveness  may  have  been  so  great 
as  to  make  entrance  with  a  broach  impossible. — Wilson 
Zerfing^  International  Dental  Journal. 

Enlarging  Root-canal. — This  serves  a  three-fold  pur- 
pose; it  renders  the  introduction  of  dressings,  medicaments 
and  fillings  an  easy  matter ;  it  cuts  away  the  zone  of  dentin 
in  which  disintegration  of  organic  matter  and  consequent 
infection  may  have  occurred ;  it  opens  the  mouths  of  the 
tubules  ready  for  any  medication  that  may  seem  necessary. 
— J.  R.  Callahan,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 


214  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulp  Removal. — It  is  my  conviction  that  there  is  often 
more  probabiUty  of  trouble  in  the  disturbance  of  tissues  at 
the  apex  by  instruments  or  chemicals  than  if  a  small  portion 
of  pulp  has  been  left  undisturbed.  Tissues  once  impaired 
by  traumatism  are  never  again  so  resistant  to  infection  as 
they  were  originally. — A.  E.  Webster,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Painless  Pulp  Removal. — Using  a  glass  barrel  syringe 
with  glass  piston,  without  needle,  simply  a  canula,  packing 
gutta-percha  around  the  nozzle  to  prevent  escape,  inject 
equal  parts  chloroform  and  carbolic  acid.  The  pulp  can  im- 
mediately be  twisted  out,  blanched  white  and  insensible  to 
pain. — International  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Cleansers. — The  smooth  jewelers'  broaches 
can  be  bought  very  cheaply  by  the  dozen.  Numbers  of 
these,  wrapped  each  with  a  wisp  of  bibulous  paper  and 
kept  always  ready  in  the  bracket  drawer,  will  be  found  a 
great  convenience. — Howard  T.  Stewart. 

Removal  of  Live  Pulp  When  the  Tooth  is  Very  Badly 
Broken  Down. — In  the  use  of  cocain  with  pressure,  if  the 
tooth  is  very  badly  broken  down,  a  thin  matrix  of  German 
silver  can  be  fitted  closely  and  the  dam  applied  over  that. 
The  cocain  will  then  not  be  forced  out  of  the  tooth,  but  is 
carried  directly  to  the  pulp. — Dr.  Crosby,  Dental  Digest. 

The  Drill  in  Root-canals. — Wet  dentin  presents  greater 
difficulties  in  the  use  of  the  Gates-Glidden  drill  than  dry 
dentin.  More  failures  in  the  use  of  the  drill  are  attribut- 
able to  wet  dentin  than  to  any  other  cause :  more  broken 
drills  are  due  to  wet  dentin  than  to  carelessness  in  handling. 
— J.  R.  Callahan,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Devitalized  Pulp. — Devitalize  with  arsenic 
and  remove  bulbous  portion.  Place  over  the  stump  a 
pledget  of  cotton  saturated  with  four  per  cent,  formalin.  In 
three  days  the  remnants  can  be  removed  with  pliers,  coming 
out  in  one  piece  like  a  tough  string. — Dental  Register. 


Pulp  Extirpation.  215 

Pulp  Extirpation. — Where  immediate  extirpation  is 
intended,  if  a  pellet  of  cotton  is  placed  over  the  rubber  in 
the  cavity  a  much  better  pressure  can  be  obtained,  as  the 
cotton  prevents  the  rubber  from  spreading  so  much  under 
the  instrument. — W.  A.  Brownlee,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Reaming  Out  Eoot-Canals. — Many  hold  that  it  is  un- 
necessary to  ream  out  root-canals,  but  the  fact  that  roots 
that  have  been  so  treated  display  a  remarkable  freedom 
from  subsequent  septicity  is  a  strong  argument  in  its  favor. 
— Wm.  Guy,  in  The  Dental  Record. 

Extirpation  of  Live  Pulps. — Using  ethyl  chlorid  to  anaes- 
thetize the  dentin  enables  one  to  go  in  with  the  drill  and 
uncover  the  pulp  painlessly.  When  the  pulp  is  reached  use 
cocain. — K.  P.  Ashley,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Devitalized  Pulp  from  Root-canals. — Adjust 
rubber-dam.  Apply  sulfuric  acid — a  40  or  50  per  cent,  solu- 
tion— directly  over  opening  into  canal.  The  pulp  becomes 
rigid,   shrinks,   and   its   removal   is   a   comparatively   easy 

task. — A.  H.  Mebes,  Dental  Digest. 

Perforation  from  Canal  Drill. — If  the  perforation  is 
of  recent  date,  use  a  soothing  antiseptic  and  over  the  open- 
ing place  a  layer  of  tin-foil,  against  which  insert  amalgam. 
— E.  A.  Peaker,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Extirpation. — Adrenalin  chlorine  is  invaluable  in 
pulp  extirpation.  The  mere  placing  in  contact  with  an  ex- 
posed pulp  cleans  up  the  surface  and  reduces  inflammation 
at  once. — T.  E.  Barker,  Dental  Hints. 

Punctured  Roots. — To  cover  the  opening  in  a  punctured 
root  lead  is  preferable  to  platinum,  using  just  enough  to 
cover  the  opening,  cementing  the  disk  in  position. — J.  T. 
Crawford,  Dental  Digest. 


2i6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painless  Removal  of  Pulp. — A  combination  of  one- 
eighth  grain  of  cocain  and  one  drop  carbolic  acid,  applied 
to  the  pulp,  will  enable  me  to  remove  it  after  five  minutes 
without  a  particle  of  pain. — Dr.  Cormany,  Dental  Digest. 

TREATMENT    OF    ROOT    CANALS 

Treatment  of  Putrescent  Pulps. — Adjust  rubber-dam 
and  sterilize  all  included  teeth,  using  either  a  ten  per  cent, 
solution  formaldehyd  to  which  a  small  amount  of  borax  has 
been  added,  or  a  1-500  solution  mercury  bichlorid  in  cinna- 
mon water.  Then  bathe  the  teeth  in  alcohol  and  open  freely, 
exposing  all  the  pulp  canals,  and  place  over  the  mouth  of 
each  a  small  pledget  of  cotton  carrying  equal  quantities  of 
cresol  and  formalin  sealed  in  hermetically,  preferably  with 
a  quick-setting  cement.  Dismiss  the  patient  for  two  or  three 
days,  or  a  week  if  more  convenient.  At  the  second  sitting 
remove  the  dressing,  cleanse  the  canals  mechanically  and 
gently  work  down  into  each  canal  a  1-500  solution  of  mer- 
cury bichlorid  in  hydrogen  dioxid ;  dehydrate  with  alcohol 
and  warm  air,  and  place  in  each  canal  cotton  carrying  2 
parts  cresol  to  i  part  formalin.  Seal  in  and  leave  for  at 
least  three  days,  when  the  remedy  will  have  sterilized  the 
entire  tubular  structure  of  the  dentin,  thus  establishing 
asepsis,  when  the  canals  should  be  thoroughly  filled. — J.  P. 
Buckley,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Aqua  Regla  in'^the  Treatment  of  Putrescent  Root-canals. 

— Nitro-hydrochloric  acid  (aqua  regia)  does  not  corrode 
a  steel  broach  further  than  a  thin  coating  on  the  surface, 
readily  removed  by  cuttle-fish  disk.  In  putrescent  canals  an 
effervescence  is  produced  almost  equal  to  that  produced  by 
hydrogen  dioxid,  carrying  out  and  into  the  pulp-chamber 
the  debris  lodged  in  the  canals.  At  the  same  time  an  elim- 
ination of  free  chlorin  takes  place,  still  further  sterilizing 
and  at  the  same  time  bleaching  the  tissue,  leaving  it  nice 
and  white  after  thoroughly  drying  out. — F.  T.  Hays,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Treatment  of  Root  Canals.  217 

Treatment  of  Septic  Pulp  Canals  with  Fistulous  Open- 
ing.— Adjust  rubber-dam  and  inject  hot  water  into  canals 
until  all  loosened  debris  is  removed,  absorbing  overflow 
with  bibulous  paper.  Dehydrate  with  Evans'  root  dryer; 
place  cotton  saturated  with  oil  of  cinnamon  loosely  in  cavity  ; 
seal  with  gutta-percha,  and  dismiss  for  forty-eight  hours. 
Repeat,  if  necessary.  If  exudation  of  pus  is  noticeable  at 
fistulous  opening,  bur  through  to  apical  space  and  inject 
pyrozone  through  the  canals  till  it  traverses  the  fistulous 
tract,  mechanically  and  antiseptically  cleansing  it.  Then 
with  hypodermic  syringe  inject  oil  of  cinnamon  till  it  oozes 
from  the  gum  opening.  Continue  till  pus  formation,  fetid 
odor  and  sensitiveness  are  eradicated. — W.  V.  McLean, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Dressing  for  Root-canals  "with  Fistula. — Make  a  piston 
of  a  broach  wrapped  with  cotton,  with  which  carefully  force 
beechwood  creosote  through  the  canal  till  it  appears  on  the 
gum.  Then  place  in  the  canals  a  dressing  of  cotton  saturated 
with  the  following :  ^/^  oz.  iodoform ;  creosote  q.  s.  to  make 
a  thin  paste,  to  which  add  ^  dram  oil  of  cinnamon,  which 
both  disguises  odor  of  iodoform  and  acts  as  a  germicide. 
It  is  very  rare  that  more  than  one  application  will  be  neces- 
sary. In  very  obstinate  cases  force  chlorid  of  zinc  (10  grs. 
to  the  oz.)  through  the  canal  till  it  appears  at  the  gum.  Fol- 
low with  dressing  above. — H.  C.  Gilchrist,  in  Items  of 
Interest. 

Sterilization  of  Eoot-canals,  Abscess,  Cavities,  etc. — 
The  soluble  metal  electrode  offers  a  convenient  method  of 
sterilization.  An  elongated  zinc  bulb  is  mounted  upon  an 
insulated  handle  and  inserted  into  the  cavity.  The  action 
of  the  current  is  an  electrolysis  of  the  metal,  and  a  genera- 
tion of  zinc  chlorid,  which  is  conveyed  into  the  tissues.  Dr. 
Geo.  B.  Massey  suggests  that  the  zinc  be  coated  with 
mercury,  generating  and  depositing  the  chlorids  of  both 
mercury  and  zinc.  In  small  root-canals  a  fine  gold  wire 
coated  with  mercury  may  be  used. — J.  M.  Fogg,  Dental 
Cosmos. 
15 


2i8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Formaldehyd  in  Root-canal  Treatment. — I  have  been 
using  formaldehyd  for  over  two  years.  I  have  seen  no 
deleterious  effects  but  have  seen  apparently  good  results. 
In  the  ordinary  dressing  of  root-canals  use  3  per  cent. ; 
in  case  of  large  foramen,  only  2  per  cent.  I  have  used  6 
per  cent,  with  very  good  results  where  I  had  reason  to 
believe  the  foramen  was  small  and  I  desired  to  get  prompt 
results.  I  have,  in  a  number  of  instances,  applied  10  per 
cent,  to  the  putrescent  contents  of  a  canal  without  any  in- 
jurious effects;  of  course,  by  the  time  the  formaldehyd 
has  permeated  the  mass  of  putrescent  matter  and  reached 
the  apical  foramen  its  strength  is  very  materiallv  reduced. 
— Wm.  Ernest  Walker. 

Root-canal  Treatment  and  Filling. 

( 1 )  Hydronapthol    20  grains 

Alcohol    54    ounce 

Oil  of  cloves    %  ounce 

Mix. 

(2)  Hydronapthol  i  part 

Oxid  of  zinc 2  parts 

Having  removed  the  contents  of  canal  and  cleaned  to 
the  apex,  wash  with  (i).  Make  a  paste  of  (2)  with  (i) 
and  fill  the  canal.  Mix  (2)  with  glacial  phosphoric  acid, 
making  a  hydronapthol  cement,  with  which  fill  pulp  chamber. 
Paint  gum  with  iodin  and  aconite,  equal  parts. — H.  S. 
Mann,  Dental  Summary. 

Sulphuric  Acid   in   Root-canal    Cleansing. — A   40  per 

cent,  solution  of  commercial  sulphuric  acid  in  water  will 
give  the  best  results  in  the  majority  of  cases.  If  stronger 
than  50  per  cent,  it  has  a  tendency  to  disintegrate 
the  cotton  on  which  it  is  most  convenient  to  introduce  it. 
With  a  drop  or  two  at  the  entrance  of  the  canal  use  a  new 
broach,  pumping  it  with  the  canal ;  this  pares  away  all  rough 
places,  and  disintegrates  the  inorganic  constituents  of  the 
dentin  with  which  it  comes  in  contact. — J.  R.  Callahan, 
Indiana  Dental  Journal. 


Treatment  of  Root  Canals.  219 

Root-canal  Treatment. — Having  prepared  the  canal  by 
the  removal  of  all  septic  matter,  pack  with  pellets  of  cotton, 
dipped  in  water,  and  then  into  finely  pulverized  crystals  of 
nitrate  of  silver.  Close  with  temporary  stopping  and  dis- 
miss for  a  week  or  two,  when  the  nitrate  of  silver  will  have 
penetrated  the  dentin  and  rendered  the  root  thoroughly 
aseptic. — L.  G.  Noll,  Miss.  Den.  Ass'n,  i8p8. 

Treatment  of  Septic  Root  Canal  with  Fistulous  Open- 
ing.— After  cleansing,  flood  canals  with  creosote;  place  a 
ball  of  cotton  saturated  with  creosote  at  orifice  of  canal; 
fill  tooth  with  unvulcanized  rubber;  press  hard  on  the 
rubber  with  ball-ended  burnisher  so  as  to  force  the  creo- 
sote through  the  fistulous  opening.  If  it  does  not  flow 
through,  mix  it  with  glycerin.  Fill  cavity  tightly  with 
temporary  gutta-percha  and  leave  alone  for  at  least  three 
days.  When  the  fistulous  opening  has  healed  or  shows 
signs  of  healing,  complete  the  cast. — Wm.  Cass  Grayston, 
Dental  Record. 

Antiseptic  Treatment  of  Putrid  Root-canals. — Open  up 
and  cleanse  pulp  chamber  and  root-canals  of  all  putrid  mat- 
ter. Then  introduce  formaldehyd  on  shreds  of  cotton  and 
evaporate  with  a  heated  silver  wire.  Repeat  two  or  three 
times  at  same  sitting;  then  introduce  a  temporary  dressing 
of  cotton  shreds  saturated  with  formaldehyd  and  essence  of 
geranium ;  close  air-tight  with  wax  or  gutta-percha.  Repeat 
after  two  or  three  days.  When  the  odor  is  sweet  and  pure 
fill  permanently. — Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

The  Treatment  of  Putrescent  Root-canals. — The  con- 
tents of  the  canals  should  be  as  nearly  sterile  before  re- 
moval as  the  use  of  antiseptics  will  make  them.  For  this 
use  formalin,  following  with  an  alkali,  such  as  hydrogen- 
dioxid  or  sodium-dioxid,  which,  in  contact  with  decomposed 
organic  matter,  cause  a  chemical  reaction  with  effervescence, 
leaving  the  debris  in  condition  to  be  easily  washed  out. 
Then  dehydrate  with  alcohol  and  hot  air. — A.  F.  Strange, 
American  Dental  Journal. 


220  Practical  Dentistry. 

Formaldehyd  in  the  Treatment  of  Putrescent  Root- 
canals. — For  the  treatment  of  putrescent  root-canals  Andre 
and  de  Marion  have  recommended  equal  parts  of  forty  per 
cent,  formaldehyd  with  forty  per  cent,  absolute  alcohol,  and 
half  as  much  essence  of  geranium,  two  or  three  applications 
of  which  will  entirely  remove  unpleasant  odors  and  entirely 
disinfect  the  root.  If  carboHc  acid  is  also  to  be  used,  use  it 
first  and  allow  two  or  three  minutes  to  elapse  before  using 
the  above,  when  the  result  will  be  admirable. — E.  A.  Bogue, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp-canal  Cleansing. — 

Formic  aldehyd    40  parts 

Essence   of  geranium 20  parts 

Alcohol,  eighty  per  cent 40  parts 

This  formula  has  resulted  from  a  long  series  of  carefully 
conducted  experiments  undertaken  with  the  purpose  of  util- 
izing the  valuable  properties  of  formaldehyd  in  treating 
putrescent  conditions  of  the  pulp-canal  and  its  surroundings 
safely,  efficiently,  and  with  the  least  discomfort  to  the 
patient. — British  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

Root-canal  Sterilization. — For  immediate  root-filling 
sterilize  with  formaldehyd,  forty  per  cent.,  full  strength, 
but  take  care  not  to  saturate,  simply  moisten  and  wipe  out 
the  canals  so  as  not  to  have  any  excess.  Thoroughly  dry 
the  canals  before  filling  with  gutta-percha  to  the  apex. — 
F.  D.  Gardiner,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp-canal  Treatment. — The  canal  is  flushed  with  cam- 
phophenique  in  which  thymol  has  been  dissolved  in  the  pro- 
portion of  forty  grains  to  the  ounce.  A  gutta-percha  point, 
fastened  to  the  end  of  the  root  plugger  by  heating  the  point 
and  pressing  it  gently  to  the  large  end  of  the  cone,  is  dipped 
into  camphophenique  and  then  into  iodoform  powder,  and 
forced  to  place  in  the  canal. — J.  Leon  Williams,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


Treatment  of  Root  Canals.  221 

Treatment  of  Putrescent  Roots. — With  Callahan's  sul- 
phuric acid  method,  but  with  sodium  peroxid  substituted 
instead  of  sodium  bicarbonate,  the  chemical  interchange 
will  result  in  peroxid  of  hydrogen  and  sodium  sulphate. 
The  newly  formed  peroxid  of  hydrogen  will  bleach  the 
tooth  and  by  evolution  of  gas  throw  out  any  material 
present.  The  sodium  sulphate  will  saponify  the  fatty 
material  and  the  root  be  left  in  a  perfectly  clean  and  sterile 
condition. — H.  Printz,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Trichloracetic  Acid. — This  is  an  excellent  treatment 
for  pyorrhoea  as  it  arrests  the  formation  of  pus  quickly.  It 
acts  like  a  charm  in  putrescent  pulp  canals.  Carefully  ap- 
plied to  spongy  gums,  it  gives  good  results.  It  is  also 
excellent  in  pericementitis  arising  from  calcic  deposits.  Be- 
cause of  its  astringent  and  escharotic  action  it  destroys 
abnormal  surface  tissue  and  resuscitates  it  after  a  single 
application. — Dental  Brief. 

Treatment  in  Case  of  Acute  Forming  Abscess. — Open, 

if  possible,  through  the  pulp-canal ;  otherwise  lance  and  open 
through  the  bone,  using  antiseptics,  such  as  oil  of  cloves, 
creosote,  or  Black's  i,  2,  3.  For  the  relief  of  pain,  hot  foot- 
bath, hot  water  to  the  face,  Dover's  powder  five  to  fifteen 
grains,  and  five  to  thirty  grains  iodid  of  potash,  to  control 
the  pus  formation,  and  eliminative  agents  to  carry  away 
the  poison. — Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Review. 

Dressing  for  Pulpless  Teeth. — Creasoform,  a  light  green 
powder,  without  smell  or  taste,  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether, 
and  which  decomposes  in  contact  with  animal  tissues  into 
creosote  and  nascent  formaldehyd,  is  useful  as  a  dressing 
for  pulpless  teeth ;  make  into  a  paste  with  any  of  the  essen- 
tial oils. — B.  J.  T.  Bennette,  Dental  Record. 

Treatment  of  Root-canals  with  Putrescent  Pulp  Con- 
tents.— Oxidize  the  contents  of  the  canals  with  permanga- 
nate of  potash,  inserting  a  small  crystal  and  waiting  for  it 
to  decompose  the  organic  matter  present.   Cleanse  carefully, 


222  Practical  Dentistry. 

following  with  aristol  and  oleum  gaultheria  when  pus  is  not 
present.  If  pyemic  conditions  exist,  precede  the  aristol  with 
zinc  chlorid  5  to  lo  grains  to  i  dram  water,  or  formalin  5 
per  cent,  solution. — Louis  Jack,  International  Den.  Jour. 

The  Treatment  of  Inaccessible  Canals. — By  the  use  of 
sodium  dioxid  this  question  was  to  me  solved  years  ago. 
A  treatment  which  can  remove  all  putrescent  matter  from 
the  tubuli  of  the  dentin  to  their  ends  meets  with  no  diffi- 
culty whatever  in  these  ever-so-fine  canals,  which,  while  no 
instrument  can  trace  or  even  find  them,  are  still  much 
larger  than  any  dentinal  tubuli  can  be,  and  so  they  are 
cleansed  and  sterilized  too. — C.  J.  Peters,  Items  of  Interest. 

Formalin  in  the  Treatment  of  Root-canals. — Besides  its 
germicidal  and  tannifying  properties,  which  make  it  a  valu- 
able agent  in  the  treatment  of  root-canals,  formalin  pos- 
sesses a  third  property,  seldom  considered,  which  contributes 
largely  to  its  value — that  is,  its  volatility.  It  expands  at 
ordinary  temperature  and  goes  beyond  the  apex,  bringing 
about  sterilization  of  the  canal  and  of  the  periapical  region. 
— Dental  Cosmos. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — Open  up  and  clean  thoroughly 
at  the  first  setting  and  pump  pure  carbolic  acid  through,  if 
possible,  into  the  abscess  or  fistula,  as  the  case  may  be,  and 
enough  to  do  the  work.  Stop  the  canal  with  a  rope  of  cotton 
dipped  in  carbolic  acid  and  xeroform ;  fill  cavity  with  gutta- 
percha and  wait  a  week  or  ten  days,  or  two  weeks,  or  two 
months,  as  the  case  may  be. — S.  C.  G.  Watkins,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — After  removal  of  putrescent 
root-canal  contents,  thorough  cleansing,  and  dehydration, 
use  an  antiseptic  dressing,  oxpara,  a  composition  of  formal- 
dehyd,  thymol,  burnt  alum,  and  creosote,  consisting  of  a 
powder  and  a  liquid  which  should  be  mixed  to  a  creamy 
consistency  and  inserted  on  a  few  threads  of  cotton  or  bitu- 
minous paper. — A.  F,  Strange,  Dental  Summary. 


Treatment  of  Root  Canals.  223 

Hydronapthol  in  Roat-canal  Treatment. — In  the  treat- 
ment of  a  putrescent  pulp  canal  use  hydronapthol-alcoholic 
solution  25  per  cent.  The  penetrating  property  of  the 
alcohol  and  its  affinity  for  moisture  carry  it,  laden  with  the 
hydronapthol  in  solution,  to  the  remotest  nook  and  corner 
of  the  pulp-chambers  and  canals,  however  small,  even  to  the 
apex  and  through  the  soft  tissues,  as  well  as  into  the  tubuli. 
The  alcohol  evaporates,  leaving  the  hydronapthol  to  do  its 
useful  work  of  disinfection.  It  is  powerful  as  a  lion,  cun- 
ning as  a  serpent  and  harmless  as  a  dove. — S.  S.  Stowell, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Treatment  of  Root-canals. — Use  the  Donaldson  broach, 
sulphuric  acid,  and,  in  favorable  cases,  the  engine  reamer  to 
clear  the  canal.  In  disinfecting  rely  on  hot  air,  hydrogen 
dioxid  and  iodoform  in  ether.  In  filling  use  gutta- 
percha points  for  all  large  canals;  for  the  smaller  ones,  a 
mixture  of  zinc  oxid,  carbolic  acid  and  iodoform,  forcing  it 
into  all  the  recesses  possible. — T.  W.  Onderdonk,  Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Sterilization. — First.  Thoroughly  remove 
all  pulp  debris  by  broaches,  wrapped  with  fibers  of  cotton. 
Second.  Disinfect  with  95  per  cent,  carbolic  acid  and  dry 
the  canal.  Third.  Flood  the  canal  with  absolute  alcohol 
and  evaporate  with  hot  air  until  thorough  desiccation  is 
obtained.  The  rubber-dam  is  indispensable. — Jno.  S. 
Marshall^  International  Den.  Jotir. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — My  root-canal  fillings  are  of 
pink  gutta-percha  because  of  the  color  which  can  be  traced 
in  drilling  for  a  post,  or  in  case  of  removal,  this  is  dissolved 
in  chloroform,  cajeput,  and  eucalyptus,  with  the  addition  of 
hydronapthol,  oil  of  cassia,  and  iodoform.  This  is  always 
heated  in  a  water-bath  just  previous  to  using,  to  render  it 
of  a  creamy  consistency,  and  is  pumped  in  with  a  smooth 
broach;  a  point  of  gutta-percha  is  also  inserted  and  left  as 
a  hard  centre  of  the  root-filling. — Chas.  E.  Parkhurst, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


224  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sodium  Peroxid  in  Dead  Teeth. — Sodium  peroxid  in 
its  action  combines  the  properties  of  sodium  hydrate  and  of 
hydrogen  peroxid ;  fat-saponifying-,  albumen  dissolving, 
sterilizing  and  bleaching,  or  union  of  the  properties  of 
kalium  natrium  and  pyrozone.  possessing  all  the  essential 
features  for  the  treatment  of  the  interior  of  dead  teeth. — H. 
H.  BuRCHARD,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Essentials  to  Success  in  Root-treatment. — First,  the  rub- 
ber-dam; second,  free  access;  third,  thorough  cleansing, 
medicinal  and  antiseptic;  fourth,  getting  the  antiseptic 
through  the  root;  fifth,  perfectly  filling  the  root  (immedi- 
ately after  getting  an  aseptic  condition)  with  an  antiseptic 
root-filling;  sixth,  sufficient  confidence  in  the  method  to  in- 
sure thorough  work,  and  the  minutest  attention  to  details. — 
F.  Milton  Smith,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — Inject  i-iooo  bichlorid  sol. 
through  root  until  canal  and  abscess  seem  clean.  Wrap  a 
little  cotton  on  a  fine  broach,  dip  in  40  per  cent.  sol.  sul- 
phuric acid  and  work  up  and  down  canal  a  few  times,  fol- 
lowed by  a  saturated  bicarbonate  of  soda  solution.  Then 
bichlorid  again  until  no  stain  on  cotton  appears.  Make 
solution  chlorid  of  zinc,  40  grains  to  i  oz.  water,  and  inject 
in  abscess  sac.  Leaving  root  moist,  mix  oxychlor.  zinc  and 
bichlor.  m.  sol.  to  consistency  of  cream  and  pump  in  canal. 
When  crystallized,  fill  the  cavity. — V.  M.  Murier,  Dom. 
Den.  Jour. 

Drying  out  Root-canals. — If  a  chip  blower  is  heated  over 
an  alcohol  lamp,  the  air  taken  in  from  the  alcohol  flame  is 
converted  into  formaldehyd  gas,  the  best  disinfectant ;  hence 
the  advantage  over  an  electric  hot-air  syringe. — Homer 
Almon,  Dental  Review. 

To  Expedite  the  Treatment  of  Putrescent  Root-canals. — 
As  a  source  of  gratifying  results,  use  a  dressing  composed 
of  equal  parts  of  alcohol,  formalin,  and  beechwood  creosote. 
— Charles  E.  Slagle. 


Treatment  of  Root  Canals.  225 

Electrolysis  in  Sterilizing  Root-canals,  Abscess  Cavities, 
etc. — A  soluble  zinc  electrode,  mounted  upon  an  insulated 
handle,  is  to  be  inserted  into  the  cavity,  the  action  of  the 
current  generating  zinc  chlorid.  If  the  zinc  electrode  is 
coated  with  mercury  the  chlorids  of  mercury  and  zinc  will 
both  be  deposited.  If  a  fine  gold  wire  coated  with  mer- 
cury is  used  as  an  electrode,  only  the  mercury  will  be  acted 
upon  by  the  current. — J.  M.  Fogg^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — When  the  pulp  is  found  ex- 
posed, vital  or  partially  so,  spray  with  chlorid  of  ethyl ;  re- 
move ;  cleanse  canal  and  dehydrate  as  follows :  Wipe  well 
with  Ceylon  oil  of  cinnamon  and  throw  hot  air  upon  it  for  a 
few  moments  to  vaporize  the  medicament  and  cause  it  to 
permeate  the  dentin,  rendering  the  canals  and  apical  space 
aseptic. — W.  T.  McLean,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Peroxid  of  Sodium. — In  the  treatment  of  septic  pulp 
.  canals,  the  use  of  the  dry  powder  of  peroxid  of  sodium  over- 
comes the  objection  to  using  the  solution,  which  is  very 
difficult  to  make.  Dip  a  dry  broach  into  the  powder  and 
work  it  into  the  canal.  Saturate  with  five  per  cent,  sulphuric 
acid;  effervescence  will  force  out  all  debris. — F.  H.  Lee, 
Dental  Digest. 

Treatment  of  Canal  After  Pulp-removal. — If  infection 
at  the  apex  is  suspected,  treat  with  sulphuric  acid  and 
sodium  dioxid,  and  seal  in  the  tooth  for  a  few  days  oil  of 
cloves  containing  one  per  cent,  of  formaldehyd.  If  there  is 
no  soreness  at  the  next  sitting,  proceed  to  fill. — Harold 
Clark,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Sterilization. — Wash  out  first  with  neutral 
peroxid  of  hydrogen  (or  pyrozone)  ;  second  with  cinnamon 
or  peppermint  water.  Dry  and  introduce  strand  of  cotton 
or  silk  wet  with  myrtol.  Seal  in  for  one  or  two  days.  Pre- 
vent ingress  of  saliva  or  water  and  fill. — A.  W.  Harlan, 
Ohio  Den.  Journal. 


226  Practical  Dentistry. 

Treatment  of  Root-canals. — Never  enter  a  doubtful 
canal,  even  with  an  instrument  that  you  feel  sure  is  sterile, 
without  first  dipping  it  in  the  Schrill  compound  (sodium 
and  potassium).  It  is  a  steriHzing  agent  for  the  instru- 
ment as  well  as  for  the  tooth. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Liquid  Medicaments  in  Root  Canal. — Flood  the  canal 
with  the  liquid,  introduce  a  Downie  broach  and  revolve  it 
the  wrong  way ;  the  blade  of  a  broach  will  operate  like  the 
screw  propeller  on  a  steamboat. — Dental  Office  and  Labora- 
tory. 

Root-canal  Treatment. — When  canals  are  so  small  that 
it  is  impossible  to  penetrate  them  with  the  finest  bristle,  I 
say  let  them  alone.  Such  canals  are  too  small  to  give  any 
trouble  by  infiltration  of  moisture. — Otto  Marx,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  in  Root-canal. — When  it  is  desirable 
to  introduce  nitrate  of  silver  into  a  root-canal,  heat  a  plat- 
inum wire  and  dip  it  in  the  crystals.  They  will  adhere  and 
may  be  carried  to  any  point  desired. — J.  F.  Steele. 

Carbolic  Acid  in  Root-canals. — After  the  removal  of  a 
pulp  the  use  of  carbolic  acid  in  the  canal  will  aid  nature  in 
closing  up  the  apical  foramen.  There  is  nothing  like  steril- 
ized coagulated  albumen  for  the  protection  of  the  periosteal 
or  pericemental  tissues. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 

Pulp  Treatment. — The  stearate  of  zinc,  with  aristol  and 
oleate  of  zinc  and  iodol,  are  excellent  agents  for  pulps  which 
need  stimulating  treatment ;  then  capping  when  an  effort 
is  being  made  to  save  the  pulp,  as  in  young  teeth. — Vida  A. 
Latham,  Dental  Digest. 

Electro-sterilization  of  Root-canals;  Chlorid  of  Zinc. — 
Seal  the  apex,  fill  canal  with  pyrozone,  add  a  small  amount 
of  chlorid  of  sodium,  place  zinc  wire  electrode  in  the 
moistened  canal,  turn  on  current. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Ohio  Den. 
Jour. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  227 

After  Pulp  Removal. — That  annoying  particle  of  sensi- 
tive tissue  at  the  apex  of  the  root  can  ordinarily  be  removed 
by  pumping  carbolic  acid  and  chloroform  into  the  root  with 
a  smooth  broach. — Chas.  E.  Parkhurst,  International  Den- 
tal Journal. 

Root-canal  Sterilization. — Put  a  minimum  portion  of 
sodium  peroxid  in  the  canal  and  cover  over  with  gutta- 
percha. After  twenty-four  hours  wash  out  with  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid,  followed  by  bicarbonate  of  soda. — C.  N.  Peirce, 
Ohio  Den.  Journal. 

Glycerol  of  Thymol. — Glycerol  of  thymol  acts  admira- 
bly as  a  preservative  if  left  at  the  bottom  of  a  well-cleaned 
root-canal  when  ready  for  filling. — Dr.  Bogue,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Root-canal  Filling. — The  best  quality  of  beeswax 
coaxed  into  the  roots  with  a  hot  instrument  has  been  used  by 
me  with  very  satisfactory  results  for  many  years. — B.  F. 
Arrington,  Dental  Digest. 

Iodoform  in  Root  Treatment. — If  iodoform  be  used  in 
root  treatment,  put  a  tonquin  bean  in  a  small  bottle  of  the 
drug;  this,  to  a  great  extent,  will  obviate  its  unpleasantness. 
— H.  Leonard  Dorrell,  The  Dental  Record. 

ROOT    CANAL    FILLINGS 

Root-canal  Filling. — Dissolve  five  or  six  grains  of  aris- 
tol  in  chloroform,  with  which  make  your  chloro-percha,  dip- 
ping your  gutta-percha  points  in  the  same  solution.  This 
makes  an  antiseptic,  non-irritating  root-canal  filling  which 
will  keep  the  tissues  in  a  normal,  healthy  condition.  Before 
inserting,  displace  the  water  in  the  canal  with  oil  of  eucalyp- 
tus, flooding  the  canal.  The  aristol  and  chloro-percha  will 
then  go  to  the  very  apex  of  even  very  fine  canals,  drawn 
by  capillary  attraction. — L.  G.  Noll,  Transactions  Missis- 
sippi Dental  Association. 


228  Practical  Dentistry. 

The    Gutta-percha    Cone   in    Root-canal    Filling. — The 

difficulty  of  root-canal  filling  is  enhanced  when  there  is  a 
large  open  foramen,  but  this  may  be  overcome  by  the  use  of 
a  section  from  a  long  hand-rolled  cone  of  gutta-percha, 
tapering  from  one-eighth  inch  in  diameter  to  a  point.  As 
the  cone  is  pressed  into  the  canal  the  sensation  produced  will 
indicate  that  apical  tissue  is  reached.  Withdraw  the  cone  and 
cut  off  the  end,  introducing  it  again  and  repeating  the  cutting 
until  it  can  be  introduced  without  sensation.  Then  cut  oflf  a 
little  more  and  a  section  of  suitable  length  on  a  flat-ended 
canal  plugger  by  heating  the  plugger  end ;  moisten  the  canal 
with  eucalyptol  or  chloro-percha  and  anitol  and  introduce  the 
cone,  packing  it  gently  to  place. — O.  E.  Inglis,  The  Stoma- 
tologist. 

Root  Filling. — Gutta-percha  is  a  good  root  filling, 
and  where  roots  are  filled  immediately  after  the  removal  of 
the  pulp,  as  is  sometimes  necessary,  it  is  an  excellent  plan 
to  carry  on  a  probe  a  small  portion  of  powdered  iodoform 
as  near  as  possible  to  the  root  apex  and  then  pack  the  gutta- 
percha on  that.  Iodoform  is,  clinically,  antiseptic  as  well  as 
anaesthetic,  and  hence  is  an  excellent  dressing  for  the  stump 
of  a  removed  pulp.  The  advantage  of  applying  the  iodoform 
before  introducing  the  gutta-percha  rather  than  with  it  is 
that  if  mixed  with  gutta-percha  and  heated  the  iodoform  is 
likely  to  be  decomposed  and  some  of  its  good  qualities  im- 
paired.— W.  F.  LiTCH,  Dental  Brief. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Dry  the  root  by  means  of  chloro- 
form of  ether  with  chloroform  in  solution,  then  the  hot  point 
and  hot  air.  Then  introduce  a  gutta-percha  point  a  little 
smaller  than  the  canal,  the  point  moistened  with  chloroform 
and  having  a  bit  of  iodoform  on  the  end.  This  is  carried  to 
the  extreme  end  of  the  canal.  Again  use  the  hot  air  and 
soften  the  gutta-percha  to  a  creamy  consistency,  and  with 
pressure  force  to  place,  and  the  canal  will  be  closed  as  well 
as  can  be  done  by  the  hand  of  man. — T.  W.  Onderdonk, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  229 

Root-canal  Filling;  Weld's  Chemico-Metallic  Method. — 

One  of  the  metallic  broaches,  composed  principally  of  zino 
(97  per  cent.),  is  to  be  dipped  into  the  modified  nitro- 
hydrochloric  acid,  probably  about  one-fifth  of  a  drop  ad- 
hering; sufficient  to  destroy  all  the  germs  and  coagulate 
the  dead  or  semi-dead  matter  in  the  canal.  The  broach 
thus  charged  is  immediately  inserted  in  the  canal,  a  slight 
nick  having  been  previously  made  at  a  point  corresponding 
with  the  depth  of  the  canal.  A  slight  bend  or  twist  breaks 
off  the  point,  leaving  it  in  the  canal,  obliterating  the  space, 
while  the  concurrent  chemical  action  acts  as  a  powerful 
germicide. — L.  N.   Seymour,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — The  filling  must  reach  the  apex 
of  the  root;  after  it  is  placed  it  must  not  leak  or  absorb 
exudations  from  the  nutritive  fluids  which  are  always  pres- 
ent. If  the  filling  does  not  occupy  all  the  space  originally 
filled  with  pulp-tissue,  that  portion  unfilled  will  develop 
poisonous  matter  fatal  to  the  life  of  the  tooth  or  the  com- 
fort of  the  patient;  new  tissue  is  never  built  into  the  un- 
filled space,  but  it  will  be  filled  with  the  exudation  of  serum, 
which  will  ferment  and  putrefy  and  form  gases,  and  by 
pressure  originate  inflammation  in  the  apical  territory^  the 
limit  being  determined  only  by  the  amount  of  poisonous 
exudate  formed  and  the  vigor,  or  lack  of  vigor,  of  the  forces 
of  the  animal  economy  of  the  individual. — J.  D.  Patterson, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 

Immediate  Disinfection  and  Root-canal  Filling. — Re- 
move all  debris  as  thoroughly  as  possible;  inject  peroxid 
of  hydrogen,  repeating  until  not  a  single  bubble  appears, 
going  through  fistula  if  one  exists.  Dry  thoroughly,  and 
flood  canals  with  bichlorid  of  mercury.  Wipe  out  and 
bathe  with  eucalyptol,  making  that  the  vehicle  for  a  con- 
siderable quantity  of  iodoform.  ■  Then  dip  fine  points  of 
gutta-percha  in  the  solution  of  eucalyptol  and  iodoform,  and 
fill  the  roots  with  them, — C.  F.  Stockwell,  International 
Dental  Journal. 


230  Practical  Dentistry. 

A  Metal  Cone  in  Root-canal  Filling. — Lengths  of  silver 
wire,  of  different  thickness  to  correspond  to  the  size  of 
root-canals,  are  cut  and  the  point  made  cone-shaped.  These 
are  roughened  and  covered  with  gutta-percha,  making  a 
gutta-percha  point  with  core  of  metal.  A  curve  or  hook 
may  be  formed  at  the  end  of  the  wire  which  occupies  the 
coronal  portion  of  the  cavity,  to  facilitate  removal  should 
this  become  necessary.  Such  a  point  will  follow  the  root 
to  the  very  end  without  turning  up  the  point.  Fill  canal 
with  chloro-percha  before  inserting  point. — Theo.  F.  Von 
BuEST,  Items  of  Interest. 

Formalin  Cement  for  Root-canal  Filling. — 

Powder. 

Calc.   of   svilphur    200 

Hydrag.  bichlor    4 

Mix   finely. 

Liquid. 

Acid    sulphuric    32 

Formalin    100 

Aq.,    distillate    100 

Rub  up  a  few  drops  of  the  liquid  with  sufficient  of  the 
powder  to  form  a  paste.  Introduce  into  the  dried  root- 
canal.  It  solidifies  in  a  few  moments.  No  discoloring  or 
corrosive  effect. — Abraham,  in  Zahnarztliches  Wochenblatt. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Apply  the  coffer-dam ;  by  the  aid 
of  the  root-drier  dry  the  canal,  destroying  any  microorgan- 
isms that  may  have  been  left  there.  Flood  the  canal  with 
eucalyptus,  which,  by  imbibition,  is  carried  into  the  dental 
tubules,  any  surplus  being  removed  by  the  aid  of  cotton  or 
other  absorbent.  Flood  with  chloroform,  and  work  a  broach 
back  and  forth  in  the  canals  as  air  bubbles  escape.  Work 
chloro-percha  into  the  canal,  withdrawing  the  broach  grad- 
ually, leaving  gutta-percha  in  its  place. — ^J.  H.  Wooley, 
Dental  Review. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  231 

Gutta-percha  in  Root-canal  Filling. — For  a  canal  which 
has  been  difficult  to  open,  select  a  point  longer  than  the 
canal,  which  cannot  be  pushed  quite  to  the  apical  opening, 
and  place  it  in  the  canal;  dip  the  foil  carriers  in  oil  6f  caju- 
put  and  carry  the  drop  which  they  will  hold  to  the  orifice  of 
the  canal;  it  will  instantly  run  in.  Catch  the  projecting 
gutta-percha  and  move  it  up  and  down ;  friction  aided  by 
the  solvent  action  of  the  oil  will  make  the  point  fit  the  canal 
accurately. — Jas.  M.  Magee^  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

The  Ideal  Root-canal  Filling. — Gutta-percha,  combined 
with  wood  creosote,  formaldehyd,  iodoform  and  oil  of  cassia 
makes  an  antiseptic  and  ideal  root-canal  filling.  These 
germicides  remain  forever  active  and  every  molecule  of  the 
filling  is  impregnated  with  these  lasting  germicides,  which 
do  not  lose  their  medicinal  qualities  as  do  all  root-canal 
dressings  by  being  absorbed. — L.  T.  Canfield,  Dental 
Summary. 

Root-fillings  in  Molar  Teeth. — Ordinarily  the  roots  of 
first  molars  cannot  be  safely  filled  before  eleven  or  twelve 
years  of  age,  and  second  molars  not  before  about  sixteen.  If 
pulps  are  painful  or  exposed  before  that  time,  every  possible 
effort  should  be  made  to  quiet  and  protect  or  cap  them,  so 
as  to  preserve  them  alive  until  their  most  important  function 
— the  completion  of  the  roots — is  fulfilled.  Fortunately,  the 
life  of  pulps  is  much  more  vigorous  and  persistent  previous 
to  this  time,  and  efforts  for  their  preservation  more  likely  to 
succeed. — Ed.  Noyes,  Dental  Review. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Since  a  root-filling  made  by  first 
moistening  the  canal  with  eucalyptol  and  then  pumping 
chloro-percha  into  it,  and  into  this  forcing  a  gutta-percha 
cone,  is  the  best  resistant  to  moisture,  and  since  oxychlorid 
of  zinc  is  the  best  resistant  to  bacteria,  a  combination  of 
these  two  materials  would  seem  to  make  the  best  root- 
filling,  gutta-percha  being  placed  at  the  apex  of  the  root- 
canal,  and  over  this  the  filling  of  oxychlorid  of  zinc. — A.  E. 
Webster,  Dental  Review. 


232  Practical  Dentistry. 

Root-filling. — Break  up  a  box  of  gutta-percha  stopping 
and  put  in  a  large-mouthed  bottle  of  colored  glass  to  ex- 
clude the  light.  Add  enough  chloroform  to  dissolve,  and 
make  a  cream.  Allow  it  to  remain  open  until  nearly  all 
the  chloroform  has  evaporated,  then  add  oil  of  eucalyptus 
to  make  it  like  dough,  and  leave  open  for  further  evapora- 
tion. Then  add  enough  powdered  europhen  to  bring  to  a 
consistency  that  can  be  lifted  without  running.  Fill  canal 
and  follow  with  gutta-percha  points. — T.  AIarshall 
Weaver,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Formaldehyd  in  Root-canals. — In  cases  where,  after  pulp 
devitalization,  a  remnant  remains  at  apex  of  root  too  sensi- 
tive for  removal,  apply  formaldehyd  (Seininger's  solidified) 
sufficient  to  one-third  fill  the  pulp-chamber,  spreading  it 
over  the  openings  to  canals.  Fill  balance  with  cotton  and 
seal  with  temporary  stopping.  After  about  three  days 
the  balance  of  pulp-tissue  will  be  found  lifeless  and  of 
leathery  consistence.  After  removal  and  thorough  cleansing, 
fill  canals  with  a  paste  made  by  rubbing  formaldehyd  with 
vaselin  and  insert  gutta-percha  point. — F.  B.  Lawrence, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 

Root-filling  Material. — Gutta-percha  base-plate,  by 
weight,  one-half  ounce ;  saturate  solution  of  thymol  in 
eucalyptus,  by  measure.  Dissolve  the  gutta-percha  (one- 
half  ounce)  in  chloroform,  add  the  thymol  and  eucalyptus 
and  mix  thoroughly;  then  allow  the  chloroform  to  evapo- 
rate. Work  into  the  canal  with  broach  and  force  to  apex 
with  soft  rubber  and  gutta-percha  cone. — B.  L.  Cochran, 
Dental  Reviezu. 

Root-canal  Filling. — A  deviation  from  the  usual  method 
of  filling  with  chloro-percha  and  gutta-percha.  A  gutta- 
percha cone  is  first  placed  in  the  canal  and  then  the  chloro- 
percha  is  applied,  dissolving  the  point ;  another  point  is  then 
inserted  and  forced  to  place,  insuring  the  complete  filling  of 
the  root  without  danger  of  confining  air  in  the  canal. — J.  J. 
Wright,  Dental  Digest. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  233 

Aseptic  Root-canal  Filling. — Having  thoroughly  dried 
the  canals  and  cleansed  with  alcohol,  work  in  a  paste  of 
oil  of  cloves  and  aristol;  if  the  paste  is  a  day  or  two  old 
it  is  better.  If  the  canal  is  not  thoroughly  dry  at  the  apex 
the  alcohol  will  readily  take  up  the  moisture  and  also  the 
oil  of  cloves  and  carry  the  paste  to  the  ends  of  the  root. 
sealing  the  apical  foramen.  Insert  a  gutta-percha  point 
except  in  small  canals. — G.  R.  Gard,  Dental  Summary. 

Using  Gutta-percha  Points. — Gutta-percha  points,  as 
received  from  the  manufacturers,  have  a  provoking  ten- 
dency to  double  upon  themselves  and  refuse  to  find  their  way 
into  a  canal.  This  difficulty  may  be  overcome  by  introduc- 
ing into  the  point  a  flexible,  smooth,  and  very  sharp-pointed 
broach,  this  supporting  it  when  carried  into  the  canal.  Hold 
the  mass  in  the  canal  with  a  root-canal  plugger  when  with- 
drawing the  broach. — L.  G.  Noel,  Dental  Digest. 

Root-canal  rilling. — Having  thoroughly  dried  the 
canals  with  hot  air  pump  to  the  apex  of  each  root  a  thick 
creamy  solution  of  chloro-percha  in  which  has  been  incor- 
porated a  considerable  amount  of  iodoform,  which  makes 
an  excellent  antiseptic  dressing  as  well  as  a  lubricant  for  the 
introduction  of  the  gutta-percha  points  which  form  the 
bulk  of  the  canal  filling,  forcing  into  each  canal  as  many  as 
is  possible. — K.  P.  Ashley,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Dr.  Pruyn  has  recently  adopted 
the  method  of  filling  canals  with  sandarac  varnish  and  gutta- 
percha points,  his  theory  being  that  the  varnish  follows  the 
remaining  alcohol  used  for  drying  out;  the  results  seem 
very  good,  the  varnish  appearing  to  enter  all  the  openings 
of  the  canaliculi. — J.  ]\I.  Wallis,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Paraffin  and  iodoform  melted  in 
with  a  copper  wire  in  the  form  of  the  Donaldson  broaches. 
The  preparation  is  carried  to  the  end  of  the  roots  by  capil- 
lary action.  By  simply  pressing  cotton  on  it  the  filling  will 
come  away  intact,  showing  the  exact  shape  of  the  canal. 
— F.  T.  Van  Woert,  Items  of  Interest. 
16 


234  Practical  Dentistry. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Free  and  easy  access  to  the  canals 
must  be  made,  however  much  tissue  has  to  be  sacrificed. 
Be  very  careful  to  avoid  perforation  of  the  apex.  Oxy- 
chlorid  of  zinc  is  by  far  the  best  material  for  filling  root- 
canals,  as  it  remains  sweet  and  pure  indefinitely.  Char- 
coal is  an  exceedingly  valuable  filling,  and  as  it  is  practically 
insoluble  it  ought  to  prove  a  permanent  one. — T.  Wilson 
Hague,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — 

Iodoform    QOgrs. 

Oxid  of  zinc  45  grs. 

Pulverized  charcoal    45  grs. 

Oil  of  cloves  67  grs. 

Does  not  solidify  in  the  bottle  and  keeps  indefinitely. 
At  time  of  using  mix  with  tincture  of  myrrh  to  the  con- 
sistency of  cement  and  carry  to  canal  on  asbestos  fibre 
heated  over  a  Bunsen  burner  flame,  using  an  iridium 
platinum  broach. — Exchange. 

Root-canal  Filling — Carbonized  Cotton. — This  porous, 
soft  and  flexible  carbon,  in  itself  a  disinfectant,  is  also  an 
excellent  antiseptic,  every  fibre  being  impregnated  with 
anhydrous  boracic  acid.  All  septic  masses,  which  may  ap- 
pear in  spite  of  careful  treatment,  are  readily  taken  up  by 
it  and  made  harmless.  It  can  be  brought  to  red  heat  before 
using.  No  irritation  ever  results  within  the  tooth,  nor  in 
surrounding  parts. — Elof  Farberg,  The  Dentist. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Dr.  W.  T.  McLean  recommends 
asbestos  fibers,  saturated  with  silver  nitrate  solution,  pro- 
tected with  cement.  The  advantage  of  asbestos  is  not  quite 
clear;  silk  or  flax  would  answer  as  well.  Fully  saturated 
with  silver  nitrate  they  would  not  undergo  any  change  in 
the  tooth  canal.  There  are  other  antiseptics  as  good  as 
silver  nitrate  and  which  will  not  discolor  the  tooth. — J.  Taft, 
Dental  Cosmos. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  235 

Root-canal  Filling. — With  rubber-dam  in  place  dry  the 
root  thoroughly  with  Evans'  root  dryer,  then  fill  with  salol, 
finishing  with  gutta-percha  point.  As  tested  by  roots  im- 
bedded in  plaster  this  makes  the  most  perfect  root  filling  of 
all  that  I  have  tried.  Salol  has  valuable  antiseptic  qualities, 
and  no  inflammation  follows  its  use  even  if  a  little  passes 
through  the  foramen. — R.  C.  Young. 

Success  in  Root-canal  Filling. — Antiseptics  used  in 
canals  in  connection  with  other  filling  material  such  as  gutta- 
percha, oxpara,  oxid  of  zinc,  etc.,  help  to  render  the  canals 
aseptic  at  the  time,  and  to  keep  them  so  for  longer  or 
shorter  periods,  but  eventually  the  success  of  the  filling  de- 
pends entirely  upon  the  other  materials  used. — Geo.  Brooks, 
American  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Place  equal  parts  salol  and  paraffin 
in  the  cavity;  insert  Donaldson  broach  in  the  canal,  and  by 
means  of  heated  Evans  root-canal  dryer  flow  the  salol  and 
paraffin  to  the  apex.  It  will  follow  the  broach  thoroughly 
to  the  most  minute  point ;  then  quickly  withdraw  broach  and 
insert  a  gutta-percha  cone. — Frank  C.  Payne,  PaciHc  Stom. 
Gazette. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Having  sterilized  the  canal  with 
bichlorid  of  mercury  1-3000,  convey  to  the  apex  a  small 
portion  of  the  powder  of  one  of  the  cements  mixed  with 
beechwood  creosote.  Then,  with  malkt  drive  in  a  peg  of 
sterilized  orange-wood  wrapped  with  a  ribbon  of  Abbey's 
soft  gold. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 

Immediate  Root-filling. — When  immediate  root-filling 
is  practiced  my  advice  is  use  both  cocain  and  arsenic,  but 
use  judgment  before  using  either.  But  if  you  use  pressure 
anaesthesia  followed  by  immediate  root-filling,  look  out  for 
subsequent  inflammation  and  pain,  which,  even  if  subsiding 
in  twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours,  is  an  entirely  unneces- 
sary infliction  upon  the  patient. — J.  P.  Root,  Dental  Brief. 


236  Practical  Dentistry. 

An  Emergency  Root-canal  Filling. — In  a  case  in  which 
there  was  no  opportunity  for  preliminary  or  subsequent 
treatment,  an  abscessed  tooth  was  filled  with  gutta-percha, 
a  tapered  copper  wire  having  been  first  inserted  in  each 
canal.  After  the  filling  was  completed  the  wires  were  with- 
drawn, leaving  a  small  opening  for  the  escape  of  any  gas- 
eous or  fluid  accumulations  which  might  form  during  an 
ocean  voyage. — E.  A.  Bogue,  International  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

An  Ideal  Root  Filling. — As  a  filling  for  the  roots  of 
putrescent  teeth  there  is  nothing  better  than  oxpara 
(a  combination  of  formaldehyd,  thymol,  burnt  alum  and 
creosote)  in  combination  with  carbonized  cotton,  which  is 
a  good  quality  of  absorbent  cotton  saturated  with  boric  acid 
reduced  to  carbon  in  an  air-tight  retort.  When  dry  it 
readily  crumbles  and  is  difficult  to  manipulate  but  in  com- 
bination with  oxpara  it  works  easily  and  very  satisfactorily. 
— A.  F.  Strange,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Metallic  Root-canal  Fillings. — It  has  been  proved  by 
experiments  upon  microbes  that  metallic  silver  in  contact 
with  microbes  is  attacked  by  certain  of  the  toxines,  prob- 
ably of  acid  reaction,  produced  by  them  in  their  life-pro- 
cesses and  death-decomposition,  and  that  it  is  dissolved, 
making  a  compound  that  is  very  poisonous  to  the  microbes. 
It  is  thus  possible  that  metallic  silver  might  be  preferable 
to  gold  as  wire  used  in  root-canal  filling. — Dr.  Dawbarn, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — There  can  be  no  question  that  tin 
in  the  root-canal  is  as  bland  as  it  would  be  if  encysted  in 
the  muscular  tissue.  Clinical  experience  has  demonstrated 
that  a  root  properly  filled  with  tin  will  remain  perfectly 
odorless,  while  one  filled  in  the  same  manner  with  cotton 
and  cement,  or  gutta-percha,  almost  certainly  gives  off  a 
most  oiTensive  odor  on  being  removed. — T.  D.  Shumway, 
Dental  Digest. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  237 

Eoot-canal  Filling. — Combine  sufficient  eucalyptus  and 
creosote  to  make  a  paste,  and  add  a  little  iodoform,  the  odor 
of  which  will  be  much  disguised.  Wipe  the  canal  with  this 
dressing  and  pump  in  chloro-percha  until  full.  Then  insert 
a  gutta-percha  cone  or  point  and  fill  pulp-chamber  with 
cement.  Fill  cavity  as  desired. — R.  E.  Loucks,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Eucalyptus  Oil  as  a  Boot-dressing. — Having  cleaned 
the  canal  as  thoroughly  as  possible,  with  hypodermic 
syringe  inject  eucalyptus  oil,  the  outflow  washing  out  any 
lehris  that  may  have  been  left.  Fill  by  packing  wdth  fine 
asbestos  fibre  soaked  in  the  oil;  cap  with  osteo  and  fill  as 
usual. — H.  J.  Thomas,  Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Asso- 
ciation. 

Immediate  Root  Filling. — Immediate  root  filling  should 
not  be  resorted  to  in  case  the  pulp  is  removed  by  pressure 
anaesthesia.  In  case  the  canal  is  filled  immediately,  second- 
ary hemorrhage,  due  to  the  reaction,  causes  an  undue  press- 
ure in  the  apical  space  and  is  liable  to  set  up  an  active 
inflammation  or  congestion  of  the  peridental  membrane. — 
E.  T.  LoEFFLER,  Dental  Summary. 

Root-canal  Filling. — After  pulp  extirpation  wipe  out 
canal  with  cotton  dipped  in  a  saturated  solution  of  thymol  in 
oil  of  cinnam^on ;  fill  canal  with  gutta-percha  points  dipped 
in  the  same  solution.  The  oil  of  cinnamon  evaporates, 
leaving  the  thymol  in  crystals  along  the  walls  of  the  root, 
forming  with  the  gutta-percha  points  a  very  lasting  anti- 
septic.— J.  J.  E.  De  Vries,  Items  of  Interest. 

Root-canal  Filling. — There  is  no  root-filling  material 
in  use  which  will  prevent  the  passage  of  moisture  and  bac- 
teria. Dependence  must  be  placed  on  something  other  than 
the  filling  material,  mainly  the  protective  proteid  bodies  of 
the  tissues,  and  therefore  we  should  not  do  an}'thing  that 
will  weaken  their  resistive  power  by  drugs  or  instrumenta- 
tion.— A.  E.  Webster,  Dental  Cosmos. 


238  Practical  Dentistry. 

Boot  Canal  Filling. — After  pulp  removal  under  pres- 
sure anaesthesia  I  always  leave  a  small  quantity  of  mum- 
mifying- paste  (zinc  oxid,  alum  and  thymol)  at  the  extreme 
end  of  the  canal  and  then  fill  with  gutta-percha  points  dipped 
in  a  saturated  solution  of  thymol  in  oil  of  cinnamon.  The 
cinnamon  gradually  evaporates,  leaving  a  layer  of  thymol 
crystals,  lining  the  root  canal. — Wilfred  E.  Griffin,  Brit- 
ish Dental  Journal. 

Combination  Koot-canal  Filling. — By  the  use  of  gutta- 
percha at  the  foramen  and  oxychlorid  for  the  balance  of  the 
canal  we  avoid  the  objectionable  features  of  both  materials, 
— vis.,  the  leakage  in  gutta-percha  and  the  forcing  of  oxy- 
chlorid through  the  foramen.  Used  as  stated,  these  mate- 
rials practically  combine  more  of  the  qualities  of  an  ideal 
root-filling  than  can  be  obtained  with  any  of  the  other 
materials  generally  used. — Western  Dental  Journal. 

Charcoal  in  Immediate  Root-canal  Filling  of  Abscessed 
Teeth. — Finding  it  difficult  to  pulverize  the  charcoal  points 
after  introduction  into  the  canal  I  have  used  thoroughly  pul- 
verized charcoal  mixed  with  creosote  with  great  success,  and 
have  as  yet  to  record  a  single  failure. — J.  H.  Darham, 
Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Filling  Root-canals. — I  use  the  oxid  of  zinc  and  trit- 
cresol,  adding  carbonized  cotton  to  thicken  the  paste,  which 
makes  the  mixture  more  easily  carried  to  place — not,  how- 
ever, without  a  good  degree  of  patience  and  considerable 
perseverance.  A  gutta-percha  cone,  if  desired,  may  be  used 
to  complete  the  filling. — Grafton  Munroe,  Dental  Review. 

Pulp-canal  Filling.  Creosoted  Charcoal  Points. — In  case 
of  alveolar  abscess,  even  with  periostitis,  clean  and  dry 
out  the  canals,  apply  oil  of  cassia  and  insert  a  creosoted 
charcoal  point.  Dismiss  the  patient  for  from  three  days  to 
a  week,  when,  as  a  rule,  the  cavity  may  safely  receive  per- 
manent filling — a  gold  restoration,  if  called  for. — E.  R. 
Tait,  Pacif.  Med.  Den.  Gazette. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  239 

Gutta-percha  Cones  in  Root-canal  Filling. — Moisten  the 
canals  with  oil  of  eucalyptus  and  press  to  place  the  gutta- 
percha cone.  If  also  applied  after  the  cone  has  been  placed 
in  the  canal,  by  employing  a  blast  of  warm  air  the  gutta- 
percha can  be  easily  packed  into  the  canal.  Use  only 
enough  to  moisten  the  canal. — C.  R.  Taylor,  Dental  Brief. 

Immediate  Root-filling. — When  immediate  root-filling 
is  practiced  my  advice  is  use  both  cocain  and  arsenic,  but 
use  judgment  before  using  either.  But  if  you  use  pressure 
anaesthesia  followed  by  immediate  root-filling,  look  out  for 
subsequent  inflammation  and  pain,  which,  even  if  sub- 
siding in  twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours,  is  an  entirely 
unnecessary  infliction  upon  the  patient. — J.  P.  Root,  Dental 
Summary. 

Root-canal  Filling:  Root  Amputation. — In  cases  where 
the  apex  cannot  be  reached  file  the  canal  as  far  as  opened 
and  amputate  at  the  point  of  filling.  Always  continue  the 
amputation  until  the  filling  material  in  the  canal  is  reached 
so  as  to  be  sure  that  no  unfilled  portion  remains.  Amputate 
all  and  any  part  of  roots  that  cannot  be  thoroughly  opened, 
disinfected  and  filled. — E.  Lenox  Curtis,  Items  of  Interest. 

Chloro-percha. — In  making  the  solution,  after  you  have 
applied  the  chloroform,  stir  it  up  and  add  eucalyptol  until 
you  have  it  in  a  creamy  state.  Then  leave  the  cork  out  of  the 
bottle  to  allow  the  chloroform  to  evaporate.  You  then  have 
a  solution  which  if  forced  through  the  apical  foramen  will 
cause  less  irritation  than  would  the  chloroform, — G.  S. 
C^SAR,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Silver-foil  as  Root-canal  Filling. — Delightful  results 
following  the  use  of  silver-foil  in  pulp-canals,  in  roots  hav- 
ing large  apical  foramen,  or  a  perforation.  ...  A  suf- 
ficient quantity  is  torn  ofif  and  rolled  into  a  small  point,  and 
only  such  portion  used  as  the  operator  is  able  to  place  in 
proper  position  and  condense. — L.  S.  Chilcott,  Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 


240  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Ideal  Root-filling. — The  ideal  root-filling  should 
be  germicidal,  penetrating,  non-irritating,  not  contracting, 
impermeable  to  anything  in  the  oral  cavity.  Gutta-percha 
combined  with  wood  creosote  and  oil  of  cassia  makes  an  anti- 
septic and  ideal  root-filling. — L.  T.  Canfield,  Dental  Reg- 
ister. 

Asepsis  in  Root-canal  Filling. — I  always  use  a  pair  of 
sterile  tweezers  to  handle  my  gutta-percha  points,  and  in 
place  of  chloro-powder  I  use  B-napthol,  which  dissolves  in 
chloroform,  and  mix  the  same  with  my  osteo  covering. 
With  these  precautions  I  feel  that  I  have  given  longer  life 
to  pulpless  teeth. — W.  J.  Law,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling;  Europhen. — In  canals  that  are  im- 
possible to  get  through,  after  the  sulphuric  acid  treatment 
desiccate  thoroughly  and  pack  full  of  powdered  europhen, 
using  fine  broach.  If  secretions  are  present,  the  iodin  liber- 
ated renders  the  development  of  bacteria  impossible. — S. 
Marshall  Weaver,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — A  piece  of  silver  wire  of  proper 
length  is  pointed  at  one  end  and  is  bent  to  form  a  hook  or 
loop  at  the  end  to  occupy  the  pulp-chamber.  Coat  with 
gutta-percha  and  it  is  ready  to  complete  the  filling  of  a  canal 
filled  with  chloro-percha.  The  hook  facilitates  removal. — 
Theo.  Von  Buest,  Dental  Register. 

Paste  for  Root-canal  Filling. — 

IJ.    Zinci  oxidi    gm.  30 

Zinci  sulphatis gm.  10 

01.  menth.  pip gtt.   ii 

Lysoform     q.s.  f t.  pasta 

The  oil  of  peppermint  disguises  the  disagreeable  odor 
of  the  lysoform. — Dr.  Hentze,  Deutsche  Zahn.  Woch. 

Root-canal  FiUing. — Use  iodoformagen  cement  with 
one  part  oil  of  cloves  to  two  parts  of  the  accompanying 
liquid.  This  addition  partially  overcomes  the  objectionable 
too-quick-setting  quality  of  the  cement. — F.  W.  Barbour, 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


Root  Canal  Fillings.  241 

Copper  Amalgam  as  a  Root-canal  Filling. — In  filling  the 
roots  of  very  weak  teeth  which  are  to  be  crowned — as  when 
the  walls  are  very  thin  and  require  some  firm  support — 
line  the  roots  with  copper  amalgam,  giving  it  time  to  set, 
inserting  cement  at  a  future  sitting. — C.  V.  Kratzer,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Oxychlorid  of  Zinc  in  Root-canal  Filling — (i)  It  does 
not  shrink.  (2)  It  is  antiseptic  for  several  hours.  (3)  It 
cauterizes  and  renders  inert  any  organic  material  which  may 
remain.  (4)  It  seals  the  openings  of  the  dentinal  tubules. 
(5)  It  is  compatible  with  structure. — J.  D.  Patterson, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Fillings. — The  only  perfect  root-canal  filling 
is  one  that  fills  all  of  the  canal  to  the  apex  with  some 
material  that  is  impervious  to  moisture,  be  it  metal,  gutta- 
percha, cement,  or  what  not.  Antiseptics  cannot  be  relied 
on  for  any  definite  period. — Geo.  Brooks_,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Wipe  out  the  canal  and  dry  with 
hot  air,  fill  with  a  paste  composed  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  equal 
parts  of  creosote  and  40  per  cent,  formaldehyd,  completing 
with  a  gutta-percha  cone  dipped  in  chloroform. — H.  Rodier, 
La  Revue  de  Stomatologic. 

Eucalypto-percha  in  Root-canal  FilHng. — Chloro-percha 
occupies  less  space  in  a  root-canal  after  evaporation  of  the 
chloroform.  Gutta-percha  dissolved  in  eucalyptus  oil  does 
not  contract,  while  the  eucalyptus  oil  even  penetrates  into 
the  tubuli. — Dr.  Leroy,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Filling  Root-canals  for  Crowning. — After  getting  the 
roots  in  healthy  condition,  fill  them  with  paraffin  and  aristol. 
A  root-canal  dryer  will  cause  this  to  flow  readily  as  far  as 
the  canal  has  been  opened.  After  thorough  excavation, 
and  before  filling,  treat  with  nitrate  of  silver  if  it  is  where 
it  will  not  show. — Dr.  Chase,  International  Dental  Journal. 


242  Practical  Dentistry. 

Wood  Pulp-canal  Points. — For  convenience  in  use, 
cheapness,  and  as  a  time-saver,  the  wood  pulp-canal  points 
is  superior  to  anything  else.  After  the  canal  has  been 
pumped  full  of  chloro-percha,  twist  ofif  the  wood  point  in  the 
canal. — W.  H.  Bailey,  Dental  Digest. 

Paraiiin  as  Root-canal  Filling. — A  little  iodoform  or 
aristol  is  first  put  in  the  canal,  and  then  the  paraffin  is  car- 
ried in  with  a  fine  heated  broach.  This  makes  a  very  good 
filling  and  will  fill  the  root  very  thoroughly  if  a  little  care 
be  used. — Fred  A.  Peeso,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Chloro-percha  as  a  Root-canal  Filling. — The  shrinkage 
of  chloro-percha  can  be  almost,  if  not  wholly,  overcome  by 
packing  cotton  fibre  with  the  chloro-percha  before  it  has 
hardened,  giving  an  almost  ideal  root-canal  filling. — J.  W. 
Hagey^  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling. — My  method  is  to  fill  with  common 
lime  mixed  with  water  to  a  pasty  condition,  with  enough 
carbolic  acid  and  iodoform  well  mixed  with  it  to  give  anti- 
septic and  disinfecting  qualities. — W.  D.  Snyder,  Ohio  Den. 
Jour. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Powdered  asbestos,  oil  of  cassia, 
and  cotton.  Protect  with  cement  and  prepare  cavity  for 
final  filling. — W.  T.  McLean,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Sterilized  Cotton  Root-filling. — Dip  a  pellet  of  cotton  in 
iodin  and  leave  it  to  burn.  It  does  not  fall  to  pieces  and 
can  be  introduced  without  difficulty. — Dr.  Hotz,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Root-canal  Filling. — In  filling  root-canals  with  pellets 
perforate  each  pellet  with  a  small  needle,  to  allow  of  the 
escape  of  the  otherwise  confined  air  in  the  root-canal. — Dr. 
Cadman,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Chloro-Percha  in  Root  Canals. — Absorbent  paper  canal 
points  are  more  effective  than  broaches  in  pumping  chloro- 
percha  in  large  or  medium-sized  canals. — H.  W.  Gillett, 
Dental  Cosmos. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  243 

TREATMENT  OF  PULP  AND  PULP  CANAL- 
MISCELLANEOUS 

Pulp  Amputation. — When  from  inaccessible  position  or 
other  reasons  the  devitalized  pulp  cannot  readily  be  removed 
from  the  canals  after  removal  of  arsenical  application, 
amputate  the  pulp,  preventing  hemorrhage  by  the  application 
of  sublimated  spirits.  Fill  the  pulp  chamber  with  dust-fine 
pulverized  linden-wood  charcoal,  to  which  has  been  added  a 
small  amount  of  thymol.  Cover  with  gutta-percha  and  im- 
mediately insert  permanent  filling. — H.  Siegfried,  Den.  Dig. 

Decomposed  Pulps. — In  case  of  an  unexposed  pulp  in 
an  advanced  state  of  decomposition  the  application  of  a  paste 
of  paraform  and  tricresol,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  pulp, 
without  directly  exposing  it,  results  in  a  slow  development 
of  formaldehyd  gas  which  will  penetrate  the  septum  of 
dentin  and  disinfect  the  canal  and  its  contents  with  better 
results  than  if  attempt  is  made  to  open  the  pulp  canal. — E. 
C.  Kirk,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Root-canals. — In  all  root-canals  the  best  after-results 
have  been  obtained  in  cases  where  the  canals  have  been 
largely  reamed  to  remove  the  ends  of  the  fibrillae,  thus 
furnishing  a  clear,  open  root  and  lessening  the  amount  of 
putrescent  material.  Use  a  five  or  three-sided  reamer.  Re- 
sults justify  continuing  that  treatment  in  probably  sixty- 
five  per  cent,  of  exposures. — E.  T.  Darby,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Prevention  of  Recurrent  Sepsis  in  Root-canals. — Cotton 

is  a  perfect  barrier  to  prevent  the  ingress  and  egress  of 
microorganisms;  iodin  is  a  germicide,  antiseptic,  and  an- 
tipyretic; tannic  acid  will  render  connective  tissue  inert. 
Hence,  after  sterilizing  the  canal,  seal  the  apex  with  cotton 
dipped  first  in  tincture  of  iodin  and  then  in  finely-powdered 
tannic  acid.  If  discoloration  ensues,  it  is  always  due  to 
faulty  manipulation. — D.  Sheehan,  Dental  Summary. 


244  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sponge  Grafting'  in  Case  of  Absorbed  or  Perforated 
Roots. — When  an  absorbed  or  perforated  root  is  diagnosed, 
a  small  piece  of  the  finest  Turkey  sponge,  clean  and  steril- 
ized, may,  with  a  suitable  probe,  be  pushed  through  into  the 
space  beyond,  forming  a  perfect  seal,  and  into  which  fibrous 
tissue  will  grow,  arresting  absorption  and  preventing  irrita- 
tion.— George  Brunton,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Putrescent  Pulp  Treatment. — Excellent  results  can  be 
obtained  by  using  formalin  and  creosote,  equal  parts,  to 
which  alcohol  has  been  added.  Formalin  and  creosote  with- 
out the  alcohol  will  not  make  a  clear  solution ;  use  only 
enough  alcohol  to  effect  this  object;  ten  minims  of  alcohol 
is  sufficient  for  a  drachm,  approximately,  of  the  formalin 
and  cresote. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Digest. 

To  Reduce  Inflammation  of  Pulp  Previous  to  Arsenical 
Application. — Apply  peroxid  of  hydrogen  to  the  pulp ;  then, 
on  a  wisp  of  cotton,  take  up  as  much  as  is  convenient  of  bi- 
carbonate of  soda  and  place  loosely  in  cavity,  saturating 
with  chloric  ether.  Protect  the  cotton  as  preferred.  After 
this  treatment  the  pulp  is  less  liable  to  give  pain  from  ap- 
plication of  arsenic. — Dr.  Williams,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

The  Broach. — Never  use  any  other  than  a  soft  broach. 
The  most  convenient  and  effective  method  of  steriliza- 
tion is  to  pass  the  broach  through  the  flame  of  the  alcohol 
lamp  just  before  using  it.  It  should  be  held  a  little 
above  the  flame  to  avoid  burning  it,  and  should  not  be  with- 
drawn from  the  heat  too  quickly  or  the  sudden  cooling  will 
harden  it. — J.  Leon  Williams,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Prognosis  in  Pulp  Exposure  with  Toothache. — If  the 

dentin  is  normally  sensitive  the  vitality  of  the  pulp  may  be 
preserved.  If  there  is  an  area  of  non-sensitiveness  in  the 
cornu  nearest  the  point  of  exposure ;  if  sensitiveness  returns 
after  bleeding  the  pulp,  you  may  still  hope  for  favorable 
results. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  245 

After  Removal  of  Arsenical  Dressings. — When  an  ar- 
senical dressing  is  removed  the  cavity  should  be  flooded 
with  dialyzed  iron  and  the  pulp  chamber  opened  up.  Then 
without  any  attempt  to  remove  an)^hing-  seal  tannic  acid  in 
some  form  in  the  cavity  for  the  purpose  of  constringing  and 
toughening  the  tissue.  When  it  is  essential  to  avoid  dis- 
coloration of  the  tooth  the  tannic  acid  should  not  be  used 
and  all  traces  of  the  iron  should  be  removed  with  alcohol. — 
J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

Flexible  Nerve-canal  Drills. — Mandolin  wire  is  cut  in 
suitable  lengths,  drawn  taut,  and  flattened  to  about  one-half 
its  original  diameter.  With  one  end  held  in  a  pin-vice,  it  is 
then  twisted  its  entire  length,  a  section  ^  or  ^  of  an  inch 
cut  off  and  soldered  into  an  engine-bit,  having  a  socket 
drilled  to  receive  it;  it  is  then  to  be  sharpened.  They  are 
exceedingly  flexible,  following  an  opening  made  with  a  Don- 
aldson broach. — A,  E.  Mattison,  Dental  Review. 

Treatment  of  a  Root  Through  a  Jacket  Crown. — The 
jacket  crown  being  hollow,  and  having  a  metal  back,  pro- 
vides a  ready  means  of  access  to  the  pulp-canal;  this  is  a 
point  in  its  favor,  particularly  to  those  who  claim  that  a 
crown  capped  will  surely  give  trouble  unless  the  pulp  be 
devitalized.  Using  a  crown  of  this  description,  therefore, 
will  demonstrate  pulp- vitality  and,  when  treatment  is  neces- 
sary, lessen  its  difficulties. — W.  A.  Capon,  Dental  Brief. 

Putrescent  Pulp-canals. — In  the  treatment  of  abscesses 
and  root-canals  generally  the  following  mixture  is  most 
serviceable.  Take  oil  of  cloves  and  carbolic  acid  crystals 
equal  parts,  melting  the  carbolic  acid  crystals  and  adding 
the  oil  of  cloves.  This  mixture  is  easily  prepared  and  pos- 
sesses in  a  marked  degree  the  desirable  qualities  of  the 
essntial  oil-carbolic  acid  mixture.  If  used  with  reasonable 
care  it  will  not  discolor  the  teeth. — F.  W.  Stephen  in 
Dental  Brief. 


246  Practical  Dentistry. 

Putrescent  Root-canals. — As  a  disinfectant  of  putres- 
cent root-canals  bromo-chloron  is  far  superior  to  anything 
now  in  use.  It  leaves  not  a  trace  of  odor.  Invariably  the 
canal  is  so  clean  and  sweet  that  it  may  be  filled  at  the  second 
sitting. — D.  W.  Barker,  Items  of  Interest. 

Compressed  Air  in  Root  Preparation. — When  using  the 
reamer  or  facer  in  preparing  roots  for  crowns  a  jet  of 
compressed  air  not  only  keeps  the  heat  down  but  blows 
away  mucus  or  blood,  the  root  remaining  clear  and  distinct 
while  being  prepared;  also  doing  away  with  pain,  a  thing 
greatly  to  be  desired. — W.  H.  Heckard,  Indiana  Dental 
Journal. 

Putrescent  Root-canals. — The  dentinal  tubules  of  an  in- 
fected tooth  are  saturated  with  putrescent  protoplasm,  which 
no  instrumentation  can  reach;  the  only  way  of  thoroughly 
sterilizing  the  tubules  and  rendering  the  root  absolutely  safe 
to  fill  is  to  so  act  on  the  contents  that  nothing  is  left.  The 
agent  used  is  sodium  dioxid ;  it  not  merely  destroys  the  life 
of  bacteria  and  renders  pus  and  debris  more  or  less  aseptic, 
but  it  simply  removes  everything  in  the  canal,  whether 
proteid  or  fatty. — Bernard  Bennette,  Dental  Record. 

The  Essentials  to  Success  in  Root  Treatment. — i.  The 
rubber-dam.  2.  Free,  direct  access.  3.  Thorough  cleans- 
ing, mechanically  and  antiseptically.  4.  Getting  the  anti- 
septic through  the  root.  5.  Perfectly  filling  the  root, 
immediately  upon  getting  an  aseptic  condition,  with  an  anti- 
septic root  filling.  6.  Sufficient  confidence  in  the  method 
used  to  insure  thorough  work  and  the  minutest  attention 
to  details. — F.  Milton  Smith,  International  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

Pulp  Mummification. — Never  mummify  a  pulp  in  other 
condition  than  freshly  exposed.  Some  try  to  mummify 
pulps  that  are  diseased,  pulps  with  pulp  stones,  teeth  that 
are  loose  in  the  socket ;  that  is  where  the  failures  come  in. 
The  pulp  must  be  in  comparatively  a  healthy  condition. — 
A.  M,  Waas,  Items  of  Interest. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  247 

Death  of  the  Pulp. — That  the  drilling  of  retaining 
pits  into  the  body  of  the  dentin  and  the  presence  of  a 
filling  that  possesses,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  the  prop- 
erty of  thermal  conductivity  can  be  responsible  for  irri- 
tation sufficient  to  destroy  the  vitality  of  the  pulp,  proves 
conclusively  the  intimate  connection  between  that  tissue  and 
the  pulp  organ.  It  is  in  view  of  this  fact  that  in  treating 
caries,  however  superficial  the  decay  may  be,  methods  should 
be  adopted  that  will  reduce  to  a  minimum  the  chances  of 
subsequent  trouble. — J.  C.  Salvas,  Dental  Brief. 

Sterilizing  Root-canals. — In  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes 
the  electrolytic  action  of  a  constant  galvanic  current  of 
from  one  to  two  milliamperes  suffices  for  sterilizing  com- 
pletely root-canals  inaccessible  to  instrumentation.  In- 
jecting a  seventy-five  per  cent,  aqueous  solution  of  salt, 
thoroughly  saturating  the  canal  contents,  gives  a  good 
conductor.  If  the  anode,  or  positive  pole,  is  made  of 
platinum  it  will  deposit  chlorin,  oxygen,  and  hydrochloric 
acid,  these  irons  promising  a  decided  antibacterial  efifect. — 
Kurt  Hoffendahl,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Digestion,  for  Teeth  Having  Small  and  Tortuous 
Roots. — One-half  to  one  grain  of  papain  is  made  into  a 
paste  with  glycerol,  and  one  drop  of  i  to  300  hydrochloric 
acid  added.  After  removal  of  bulbous  portion  of  pulp  put 
paste  into  pulp-chamber  and  seal  in  with  oxysulphate  or 
oxyphosphate  of  zinc,  or  gutta-percha,  for  one  week  or  two 
if  necessary.  With  rubber-dam  in  place,  open  the  cavity,  and 
the  pulp  will  be  found  liquefied  or  digested  into  something 
like  thin  glue,  easily  removed.  Fill  at  once. — A.  W.  Har- 
lan, Dental  Review. 

Mummifying  Paste. — Most  satisfactory  results  can  be 
had  from  the  following :  Calomel  and  zinc  oxid  equal  parts 
and  sufficient  formaldehyd  to  make  a  paste.  The  for- 
maldehyd  readily  evaporates,  so  that  it  will  be  necessary 
to  occasionally  add  more  of  it  to  the  mixture. — Dental 
World. 


248  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulp  Protection. — Dip  a  sheet  of  asbestos  foil  into  san- 
darac  or  balsam  varnish;  when  dry,  dip  again,  repeating 
until  well  glazed.  From  this  punch  small  disks  of  different 
sizes.  When  about  to  use,  dip  again  in  varnish,  and  place 
in  position  over  exposed  pulp,  covering  with  cement  (first 
drying  pulp  and  applying  carbolic  acid). — I.  D.  Whitman, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Chromic  Acid  in  Pulp  Mummification:  Caution. — The 
use  of  chromic  acid  in  conjunction  with  sulphuric  acid  has 
been  recommended  for  pulp  mummification.  It  should  be 
remembered  that  chromic  acid  is  an  explosive  agent ;  when 
brought  in  contact  with  alcohol,  ether,  glycerin,  etc.,  de- 
composition takes  place,  sometimes  with  dangerous  vio- 
lence.— H.  Printz,  Dental  Digest. 

A  Mummifying  Paste. — 

I^.     Dried  alum, 
Thymol, 

Glycerol     aa  oj 

Zinc  oxid,  q.  s.  to  make  a  stiff  paste. 
Misce. 
Sig. — Apply  to  pulp-chamber  and  cover  with  gutta-percha. 

— H.  R.  SouLEN,  Dental  Brief. 

Pulp  Digestion. — If  a  few  drops  of  caroid  solvent  are 
introduced  into  the  pulp-chamber  and  sealed  in  for  two  or 
three  days  with  temporary  stopping,  a  pulp  otherwise  diffi- 
cult of  access  can  be  removed  by  irrigation  with  an  alkaline 
solution. — L.  Greenbaum,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Capping. — In  order  to  encourage  the  throwing 
out  of  secondary  dentin  as  a  protective  to  the  pulp,  the 
greatest  care  must  be  used  to  preserve  the  superficial  layer 
covering  the  pulp,  from  which  the  secondary  dentin  is 
formed,  much  in  the  same  way  as  a  surgeon,  when  requir- 
ing new  bone  to  be  formed,  preserves  the  periosteum  intact. 
— F.  Coleman,  The  Dental  Record. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  249 

Pulp-capping. — Iodoform  powder,  made  in  a  paste  with 
creosote,  and  flowed  gently  over  the  exposure,  and  protected 
by  cement  appUed  over  it,  comes  as  near  perfection  as  a 
pulp-capping  as  anything  in  my  experience  or  observation. — 
D.  D.  Atkinson,  Am.  Weekly  Dentist. 

Mummifying  Paste. — This  is  not  intended  for  use  in 
putrid  conditions  in  dead  teeth.  It  only  takes  care  of  the 
ends  of  pulps  that  we  cannot  get  at  otherwise.  It  takes 
care  of  healthy  pulp  tissue  that  you  cannot  extract,  and  you 
afterwards  fill  the  canals.  The  pulp  chamber  must  be  clean 
and  dry.  Use  as  much  care  there  as  though  you  were  try- 
ing to  fill  the  canals  with  gold. — Dr.  Rippier,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Papain  for  Pulp  Digestion  or  Liquefaction. — The  use 

of  a  paste  composed  of  papain  and  glycerol,  with  one  drop 
of  hydrochloric  acid,  does  away  with  the  uncertainty  of 
pulp  mummification.  Papain  is  not  poisonous,  and  putre- 
faction will  not  take  place  in  the  presence  of  this  paste. 
It  will  act  even  if  creosote  or  carbolic  acid,  arsenic  or  zinc 
chlorid  has  been  in  contact  with  the  pulp. — A.  W.  Harlan, 
Dental  Review. 

Pulp-capping. — In  all  cavities  deep  enough  to  require 
protection  mix  oxid  of  zinc  to  a  creamy  paste  with  car- 
bolized  resin ;  apply  over  the  exposure,  if  there  be  one,  or 
the  vital  spot.  Add  a  thin  covering  of  soft  cement  over  the 
capping  and  apply  the  necessary  filling. — W.  R.  Hughes, 
Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Pulp  Protection. — Coat  the  cavity  walls  with  thin  var- 
nish and  partially  fill  with  cement,  completing  with  porce- 
lain, gold  or  amalgam,  sufficiently  to  protect  the  under- 
lying cement.  The  varnish  protects  the  dentinal  fibrillae 
from  the  irritating  effects  of  the  cement,  the  cement  pro- 
tects the  pulp  from  thermal  shock,  the  gold  or  amalgam 
protects  the  cement  from  disintegration. — F.  G.  Worth ly. 
Western  Dental  Journal. 
17 


2^0  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulp  Protection. — With  a  ball  burnisher  make  a  con- 
cavity in  the  under  surface  of  a  wafer  of  gutta-percha ;  coat 
it  on  the  under  surface  with  a  good  cavity  varnish.  For  use 
in  case  of  vital  pulp  needing  more  protection  than  cement 
alone  would  afford. — Ira  J.  Coe,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Pulp  Mummification. — Pulps  being  in  warm  moist 
mouths,  there  is  no  remedy  known  to  chemistry  that  will, 
under  such  circumstances,  make  a  mummy  that  will  remain 
a  mummy.  Put  a  mummy  under  the  Pyramids  of  Egypt, 
and  in  that  dry  atmosphere  it  will  remain  a  mummy,  but 
the  pulp  of  a  tooth  in  the  mouth  does  not  act  that  way. — Dr. 
BoGUE,  Itetns  of  Interest. 

Formalin  in  Pulp  Conservation. — Dr.  Kirchoff  employs 
formalin  when  amputating  pulps  in  bicuspids  and  molars. 
When  the  coronal  end  of  the  pulp  is  exposed,  he  applies  to 
it  a  mixture  of  formalin  and  zinc  oxid ;  then  covers  this 
with  cement  and  builds  over  all  the  permanent  filling. 
— B.  J.  CiGRAND,  in  Dental  Digest. 

Paste  for  Pulp  Mummification. — 

5.    Paraformaldehyd 

Thymol    aa  3  i 

Zinc    oxid     3ii 

Glycerin  to  make  stiflf  paste. 

— H.  Printz,  Dental  Digest. 

Capping  Pulps:  Scheuer's  Paste. — Never  destroy  the 
pulp  if  it  can  be  avoided,  but  usually  remove  all  the 
leathery  substance.  Scheuer's  paste  is  good.  It  is  very 
sticky  and  hard  to  manipulate.  Place  a  bit  of  varnish  in 
the  cavity  near  the  pulp,  then  moisten  a  fine  instrument  with 
glycerin,  pass  a  small  quantity  of  the  paste  up  against  the 
varnish,  and  drag  the  paste  over  the  pulp  carefully.  When 
a  good  coating  is  secured  cement  can  be  put  on  at  once. — 
F.  Messerschmidt,  Dental  Digest. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  251 

Pulp  Capping. — When  a  pulp  of  a  young  tooth  has 
been  accidentally  exposed,  being  normal  and  healthy, 
chances  are  usually  good  for  the  completion  of  the  apical 
portion  of  the  root.  Cap  with  oxyphosphate  of  zinc,  dilut- 
ing the  fluid  with  oil  of  cloves  or  any  mild  antiseptic  fluid 
to  reduce  the  irritating  effect  of  the  phosphoric  acid  solu- 
tion. Mix  to  creamy  consistency  and  apply  in  such  manner 
as  to  cause  no  pressure. — A.  T.  Starr,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Formagen  Cement. — To  avoid  pulp  devitalization  in 
cases  where  caries  encroaches  very  near  the  pulp,  or  in  case 
of  accidental  pulp  exposure,  insert  a  small  amount  of  for- 
magen cement,  then  a  sufficient  quantity  of  "osteo"  to  allow 
of  cutting  retention  grooves  or  undercuts,  and  finish  with 
amalgam,  gold,  or  porcelain.  While  a  few  pulps  are  prone 
to  necrosis,  the  majority  will  survive  under  this  treatment, 
— Arthur  L.  Bostick,  Dental  Record. 

Pulp  Capping. — It  should  adapt  itself  perfectly  to  the 
pulp  and  other  dental  tissues  without  compressing  the 
pulp.  Incidentally,  the  property  of  adhering  firmly  to 
dental  structure  is  a  desirable  one.  It  should  be  a  non- 
conductor of  heat  and  should  be  non-irritating.  It  should 
have  anaesthetic  and  germicidal  properties.  It  should  in 
itself  be  a  bridging  material.  A  thin  layer  of  the  material 
should  be  rigid.  The  capping  should  economize  space.  It 
should  set  quickly.  Its  method  of  application  should  fit  it 
for  use  in  any  portion  of  the  mouth. — A.  L.  Bower,  Dental 
Brief. 

Pulp  Capping. — Boracic  acid,  one  part,  and  zinc  oxid, 
two  parts;  mix  with  creosote.  This  makes  a  soft,  velvety 
paste,  which  should  be  spread  over  the  exposure  very  deli- 
cately, avoiding  the  slightest  pressure.  The  boracic  acid  is 
a  refrigerant,  permanent  antiseptic,  reducing  inflammation; 
the  creosote  is  a  diffusible  antiseptic  and  destroyer  of 
germs ;  the  zinc  oxid  is  bland  and  non-conductive  of  thermal 
stimuli. — C.  Stanley  Smith,  Dental  Summary. 


252  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulp  Mummification. — If  asked  to  name  the  best  drugs 
for  mummifying  pulp  tissue,  whether  fresh  and  vital  or 
necrotic  and  septic,  mention  silver  nitrate  first  of  all,  placing 
some  cotton  well  charged  with  powdered  silver  nitrate 
in  the  canals,  covering-  it  over  with  cement  of  gutta-percha 
until  it  should  dissolve  and  permeate  the  entire  substance 
of  the  tooth. — L.  G.  Noel,  Dental  Headlight. 

Conservative  Pulp  Treatment. — lodoformagen  cement 
of  a  rather  thin  creamy  consistency,  carried  to  place  in  a  de- 
pressed cavity-cap  disk,  covering  the  exposed  pulp  snugly 
but  without  pressure,  will  give  astonishing  results.  Mix 
on  a  heavy  glass  plate  raised  to  the  temperature  of  the 
blood,  and  warm  the  spatula.  This  in  order  to  overcome 
the  quick-setting  tendency  of  the  cement. — Otto  Bechel, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Pulp  Digestion. — 

3.     Papain  gr.  i 

Glycerin 

Hydrochloric  acid,   1-300  solution    .      aa  gtt.  i 

Make  a  paste,  apply  to  dead  pulp,  and  seal  into  the 
cavity  for  two  weeks,  at  the  end  of  which  time  the  pulp  will 
be  digested.  First  destroy  the  pulp  with  arsenic  left  in  the 
tooth  for  two  or  three  days.  Remove  the  arsenic,  cut  away 
the  bulbous  portion  of  the  pulp,  and  introduce  the  paste  as 
above.  The  pulp  is  reduced  to  a  jelly-like  mass  resembling 
glue,  and  is  easily  removed. — A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Pulp  Capping. — Carbonized  cotton,  like  all  carbon,  is 
a  poor  conductor  of  heat  and  electricity,  a  thing  to  be  con- 
sidered in  pulp  capping.  It  can  be  thoroughly  sterilized  and 
used  in  all  cavities  where  the  walls  are  not  so  thin  as  to 
allow  the  color  to  appear  through.  Dip  into  the  medicament, 
place  carefully  over  the  pulp  and  seal  with  temporary  stop- 
ping— preferably  formalin  cement,  which  hardens  rapidly, 
is  a  powerful  antiseptic,  and  can  be  removed  if  necessary. — 
A.  Jessel,  Dental  Review.'. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  253 

Stanno-Pcrcha. — Scheuer's  stanno-percha  is  a  labor  and 
time-saving  material  of  great  value.  As  a  pulp-capping 
material  it  is  without  difficulty  placed  in  correct  position. 
Amalgam  readily  unites  with  the  tin  present,  and  either 
sponge  gold  or  gold  foil  may  be  readily  worked  into  the 
slightly  softened  layer.  As  a  temporary  filling,  or  for  re- 
taining arsenical  dressings  it  is  of  great  value  and  to  be 
preferred  over  all  other  materials. — Dental  Messenger  (St. 
Petersburg). 

For  Relief  of  Reflex  Pains  from  Diseased  Pulp. — 

R.    Acetanelid    grs.  viii. 

Phenacetin   grs.  xv. 

Caffein  citrate  grs.  xv. 

Misce  et  ft.  pulv.  No.  viii. 

Sig. — One  to  be  taken  every  two  hours. 

— Leo  Greenbaum,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Barbed  Broach  from  Canal. — In  a  difficult 
case  saturate  a  pledget  of  cotton  with  twenty-five  per  cent, 
pyrozone  and  seal  in  the  cavity  with  gutta-percha  or  san- 
darac  for  three  or  four  days,  when  the  pyrozone  will  have 
so  completely  rusted  it  that  its  removal  will  be  easy. — 
Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Association. 

Putrescent  Pulps. — For  putrescent  pulps  which  are  still 
quite  sensitive  upon  touch  of  broach,  a  mixture  of  tannic  acid 
with  glycerin  will  in  a  few  days  so  toughen  and  tan  the  pulp 
that  it  may  be  removed  entirely,  and  with  little  or  no  pain. — 
A.  F.  Strange,  American  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Sterilization. — Oxidize  contents  of  canal  by 
inserting  a  small  crystal  of  permanganate  of  potash ;  cleanse 
thoroughly,  following  with  aristol  and  oleum  gaultheria.  If 
pus  is  present,  precede  the  aristol  with  zinc  chlorid,  5  to  10 
grains  in  i  dram  water,  or  formalin,  5  per  cent,  solution. — 
Louis  Jack,  Ohio  Dental  Jounal. 


254  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Tests  of  Success  in  Root-treatment. — i.  The  Physi- 
cal test:  the  absence  of  pain  under  temporary  stopping. 
2.  The  Scientific  test:  a  culture  made  from  the  cotton 
dressing;  also  from  a  fresh  specimen  taken  after  thorough 
disinfection  when  we  think  the  root  is  ready  to  fill. — T.  W. 
Onderdonk,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Hemorrhage  after  Pulp  Extirpation. — Wrap  a  few 
fibres  of  cotton  on  a  broach,  dip  in  trichloracetic  acid  and 
insert  to  bottom  of  canal.  Hold  it  there  a  few  seconds  and 
the  hemorrhage  will  cease.  This  will  also  cauterize  the 
ends  of  the  severed  nerve  fibres. — A.  Enbank,  Dental  Head- 
light. 

Hemorrhage  After  Pulp  Eemoval. — Pump  ten  or  fifteen 
per  cent,  trichloracetic  acid  towards  the  apex  of  the  canal 
with  cotton  on  a  broach.  If  this  fails,  have  the  cotton  satu- 
rated with  the  acid  in  the  canal,  and  exert  pressure  with  un- 
vulcanized  rubber  and  a  large-ended  instrument.  This  will 
rarely  fail. — Harold  Clark,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Sensitiveness  at  the  End  of  Root-canals. — Pump  the 
canal  full  of  eucalyptol  and  proceed  cautiously  to  the  end. 
This  is  effective  in  cases  of  sensitiveness  following  extir- 
pation under  pressure  ansesthesia,  but  it  is  more  efifective 
in  cleansing  roots  after  arsenical  applications. — R.  E. 
Sparks,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Putrescent  Pulp. — On  opening  up  a  pulp-chamber  in 
which  there  is  a  putrescent  pulp  giving  out  a  most  offensive 
odor,  dip  your  broach  in  oil  of  turpentine  and  insert  in  canal ; 
the  odor  will  change  almost  instantly,  most  agreeably  to 
both  yourself  and  patient. — J.  E.  McDonald,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

To  Control  Hemorrhage  at  Apex  of  Root  after  Removal 
of  Pulp. — Wet  a  needle  of  bibulous  paper  in  bichlorid  of 
mercury  and  insert  in  canal.  Will  control  hemorrhage  every 
time. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 


Treatment  of  Pulp  and  Pulp  Canal.  255 

Introducing  Cement  Into  a  Pulp-canal. — To  prevent  the 
cement  from  drawing  away  with  the  instrument  moisten  a 
small  square  of  blotting  paper  with  aromatic  sulphuric  acid 
and  pass  the  face  of  the  instrument  over  that,  slightly  moist- 
ening it.  The  cement  may  be  forced  up  with  the  instru- 
ment and  will  not  be  drawn  away. — J.  W.  Beach,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Pulp  Devitalization  in  Posterior  Teeth.. — To  minute 
particle  of  arsenic  crystals  add  about  double  the  quantity 
of  alum  and  a  drop  of  campho-phenique.  Take  up  the 
mass  on  a  small  pledget  of  devitalizing  fiber,  which,  as  it 
contains  morphin,  will  assist  in  keeping  the  tooth  quiet. 
Iodoform  will  prevent  subsequent  soreness. — F.  C.  Payne, 
Pa.  Med.  Den.  Gazette. 

Pulpless  Teeth. — By  the  use  of  peroxid  of  sodium  (in- 
stead of  the  bicarbonate)  after  treating  root-canals  with 
sulphuric  acid,  mephitic  gases  are  broken  up,  microorgan- 
isms discharged,  organic  acid  coloring  matter  destroyed,  and 
the  tooth  bleached  and  left  in  as  perfect  a  condition  as  it  is 
possible  to  place  it. — S.  S.  McFarlan^  Dental  Review. 

Soreness  After  Removal  of  Pulp. — To  prevent  soreness 
after  removal  of  pulp  under  pressure  anaesthesia,  wait  for 
hemorrhage  to  subside  and  place  in  the  canal  a  dressing  of 
cotton  saturated  with  extract  of  witch-hazel,  full  strength, 
letting  it  remain  until  the  next  sitting,  when  the  root  canal 
can  be  filled. — G.  W.  Pringle,  Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Remove  Gutta-percha  Points  from  Root-canals. — 

Roughen  the  point  of  an  Evans  root-canal  dryer,  heat  the 
bulb,  and  press  the  point  slowly  into  the  canal.  Cool  the 
bulb  with  a  wet  sponge,  and  on  removing  the  point  the 
gutta-percha  will  come  with  it. — Indiana  Dental  Journal. 

To  Expedite  the  Teatment  of  Putrescent  Root-canals. — 

As  a  source  of  gratifying  results,  use  a  dressing  composed 
of  equal  parts  of  alcohol,  formalin  and  beechwood  creosote. 
— Charles  E.  Slagle,  Brief. 


256  Practical  Dentistry. 

Hemorrhag-e  After  Removal  of  Live  Pulp. — Hemorrhage 
is  sometimes  copious,  but  I  have  found  tliat  witch-hazel, 
freely  used,  would  check  the  flow  in  a  very  short  time. — A. 
H.  Peck,  Dental  Digest. 

Hemorrhage  After  Pulp  Extirpation. — Wind  cotton  on 
a  broach,  dip  in  25  per  cent,  pyrozone  and  put  up  the 
canal,  and  the  bleeding  will  stop  instantly.  The  canal  can 
be  dried  and  filled  at  once. — L.  West,  Items  of  Interest. 

Soreness  at  Apex  of  Root. — A  solution  of  menthol  in 
chloroform,  applied  in  root  canal,  will  remedy  the  soreness 
at  apex  after  pulp  has  been  devitalized  by  arsenic  and  re- 
moved.— W.  C.  Smith,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

A  Pus  Destroyer. — As  a  pus  destroyer  no  drug  will  take 
the  place  of  ichthyol. — Lancet  Critic. 


ROOT   CANAL    TREATMENT    IN    DECIDUOUS 
TEETH 

Taper  a  suitable  sized  gold  wire  or  broach  and  sharpen 
the  point.  Force  cautiously  through  the  end  of  the  canal, 
just  enough  to  prick  a  little,  of  which  the  patient  will  give 
warning.  Mark  the  exact  length  of  the  canal  and  withdraw. 
File  off  the  tiny  sharpened  point ;  insert  again  and  force  to 
the  end  of  the  root,  making  sure  there  is  no  pain.  Remove 
again  and  file  almost  through  the  wire,  one-sixteenth  of  an 
inch  from  the  end.  Force  home  in  the  canal  again  and  twist 
off  the  wire,  leaving  in  position  the  filcd-ofif  end,  thus  se- 
curely sealing  the  apex  with  a  royal  metal.  Fill  the  re- 
mainder of  the  canal  as  preferred. — J.  H.  Daly,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 


Root-canal  Treatment,  Deciduous  Teeth.  257 

In  molar  roots  use  copper  wire  with  chloro-percha.  The 
therapeutic  action  of  the  sulphate  of  copper,  the  hermetic 
sealing  of  the  gutta-percha,  combined  with  the  preserving 
qualities  of  chloroform,  make  this  a  very  desirable  nerve 
canal  filling. — W.  J.  Morrison,  Dental  Headlight. 

Cut  soft  gold  foil  in  very  thin  strips,  fold  it  once  and 
cut  into  very  small  pieces  not  larger  than  half  a  pin's  head. 
For  a  root-canal  plugger  take  a  Donaldson  nerve  extractor, 
snip  off  the  hook  and  flatten  the  end.  Measure  the  depth 
of  the  canal  and  mark  it  on  the  instrument  with  a  bit  of  rub- 
ber-dam slipped  on  it.  With  this  instrument  pick  up  one  of 
the  very  small  pieces  of  gold  and  carry  it  steadily  to  the 
apex  and  pack  with  the  plugger  described.  The  rubber- 
dam  index  will  tell  you  when  you  have  got  to  the  apex. 
When  you  know  the  apex  is  well  filled  any  other  material 
will  answer  for  the  rest  of  the  canal. — N.  T.  Shields,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Form  a  cone-shaped  piece  of  lead  or  fine-grained  wood 
and  saturate  in  some  antiseptic  fluid.  Coat  the  surface  with 
oxyphosphate  and  press  firmly  home.  By  this  method  the 
space  is  completely  obliterated  and  the  ends  of  the  tubuli 
closed. — J.  Taft,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Powdered  resin,  dissolved  in  alcohol,  makes  an  anti- 
septic, insoluble  root-canal  filling. — D.  V.  Beacock,  in  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Treatment  of  Abscessed  Deciduous  Teeth. — Cleanse 
canals  as  thoroughly  as  possible.  Fill  pulp-chambers  with 
cotton  saturated  with  oil  of  cloves  and  by  means  of  unvul- 
canized  rubber  exert  pressure  on  cotton  until  oil  of  cloves  is 
forced  through  sinus.  Then  flood  cavity  with  solution 
gutta-percha  in  eucalyptus  and  force  temporary  stopping 
into  each  canal  until  the  eucalyptus  appears  at  fistulous  open- 
ing.— C.  N.  Johnson. 


258  Practical  Dentistry. 

Removal  of  Living  Sensitive  Pulps  in  the  Teeth  of 
Children. — Wash  the  cavity  thoroughly  with  warm  water, 
remove  food  debris  and  as  much  decay  as  may  be  removed 
painlessly.  Place  two  or  three  drops  of  adrenalin  on  the 
mixing-slab  and  macerate  in  it  fresh  crystals  of  cocain ; 
saturate  a  small  pellet  of  cotton  and  place  in  cavity ;  cover 
with  unvulcanized  rubber  and  produce  pressure  with  tip  of 
finger,  using  napkin  to  avoid  escape  of  cocain  into  the 
mouth.  Exert  pressure  for  exactly  three  minutes.  The 
gum  septum  will  then  be  insensitive  and  all  carious  matter 
can  be  removed  and  the  pulp  fully  uncovered. — Items  of 
Interest. 

Root-canal  Filling. — Let  stand  two  or  three  days  before 
using.  Pump  into  root-canal  and  then  force  in  gutta-percha 
points. — M.  D.  GoBLE,  International  Dental  Jonrnal. 

IJ .     Chloroform    3ss 

Gutta-percha, 

Resin    aa  3j 

Exposed  Pulp  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — The  pain  incident 
to  exposure  of  the  pulp  can  usually  be  controlled  by  syring- 
ing the  cavity  with  tepid  water ;  follow  by  the  application 
of  oil  of  cloves  slightly  warm  on  a  pledget  of  cotton.  To 
protect  the  pulp  from  further  irritation,  cap  the  pulp  with 
a  paste  made  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  oil  of  cloves  and  fill  the 
cavity  with  cement.  The  pulp  will  usually  die,  but  in  the 
meantime  it  will  have  been  kept  comfortable,  and  often 
until  the  tooth  is  shed. — Henry  L.  Banzhaf,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Filling  Root-canals  of  Deciduous  Teeth. — When  the 
root  canals  of  deciduous  teeth  have  been  filled  absorption 
ceases.  The  teeth  should  therefore  be  kept  non-occluded  by 
the  use  of  the  carborundum  wheel  from  time  to  time,  as 
suggested  by  Dr.  J.  Y.  Crawford.  They  will  then  be  grad- 
ually extruded  from  the  socket;  otherwise  abnormal  erup- 
tion, or  impaction,  of  the  permanent  teeth  may  result. — W. 
J.  Morrison,  Dental  Headlight. 


Root-canal  Treatment,  Deciduous  Teeth.  259 

Eoot-canal  Filling:  Deciduous  Teeth. — A  material  that 
is  easily  inserted  and  easily  removed  is  found  in  a  mixture 
of  salol  and  paraffin.  If  kept  in  a  test-tube  it  becomes 
liquid  on  being  dipped  in  hot  water,  and  solidifies  at  once 
when  transferred  to  the  canal  on  a  hot  spatula,  working  it 
down  with  a  smooth  broach;  or  strands  of  cotton  or  floss 
silk  may  be  introduced  into  the  liquid  and  transferred  to 
the  canal,  packed  down  with  a  warm  instrument. — G.  S. 
Marten,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

The  foramen,  in  tortuous  root-canals,  is  more  readily 
reached  with  gutta-percha  reduced  to  a  cream  with  eucalyp- 
tus oil  than  with  chloro-percha.  In  case  of  large  foramen, 
the  eucalyptus  is  soothing  to  the  tissues  beyond  the  fora- 
men, rather  than  irritating,  as  is  the  case  with  chloroform. 
— H.  C.  West,  Dental  Review. 

Gutta-percha  will  cling  more  closely  if  the  canal  is 
washed  with  ammonia  water  one-half  per  cent  dilution. — A. 
W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

After  the  cavities  are  prepared,  I  use  chloroform,  then 
liquid  gutta-percha,  then  gutta-percha  points,  then  hot  air 
and  pack  solidly. — R.  R.  Andrews,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Roll  red  gutta-percha  into  a  long,  tapering  point. 
Working  some  chloroform  into  the  canal,  take  the  cone  in 
a  pair  of  delicate  forceps,  hold  it  a  moment  or  so  in  chloro- 
form so  that  the  outside  is  softened  or  partially  dissolved, 
then  press  the  cone  cold  into  the  canal.  The  cone,  while  soft 
and  sticky  on  the  outside,  is,  as  a  whole,  stifY,  elastic  and 
yielding,  and  quite  obliterates  the  space. — L.  D.  Shepard, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

With  a  syringe  inject  a  drop  or  two  of  a  saturated  solu- 
tion of  hydro-napthol  in  chloroform.  Follow  with  gutta- 
percha cones  till  the  canal  is  filled.  Simple,  clean,  antiseptic, 
effective. — S.  Freeman,  International  Dental  Journal. 


26o  Practical  Dentistry. 

In  case  of  perforation,  if  the  canal  is  accessible,  whittle 
a  piece  of  wood  to  the  length  and  size  of  canal — trying  it  in 
to  ascertain  that  it  does  fit;  then  make  the  point  a  little 
smaller  and  wrap  around  it  a  piece  of  very  thin,  well  an- 
nealed platinum  foil.  Dry  the  canal  and  coat  the  platinum 
with  thin  varnish.  Then  push  the  platinized  wood  point  to 
the  end  of  the  canal  and  gently  remove  the  wooden  point, 
leaving  the  platinum  lining  in  the  canal.  Blow  in  hot  air  to 
hasten  the  hardening  of  the  varnish,  and  proceed  to  fill. — 
Editor  American  Dental  Weekly. 

With  Donaldson  nerve  broach  work  in  \\\)  to  apex  as 
much  creamy  oxyphosphate  as  possible.  Then  drive  in  a 
splinter  of  orange  or  cedar  wood  trimmed  smaller  than  the 
canal,  and  leave  it  there. — Dr.  Allen,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Cedar  wood  is  peculiarly  well  adapted  for  filling  root- 
canals,  as  it  is  very  soft  laterally  and  adapts  itself  readily 
to  any  irregularity  in  the  canal,  while  it  is  very  hard  when 
dried. — Dr.  Seabury,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Trim  a  Japanese  wooden  toothpick,  dip  with  chloro- 
percha  and  use  as  a  piston  to  force  the  chloro-percha  into 
the  root-canal,  leaving  the  stick  in  the  canal,  filling  it  posi- 
tively and  most  perfectly.  In  case  of  subsequent  trouble  it 
is  readily  removed  with  pliers. — Geo.  A.  McMullen,  Dental 
Review. 

With  hypodermic  syringe  fill  root-canal  with  chloroform 
and  immediately  insert  gutta-percha  points. — R.  T.  Oliver, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

If  the  canals  and  the  opening  at  the  apex  are  very  large, 
wrap  barbed  gold  wire  with  red  gutta-percha,  putting  it  in 
and  out  several  times,  getting  an  impression  of  the  canal  by 
which  to  gauge  the  proper  quantity  of  gutta-percha  required 
to  fill  it  completely. — S.  G.  Perry,  International  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 


Root-canal  Treatment,  Deciduous  Teeth.  261 

Trim  a  small,  fine  needle  of  orange  or  some  other  wood, 
made  sterile  by  proper  treatment.  Roll  a  small  quantity  of 
Abbey's  soft  gold  foil  around  the  tiny  end  and  then  tap  it 
into  the  apical  third  of  the  canal,  after  which  the  remaining 
portion  can  be  filled  with  any  of  the  reputable  root  fillings 
desired  except  tea,  lead  or  amalgam.  The  latter  are  factors 
in  the  discoloration  of  pulpless  teeth,  when  placed  in  the 
roots. — J.  Y.  Crawford,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Chloro-percha  and  asbestos  form  an  indestructible  root- 
canal  filling  which  can  be  packed  firmly,  and  which  can  be 
introduced  into  canals  too  fine  to  admit  a  gutta-percha  cone. 
— Carl  E.  Klotz,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Cleanse  the  canals  thoroughly,  both  mechanically  and 
chemically,  with  an  antiseptic  oil,  absorbing  surplus  with 
antiseptic  cotton;  follow  with  alcohol,  hot  air,  and  finally  a 
hot  root-canal  drier.  Select  a  gutta-percha  cone,  roll  to  fit 
the  canal;  lubricate  canal  walls  with  hot  eucalyptus,  pump 
in  chloro-percha,  and  introduce  the  cone,  using  care  to  ex- 
clude the  air. — Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Review. 

Fill  the  canals  with  powdered  iodoform  mixed  with 
campho-phenique. — W.  E.  Grant,  Dental  Digest. 

Render  aseptic  with  peroxid,  and  oil  of  cloves  and  car- 
bolic acid,  half  and  half.  Fill  canals  with  shreds  of  cotton 
impregnated  with  aristol  dissolved  in  chloroform. — B.  J.  De 
Vries,  Dental  Register. 

Use  a  paste  made  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  aristol  equal  parts, 
with  enough  oil  of  cassia  and  vaseline  to  make  a  soft  putty- 
like paste.  Work  into  canals  with  a  hot  instrument  wrapped 
with  a  wisp  of  cotton. — Chas.  Keyes,  International  Denial 
Journal. 

Wind  gold  foil  on  a  fine  broach;  then  pull  the  foil  one- 
quarter  inch  beyond  end  of  broach,  and  roll  in  fingers  to 
a  fine  point  with  which  canal  can  be  filled. — Dr  Hill,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 


262  Practical  Dentistry. 

I  obtain  very  satisfactory  results  by  packing  the  canal 
as  tightly  as  possible  with  cotton  and  iodoform  paste. — 
S.  H.  Guilford,  International  Dental  Journal. 

When  the  canals  are  of  good  size,  and  can  be  made 
easily  accessible,  I  have  found  no  substance  so  good  for 
filling  the  apical  portion  as  small  cones  of  gold  foil  mal- 
leted  into  place,  the  remainder  being  filed  with  gutta-percha 
or  oxychlorid  of  zinc. — Louis  Jack,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Shape  rods  of  lead,  zinc  or  tin  to  fit,  and  imbed  in  canal 
in  a  paste  of  tincture  of  benzoin  and  oxid  of  zinc. — J.  L. 
Williams,  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  quick  and  effective  root  filling  is  made  with  an  alum- 
inum point  which  can  also  be  used  to  cleanse  the  root-canal. 
The  aluminum  being  soft  can  easily  be  bent  and  nicked  at 
the  right  point  where  it  is  to  break  off. — Dr.  Dunn,  Sr., 
Dental  Weekly. 

With  a  smooth  broach  pass  into  the  canal  some  oxy- 
phosphate  or  oxychlorid  of  zinc,  lining  it  to  the  apex.  Have 
ready  a  tapered  piece  of  lead  wire,  which  pass  into  the  canal, 
forcing  it  home  with  a  plugger.  The  lead  can  be  com- 
pressed and  will  force  the  plastic  into  the  remotest  parts  of 
the  canal.  The  lead  salts  are  antiseptic,  and,  if  the  canal 
has  been  properly  prepared  and  sterilized,  pericementitis  is 
not  likely  to  ensue. — F.  D.  Price,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

In  very  small  canals  I  have  been  using  Gramm's  fine 
copper  points.  First  pump  in  chloro-percha,  made  from 
chloroform,  to  which  has  been  added  twenty-six  per  cent. 
formalin. — Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Review. 

Koot-canal  Filling  for  Deciduous  Teeth. — The  material 
selected  should  be  such  that  if  absorption  occurs  the  filling 
will  not  interfere.  In  preference  to  all  others  melted  paraf- 
fin and  balsam-of-the-desert,  iodoform  and  glycerin,  or 
iodoform  and  oil  of  cloves. — D.  H.  Ziegler,  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 


Root-canal  Treatment,  Deciduous  Teeth.  263 

Pulp  Mummification  in  Deciduous  Molars. — When  a 
child  presents  itself  with  an  aching  deciduous  molar  with  ex- 
posed pulp,  destroy  and  remove  pulp  from  chamber  only, 
and  fill  the  chamber  with  Soderberg's  paste,  filling  cavity 
with  oxyphosphate. — O.  E.  Houghton,  Items  of  Interest. 

Treatment  of  Pulpless  Deciduous  Teeth. — When  root 
filling  is  impracticable,  remove  contents,  sterilize  with  3  per 
cent,  aqueous  solution  hydrogen  peroxid  and  close  open 
ends  of  tubuli  with  cavitine  or  similar  preparation.  Fill  with 
gutta-percha  or  other  soft  filling.  Absorption  of  the  roots 
is  not  interfered  with,  and  the  tooth  will  seldom  give 
trouble  if  carefully  treated  in  this  manner. — Geo.  S.  Allen, 
International  Den.  Jour. 

Pulp  Devitalization  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — ^Under  normal 
physiological  conditions  the  pulps  of  the  deciduous  teeth 
seem  tO'  remain  active  until  the  entire  tooth,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  enamel  cap,  is  absorbed  and  the  latter  ready  to 
tumble  out.  If  the  deciduous  pulp  is  destroyed,  this  physio- 
logical process  of  absorption  ceases,  and  to  a  certain  extent 
the  root  becomes  a  foreign  body. — H.  C.  Register,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Pulp  Devitalization  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — I  have  used 
with  much  success  a  paste  of  powdered  cantharides  and 
carbolic  acid — say  about  one-twentieth  grain  of  the  powder 
with  enough  carbolic  acid  or  creosote  to  make  a  paste. — ■ 
E.  T.  Darby,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Root-canal  Filling  of  Deciduous  Teeth. — If  the  teeth 
are  not  to  be  retained  very  long  a  creamy  paste  of  iodo- 
form and  oil  of  cloves,  or  paraffin  wax,  will  very  well  serve 
the  purpose  of  root-canal  filling. — A.  H.  Peck,  Dental 
Revietv. 

Root-canal  Filling  for  Deciduous  Teeth. — Make  a  paste 
of  iodoform  in  glycerol,  of  such  consistency  as  can  be  readily 
applied  on  a  probe.  Fill  pulp  chamber  with  temporary  stop- 
ping, and  cavity  according  to  conditions. — Geo.  N.  Wasser, 
Ohio  Den.  Jour. 


CHAPTER  IX 


PYORRHCEA  ALVEOLARIS  AND  ASSOCIATED 
CONDITIONS      . 


An  Appliance  for  Retaining  Loose  Teeth. — The  appli- 
ance consists  of  what  may  be  styled  two  yokes  held  together 
by  means  of  bolts  or  screws.  These  yokes  fit  accurately  the 
cervical  border  of  the  labial  and  lingual  surfaces  of  the  loose 
teeth  and  those  intended  as  supports  at  either  end,  and 
are  held  in  place  by  the  bolts  which  pass  through  the 
interproximal  spaces.  An  accurate  impression  is  obtained 
of  the  labial  and  lingual  surfaces  of  the  teeth  involved,  from 
which  a  metal  die  is  made.  On  this  die  is  swaged  or  bur- 
nished a  narrow  strip  of  pure  gold,  thirty  gauge.  This  strip  is 
then  cut  to  shape  and  tried  in  the  mouth  and  burnished  so  as 
to  fit  the  cervical  border  of  the  teeth  accurately.  The  yokes 
should  now  be  strengthened  with  22-karat  solder.  Drill 
holes  the  exact  gauge  of  the  bolts  through  the  labial  yoke  at 
the  approximal  spaces.  Place  the  yokes  in  position  and  with 
a  sharp  instrument  mark  on  the  lingual  yoke  where  the 
corresponding  holes  are  to  be  drilled.  The  bolts  are  made  of 
platinum  and  iridium  wire,  with  cone-shaped  head  and  nuts, 
which  are  to  be  countersunk  in  the  yokes.  Where  it  is  neces- 
sary to  hold  an  elongating  tooth  or  to  prevent  the  yokes 
slipping  on  the  roots,  a  half  cap  may  be  swaged  to  fit  the 
lingual  surface  of  the  tooth  and  soldered  to  the  lingual  voke. 
This  cap  is  cemented  to  the  tooth,  the  yokes  bolted  firmly 
in  place,  and  the  heads  and  nuts  ground  and  polished  smooth. 
— E.  Darwin  Reed,  Dental  Brief. 
IS  265 


266  Practical  Dentistry. 

Ulceration  of  Tootli  Sockets. — If  serumal  calculus  de- 
posits, first  remove  all  deposits  and,  secondly,  operate  upon 
the  soft  tissues,  but  not  until  the  socket  is  completely  disin- 
fected and  cleansed.  If  the  soft  tissues  be  gouged  and 
scraped  and  cut  sufficiently  to  rid  them  of  adherent  dead 
and  dying  portions,  causing  a  flow  of  blood  to  relieve  tur- 
gidity  and  carry  away  the  effete  white  corpuscles,  we  have 
a  condition  which  will  promise  a  cure.  The  weeping  serum 
is  not  to  be  disturbed  or  burned  or  cauterized;  let  it  alone. 
— A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  CoCsmos. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — When  the  disease  is  well  estab- 
lished and  the  sockets  deep,  inject  cocain  and  remove  the 
tooth ;  pack  the  alveolus  with  cotton  saturated  with  a  formalin 
solution  (one  in  five  parts  of  water)  dipped  in  cocain  crystals. 
Remove  the  pulp  from  the  extracted  tooth,  swab  out  the 
canals  with  formalin,  fill  the  roots  with  gutta-percha,  scrape 
off  all  remaining  pericemental  membrane,  calculus  and  other 
adhesions  from  the  roots.  Disinfect  thoroughly,  replant  the 
tooth,  and  ligate  to  the  adjoining  teeth  with  fine  flexible 
wire,  treat  antiseptically  until  all  inflammation  subsides. — 
Dr.  B.  Dolan,  The  Stomatologist. 

lodo-glycerol  in  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — If  the  disease 
be  due  to  local  causes,  the  removal  of  the  cause  and  local 
treatment  will  generally  be  all  that  is  necessary.  The  re- 
moval of  deposits  and  the  application  of  iodo-glycerol  every 
other  day  with  vigorous  gum-massage  will  soon  reduce  and 
restore  the  gum  and  alveolar  process  to  a  healthy  condition. 

The  formula  for  iodo-glycerol  is : 

Zinc  iodid    I5  gm- 

Water    lO  " 

lodin  25  " 

Glycerin   So 

Loose  teeth  should  be  fastened  to  solid  teeth  to  preserve 
them  as  long  as  possible  and  to  prevent  movement  from  ex- 
tending the  inflammatory  process  to  adjoining  teeth. — E.  S. 
Talbot,  Dental  Cosmos. 


Pyorrhcra  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     267 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — After  thorough  removal  of  all 
deposits  and  curettement  of  the  pocket,  removing  all  necrotic 
bone  and  granulation  tissue,  syringe  repeatedly  with  hot 
water  and  apply  lactic  acid  in  a  thorough  manner.  This 
has  a  pronounced  effect  in  promoting  a  healing  of  the  af- 
fected parts.  The  lactic  acid  not  only  induces  healthy  gran- 
ulation tissue  to  spring  up,  but  insures  a  union  between  the 
tissues  and  the  root ;  that  is,  by  partly  decalcifying  the  outer 
layers  of  the  root  it  opens  up  the  mouths  of  the  canaliculi 
and  stimulates  the  adjacent  tissue  to  healthy  action.  Pre- 
scribe an  antiseptic  mouth  wash,  to  be  held  in  the  mouth 
not  less  than  three  or  four  minutes,  and  frequently  repeated. 
— O.  N.  Heise,  Dental  Register. 

Pyorrhcea  and  Gingivitis. — In  case  of  pyorrhoea  al- 
veolaris and  gingivitis  douch  the  mouth  by  means  of  a 
rubber  hose  attached  to  the  faucet  of  a  bath.  By  pressure 
of  the  hose  between  thumb  and  finger  the  force  can  be 
regulated  so  as  to  expel  from  the  interstitial  spaces  all  de- 
posits that  are  not  attached  to  the  teeth,  and  all  the  sur- 
faces of  the  teeth  can  be  subjected  to  the  action  of  the 
stream;  the  gums,  buccal  surfaces,  under  the  tongue,  the 
teeth,  and  to  those  not  easily  gagged  the  fauces. — S.  Blair 
LucKiE,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Sealing  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — 

R.    Purified  gun  lac    135 

Purified  benzoin 5 

Carbol.  acid  crystals  50 

Oil  cinnamon    3 

Saccharin 3 

Alcohol  q.  s.  to  make  %  liter. 

After  the  removal  of  all  deposits  and  the  application 
of  a  stimulating  escharotic,  covering  with  the  above  sooth- 
ing application  will  keep  the  pockets  sealed  for  many  hours, 
and  will  be  found  beneficial  from  its  therapeutic  properties. 
— M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental  Review. 


268  Practical  Dentistry. 

Trichloracetic  Acid  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alve- 
olaris. — Trichloracetic  acid  not  only  acts  as  a  solvent,  but 
its  judicious  use  causes  a  slight  sloughing,  which  seems  to 
be  particularly  stimulating  and  healthy  granulations  soon 
spring  from  the  gum  tissue.  Carry  to  base  of  pocket,  and 
repeat  as  may  be  necessary.  Take  one  tooth  at  a  time  and 
clean  it  well.  Syringe  the  pocket  with  any  soothing  anti- 
septic, dry  the  pocket  as  far  as  possible,  and  fill  with  a 
paste  of  powdered  pepsin  and  boracic  acid  in  vaselin.  Pre- 
scribe a  proper  mouth  wash  or  spray,  and  do  not  touch  that 
tooth  again. — Henry  H.  Tom  kins,  I  tons  of  Interest. 

Cleansing  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Wash  out  loosened  par- 
ticles of  calculus  with  luke-warm  water,  to  which  an  anti- 
septic has  been  added,  and  follow  by  pyrozone,  which  should 
have  been  brought  to  the  temperature  of  the  body  in  an 
open  vessel,  and  a  small  tablet  of  soda-mint  added  just  before 
using.  The  increased  temperature  lessens  pain  and  the  soda- 
mint  neutralizes  the  acid  and  liberates  oxygen,  causing 
greater  effervescence  with  better  cleansing  of  the  pocket. 
It  acts  as  a  pus  destroyer  also. — A.  H.  Mabee,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  a  Catarrh  of  the  Gums. — In  the 
case  of  a  patient  whose  gums  showed  every  evidence  of 
Riggs'  disease,  the  effects  in  the  mouth  of  the  use  of  Seiler's 
antiseptic  tablets  for  the  nose  and  throat  were  most  remark- 
able. Instead  of  loose  teeth  and  spongy  gums  the  teeth  be- 
came firm  and  the  gums  perfectly  healthy  in  a  short  time. 
— Dr.  Fisher,  Items  of  Interest. 

Splinting   Loosened   Teeth   in   Pyorrhoea   Alveolaris. — 

Ligatures  of  pure  silver  wire,  of  about  30  gauge,  can  be 
used  to  great  advantage  if  covered  with  celluloid  cement. 
When  the  ligature  tends  to  move  upward  towards  the  gum, 
small  buttons  of  oxyphosphate  cement  can  be  placed  upon 
the  necks  of  the  teeth  above  the  point  of  placement  of  the 
ligature. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental  Cosmos. 


Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     269 

Chronic  Pyorrhoea — Treatment  of  an  Advanced  Case. — 
An  upper  left  first  bicuspid,  no  connection  between  the  roots 
of  the  teeth  and  the  maxilla ;  pus  constantly  flowing  and  the 
patient's  breath  impaired.  The  tooth  was  extracted,  the 
pulp  removed,  tooth  sterilized,  apex  of  root  amputated, 
socket  deepened  and  tooth  replanted.  Result — Tooth  firm 
and  in  a  healthy  condition.  Silk  ligatures  were  used  instead 
of  mechanical  splint.  Check  hemorrhage,  if  any,  with  sulpho- 
napthol  and  hot  water. — R.  H.  Cool,  Pacific  Stoni.  Gazette. 

Pulp  Removal  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveo- 
laris.— I  have  cured  many  a  case  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris 
and  made  a  loose  tooth  firm  by  removing  the  pulp  of  the 
tooth  and  filling  the  root,  in  that  way  giving  a  better  nu- 
tritional supply  to  the  pericemental  circulation.  A  tooth 
without  a  pulp  stands  a  better  chance  of  being  immune  from 
loss  by  pyorrhoea  alveolaris  than  with  a  pulp  that,  in  case  of 
nutritional  deficiency  or  other  causes,  would  be  constantly 
robbing  the  pericementum  of  the  nutrient  protoplasm  which 
it  requires  for  its  healthy  maintenance. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

Retention  of  Loose  Teeth. — For  very  loose  lower  incisors 
make  a  metal  model,  and  upon  it  swage  a  band  of  gold 
to  the  lingual  surfaces;  then  drill  holes  through  the  teeth, 
between  the  pulp  and  cutting  edge,  to  receive  a  gold  wire 
which  is  soldered  to  the  plate.  The  plate  is  then  re-enforced 
with  a  layer  of  solder,  the  rubber-dam  put  on,  and  the 
whole  cemented  firmly  to  place.  The  pins  through  the 
teeth  are  cut  off  even  with  the  surface,  so  that  no  gold 
shows  except  the  end  of  the  little  pin.  The  splint  is  far 
away  from  the  gum,  so  that  the  tooth-brush  reaches  the 
interproximal  spaces  as  though  no  splint  were  there. — J. 
D.  Patterson,  Dental  Digest. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — In  the  use  of  cocain  in  the 
treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris  a  saturated  solution  of 
cocain   in   chloroform    is   preferred.      Having   one-quarter 


270  Practical  Dentistry. 

ounce  chloroform  in  a  suitable  bottle  add  fresh  cocain,  a 
little  at  a  time,  till  saturated;  a  few  drops  of  oil  of  cloves 
increases  the  solvent  property  so  that  we  get  a  10  per  cent, 
solution.  To  guard  against  the  harmful  eflfects  of  the  escape 
of  the  cocain  solution  on  to  the  gums,  lave  the  mucous  mem- 
brane with  whiskey,  which  neutralizes  the  effect  of  the 
cocain. — L.  G.  Mitchell,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Fixation  of  Loose  Teeth. — Tie  the  teeth  with  "O"  or 
"C"  sewing-silk,  making  several  knots  in  between  the  teeth 
as  an  entanglement  for  Kornarska's  paste,  for  which  the 
formula  is  celluloid,  155  grains;  acetone,  500  grains.  This 
makes  a  smooth,  unctuous  paste  which  will  harden  on  the 
teeth  in  about  two  hours,  or  a  little  less.  All  colors  of  cel- 
luloid can  be  found  at  artists'  stores.  The  sheets  can  be 
filed  or  ground  up,  or  cut  into  chemically  pure  acetone. — A. 
W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Treatment. — In  treating  pyor- 
rhoea, and  in  many  diseases  of  the  pericementum,  we  save 
much  time  and  effect  a  permanent  cure  quicker  by  the  use 
of  a  compressed-air  atomizer,  which  enables  the  sending  of 
uninterrupted  streams  of  the  desired  medicament,  as  strong 
or  as  weak  as  the  case  may  demand,  into  the  deep  tissues 
and  down  into  pus  pockets  where  it  is  most  needed. — 
George  Zederbaum,  Dental  Digest. 

Constitutional  Effects  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — (i) 
Pus,  with  its  putrefactive  organisms,  and  decayed  food  rem- 
nants, may  be  swallowed  and  act  either  upon  the  stomach 
wall,  or  set  up  fermentation  of  the  stomach  contents. 

(2)  The  toxins  generated  in  the  mouth  may  be  ab- 
sorbed by  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth  or  stomach. 

(3)  The  local  conditions  of  the  mouth  may  favor  the 
growth  of  pyogenic  organisms  and  thus  render  the  patient 
more  liable  to  certain  infectious  disorders. — Chas.  Pea- 
cock, Dental  Record. 


Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     271 

Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — After  scaling  and 
cleaning  wrap  a  wisp  of  cotton  round  a  fine  broach,  dip  in  a 
saturated  solution  of  hydrate  of  potash,  press  lightly  on 
amadou  to  take  up  excess,  and  pass  carefully  around  the 
root,  cauterizing  the  pocket,  exercising  care  to  touch  only 
the  affected  tissue.  Disappearance  of  pain  is  followed  by 
the  formation  of  new  granulations,  the  pockets  becoming 
shallower  until  a  cure  is  obtained. — Walter  Tothill,  Den- 
tal Record. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — By  putting  a  band  around  the 
neck  of  the  tooth,  letting  it  extend  well  up,  cutting  it  first 
to  the  gum  line,  wherever  that  might  Idc,  cutting  down  to 
the  gum  line  as  though  the  gum  margin  were  in  proper 
place,  and  fitting  the  band  well  down  under  the  margin  of 
the  gum,  in  order  to  change  the  conditions  completely.  If 
you  fit  the  band  snug  around  the  root  it  will  get  well  be- 
cause the  conditions  are  changed,  although  no  amount  of 
treating  can  make  it  well. — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Gold  and  Silver  Salts  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea 
Alveolaris. — It  is  well  known  that  a  root  discolored  by 
silver  nitrate  seems  less  likely  to  take  on  deposits  afterward. 
*  *  *  I  have  been  using  gold  chlorid  for  a  couple 
of  years  in  the  place  of  silver  nitrate;  the  latter  in  a  deep 
pocket  is  decidedly  irritating,  and  may  cause  inflammation, 
while  with  gold  chlorid  we  get  the  same  good  effects  with- 
out the  irritation. — W.  V.  B.  Ames,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — ^All  teeth  which  are  loose  must 
be  fixed  in  their  positions  and  bad  occlusion  corrected.  The 
spring  splint  has  given  great  satisfaction,  swaging  a  piece 
of  gold  plate  to  the  palatal  and  labial  or  the  buccal  and  lin- 
gual surfaces,  according  to  location,  and  uniting  them  with 
platinum  and  iridium  spring  wire.  This,  when  snapped  over 
the  teeth,  secures  them  and  is  easily  removed  for  cleaning. — 
Gordon  White,  Items  of  Interest. 


272 


Practical  Dcntisirv. 


Nitrate  of  Silver  in  Treating  Pyorrhoea. — After  the  sur- 
gical operation  we  find  the  necks  of  the  teeth  extremely 
sensitive.  Cold  air  hurts  and  it  is  extremely  disagreeable 
for  the  patient;  and  there  is  nothing  which  gives  relief  like 
nitrate  of  silver.  Keep  a  fresh  saturated  sohition  and 
apply  it  by  means  of  shreds  of  cotton  wound  on  an  orange 
wood  stick,  protecting  the  gums  and  mouth  with  cotton 
rolls.  The  stain  wnll  wear  off  in  a  few  weeks  and  the 
teeth  will  have  recovered  from  sensitiveness. — J.  D.  Pat- 
terson, Dental  Era. 

Cataphoresis  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. 

— Cataphoresis  affords  an  effective  way  of  saturating  the 
tissues  with  antiseptics  by  virtue  of  the  osmotic  effect 
brought  about ;  it  is  the  most  thorough  method  of  destroying 
bacteria ;  it  stimulates  the  tissue  to  repair  and  the  bone  to 
reform  about  the  roots  of  the  loosened  teeth.  However, 
no  results  will  be  attained  of  a  permanent  nature  if  the  sali- 
vary deposits  are  not  completely  removed.  Argyrol  is  ad- 
vised when  nitrate  of  silver  would  be  indicated. — E.  Stur- 
RiDGE,  British  Dental  Journal. 

To  Harden  the  Gum-tissue. — After  thorough  removal 
of  all  deposits  in  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea,  to  harden  the 
gum-tissue  and  tighten  the  teeth  glycothymolin  in  combina- 
tion with  citrate  of  lithia  will  be  found  well  suited  for  this 
purpose.  Throw  the  solution  deep  into  the  pockets,  and 
instruct  the  patient  to  apply  it  several  times  a  day,  with  the 
little  syringe  known  as  the  glycothymolin  applicator. — John 
P.  Ruff,  Dental  Era. 

Silver  Nitrate  in  Convenient  Form  for  Treatment  of 
Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Fuse  crystals  of  silver  nitrate  on  the 
end  of  a  wire.  Quite  a  bulb  of  the  fused  salt  can  be  made 
to  adhere  by  heating  the  wire  and  touching  it  repeatedly 
to  small  crystals,  passing  them  through  a  flame  to  fuse 
them.  Applied  to  moist  surfaces  solution  of  the  salt  will 
take  place  on  contact. — J.  Morgan  Howe,  International 
Dental  Journal. 


Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     273 

Chloretone  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — 

During"  the  period  of  treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris, 
chloretone  acts  as  a  powerful  antiseptic,  as  well  as  a  local 
anaesthetic,  both  of  which  effects  are  desirable  in  the  treat- 
ment of  this  disease.  It  also  permits  continuing-  the  opera- 
tion of  removing  deposits  from  the  roots  of  the  teeth  as 
long  as  possible,  without  fear  of  toxic  effects. — C.  H.  Oak- 
man,  Dental  Review. 

The  Silver  Salts  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveo- 
laris.— In  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris  the  organic 
silver  salts  are  worthy  of  the  highest  praise.  They  do  not 
discolor  the  tissues,  they  do  not  coagulate  albumin,  and  they 
do  not  act  as  caustics.  They  should  be  applied  in  very  con- 
centrated solutions,  or  even  in  substance,  deep  in  the  pockets, 
by  means  of  a  platinum  loop. — Hermann  Printz^  Dental 
Era. 

Hot  Water  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — 

Hot  water  is  only  beneficial  in  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea 
alveolaris.  Keep  a  thermometer  in  the  distilled  water,  keep- 
ing it  between  135  and  145  degrees;  if  you  go  to  150  it  will 
scald;  do  not  let  it  drop  below  130  degrees. — Dr.  Cren- 
shaw. 

Silver  Lactate  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveo- 
laris.— Silver  lactate  (actol)  is  a  white,  inodorous,  tasteless 
powder,  soluble  in  water — i  in  100  destroys  within  five 
minutes  all  pathogenic  microbes.  I  have  used  it  in  sup- 
puration pockets  along-  the  sides  of  roots  of  teeth  with  ex- 
cellent results.  It  does  not  cause  pain  when  used  up  to  20 
per  cent. — A.  W.  Harlan. 

Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — Very  often,  when 
the  trouble  is  not  deep-seated  or  aggravated,  most  excellent 
results  are  secured  by  cleaning  the  teeth  thoroughly  and 
packing  quinin  sulphate  under  the  free  margin  of  the  gum 
around  the  necks  of  the  teeth.  This  has  a  stimulating  effect 
and  will  tend  to  tighten  the  teeth  in  their  sockets. — Fred  A. 
Peeso,  Dental  Cosmos. 


274  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Lactic  Acid. — Employ  lactic 
acid  in  some  cases  where  there  is  much  necrosis  of  the 
alveolus,  and  where  a  powerful  hyperplastic  inflammatory 
reaction  which  will  at  the  same  time  separate  the  necrotic 
bone  from  the  healthy  tissue  is  desired.  The  introduction 
of  lactic  acid  is  quite  painful,  and  wherever  employed 
anaesthetize  the  surroundings  by  the  use  of  cocain  phenate. 
C.  F.  W.  BoDECKER,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Protection  of  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Dry  the  roots  with 
alcohol  and  place  over  the  parts  bits  of  Japanese  paper  sat- 
urated with  liquid  celluloid,  so  as  to  form  a  protecting  wall 
over  the  roots  and  edge  of  gum.  Wind  thread  around  and 
tie  to  prevent  paper  from  getting  out  of  position.  The  cover- 
ing hardens  and  forms  a  perfect  shield  to  the  granulations 
which  grow  up  and  fill  the  spaces  between  the  roots. — 
W.  J.  Younger,  Dental  Summary. 

Compressed  Air  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveo- 
laris.— A  blast  of  air  inflates  pyorrhoea  pockets  and  ren- 
ders visible  the  deposits  which  can  be  removed  more  accu- 
rately than  if  fished  for  all  unseen;  when  dislodged  they 
are  successfully  driven  from  the  pockets  by  a  blast  of  air, 
and  the  pockets  sterilized  by  air  passed  through  an  atomizer 
containing  the  preferred  antiseptic  solution. — B.  E.  San- 
ders, Dental  Summary. 

Precaution;  Lactic  Acid  in  Pyorrhoea. — Protect  gums, 
mouth  and  lips  by  the  application  of  oleo-stearate  of  zinc.  It 
is  exceedingly  grateful  to  the  mucous  membrane  and  coats 
the  teeth,  protecting  any  sensitive  points  that  may  be  ex- 
posed. Then  you  can  use  lactic  acid  with  perfect  immunity. 
— W.  J.  Younger,  Dental  Review. 

Zinc  Sulphate  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveola- 
ris.— After  thorough  cleaning  of  pockets  and  roots,  warm 
beeswax  in  warm  water,  and  incorporate  zinc  sulphate  to 
form  a  paste,  with  which  pack  the  pockets.  As  the  pockets 
fill  in  with  granulations  from  the  bottom,  the  plug  is  forced 
out. — Dominion  Den.  Jour. 


Pyorrhcea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     275 

Electrolysis  in  Chronic  Pericementitis. — To  a  saturated 
solution  of  potassium  iodid  add  about  one-fifth  the  quantity 
of  equal  parts  tincture  of  iodin  and  aconit.  Saturate  a 
pledget  of  cotton  with  this,  and  apply  by  means  of  the 
rubber-cup  electrode  to  the  inflamed  region.  About  one 
milliampere  of  a  ten-cell  current  for  five  minutes  will  be 
sufficient;  and  usually  one  application  is  all  that  is  re- 
quired.— J.  M.  Fogg,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Mouth-wash  for  Pyorrhoea  Patients. — After  scaling,  etc., 
prescribe  the  following  mouth-wash,  to  be  used  twice  daily, 
twenty  drops  in  a  glass  of  water  : 

IJ.   Hydronaphthol    gr.-xv 

Alcoholis 

Aquae  dest aa  ^  i.     M. 

— ^James  Truman^  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pyorrhcea  Alveolaris,  Very  Bad  Cases. — When  the  tooth 
is  extremely  loose,  the  pockets  very  extensive,  reaching  the 
apex  of  the  root  at  various  points  and  containing  pabulum 
as  well  as  pus,  the  alveolar  process  practically  all  absorbed, 
the  pulp  dead,  and  pressure  upon  the  tooth  causing  pain,  the 
remedy  is  extraction. — E.  C.  Brigg,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Pyorrhcea  Alveolaris. — As  a  mouth-wash  after  the  re- 
moval of  deposits  equal  parts  of  thre  per  cent,  of  pyrozone 
and  one-fourth  per  cent,  solution  of  hydronaphthol  is  an 
excellent  combination.  The  slight  amount  of  acid  present 
appears  to  have  no  detrimental  action,  for  wherever  tartar 
is  forming  there  is  an  alkalin  reaction. — A.  C.  Hart,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Loose  Teeth. — In  a  large  percentage  of  cases  if  the 
peridental  membranes  and  gums  are  freed  from  infectious 
accumulations  the  loose  teeth  will  tighten,  and  the  stripped 
gums  will  of  themselves  reattach  to  the  roots.  The  one 
and  only  effective  means  of  removing  these  infectious  masses 
is  by  instrumentation  and  poHshers. — Joseph  Head,  The 
Dentist's  Magazine. 


276  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pus  Pockets:  Argyrol. — When  pus  pockets  are  found, 
after  removal  of  deposits  and  syringing  with  warm  water  a 
twenty  per  cent,  solution  of  argyrol  is  used,  freely  injecting 
into  the  pockets.  The  argyrol  is  a  thorough  non-irritating 
disinfectant  and  invariably  prevents  soreness  following  the 
surgical  treatment,  and  is  the  only  drug  necessary  in  the 
treatment  of  pyorrhoea  and  from  a  good  mouth-wash  for 
continuous  use. — Austin  F.  J.\mes,  Dental  Revietv. 

Sulphate  of  ftuinin  in  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — Sulphate 
of  quinin  has  been,  as  a  local  application,  one  of  the  most 
valuable  therapeutic  agents.  Its  topical  effects  have  been 
tested  to  a  degree  that  warrants  its  continued  use.  The 
pockets  must  be  closed  to  the  ingress  of  pathogenic  germs, 
to  permit  the  natural  restoration  of  tissue,  and  this  agent 
must  be  non-irritating  and  antiseptic  in  character. — James 
Truman,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Protection  of  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Dry  the  root  with 
alcohol  and  place  over  the  parts  bits  of  Japanese  paper  sat- 
urated with  liquid  celluloid,  so  as  to  form  a  protecting  wall 
over  the  gum  margins  and  around  the  tooth.  Tie  to  place 
with  thread  and  allow  to  harden.  This  forms  a  shield  and 
protects  the  granulations,  which  soon  form  and  build  up  new 
tissue. — W.  J.  Younger,  Dental  Summary. 

Trichloracetic  Acid  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Al- 
veolaris.— I  use  a  2  per  cent,  solution,  getting  first  an  as- 
tringent effect,  preventing  much  hemorrhage,  and  second, 
an  anaesthetic  effect.  Use  on  a  few  shreds  of  cotton  wrapped 
on  a  scaler  and  left  in  place  for  a  short  time.  Deposits  are 
removed  with  less  pain  than  by  any  other  method  tried. — 
E.  Mawhinney,  Dental  Re^nezv. 

Treatment  of  Alveolar  Abscess  by  Electrolysis. — The 
fluids  of  the  body  being  saline,  mainly  chlorid  of  sodium,  the 
application  of  a  point  of  zinc  wire  into  a  sinus  or  fistula  with 
the  aid  of  the  electric  current,  chlorid  of  zinc  is  formed  in 
situ,  which  is  forced  into  the  tissues — an  ideal  method  of 
infusing  an  escharotic  into  a  confined  area. — W.  J.  Morton, 
Items  of  Interest. 


Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     277 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Mechanical  Treatment. — Some- 
times there  are  sections  of  the  cancellated  alveolar  structure 
truly  carious ;  the  hone  should  be  examined  and  soft  por- 
tions burred  or  scraped  out.  This  is  just  as  important  as 
the  removal  of  deposits  from  the  roots  of  the  teeth.  Many 
persistent  cases  will  yield  promptly  after  the  removal  of 
disorganized  alveolar  wall. — Garrett  Newkirk,  Dental 
Review. 

Extraction  and  Replantation  as  a  Cure  for  Pyorrhoea.— 
When  advanced,  with  no  connection  between  roots  of  tooth 
and  maxilla,  the  tooth  was  extracted,  the  pulp  removed,  the 
tooth  sterilized,  apex  of  root  amputated,  canal  filled,  socket 
deepened  and  tooth  replanted.  The  tooth  was  subsequently 
found  to  be  firm  and  in  good  condition.  Ligate  with  silk 
ligatures  instead  of  using  mechanical  splints.  In  case  of 
hemorrhage  after  extraction  use  sulpho-naphthol  and  hot 
water. — R.  H.  Cool,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 

Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea. — After  removal  of  deposits 
instruct  patients  to  rinse  mouth  frecjuently  with  alum  or 
borax  dissolved  in  rain  water,  and  abstain  from  soap  or 
soda  in  dentifrices.  Pulverized  sulphur  makes  the  best  den- 
tifrice for  these  cases.  It  is  unpleasant,  but  impress  pa- 
tients with  its  importance,  and  for  a  term  of  weeks  at  least. 
— J.  E.  Cravens,  Dental  Review. 

The  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — (i)  Dissolve 
zinc' sulphate  to  saturation  in  cold  water.  (2)  One  ounce  of 
potassium  iodid  in  two  ounces  of  water,  adding  as  much 
iodin  crystals  as  it  will  take  up.  Put  together  equal  quan- 
tities of  the  two  solutions. — E.  A.  Bogue,  International  Den- 
tal Journal. 

Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Packing  pyorrhcea  pockets  with 
menthol  crystals  a  few  minutes  in  advance  of  operating  in 
the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris  will  afford  great  re- 
lief to  the  patient.  Valuable  in  case  of  cocain  contraindica- 
tion and  in  every  way  a  more  pleasant  application. — 
Dental  Review. 


278  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Treatment. — To  lessen  the  pain 
during  operation  make  .use  of  a  concentrated  syrupy  solu- 
tion of  cocain  phenate  applied  under  the  gum  on  a  piece 
of  cotton  for  four  or  five  minutes.  This  is  the  safest  of 
all  the  cocain  preparations.  The  carbolic  acid  to  a  certain 
extent  prevents  absorption  of  the  cocain,  while  the  cocain, 
if  the  solution  is  saturated,  inhibits  the  action  of  the  carbolic 
acid. — C.  F.  W.  Bodecker,  Dental  Review. 

Pulp  Removal  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea. — In  pulp 

removal  in  so-called  sound  teeth,  as  a  measure  of  treat- 
ment in  pyorrhoeal  mouths,  three  obstacles  to  success  may 
be  encountered.  First,  there  is  great  probability  of  pulp- 
calcification  ;  second,  hemorrhage  is  a  common  sequence ; 
and  third,  and  most  important,  the  socket  being  already 
in  an  infected  condition,  apical  abscess  is  a  not  improbable 
sequence. — R.  Ottolengui,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Glutol  in  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — Glutol  is  well  worth 
trying,  especially  for  cleansing  pockets  after  the  tartar  has 
been  removed.  The  solvent  action  of  the  living  tissue  dis- 
solves the  gelatin,  liberating  the  formalin,  which  is  the  anti- 
septic factor.  It  is  of  great  value  in  controUing  microbic 
activity  in  infected  surfaces.  It  is  harmless  even  if  swal- 
lowed in  large  quantities. — R.  H.  M.  Dawbarn,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — I  have  had  very  good  results 
from  the  electrolytic  effect  of  pure  silver,  using  the  ordinary 
cataphoric  apparatus  and  a  spatula  of  pure  silver,  thus  ob- 
taining the  oxychlorid  of  silver.  I  think  this  is  a  thera- 
peutic field  worth  investigating. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  in  Young  Children. — It  is  not  an 
uncommon  thing  to  find  pyorrhea  alveolaris  in  a  very  young 
child,  because  young  children  are  prone  to  nephritic  troubles. 
The  presence  of  albumen  in  the  urine  of  young  children  is 
very  common.  Pyorrhea  in  children  is  more  common  than 
our  literature  would  show. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental  Cosmos. 


pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  and  Associated  Conditions.     279 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Common  Salt. — In  a  case  which 
had  resisted  treatment  for  a  great  many  years,  after  the  loss 
of  many  teeth  a  cure  was  effected  through  the  use  of  com- 
mon salt  worked  down  into  the  pockets  several  times  a  day, 
salt  being  also  used  on  the  tooth  brush.  The  gums  became 
solid  and  healthy  and  recession  stopped.  The  loose  teeth 
became  so  firm  that  they  were  used  as  supports  for  a  bridge. 
— E.  H.  Allen,  Dental  Review. 

Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — I  am  in  favor  of  washing  out  pock- 
ets with  a  solution  of  bichlorid  mercury  in  hydrogen  per- 
oxid.  I  recognize  the  tendency  of  the  sublimate  to  deposit 
in  using  pyrozone,  but  in  Marchand's  Hyper,  there  is  suffi- 
cient free  acid  present  to  avoid  this  difficulty.  I  believe 
in  the  efficacy  of  this  solution. — M.  L.  Rhein,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Plastic  Injection  for  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — 

IJ.    Vaselin i  oz. 

White  wax ^  oz. 

Hydronapthol  15  grs. 

Menthol   3  grs. 

To  be  injected  into  pyorrhoea  pockets  to  keep  them  free 
from  infection. — Geo.  F.  Eames,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Removal  of  Calcic  Deposits. — The  use  of  iodin  to  soften 
and  stain  the  deposits  will  facilitate  their  removal.  It  is 
also  disinfectant.  Should  the  gums  and  peridental  mem- 
brane be  hypersensitive  the  application  of  a  cocain  solution 
in  adrenalin  or  equivalent  will  greatly  relieve. — C.  B,  RoH- 
LAND,  Dental  Review. 

Papain  in  the  Treatment  of  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — If  after 
removal  of  deposits  papain  paste  is  packed  in  the  pyorrhoea! 
pockets  it  will  digest  all  blood-clots,  etc.,  and  will  not  dis- 
color the  tooth.  The  paste  is  composed  of  equal  parts  of 
papain  and  glycerin,  and  hydrochloric  acid  one-fiftieth  to 
one-three-hundredth. — A.  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 


28o  Practical  Doitistry. 

Retention  of  Loose  Teeth. — Where  but  very  little  at- 
tachment is  left  the  condition  may  in  many  cases  be  im- 
proved by  the  removal  of  the  pulp,  thus  concentrating  the 
circulation  and  increasing-  the  nutritional  supply  of  the  cap- 
illaries feeding  the  pericemental  tissues. — M.  L.  Rhein, 
Dental  Review. 

Suprarenal  Capsules  in  Pyorrhoea  Pockets. — When  hem- 
orrhage interferes  with  removal  of  calculus,  a  little  of  the 
powdered  extract  packed  into  the  pocket  will  soon  cause 
hemorrhage  to  cease.  Either  pack  it  dry  or  use  it  on  a 
moist  piece  of  cotton. — Elliott  R.  Carplnter,  Dental  Re- 
viczv. 

Pyorrhoea  Precautions. — Insist  upon  a  discontinuance  of 
the  use  of  coffee  or  alcoholic  stimulants,  because  they  retard 
the  elimination  of  waste  material.  Also  the  patient  must 
not  use  any  dentifrice  or  soap  that  is  of  an  alkaline  nature. 
L.  G.  Mitchell,  IVesteni  Dental  Journal. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  Pulp  Removal. — Do  not  hesitate 
to  remove  the  pulp  from  any  of  the  teeth  greatly  affected, 
when  there  is  enough  bone  remaining  to  justify  an  effort  to 
save  the  tooth.  I  have  rarely  known  a  case  that  was  not  bene- 
fited, and  the  usefulness  of  the  tooth  prolonged,  by  the  re- 
moval of  the  pulp. — Gordon  White,  Dental  Digest. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — A  line  of  "continuous,  mild 
medication"  which  has  proven  efficacious  consists  in  placing 
silver  bands  about  the  roots  of  the  teeth,  to  furnish  silver 
salts  for  their  typical  effect. — W.  V.  B.  Ames,  Dental 
Revieiv. 

Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris:  Gum  Massage. — Instruct  pa- 
tients to  massage  the  gums  frequently,  using  the  following 
preparation :  Lanolin,  one  ounce ;  boracic  acid,  forty 
grains  ;  a  few  drops  of  some  essential  oil.  Any  tendency 
to  bleeding  will  soon  disappear. — Dental  Summary. 


pyorrhoea  Alveolarts  and  Associated  Conditions.     281 

PyorrhcEa  Pockets.— After  thoroughly  cleansing  the 
roots,  fix  the  teeth  firmly  with  ligatures  or  splints  and  pack 
the  pockets  full  with  quinin  sulphate  as  an  antiseptic  dress- 
ing. The  quinin  will  exclude  bacteria  and  cause  the  gums 
to  become  reattached  to  the  peridental  membrane,  or  tooth 
substance. — Joseph  Head. 

PyorrhcEa  Alveolaris:  The  Water  Cure. — When  I  have 
gotten  my  patients  to  drinking  water  I  think  I  have  ac- 
complished much  toward  the  cure  of  this  dreaded  gum 
disease. — C.  N.  Pierce. 

Silver  Nitrate  in  Pyorrhea  Pockets. — Protect  the  gum 
by  a  preliminary  application  of  tincture  of  iodin ;  if  the  ni- 
trate of  silver  spreads  it  will  form  a  painless  iodid. — L.  Van 
Orden,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Wash  for  Pyorrhea  Pockets. — Use  tar  water  and  ham- 
mamelis,  half  and  half.  Always  have  it  warm. — Dr.  Good, 
Dental  Review. 

Hydronapthol  Wash  for  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — 

'Bl.   Hydronapthol fl.  3ij 

Tinct.  Celandula   fl.  3iv 

Aq.  dist.  q.  s.  ad ^viij 

— Grafton  Monroe,  Dental  Review. 
19 


CHAPTER  X 


OPERATIVE  DENTISTRY—  MISCELLANEOUS 


Denuded  Necks  of  Teeth. — If  the  patient  is  still  young 
enough,  say  under  forty,  you  can  coax  the  gum  to  grow  and 
recover  the  root  in  part,  by  great  care  and  stimulating  it 
gently  with  iodin  and  zinc  oxid  with  ten  per  cent,  resorcin 
painted  on  it  at  intervals  of  one  to  two  weeks.  This  is  very 
tedious  and  requires  much  patience.  The  remedies  must  be 
alternated  and  changed  about  every  six  weeks.  During 
the  process  of  building  gum-tissue  the  patient  must  use  a 
badger  brush  and  a  dentifrice  composed  of  one  part  white 
castile  soap  and  nine  parts  precipitated  chalk. — A.  W.  Har- 
lan, Items  of  Interest. 

Shaping  the  Natural  Teeth. — When  elongation  has  oc- 
curred, the  entire  incisal  third  may  often  be  removed,  cut- 
ting by  stages,  and  using  chlorid  of  zinc  where  sensitive- 
ness is  encountered;  this  to  be  followed  by  a  constant  use 
of  bicarbonate  of  soda  by  the  patient.  My  experience  shows 
no  trouble  from  such  treatment,  care  being  taken  that  the 
surface  stoned  and  shaped  be  highly  polished  and  burnished. 
This  is  essential.  Use  emery,  rotten  and  Arkansas  stone, 
followed  by  pumice  and  whiting,  the  latter  carried  on  moose- 
hide.  Finally,  the  burnisher  is  used. — B.  Holly  Smith, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Restoration  of  Bicuspids. — If  the  buccal  face  has  broken 
away,  the  tooth  being  pulpless,  select  a  cross-pin  porcelain 
facing  and  grind  to  fit  the  buccal  aspect  of  the  tooth  just 
under  the  edge  of  the  gum.  Fit  the  pins  of  the  porcelain 
into  a  narrow  scrap  of  platinum,  leaving  on  for  a  screw  to 

283 


284  Practical  Dentistry. 

pass  between.  Cement  the  screw  into  the  root,  place  the 
porcelain  in  position  with  the  pins  embracing  the  screw,  and 
surround  the  whole  with  a  matrix ;  pack  amalgam  into  the 
matrix  about  the  pins  and  into  all  the  irregularities  of  the 
palatal  wall.  Remove  matrix  next  day  and  finish  up  the 
amalgam. — E.  L.  Davenport,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pericementitis. — In  all  cases  of  acute  pericementitis, 
I  have  found  cataphoresis,  with  the  use  of  the  copper  elec- 
trode, to  give  immediate  relief,  leading  to  a  speedy  cure; 
also  in  cases  of  chronic  soreness  of  teeth  filled  to  the  apex. 
Use  a  point  of  copper  similar  to  a  root  dryer.  Place  in  pulp 
cavity  a  saline  solution,  insert  point  attached  to  the  positive 
pole,  using  as  strong  a  current  as  the  patient  will  bear  with 
comfort,  for  about  five  minutes.  A  flat  piece  of  copper 
shaped  like  a  trowel,  soldered  to  an  electrode  stump,  applied 
to  cotton  saturated  with  a  salt  solution,  laid  on  the  gum,  will 
usually  give  satisfactory  results. — S.  T.  Kirk,  Indiana  Den. 
Jour. 

Mouth  Breathing  and  Tartar  Formation. — I  think  there 
can  be  no  reasonable  doubt  that  mouth-breathing  is  related 
to  tartar  formation,  at  least  as  a  contributory  facor.  The 
constant  interchange  of  air  currents  brought  about  by 
mouth-breathing  necessarily  tends  to  cause  evaporation  of 
films  of  saliva  and  mucus  upon  the  teeth.  This,  on  the  one 
hand,  would  result  in  loss  of  the  dissolved  carbon  dioxid 
of  the  saliva,  with  consequent  precipitation  of  lime  salts  in 
a  mucoid  medium  concentrated  by  evaporation,  or  impissated 
by  the  loss  of  water,  with  the  final  eflfect  of  tartar  formation 
upon  the  protected  tooth  surfaces. — E.  C.  Kirk,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Pyo-destructive  Pericementitis.  —  The  predisposing 
cause  is  very  frequently  a  malocclusion,  often  not  observ- 
able. A  slight  deviation  from  the  normal  position  in  the 
arch  is  sufficient  to  cause  the  tooth  to  perform  an  amount 
of  work  greater  than  its  own  normal  share.  This  leads  to 
overactivity,  massive  oxidation,  disease  of  alkalinity,  and 


operative   Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  285 

probably  to  the  formation  of  lactic  acid,  and  finally  to  the 
precipitation  upon  that  area  of  the  uratic  salts  held  in  solu- 
tion in  the  blood  by  virtue  of  its  alkalinity.  Treatment 
should  include  absolute  relief  from  pressure  upon  such  tooth 
during  mastication. — Julio  Endelman,  Dental  Cosmos. 

In  Case  of  Pericemental  Inflammation. — When  teeth 
containing  putrescent  pulps  involved  with  pericemental  in- 
flammation and  great  tenderness,  are  to  be  drilled  into,  the 
tooth  should  be  braced,  either  with  a  clamp  or  modeling 
compound  formed  about  it  and  chilled  when  it  can  be  so 
held  in  place  as  to  support  the  tooth  and  prevent  the  press- 
ure in  drilling  from  causing  pain.  Sharp  instruments  and 
burrs  afford  the  most  effective  aid  to  other  means  employed 
for  relieving  sensation. — B.  Holly  Smith,  Den.  Digest. 

Restoration  of  the  Enamel  Surface. — After  the  lapse 
of  years  of  usage  the  enamel  is  so  affected  by  the  contact  of 
hard  food  substances  and  of  acids,  whether  used  as  condi- 
ments or  medicaments,  that  the  surface  is  no  longer  normal 
enamel.  Being  so  roughened  it  retains  food  debris  and  in- 
vites decay.  But  this  disorganized  disintegrated  layer  can 
be  removed,  and  the  surface  polished  and  restored  to  its 
original  brilliancy  and  smoothness,  shedding  extraneous  mat- 
ter like  water  from  a  duck's  back,  thus  preventing  decay. — 
W.  J.  Younger. 

Treatment  of  Erosion. — General:  Antidiuretic,  anti- 
rheumatic, antigouty.  Local:  Use  of  soft  brushes  at  the 
level  of  the  erosion ;  use  of  alkalin  dentifrices ;  use  of  ant- 
acids, gum  arabic,  or  saccharin.  Surgical:  Ignipuncture 
of  the  labial  glands.  The  teeth :  Treatment  directed 
against  the  sensitivity  of  the  erosion;  cauterization  with 
silver  nitrate,  or  with  antimony  chlorid  with  the  advantage 
of  not  staining  the  teeth.  Fill  erosions  with  gold  prefer- 
ably, or  protect  with  metallic  crowns. — Leon  Frey,  Dental 
Cosmos. 


286  Practical  Deufistry. 

Eruption  of  the  Third  Molar. — Experience  has  taught 
me  that  if  all  the  twenty-eight  teeth  are  in  the  mouth 
when  the  time  arrives  for  the  third  molars  to  appear,  there 
is  trouble  in  at  least  fifty  per  cent,  of  these  cases,  by  de- 
layed or  impossible  eruption  of  the  third  molars,  but  when 
the  first  molar  has  been  removed  before  the  age  of  twelve 
no  living  dentist  has  observed  any  difficult  or  delayed  erup- 
tion of  the  third  molar. — J.  D.  Patterson.  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Nearly  Exposed  Pulp  in  First  Permanent  Molars. — When 
a  child  presents  at  the  age  of  eight  years,  when  the  fora- 
men is  large  and  the  filling  of  the  root  would  leave  the 
tooth  in  poor  condition,  with  the  pulp  of  the  first  perma- 
nent molar  exposed,  cap  with  a  paste  made  of  pure  oil  of 
cloves,  oxid  of  zinc,  and  iodoform  (without  any  phosphoric 
acid).  Although  we  object  to  the  odor  of  iodoform  I  have 
never  been  able  to  find  anything  else  that  will  give  the 
same  results. — Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Review. 

Retention  of  the  First  Permanent  Molars. — The  reten- 
tion of  the  first  molars  vmtil  the  second  are  ready  for  im- 
mediate eruption  is  very  important,  because  they  are  the 
only  teeth  that  are  strong  enough  and  large  enough,  and  so 
placed  in  the  jaws,  as  to  be  able  to  maintain  the  articulation 
and  preserve  the  proper  relations  of  the  upper  and  lower 
jaws,  and  consequently  the  symmetry  of  the  face,  during 
the  period  while  the  deciduous  teeth  are  being  removed  and 
replaced  by  the  permanent  set. — E.  Noyes,  Dental  Review. 

Removal  of  Pulp  Nodules. — Anaesthetize  the  very  sen- 
sitive pulp  tissue  with  cocain  and  open  more  thoroughly. 
If  the  deposit  adheres  to  the  dentinal  wall  and  obstructs  the 
entrance  to  the  canals,  saturate  a  pledget  of  cotton  with  50 
per  cent,  sulphuric  acid  and  seal  in  the  cavity  for  twenty- 
four  hours.  This  will  form  a  line  of  demarcation  about  the 
nodule,  and  separate  it  from  the  walls  of  the  tooth.  If  the 
pulp  is  still  sensitive  anaesthetize  again  with  cocain. — D.  A. 
Hare.  Dental  Revieiv. 


operative   Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  287 

Tincture  of  lodin  for  the  Removal  of  Deposits. — Apply 
the  dilute  tincture  freely  to  teeth  and  gums,  which  will  con- 
stringe  puffy  gums,  drawing  them  away  from  about  the 
teeth  and  outline  deposits,  which  might  otherwise  escape  de- 
tection. It  loosens  deposits  upon  the  teeth,  insinuating  itself 
into  minute  crevices  and  rough  areas  of  the  crowns.  Fol- 
low the  iodin  with  ammonia,  which  forms  a  colorless  solu- 
tion, leaving  the  teeth  much  lighter  in  color.  Clean  and 
polish  the  surfaces. — H.  C.  Register,  International  Den. 
Jour. 

Pulp  Stone — Diagnosis. — i.  Such  exertion  as  will  in- 
crease the  action  of  the  heart  will  aggravate  the  trouble. 
2.  Sounding  the  tooth  with  a  steel  instrument  will  give 
the  same  result  as  an  incipient  periostitis.  3.  Sudden  clos- 
ing of  the  teeth  indicates  periostitis.  4.  Closing  the  teeth 
gently  and  biting  ever  so  hard  is  not  painful,  and  indicates 
that  periostitis  is  absent.  5.  Lateral  pressure  does  not 
give  pain  as  it  would  in  a  case  with  periostitis. — E.  T. 
Payne,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Retention  of  Applications  in  Badly  Decayed  Teeth. — 

Prepare  cavity  with  retaining  grooves  to  cervical  margins. 
Fill  the  cavity  largely  with  cotton,  over  which  pack  a  quick- 
setting  amalgam  for  restoration  of  proximal  contours. 
When  hard,  cut  through  to  and  remove  cotton,  giving  direct 
and  free  access  to  the  pulp  chamber,  permitting  ready  ap- 
pHcation  of  rubber-dam  and  easy  medication  of  pulp  or  ap- 
plication of  some  paste. — O.  E.  Inglis,  Stomatologist. 

Saving  Devitalized  Teeth. — A  pulpless  tooth,  having  been 
deprived  of  its  principal  source  of  nourishment,  soon  be- 
comes brittle,  and  should  be  protected  from  fracture  through 
leverage  in  mastication ;  this  can  be  done  by  grinding  away 
the  occlusal  margins,  preventing  excessive  bearing  upon  the 
tooth  and  rendering  it  less  liable  to  pericementitis ;  this  will 
materially  assist  in  saving  it. — A.  W.  Chance,  Pacific 
Gazette. 


288  Practical  Dentistry. 

Pulpless  Teeth,  and  Neuralgia. — Teeth  without  living 
pulps  are  never  the  cause  of  neuralgia.  All  cases  examined 
by  Dr.  G.  V.  Black  indicate  that  there  has  never  been  one 
case  resulting  from  teeth  with  pulp  removed.  When  ap- 
parently otherwise,  examinations  have  not  been  thorough 
and  portions  of  living  pulp  were  certainly  present. — James 
G.  Atterberry,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

For  Temporary  Dressings. — Soak  a  large  piece  of  cotton 
in  a  chloro-percha  solution.  With  gentle,  steady  heat  evap- 
orate the  chloroform  and  cut  up  the  hard  mass  into  pieces 
of  various  sizes,  which,  when  wanted,  can  be  softened  by 
warming  over  spirit  lamp  and  packed  into  cavity.  If  re- 
quired extra  soft,  as  for  over  arsenical  dressings,  heat  and 
dip  in  chloroform.  They  will  be  found  useful  also  as  wedges. 
— A.  T.  CoucHER,  Journal  British  Association. 

The  Chemical  Arrest  of  Caries. — I  have  used  nitrate 
of  silver  in  my  laboratory  experiments,  and  find  that  it  made 
the  teeth  much  more  resistant  to  artificial  caries.  Chlorid 
of  antimony  will  do  the  same  without  discoloring  the  teeth, 
but  I  doubt  if  it  is  safe  to  use  it  in  the  mouth. — S.  A.  Hop- 
kins, Bac.  Lab.  Harvard  Med.  School,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Filling  the  First  Permanent  Molars. — First,  the  cavity 
must  be  extended  to  the  terminals  of  all  sulci ;  second,  the 
filling  must  be  made  of  gold  if  it  be  possible  to  insert  a 
perfect  gold  filling ;  third,  the  filling  must  be  made  of  pink 
gutta-percha  if  it  be  not  possible  to  insert  a  perfect  gold 
filling.  In  rare  exceptional  cases  oxyphosphate  may  be 
used ;  fourth,  the  filling  must  never  be  made  of  amalgam. — 
R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Give  Relief  in  Case  of  Pulpitis. — In  many  cases  the 
application  of  hot  water  to  the  neck,  and  above  the  ear,  of 
the  affected  side,  by  means  of  heavy  toweling — six  or  eight 
thicknesses,  soaked  and  partially  wrung  out,  will  prove 
afficacious  if  continued  for  from  five  to  ten  minutes. — A.  W. 
Harlan,  Dental  Cosmos. 


operative  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  289 

Oil  of  Cloves  in  Carious  Cavities. — With  rubber-dam 
in  place  desiccate  cavity  thoroughly,  using  absolute  alcohol 
and  warm  air;  then  place  in  cavity  a  pledget  of  cotton 
saturated  with  oil  of  cloves  and  passed  quickly  through  the 
flame,  and  direct  a  current  of  warm  air  on  the  cotton  until 
the  eugenol  is  completely  volatilized. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Den- 
tal Review. 

Decalcified  Dentin. — Remove  all  that  can  safely  be  done 
short  of  actual  exposure  of  the  pulp.  If  large  masses  of 
decomposing  tissues  are  found  remove  even  if  it  causes  ex- 
posure. The  pulp  will  be  safer  under  a  capping  of  foreign 
material  then  when  subjected  to  the  influence  of  this  in- 
fected and  poisonous  mass. — C.  N.  Johnson,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Silver  Nitrate  for  Arrest  of  Decay. — Advantages: 
Avoidance  of  painful,  tedious,  expensive  operations ;  posi- 
tive arrest  of  decay ;  conservation  of  larger  amount  of  nor- 
mal tissue.  Disadvantages :  Unsightly  discoloration ;  lia- 
bility of  pulp  irritation  in  deep  cavities;  irregularity  and 
roughness  of  treated  surfaces.  The  advantages  greatly 
preponderate. — J.  Morgan  Howe,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Erosion. — Stop  erosin  at  the  neck  of  the  tooth  by  means 
of  porcelain  fillings.  Of  course,  the  patient  has  to  use  milk 
of  magnesia  and  take  the  ordinary  precautions. — Joseph 
Head,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Hold  Erosion  in  Check. — Rinse  the  mouth  twice  a 
day  with  alcohol.  The  stinging  effect  on  the  mucous  glands 
changes  the  character  of  the  buccal  fluids  and  corrects  the 
acid  secretions. — Dr.  Merriam,  International  Den,  Jour. 

For  Erosion. — A  paste  of  milk  of  magnesia  and  prepared 
chalk,  applied  around  the  necks  of  the  teeth  before  retiring, 
will  remain  longer  than  any  preparation  yet  tried.  Spread 
on  a  piece  of  thin  muslin  and  placed  under  the  lip  at  night 
it  will  be  found  efficient  in  very  wet  mouths. — Dental  Sum- 
mary. 


290  Practical  Dentistry. 

Periodontitis. — Where  a  pulp  has  died  without  exposure 
periodontitis  is  apt  to  supervene  when  the  tooth  is  opened 
up.  If  it  is  drilled  into  through  a  five  per  cent,  solution  of 
formic  aldehyd  there  is  practically  no  risk. — B.  J.  T.  Ben- 
NETTE,  Dental  Record. 

Removal  of  Calculus. — Before  removing  salivary  or 
serumal  calculus  it  will  be  found  advantageous  to  apply 
tincture  of  iodin.  A  few  treatments  will  tend  to  disintegrate 
the  deposit  and  thus  facilitate  its  removal. — E.  M.  S. 
Fernandez,  The  Dentist's  Magazine. 

Eemoval  of  Tartar. — If  50  per  cent,  solution  peroxid 
of  hydrogen  is  prescribed  as  a  mouth-wash  for  several  days 
previous  to  operating,  it  will  greatly  facilitate  scaling  off 
heavy  deposits  of  hard  tartar. — Wallace  Wood,  Jr.,  Den- 
tal Hints. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  for  Superficial  Decay. — Dissolve  the 
nitrate  of  silver  in  alcohol  and  place  in  the  solution  coarse 
particles  of  asbestos.  When  dried,  they  form  a  convenient 
medium  for  the  application  of  nitrate  of  silver. — Dr.  Bliss, 
Pacific  Gazette. 

Adrenalin  Chlorid. — In  cases  where  bleeding  at  the 
gum  margin  has  been  caused  by  removal  of  gum-tissue, 
partly  filling  the  cavity,  the  hemorrhage  is  quickly  checked 
by  the  use  of  adrenalin  chlorid. — Wm.  Pilcher,  Dental 
Summary. 

Acetanilid  in  Toothache. — A  saturated  solution  of 
acetanilid  in  alcohol  with  a  few  drops  of  oil  of  cloves 
forms  an  elegant  preparation  and  meets  many  a  demand. — 
M.  G.  Price,  M.D.,  Medical  Summary. 

Injuries  to  the  Mucous  Membrane. — For  painting  those 
little  breaks  caused  by  the  sharp  edge  of  a  denture  use  com- 
pound tincture  of  iodin. — Dental  Review. 

Mummifying  Paste. — Take  tannic  acid  and  thymol,  of 
each  equal  parts,  with  glycerol  sufficient  quantity  to  make  a 
stifif  paste. — Dental  Brief. 


operative   Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  291 

Canker  Sore  Mouth. — Use  trichloracetic  acid  in  the 
treatment  of  canker  sore  mouth,  which  is  at  times  very 
troublesome  and  painful.  One  or  two  applications  will 
usually  be  sufficient,  using  the  acid  in  small  quantity. — C.  E. 
Drummond,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Treatment  of  Very  Sore  Teeth. — Great  help  follows 
the  use  of  a  string  tied  around  the  tooth,  instructing 
the  patient  to  draw  on  it  until  it  is  real  tight.  The  effect 
will  be  a  revelation. — F.  Milton  Smith,  Internatianal  Den- 
tal Journal. 

Removal  of  Silver  Nitrate  Stain  from  Tooth. — Use 
nitrate  of  silver,  but  as  that  stains  the  teeth  I  change  the 
nitrate  into  iodid  of  silver  by  the  action  of  iodin ;  this  in 
turn  ma}^  be  discharged  by  ammonia,  leaving  the  tooth 
stainless. — H.  C.  Register,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Utilizing  Worn-out  Burs. — Old,  large,  round  burs,  if 
cut  down  one-third  of  the  distance  to  the  shank,  make  a 
bur  which  is  useful  for  making  under-cuts. — H.  S.  Whip- 
ple, Dental  Review. 

The  Lancet. — Use  lancets  with  solid  metal  handles  only. 
They  are  easily  kept  clean.  Keep  the  blade  sharp  and  clean 
by  inserting  it  into  a  cork  when  not  in  use. — Homer 
Almon,  Dental  Review. 

Care  of  the  Handpiece. — Disconnect  the  handpiece  and 
dip  it  in  a  jar  of  alcohol  containing  10  per  cent.  eucal3'^ptus 
oil.  That  is  the  best  solution  for  the  purpose. — L.  M. 
Markham,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Cavities  Extending  Beneath  the  Gum-margin. — When  it 
is  impossible  to  force  back  the  gum  except  by  cutting  and 
turning  back  the  flaps,  it  seems  preferable  to  fill  that  por- 
tion of  the  cavity  which  is  out  of  sight  with  amalgam,  and 
at  a  subsequent  sitting  finish  with  gold.  Do  this  rather 
than  wound  the  festoon  of  the  gum  by  an  incision,  which 
invariably  results  in  recession. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 


292  Practical  Dentistry. 

Treatment  of  Cavities  Extending  Beneath  the  Gum. — 
When  the  whole  proximal  wall  is  involved  and  separation 
required,  remove  the  decay,  break  down  weak  enamel  walls, 
and  pack  with  gutta-percha,  instructing  patient  to  chew  on 
that  side.  A  month  later  pack  in  more  gutta-percha,  and 
the  teeth  will  soon  be  sufficiently  separated  and  the  gum 
tissue  crowded  away  from  the  margins.  Fill  the  gingival 
third  and  then  insert  a  wooden  wedge  to  maintain  space. — 
J.  E.  Nyman,  Dental  Digest. 

Preservation  of  Molars  Decayed  Below  the  Gum  Mar- 
gin.— Fit  a  band  as  though  for  a  gold  cap.  Contour  the 
part  which  is  to  restore  the  decayed  portion  by  soldering 
gold  or  platinum  sufficient  to  knuckle  against  the  adjoining 
tooth.  Solder  to  the  inside  of  the  band  a  platinum  pin  from 
a  broken  porcelain  tooth,  to  project  into  the  cavity.  Adjust 
the  band,  fill  the  cavity  with  cement  and  finish  the  grinding 
surface  with  a  porcelain  block,  pure  gold  or  amalgam. — W. 
Farley,  Items  of  Interest. 

Hypertrophied  Gum. — When  hypertrophied  gum  pre- 
sents between  teeth  and  overlapping  edge  of  cavity  to  be 
filled,  ethylate  of  sodium,  applied  with  a  pellet  of  cotton, 
will  destrov  the  tissue ;  melting  it  into  a  gelatinous  mass. 
It  comes  in  the  form  of  powder,  which,  dissolved  in  alcohol, 
forms  a  red,  syrupy  liquid,  exceedingly  corrosive. — S. 
George  Elliott,  Dental  Review. 

Overcoming  Recession  of  Gum  Tissue. — In  case  of  reces- 
sion of  the  gum  over  the  root  of  an  anterior  tooth  to  be 
crowned,  make  a  horizontal  incision  and  put  in  a  stitch  in 
the  part  of  the  gum  below  the  incision,  tie  it  close  to  the 
tooth,  the  idea  being  that  the  gap  will  fill  in  with  granu- 
lations.— Dr.  Nase,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

To  keep  a  Gingival  Margin  Cavity  dry  without  Rubber- 
dam. — Place  a  napkin  in  position  and  saturate  a  little  floss 
silk  or  small  loosely  twisted  thread  of  absorbent  cotton 
with  thin  cement.  Dry  the  cavity,  and  pack  this  around 
under  the  gum  margin. — R.  E.  Sparks,  Dental  Review. 


operative  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  293 

To  Cleanse  the  Cement  Slab. — Keep  a  bottle  of  ammonia 
water  convenient  for  cleansing  your  cement  slab  and  instru- 
ments.— A.  M.  Jackson,  Dental  World. 

Removal  of  Gum  Tissue  from  Cavity. — Apply  trichlora- 
cetic acid,  which  destroys  all  organic  matter  (but  not  inor- 
ganic). It  does  not  matter  if  it  should  touch  the  pulp.  In 
a  quarter  of  an  hour  you  can  cut  away  without  any  pain. 
In  cases  of  difficult  eruption  of  third  molars,  put  a  few 
crystals  between  gum  and  tooth. — Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Gum  Septum. — No  matter  how  perfectly  a  cavity 
may  be  prepared  and  the  falling  adapted  and  condensed,  the 
operation  must  be  considered  a  failure  unless  the  proximal 
surface  is  so  contoured  that  perfect  protection  is  afforded 
the  gum  septum  and  the  retention  of  food  prevented. — C. 
N.  Johnson,  Dental  Review. 

Overhanging  Gum  Tissue. — In  pulp-canal  preparation 
for  crowning,  in  case  of  overhanging  gum  tissue  a  copper 
tack  with  a  good  supply  of  gutta-percha  will  usually  leave  a 
fair  field  after  being  in  place  some  three  days. — E.  R.  Jeb- 
BiTT,  British  Dental  Journal. 

The  Use  of  Floss  Silk :  Caution. — Some  gums  can  stand 
any  amount  of  irritation  caused  by  floss  silk  snapping  down 
from  the  contact  point  of  the  teeth  and  impinging  on  the 
gums,  but  in  a  mouth  where  the  g^ms  are  easily  irritated 
by  any  mechanical  interference  the  use  of  floss  silk  should 
not  be  advised.  If  used  with  considerable  force  it  may  set 
up  irritation. — Hugo  Frantz,  Dental  Review. 

To  blow  out  the  Chips :  Compressed  Air. — ^Wire  around 
the  engine  cable  down  to  the  point  of  the  hand-piece  a 
small  rubber  tube;  the  diameter  of  the  opening  need  not 
be  more  than  one  thirty-second  of  an  inch.  Turn  on  the 
air-pressure  and  go  ahead  with  the  drilHng.  The  current 
will  keep  the  point  of  operation  in  constant  sight  and  free 
from  chips,  but  will  also  prevent  the  bur  from  heating  and 
thereby  lessen  both  the  pain  and  the  duration  of  the  opera- 
tion.— Geo.  Zederbaum,  Dental  Digest. 


294  Practical  Dentistry. 

Gum  Tissue  in  Buccal  Cavities. — When  the  gum  has 
intruded  into  the  cervical  portion  of  a  cavity,  the  excess  of 
tissue  may  be  burnt  away  with  a  minimum  of  pain  by  means 
of  sodium  ethylate. — Dr.  Robertsham,  Dental  Record: 

A  Simple  Protector  for  the  Hot-air  Syringe. — The  metal 
portion  or  end  of  the  syringe  may  be  covered  with  a  piece  of 
white  rubber  tubing  of  the  same  diameter;  the  tubing  to 
be  about  an  inch  shorter  than  the  metal  end.  When  in  use, 
the  tubing  is  to  be  drawn  up  on  the  metal  toward  the  bulb, 
exposing  the  tip  for  heating;  after  which  the  tubing  is 
pushed  out  so  as  to  cover  the  point,  thus  confining  the  heat 
and,  being  a  non-conductor,  effectually  preventing  the  burn- 
ing of  the  lips  or  mucous  tissue. — Frederick  Crosby 
Brush,  Dental  Brief. 

The  Chip  Blower. — A  nice  unique  way  of  getting  rid 

of  the  very  disagreeable  odor  of  the  chip  blower  is  to  com- 
press the  bulb  and  inject  a  few  drops  of  violet  water  through 
the  tube,  and  the  result  will  be  most  pleasing  to  the  patient 
as  well  as  to  the  operator. — F.  G.  Peirce. 

The  Gates-Glidden  Drill. — In  choosing  drills  select  those 
that  are  made  with  the  shanks  tapering  from  the  head  to  the 
shoulder,  so  that  if  a  break  occurs  it  will  be  at  the  weakest 
point,  the  shoulder,  leaving  the  shank  accessible  so  that  it 
can  be  grasped  with  pliers  and  removed. — S.  J.  Fernandez, 
Dental  Cos)iios. 

Broach  Holder. — To  reach  the  anterior  roots  of  lower 
molars,  and  the  buccal  roots  of  upper  molars,  I  cut  off  the 
Donaldson  broach  in  the  middle  and  affix  a  ball  of  sealing 
wax  to  the  end.  It  is  easy  to  put  on  and  gives  good  grip  to 
the  thumb  and  finger  for  rotating. — T.  B.  Hixman,  Ohio 
Den.  Journal. 

The  Gates  Glidden  Drill. — Where  the  dentin  is  hard  and 
resistant  to  the  drill  it  is  well  to  commence  with  a  fissure 
bur.  after  which  the  drill  will  cut  effectually.  A  small  rose 
bur  will  be  found  useful  in  removing  small  obstacles  in  the 
base  of  the  canal. — S.  J.  Fernandez,  Dental  Cosmos. 


operative   Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  295 

Care  of  the  Handpiece. — After  the  day's  work  take  the 
jacket  off  your  hand-piece  and  clean  the  bearing  carefully; 
place  the  jacket  and  spindle  in  a  drawer  separately  for  a 
night's  rest.  In  the  morning  a  drop  of  oil,  the  parts  put 
together  and  ''it's  just  like  new."  Adjust  the  bearings  when 
needed. — F.  O.  Hetrick^  Western  Dental  Journal. 

The  Mouth  Mirror. — A  thoughtful  and  cleanly  operator 
will  never  think  of  placing  a  mouth  mirror  in  the  mouth  of 
a  patient  without  first  placing  it  in  pure  alcohol,  there  to 
remain  until  needed.  It  can  then  be  dipped  in  water  and 
dried  with  a  napkin. — E.  M.  Kapitan,  Dental  Review. 

In  Using  the  Mallet. — If  you  would  have  your  patient 
thank  you,  use  a  piece  of  cork,  trimmed  square,  between  the 
teeth  when  inserting  a  gold  filling.  The  impact  of  the  mallet 
blows  is  less  severe  on  a  tooth  thus  supported  by  a  cushion 
of  cork. — Dental  Hints. 

To  Deaden  the  Sound  of  a  Mallet. — Tie  over  the  plugger 
a  hood  made  of  several  layers  of  rubber-dam.  This  will 
deaden  the  sound  so  disagreeable  to  many  patients,  appar- 
ently softening  the  blow. — G.  H.  Claude,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Burs  and  Mandrels. — Keep  a  small  jar  of  vaselin  handy 
in  which  to  dip  the  shanks  of  burs  and  mandrels  before 
putting  them  in  the  hand-piece.  It  insures  easy  working 
of  the  hand-piece  and  prevents  the  ingress  of  moisture. — 
R.  H.  Manning,  British  Dental  Journal. 

To  Hold  Napkins  in  Place. — Clamp  the  napkin  to  a 
posterior  tooth  in  operating  on  a  superior  tooth.  This 
affords  a  dry  as  well  as  a  very  light  field  to  work  in,  the 
white  napkin  reflecting  the  light  to  all  parts  of  the  cavity. 
— X.  DoDEL_,  Pointers  for  Dentists. 

The  Moustache. — To  prevent  the  moustache  from  shut- 
ting out  the  light  when  not  using  the  dam,  take  a  strip  of 
white  muslin,  an  inch  wide  and  three  long,  and  draw  the 
moustache  back  with  it,  fastening  it  with  the  dam-holder. 

— F.   C.   NOYES. 


296  Practical  Dentistry, 

Dull  Burs. — The  inverted  cone  burs,  when  dulled,  can 
be  brought  to  renewed  usefulness  by  grinding  the  end  until 
the  dulled  corner  is  ground  away  and  a  new  sharp  corner 
is  made. — Dr.  Matthews,  Western  Dental  Journal, 

To  Clean  an  Oil-stone. — Smear  a  flat  block  of  wood 
with  glycerin  and  fine  pumice,  and  rub  the  stone,  face  down, 
till  all  traces  of  previous  usage  have  disappeared.  This  will 
greatly  improve  the  working  qualities  ©f  the  stone.  To  ruin 
an  oil-stone  clean  it  with  kerosene. — Odonto graphic  Journal. 

Sodium  Dioxid  in  Bleaching  Teeth. — The  best  results 
can  be  obtained  by  placing  the  dry  powder  in  the  cavity  of 
the  tooth  to  be  bleached  and  bring  about  the  action  by  drop- 
ping distilled  water  on  the  powder.  Place  a  thin  platinum 
ribbon  between  the  discolored  tooth  and  the  adjacent  tooth, 
extending  above  or  below  the  cutting  edge,  pressing  warmed 
white  gutta-percha  against  the  lingual  surface  to  form  a 
pocket  in  which  the  powder  is  placed,  using  a  little  gold  or 
platinum  spoon.  It  can  be  worked  into  the  root  with  a 
glass  rod  which  has  been  drawn  out  to  a  point.  The  plat- 
inum ribbon  can  be  so  bent  as  to  enclose  the  cavity  while 
the  reaction  is  taking  place. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

Worn-out  Gates-Glidden  Drills. — When  utterly  worn 
out,  drills  can  still  be  made  to  render  useful  service  by 
grinding  them  to  a  spear-point  upon  the  lathe  stone.  In 
this  shape  they  are  very  useful  in  alveolar  abscess,  where 
it  is  to  be  approached  from  the  outside,  through  the  alveolar 
process. — S.  J.  Fernandez,  Dental  Cosmos, 

Filling  after  Bleaching. — Having  restored  the  tooth 
to  normal  color,  wash  thoroughly  and  let  dry  slowly.  When 
dry  force  a  paste  of  precipitated  calcium  phosphate  and  dis- 
tilled water  up  into  the  canal  and  burnish  it  against  all  ex- 
posed dentin.  Dry  this  thoroughly  and  use  a  light  colored 
cement  as  a  basis  for  the  final  filling,  which  should  be 
inserted  before  the  rubber-dam  is  removed. — J.  P.  Bugkley, 
Dental  Reziew. 


operative   Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  297 

Sterilized  Brushes. — Tests  with  a  large  number  of 
brushes  showed  that  boiling  them  for  ten  minutes  in  a  i 
per  cent,  solution  of  soda,  keeping  them  afterward  in  a 
i-iooo  solution  sublimate,  sterilized  them,  in  respect  to  the 
pathogenic  germs  usually  encountered,  with  complete  suc- 
cess and  without  injury  to  the  brush. — ^A.  Winternitz, 
Journal  Ametican  Medical  Association. 

A  Substitute  for  tlie  Diamond  Disk. — A  small  disk  of 
thin  copper,  used  with  water  or  oil,  will  cut  as  perfectly 
as  a  diamond  disk,  and  even  more  quickly. — H.  E.  Roberts, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Scaling  the  Teeth. — Make  a  paste  of: 

White  vaselin  3  i 

Cocain    grs.  xiv 

Menthol    grs.  xxiv 

Oil  of  peppermint grs.  x 

Chloretone    grs.  ix 

Phenol    grs.  ii 

Before  scaling  the  teeth,  apply  this  antiseptic  and 
anaesthetic  paste  by  rubbing  it  into  the  spaces  between  the 
teeth  and  on  the  gums. — Dentists'  Magazine. 

Bleaching  Teeth. — It  is  folly  to  expect  a  tooth  to  re- 
main bleached  unless  the  dentin  is  properly  protected.  The 
teeth  which  I  attempt  to  bleach  are  those  that  have  a  good 
bulk  of  dentin  which,  if  restored  to  its  original  color,  can 
be  protected  by  the  remaining  enamel  and  some  filling- 
material,  preferably  porcelain. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Painful  Dentition. — Relief  may  be  given  by  frequently 
washing  out  the  mouth  and  rubbing  the  gums  with  the  fol- 
lowing preparation,  which  has  proven  very  beneficial: 

IJ.    Eucain  hydrochlorate    2  grs. 

Chloroform    15  min. 

Glycerin    6  drams. 

Extract  rosse  5  drops. 

— Items  of  Interest. 
20 


29B  Practical  Dentistry. 

Bleaching  Stained  Enamel. — Apply  the  rubber-dam  and 
dry  with  air  as  hot  as  the  patient  can  comfortably  bear. 
Then  lay  upon  the  stain  a  thin  layer  of  cotton  soaked  in 
twenty-five  per  cent,  pyrozone  and  place  on  it  a  broad,  flat, 
hot  instrument,  so  that  the  steam  of  the  pyrozone  will  be 
driven  into  the  enamel.  Continue  for  about  ten  minutes. 
Then  remove  the  cotton,  and  with  a  heated  ball  burnisher 
iron  over  the  stain,  driving  out  the  pyrozone.  Continue 
this  for  an  hour,  and  then  dismiss  the  patient,  to  return 
after  an  interval  of  not  less  than  two  days,  to  provide  against 
possible  disturbance  of  the  pulp.  Three  or  four  such  sittings 
usually  give  satisfactory  results.  If  necessary,  oxalic  acid 
may  be  used  at  the  last  sitting,  but  the  pyrozone  is  usually 
sufficient. — Joseph  Head,  Dental  Digest. 

Pulp-capping  Paste. — 

Trioxymethylene   (paraform,  triformol) 16  gm 

Pure  vaselin 8  gm 

Inert  powder    6  gm 

Cocain  hydrochlorate 2  gm 

Pitsch  uses  the  above  paste  for  capping  pulps  when  in 

a   healthy   condition,   and   for  filling  pulp-canals   after  the 

ordinary  antiseptic  treatment. — A.  Andre,   L'Odonto'.ogie. 

Aluminumized  Gutta-percha  Fillings. — 

IJ.    White   gutta-percha    8  parts. 

Aluminum   filings    5  parts. 

Oxid   of   zinc    I  part. 

Whiting    V2  part. 

Easily  manipulated,  and  when  firmly  packed  holds  its 
position  well  in  the  cavity  without  bulging. — F.  W.  Bliss, 
Pacific  Medical  Dental  Gazette. 

Devitalizing  Paste. — 

R.     Arsenic    grs.  xv. 

Acetate    of    morphia     grs.  v. 

Wood  creosote   q.  s. 

To  make  thin  paste. 
To  which  add  enough  powdered  alum  to  make  a  stiff 
paste. — W.  A.  Mills,  Dental  News. 


PART   II 

CHAPTER  I 


PROSTHETIC  DENTISTRY 


CONSTRUCTION    OF    DENTURES,    ENTIRE,  FULL  AND 
PARTIAL    MISCELLANEOUS  INFORMA- 
TION—IMPRESSIONS 


Magnesium  Hydrate  to  Facilitate  Removal  of  Plaster 
From  Mouth. — If  the  remaining  teeth  are  short  and  straigh., 
and  no  wedge-shaped  spaces  or  undercuts  are  formed  be- 
tween them,  Httle  difficulty  will  be  experienced.  When  the 
teeth  are  long,  or  when  they  incline  toward  each  other  and 
form  dovetail  spaces,  or  when  several  teeth  are  loose,  then 
the  condition  is  more  complicated  and  must  be  dealt  with  ac- 
cordingly. A  good  expedient  in  all  cases  of  impression- 
taking  for  partial  cases  is  to  have  the  patient  rinse  the 
mouth  with  milk  of  magnesia  just  before  taking  the  im- 
pression.— J.  F.  Wessels,  Brief. 

Plaster  Impressions. — Coat  the  tray  with  vaselin  and 
cover  with  a  layer  of  thin,  but  strong,  gauze,  previously 
soaked  in  water,  allowing  the  gauze  to  project  beyond  the 
margin  and  over  the  sides  of  the  tray.  Let  the  plaster  first 
poured  be  very  liquid  so  that  the  gauze  may  rise  slightly; 
when  the  tray  is  filled  the  gauze  will  be  enmeshed  in  the 
plaster.  Remove  when  thoroughly  hardened.  Though 
fractured,  not  a  piece  will  be  lost,  all  the  sections  being 
held  together  by  the  gauze,  and  an  accurate  reassembling 
of  the  pieces  is  readily  secured. — Dental  Cosmos. 

299 


300  Practical  Dentistry. 

Taking  Impression  of  Mouth  with  Very  High  Vault. — A 
flat  piece  of  copper  or  German  silver  plate,  shaped  like  the 
outline  of  the  letter  U,  and  of  size  to  approximately  fit 
against  the  sides  of  the  vault,  some  distance  below  its 
deepest  portion,  and  to  which  is  afifixed  a  removable 
handle  of  heavy  copper  wire  bent  at  right  angles,  is 
used  to  carry  a  body  of  plaster  to  the  high,  inacces- 
sible part  of  the  palate.  When  the  plaster  has  hardened 
the  handle  is  withdrawn,  leaving  the  plate  and  plaster  in  po- 
sition; the  major  part  of  the  impression  is  then  taken  in 
the  usual  way,  and  the  complete  impression,  in  two  pieces, 
removed  and  fitted  together  out  of  the  mouth. — Dr.  To- 
il asku.  Dental  Record. 

For  Removing  Plaster  Impressions  from  the  Mouth. — 
The  best  instrument  on  the  market  for  removing  plaster  im- 
pressions from  the  mouth  is  a  wax  spatula  with  one  end 
pointed  and  the  other  broad  and  curved.  After  the  tray  is 
removed  from  the  mouth,  the  pointed  end  of  the  spatula  is 
used  to  groove  the  impression  when  it  is  desired  to  have  it 
break,  and  then  the  broad  end  is  introduced  into  the  groove, 
and  with  a  slight  prying  or  twisting  movement  the  fracture 
is  accomplished,  and  the  pieces  removed.  The  curve  of  the 
instrument  is  well  adapted  for  guiding  pieces  out  of  the 
mouth,  as  well  as  for  hooking  them  out  of  the  palate. — Wm. 
Ernest  Walker. 

Impressions  of  the  Lower  Jaw. — When  taking  an  im- 
pression of  the  lower  jaw  in  either  wax  or  modeling  com- 
pound, it  is  necessary  that  the  cheek  on  either  side  be 
pulled  out  by  inserting  the  finger  along  the  buccal  side 
of  the  impression  tray  so  as  to  lift  out  the  fold  of  the 
muscles  that  may  have  been  caught  under  the  edge  of  the 
tray  and  material.  The  patient  should  also  be  instructed 
to  raise  the  tongue  from  the  floor  of  the  mouth  and  extend 
it,  so  as  to  prevent  the  impression  from  impinging  upon 
the  muscles  beneath  the  tongue. — J.  F.  Wessels,  Dental 
Brief. 


Impressions.  301 

A  New  Impression  Material. — A  specially  prepared 
sealing-wax,  made  from  pure  lac,  is  recommended  as  com- 
bining all  the  essentials  of  an  impression  material.  It  is 
not  liable  to  fracture,  as  does  plaster ;  does  not  drag  or  bend 
on  removal  from  the  mouth;  softens  readily  and  remains 
plastic  long  enough  to  take  any  impression,  or  impression 
and  bite  combined.  It  is  found  to  be  all  that  could  be  de- 
sired, and  superior  to  anything  hitherto  tried,  and  suitable 
to  all  the  purposes  for  which  such  material  is  required. — 
John  Girdwood,  American  Dental  Revieiv. 

Relief  of  Sensitive  Palate. — For  a  patient  who  cannot 
endure  "taking  an  impression,"  trim  a  sheet  of  "dainty-wax" 
to  proper  outline,  warm  until  it  yields  to  pressure,  and  mold 
it  over  the  palate  and  around  the  arch,  in  the  form  of  a  base- 
plate. It  is  smooth  to  the  tongue,  can  be  made  thin  and 
light,  and  with  care  can  be  worn  long  enough  to  accustom 
the  wearer  to  the  presence  of  something  unusual  in  the 
mouth,  as  a  preparation  for  taking  an  impression.  Of 
course,  it  should  be  removed  when  eating. — W.  D.  Cov^an, 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

A  Hint  on  Impression  Taking. — Where  impressions  are 
taken  of  mouths  having  a  high  arch  I  have  found  it  very 
helpful  to  insert  a  little  plaster  with  a  spatula  before  plac- 
ing in  the  cup.  It  avoids  the  necessity  for  using  a  large 
bulk  of  plaster  in  the  cup  and  simplifies  the  operation.  In 
partial  lowers,  also,  this  same  plan  works  admirably.  But 
no  matter  what  the  case  may  be,  if  an  accurate  impression 
is  desired  plaster  is  by  far  the  best  material. — E.  S.  Gay- 
lord,  Dental  Brief. 

Nausea  Produced  by  the  Insertion  of  Impression  Ma- 
terial.— This  tendency  can  be  overcome  by  gargling  with 
camphor  water,  or  the  use  of  a  little  cocain  in  solution  on 
the  palate,  also  by  manipulating  the  palate  with  the  end  of 
the  finger  or  a  feather  previous  to  taking  the  impression ;  a 
few  doses  of  sodium  bromid  are  also  efficacious. — J.  F. 
Wessels,  Brief. 


302  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Remove  Difficult  Plaster  Impressions  from  the 
Mouth. — Slightly  oil  the  impression  cup  before  pouring  the 
plaster.  When  set  hard,  slip  the  cup  off,  and  with  a 
pointed  spatula  or  knife  cut  grooves  in  the  plaster,  not 
quite  cutting  through.  Following  the  grooves  first  break 
away  the  interior  piece,  then  the  lateral  pieces.  The  re- 
maining piece,  covering  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  may  then  be 
readily  worked  loose.  The  four  pieces  are  readily  united 
again. — Geo.  D,  Setherwood. 

Partial  Impressions. — To  prevent  adhesion  of  plaster  to 
the  teeth  in  taking  partial  impressions,  request  the  patient 
to  hold  milk  of  magnesia  in  the  mouth  until  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  plaster.  Upon  removal  the  impression  will  be 
found  sharp  and  smooth.  The  film  of  magnesia  adherent  to 
the  teeth  prevents  the  plaster  from  sticking  while  harden- 
ing, but  makes  no  appreciable  difference  in  fit  of  plate. — H. 
H.  Johnson,  Dental  World. 

To  Release  a  Plaster  Impression. — The  strong  adherence 
of  plaster  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  sometimes  encountered, 
is  due  to  the  plaster  having  absorbed  the  moisture  from  the 
tissues.  The  remedy  is,  when  the  plaster  is  quite  hard,  to 
insert  nozzle  of  water  syringe  under  the  edge  of  the  impres- 
sion and  gently  force  in  a  little  water.  Repeat  all  around, 
and  the  impression  will  usually  drop  down  without  pulling. 
— D.  L.  Aber,  Dental  Digest. 

Accurate  Partial  Impressions. — Either  the  cup  must 
conform  very  closely  to  the  mouth  or  a  preliminary  im- 
pression of  composition  must  be  taken  and,  after  being 
drilled  out  of  the  mouth,  cut  away  slightly  over  the  whole 
surface  for  the  addition  of  a  thin  layer  of  soft  composition 
for  the  final  accurate  impression,  the  hardened  composition 
serving  merely  as  an  addition  to  the  cup  to  force  the  soft 
composition  into  all  the  inequalities. — S.  E.  Davenport, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


Impressions.  303 

Sterilized  Impression  Trays  and  Impression  Material. — 

Impression  trays  should  be  thoroughly  washed  and  polished 
when  the  impression  material  has  been  removed.  Impres- 
sion material  may  be  effectively  sterilized  without  damage 
by  placing  it  in  a  double  saucepan  with  a  lid  having  a  hole 
in  it  for  a  thermometer  and  keeping  it  at  a  temperature  of 
160°  F.  for  an  hour  and  a  half. — J.  H.  Babcock,  British 
Dental  Journal. 

Impressions  for  Partial  Plates. — Take  an  impression 
with  No.  2  modeling  compound,  and,  while  warm,  trim  out 
all  the  impression  of  the  teeth,  as  well  as  part  of  the  entire 
impression,  undercutting  around  the  rim.  This  makes  a  cup 
that  fits  the  mouth  exactly.  Fill  about  half  full  of  plaster 
and  press  home.  Hold  steady  till  it  sets,  and  nine  times  out 
of  ten  you  can  remove  without  breaking. — L.  E.  Jenkins,  in 
Items  of  Interest. 

Taking  an  Upper  Impression. — Having  the  grooves  of 
the  tray  filled  with  the  plaster  and  placed  where  it  may  be 
readily  reached,  fill  the  buccal  and  labial  spaces,  using  a  bone 
spatula  to  insure  ease  of  application  and  cleanliness,  work- 
ing the  plaster  carefully  under  the  cheeks  and  lips,  and 
expelling  all  the  air;  then  place  the  tray  firmly  in  position 
and  give  sufficient  time  for  the  plaster  to  harden  before 
the  tray  is  removed. — Alfred  P.  Rogers,  Items  of  Interest. 

In  Case  of  Gagging. — Dismiss  the  patient  with  instruc- 
tions to  massage  the  palate  with  the  finger  frequently. 
When  this  can  be  done  without  discomfort  an  impression 
can  be  taken,  but  until  the  patient  can  bear  the  finger  on  the 
roof  of  the  mouth  there  is  no  use  in  making  a  plate. — H.  D. 
Mann,  Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Partial  Impressions  in  Plaster. — Vaselining  the  teeth, 
especially  for  a  second  impression  at  the  same  sitting,  gives 
a  sharper  impression  and  greatly  facilitates  the  removal  of 
the  plaster.  Apply  the  smallest  quantity  of  vaselin,  in  the 
meshes  of  a  bit  of  cotton;  this  fully  realizes  all  reasonable 
expectations. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 


304  Practical  Dentistry. 

Lower  Impressions. — Before  pressing  the  tray  down  on 
the  alveolar  ridge  direct  the  patient  to  raise  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  This  will  draw  the 
lingual  muscles  from  under  the  tray,  while  the  other 
muscles  will  be  in  normal  position.  This  is  particularly 
desirable  in  flat  mouths. — Frank  Fount,  Dental  Century. 

Impression  Trays. — Faulty  models  are  often  the  result 
of  using  an  upper  tray  the  rim  of  which  is  so  high  that  it 
forces  the  lip  upward,  carrying  with  it  the  gum  over  the 
alveolus  of  the  anterior  portion  of  the  arch.  This  is  also 
often  distorted  by  stiff  plaster  or  modeling  compound, 
which  flattens  or  protrudes  it. — Dental  Register. 

Impression  Material. — An  impression  material  which 
will  take  sharp,  smooth  impressions.  For  use  in  gold 
crown  work  mix  fine  plaster,  12  oz.,  with  fine  marble  dust, 
3  oz.,  and  whiting,  i  oz. ;  tint  with  powdered  carmine  and 
flavor  with  oil  of  sassafras.  Keep  in  a  tight  tin  can. — W. 
T.  Wallace,  Items  of  Interest. 

Taking  Impressions. — In  cases  which  are  extremely 
sensitive  and  easily  nauseated,  sponge  the  mouth  with 
hydrogen  dioxid  and  apply  a  i  to  100  solution  of  eucain 
to  the  whole  palate.  This  will  relieve  the  most  exagger- 
ated cases  of  palatal  sensitivity. — T.  B.  Hartzell,  Texas 
Dental  Journal. 

Upper  Impressions. — If  it  is  found  difficult  to  remove 
an  impression  for  full  superior  denture,  have  the  patient 
close  the  lips  and  blow  with  sufficient  force  to  distend  the 
cheeks  and  the  impression  will  drop  down,  no  matter  how 
tight  it  may  have  been. — R,  C.  Traynham,  Practical  Dental 
Journal. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  of  Impression  Material  to  the 
Teeth. — Request  the  patient  to  hold  a  little  milk  of  mag- 
nesia in  the  mouth  for  a  few  minutes.  This  will  cleanse  the 
teeth  and  mucous  surfaces  of  adherent  secretions  and  give 
a  clear,  sharp  impression. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 


Impressions.  305 

Impression  Plaster. — Oil  of  wintergreen  added  to  dental 
plaster  for  impressions  makes  it  less  unpleasant  to  the  pa- 
tient. Use  several  drops  for  about  six  quarts  of  fine  plaster ; 
work  it  well  and  sift  into  the  can. — Jacob  Senty,  Dental 
Century. 

Impression  Plaster. — Where  there  are  heavy  undercuts, 
or  teeth  standing  alone,  mix  with  plaster  of  paris  one- 
third  its  bulk  of  finely  powdered  pumice.  It  breaks  readily, 
while  giving  as  clear  an  impression  as  plaster  alone. — 
Lauritz  Basgard,  Items  of  Interest. 

Plaster  of  Paris  Impressions. — Let  the  patient  thor- 
oughly rinse  out  the  mouth  with  a  little  milk  immediately 
before  the  tray  is  inserted  instead  of  using  vaselin  or  glyc- 
erin, either  of  which  is  objectionable  to  many  patients. — H. 
W.  Greenfield,  Ash's  Quarterly. 

How  to  Make  a  Right  and  Left  Lower  Partial  Tray. — 

Take  an  ordinary  flat-bottom  tray  and  with  a  hack-saw  cut 
midway  through  the  handle.  This  makes  two  good  partials 
at  the  expense  of  one.— C.  Wesley  Sufpin,  Dental  Brief. 

Plaster  Impressions. — To  overcome  the  unpleasant 
taste  of  plaster,  add  one  or  two  drops  of  the  oil  of  winter- 
green,  or  eucalyptus,  or  peppermint,  as  the  patient  may 
prefer. — W.  W.  Keizer,  Dental  Record. 

To  Relieve  Tendency  to  Gag  or  Vomit. — Administer 
oxalate  of  cerium  in  one-grain  doses,  or  the  aromatic  spirits 
of  ammonia,  one-half  to  two  drachms  in  an  ounce  or  more 
of  water. — I.  Robert  Megraw,   Western  Dental  lournal. 

To  Prevent  Nausea  in  Impression  Taking. — Dipping 
the  tray  into  strong  vinegar  before  inserting  it  in  the  pa- 
tient's mouth  will  prevent  any  ordinary  case  of  gagging. — 
Dominion  Dental  lournal. 

To  IVEake  Partial  Lower  Impression  Tray. — With  hack 
saw  cut  midway  through  handle  of  fiat  bottom  lower  tray. 
This  makes  two  partial  at  expense  of  one. — C.  W.  Siefkill, 
Rolfe,  Iowa. 


3o6  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Prevent  Nausea  When  Taking  Impressions. — Have 
the  patient  thoroug-hly  rinse  the  mouth  with  brandy  or  al- 
cohol and  water,  half  and  half.  This  will  benumb  the  tis- 
sue so  efficiently  as  to  prevent  retching  in  all  but  the  very 
worst  cases. — Mark  Hayter,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

To  Remove  Plaster  Impression  from  Impression  Cup. — 
Cut  off  overhanging  surplus ;  hold  the  cup  over  a  flame,  and 
the  plaster  will  fall  out. — Dominion  Doital  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Gagging. — Bathe  the  roof  of  the  mouth 
with  a  menthol  solution  applied  on  a  pledget  of  cotton  be- 
fore inserting  the  impression  tray. — Dental  Summary 

Impression  Taking. — In  proportion  as  it  would  be  diffi- 
cult to  remove  an  impression,  plaster  of  paris  becomes 
needful. — R.  Ottolexgui,  Dental  Cosmos. 

PLASTER  CAST— ARTICULATING  MODELS 

To  Mend  Broken  Plaster  Casts. — Paint  the  broken  sur- 
faces over  two  or  three  times  with  very  thick  shellac  var- 
nish, and  at  each  application  burn  out  the  alcohol  over  a 
flame.  When  the  shellac  is  sufficiently  soft,  press  the  parts 
together  and  hold  in  position  till  cool.  It  will  be  as  strong 
as  before  breaking. — Atlanta  Dental  Journal. 

Repairing  Broken  Plaster  Models. — Attach  weak  or  bro- 
ken models  to  be  articulator  by  setting  in  a  soft  mat  of 
modeling  composition,  instead  of  a  mix  of  plaster.  They 
are  easily  detached  by  softening  the  composition  in  hot 
water,  while  in  separating  from  plaster  breakage  is  almost 
sure  to  occur. — B.  H.  Teague,  Dental  Hints. 

To  Secure  a  Perfect  Plaster  Cast. — Never  pour  newly 
mixed  plaster  on  an  impression  without  first  thoroughly 
soaking  the  latter  in  water.  If  this  is  not  done  the  dry 
impression  will  absorb  the  water  from  the  freshly  mixed 
plaster,  while  the  displaced  air  from  the  former,  being  forced 
into  the  latter,  results  in  an  imperfect  cast. — D.  D.  Atkin- 
son, Am.  Den.  Weekly, 


Casts  and  Models.  307 

To  Separate  Cast  from  Impression. — When  dry  stain  the 
impression  with  thin  shellac.  Spread  a  thin  film  of  wax 
along  the  edge  of  the  impression  and  soak  for  two  or  three 
minutes  in  a  solution  of  soap.  Just  before  pouring  wash  off 
the  soap  with  a  dash  of  cold  water.  Dry  well,  then  immerse 
for  a  minute  or  two  in  boiling  water.  The  impression  can 
be  easily  broken  from  the  cast. — W.  Buzzell,  Ohio  Den. 
Journal. 

"Taking  the  Bite." — Chill  the  wax  on  the  rim  and  try 
in  the  mouth,  cutting  the  wax  down  until  the  antagonizing 
teeth  all  touch,  and  the  mouth  when  the  lips  are  closed 
assumes  a  natural  appearance.  Remove  and  place  a  layer 
of  softened  wax  on  the  hard  rim ;  when  the  teeth  are  closed 
they  cannot  penetrate  into  the  hard  portion,  and  you  will 
have  maintained  the  desired  distance  apart. — J.  C.  Curtis, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Utilize  Cuttings  of  "Ideal  Base  Plate."— Put  the 
scraps  in  a  small  pan,  which  place  in  a  larger  pan  with  suffi- 
cient water  in  the  latter  to  cover  all.  Use  a  glazed  tile  or 
glass  slab  as  cover.  Boil  until  the  base  plate  is  quite  soft. 
Place  the  mass  on  the  cover  while  both  are  still  hot  and  roll 
with  porcelain  roller  and  cut  into  squares.  Better  than  when 
new,  as  it  is  less  brittle. — John  Cromar,  The  Dentist. 

Impressions  and  Bites. — In  taking  impressions  and  bites 
in  wax  or  gutta-percha  or  modeling  compounds,  requiring 
heat  for  their  plasticity,  turn  on  compressed  air  and  you 
cool  off  the  miass  in  a  minute,  getting  a  sharper  impression 
as  the  result,  and  the  patient  will  not  spoil  the  impression  by 
involuntarily  closing  the  mouth  or  changing  the  relative 
position  of  the  jaws  in  case  of  bite. — Geo.  Zeduhanne, 
Dental  Digest. 

To  Make  Hard  Plaster  Models. — Mix  the  plaster  of 
Paris  with  cne-sixth  of  its  volume  of  pulverized  slaked 
lime.  After  the  model  is  dried  place  it  in  a  10  per  cent, 
solution  of  zinc  sulphate  until  it  is  thoroughly  saturated. 
Remove  and  dry. — Dental  Era. 


3o8  Practical  Dentistry. 

A   Cause    of    Faulty    Articulation    in    Dentures. — One 

source  of  danger  lies  in  the  flask.  When  a  flask  has  been 
used  for  some  time  the  guide-posts  become  worn  or  cor- 
roded and  cannot  be  relied  on  to  draw  the  two  sections  of 
the  flask  together  in  exactly  the  same  position  as  before 
removal  of  wax,  and  the  cusps  fail  to  intermesh  correctly. — 
T.  J.  Spence,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Trial  Plates. — I  much  prefer  a  swaged  plate  made  of 
block  tin.  They  are  made  to  the  approximate  thickness  of 
the  intended  vulcanite,  and  I  find  them  very  satisfactory  in 
adjusting  to  the  mouth,  in  getting  the  articulation,  and  ad- 
justing the  teeth  when  they  are  waxed  in  place. — Wm.  H. 
Trueman,  International  Dental  Journal. 

"Taking  the  Bite." — In  taking  a  bite  request  patient 
to  press  the  tip  of  the  tongue  tightly  against  the  posterior 
border  of  the  trial  plate,  impressing  upon  him  the  importance 
of  keeping  the  mind  on  this  procedure.  After  this  ask  him 
to  close  the  jaws;  the  resultant  bite  is  almost  always  correct. 
— Hugo  Franz,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Taking  the  Bite. — It  is  much  better  to  take  an  im- 
pression before  extracting  the  teeth,  cutting  the  teeth  down 
to  the  gum  line  on  the  model.  By  taking  the  bite  before 
extraction  you  get  a  correct  closure  of  the  jaws,  and  have 
a  guide  to  go  by.  There  is  also  less  liability  of  soreness 
and  inflammation. — W.  H.  Weaver,  Dental  World. 

Models  from  Plaster  Impressions. — Varnish  the  impres- 
sion with  thin  collodion ;  dust  this  surface  with  talcum, 
brushing  away  all  loose  powder  with  a  large  camel's-hair 
brush.  The  model  made  from  this  impression  will  have  a 
hard,  smooth,  almost  polished  surface. — D.  H.  Paine, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Cement  for  Broken  Casts. — Dissolve  sheet  celluloid  in 
ether,  making  a  thick  creamy  paste.  Coat  the  broken  sur- 
faces thickly  and  hold  together  for  a  few  minutes ;  allow  to 
harden  not  less  than  three  minutes  before  handling. — Dental 
Weekly. 


Casts  and  Models.  309 

Trial  Base  Plate:  Arranging  the  Teeth. — Warm  each 
tooth  in  the  flame  and  then  put  a  cold  stick  of  wax  against  it 
until  it  melts,  smearing  the  surface  to  be  attached  to  the 
wax ;  this  gives  an  attachment  of  the  teeth  to  the  base  plate 
that  moisture  will  not  penetrate  when  trying  the  teeth  in 
the  mouth. — W,  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Review. 

Perfect  Models. — To  avoid  the  imperfections  of  poured 
plaster  models  galvanoplastic  methods  have  given  perfect 
satisfaction,  with  absolutely  accurate  results.  There  is  but 
one  drawback,  and  that  is  that  it  takes  about  eight  days  to 
make  the  model. — Dr.  Poinsot,  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  Correct  Bite. — In  taking  a  bite  instruct  the  patient 
to  extend  the  jaw  as  far  as  possible  (as  they  always  do); 
then  have  him  relax  the  muscles  and  bite  gently  on  the 
wax,  and  you  will  have  a  correct  'bite. — Gustavus  North, 
Cedar  Rapids,  Iowa. 

To  Harden  and  Protect  Plaster  Casts. — In  an  ordinary 
cabinetmaker's  glue-pot,  melt  in  the  inner  pot  stearin. 
Have  the  plaster  model  perfectly  dry  and  warm  and  place 
it,  for  from  five  to  ten  minutes,  in  the  melted  stearin. 
When  cool  the  model  will  be  found  to  have  a  marbleized 
appearance,  and  may  be  used  for  fitting  clasps  and  bands 
without  injury  to  the  teeth. — William  Mitchell,  Dental 
Register. 

To  Keep  from  Losing  Bite. — Before  the  bite  is  re- 
moved from  the  models  on  articulator,  with  an  ordinary  car- 
penter's compass  extending  from  one  model  to  the  other 
make  a  slight  depression  with  points.  This  will  serve  as  a 
guide  after  the  wax  is  removed  if  in  any  way  the  bite  is 
lost. — C.  W.  SiEFKiN,  Rolfe,  Iowa. 

Matrix  for  Pouring  a  Model. — Dip  in  melted  wax  until 
saturated  a  strip  of  tape  two  inches  wide  and  about  eleven 
inches  long ;  allow  it  to  cool.  When  wanted  warm  it  slightly 
and  place  around  the  impression  tray,  to  which  it  will  con- 
form without  sticking  to  the  plaster  when  poured,  making 
a  good  matrix  rim. — G.  E.  Truitt,  Dental  Cosmos. 


3 TO  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Articulator. — All  cases  in  bridge-work  involving 
posterior  teeth  should  be  mounted  and  constructed  upon  an 
articulator  which  affords  lateral  movements,  as  many  fail- 
ures in  bridge-work  can  be  attributed  directly  to  faulty  oc- 
clusion, and  success  of  all  such  cases  depends  largely  upon 
the  degree  of  accuracy  in  this  particular. — H.  J.  Goslee, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Handy  Application  of  Varnish  to  Casts. — A  pellet  of 
cotton,  held  with  a  pair  of  pliers,  is  superior  to  a  camel's- 
hair  pencil,  for  applying  varnish  and  oil  to  casts,  etc.,  and 
there  is  not  the  trouble  of  loosened  hairs. — The  Phagocyte. 

Repair  of  Broken  Model. — Mend  a  broken  model  with 
thin  oxyphosphate  cement,  allowing  it  to  harden  thor- 
oughly. It  will  not  break  again  in  the  same  place. — 
Dental  Century. 

Porous  Plaster  Models. — Dust  the  surface  over  with 
soapstone,  filling  in  the  pores.  You  will  then  get  a  beautiful 
cast  every  time. — J.  E.  Nyman,  Dental  Review. 

Hard  Models. — Alum  makes  models  harder  for  rubber 
work. — Dental  Clippings. 

To  Obtain  Duplicates  of  Plaster  Models. — Soak  about 
150  leaves  of  common  gelatin  in  cold  water  for  one  or  two 
hours,  gradually  adding  four  or  five  ounces  of  oil,  constantly 
stirring.  Place  the  model  in  an  enameled  vessel  and  pour 
the  above  mixture  over  it.  After  about  three  hours  it  will 
have  hardened,  when  the  model  may  be  removed  and  any 
number  can  be  poured. — F.  A.  B.,  Dental  OfUce  and  Labora- 
tory. 

Matrix  for  Pouring  Model. — ^A  strip  of  tea  lead,  two 
inches  wide  and  eleven  inches  long,  makes  a  good  matrix 
when  pouring  a  plaster  model  in  an  impression.  It  con- 
forms to  the  shape  of  the  tray  and  does  not  adhere  to  the 
plaster. — C.  Y.  Siefkin,  Rolfe,  Iowa. 


Partial  Impressions.  31 1 

PARTIAL  IMPRESSIONS 

Wax  for  Partial  Impressions. — IMelt  together  one  pound 
of  beeswax  and  one  ounce  of  resin  and  run  it  into  a  cake 
a  quarter  of  an  inch  thick.  Warm  the  wax,  place  in  im- 
pression cup  and  push  gently  and  firmly  to  place  in  the 
mouth.  Cool  in  the  mouth  and  remove ;  cut  away  to  an 
eighth  of  an  inch  deep  on  all  parts  where  the  plate  is  to 
bear  on  the  mucous  membrane.  Then  roughen  the  surface 
by  running  a  knife  into  the  wax  so  that  plaster  will  hold 
tightly  to  the  wax ;  heat  the  cup  so  that  the  wax  will  adhere 
to  it,  and  pour  moderately  thin  plaster  on  such  portions 
as  require  the  best  possible  adaptability,  but  not  into  the 
depressions  made  by  the  teeth.  Insert  in  mouth,  with  the 
teeth  for  a  guide,  and  let  it  remain  until  the  plaster  in  the 
bowl  breaks  with  sharp  fracture. — D.  J.  McMillen,  West- 
ern Dental  Journal. 

Taking  Impressions  of  the  Lower  Jaw  with  Modeling 
Compound  or  "Wax. — When  taking  an  impression  of  the 
lower  jaw  in  either  wax  or  modeling  compound,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  the  cheek  on  each  side  be  pulled  out  by  inserting  the 
finger  along  the  buccal  side  of  the  impression  tray  so  as  to 
lift  out  the  fold  of  the  muscles  that  may  have  been  caught 
under  the  edge  of  the  tray  and  material.  The  patient  should 
also  be  instructed  to  raise  the  tongue  from  the  floor  of  the 
mouth  and  extend  it,  so  as  to  prevent  the  impression  from 
impinging  upon  the  muscles  beneath  the  tongue. — J.  F. 
Wessels,  Dental  Brief. 

Impression  of  Modeling  Compounds. — Secure  impres- 
sion as  usual.  When  hard,  trim  away  surplus,  soften  surface 
(only),  and  while  warm  return  to  mouth  and  press  firmlv 

home. — W.  E.  Robertson,  Aincricaii  Jourruil. 

Modeling  Compound. — To  marble  dust  add  sufficient 
glycerin  to  produce  a  moldable  material. — B.  J.  Cicrand, 
Dental  Dis^est. 


3'I2  Practical  Dentistry. 

Modeling  Composition. — In  spite  of  a  rather  general 
feeling  to  the  contrary,  the  successful  handUng  of  composi- 
tion requires  quite  as  much  skill  as  does  plaster.  The 
greater  one's  experience  with  it,  the  more  positive  becomes 
the  opinion  that  the  best  results  are  to  be  obtained,  when  the 
least  thickness  possible  of  the  softened  material  is  used. — 
S.  E.  Davenport,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Stanno-percha. — Stanno-percha  is  prepared  by  mixing 
in  a  mortar,  in  a  sand-bath,  equal  parts  of  pink  gutta- 
percha and  sponge-tin  and  the  two  ingredients  thoroughly 
rubbed  until  the  whole  mass  assumes  a  greyish  color.  One- 
half  of  the  mass  is  removed  from  the  mortar  for  use  as 
cavity  lining;  that  which  remains  in  the  mortar  is  mixed 
with  an  additional  amount  of  tin  and  used  to  complete  the 
filling.  It  is  not  affected  by  friction,  does  not  expand,  be- 
comes soft  at  a  relatively  low  temperature,  and  does  not 
adhere  to  the  instruments. — Arthur  Scheuer,  British 
Dental  Journal. 

VULCANITE  DENTURES 

Vulcanite  Plates  for  Regulating  or  for  Dentures. — The 

plaster  model  must  be  dry.  Paint  the  surface  to  be  covered 
by  the  plate  with  a  solution  of  rubber  in  chloroform.  Cut 
a  piece  of  quick-vulcanizing  base-plate  rubber  of  about  the 
size  required,  and  after  evaporation  of  the  chloroform  press 
it  down  on  the  painted  surface,  taking  care  that  it  comes  in 
close  contact  in  every  part.  Trim  off  superfluous  edges,  put 
in  position  the  regulating  parts,  or  the  teeth  if  for  a  den- 
ture, warming  the  teeth  and  pressing  them  into  place. 
Then  cover  the  rubber  with  tin-foil  and  place  in  a  Hdded 
metal  box  of  any  kind  large  enough  to  hold  the  model, 
which  must  be  surrounded  with  French  chalk,  packing 
lightly  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  teeth  or  appHances.  Fasten 
down  the  cover,  with  wire  or  otherwise,  and  vulcanize  as 
usual. — George  Brunton,  Journal  British  Dental  Asso- 
ciation. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.  313 

Forming  the  Gums  in  Plate-work. — After  the  teeth  are 
waxed  on,  carefully  remove  all  wax  from  between  the  teeth, 
using  chloroform  if  necessary.  Instead  of  carving  the 
gums,  lay  on  a  strip  of  moldin  close  to  the  necks  of  the  teeth. 
Punch  holes  in  a  piece  of  rubber-dam,  pass  the  teeth 
through,  draw  the  dam  up  and  manipulate  the  moldia 
through  the  rubber,  turning  it  back  and  adding  more  moldin 
when  needed.  This  will  form  a  very  natural  smooth  gum. 
Flask  with  the  rubber-dam  covering  the  moldin ;  when  the 
flask  is  opened  to  wash  out  the  wax  remove  the  rubber, 
carrying  the  moldin  with  it.  Pack  and  vulcanize  in  the 
usual  way.  The  gum  will  be  found  to  have  a  good  form 
with  smooth  surface  and  no  points  of  rubber  between  the 
teeth. — T.  C.  West. 

Aluminum  Lining  for  Rubber  Plates. — Take  chloro- 
form, three  ounces ;  carbon  disulphid,  one  ounce ;  powdered 
aluminum,  one  ounce.  Before  mixing  the  ingredients  make 
a  saturated  solution  of  the  chloroform  and  white  vulcanite 
rubber.  When  the  case  is  ready  to  pack  give  the  model  a 
good  coat  of  collodion,  and  follow  this  with  about  three 
or  four  coats  of  the  aluminum  preparation. — Burdette  L. 
Conway,  Stomatologist. 

Dissolved  Rubber  in  Making  Partial  Plates. — Have  two 
grades  of  solution — one  quite  thin,  the  other  of  a  thick, 
syrupy  consistency.  The  solvent  should  be  very  volatile — 
as  chloroform,  naphtha,  benzine,  etc.  Keep  in  wide-necked, 
glass-stoppered  bottles.  Grind  the  teeth  to  fit  gum  ac- 
curately and  hold  in  place  by  plaster  of  paris  om  labial  and 
occluding  aspects,  pack  a  small  portion  of  the  thick  solution 
around  the  pins;  paint  palatal  portion  of  model  with  the 
thin  solution.  Dry  and  add  other  coats  until  the  desired 
thickness  is  obtained ;  then  trim  with  sharp  knife  to  size  and 
shape  required.  Invest  and  vulcanize — no  flask  required, 
Plate  may  be  made  as  thin  as  paper  and  will  show  ruge 
clear  and  distinct.  Tin-foil  on  both  sides  of  the  rubber  is 
advisable. — Wm.  Louisson,  Penn  Den.  Journal. 
21 


3i4  Practical  Dentistry. 

Mistakes  in  Vulcanizing. — The  mistake  is  often  made  of 
not  taking  time  enough.  For  most  rubbers  the  instruc- 
tions say  "Run  the  temperature  up  to  320°."  This  is  too 
hot.  It  is  better  to  be  an  hour  vulcanizing  at  310°,  or  even 
less  than  that.  I  have  many  times  consumed  two  hours  in 
vulcanizing  a  plate.  If,  however,  you  are  careful  to  run  the 
heat  up  slowly,  you  can  run  it  beyond  320°,  even  with  heavy 
plates. — F.  M.  Schrivers,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Rubber-dam  Lining  for  Vulcanite  Plates. — When  ready 
for  packing  first  pack  around  pins  and  flange.  Then  cut  a 
piece  of  red  rubber,  size  and  shape  of  cast  and  large  enough 
to  come  up  as  high  as  will  be  required  when  finished.  Cut 
a  piece  of  new,  clean,  thin  rubber-dam  to  fit  the  red  rubber 
Paint  the  latter  all  over  one  side  with  good  rubber  cement, 
apply  the  rubber-dam  and  press  down  smoothly,  making 
sure  there  are  no  air  bubbles.  Place  in  flask  with  dam  next 
to  cast.  Close  the  case  by  dry  heat.  Use  paper  vacuum 
form,  as  the  dam  will  not  harden  over  tin. — L.  Crouther, 
American  Dental  Journal. 

Vulcanizable  Gutta-percha  for  Artificial  Dentures. — In 
the  use  of  vulcanizable  gutta-percha  instead  of  rubber  no 
wax  is  used;  there  is  no  melting  out  of  wax,  no  measuring 
the  rubber,  no  screwing  down  the  flask  to  break  the  model 
or  displace  the  teeth;  there  is  no  carving  of  gums.  It  is 
less  porous  than  red  rubber,  with,  therefore,  less  risk  of 
inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrane. — W.  O.  Talbot, 
Northwestern  Dental  Journal,  Dental  Brief. 

Vulcanizing  Rubber. — ^The  majority  of  rubber  dentures 
are  vulcanized  at  too  high  a  temperature  and  in  too  short 
a  time.  A  denture  should  be  vulcanized  at  280°  or  290° — 
depending  upon  the  rubber — for  three  hours  after  the  vul- 
canizer  has  reached  that  point.  In  that  time  a  thick  lower 
denture  can  be  vulcanized  solid ;  you  can  saw  right  down 
through  the  mass  and  polish  the  cut  surface,  but  you  cannot 
do  that  if  vulcanized  at  320°  for  55  minutes  approximately. 
— Dr.  Gritman^  Dental  Cosmos. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.  315 

Aluminum  Lining  for  Rubber  Plates. — Dissolve  unvul- 
canized  rubber  in  chloroform  to  a  fluid  consistency  and  add 
aluminum  powder  until  the  original  rubber  color  is  lost  and 
the  bright  metallic  color  of  aluminum  prevails.  After  open- 
ing flask,  paint  the  model  with  the  aluminum  mixture  and 
pack  as  usual.  Final  effect  of  finished  plate  is  good,  and 
process  prevents  so-called  "rubber  sore  mouth." — W.  H. 
Fox,  Dental  Review. 

Shrinkage  in  Rubber  During  Vulcanizing. — The  amount 
of  shrinkage  depends  not  alone  on  the  time  the  rubber  is 
subjected  to  the  process  of  vulcanization,  but  also  upon  the 
temperature.  The  lower  the  temperature  and  steam  pres- 
sure, the  less  the  loss  in  shrinkage  and  the  less  the  contrac- 
tion in  cooling.  Low  heat  and  long  time  also  insure  an 
improvement  in  the  texture  of  the  product. — George  B. 
Snow,  Dental  Brief. 

To  Produce  Rugse  in  a  Vulcanite  Plate. — Take  a  good 
impression  of  a  mouth  with  well-developed  rugse.  Make  a 
plaster  cast  from  this  and  let  it  dry  till  it  rings  like  a  piece 
of  metal.  Cut  a  piece  of  heavy  tin-foil  and  press  down  in 
the  rugse,  following  into  the  depressions  with  a  burnisher. 
Turn  the  foil  over  and  fill  up  the  convex  side  \vith  hard 
wax.  Place  on  the  wax  of  the  plate  and  adjust  carefully. 
When  separated,  the  reverse  of  the  rugse  will  appear,  and 
when  vulcanized  they  will  be  nicely  brought  out,  much 
better  than  by  any  attempt  at  carving. — J.  B.  Hodgkin, 
Dental  Digest. 

Grinding  Porcelains. — Many  operators  seem  to  be  afraid 
of  grinding  the  labial  surface  of  crowns  for  fear  of  destroy- 
ing the  lustrous  surface  of  the  facing.  Grind  any  mu- 
tilate— so  to  speak — until  you  have  obtained  the  desired 
shape;  it  can  then  be  made  smooth  with  fine  sand-paper, 
and  put  on  a  buff  of  cotton  batting,  using  pumice  first,  then 
whiting,  which  brings  a  gloss  more  in  keeping  with  the 
adjoining  natural  teeth. — F.  J.  Capon,  Dental  Cosmos. 


3i6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Aluminum  Lining  for  Rubber  Plates. — Roll  aluminum 

to  28  gage ;  anneal  with  blow-pipe  till  white  like  unburnished 
silver.  Thoroughly  dry  the  cast,  and  with  the  two  thumbs 
press  the  aluminum  to  the  cast,  working  from  center  to 
edges ;  burnish  it  to  place.  To  secure  adhesion  of  rubber, 
with  chisel  make  rows  of  small  hooks  1-32  inch  long,  running 
alternately  till  surface  of  plate  is  covered.  Anneal  again, 
and  adjust  to  cast.  Wax  teeth  and  pack  as  usual.  The 
pressure  under  the  screw  will  make  a  perfect  adaptation. — 
Dominion  Den.  Jour. 

To  Prevent  Vacant  Spaces  in  Vulcanized  Rubber. — The 
expansion  of  rubber  by  heat  between  200  and  320  degrees 
is  a  very  close  approximation  to  its  shrinkage  in  vulcanizing, 
therefore,  if,  after  the  flask  is  closed  by  boiling  it,  the  bolts 
are  slackened  so  that  the  flask  will  part  easily  under  the 
pressure  caused  by  the  expansion  of  the  rubber  as  it  is 
heated  to  the  vulcanizing  point,  all  the  rubber  which  was  in 
the  mould  when  it  was  closed  can  be  retained  therein.  Then, 
if  spring  pressure  is  applied  and  the  flask  closed  after  shrink- 
age has  practically  ceased,  the  rubber  will,  at  the  end  of  the 
vulcanizing  process,  remain  closely  applied  to  the  teeth  and 
the  surfaces  of  the  mould. — Geo.  B.  Snow. 

Velum  Rubber  in  Plate  Work. — In  a  case  where  the 
mouth  was  very  flat  and  tender,  and  in  which  a  plate  made 
in  the  ordinary  way  will  not  "stay  up,"  make  a  plate 
with  the  entire  roof  of  the  mouth  of  velum  rubber,  using 
hard  rubber  next  to  the  pins  and  pink  rubber  for  the  gums. 
Vulcanize  with  tin  foil  on  both  sides,  as  velum  rubber  can- 
not be  polished. — M.  N.  Mixon,  Dental  World. 

Packing  Vulcanite  Plates. — In  packing  a  vulcanite  plate 
of  single  teeth  I  cut  the  pink  rubber  in  small  triangular  pieces 
(A).  I  then  dip  in  chloroform  and  press  down  in  between 
the  teeth.  The  sharp  point  on  the  triangle  fits  perfectly,  and 
at  the  same  time  the  chloroform  retains  it  in  position.  By 
packing  plates  in  this  way  you  will  be  astonished  at  the 
pleasing  results. — O.  G.  Crawshaw,  Dawson,  Pa. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.  317 

Stippling  the  Gum. — After  the  pink  gum  is  polished,  go 
over  the  surface  with  the  electric  mallet  (I  use  a  point  made 
from  a  broken  cone-socket  excavator  with  the  end  rounded 
and  smoothed)  ;  this  method  enables  you  to  distribute  the 
stippling  exactly  as  in  nature,  leaving  the  gum  smooth  at  the 
immediate  edge,  with  indentations  made  scatteringly  over 
the  roots  of  the  teeth  and  very  numerous  between  the  roots. 
— W.  E.  Walker. 

Vulcanizing  on  Tin. — Instead  of  covering  the  model 
with  tinfoil,  make,  when  it  is  possible,  a  tin  model,  prefer- 
ably a  tin  shell,  which  has  the  advantage  of  being  readily 
removed  from  the  plate.  A  peculiarity  is  that  rubber  when 
vulcanized  on  tin  is  totally  different  from  rubber  vulcanized 
in  contact  with  plaster.  It  seems  to  lose  its  weight  almost 
one-half. — R.  H.  Nones,  International  Dental  Journal. 

A  Device  for  Heating  Rubber. — Don't  soften  rubber  for 
packing  on  a  metal  cover  over  boiling  or  steaming  water. 
All  know  how  the  rubber  sticks  to  a  thin  or  metal  surface 
when  the  water  gets  a  little  too  hot;  how  in  a  short  time 
the  cover  is  covered  with  little  chunks  and  humps  of  cohesive 
rubber.  Try  a  piece  of  clean  pasteboard  instead  of  a  metal 
cover  to  warm  rubber  on  and  you  will  have  no  sticking. — 
J.  K.  Rice. 

To  Prevent  Porosity  in  Vulcanized  Rubber. — When,  for 
restoration  purposes,  an  unusual  amount  of  rubber  is  neces- 
sary, making  the  plate  very  thick  in  some  places,  fillings  of 
old  vulcanized  rubber  incorporated  with  the  new  when 
packing  will  prevent  bubbles  and  sponginess  in  the  interior 
of  the  thick  portions. — W.  R.  Wright. 

Separating  Medium  in  Vulcanite  Work. — Cut  strips  of 
tissue  paper  about  half  an  inch  wide,  moisten  and  cover  all 
the  plaster,  but  not  the  wax  or  teeth.  Pour  the  upper  half 
as  usual.  Remove  the  tissue  paper  before  packing.  Ap- 
plicable to  any  case,  but  especially  advantageous  in  difficult 
'  cases.  It  is  not  necessary  to  wait  for  the  plaster  in  the  lower 
half  to  set. — J.  H.  Noble,  Dental  Cosmos. 


3iS  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Determine  the  Amount  of  Rubber  for  a  Plate. — After 
the  case  is  invested  in  flask  submerge  the  flask  in  boiling 
water  for  a  minute  and  a  half.  This  warms  the  wax  just 
sufficiently  for  it  to  come  out  intact.  Weigh  the  wax ;  the 
amount  of  rubber  required  is  the  weight  of  the  wax  and  one- 
half  more.  In  other  words,  a  given  quantity  of  rubber 
weighs  one  and  a  half  times  as  much  as  the  same  bulk  of 
wax. — H.  N.  Walters,  Dental  Hints. 

Strengthening  Rubber  Plates. — A  perforated  metal 
if  used  to  strengthen  vulcanite  plates  should  be  placed  in 
the  middle  of  the  vulcanite,  as  a  metal  plate  on  the  sur- 
face is  only  a  source  of  weakness.  If  the  cost  has  to  be 
considered,  aluminum  may  be  used,  though  the  rubber 
does  not  stick  to  it  as  it  does  to  gold. — E.  Lloyd  Williams, 
British  Dental  Journal. 

"Strengthened  Dental  Rubber." — A  toughened  rubber, 
free  from  all  brittleness  and  of  very  great  strength,  is  pro- 
duced by  a  process  of  rolling  a  sheet  of  metal  gauze  be- 
tween two  sheets  of  rubber,  the  metal  being  of  a  quality 
not  acted  upon  by  the  constituents  of  the  rubber.  Used  in 
one  piece,  roughly  cut  to  the  shape  of  the  plate. — Dental 
Record. 

Strengthening  Vulcanite  Plates. — The  employment  of 
metal  devices  for  the  supposed  purpose  of  imparting 
strength  to  a  vulcanite  plate  is  an  error,  for  in  proportion 
to  their  bulk  they  displace  vulcanite  and  thus  weaken  the 
piece,  with  greater  liability  to  crack  and  greater  difficulty 
of  repair. — Grant  Mitchell,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

To  Give  a  Smooth,  Finished  Surface  to  Vulcanite. — After 
investing  in  the  flask,  remove  the  wax  absolutely  and  paint 
the  palatal  and  lingual  surfaces  with  a  mixture  of  liquid 
glass  and  silver  bronze.  When  hard,  cover  with  soapsuds 
to  prevent  adhesion  to  the  vulcanite.  The  case  will  come 
out  smooth,  with  a  glistening  appearance. — B.  J.  Cigrand, 
Dental  Digest. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.  319 

The  Flexible  Ridge. — When  a  patient  will  not  consent 
to  the  excision  of  the  soft,  flexible  ridge  which  so  interferes 
with  the  adaptation  of  a  denture,  place  a  layer  of  soft  oxy- 
phosphate  in  the  plate  so  that  it  will  bear  upon  the  ridge; 
after  a  few  days  put  on  some  more,  and  pressure — atrophy 
will  usually  remove  the  ridge  easily  and  successfully. — C. 
P.  Pruyn,  Dental  Review. 

Veneering  Vulcanite  Plates. — Pack  as  usual  and  open 
flask;  stretch  a  sheet  of  vulcanite  until  quite  thin  and  place 
it  over  the  vulcanite  in  the  flask ;  close  and  vulcanize.  Red 
rubber  can  be  veneered  or  lined  with  rubber  in  this  way  with 
beneficial  results,  producing  beautiful  plates. — W.  J.  Robin- 
son, Stomatologist. 

To  Insure  Easy  Closure  of  Flask. — Dipping  rubber  in 
a  mixture  of  one  part  of  benzin  to  two  parts  alcohol  before 
packing  it  makes  flask  closure  a  much  easier  operation  and 
does  not  appreciably  retard  vulcanization.  Close  the  flask 
with  the  additional  aid  of  hot  water. — Dental  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

ftuick  Vulcanizing. — By  using  "Poulson's  Quick  Vul- 
canizing Rubber,"  allowing  only  20  minutes  at  335"  F., 
dentures  are  quickly  made,  the  rubber  being  elastic,  tough 
and  not  burnt  in  any  way.  It  will  be  found  valuable  for 
quick  work. — W.  J.  Turner,  Journal  British  Dental  Ass'n. 

To  Remove  the  Cloth  Adherent  to  the  Sheets  of  Black 
Rubber. — When  the  rubber  adheres  tenaciously  to  the  cloth 
used  in  separating  the  sheets  of  black  rubber,  cut  the  whole 
into  strips  and  throw  into  cold  water.  The  cloth  can  then 
be  readily  peeled  from  the  rubber. — T.  F.  Chaplin,  Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory. 

Opening  a  Flask  for  Inspection. — By  placing  a  piece  of 
rubber  dam  over  the  model  the  flask  can  be  opened  to  as- 
certain whether  it  is  necessary  to  add  a  little  more,  or  to 
remove  a  portion.  If  the  dam  sticks  to  the  packed  rubber, 
touch  with  gasoline  on  a  small,  clean  brush,  when  it  will 
separate  readily. — J.  B.  Hodgkin,  Dental  Digest. 


320  Practical  Dentistry. 

Packing  Pink  Rubber. — To  prevent  red  or  black  rubber 
cropping  through  the  pink,  cut  all  gates,  or  outlets  for  ex- 
cess, at  the  back  of  the  flask.  Boil  the  flask  well,  at  least  ten 
minutes,  and  screw  down  the  two  front  bolts  first,  not 
screwing  down  the  back  set  until  after  the  front  parts  of  the 
flask  have  been  brought  together. — T.  F.  Chupein,  Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory, 

Vulcanized  Gutta-percha  or  Waxable  Vulcanite. — This 
combination  or  ordinary  rubber  and  gutta-percha  when 
vulcanized  looks  like  rubber,  acts  like  rubber,  but  is  less 
porous,  lighter  in  weight,  and  cooler  in  the  mouth.  The 
method  of  manipulating  is  about  the  same  as  employed  for 
bees-wax ;  soften  the  sheet  and  mold  evenly  over  the  model 
as  you  would  wax. — A.  S.  Parker,  Dental  Summary. 

To  Keep  Flasks  Clean. — Place  a  small  quantity  of  so- 
dium bicarbonate  in  the  vulcanizer  and  your  flasks  will  be 
readily  and  easily  cleaned  after  using.  The  use  of  ilask 
tongs  aids  in  keeping  the  hands  clean,  and  with  them  hot 
flasks  are  handled  to  better  advantage. — H.  E.  Davis,  Den- 
tal Review. 

Liquid  Silex. — Instead  of  paying  a  big  price  for  a  small 
bottle  of  "liquid  silex''  at  the  dental  depot,  get  a  quart  of 
silicate  of  soda,  which  is  the  same  thing,  and  can  be  had  at 
any  wholesale  drug  house  for  forty  cents. — J.  G.  Temple- 
ton,  in  Dental  Revieiv. 

Eubber  and  Aluminum  Plates. — Dissolve  rubber  in 
chloroform  and  add  aluminum  powder  until  the  solution 

takes  a  creamy  consistence.  Give  two  or  three  coats  to  the 
model,  after  removal  of  the  wax.  Close  the  flask  in  the 
usual  way. — Archiv.  fur  Zahn. 

To  Remove  Plaster  from  the  Inner  Surface  of  Vul- 
canite Kates. — Immerse  the  plate  for  a  short  time  in  a 
strong  solution  of  HCl.  Then  by  using  a  cup-shaped 
brush-wheel,  carrying  pumice  and  oil,  it  is  readily  made 
clean  and  nice. — J.  A.  Bullard,  Dental  Review. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.      '  321 

To  Remove  Tin  from  Plates. — Small  particles  of  tin  ad- 
hering to  vulcanite  plates  can  easily  be  removed  by  mixing 
mercury  with  enough  alloy  to  keep  it  from  flowing,  and 
rubbing  it  over  the  plate  under  fingers. — C.  W.  Siefkin, 
Dental  Brief. 

Shrinkage  in  Rubber. — The  amount  of  shrinkage  of 
rubber  in  vulcanizing  depends  upon  its  composition.  Pure 
rubber  and  sulphur  shrinks  the  most ;  red  rubber  less ;  pink 
tubber  still  less,  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  coloring 
matter. — Geo.  B.   Snow. 

Porous  Plates. — In  vulcanizing  a  case  place  the  flask 
above  the  water-line,  supporting  it  on  an  old  flask  or  any- 
thing suitable.  Use  very  little  water,  and  you  will  not  be 
troubled  with  porous  plates. — A.  C.  Peterson,  Dental 
Record. 

Cleaning  the  Festoons  Between  Plain  Teeth. — In  using 
plain  teeth  with  pink  vulcanite  gum,  cut  discs  from  cork 
stoppers  and  use  for  cleaning  up  the  festoons  between  the 
teeth. — Frank  H.   Smith. 

To  Prevent  Teeth  from  Receding  from  the  Rubber  in 
Vulcanizing. — Let  the  temperature  go  up  very  slowly  and 
vulcanize  rather  under  than  above  the  normal  degree.  Heat 
the  flask  in  boiling  water  and  the  rubber  over  steam,  taking 
care  that  it  does  not  burn. — C.  Soulard,  Le  Laboratoire. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  in  Heating  Rubber. — To  prevent 
rubber  from  adhering  to  surface  while  heating  for  packing, 
cut  a  piece  of  muslin  to  fit  the  top  of  the  lid,  and  glue  it  on. 
J.  G.  Halsey,  Dental  Brief. 

Clean  Flasks. — Put  a  coil  of  sheet  zinc  into  the  water 
in  the  vulcanizer,  and  it  will  prevent  the  formation  of  the 
black  oxids  on  the  iron  flasks,  and  they  will  soil  the  hands 
but  very  little. — British  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

To  Clean  Vulcanite  Files. — Apply  chloroform  and  clean 
with  stiff  brush.  This  will  remove  all  the  rubber  packed 
in  in  trimming  plates. — W.  H.  Wheat,  Dental  Hints. 


3'22  Practical  Dentistry. 

Porous  Plates. — In  vulcanizing  a  case  place  the  flask 
above  the  water-line,  supporting"  it  on  an  old  flask  or  any- 
thing suitable.  Use  very  little  water,  and  you  will  not  be 
troubled  with  porous  plates. — A.  C.  Peterson,  Dental  Brief. 

Vulcanizing. — In  vulcanite  work,  for  strength  and  to 
avoid  secretions  behind  gum  sections,  vulcanize  three  hours, 
commencing  at  280°  F.  and  run  up  to  290°  F.  for  the  last 
half  hour. — Western  Dental  Journal. 

Vulcanite  Plates. — There  are  two  benefits  to  be  derived 

from  the  adoption  of  a  low  heat  and  long  time  for  vulcan- 
izing, viz. :  an  improvement  in  the  texture  of  the  product 
and  a  diminution  in  its  shrinkage. — Geo.  B.  Snow. 

Dark  Joints. — Touch  the  dark  places  with  a  very  little 
nitric  acid.  It  dissolves  off  the  stain.  Wash  off  the  acid, 
and  you  will  be  pleased  with  the  result. — J.  B.  Hodgkin, 
Dental  Hints. 

To  Remove  Vulcanite  from  Between  the  Teeth. — Mount 
a  stiff  fine  needle  in  a  small  handle  or  broach  holder; 
sharpen  on  two  sides  and  you  have  a  useful  little  tool. — 
A.  E.  H.  Leister,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Remove  Adhering  Plaster  from  Vulcanite  Plates. — 
Place  the  plate  for  a  short  time  in  water  containing  a  small 
quantity  of  sulphate  of  potassium. — Dr.  Isham,  Dental 
Forum. 

Dark  Joints. — To  prevent  dark  joints  in  vulcanite 
plates,  pack  the  joints  with  gold  or  tin-foil,  pressing  it  in 
with  the  edge  of  a  penknife  blade. — W.  W.  France,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Vulcanizer  Packing. — Heavy  pasteboard  makes  an  ex- 
cellent vulcanizer  packing,  and  when  vulcanizers  leak  dust- 
ing on  cornstarch  will  stop  it. — Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


Vulcanite  Dentures.  323 

Partial  Plates  for  Lower  Molars. — The  portion  of  a  par- 
tial lower  plate  passing  around  the  anterior  teeth  is  in  the 
way  and  more  or  less  of  an  impediment.  A  partial  plate 
for  each  side,  on  the  principle  of  a  bridge,  supported  by- 
telescoping  crowns  on  the  last  two  natural  teeth,  might  be 
employed  to  advantage  in  some  cases.  The  ridge-plate 
should  be  a  saddle-plate,  the  alveolar  ridge  supporting  and 
steadying  it.  Tube  teeth  stimulate  the  natural  teeth 
in  size  and  form,  and  are  pleasant  to  the  tongue.  The  teeth 
are  attached  to  the  posts  by  melted  sulphur,  which  is  not 
soluble  in  the  fluids  of  the  mouth. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Stoma- 
tologist. 

To  Remove  Plaster  Prom  Vulcanite  Plates. — Immerse 
plate  for  a  few  minutes  in  hydrochloric  acid. — Dr.  Wright, 
Pacific  Gazette. 

Adaptation  of  Partial  Denture  to  Remaining  Teeth. — 

When  only  one  or  two  teeth  remain,  as  the  two  superior 
cuspids  for  instance,  a  closer  adaptation  to  the  teeth  may  be 
secured  by  slightly  trimming  the  plaster  teeth  and  completely 
encircling  them  with  soft  or  velum  rubber.  Pack  the  or- 
dinary rubber  around  this  and  vulcanize  as  usual.  In  finish- 
ing use  a  sharp  knife,  with  both  the  knife  and  the  velum 
rubber  wet.  A  snug  adaptation  will  be  attained  with  support 
superior  to  clasps  and  less  harmful  to  tooth  structure. — P.  B. 
McCuLLouGH,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Anchorage  for  Partial  Dentures. — Burnish  thin  plati- 
num around  the  tooth  to  be  clasped,  extending  it  slightly  into 
the  sulci.  Fit  the  clasp  over  the  platinum,  wax  the  two 
together,  remove  and  run  solder  between  them  and  over  the 
platinum  extending  between  the  cusps.  The  platinum  can  be 
perfectly  adapted  to  the  tooth,  while  clasp  metal  cannot, 
while  possibility  of  bearing  upon  the  soft  tissues  is  prevented 
by  the  projection  upon  the  occlusal  surface. — G.  W.  Pitts, 
The  Bur. 


3'24  Practical  Dentistry. 

Anchor  Plates. — To  replace  missing  posterior  teeth, 
upper  or  lower,  make  telescope  crowns  for  the  last  tooth 
posteriorly  on  each  side ;  cement  the  under  ones  to  the 
natural  teeth  and  attach  the  top  crowns  to  a  plate  con- 
structed in  the  ordinary  way.  The  telescope  crowns,  fit- 
ting tightly,  hold  the  plate  rigidly  in  position  while  the 
plate  derives  its  support  from  close  contact  with  the  mu- 
cous membrane. — P.  T.  Dash  wood,  Dental  Headlight. 

REPAIRING  VULCANITE  DENTURES 

To  Remove  One  or  More  Teeth  from  a  Vulcanite  Plate 
Without  Distortion  of  the  Denture. — Apply  to  the  teeth  to  be 
removed  a  coating  of  sperm  or  other  oil.  Then  hold  the 
tooth  to  be  removed  directly  over  a  small  pointed  flame ;  as 
soon  as  the  tooth  is  thoroughly  heated  it  may  be  removed 
without  difficulty. — W.  A.  Stevens,  Dental  Review. 

Repair  of  Rubber  Dentures. — The  articulation  being 
satisfactory,  a  new  denture  can  be  made  almost  as  quickly 
as  to  repair  the  old  one.  Join  the  pieces  accurately  and 
place  in  lower  half  of  flask,  keeping  flask  even  with  rim  of 
plate.  Oil  the  surface,  build  some  plaster  around  the  out- 
side of  the  denture,  even  with  the  occluding  surface  of  the 
teeth.  When  hard,  oil  the  surface,  place  the  other  half  of 
flask  in  place  and  fill.  When  hard  separate,  leaving  plaster 
rim  around  the  outside  of  the  teeth.  Remove  the  teeth  and 
place  in  upper  half  of  flask ;  heat  the  old  denture  and  re- 
move the  rubber,  leaving  impression  of  palatine  portion  per- 
fect. Place  the  teeth  in  the  impressions  in  the  upper  part 
and  pack  as  in  any  other  case. — C.  C.  Noble,  Dental  Reg- 
ister. 

Attaching  Teeth  to  Plate. — In  a  case  in  which  teeth 
had  been  repeatedly  broken  from  the  plate,  long-pin  plate 
teeth  were  selected  for  the  six  anterior  teeth.  These  were 
backed  and  ed_c;ed  a^  for  a  bridge  and  soldered  together,  a 
platinum  wire  being  soldered  back  of  the  teeth  for  anchor- 
age to  rubber  base. — C.  A.  Bent,  American  Dental  Journal. 


Repairing  Vulcanite  Dentures.  325 

Rubber  Plate  Repair. — To  adjust  the  edges  of  a  broken 
vulcanite  plate  accurately  is  a  trying  feat  sometimes ;  and  the 
placing  of  wax  on  the  plate  hides  the  union  more  or  less. 
Take  a  sheet  of  base-plate  wax,  hold  it  over  a  flame  until 
well  softened,  fold  it  upon  itself  until  it  is  about  the  size  of 
the  plate;  take  the  plate  in  both  hands  and  adjust  edges  and 
insert  with  pressure  into  the  wax,  teeth  downward,  and  hold 
a  few  seconds  for  wax  to  cool;  remove  the  hands  and  the 
plate  will  be  in  perfect  relation,  ready  to  run  your  model. — 

W.    G.    HOLLINGSWORTH. 

Adding  Teeth  to  a  Plate  in  Repairing. — To  add  teeth 
to  a  vulcanite  case,  instead  of  putting  wax  on  the  cast 
where  the  repair  or  addition  is  needed,  place  rubber  by 
means  of  a  hot,  clean  spatula.  This  may  be  entirely  buried 
in  the  plaster  when  flasking  and  immediately  placed  in  the 
vulcanizer. — Ellio  it's  Q  iiarterly. 

To  Remove  Teeth  from  Rubber  Plate  Without  Danger 
of  Cracking  or  Etching  the  Teeth. — Boil  the  plate  in  glycerin, 
in  a  porcelain  pan,  till  it  smokes,  and  the  teeth  will  come 
away  clean  and  free  from  discoloration.  Put  them  back 
in  the  glycerin  to  anneal  them,  and  when  cool  wash  in 
warm  water.  They  will  be  as  bright  as  when  new.  The 
glycerin  can  be  bottled  for  future  use. — D,  Genese,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Repairing  Vulcanite. — If,  after  mending,  the  joints 
look  dark,  touch  the  stains  with  a  very  little  nitric  acid. 
It  will  not  hurt  the  rubber  and  dissolve  the  stain. 
Use  a  darker  rubber  than  the  original,  in  repairs,  as  the 
used  rubber  will  have  become  darker. — J.  B.  Hodgkin, 
Dental  Digest. 

Repairing  a  Vulcanite  Plate. — A  plate  which  has  been 
broken  in  halves  often  gives  us  trouble  to  hold  in  correct 
position  until  we  can  get  it  poured.  This  may  be  made 
easy  by  simply  pressing  the  two  halves  on  a  piece  of  wax, 
such  as  that  which  porcelain  teeth  are  placed  on,  and  adjust 
the  fracture  properly,  then  pour. — G.  A.  Hitch. 


326  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Prevent  Fracture  of  Rubber  Plate. — When  gum  sec- 
tions are  used  to  prevent  fracture  at  the  median  Hne,  or 
opening  of  the  joint  after  the  wax  has  been  mashed  out, 
pass  a  loop  of  fine  platinum  wire  around  the  pins  on  either 
side  of  the  joint  between  the  two  central  blocks;  twist  the 
ends  of  the  wire  together,  flask,  and  vulcanize. — Dental 
Hints. 

To  Refit  Dentures. — Place  new-process  oxyphosphate  of 
copper,  mixed  to  a  stiff  creamy  state,  upon  the  defective  sur- 
face and  press  accurately  to  place.  Allow  the  cement  to  set 
in  contact  with  the  tissues.  Applicable  to  cases  in  which  the 
tissues  have  become  flabby  and  yielding  as  well  as  to  those 
in  which  a  leak  at  the  periphery  admits  air  under  the  plate. — 
R.  C.  Brophy,  The  Bur. 

Attaching  Teeth  to  Plate. — Use  long-pin  plate  teeth  for 
six  anterior  teeth,  back  and  edge  as  for  bridge,  articulate 
and  solder  together,  then  solder  platinum  wire  back  of  teeth 
for  an  anchorage  to  rubber  base,  and  proceed  as  usual  with 
rubber  plate. — C.  A.  Bent,  American  Dental  Journal. 

To  Replace  a  Single  Tooth  in  a  Denture. — Cut  away 
the  part;  roughen  the  surface  and  fill  the  space  with  vul- 
canizable  gutta-percha.  Warm  the  tooth  and  press  into 
position  and  trim  away  the  surplus  with  a  warm  spatula. 
Bury  in  the  flask  and  vulcanize  forty  minutes  at  320°. — W. 
A.  Brownlee,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Removing  Teeth  from  Old  Rubber  Plate. — Boil  the  plate 
for  a  few  moments.  The  rubber  will  be  found  yielding  and 
may  be  sprung  from  the  teeth  with  a  pair  of  pliers,  avoid- 
ing the  unpleasant  odors  arising  from  holding  over  gas-jet. 
— Dental  Digest. 

To  Prevent  Fracture  of  Vulcanite  Denture. — When  gum 
sections  are  used,  to  prevent  fracture  between  sections  place 
a  loop  of  platinum  wire  around  the  pins  on  each  side  of  the 
joint;  twist  the  ends  together,  flask  and  vulcanize. — Western 
Dental  Journal. 


Repairing  Vulcanite  Dentures.  327 

To  Insure  Perfect  Adaptation  of  Parts  in  Eepairing 
Rubber  Plates. — Warm  a  sheet  of  wax  and  lay  on  a  flat 
surface.  Press  the  teeth  into  the  wax,  teeth  down,  properly 
adjusted.  Pour  and  proceed  as  usual.  Soft  plaster  may  be 
used  instead  of  the  wax. — Dr.  Wright,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 

Repairing  a  Vulcanite  Plate. — Instead  of  dissolving 
rubber  in  chloroform,  use  the  ordinary  bicycle  cement.  It 
gives  perfect  union  between  old  and  new  rubber  and  simpli- 
fies the  work  of  repairing  very  much. — W.  T.  Martin,  Mis- 
sissippi Dental  Association,  1900. 

SEPARATING  MEDIUMS 

An  Aqueous  Solution  of  Shellac  as  a  Separating  Medium. 

— Shellac  will  dissolve  in  water  to  which  borax,  potassium 
carbonate,  or  any  of  the  caustic  alkalies  are  added.  This 
is  readily  absorbed  into  the  plaster  and  leaves  absolutely 
no  film.  The  solution  can  be  poured  immediately  on  the 
base  half  without  waiting  for  the  plaster  to  dry,  thus  saving 
considerable  time. — De  Courcey  Lindsley,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Separating  Impression  and  Model. — Drop  model  and  im- 
pression into  hot  water  for  a  minute  or  two,  after  which 
they  will  separate  without  the  least  trouble,  leaving  the 
model  much  smoother  than  if  whittled  out.  Another  model, 
if  desired,  can  be  made  in  the  same  impression,  as  in  nearly 
every  instance  the  impression  will  come  off  in  such  large 
pieces  that  they  can  be  placed  back  in  the  tray  and  fastened 
with  a  little  wax. — J.  A.  Robinson,  Dental  Weekly. 

A  Separating  Fluid. — Cover  the  impression  with  a  solu- 
tion of  anilin  in  alcohol,  and  then  with  collodion.  The  anilin 
makes  the  ideal  color-line,  and  collodion  will  not  peel  up 
from  plaster  previously  treated  with  the  anilin  solution. 
The  surface  of  the  model  will  be  perfectly  smooth  and  the 
finest  lines  of  the  impression  reproduced. — Frank  Fount, 
Dental  Century. 


328  Practical  Dentistry. 

Separating  Medium. — Shellac  dissolved  in  a  saturated 
solution  of  borax  in  water  makes  a  most  excellent  separat- 
ing medium.  Being  an  aqueous  solution  it  is  absorbed  by 
the  plaster  of  Paris  and  leaves  not  even  a  film  of  shellac  on 
the  surface.  It  separates  with  perfect  ease  and  leaves  a 
smooth  surface. — W.  M.  Bartlette,  Western  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

A  Good  Separating  Medium. — Pulverized  soapstoni* 
sprinkled  on  the  plaster  of  paris  in  the  lower  part  of  the- 
flask,  after  it  has  hardened  sufficiently  to  handle,  makes  a 
good  separating  medium. — Dental  Reziezv. 

Separating  Cast  and  Model. — If  the  impression  material 
is  modeling  compound,  use  a  small  quantity  of  machine  or 
other  convenient  oil  on  the  surface  of  the  impression;  if 
it  is  plaster,  mix  a  small  quantity  of  common  laundry 
bluing  in  the  plaster  for  the  cast,  and  the  line  of  separation 
cannot  be  mistaken. — I.  R.  Warren,  Dental  Hints. 

To  Separate  Cast  and  Impression. — Drop  the  piece  into 
hot  water  for  a  minute  or  two  when  they  will  separate  with- 
out trouble,  leaving  the  cast  much  smoother  than  if  the  im- 
pression was  cut  away.  If  desired,  another  cast  can  be 
made  from  the  same  impression. — Dental  Office  and  Labora- 
tory. 

Separating  Medium. — Strain  a  saturated  solution  of 
soap  and  water  and  add  an  equal  part  of  lard  oil ;  color  if 
desired.  This  is  simple  and  inexpensive  and  separates 
cleaner  than  anything  else.  In  time  the  ingredients  will 
separate  and  the  bottle  will  have  to  be  shaken. — E.  E.  War- 
ren, Dental  Digest. 

Separating  Mould  from  Plaster  Impression. — Soap  the 
impression,  then  add  a  little  bluing  to  the  water  used  for 
mixing  plaster  to  run  the  model.  Before  separating,  place 
the  model  and  impression  in  warm  water,  and  in  removing 
the  impression  the  parts  in  contact  will  be  quite  distinct. — 
H.  T.  Armstrong. 


Separating  Mediums.  329 

To  Make  a  Smooth  Cast. — Powdered  tin  mixed  with 
collodion  to  the  consistency  of  thick  molasses,  and  applied  to 
the  suface  of  a  dried  cast  before  packing  with  rubber,  makes 
the  inner  surface  of  a  plate  smooth  and  hard  as  if  vulcanized 
on  metal. — Pacific  Journal. 

A  Varnish  for  Plaster  Models. — Gum  sandarac,  2  oz. ; 
gum  mastic,  i  oz. ;  Venice  turpentine,  j/^  oz.;  alcohol,  5  oz. ; 
dissolve.  This  varnish  is  colorless,  elastic,  and  leaves  a 
fine  glossy  surface.  Color  with  anilin  dye,  if  desired. — 
Dental  Era. 

A  Dangerous  Separating  Medium. — Lycopodium,  which 
is  sometimes  used  as  a  separating  medium  in  the  making 
of  sand  impressions  for  the  casting  of  metallic  dies,  ex- 
plodes if  any  of  the  dust  reaches  a  gas  flame. — Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Separating  Medium. — A  good  separating  medium  is 
made  by  dissolving  paraffin  in  gasoline.  Put  in  all  that  the 
gasoline  will  take  up.  Spread  lightly  over  the  impression 
with  a  camel's-hair  brush. — Hints. 

Separating  Varnish. — Dissolve  three  ounces  of  borax 
in  a  quart  of  water;  bring  to  the  boiling  point  and  add  six 
ounces  of  powdered  shellac. — A.  Doughaday,  Western  Den- 
tal Journal. 

A  Varnish  for  Models. — Models  may  be  coated  with  a 
varnish  made  by  dissolving  white  wax -in  spirits  of  turpen- 
tine.— W.  H.  Ellis,  Dentists'  Magazine. 

A  Polisher  for  Rubber  Work. — Procure  a  piece  of  fair 
leather,  heavy  and  stiff,  cut  discs  one  inch  in  diameter  and 
trim  to  a  knife-edge,  cut  a  hole  in  the  center  for  lathe  chuck. 
This  is  very  efficient  for  polishing  between  teeth  and  places 
hard  of  access. — J.  A.  Rockey,  D.D.S.,  in  Dental  Brief. 

To  Prevent  Warpage  of  Plates. — When  polishing  a 
thin  rubber  or  gutta-percha  plate,  fill  it  with  plaster  before 
putting  it  on  the  polishing  lathe,  first  filling  the  under  cuts 

with  wax. — Tri-State  Dental  Quarterly. 
22 


330  Practical  Dentistry. 

For  Polishing  Plates. — Cones  and  wheels  made  of  car- 
spring  rubber  are  superior  to  felt  wheels  and  cones.  But  a 
small  amount  of  water  is  needed,  as  the  rubber  does  not 
absorb  the  water  like  the  felt  cones,  and  this  saves  the  hands 
and  clothing  from  being  soiled  by  the  flying  water  and  pum- 
ice.— H.  T.  Crews,  Dental  Headlight. 

Polishing  Dentures. — Soap  rubbed  on  a  felt  buff  wheel 
will  retain  the  wet  pumice,  causing  it  to  cut  much  faster  and 
considerably  lessening  the  time  and  labor  of  polishing  an 
artificial  denture. — Dental  Register. 

Polishing  Porcelain  that  has  been  Ground. — IMake  a 
very  soft  paste  of  a  saturated  solution  of  gum  camphor  and 
pumice ;  place  in  spirits  of  turpentine.  Keep  your  polishing 
wheel  wet  with  this  while  repohshing  the  ground  surface. — 
W.  H.  Spaulding,  Dental  Summary. 

A  Polishing  Material. — To  polish  gold  crowns,  etc.,  I 
run  my  felt  wheel  over  a  cake  of  "lava  soap."  Very  little 
pumice  will  be  required,  the  base  of  this  soap  being  probably 
pumice  or  volcanic  dust. — J.  K.  Willis,  Kansas  City  Dental 
Journal. 

Polishing  a  Vulcanite  Plate. — Use  aqua  ammonia  to 
mix  the  whiting  instead  of  water  and  the  result  will  be 
more  satisfactory.  After  polishing  wash  the  plate  in  tepid 
water  and  finish  with  a  clean  buff  wheel. — W.  J.  Robinson, 
The  Stomatologist. 

Finishing  Up  Vulcanite. — After  sandpapering  use  emery 
and  pumice,  mixed  half  and  half,  followed  by  pumice  alone, 
finishing  with  whiting. — Dr.  Wessels,  Dental  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

To  Give  a  Fine  Finish  to  Gold. — After  scratches  have 
been  removed  with  pumice  nothing  is  so  effective  as  oxid 
of  zinc  on  a  brush  wheel.  It  leaves  a  beautiful  lustrous 
polish. — H.   H.  Johnson. 


Dies  and  Counter  Dies—Swaging.  331 

DIES  AND  COUNTER  DIES— SWAGING 

A  Metallic  Shell-Die  for  Rubber  Plates.— Take  two  im- 
pressions. Varnish  the  better  one  and  set  aside  to  dry.  In 
the  other  pour  a  model,  to  which  carefully  adjust  Stuck's 
tin,  32  to  34  gauge.  Do  this  with  the  fingers,  using  spunk 
in  foil  carriers  to  bring  to  close  adaptation.  Cut  and  lap  if 
inclined  to  pucker  in  places.  When  satisfactorily  fitted, 
transfer  the  tin  plate  to  the  other  impression,  forcing  it  into 
every  depression  and  undercut,  using  spunk,  ball  burnisher, 
etc.,  if  necessary.  Remove  the  impression  and  you  have  an 
ideal  model.  After  waxing  up  the  teeth,  and  when  the  case 
is  ready  for  the  flask,  place  another  piece  of  tin  over  the 
whole,  burnishing  close  to  the  teeth.  Vulcanize  between 
these  two  metallic  surfaces  and  you  will  have  a  dense,  tough, 
flexible  plate  with  rugse  plainly  defined  and  the  results  such 
as  are  not  attainable  by  any  other  method. — W.  K.  Slater, 
Dental  Headlight. 

Making  Dies. — In  cases  where  it  is  impossible  to  secure 
a  plaster  of  paris  impression  a  die  can  be  obtained  from 
modelling  compound  by  using  the  following  die  metal :  Bis- 
muth, 48  per  cent. ;  cadmium,  13  per  cent. ;  lead,  19  per  cent. ; 
tin,  20  per  cent.  This  can  also  be  poured  into  wet  plaster  of 
paris  with  little  or  no  risk. — O.  H.  Simpson,  Dentists' 
Magazine. 

Substitute  for  Counter  Die. — With  soft  pine  cut  into 
little  blocks  and  used  endwise  of  the  wood,  laying  the  gold 
over  the  face  of  the  die,  one  blow  with  a  good  heavy  ham- 
mer will  make  what  will  serve  as  a  counter  die,  and  there 
is  no  fusible  metal  to  adhere  to  the  gold.  The  swaging 
process  is  shortened  one-half  by  this  process. — G.  W. 
Melotte,  Dominion  Den.  Jour. 

Swaging  with  Moldine.-^By  using  the  moldine  as  a 
die  the  moldine  seems  to  draw  from  every  point,  pressing  the 
metal  right  into  place  when  using  it  for  swaging  backings 
on  teeth,  swaging  matrices  for  gold  inlays  and  porcelain  in- 
lays from  die. — J.  K.  Douglas,  Dental  Summary. 


332  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Ideal  Die. — Take  a  plaster  impression ;  if  it  breaks, 
unite  the  pieces  with  some  easy-flowing  cement.  Boil  the 
impression  in  beeswax  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  to  fill  the  pores 
of  the  plaster.  Build  a  sheet  of  wax  up  around  the  tray 
to  the  height  of  the  desired  die,  coat  thoroughly  with  dry 
graphite,  and  electroplate  with  copper  to  the  thickness  of  a 
writing-card.  Set  the  impression  on  a  dish  of  sand  and 
pour  molten  zinc  into  the  matrix  thus  formed. — Geo.  A. 
CoMPTE,  Dental  Clippings. 

Sandvig's  Swaging  Apparatus. — The  metal  used  for  the 
die  is  very  low  fusing,  and  free  from  zinc;  the  die  is 
made  direct  from  the  plaster  impression,  without  even  wait- 
ing for  it  to  dry.  The  metal  base-plate  is  swaged  direct 
upon  the  die,  using  sand  as  a  counter-die. — I.  Ottesen, 
Dental  Review. 

A  New  Metal  for  Dies  for  Swagfing  Plates. — Lumen 

metal  works  very  much  like  Babbitt,  but  is  very  much  harder. 
It  makes  a  nice  clean  die,  and  apparently  does  not  shrink 
or  expand. — B.  D.  Wikoff,  Dental  Review. 

Counter-die  Metal. — Add  one  part  tin  to  five  parts  lead. 
Do  not  pour  until  it  thickens,  and  then  it  will  not  adhere. — 
L.  P.  Haskell^  Dental  Digest. 

Babbitt  Metal;  Haskell's. — One  part  copper,  two  parts 
antimony,  eight  parts  tin.  Non-shrinking,  hard  enough  not 
to  batter,  has  a  much  lower  fusing  point  than  zinc. — L.  P. 
Haskell,  Dental  Digest. 

Zinc  Dies. — To  save  time  in  making  small  zinc  dies  for 
special  purposes  the  model  can  be  partly  contoured  with 
wax,  covered  with  tinfoil,  and  the  mold  made  immediately. 
— M.  G.  McElhinney,  Dental  Digest. 

To  Prevent  Counter-dies  from  Sticking. — Coating  the 
face  of  a  Melotte  metal  die  with  vaselin  will  prevent  it  from 
fusing  with  the  die. — Indiana  Dental  Journal. 


Solders  and  Soldering.  333 

SOLDERS    AND    SOLDERING 

Cutting  Up  Solder. — Solder  should  be  used  in  as  large 
pieces  as  can  be  put  on  the  work.  One  or  two  pieces  the 
right  size  for  a  crown  will  give  better  results  than  twenty- 
small  ones.  The  reason  for  this  is  that  oxid  on  a  large 
piece  is  much  less  in  proportion  to  bulk  than  the  skin  on  a 
small  piece  and  the  weight  of  the  large  piece  will  break  the 
skin  easier.  Again,  less  borax  is  necessary,  and  the  least 
borax  used  the  better,  provided  you  use  enough. — C.  C. 
Allen,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Soldering  without  Blowpipe. — Much  of  the  soldering 
with  18-  and  20-carat  gold  may  be  done  without  a  blow- 
pipe and  with  less  risk  of  fracturing  porcelains  or  melting 
off  gold  backings.  Trim  and  shape  a  lump  of  charcoal  so 
that  it  will  fit  into  the  burner  without  tilting,  and  with  a 
depression  in  the  top  for  the  reception  of  the  piece.  Build 
charcoal  log-cabinwise  around  the  work  and  roof  over  with 
flat  pieces  to  radiate  the  heat  back  on  the  work,  with  an 
opening  at  the  front  to  give  a  view  of  the  piece  and  oppor- 
tunity to  add  solder  if  needed.  Clip  the  solder  into  small 
bits,  dip  in  cream  of  borax,  handling  with  pliers,  and  apply 
sufficient  to  solder  the  case.  Light  the  gas  and  let  it  heat 
up,  having  the  burner  so  located  as  to  avoid  side  draughts. 
— L.  G.  Noel,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Second  Soldering. — When  a  second  soldering  becomes 
necessary  place  a  piece  of  lower  karat  solder  than  was  first 
used  in  mercury  until  the  surface  is  slightly  amalgamated. 
It  will  flow  readily  and,  the  mercury  being  sublimated  in  the 
heating,  the  appearance  of  the  finished  piece  is  the  same  as  it 
originally  was. — American  Dentist. 

To  Confine  Solder  to  One  Spot. — Paint  the  parts  to  be 
protected  with  yellow  ochre  water  color.  Whiting  will  work 
the  same  way,  but  flakes  off  when  heat  is  applied,  which  is 
not  the  case  with  the  yellow  ochre. — C.  C.  Nobles,  Dental 
Register. 


334  Practical  Dentistry. 

Solder  Teaser. — A  common  lead  pencil  is  a  fine  tool 
for  teasing  solder  to  flow  just  where  wanted.  Expose 
the  lead  for  about  half  an  inch  from  the  point  and  give  the 
wood  a  longer  slant  than  for  ordinary  use.  Saturate  the 
wood  for  about  an  inch  up  the  slant  with  dilute  sulphuric 
acid.  Wrap  with  a  strip  of  asbestos  down  to  the  lead  ex- 
posure and  bind  with  wire  thread.  This  makes  it  more 
resistant  to  the  heat  of  the  blow-pipe. — W.  H.  Spaulding, 
Dental  Summary. 

"The  Teaser." — To  one  end  of  a  four-inch  piece  of 
German  silver  wire  solder  a  pointed  piece  of  platinum  wire 
about  gauge  17  and  two  inches  long.  Put  a  handle  on 
the  other  end  and  use  the  platinum  point  to  move  about 
pieces  of  solder,  without  fear  of  displacing  the  rest,  coax- 
ing it  to  points  or  surfaces  to  which  it  does  not  flow, 
spreading  and  drawing  it  as  desired.  The  platinum  does 
not  effect  the  solder  as  steel  would. — H.  W.  Northrop, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Managing  Solders. — Gold  or  silver  solder  has  a  dis- 
agreeable habit  of  flowing  when  it  is  not  wanted  and  of  not 
flowing  when  desired.  It  inclines  to  flow  after  the  flux  and 
also  to  the  point  where  most  heat  is  concentrated,  and 
avoids  places  covered  by  such  material  as  whiting,  yellow 
ochre  or  graphite.  About  the  most  convenient  method  of 
preventing  the  flow  of  solder  to  any  point  is  to  rub  that 
point  over  with  a  soft  lead  pencil  point. — Thomas  J.  Mc- 
Lernon,  Stomatologist. 

A  New  Method  of  Soldering. — Mix  equal  parts  of  filings 
of  an  easy-flowing  solder  and  of  filings  of  some  higher 
fusing  metal  with  enough  of  a  creamy  solution  of  borax 
to  make  a  thick  paste.  Pack  the  joint  with  this  mixture 
and  heat  until  fused,  being  careful  that  the  entire  mass  is 
evenly  heated  throughout.  This  is  especially  adapted  to 
cases  where  large  spaces  are  to  be  bridged,  or  a  cusp  to 
be  added,  always  making  allowance  for  shrinkage. — F.  W. 
Stephan,  Dental  Summary. 


Solders  and  Soldering.  335 

Investment  Material. — Three  parts  plaster  of  Paris  to 
one  part  powdered  asbestos.    If  this  investment  is  properly 
•  heated,    you    will    have    no    fractured    porcelains. — P.    T. 
Dashwood. 

A  Cheap  and  Handy  Asbestos  Block. — Take  about  a 
yard  of  asbestos  rope,  to  be  obtained  at  any  hardware  store, 
and  make  a  flat  coil  of  from  three  to  four  inches  in  diameter. 
Cover  with  a  mixture  of  plaster  of  Paris  and  pumice  with 
some  shreds  of  asbestos  fibre.  While  still  soft,  insert  as 
legs  three  flat-headed  nails  to  form  an  equilateral  triangle. 
— Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

A  Convenient  Soldering  Outfit. — Upon  the  swing- 
bracket  of  a  druggist's  filtering  rack  place  a  piece  of  wire 
gauze  upon  which  the  case  to  be  soldered  is  placed  and 
heated  from  below  with  a  Bunsen  burner.  When  the  case 
is  thoroughly  hot  a  few  blasts  from  one  of  the  improved 
gas  blow-pipes  will  flow  the  solder. — C.  L.  Alexander, 
Dental  World. 

A  Convenient  Mode  of  Investment. — In  backing  teeth 
for  the  investment,  soak  asbestos  paper  until  it  becomes 
a  pulpy  mass.  Press  the  porcelain  facing  into  the  mass 
until  the  edges  are  brought  a  trifle  above  the  porcelain.  The 
blow-pipe  can  be  applied  immediately  without  waiting  for 
it  to  dry. — A.  P.  Fellows,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Avoid  Pit-holes  in  Soldering. — Be  sure  to  keep 
your  borax  floating  to  the  top  of  the  melted  metal ;  little  pits 
are  formed  by  particles  of  borax  confined  under  pieces  of 
solder.  Use  a  small  pointed  instrument  to  stir  up  the  solder 
and  displace  any  borax  that  might  otherwise  be  confined 
within  the  mass. — H.  W.  Northrop,  Items  of  Interest. 

Protection  of  the  Eyes  While  Soldering. — When  en- 
gaged in  soldering,  relief  from  the  glare  of  the  flame  will 
be  derived  from  the  use  of  plain  smoked  glasses,  which 
should  be  quite  dark. — W.  T.  Jackman,  Ohio  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 


336  Practical  Dentistry. 

Borax  to  Prevent  Oxidation  in  Soldering. — Before  cut- 
ting up  gold  solder,  borax  both  sides  and  anneal  in  water. 
This  will  leave  a  coating  of  borax  on  both  sides,  and  it 
will  be  impossible  for  it  to  oxidize.  In  bridge-work  with 
porcelain  teeth  no  borax  will  come  in  contact  with  the 
teeth. — E  J.  Conley. 

To  Prevent  Bubbling  in  Soldering. — Cut  the  solder  up 
and  drop  it  in  a  solution  of  borax.  Pick  it  out,  and 
when  dry  there  will  be  enough  borax  on  it  to  make  a  flux, 
and  no  bubbling. — Dr.  Sangster,  Dominion  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

To  Prevent  Broken  Porcelain. — Fracture  of  porcelains 
is  often  due  to  borax  getting  through  the  pin-holes  in  the 
backing.  To  prevent  this,  remove  the  backing  and  adapt 
a  piece  of  No.  20  or  30  gold-foil  over  the  back  of  the  facing, 
by  means  of  a  cork.  Put  the  backing  on,  press  down,  and 
trim  off  excess  of  foil.  The  borax  cannot  get  in  between 
the  gold-foil  and  the  porcelain. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Solder  for  Aluminum  Plate. — A  French  patent  has  is- 
sued for  an  aluminum  solder,  which  consists  of  aluminum  95 
parts,  copper  2  parts,  antimony,  bismuth  and  zinc  each  i 
part.  The  aluminum  must  be  protected  by  a  flux,  viz.,  a 
thin  layer  of  phosphoric  acid. — Ohio  Dental  Journal,  Trans- 
lation by  H.  Prinz. 

Easy  Soldering. — Attach  compressed-air  hose  to  your 
blow-pipe  and  the  absolute  ease  with  which  the  soldering 
can  be  done  is  surprising,  while  no  checking  of  porcelain 
is  apt  to  occur  when  the  heat  is  thus  steadily  applied  — 
George  Zederbaum,  Dental  Digest. 

Borax  Flux. — Fill  a  bottle  with  water;  drop  into  it  a 
lump  of  borax  and  boil.  With  this  moisten  the  place  where 
the  solder  is  wanted  to  flow,  and  it  will  run  like  a  flash; 
much  easier  than  when  borax  powder  is  used. — J.  B. 
Ascher,  Dental  Cosmos. 


Solders  and  Soldering.  337 

To  Prevent  Change  of  Color  of  Porcelain  After  Solder- 
ing.— Paint  between  backing  and  tooth  with  whiting  dis- 
solved in  alcohol.  Make  backing  of  platina  and  flow  i8k. 
gold  over  it.  Invest  in  chalk  and  plaster  half-and-half. — ^Dr. 
LoMBORG,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 

Annealing. — Gold  or  copper  plate  heated  to  redness 
and  then  dropped  into  alcohol  will  be  softer  and  cleaner  than 
when  water  is  used. — Dental  World. 

To  Prevent  Bubbling  of  Borax. — Mix  a  minimum  of 
gum-arabic  and  water  with  the  borax  on  a  glass  slab. — In- 
ternational Dental  Journal. 

Quick  Investment. — For  quick  investment  for  soldering 
bands,  clasps  and  teeth,  the  following  mixture  may  be  kept 
on  hand:  Equal  parts  of  prepared  chalk  and  fine  sand, 
kneaded  in  glycerin,  making  a  plastic  mass. — Dental  Hints. 

Fluid  Flux. — Powdered  borax,  7  drachms ;  boracic  acid, 
7  drachms;  distilled  cold  water,  6  ounces.  Shake  well 
until  dissolved;  then  filter,  pouring  back  the  liquid  until 
perfectly  clear. — Pointers. 

To  Prevent  Checkered  Porcelains. — Always  wrap  an  in- 
vestment, immediately  after  soldering,  in  asbestos  cloth, 
and  the  teeth  will  never  be  cracked  by  chilling. — B.  H. 
Teague,  Dental  Hints. 

ftuick  Pickle. — Place  the  piece  in  a  small  glass  dish  and 
nearly  cover  with  hot  water;  pour  in  an  equal  quantity  of 
pure  sulphuric  acid,  and  by  that  time  the  piece  will  be  clean. 
— Oliver  Martin,  Dental  Review. 

Jumping  Solder. — In  placing  foil  scraps  in  a  crack 
where  you  wish  to  span  solder  use  scrap  mat  gold.  It  will 
stay  where  put  and  not  ball,  but  make  a  satisfactory  joint. 
— Prescott  Niles,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Flux  for  Hard  Solder. — In  place  of  borax,  use  the  fluid 
that  comes  with  your  phosphate  of  zinc. — Dental  Hints. 


338  Practical  Dentistry. 

Resoldering. — To  prevent  the  unsoldering  or  re-fusing 
of  parts  previously  united,  coat  such  surfaces  with  crocus 
(ferric  peroxid)  or  a  solution  of  plumbago  or  whiting  in 
alcohol  or  water. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Items  of  Interest. 

MANIPULATION  OF  PLASTER  OF  PARIS 

A  Coating  for  Plaster  Casts. — Mix  in  four  ounces  of 
sulphuric  ether  two  ounces  of  collodion  and  two  ounces  of 
"silver  gloss"  (obtained  from  dealers  in  painters'  supplies). 
Let  it  stand  for  about  forty-eight  hours  and  shake  well 
before  using.  Keep  in  well-corked  bottle.  Apply  with 
camel's  hair  brush.  Gives  a  beautiful  glossy  surface  to  casts. 
— J.  F.  Steele,  American  Journal. 

Manipulation  of  Plaster  of  Paris. — Use  no  water,  but 
a  preparation  made  from  the  gluten  of  rice.  It  is  almost 
a  syrup,  but  entirely  free  from  any  adhesiveness,  yet  it  has 
a  great  affinity  for  the  plaster  and  will  take  up  a  very  large 
quantity;  enough  is  added  so  that  it  can  be  rolled  in  the 
hands  like  a  piece  of  putty.  There  is  no  need  for  haste. 
When  set  it  has  a  beautiful  smooth  surface,  and  no  air 
bubbles  remain  in  it.  If  ordinary  plaster  is  dropped  in  water 
and  allowed  to  settle  thoroughly  and  the  excess  of  water 
poured  off,  and  then  a  teaspoonful  of  this  gluten  added,  it 
will  make  the  mixture  smooth,  and  it  will  pour  without  any 
air  bubbles. — D.  Genese,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Harden  Plaster  Casts. — Dissolve  one  part  alum  (free 
from  iron)  in  five  and  a  half  parts  hot  water.  Immerse  the 
cast  and  allow  to  remain  from  half  an  hour  to  several 
weeks,  according  to  size  and  bulk.  After  it  has  absorbed 
a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  solution,  remove  and  from  time 
to  time  drench  with  the  same  solution  until  a  coating  of 
crystallized  alum  is  formed  over  the  entire  surface.  When 
thoroughly  dry  polish  with  sand-paper  and  finish  by  rubbing 
with  a  dry  cloth.  The  product  will  be  a  hard,  dense  mass 
of  fine  texture,  extremely  white,  showing  a  high  polish  re- 
sembling Carrara  marble. — Ex. 


Manipulation  of  Plaster  of  Paris.  339 

To  Harden  Plaster  of  Paris  Casts. — Dissolve  boric  acid 
in  warm  water  and  add  sufficient  ammonia  to  form  the 
borate  which  remains  in  the  solution.  Mix  the  plaster  of 
paris  with  this  solution,  cold,  or  apply  it  to  the  surface  of 
the  casts  with  a  brush.  Rinse  off  and  dry.  The  surface 
will  become  hard  in  two  days,  the  induration  in  the  interior 
proceeding  more  slowly. — Medical  Nezus  {Brief). 

Plaster  of  Paris. — Vinegar  of  borax  will  delay  the  set- 
ting of  plaster  of  Paris.  Sugar,  salt,  or  potassium  sulphate 
will  hasten  its  setting.  Marshmallow  hardens  and  toughens 
it.  Marble-dust  mixed  with  it  prevents  its  expansion  and 
makes  it  stronger  and  better  able  to  withstand  heavy  pres- 
sure.— D.  Beacock,  Dental  OiRce  and  Laboratory. 

Impression  Plaster. — French's  plaster  being  very  fine 
sets  quicker  and  gives  a  smoother  surface  to  the  cast  than 
the  coarser  plaster.  In  orthodontic  cases  the  impressions  in 
almost  all  cases  have  to  be  broken  for  removal,  and  the  fine 
plaster  does  not  set  so  hard  but  that  it  can  be  removed  with- 
out causing  much  pain.  If  reasonable  care  and  skill  are 
used  the  pieces  can  be  put  together  accurately  enough.  The 
impression  should  be  well  dried  before  varnishing. — Dr. 
Abell,  Dental  Register. 

Plaster  of  Paris:  Prevention  of  Expansion. — The  addi- 
tion of  sulphate  of  potassium  to  the  water  used  in  mixing, 
in  the  proportion  of  five  grammes  to  forty  cubic  centimetres 
of  water  for  from  fifty-five  to  sixty  grammes  plaster  of 
paris,  will  accelerate  setting  and  partially  control  expansion. 
Dissolve  the  potassium  sulphate  in  the  water  before  adding 
the  plaster.    Stir  as  little  as  possible. — J.  H.  Prothero. 

Mixing  Plaster. — With  the  patient's  mouth  in  readiness 
and  the  tray  in  convenient  position  for  filling,  proceed  to 
mix,  using  distilled  water  about  70°.  Sift  the  plaster  slowly 
into  the  water  with  little  or  no  stirring ;  when  the  last  parti- 
cle has  disappeared  below  the  surface  of  the  water  pour  off 
the  surplus  and  the  plaster  is  ready  for  the  impression. — 
Alfred  P.  Rogers,  Items  of  Interest. 


340  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Give  a  Smooth  Glossy  Surface  to  Plaster  Models. — 

Coat  the  impression  with  very  thin  shellac  varnish,  just 
enough  to  color  the  plaster.  Then  coat  with  a  varnish 
made  by  dissolving  gum  sandarac  three  parts  and  gum 
elemi  one  part  in  pure  alcohol,  thin  enough  not  to  form 
bubbles  when  applied  with  soft  brush. — A.  J.  Hand,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Hardening  Plaster  Models. — Plaster  models  may  be 
hardened  and  given  a  marble-like  surface  by  boiling  them 
in  stearin,  using  a  double  boiler  like  a  glue-pot  for  melting 
the  stearin.  The  models  must  be  perfectly  dry  before  put- 
ting them  into  the  boiling  stearin. — Dental  Register. 

Test  for  Quality  of  Plaster  of  Paris. — The  quality  of 
plaster  may  be  tested  by  simply  squeezing  it  in  the  hand. 
If  it  coheres  slightly  and  remains  in  position  after  the 
hand  has  been  gently  opened,  it  is  good ;  if  it  falls  to  pieces 
immediately  it  has  been  injured. — British  Journal  of  Dental 
Science. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  Between  Two  Plaster  Surfaces. — 
Melt  a  small  piece  of  old  wax  in  olive  oil,  to  form  a  thin 
paste,  with  which  smear  the  impression.  The  amount  of 
wax  required  differs  summer  and  winter. — R.  Stanwav 
Parris,  Journal  British  Dental  Association. 

To  Harden  and  Protect  Plaster  Casts. — Immerse  the 
casts  in  a  pot  of  boiling  beeswax  until  thoroughly  saturated. 
The  wax  penetrates  throughout  the  plaster,  making  it  hard 
or  horny  and  impervious  to  moisture. — International  Dental 
Journal. 

To  Prevent  Air  Bubbles  in  Plaster. — Soaking  the  lower 
part  of  a  flask  in  water  for  a  few  minutes  before  you  fill  in 
the  upper  half  will  entirely  prevent  air  bubbles  in  the 
plaster. — W.  A.  Brownlee,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

To  Toughen  Plaster  Models. — Immerse  for  half  an  hour 
in  an  alum  solution — one  part  iron-free  alum  and  six  parts 
water. — International  Dental  Journal. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  341 

The  Plaster  Bench. — A  piece  of  plate  glass  about  a  foot 
wide  and  two  feet  long,  set  in  the  plaster  bench  near  the 
waste  drawer,  presents  a  smooth  surface  on  which  to  set 
models,  and  which  is  easily  cleaned. — A.  W.  Thornton, 
Dental  Brief. 

Plaster  of  Paris :  Warpage. — Prompt  removal  from  tray 
and  separation  of  cast  from  impression  will  obviate  warp- 
age to  a  considerable  extent. — J.  H.  Prothero,  Dental 
Digest. 

To  Prevent  Expansion  of  Plaster  in  Setting. — If  slacked 
lime  is  added  to  boiling  water  and  the  clear  liquid  decanted 
for  use  in  mixing  plaster  of  Paris,  the  plaster  will  not  ex- 
pand.— P.  B.  McCuLLouGH,  International  Dental  Journal. 

PROSTHETIC  DENTISTRY— MISCELLANEOUS 

Combination  Lower  Plates. — In  a  partial  lower  vulcan- 
ite denture  the  inconvenience  arising  from  the  bulk  of  rub- 
ber necessary  to  give  strength  to  the  portion  passing  back 
of  the  anterior  teeth  can  be  overcome  by  substituting  for  the 
rubber  a  platino-iridium  wire  to  hold  the  two  lateral  por- 
tions of  the  plate  in  position.  Flatten  and  notch  or  roughen 
about  one-half  inch  of  the  ends  of  the  wire,  fitting  it  to  the 
plaster  model  one-half  or  three-fourths  of  an  inch  back  of 
the  last  anterior  tooth  on  each  side,  bending  the  end  in 
around  the  tooth.  Wax  up  as  you  would  an  all-vulcanite 
plate,  leaving  out  the  wax  behind  the  anterior  teeth,  but  in- 
vesting the  ends  of  wire  well  in  the  wax.  Let  the  wire  clear 
the  gum  back  of  the  anterior  teeth,  as  pressure  would  result 
in  irritation. — Raymond  C.  Mathis,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cavity-cutter  for  Artificial  Teeth. — Dissolve  gum  cam- 
phor in  turpentine,  making  a  saturated  solution.  Shape 
cavity  with  carborundum  wheel,  then  use  engine  and  an  old 
discarded  engine-bur  kept  moistened  with  solution. — J.  A. 

ROCKEY. 


3'42  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Prevent  Shrinkage  of  the  Gums  and  to  Preserve  the 
Festoons  While  a  Denture  is  Being  Made. — The  sockets 
must  be  kept  open,  for  which  purpose  a  model,  including 
the  roots,  is  made  as  follows :  Take  an  impression  in  plas- 
ter before  the  teeth  are  removed.  Then  extract  the  teeth, 
smooth  the  roots  and  insert  them  in  the  impression,  which 
is  then  poured.  Remove  the  natural  teeth  from  the  cast 
and  make  a  plate  of  vulcanite,  which  will  carry  points 
corresponding  to  the  roots  of  the  teeth,  and  which  will  fill 
the  sockets.  This  can  be  worn  without  irritation,  and  there 
will  be  no  hemorrhage.  Facings  having  long  necks  are 
to  be  used  for  the  denture,  entering  the  sockets  as  high  up 
as  possible,  say  three-eighths  of  an  inch. — S.  J.  Hagman, 
Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Association. 

Handy  Instrument  for  Burnishing  Backing  to  Pins. — 
Dravir  the  temper  from  an  old  excavator  and  cut  off  sufficient 
to  leave  of  a  size  to  be  drilled  from  the  end,  deep  enough  to 
more  than  receive  facing  pin ;  countersink  the  hole.  With 
sharp-pointed  instrument  punch  holes  through  backing  and 
place  backing  over  pins  with  flared  out  edges  away  from 
facing.  Place  the  above  burnishing  instrument  over  the  pin 
and  press  the  backing  hard  against  the  facing  and  with  a 
few  turns  of  the  instrument  burnish  the  flared  edges  close 
to  the  pin,  making  a  perfect  joint.  This  avoids  bending  the 
pins,  with  the  strain  on  the  porcelain. — C.  E.  Bellchamber, 
Dental  Review. 

Forming  "A  Relief." — Outline  on  the  cast  with  pencil 
the  location  of  the  hard  places  and  cover  with  tin  foil  No. 
60,  from  three  to  five  thicknesses.  Cut  the  first  piece  by 
the  outline  on  the  cast.  Cut  another  by  this  and  trim  it 
slightly  all  around  the  edges.  Use  the  second  as  a  pattern 
for  the  third,  which  in  turn  trim  as  before,  and  so  with  the 
others.  Apply  the  smallest  to  the  cast  first  followed  by 
the  others,  necessarily  thus  concealing  the  steps  at  the  mar- 
gins and  avoiding  the  sharp  edges  so  objectionable  in  the  old 
air-chambers.  Secure  the  foil  to  the  cast  with  liquid  silex 
or  varnish. — W.  E.  Walker. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  343 

To  Drill  Cavities  in  Porcelain  Teeth. — With  carborun- 
dum wheel  grind  down  a  pit  of  suitable  size.  Make  a  paste 
of  glycerin,  turpentine  and  corundum  powder  and  rub  it  into 
the  pit,  and  with  copper  mandrel  drill  two  retaining  points. 
In  this  way  a  cavity  can  be  prepared  in  a  porcelain  tooth  in 
five  minutes. — J.  F.  Steele,  Dental  Brief. 

Preparing  and  Filling  Cavities  in  Porcelain  Teeth. — 

It  takes  but  a  few  minutes  to  prepare  a  cavity.  Much  better 
results  can  be  obtained  by  the  use  of  a  thin  diamond  disk 
than  with  the  diamond  point  drill.  By  using  the  disk,  cavi- 
ties may  be  made  in  almost  any  part  of  the  tooth  in  which 
the  natural  ones  usually  decay.  First  cut  away  with  a  corun- 
dum or  carborundum  stone  the  surface  of  the  tooth  where 
the  filling  is  to  be  placed,  and  then  with  the  diamond  disk 
the  sides  of  the  cavity  can  be  easily  undercut  sufficiently  to 
hold  the  filling.  Moss  fibre  or  some  form  of  sponge  gold  is 
much  easier  started  than  foil,  and  can  be  worked  with  very 
little  malleting.  It  only  requires  about  half  the  quantity  of 
gold  necessary  to  fill  the  ones  prepared  with  the  drill.  Ap- 
proximal  cavities  can  easily  be  imitated  by  this  method, 
which  would  be  impossible  in  the  old  way ;  corners  can  be 
built  out  and  a  filling  can  be  inserted  in  almost  any  position 
desired.  With  a  little  experimenting  one  will  be  surprised 
at  the  artistic  results  which  may  be  obtained,  and  I  am  sure 
your  patients  will  fully  appreciate  your  efforts  in  this  direc- 
tion.— D.  LiNLEY  Palmer,  Dental  Brief. 

Continuous  Gum  Facing  Compound. — To  give  as  nearly 
as  possible  the  appearance  of  gum  tissue  when  using  plain 
teeth  for  vulcanite  dentures,  the  "Continuous  Gum  Facing" 
closely  resembles  porcelain  continuous  gum,  is  inexpensive, 
easily  applied,  and  when  thoroughly  hardened  retains  well 
its  color  and  form.  It  should  have  from  six  to  twelve  hours 
in  which  to  harden,  placing  it  in  the  sun  or  other  warm  place 
to  hasten  the  process.  By  using  aluminum  as  lining  and  con- 
tinuous gum  compound  as  a  facing  makes  a  plate  that  is 
healthy,  cleanly  and  handsome  at  little  expense.-^-J.  J. 
GrouTj  Dental  Digest. 


3'44  Practical  Dentistry. 

Denture  Retention:  Model  Modification. — Denture  re- 
tention depends  upon  adaptation  rather  than  fit.  The  plate 
must  lie  close  to  the  hard  parts  of  the  mouth  but  rest  defi- 
nitely on  the  softer  and  yielding  portions ;  each  case  has  a 
peculiarity  unto  itself  and  no  definite  rule  can  be  formu- 
lated. It  is  an  excellent  practice  to  place  powdered  rouge 
on  the  parts  when  the  tissues  are  soft  and  yielding;  when 
followed  up  with  the  plaster  these  parts  are  found  marked ; 
coating  them  with  more  rouge  the  model  will  be  likewise 
marked  and  should  be  scraped  to  the  depth  indicated  by  the 
tissues ;  if  pronouncedly  soft,  remove  considerable ;  if  less 
so,  remove  accordingly. — B.  J.  Cigrand,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Aluminum  in  Prosthetic  Dentistry. — The  special  merits 
of  aluminum — pure  aluminum,  be  it  understood — are  its 
extraordinary  lightness,  its  power  of  resistance  to  the  oral 
fluids,  its  indifference  to  the  action  of  the  mucous  mem- 
brane, its  remarkable  susceptibility  of  polish,  easy  method 
of  working,  resistance  against  oxidation,  its  superior  capa- 
bility of  adhesion.  Only  the  careful  practitioner,  however, 
can  treat  aluminum  with  success.  Care  must  be  taken  in 
selecting  the  pure  and  not  too  soft  metal,  carefully  removing 
any  impurities  after  rolling  or  stamping,  heating  it  cautiously 
and  cooling  it  slowly,  and  having  it  not  too  thin,  or  it  will 
easily  bend ;  never  below  0.7  millimetre  for  full  and  at  least 
one  millimetre  thick  for  partial  plates. — W.  Pfaff,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

To  Keep  Lathe  Stone  Wet  and  Clean  While  Grinding. — 

Select  a  small  egg-shaped  sponge,  commonly  called  "school 
sponges ;"  through  the  center  of  this  pass  an  old  excavator, 
having  previously  filed  it  to  a  sharp  point  at  one  end.  Now 
tack  a  thin  piece  of  soft  pine,  about  four  inches  square,  to 
the  lathe  table  a  little  back  of  the  stone.  Wet  the  sponge 
and  wring  out  just  enough  to  prevent  dripping;  stick  in  the 
excavator  and  allow  the  sponge  to  recline  against  the  wheel. 
— R.  B.  CoLViN,  Dental  Brief. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  345 

A  Temporary  Partial  Plate  Made  in  a  Few  Minutes. — 

Mold  a  large  piece  of  temporary  stopping  to  the  A^acant 
space.  Suitable  teeth  are  heated  and  pressed  into  place  in 
the  mouth.  With  powdered  gum  tragacanth  sprinkled  on 
the  under  surface  of  the  piece  it  can  be  worn  with  perfect 
comfort  and  security  until  the  plate  is  repaired, — John 
GiRDWOOD,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Dentures  for  Edentulous  Mouths. — To  counteract  the 
natural  tendency  of  the  lower  jaw  to  elongate  with  age,  in 
setting  the  teeth  let  the  overlap  of  the  incisors  be  somewhat 
pronounced,  and  let  the  back  upper  teeth  be  slightly 
longer  and  the  back  lower  teeth  a  trifle  shorter  than  the 
natural  teeth  would  be,  dropping  the  line  of  occlusion  to  the 
rear,  the  force  of  bringing  the  teeth  together  giving  a  ten- 
dency to  tighten  the  upper  plate  upon  the  gum. — R.  R. 
Freeman,  Dental  Headlight. 

Bicuspid  Teeth  in  Metal  Plate-work;  The  Logan  Crown. 

— The  bicuspid  teeth  as  furnished  are  not  all  that  they 
ought  to  be,  and  in  order  to  get  a  grinding  surface  that  is 
adequate  use  the  Logan  crown  in  metal  work.  Having 
selected  a  suitable  crown,  cut  off  the  pin  and  fill  the  depres- 
sion flush  with  gold-foil,  and  bevel  oflf  at  the  palatal  surface, 
leaving  a  V-shaped  space  into  which  solder  will  run.  The 
Logan  crown  gives  the  desired  articulating  surface,  a  better 
aesthetic  effect,  and  a  natural  feeling  to  the  tongue. — W.  D. 
Tracy,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Artistic  Prosthetic  Dentures. — A  simple  method  by 
which  the  individual  characteristics  of  the  patient  may  be 
preserved  in  the  alignment  of  the  teeth  is,  before  extract- 
ing the  remaining  teeth,  to  have  the  patient  close  the  teeth 
into  a  piece  of  softened  wax.  When  the  teeth  are  extracted, 
wash  them  and  place  them  in  the  impression  in  the  wax  and 
run  plaster  around  the  roots  to  hold  them  in  place.  This 
will  prove  a  valuable  aid  in  setting  up  the  artificial  teeth,  in 
preserving  the  characteristics  of  the  natural  teeth. — L.  W. 
Skidmore,  Dental  Digest. 

23 


346  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cutting  Cavities  in  Porcelain  Teeth. — Undercuts  in  cavi- 
ties in  porcelain  teeth  are  readily  made  with  a  fine  or  small 
copper  wire  carried  in  the  engine,  the  point  being  wet  with 
oil  and  emery. — Howard  E.  Roberts. 

Malocclusion. — There  is  no  department  of  dentistry 
that  demands  more  knowledge  and  skill  than  does  the  mov- 
ing of  maloccluded  teeth  into  the  proper  position.  It  is  also 
a  difficult  task  to  keep  them  there  except  in  those  cases  when 
the  occlusion  insures  retention.  Use  only  one  retaining 
jappliance,  the  complete  splint,  similar  to  that  used  for  a 
fractured  jaw.  "The  retainer  that  doesn't  wiggle  is  the  one 
that  holds  the  teeth." — J.  D.  Patterson,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Hygienic  Lower  Dentures. — Watts'  and  Weston's  metals 
are  alloys  largely  composed  of  tin  and  silver,  to  which  a 
small  amount  of  bismuth  is  added  to  reduce  the  melting 
point.  The  saline  fluids  in  the  mouth  when  acting  on  the 
plates  may  form  chlorid  of  tin,  as  tin  is  easily  attacked  by 
chlorin.  This  chlorid  of  tin  is  a  strong  antiseptic  agent, 
which  will  exert  its  good  influence  upon  the  mucous  lining 
of  the  oral  cavity;  no  toxic  salts  being  formed  for  this 
reason. — H.  Printz,  Dental  Digest. 

Temporary  Dentures. — We  cannot  place  in  the  mouth 
a  temporary  denture  quickly  enough  after  the  removal  of  the 
teeth.  I  am  so  radical  in  my  belief  that  I  advocate  making 
a  denture  before  the  extraction  of  the  teeth  in  a  great  many 
cases,  so  that  after  the  extraction  has  taken  place  I  can  ai 
once  put  the  denture  into  position,  thus  not  only  restoring 
the  lost  teeth,  but  the  denture  acts  as  a  splint  to  encourage 
the  rapid  healing  of  the  wounded  parts. — W.  M  Bartlett, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 

Clasps  and  Bands. — When  a  gold  band  encircles  a  tooth 
saturated  with  acid  and  pathological  saliva,  an  electrolytic 
action  is  established  which  destroys  the  enamel  and  dentin 
of  the  tooth,  varying  with  the  state  of  calcification.     By 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  347 

the  substitution  of  iridoplatinum  these  evil  consequences 
are  averted.  The  swaging  of  iridoplatinum  being  difficult, 
the  alloy  is  annealed  in  a  sheet-iron  box  filled  with  charcoal 
heated  by  an  electric  current.  Pure  gold  must  be  used  for 
soldering. — Dr.  Poinsot,  Dental  Cosmos. 

"Shoeing"  or  Tipping  Porcelain  Teeth. — Grind  the  tooth 
to  thin  or  "feather  edge"  as  usual;  extend  backing  as  far 
as  possible,  filling  off  gently  toward  the  tooth.  Place  on 
model  and  wax  up,  extending  the  wax  a  few  lines  beyond 
occlusal  end  of  tooth.  After  investment  has  hardened  re- 
move wax  and  pack  the  groove  left  by  removal  of  wax  on 
end  of  tooth  with  non-cohesive  gold  foil.  When  soldered 
the  tip  will  be  perfect,  the  foil  serving  as  scaffolding  to 
carry  the  solder. — E.  P.  Beadles,  Danville,  Va. 

Quick  Flasking. — Mix  sufficient  plaster  to  fill  the  flask. 
Fill  one  half  and  put  in  the  plaster  cast  or  plate,  shaping 
the  surrounding  soft  plaster  so  as  to  have  no  undercuts. 
Cover  the  filled  half  with  tissue  or  bibulous  paper,  brush  it 
over  with  soap  solution,  put  on  the  ring  of  the  other  half 
and  fill  up  with  the  remaining  plaster  while  still  soft,  and 
put  on  the  top  of  the  flask.  Will  open  as  readily  as  if  two 
mixes  of  plaster  had  been  made. — B.  H.  Teague,  American 
Dental  Weekly. 

Bicuspid  and  Molar  Porcelains  in  Close  Bites. — Use 
diatoric  teeth  .  They  are  the  strongest  teeth  that  are  made. 
Solder  a  dwarf  pin  to  the  plate  to  pass  up  centre  of  tooth, 
packing  in  a  little  vulcanite,  which  makes  a  very  strong 
bite,  absolutely  firm.  They  will  stand  very  great  pressure. 
— J.  H.  Coster,  Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Association. 

Perfect-fitting  Backings. — Grind  the  facings  (for  front 
tooth)  to  feather  edge,  using  fine  stone.  Adapt  pure  gold, 
No.  32,  to  back;  punch  holes  for  pins  and  put  back  on 
tooth.  Roll  up  several  thicknesses  of  rubber-dam  and 
swage  the  tooth  and  backing  between  the  heavy  folds  of 
dam,  using  horn  mallet. — American  Dentist. 


348  Practical  Dentistry. 

Modeling  a  Plate. — Make  the  wax  model  represent  as 
accurately  as  possible  the  .finished  plate.  Make  the  sur- 
face of  the  wax  smooth  with  blowpipe  flame,  and  when  cold 
polish  with  light  and  rapid  strokes  with  the  dry  finger. 
Then  varnish  the  wax  with  thin  shellac.  This  will  give  the 
plate  such  a  smooth  surface  that  no  scraping  will  be  neces- 
sary, only  scouring  with  felt  wheels  and  pumice,  and  polish- 
ing.— W.  BuzzELL,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 

Adaptation  of  Partial  Denture. — When  only  one  or  two 
teeth  remain,  as  the  two  upper  canines  for  instance,  a 
closer  adaptation  may  be  secured  by  slightly  trimming  the 
plaster  teeth  and  completely  encircling  them  with  soft  or 
velum  rubber.  Pack  the  ordinary  rubber  around  this  and 
vulcanize  as  usual.  This  will  give  a  support  superior  to 
that  given  by  clasps  and  less  harmful  to  tooth  structure. — 
P.   B.    McCuLLOUGii,   International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Mark  Exactly  on  a  Denture  the  Spot  Corresponding 
to  a  Wound  of  the  Mucous  Membrane. — Cut  a  disc  of  suit- 
able size  from  paper  gummed  on  one  side,  and  place  it  care- 
fully over  the  ulcerated  spot,  gummed  side  up.  Moisten  the 
denture  and  place  in  position  with  light  pressure.  Remove 
carefully  and  the  disc  will  be  found  adherent  upon  the  point 
wounding  the  membrane,  which  can  then  be  relieved. — 
Revue  de  Stomatologie. 

To  Renovate  Hardened  Mouldine. — Place  in  a  glass  and 
cover  with  water  to  which  a  half-teaspoonful  of  glycerin 
has  been  added.  Leave  in  a  warm  place  until  the  water 
evaporates.  The  water  dissolves  the  lumps  and  the  glycerin 
thoroughly  permeates  the  mass ;  a  little  kneading  will  make 
it  as  good  as  new. — P.  W.  Smith,  Dental  Digest. 

Retention  of  Full  Upper  Dentures. — The  most  essential 
points  governing  the  comfortable  retention  and  subse- 
quent satisfactory  use  of  a  full  upper  denture  are,  (1)  fault- 
less adaptation  of  the  denture  to  the  mouth  and  gum; 
this  alone  will  cause  considerable  capillary  attraction  or 
adhesion;  (2)  a  perfect  articulation;  (3)  a  properly  con- 
structed relief  chamber. — H.  M.  Kirk,  Items  of  Interest. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  349 

To  Precipitate  G-old  from  a  Solution  Containing  other 
Metals. — Make  the  solution  thoroughly  acid  by  either  nitric 
or  hydrochloric  acid.  Then  add  from  ten  to  one  hundred 
cubic  centimetres  commercial  formalin,  according  to  quan- 
tity; the  action  is  hastened  by  gentle  heat;  pure  gold  in 
crystalline  condition  is  completely  precipitated  and  separated 
from  a  solution  also  containing  mercury,  zinc,  lead,  tin,  etc. 
— F.  J.  McInnes,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Insert  Dentures  Immediately  After  the  Extraction  of 
the  Teeth. — Frequent  use  exerts  an  influence  in  maintain- 
ing the  shape  of  the  jaw,  the  presence  of  dentures  prevent- 
ing the  degeneration  of  the  facial  and  masticating  muscles, 
the  jaws  consequently  retaining  longer  the  form  character- 
istic of  adult  life. — W.  H.  Dolgmare,  Journal  British  Dental 
Association. 

Retention  of  Dentures. — If  possible  a  mouth  should  not 
be  rendered  edentulous,  but  in  each  jaw  two  roots  should 
be  left  and  utilized  to  support  the  plate.  A  satisfactory 
method  is  to  fit  each  root  so  left  with  a  gold  cap  and  tube, 
into  which  fit  a  pin  attached  to  the  plate.  The  stability 
which  even  one  root  so  treated  will  give  to  an  entire  den- 
ture is  surprising. — Wm.  M.  Gabriel,  Dental  Record. 

Banding  a  Tooth. — In  banding  with  gold  a  tooth  having 
an  amalgam  filling,  burnish  over  the  portion  of  the  gold 
coming  in  contact  with  the  amalgam  a  piece  of  platinum 
foil  and  solder  before  bending  the  gold,  thus  obviating  the 
danger  of  weakening  the  band  by  permeation  of  the  gold 
with  mercury  from  the  amalgam. — A.  Drake,  Dental 
Record. 

A  Cushion  Lower  Plate. — In  a  case  in  which  the  mouth 
was  exceedingly  tender,  so  that  the  patient  was  quite  dis- 
couraged about  the  possibility  of  wearing  a  lower  plate,  a 
plate  was  made  with  the  whole  lower  surface  of  palate  rub- 
ber, about  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  This  was 
worn  with  much  comfort. — C.  C.  Bachman,  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 


350  Practical  Dentistry. 

Exactness  in  Prosthetic  Methods. — A  greater  degree  of 
exactness  in  our  methods  and  of  accuracy  in  our  results  in 
prosthetic  dentistry  are  calculated  to  produce  a  more  favor- 
able opinion  among  our  patients  than  would  the  same  in- 
creased vigilance  when  applied  to  what  might  strictly  be 
termed  operative  dentistry.  A  far  greater  proportion  of 
patients  can  judge  of  the  accuracy  of  fit  of  a  denture  than  of 
the  perfection  of  a  gold  filhng. — H.  C.  Wetmore,  Dominion 
Dental  Journal. 

Adapting  Metal  Backing  to  Facings. — Provide  a  semi- 
hard rubber  block  with  holes  for  the  reception  of  tooth- 
print.  Apply  backing  to  facing  approximately ;  place  on  the 
rubber  block  with  the  pins  inserted  in  the  holes.  Place 
another  block  of  rubber  on  the  porcelain  and  strike  with 
mallet  until  adaptation  is  obtained. — A.  H.  Peck,  Dental 
Revieiv. 

Shaping  the  Anterior  Teeth. — A  practice  which  is  of 
considerable  importance,  but  too  frequently  overlooked,  is 
that  of  modifying  the  forms  of  the  anterior  teeth  for 
esthetic  and  prophylactic  reasons.  Quite  often  a  few  touches 
of  the  carborundum  wheel  will  wholly  change  the  appear- 
ance of  the  anterior  teeth  and  greatly  augment  their  powers 
of  resistance. — J.  H.  Morrison,  Dental  Digest. 

Articulation. — The  four  positions  of  the  lower  jaw  in 
its  relation  to  the  upper,  from  a  strictly  dental  standpoint, 
are  occlusion  (being  the  relation  desired  in  taking  the  bites), 
right  lateral  occlusion,  left  lateral  occlusion,  and  incisal  oc- 
clusion. The  combination  of  these  four  positions,  in  action, 
constitutes  articulation. — P.  B.  McCullough,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Artificial  Dentures :  Failure  or  Success,  Which  ? — A  few 
days'  treatment  of  unhealthy  gums,  a  few  days  going  with- 
out an  ill-fitting  old  plate,  a  minor  surgical  operation  to  re- 
move a  flab  of  tissue  before  taking  the  impression,  will  often 
give  success  where  otherwise  you  are  destined  to  meet  with 
failure. — Frank  Fount,  Dental  Century. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  351 

The  Celluloid  Plate. — A  celluloid  plate,  made  on  a  metal 
cast,  fits  more  perfectly  than  a  rubber  plate  made  on  plaster. 
Take  impressions  in  plaster  and  sand,  in  an  asbestos  im- 
pression-tray, and  get  a  metal  cast  direct  from  the  impres- 
sion. Celluloid  plates  are  non-breakable,  contain  no  mer- 
cury, are  more  nearly  like  natural  gum,  and  when  made  on 
a  metal  die  of  ordinary  tinners'  solder,  they  come  out  smooth 
and  polished  and  slip  ofif  the  cast  with  very  little  trouble. — 
T.  H.  Morgan,  Items  of  Interest. 

Platinum-gold. — In  the  use  of  platinum-gold  for  build- 
ing down  teeth  great  care  must  be  exercised  in  annealing, 
unless  it  is  done  with  the  lectric  annealer.  The  most  per- 
fect results  can  be  obtained  by  using  it  within  a  short  time 
after  annealing. — Dental  Review. 

Cleansing  Wax  from  the  Pins  of  Teeth.— Alcohol,  used 
with  a  little  cotton  on  an  excavator,  after  the  use  of  hot 
water,  will  cleanse  the  pins  better  than  water  alone.  It  will 
separate  from  the  pins  unnoticed  particles  of  wax.  detaching 
it  from  the  pins  but  not  dissolving  the  wax. — J.  B.  Hodgkin, 
Dental  Digest. 

An  Improved  Bunsen  Burner. — Drill  a  small  hole  in  the 
side  and  insert  a  small  brass  tube,  allowing  it  to  come  just 
flush  with  the  top,  leaving  the  other  end  long  enough  to  at- 
tach to  your  bellows.  When  you  need  more  heat  than  the 
burner  makes,  apply  the  blast. — G.  B.  Speer,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 

'"Waxing-up"  Made  Easy. — Grease  a  tin  box  and  put 
your  scraps  of  base  plate  wax  in  it.  Melt  them  up  and 
while  hot  paint  on  the  wax  with  an  artist's  paint  brush 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  wide.  Keep  the  wax  hot. — E.  C. 
French,  American  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

A  Suggestion  in  Prosthesis. — For  a  full  lower  plate, 
when  the  ridge  is  narrow  and  thin,  use  small  bicuspid  and 
molars,  very  narrow  on  the  grinding  surface,  thus  lessen- 
ing the  resistance  in  mastication,  with  less  injury  to  the 
gums  than  with  larger  teeth. — J.  J.  Reed,  Dental  Review. 


352  Practical  Dentistry. 

An  Artistic  Artificial  Denture. — An  artistic  artificial 
denture  is  one  where  the  laws  of  nature  have  been  compHed 
with  in  harmonizing  the  size,  in  form,  in  shade,  and  in 
ahgnment,  with  the  physical  characteristics  of  the  patient, 
so  that  the  patient  on  opening  or  closing  the  mouth  will 
show  no  suspicion  of  inharmony.  Otherwise  it  is  simply 
"making  a  plate." — C.  O.  Metzler,  Dental  Summary. 

Artificial  Dentures:  To  Prevent  Tipping. — A  knowl- 
edge of  the  laws  relating  to  levers,  as  applied  in  the  con- 
struction of  artificial  dentures,  is  most  useful,  and  if  it  is 
borne  in  mind  that  it  is  best  to  keep  the  load  between  the 
power  and  the  fulcrum,  much  will  be  done  in  the  way  of 
preventing  tipping  of  the  plate. — D.  P.  Sims,  Dental  Digest. 

Vulcanizer  Packing. — Have  a  ring  cut  of  tin  the  size 
of  top  rim  of  the  boiler.  With  this  as  a  pattern  cut  rings 
of  thick  wrapping  paper.  One  of  these,  soaked  in  water, 
placed  over  the  old  rubber  packing,  and  brushed  over  with 
stove-polish,  makes  a  perfect  joint, — A,  T.  Peete,  Am.  Den. 
Weekly. 

To  Remove  Model  from  Articulator, — Grip  the  articu- 
lator in  a  bench  vise  and  cut  through  the  plaster  with  a 
small  hand  saw.  Especially  suitable  for  lower  models  which 
are  so  easily  broken.  If  sawn  off  at  the  right  depth  no 
paring  is  necessary  before  flasking. — W.  A.  Brownlee,  Do- 
minion Dental  Journal. 

Immediate  Insertion  of  Temporary  Dentures. — In  order 
that  the  anterior  teeth  may  enter  the  sockets  of  the  ex- 
tracted teeth,  insert  rolls  of  soft  wax  into  the  sockets,  to 
come  away  with  the  impression.  This  will  permit  the  teeth 
to  go  to  place  without  impinging  upon  either  the  gum  or 
the  alveolus. — Dr.  Driscoll,  Items  of  Interest. 

Celluloid  Cement. — For  making  celluloid  cement  for 
mending  casts,  dissolve  the  celluloid  in  aceton ;  this  is 
better  than  ether  and  alcohol.  The  solution  may  also  be 
used  in  place  of  collodion  on  wounds,  to  protect  from  the 
air  like  court  plaster. — I.  Douglas,  Dental  Register. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  353 

Shellac  Varnish. — To  produce  a  clear  solution,  take  a 
two-ounce  bottle  half  full  of  powdered  shellac,  fill  with  alco- 
hol and  shake  well.  Let  it  stand  until  thoroughly  clear  on 
top ;  then  pour  off  into  small  bottle  for  immediate  use.  Fill 
the  larger  bottle  again  with  alcohol  and  put  aside  for  future 
use. — G.  S.  Hershey,  Dental  Review. 

Artistic  Treatment  of  the  Teeth. — Pointed  cuspids  and 
irregular  lengths  of  laterals  and  centrals,  when  ground  off 
to  approximate  symmetry,  improve  the  appearance  and 
increase  the  usefulness  of  the  teeth,  also  facilitating  clean- 
ing the  teeth  on  the  part  of  the  patient. — A.  C.  Hart,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Sticky  Wax. — For  fastening  teeth  securely  to  the  base 
plate,  preparatory  to  trying  in  the  mouth,  a  wax  made  with 
seven  parts  of  white  wax  and  three  parts  of  gum  dammar, 
melted  together,  and  one  part  of  resin  added,  will  be  found 
far  superior  to  the  ordinary  yellow  wax. — ^Jas.  K.  Burgess, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

long  or  Short  Cusps. — When  there  is  scarcely  any  ridge 
at  all,  and  the  lower  plate  is  liable  to  be  thinner,  or  the  upper 
to  lose  its  suction,  use  short  cusps  or  grind  them  off  almost 
entirely.  Long  cusps  interlock,  and  it  requires  the  bearer  to 
bite  exactly  right,  or  dislodge  the  plate. — J.  J.  Reed,  Dental 
Review. 

Rocking  Plates. — To  prevent  plate  from  rocking  from 
expansion  of  plaster,  as  soon  as  cast  is  poured  sprinkle  a 
little  dry  plaster  on  top  and  lay  over  it  a  little  piece  of 
non-plastic;  place  in  flask,  turn  down  snug,  leave  it  three 
hours.  The  cast  will  never  bulge  up  in  the  centre. — L  F. 
Steele,  Dental  Brief. 

To  Renovate  Dirty  Wax. — Melt  in  water;  when  cool 
scrape  dirt  from  underside,  melt  again  in  clean  water,  adding 
a  teaspoonful  of  sulphuric  acid  when  it  comes  to  a  boil. — 
Dr.  Wright,  Ohio  Den.  Jour. 


354  Practical  Dentistry. 

Artificial  Dentures. — All  who  wear  artificial  dentures 
will  find  great  comfort  in  using  glycothymolin  in  cleaning 
the  plates  and  for  rinsing  the  mouth.  It  is  very  soothing 
to  the  mucous  membrane,  particularly  the  red  spongy  con- 
dition often  met  with  under  plates  of  rubber. — W.  H. 
Craft. 

Blow-pipe  for  Waxing  Cases. — A  convenient  and  effec- 
tive blow-pipe  for  waxing  cases  is  made  by  using  the  nozzle 
of  a  chip  blower  and  the  mouth-piece  of  a  tobacco  pipe,  con- 
necting the  two  with  a  piece  of  rubber  tubing  ten  inches 
long. — I.  A.  Robinson,  Dental  Weekly. 

Broken  Column  of  Mercury  in  Vulcanized  Thermometer. 
— Heat  the  thermometer  until  the  mercury  in  the  bulb  ex- 
pands and  joins  the  mercury  above.  Cool  off  suddenly  and 
it  will  all  go  down  together.  It  will  then  register  correctly 
again  when  the  temperature  is  increased. — J.  ]\I.  ^^'ALKER. 

Faulty  Dentures. — To  clearly  locate  on  the  plate  the 
irritated  spot,  place  a  little  moistened  whiting  on  the  curve 
of  a  spatula  and  apply  it  to  the  spot  in  the  mouth.  Put  the 
plate  in  place,  and  on  removing  it  the  place  demanding  relief 
is  clearly  indicated. — L.  P.  Haskell,  Dental  Review. 

Flat  Ridgeless  Jaws. — With  flat  ridgeless  jaws  better 
success  can  be  attained  with  swaged  metal  plates  than  with 
rubber,  and  that,  too,  without  the  vacuum  cavity  — L.  P. 
Haskell,  Items  of  Interest. 

Prosthetic  Dentistry. — A  good  prosthetic  dentist  must 
be  not  only  a  mechanic,  he  must  be  an  artist  of  the  highest 
excellence,  and  also  a  thorough  anatomist. — Dr.  Lowry, 
Dental  Reziezv. 

An  Aid  to  Laboratory  Neatness. — Do  all  wax  work 
on  a  piece  of  plate-glass  lo  x  17  inches,  which  helps  to  keep 
the  surroundings  clean.  To  clean  the  glass  simply  heat 
it  or  scrape  it. — H.  E.  Davis,  Dental  Era. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  355 

Lower  Dentures. — Do  not  extract  the  last  remaining 
lower  tooth  in  any  mouth  if  it  has  any  kind  of  a  healthy  at- 
tachment to  the  jaw.  Clasp  it  properly  and  you  will  get  the 
blessing  of  a  grateful  patient.  Extract  it  and  the  chances 
are  you  will  have  to  make  excuses  about  full  lower  plates  the 
balance  of  your  days. — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Review. 

Compressed  Air  in  the  Laboratory. — In  the  laboratory 
compressed  air  is  a  desirable  substitute  for  the  bellows 
when  using  the  blow-pipe.  The  flow  is  so  steady  that  it  is 
safe  and  effective  for  soldering  crowns  and  bridge-work 
containing  porcelain. — B.  E.  Sanders,  Dental  Summary. 

"Mouldine." — Send  to  a  near-by  pottery  or  to  the  studio 
of  an  artist  friend  and  get  some  wet  clay.  Add  a  quantity 
of  glycerin ;  keep  in  a  tightly  closed  can  and  you  will  have 
"mouldine"  always  ready  for  use. — Dental  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  of  Plaster  to  Vulcanite. — 
Before  packing,  varnish  the  model  with  collodion,  and  the 
plaster  will  not  adhere  to  the  plate  as  when  sandarach  is 
used,  and  the  plate  will  have  a  smoother  and  more  polished 
surface. — D.  H.  Payne,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Change  the  Shade  of  a  Porcelain  Tooth. — The  shade 

of  a  porcelain  tooth  can  be  changed  to  a  darker  tint  by 
carefully  heating  over  an  alcohol  flame  for  a  few  minutes. — 
C.  B.  Coleman,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Improve  Appearance  of  Artificial  Teeth. — To  remove 
the  unnatural  high  glossiness  of  porcelain  teeth,  dip  into 
hydro-fluoric  acid  prior  to  setting,  making  the  surface  ap- 
pear more  life-like. — British  lour.  Den.  Science. 

To  Clean  Plaster  Bowls, — When  plaster  has  been  left 
in  the  bowl  until  it  has  become  hard,  pour  boiling  water 
in  the  bowl  and  let  it  stand  about  two  minutes.  The  plaster 
can  then  be  easily  detached. — A.  M.  Waas,  Dental  Review. 


356  Practical  Dentistry. 

Removal  of  Tinfoil  Adhering  to  a  Plate. — Immerse 
plate  in  solution  of  nitric  acid  (one-third  to  three-fourths 
water),  permitting  the  plate  to  remain  in  the  solution  for 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes. — Dental  OfUce  and  Laboratory. 

Diatoric  Teeth. — Diatoric  teeth  make  good  bicuspid 
crowns,  especially  for  lowers.  Bake  a  pin  into  the  tooth 
and  it  can  be  adjusted  with  or  without  band. — Oliver  Mar- 
tin, Dental  Digest. 

Celluloid  Cement. — Mix  75  parts  sulphuric  ether  with 
25  parts  alcohol  in  a  well-corked  bottle.  After  a  few  days 
add  celluloid  in  small  pieces  to  make  an  almost  saturated 
solution.  An  excellent  medium  for  uniting  broken  plaster 
models. — Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Fusible  Metal  Base  Plate. — A  base  plate  of  metal  fur- 
nishes a  sure  solid  base  on  which  to  obtain  the  occlusion  of 
the  teeth,  under  the  same  conditions  as  prevail  in  the  finished 
piece.  You  get  an  accurate  bite,  and  have  a  base  plate  to 
work  on  that  is  rigid,  not  very  thick,  and  offers  good  re- 
sistance. You  can  tell  exactly  whether  there  is  sufficient 
atmospheric  pressure. — Geo.  F.  Grant,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Polishing    Ground    Surface    of    Porcelain    Teeth. — A 

cleansing  preparation  known  as  Porcela  (compounded  for 
the  purpose  of  cleaning  and  polishing  porcelain  bath-tubs, 
etc.)  gives  an  excellent  polish  to  porcelain  teeth  which  have 
been  ground.  Moisten  with  water  and  use  with  a  felt  wheel 
on  the  lathe. — Ed.  C.  Duryee,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Restoring  the  Enamel  Surface  to  Porcelain. — When  it 
has  been  necessary  to  grind  the  surface  of  a  tooth  to 
restore  the  polish  work  it  over  an  Arkansas  stone,  keeping 
well  moistened  with  liquid  soap;  finish  with  oxid  of  tin 
and  a  cork,  at  high  speed,  keeping  well  wetted  with  soap 
solution. — D.   Genese,   Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneoiis.  357 

Cleansing  from  Borax. — Borax  can  be  removed  from 
porcelain  and  gold  by  boiling  in  commercial  muriatic  acid, 
full  strength.  To  protect  the  facings  from  borax  coat, 
previous  to  investing,  with  a  paint  composed  of  yellow  ochre 
four  parts,  boracic  acid  one  part,  mixed  with  boiling  water. 
— J.  L.  Young,  Dental  Register. 

Cleaning  Vulcanite  Files. — When  vulcanite  files  are 
clogged,  place  in  a  solution  of  one  part  saltpetre,  three 
parts  sulphuric  acid,  and  one  part  water.  Clean  off  with 
stiff  brush  and  soap.  This  removes  the  vulcanite  and  sharp- 
ens the  files. — Ohio  Dental  Journal    (Trans.). 

To  Sharpen  Files. — Wash  with  soap  and  a  stiff  brush, 
and  immerse  in  a  mixture  of 

Nitric  acid  i  part. 

Sulfuric  acid 3  parts. 

Water    i  part. 

Let  them  remain  in  the  fluid  until  well  cut;  then  wash 
in  lime  water. — Dental  Hints. 

To  Remove  Plaster  of  Paris  from  the  Hands. — Moisten 
a  little  sugar  on  the  hands  and  thoroughly  rub  the  same  into 
the  plaster  adhering  to  the  hands.  It  will  disorganize  the 
plaster,  and  is  one  of  the  best  agents  to  use  for  this  purpose. 
— Electric  Medical  Journal. 

Cleaning  Files. — Saturate  a  tooth-brush  with  chloro- 
form and  scrub  the  file  vigorously.  This  will  remove  all 
wax  and  modeling  composition  that  becomes  clogged  in  the 
serrations. — C.  J.  Hadley,  Dental  Review. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  German  Silver. — Anneal  by  heat- 
ing to  red  heat  and  plunge  in  a  solution  of  oxalic  acid. 
This  cleanses  and  softens  the  metal  better  than  any  method. 
— C.  J.  Hadley,  Dental  Review. 

A  Splice  for  Rubber  Tubing. — The  small  vials  that 
hypodermic  tablets  come  in  can  be  utilized  for  splicing  rub- 
ber tubing. — G.  B.  Speer,  Dental  Summary. 


358  Practical  Dentistry. 

Soft  Soldering  Powder. — Granulated  soft  solder,  three 
parts;  pulverized  sal  ammoniac,  one  part;  pulverized  rosin, 
one  part.     Mix. — Druggists'  Circular. 

Treatment  of  Lead. — Sulphur  added  to  molten  lead  will 
cause  it  to  be  clean  and  pliable  when  cooled. — P.  A. 
I\1ariotte,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

Corrosion  of  Silver  Plates. — Silver  plates  boiled  in  a 
solution  of  cream  of  tartar  and  salt  will  not  corrode  when 
placed  in  the  mouth. — Pacific  Gazette. 

Wire  Cutter. — Grind  a  notch  in  your  plate  shears  near 
the  joint  and  thus  make  a  good  wire  cutter. — Dental  Hints. 

A  Cast-gold  Plate. — Dr.  Livermore  was  the  inventor  of 
a  cast-gold  plate,  the  method  being  somewhat  similar  to 
"cheoplastic"  work.  From  a  correct  impression  a  model 
was  made  of  two  parts  plaster  and  four  parts  sand,  on  which 
tea-lead  was  burnished  to  the  thickness  desired  for  the  plate. 
A  special  cast-iron  flask,  with  detachable  handle,  was  re- 
quired. After  removal  of  wax  and  lead  the  flask  was  put 
in  the  furnace  and  carefully  brought  to  a  dull-red  heat,  when 
the  gold  in  a  molten  state  was  poured  from  the  crucible  into 
the  opening  in  the  flask,  the  whole  being  left  in  the  coals 
until  perfectly  cold. — A.  J.  Rederich,  Dental  Review. 

Aluminum  Plates. — Advise  your  patients  that  the  alumi- 
num plate  is  infinitely  better  than  a  rubber  plate  and  you 
will  have  more  satisfaction  in  putting  in  a  set  of  teeth.  At- 
tach the  teeth  with  rubber  fastened  in  with  the  loop  punch. 
Put  one  row  of  eight  loops  around  the  margin  and  eight 
more  around  the  ridge. — L.  P.  Haskell,  Items  of  Interest. 

Aluminum  for  Dental  Plates. — Pure  aluminum  is  not 
affected  by  the  secretions  of  the  mouth.  Aluminum,  as 
made  by  electrolysis,  is  free  from  contamination.  Use  a 
good  thickness,  twenty-two  or  even  twenty  gauge.  Unless 
thick,  the  strain  of  mastication  will  bend  it. — L.  P.  Haskell, 
Dental  Digest. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  359 

Finishing  Aluminum  Plates. — First,  wash  the  plate  in 
benzoin,  or  gfasohn,  to  remove  any  grease  or  oil. 

Second. — Apply  a  forty  per  cent,  solution  of  caustic 
potash. 

Third. — Apply  nitric  acid  full  strength.  Then  wash  in 
clear  water.  Apply  the  potash  and  nitric  acid  by  means  of  a 
small  piece  of  cotton  held  in  soldering  pliers. — V.  I.  Miller, 
Dental  Summary. 

Aluminum  versus  Gold,  for  Clasps. — The  teeth  embraced 
by  gold  clasps  are  especially  prone  to  decay  on  the  surface 
covered  by  the  clasp.  I  have  frequently  used  aluminum  for 
clasps,  and  not  one  has  caused  trouble. — H.  R.  Neeper 
Dental  Digest. 

Aluminum  Solder. — Six  parts  aluminum,  two  parts 
zinc,  four  parts  phosphor  tin.  Flux — stearic  acid.  This 
solder  is  sluggish  and  is  pushed  along  the  seam  by  means 
of  a  piece  of  iron  wire  in  the  form  of  a  loop. — OMce  and 
Laboratory. 

Aluminum  in  Prosthetic  Dentistry. — Dr.  Booth  Pearsall, 
of  London,  after  several  years  of  experience,  recommends 
for  persons  subject  to  gout  the  use  of  aluminum  base  with 
rubber  attachments. — The  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Silver  as  a  Base  Plate  with  Rubber  Attachments. — A 
silver  plate  coated  Avith  mercury  and  covered  with  gold  foil, 
to  absorb  some  of  the  mercury,  gives  entirely  satisfactory 
results,  overcoming  the  afifinity  of  silver  for  the  sulphur  in 
the  rubber. — John  T.  Usher,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Gold  Plate  Strengthener. — Wax  in  position  on  the  plas- 
ter cast  a  piece  of  half-wound  wire  outlining  a  narrow  up- 
per plate.  In  the  zincs  this  is  represented  by  a  ridge,  which 
strikes  up  a  groove  across  the  gold  plate,  adding  greatly  to 
its  strength.  The  gum  soon  grows  into  this  so  that  little  or 
no  space  remains. — L.  Read,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


360  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cutting  Down  Gold  Work. — The  wire  brush-wheel  made 
for  jewelers  is  a  time-saver  in  cutting  down  and  polishing 
crowns  and  bridge  pieces  and  other  metal  work.  It  cuts 
rapidly.  Can  be  procured  at  any  jeweler's  supply  house. — 
L.  P.  Bethel,  Ohio  Journal. 

Punching  Holes  in  Backings. — Slip  over  the  pins  of  the 
facing  a  small  piece  of  paper  and  trim  it  to  the  size  you  wish 
the  backing  to  be.  Remove  this  pattern  and  place  on  the 
plate,  punching  to  correspond  with  the  holes  in  the  paper. — 
R.  L.  Hesser,  Dental  Summary. 

Platinum  and  Gold  Plate. — Melt  with  blowpipe  pure 
gold  on  a  piece  of  platinum  plate,  and  roll  to  desired  thick- 
ness, thereby  saving  thirty  cents  per  pennyweight  over 
buying  the  same  from  a  supply  place. — J.  G.  Templeton, 
Dental  Register. 

To  Restore  Tarnished  Aluminum. — Wash  in  water  in 
which  borax  has  been  dissolved  and  a  few  drops  of  am- 
monia added. — American  Druggist. 

Annealing  Gold. — You  cannot  anneal  gold  with  safety 
by  carrying  it  through  the  flame  with  a  pair  of  pliers  unless 
you  consume  a  large  amount  of  time;  after  holding  it  by 
one  end  and  passing  it  through  the  flame  you  must  put  it 
down  and  take  it  up  again  by  the  other  end  and  again  pass 
it  through  the  flame ;  otherwise  you  will  have  a  piece  of  gold 
in  which  you  have  developed  cohesion  in  one  part  and  im- 
perfect cohesion  in  another  part,  which  will  result  in  an  im- 
perfect filling. — W.  E.  Harper,  Dental  Digest. 

Babbitt  Metal. — This  is  the  only  metal  having  all  the 
fine  requisites  for  a  dental  die,  which  are,  (i)  non-shrink- 
age; (2)  hardness,  so  as  not  to  batter;  (3)  toughness,  so 
as  not  to  break;  (4)  a  smooth  surface;  (5)  melting  at  a 
low  temperature.  The  proper  formula  is  copper,  i  part; 
antimony,  2  parts ;  tin,  8  parts,  melted  in  the  order  named. 
Do  not  overheat,  so  as  to  oxidize  the  tin. — L.  P.  Haskell, 
The  Dentists'  Magazine. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  361 

To  Restore  Zinc  for  Castings. — When  zinc  has  become 
thick  by  repeated  heating,  the  addition  of  an  infinitesimal 
amount  of  aluminum  will  perfectly  restore  its  fluidity.  An 
alloy  is  first  made  of  one  part  of  aluminum  to  25  of  zinc. 
The  thick  zinc  is  then  heated  to  its  fusing  point  and  small 
portions  of  the  alloy  added,  until  the  desired  effect  is  pro- 
duced.— International  Dental  Journal. 

Mellotte's  Metal. — A  great  mistake  is  made  in  trying 
to  get  Mellotte's  metal  thin  or  fluid-like.  It  wants  to  be  in 
a  cheesy  state,  so  that  you  can  take  it  up  with  a  spoon  as 
you  would  take  up  a  handful  of  snow  and  pack  it  in,  and  it 
will  give  a  sharp  outline.  Do  not  reduce  it  to  the  melting 
stage. — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Spence-Metal. — The  chief  component  parts  of  Spence- 
metal  are  iron  and  sulphur:  its  fusing  point  is  lower  than 
that  of  boiling  water  and  it  hardens  quite  rapidly.  It  must 
be  melted  over  a  very  slozv  fire,  otherwise  it  may  catch 'fire 
with  a  very  suffocating  odor  of  sulphur.  Stir  with  a  wooden 
stick  until  it  presents  a  very  thick,  bubbling  liquid,  then 
extinguish  the  fire  immediately  and  leave  undisturbed  until 
crystals  begin  to  form  at  the  sides  of  the  vessel — the  oppor- 
tune moment  for  casting  the  die.  Pour  quickly  to  the  edges 
of  the  flask  because  of  rapid  hardening.  It  can  be  poured 
into  a  plaster-of-paris  impression,  first  lubricating  the  im- 
pression with  oil  or  vaselin. — M.  Bank,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Richmond  Metal. — The  advantage  of  Richmond  metal 
over  other  impression  metals  is  its  low  fusing  point — 160 
degrees — 52  below  boiling  water,  enabling  you  to  run  a 
model  over  a  gutta-percha  impression. — ^J.  P.  Root^  Kansas 
City  Dental  Journal. 

To  Restore  Deteriorated  Zinc. — Zinc  which  has  deterio- 
rated by  repeated  melting  may  be  restored  by  keeping  it 
in  a  molten  state  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  adding  wax  or 
fat,  which  separates  the  oxid  and  dirt  from  the  metal. — 
Chas.  Boxton,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 
24 


362  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Clean  Molten  Zinc. — When  melted  add  a  teaspoonful 
or  two  of  muriate  of  ammonia,  stir  briskly  with  clean  iron 
spoon,  skim  off  the  dirt,  and  the  zinc  will  pour  like  water 
and  at  a  lower  temperature  than  before  it  was  cleared.  The 
same  process  will  purify  tin,  lead,  and  babbitt  metal. — B.  E. 
Mead,  Dental  Digest. 

Babbitt  Metal  Die. — Pure  lead  cannot  be  poured  upon 
a  Babbitt  metal  die.  The  melting  point  must  be  reduced  by 
the  addition  of  one-sixth  tin.  This  must  not  be  poured  hot, 
as  it  comes  from  the  heater,  but  stirred  until  it  begins  to  at- 
tach to  the  sides  of  the  ladle. — L.  P.  Haskell,  Pennsylvania 
Dental  Times. 

Annealing  Platinum. — If  platinum  be  annealed  in  the 
open  flame  of  a  Bunsen  burner  it  becomes  very  harsh,  be- 
cause it  absorbs  gas,  but  if  it  be  fused  in  the  muffle  of  a  gas 
furnace,  where  no  gas  can  get  at  it,  or  in  an  electric  fur- 
nace, it  will  become  as  soft  as  tin  foil. — ^Jos.  Head,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Proper  Temperature  at  Which  to  Pour  Zinc. — Thrust 
into  the  molten  zinc  a  piece  of  dry  white  pine;  if  it  chars 
badly  the  metal  is  too  hot;  if  it  chars  very  slightly — say  a 
coffee-brown — it  is  about  right.  The  cooler  you  can  pour 
the  zinc  the  better  it  will  flow. — Dental  Office  and  Labora- 
tory. 

Platinum  Solder. — Twenty-five  parts  of  platinum  to 
seventy-five  parts  pure  gold.  Be  sure  to  shellac  the  surface 
of  a  facing  before  investing  to  flow  platinum  solder  on  to 
the  pins. — Dental  Clippings. 

Clasps  for  Partial  Lower  Plates. — Always  have  a  lug 
extending  onto  the  grinding  surface  so  as  to  prevent  the 
clasp  from  riding  up  and  down  on  the  tooth,  to  its  injury, 
and  also  because  the  patient  can  bite  at  least  fifty  per  cent, 
harder,  there  being  no  undue  stress  on  the  soft  tissues. — 
W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Review. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  363 

Alumimim  Clasps. — On  a  plaster  or  fusible  metal  model 
of  the  tooth  to  be  clasped  a  pattern  of  thin  sheet  lead  is 
made,  and  a  piece  of  aluminum  plate  cut  to  pattern.  Holes 
are  punched  and  countersunk  to  engage  the  rubber.  Fit 
a  clasp  to  the  model,  and  also  to  the  tooth  in  the  mouth. 
Fill  holes  and  countersink  with  wax,  place  on  tooth,  and 
bring  away  with  impression,  after  which  proceed  as  usual. 
— H.  R.  Neeper,  Dental  Digest. 

Clasping  Cuspids. — The  cuspid  is  a  very  hard  tooth  to 
clasp,  but  if  instead  of  clasping  from  behind  forward  it  is 
clasped  from  interior  outward  you  reach  either  side  of  the 
tooth,  the  mesial  and  distal,  which  is  especially  valuable  in 
lower  cases. — Charles  P.  Pruyn,  Dental  Digest. 

Separating  Fluid  for  Plaster  Casts. — 

'^.    Shellac     3xii 

Borax  5vi 

Water    ^x. 

Keep  in  warm  place  and  shake  occasionally  until  com- 
plete solution ;  then  add 

^.    Sugar      3xi 

Glycerin     3vi 

Water  to  make  5xvi 

Shake  well  until  sugar  is  dissolved;  then  decant  with 
wide-mouth  bottle.  Saturate  plaster  impression  with  water 
and  paint  with  the  above;  pour  plaster  immediately.  Will 
penetrate  the  plaster,  leaving  a  fine  gloss  upon  the  surface 
with  no  deposit  of  rosin  to  fill  up  the  finer  details  of  the 
impression. — Dental  Era. 

Soldering  Aluminum. — A  very  good  solder  for  alumi- 
num and  one  which  will  not  undergo  rapid  change  in  the 
mouth  may  be  made  as  follows : 

!^.    Aluminum    60  parts 

Zinc 10  parts 

Phosphor-tin    30  parts 

A  flux  that  works  very  well  with  this  solder  is  stearic  acid, 
or  common  stearine. — E.  Bumgardner,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 


364  Practical  Dentistry. 

Richmond  Metal. — This  metal  offers  the  great  advan- 
tages of  very  low  fusing  point — 160  degrees,  fifty-two  below 
boiling  water,  enabling  you  to  run  a  model  over  a  gutta- 
percha impression. 

The  formula  is  as  follows: 

Tin 20  parts  by  weight 

Lead 19  parts  by  weight 

Cadmium 13  parts  by  weight 

Bismuth 48  parts  by  weight 

A  Low  Fusible  Metal. — 

Bismuth    48  parts. 

Cadmium    13  parts. 

Tin   19  parts. 

Melts  below  the  boiling  point  of  water  and  is  very  hard. 
Melts  at  so  low  a  temperature  that  it  can  be  packed  in  with 
the  fingers.  A  common  plaster  impression  can  be  poured 
at  once  without  waiting  for  it  to  dry;  can  even  be  poured 
in  water. — R.  Matthews,  i)i  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  New  Metal  as  Base  for  Dentures. — 

Silver    3.53 

Platinum    2.40 

Copper    1 1. 71 

This  metal  is  elastic  and  takes  a  most  brilliant  polish. 
It  is  not  acted  on  by  the  fluids  of  the  mouth,  and  answers  the 
same  purpose  as  gold. — B.  J.  Cigrand,  Dental  Digest. 

Aluminum  Solder  and  Flux. — 

IJ.    Aluminum  plate   6  parts 

Zinc   I   part 

Phorphortin    3  parts 

Flux :   Stearic  acid. 

Very  useful  for  strengthening  seamless  aluminum 
crowns,  to  prevent  wearing  through  on  the  occlusal  surface. 
— C.  H.  Warboys,  Dental  Register. 


Prosthetic  Dentistry — Miscellaneous.  365 

Lennox  Fusible  Metal. — 

Bismuth 5  parts. 

Lead 3  parts. 

Tin    2  parts. 

Fuses  in  a  ladle  set  in  boiling  water.  Can  be  cast  in 
a  mold  of  modeling  composition.  Can  be  worked  with  great 
rapidity. — George  F.  Grant,  in  International  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

A  Superior  Varnish  for  Plaster  Models. — 

R.    Gum  sandarac    5" 

Gum  mastic   5i 

Venice  turpentine  3ss 

Alcohol 5v 

Dissolve. 

This  makes  a  varnish  that  is  colorless  and  elastic,  and 
which  leaves  a  fine,  glossy  surface. — Dental  Era. 

Soldering-fluid   for  Gold. — 

5^.    Boracic   acid    5i 

Ammonia  carb grs.  x 

Soda  bicarb 5i 

Ammonia  aqua   Jss 

Shake  well  before  using. — Dental  Clippmgs. 
Investment  Material. — 

Powdered    Silex    i  part. 

Ground  or  Fiber  Asbestos  2  parts. 

Plaster    3  parts. 

Excellent  for  crown  and  bridges,  as  there  is  but  little 
shrinkage  and  no  tendency  to  crack. — J.  H.  Prothro^  Dental 
Review. 

Fluid  Flux  that  Does  not  Pit. — 

Powdered  borax 7  drachms 

Powdered  boracic  acid,  C.  P 7  drachms 

Distilled  cold  water 6  ounces 

Put  all  in  a  pint  bottle  and  shake  well  until  all  is  dis- 
^.ilved;  then  filter  and  pour  back  until  perfectly  clear, — 
X.  DoDEL,  Dental  Brief. 


366  Practical  Dentistry. 

Separating  Varnish. — 

Shellac    6  oz. 

Borax    3  oz. 

Water  i  qt. 

Dissolve  the  borax  in  the  water ;  bring  to  a  boil  and  add 
the  shellac. — A.  Daugherday,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Soft  Soldering  Powder. — 

Granulated  soft  solder   3  parts 

Powdered  sal  ammoniac   i   part 

Pulverized  resin   i  part 

^^^^-  — Druggists'  Circular. 

A  Superior  Solder. — 

Copper,    pure    53  parts. 

Silver    25  parts. 

Brass  pins    12  parts. 

Melt  the  silver,  add  the  copper,  then  the  pins,  and  pour 
at  once. — Dr.  Beebee,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Soldering  Fluid  for  Gold. — 

Boracic  acid   i  ounce 

Ammonia  carb 10  grains 

Soda  bicarb i  drachm 

Ammonia  aqua   ss.  ounces 

Shake  well  beiore  using. — Dental  Brief. 


CHAPTER  II 

(PART    II) 


CROWN-  AND  BRIDGE- WORK 


Crowning  a  Misplaced  Root. — Occasionally  it  is  neces- 
sary to  crown  a  root  which  is  not  in  line  with  the  adjoining 
teeth.  When,  in  such  cases,  the  facing  must  be  brought 
forward  bodily,  so  as  to  project  beyond  the  root.  Then 
remove  the  facing  from  the  backing,  leaving  the  backing 
waxed  to  the  root-cap.  The  cap  and  backing  are  then  re- 
moved from  the  model,  invested,  and  soldered  with  a  22- 
carat  solder.  When  this  has  been  done,  reinvest  with  the 
labial  side  up,  and  with  22-carat  solder  fill  up  the  over- 
hanging between  the  backing  and  cap,  adding  plate,  if 
need  be,  so  as  to  have  enough  to  make  a  neat  finish.  When 
this  has  been  done  replace  the  fusing  and  solder  it  to  the 
fixture.  By  this  method  a  strong  and  cleanly  crown  can 
be  made  without  unduly  risking  the  facing  by  repeated 
soldering. — Dr.  Cornish,  Brief. 

How  to  Improve  Your  Crown  and  Bridge  Articulator. — 

The  ordinary  crown  and  bridge  articulators  now  on  the 
market  have  but  one  movement,  namely,  vertical.  By  the 
use  of  the  mechanical  saw  and  a  few  minutes  time,  enlarge 
the  hole  for  the  pin  backwards,  say  one-quarter  of  an  inch, 
making  a  slit  for  the  pin  to  slide  back  and  forth.  Do  the 
same  on  both  sides,  but  only  in  the  one  piece  (lower),  and 
fasten  a  small  rubber  band  to  each  end  of  the  pin,  allowing 
it  to  pass  around  in  front.  This  elastic  band  will  keep  the 
articulator  in  a  given  position  when  at  rest,  but  can  easily  be 
moved  to  give  any  desired  position. — A.  F.  Donahower 
Dental  Brief. 

367 


368  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Open-face  Crown. — At  their  best  they  have  elements 
of  weakness  difficult  to  overcome.  Nevertheless,  properly 
made  and  properly  placed,  they  have  a  field  of  usefulness 
all  their  own.  Upon  bicuspid  teeth  they  are  satisfactory  and 
durable,  especially  so  in  cases  which  admit  of  the  open-face 
being  entirely  open.  When  the  bar  connecting  the  two  sides 
at  the  gum  margin  can  be  dispensed  with  the  sides  can  be 
made  to  spring  apart  as  the  crown  passes  over  the  tooth, 
and  to  embrace  more  closely  the  tooth-neck  when  it  is  in 
place.  The  peculiar  shape  of  the  canine  and  incisor  teeth 
not  only  increases  the  difficulty  of  making  the  crown  fit  ac- 
curately, but  it  also  hampers  us  when  cementing  it  in  place. 
We  miss  the  piston-like  action  of  the  tooth  which  assists 
so  much  in  forcing  the  cement  solidly  into  the  intervening 
space  when  a  full  crown  is  pressed  into  place.  Not  only 
does  the  cement  escape  through  the  open  face,  but  the  screw- 
like motion  necessary  when  manipulating  it  into  place  so 
displaces  the  cement  that  a  thorough  and  compact  filling 
of  the  space  between  the  tooth  and  the  crown  becomes  im- 
possible. As  a  natural  result  the  cementing  is  imperfect. — 
William  H.  Truemax,  Dental  Brief. 

To  Replace  Porcelain  Fronts  without  Removal  of 
Bridge. — Grind  tooth  down  same  as  for  bridge  work, 
fit  same  accurately  in  vacant  space  on  bridge.  Bore 
two  holes  in  bridge  (in  center  of  space)  to  fit  pins  in  tooth 
to  be  adjusted.  On  back  of  bridge  around  holes  cut  out  a 
round  circle  (using  round  bur  to  make  undercuts).  With  a 
small  saw  or  knife  roughen  pins  on  tooth,  after  heating 
tooth  and  space  in  bridge  thoroughly  dry.  Mix  cement  to 
same  consistency  as  used  for  setting  crowns,  place  same  on 
tooth  and  in  space,  gently  press  tooth  in  position.  With  a 
heavy  instrument  press  pins  in  circle  cut  out  on  back  of 
bridge  and  fit  space  with  amalgam. — J.  A.  Richard. 

To  Stren^hen  a  Badly  Decayed  Root  for  Crowning. — 

Remove  all  the  disintegrated  dentin  and  enlarge  the  open- 
ing into  the  sound  portion  near  the  apex.  Into  one  end 
of  a  platinum  tube  solder  firmly  a  screw-threaded  wire;  cut 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  369 

a  slot  in  the  open  end  of  the  tube,  and  with  screw-driver 
tap  the  apical  portion  of  the  root  with  the  threaded-wire 
end  of  the  tube.  Remove  by  unscrewing,  cover  the 
threaded  end  with  oxyphosphate  cement  and  screw  firmly 
to  place.  Oil  the  outer  surface  of  the  tube  to  prevent  amal- 
gamation and  fill  around  it  with  amalgam  firmly  packed  in. 
The  root  being  thus  restored  to  its  original  strength,  is 
ready  for  crowning,  the  post  and  disk  method  being  recom- 
mended, the  post  to  be  cemented  into  the  tube,  which  is 
firmly  anchored  by  screw,  cement  and  amalgam. — H.  H. 
Johnson. 

Setting  Bands  with  Gutta-percha. — Wipe  out  the  band 
or  crown  with  oil  of  cajuput  and  warm  both  crown  and 
pellet  of  gutta-percha  and  press  the  latter  into  the  band; 
while  still  quite  warm  carry  to  root,  allowing  all  the  moist- 
ure to  remain  in  the  latter,  which  permits  of  easy  with- 
drawal of  band.  Remove,  and  with  hot,  flat  burnisher  cut 
off  all  surplus,  removing  a  portion  from  the  inside  if  there 
appears  to  be  too  much.  Repeat  till  it  will  almost  go  to 
place.  When  there  is  no  exuding  gutta-percha  dry  the  root 
with  absolute  alcohol;  make  the  crown  as  warm  as  you  can 
hold  it  in  your  fingers;  drop  oil  of  cajuput  in  it  and  carry 
to  place.  By  this  means  you  are  sure  there  is  no  excess  or 
exudation  of  gutta-percha. — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Cause  of  Unsatisfactory  Results  of  Open-face  Crowns. — 

This  may  be  attributed  to  either  of  two  causes ;  either  it  is 
improperly  made — that  is  to  say,  it  does  not  conform  to  the 
shape  of  the  tooth — or,  while  it  may  fit  the  tooth  perfectly, 
it  is  not  made  strong  enough  to  withstand  the  strain  to 
which  it  is  subjected.  The  result  in  either  case  is  the  same, 
the  cement,  being  exposed,  washes  out  and  decay  takes 
place.  It  is  essential,  therefore,  that  the  crown  should  fit 
the  tooth  accurately,  that  it  shall  be  made  so  as  to  prevent 
being  forced  up  under  the  impact  of  mastication,  and  that 
it  shall  be  strong  enough  to  meet  the  requirements  for  which 
it  is  designed. — J.  C.  Salvas,  Dental  Brief. 


370  Practical  Dentistry. 

Crowning  a  Molar  Decayed  Below  the  Gum  Margfin. — 

When  moisture  cannot  be  excluded  fit  and  adjust  a  band 
before  treating  and  filling  the  roots.  With  the  band  in  posi- 
tion, and  dam  adjusted,  the  tooth  can  be  kept  dry,  and  the 
roots  treated  and  filled  satisfactorily.  Cut  the  band  down  to 
occlusion  contour,  and  turn  in  at  the  free  edge  slightly  with 
pliers.  Mop  out  the  cavity  with  a  i  per  cent,  solution  per- 
chlorid  of  mercury  in  absolute  alcohol,  dry  with  hot  air,  and 
partially  fill  with  Harvard  cement.  While  at  its  stickiest  put 
on  a  piece  of  fairly  soft  amalgam,  and  burnish  from  center 
to  circumference,  covering  the  cement,  carrying  the  amal- 
gam to  the  edges  of  the  band.  Add  sufficient  amalgam  to 
cut  free  of  the  bite.  Polish  at  a  subsequent  sitting. — J.  H. 
Babcock,  Journal  British  Dental  Association. 

Crown-  and  Bridge-work  Decrowning  and  Immediate 
Pulp  Extirpation. — Having  ready  a  few  points  of  orange 
wood,  hickory  or  wedgewood  well  saturated  with  a  strong 
disinfectant,  with  a  disk  cut  a  groove  across  the  labial  and 
lingual  surfaces  of  the  tooth ;  place  one  blade  of  excising 
forceps  in  each  groove  and  remove  crown.  Without  delay 
insert  one  of  the  prepared  points  at  the  mouth  of  the 
canal,  and  with  a  light  mallet  give  a  quick,  sharp  blow. 
Withdraw  the  plug,  to  which  the  pulp  remnants  will  usually 
adhere.  Prepare  canal  for  post  at  once. — R.  E.  Sparks, 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Difficulties  in  Bridge-work. — When  a  tooth  has  been 
considerably  loosened  by  a  loss  of  pericementum,  even  if 
the  destroying  cause  be  removed,  it  is  subjected  to  constant 
motion,  irregular  in  direction.  Sometimes  quite  strong  pres- 
sure forces  it  in  one  direction,  and  the  result  is  a  state  of 
ever-present  inflammation,  due  entirely  to  motion.  If  we 
stop  this  motion  by  using  it  as  a  bridge  pier  or  clasp  it  to  a 
plate  the  tooth  will  be  more  comfortable  and  be  retained 
longer  than  if  not  so  used.  But  great  care  must  be  taken 
that  the  occluding  tooth  or  teeth  do  not  put  it  under  a  tilt- 
ing stress. — S.  H.  Voyles,  Dental  Brief. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  371 

Investment  Compound  for  Crown-  and  Bridge-work. — 

An  investment  compound  that  is  second  to  none  for  crown- 
and  bridge-work  and  all  soldering  purposes  is  composed  of 
plaster  and  ashes.  The  ashes  may  be  prepared  for  use  by 
sifting  common  coal  ashes  until  all  grit  is  removed  and  a 
soft,  flaky  powder  left.  The  powdered  ashes  are  added 
to  the  plaster  at  the  time  of  mixing,  the  proportion  being 
about  two  of  plaster  to  one  of  ashes.  This  compound  sets 
very  hard,  and  apparently  does  not  contract  or  expand, 
nor  does  it  burn  out,  warp,  or  crack  under  the  heat  of  the 
blowpipe.  This  compound  has  proved  to  be  far  superior 
to  all  mixtures  containing  marble-dust,  asbestos,  sand,  etc. 
— Frederick  C.  Brush,  Dental  Brief. 

Selecting  a  Crown. — In  matching  all  porcelain  crowns, 
the  shade  can  be  determined  more  accurately  by  examining 
both  crown  and  natural  teeth  from  the  lingual  aspect  with 
the  mouth  mirror,  while  holding  the  crown  in  position  in 
the  mouth.  In  some  cases  a  crown  may  seem  to  be  a  perfect 
match  while  looking  at  it  from  the  labial  side  only,  when 
upon  examination  from  the  lingual  side  there  will  be  dis- 
closed a  distinct  difference  in  shade.  A  crown  should  be 
selected  having  for  its  foundation-body  material  of  the  same 
shade  as  the  underlying  colors  in  all  angles  of  light,  but 
will  match  more  closely  after  a  few  years  of  service,  when 
the  natural  teeth  gradually  assume  a  darker  shade. — P.  P. 
Dove,  Dental  Brief. 

To  Solder  Cusps  to  Backing  for  Porcelain  Facing. — 
Convenient  tweezers  are  made  from  wire  tweezers  with  ring 
beaks.  Flatten  one  of  the  rings  and  straighten  the  other, 
bending  it  at  right  angle  to  the  other  beak.  Catch  cusps  and 
backing  with  Parr's  flux,  and  remove  from  facing.  Cover 
back  of  backing  with  rouge  or  whiting  to  keep  solder  from 
flowing  there.  Place  the  backing  in  the  flattened  ring,  with 
the  right  angle  point  on  the  cusps ;  pressure  will  make  per- 
fect contact  between  cusps  and  backing.  Will  require  less 
heat  in  final  soldering,  and  consequently  less  liable  to  fract- 
ure facings. — H.  B.  Bull,  Items  of  Interest. 


372  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Prevent  Injury  to  the  Teeth  of  Plaster  Models  in 
Adjusting  Crowns  for  Bridge-work. — l\Take  little  ferrules 
from  very  thin  sheet  copper,  say  32  guage.  After  the  caps 
are  made  and  placed  on  the  teeth  in  the  mouth,  and  the  im- 
pression taken  to  secure  proper  position  on  the  cast,  so  that 
the  dummy  teeth  may  be  properly  ground  and  adjusted,  place 
these  ferrules  inside  of  the  abutment  caps,  adapting  them  to 
a  snug  fit  before  pouring  the  cast.  When  the  cast  is  poured 
the  caps  will  be  easily  removed  from  the  plaster  which  are 
bound  or  covered  by  the  copper  ferrules,  so  that  the  caps 
may  be  removed  and  replaced  as  often  as  necessary  without 
marring  the  copper-bound  teeth,  and  also  always  compel  the 
placing  of  the  cap  in  exactly  its  right  relation  and  position. — 
Dr.  Siddell,  Dental  Register. 

Pinless  Teeth  for  Dummies  in  Bridge-work. — Burnish 
pure  gold,  30  gauge,  to  the  under  side  of  the  tooth;  turn 
the  gold  up  against  the  Ungual  and  buccal  surfaces,  cut 
the  gold  at  the  angles  and  burnish  to  the  sides  of  the 
tooth;  lap  the  gold  at  the  corners,  trim  off  the  surplus,  and 
solder  the  corners.  Put  the  tooth  in  the  cup,  punch 
through  the  gold,  insert  post  and  catch  with  solder.  The 
tooth  is  then  ready  for  setting  up  and  waxing  to  the  abut- 
ments. Remove  porcelains  before  investing  in  solder. 
Secure  the  porcelain  in  the  cup  with  cement  or  gutta- 
percha ready  to  place  in  the  mouth. — McFerran  Crow, 
Dental  Reviezv. 

Seamless  Crowns. — Swaged  over  an  accurate  model  of 
the  tooth,  they  have  a  glove-like  fit  which  cannot  be  at- 
tained by  any  other  method.  It  is  well  to  remember,  how- 
ever, that  drawing  a  disk  of  gold  plate  to  the  form  of  a 
thimble  does  not  increase  its  toughness,  and  that  a  seamless 
crown  so  made  must  be  thoroughly  reinforced.  The  nar- 
row bar  at  the  gum  margin  should  be  doubled,  and  any 
bridge  attachment  should  be  so  extended  as  not  to  depend 
for  security  upon  a  small  area  of  the  crown. — Wm.  H. 
Trueman,  Dental  Brief. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  373 

The  Poor  Man's  Crown. — A  pin,  made  from  German 
silver  wire  hammered  into  shape  and  fitted  to  the  root,  has 
one  end  made  jagged  with  the  file  and  is  then  placed  between 
the  pins  of  a  plain  rubber  tooth  selected  to  suit  the  case.  The 
pins  of  the  tooth  are  bent  to  hold  the  wire  pin.  Small  pieces 
of  vulcanizable  rubber  (white  preferably)  are  packed  around 
the  pins  with  warm  instruments  and  molded  to  form  a 
shoulder  which  will  cover  the  end  of  the  root.  The  rubber 
is  then  warmed,  the  pin  inserted  in  the  canal,  the  porcelain 
pressed  to  its  proper  position,  and  the  rubber  molded  to 
proper  shape  by  pressure.  Trim,  invest  and  vulcanize.  Se- 
cure to  place  with  oxyphosphate. — S.  E.  Davenport,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

A  Temporary  Crown. — Never  dismiss  a  patient  with  an 
open  space  in  the  front  of  the  mouth.  Construct  a  tem- 
porary crown.  Enlarge  the  root-canal,  place  a  piece  of 
German  silver  wire,  about  i6-gauge,  in  the  canal;  select 
a  facing  and  slip  it  over  the  end  of  the  wire,  clinch  the 
pieces  around  it,  lay  it  on  a  bit  of  charcoal  or  an  asbestos 
pad  and  solder  it  with  soft  solder.  In  five  minutes  the 
whole  thing  is  done,  and  then  it  can  be  mounted  with  gutta- 
percha or  temporary  stopping.  You  not  only  relieve  the 
patient  of  temporary  disfigurement  but  you  have  the  gum 
around  the  root  nicely  compressed,  giving  perfect  access 
to  the  end  of  the  root  when  ready  to  mount  the  permanent 
crown. — J.  Hart  Goslee,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cementing  Crowns  and  Bridges. — Having  everything 
in  perfect  readiness,  warm  the  crown  and  apply  a  thin  coat- 
ing of  chloro-gutta-percha  to  the  post.  The  chloroform  evap- 
orating leaves  a  film  of  heated  gutta-percha.  Adjust  the 
crown  to  the  root  and  remove  immediately.  This  shapes 
the  gutta-percha  on  the  post.  Allow  the  crown  to  cool  and 
then  cement  to  place  as  though  no  gutta-percha  had  been 
used.  A  crown  so  cemented  can  be  removed  at  any  time  by 
the  application  of  heat  to  the  metallic  portion  of  the  crown, 
communicating  heat  to  the  post  and  softening  the  sheath  of 
gutta-percha. — Geo.  Evans,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


374  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Open-fape  Crown. — The  open-face  crown  is  adapted 
only  to  those  teeth  which  have  normally  good  faces;  this 
naturally  confines  their  use  to  sound  teeth  or  the  labial  or 
buccal  surface  of  which  is  in  a  perfect  condition.  There 
are  many  bicuspids  where  the  palatal  half  of  the  crown  has 
been  fractured  or  destroyed  by  caries,  and  restoration  is 
necessary.  In  such  cases  the  open- face  is  the  best.  As  an 
abutment  for  large  bridges  they  lack  strength  unless  the 
band  which  covers  the  cervical  portion  of  the  tooth  is  thick 
and  wide  enough  to  give  the  desired  strength.  Where  the 
bite  is  close  the  strain  brought  upon  an  open- face  crown 
under  the  stress  of  mastication  will  force  it  out  of  position. 
From  an  esthetic  point  of  view  the  open-face  crown  is  much 
to  be  preferred  to  an  all-gold  crown,  especially  for  anterior 
teeth ;  its  usefulness  depends  on  its  accurate  adaptation.  If 
the  band  could  be  strengthened,  this  crown  would  be  pre- 
ferred as  an  anterior  abutment  for  bridges. — G.  W.  Cupit, 
Dental  Brief. 

Cusps  for  Gold  Crowns. — To  save  investing,  in  mold- 
ine,  in  making  a  fusible  metal  die,  provide  a  ring  of  metal 
that  will  fit  closely  around  the  rubber  ring  of  Melotte's 
outfit.  Punch  a  hole  in  a  piece  of  rubber-dam,  lay  the  dam 
over  the  top  of  the  rubber  ring,  and  secure  in  place  with 
the  metal  ring.  Push  the  tooth — natural  or  porcelain — which 
is  to  serve  as  model  for  the  cusps  through  the  hole  in  the 
dam  to  the  depth  desired  for  the  cusps.  Set  the  ring  on  a 
partly  open  bench  vise  or  other  convenient  place,  and  pour 
the  fusible  metal. — A.  B.  Boyd,  Items  of  Interest. 

Setting  a  Logan  Crown. — Make  a  cap  over  the  stump 
of  the  root,  with  or  without  a  band,  and  set  a  pin  in  the 
cap.  Cut  the  pin  from  the  Logan  crown  and  grind  to  fit 
the  cap  and  the  articulation.  Fill  the  concavity  in  the 
crown  with  pure  gold  and  press  to  place  until  the  gold 
spreads  all  over  the  bed  of  the  crown.  Put  in  the  mouth 
with  Parr's  flux  between  crown  and  cap.  Remove  all 
together,  invest  and  solder. — J.  D.  Patterson,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  375 

Crown-work:  Dowels  that  Fit  the  Root-canal. — Make  a 
gold  cap  as  usual  and  punch  a  hole  as  large  as  the  mouth 
of  the  canal.  Make  a  cone  from  a  piece  of  thin  platinum 
cut  in  the  shape  of  a  V  and  folded  round  a  tapering  mandrel 
with  considerable  lap  of  the  edges.  With  cap  in  place  on 
the  root  pass  the  cone  down  into  the  canal,  and  with  a 
tapering  piece  of  wood  force  it  into  contact  with  the  walls 
of  the  canal ;  burnish  the  protruding  portion  down  upon  the 
surface  of  the  cap  and  unite  the  two  with  hard  wax.  Re- 
move, invest,  and  fill  the  cone  with  solder^  also  uniting  the 
edges. — The  Stomatologist. 

Mounting  Porcelain  Bridges. — Porcelain  bridges  should 
always  be  mounted  with  gutta-percha  in  preference  to  ce- 
ment, because  of  three  important  features :  First,  when 
so  mounted  they  may  be  removed  at  any  time  without 
difficulty  or  injury;  second,  the  impact  from  the  stress  of 
mastication  is  relieved  by  the  cushion-like  effect  imparted 
by  the  presence  of  this  material,  and  third,  it  is  almost  im- 
possible to  use  cement  when  a  saddle  is  employed  without 
forcing  the  surplus  underneath  it,  and  when  this  crystallizes 
irritation  is  the  invariable  result. — Hart  J.  Goslee,  Dental 
Review. 

Investment  Compound. — An  investment  compound  that 
is  second  to  none  for  crown  and  bridge-work  and  all  solder- 
ing purposes  is  composed  of  plaster  and  ashes.  The  ashes 
may  be  prepared  for  use  by  sifting  common  coal  ashes  until 
all  grit  is  removed  and  a  soft,  flaky  powder  left.  The  pow- 
dered ashes  are  added  to  the  plaster  at  the  time  of  mixing, 
the  proportion  being  about  two  of  plaster  to  one  of  ashes. 
The  compound  sets  very  hard,  and  apparently  does  not  con- 
tract or  expand,  nor  does  it  burn  out,  warp  or  crack  under 
the  heat  of  the  blowpipe. — Frederick  C.  Brush,  Dental 
Brief. 

Eemovable  Bridgework:  Advantages. — First,  the 
hygienic  properties  from  the  opportunity  to  remove  and 
clean  the  piece.    Second,  adaptability  to  varying  conditions 


376  Practical  Dentistry. 

of  absorption,  occlusion  and  support,  affording  greater 
range  of  application.  Third,  opportunity  for  restoring  lost 
tissue  in  cases  of  extensive  absorption,  with  more  natural 
and  more  artistic  results.  Fourth,  the  support  derived  from 
contact  with  the  soft  tissues,  fewer  abutment  teeth  being 
mechanically  required.  Fifth,  less  mutilation  of  the  sup- 
porting teeth  is  usually  involved,  and,  sixth,  greater 
longevity  of  the  teeth  is  insured. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Mounting  Porcelain  Bridges. — Porcelain  bridges  should 
always  be  set  with  gutta-percha  in  preference  to  cement 
because  of  three  very  important  features :  First,  when  so 
mounted  they  may  be  removed  at  any  time  without  diffi- 
culty or  injury;  second,  the  impact  from  the  stress  of  mas- 
tication is  relieved  by  the  cushion-like  effect  imparted  by 
the  presence  of  this  material,  and  third,  it  is  almost  impos- 
sible to  use  cement  without  forcing  the  surplus  underneath, 
with  consequent  irritation  as  the  unavoidable  result. — H. 
J.  GosLEE,  Dental  Review. 

A  Temporary  Crown. — Whenever  a  permanent  crown 
is  being  constructed  for  any  of  the  anterior  teeth  a  tem- 
porary crown  is  placed  in  position,  allowing  the  operator  to 
complete  the  crown  at  leisure,  permitting  the  time  necessary 
for  artistic  results.  The  temporary  crown  also  serves  to 
hold  the  gum  away  from  the  root,  so  that  the  final  setting  of 
the  permanent  crown  is  effected  with  much  less  difficulty  to 
the  dentist  and  much  less  discomfort  to  the  patient. — J.  E. 
Nyman,  Dental  Review. 

Gutta-Percha  in  Setting  Crowns  and  Bridge-Work. — 
I  am  a  strong  advocate  of  gutta-percha,  because  it  acts  as  a 
cushion,  and  in  case  of  a  patient  accidentally  biting  upon  a 
piece  of  shell  or  solder  (as  found  in  canned  goods),  or  a 
piece  of  bone,  the  jar  is  not  nearly  so  great.  Also,  if  acci- 
dent should  happen  to  a  bridge  or  crown,  requiring  its  re- 
moval, it  is  almost  as  easily  done  as  removing  a  plate  from 
the  mouth. — A.  W.  McCandless,  Dental  Review. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  Z77 

Setting  Logan  Crown  with  Porcelain  Body. — Prepare 
root  with  bevel  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees  to  a  point  well 
under  the  gum  at  labial  surface.  Burnish  a  piece  of  very 
soft  platinum  over  end  of  root,  leaving  surplus  posteriorly 
and  at  sides,  and  perforate  for  reception  of  pin.  Mix  body, 
and  fill  recess  of  crown  over-full,  and  push  home  as  if  using 
cement.  With  bibulous  paper  absorb  moisture,  and  remove 
surplus  body  with  camel's-hair  brush.  Remove  all  together 
and  carry  to  furnace.  Baking  and  cooling  will  take  about 
ten  minutes.  Have  perfect  fitting  V-joint.  Cement  to 
place  as  usual. — R.  M.  Sanger,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Shaping  a  Root  for  Crowning. — An  important  step  in 
preparing  an  anterior  tooth  for  crowning  is  that  the  root 
should  be  so  beveled  and  paralleled  that  when  the  band  is 
driven  to  place  the  further  it  goes  toward  the  gum  margin 
the  tighter  and  snugger  it  will  become,  its  relation  to  the 
root  being  that  of  a  ferrule  to  a  cane,  going  well  under  the 
gum — at  least  a  32d  of  an  inch.  This  induces  a  beneficial 
change  of  condition,  exciting  a  healthy  circulation. — Bur- 
ton Lee  Thorpe,  Le  Laboratoire. 

The  Richmond  Crown. — The  banding  of  teeth  as  called 
for  by  the  Richmond  crown  is  highly  objectionable.  The 
disfigurement  of  the  mouth  ought  in  itself  to  exclude  it; 
furthermore,  it  is  a  source  of  constant  irritation,  and  if  worn 
for  many  years  the  tooth  will  become  loose.  The  band  is  not 
necessary;  if  the  post  in  the  canal  is  sufficiently  long  and 
properly  adjusted  and  the  end  of  the  crown  is  properly  fitted 
to  the  root  end  and  the  two  securely  cemented,  there  is  no 
reasonable  danger  of  failure. — Edw.  Eggleston,  Dental 
Era. 

A  Removable  Bridge. — For  those  cases  in  which  it  is 
desirable  to  avoid  shaping  the  teeth  of  abutment  for  the  re- 
ception of  caps,  a  removable  single  tooth  bridge  can  be  con- 
structed by  using  a  double  loop 'clasp  of  platinum  wire  so 
shaped  that  one  wire  rests  on  the  tooth  just  above  the  gum, 
the  other  just  above  the  bulge  of  the  tooth,  the  bridge  being 

25 


378  Practical  Dentistry. 

further  supported  by  very  small  spuds  resting  upon  the 
edge  of  the  occlusal  surface.  A  saddle  of  very  soft  platinum 
No.  33  is  swaged  to  the  plaster  model,  and  stiffened  by  flow- 
ing gold  over  it. — Howard  T.  Stewart. 

Preparation  of  Root  for  a  Banded  Crown. — To  allow  the 
shaping  to  be  done  without  pain  or  unnecessary  hemorrhage, 
a  small  piece  of  gutta-percha  retained  for  a  day  or  so  over 
the  root-face  will  be  found  of  advantage.  The  gutta-percha 
is  best  held  in  position  by  means  of  a  disc  of  thin  German 
silver,  through  the  center  of  which  is  soldered  a  short  length 
of  wire.  Warm  the  gutta-percha,  place  it  around  the  wire 
and  disc  and  press  tightly,  while  warm,  upon  the  root-face. — 
Percival  S.  Campkin,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Amalg"am  in  Crown-work. — Whenever  a  broken-down 
molar  is  to  receive  a  shell  crown,  it  is  my  view  that  the 
natural  tooth  should  first  be  protected  by  as  perfect  an 
amalgam  filling  as  can  be  made.  This  is  especially  obliga- 
tory when  decay  or  fracture  has  destroyed  a  portion  of  the 
tooth  below  the  margin  of  the  gum ;  replacing  the  lost  part 
with  amalgam  renders  the  fitting  of  the  gold  band  more 
easily  possible  and  painless  and  assures  a  tighter  adaptation 
through  the  restoration  of  the  circumference  of  the  root  to 
its  full  proportion. — R.  Ottolengui,  Iteuis  of  Interest. 

To  Replace  Porcelain  Fronts  Without  Removal  of 
Bridge. — Grind  tooth  down  same  as  for  bridge-work,  fit 
same  accurately  in  vacant  space  on  bridge.  Bore  two 
holes  in  bridge  (in  center  of  space)  to  fit  pins  in  tooth 
to  be  adjusted.  On  back  of  bridge  around  holes  cut  out  a 
round  circle  (using  round  bur  to  make  undercuts).  With 
a  small  saw  or  knife  roughen  pins  on  tooth,  after  heating 
tooth  and  space  in  bridge  thoroughly  dry.  Mix  cement  to 
same  consistency  as  used  for  setting  crowns,  place  same  on 
tooth  and  in  space,  gently  press  tooth  in  position.  With 
a  heavy  instrument  press  pins  in  circle  cut  out  on  back  of 
bridge  and  fit  space  with  amalgam. — J.  A.  Richard,  Dental 
Brief. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  379 

Preparation  of  Roots  for  Crowning. — In  preparing  roots 
for  crowning  it  is  good  practice  to  make  sure  of  your 
foundations.  Before  opening  the  canal  fully,  or  using 
broaches,  sterilize  cataphorically  by  introducing  some  anti- 
septic, as  argentine  nitrate  or  formaldehyd,  into  the 
canal ;  then  turning  on  the  current  for  five  minutes,  and 
at  the  next  visit  remove  the  debris.  In  this  way  we  get  rid 
of  the  possibility  of  forcing  morbid  matter  through  the 
apical  foramen. — Sir  George  Elliott,  Journal  British  Den. 
Asso. 

Swaging  Carved  Cusps. — Place  the  die  (Melotte's  metal) 
on  a  piece  of  soft  lead  which  allows  the  die  to  become  closely 
adjusted  and  prevents  dancing.  Adjust  a  piece  of  gold  of 
suitable  size  on  the  cusp  of  the  die  and  place  over  it  a  piece 
of  soft  lead  strap-shaped,  say  one-fourth  inch  thick,  three- 
fourths  inch  wide,  and  one  foot  long;  its  length  and  width 
allows  both  a  firm  hold  and  a  clear  view  of  the  work  with- 
out danger  of  displacing  the  gold  or  hitting  your  fingers ;  a 
sharp  blow  or  blows  with  a  horn  hammer  will  produce  a 
clearly  defined  cusp. — X.  Dodel,  Pointers  for  Dentists. 

Capping  Live  Teeth.. — If  live  teeth,  which  are  to  be 
capped  either  for  single  crowns  or  bridges,  are  first  dried 
and  then  coated  with  a  chloroform  solution  of  gutta-percha, 
and  dried  again  by  means  of  the  chip-blower  before  placing 
the  cement-filled  shells  in  position,  a  bar  to  thermal  changes 
is  afforded  and  also  protection  against  the  chemical  action  of 
the  phosphoric  acid. — W.  A.  Bostwick,  Dental  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

Bridgework:  Fixed  or  Removable? — The  interests  of 
the  patient  should  be  the  guiding  principle  in  all  our  oper- 
ations ;  often  careful  examination  plainly  and  distinctly  indi- 
cates to  him  the  best  system  suited  to  his  case.  To  arrive 
at  a  safe  conclusion,  in  nearly  every  instance,  in  selecting  a 
system  the  same  care  should  be  exercised  as  pursued  by  the 
skilled  orthodontist,  namely,  obtaining  an  accurate  model 
of  each  jaw,  occluding  them  for  careful  study. — A.  P. 
BuRKHART,  Items  of  Interest. 


380  Practical  Dentistry. 

Porcelain  Joints  in  Bridge-work. — Porcelain  is  prob- 
ably no  cleaner  than  high-carat  gold,  but  soldered  joints  in 
bridges  are  very  apt  to  oxidize  and  collect  an  uncleanly 
covering.  Unfortunately,  porcelain  bridges  are  limited  to 
a  small  percentage  of  cases  because  of  their  friability,  and 
for  successful  use  the  bite  must  be  quite  long  and  the  oc- 
clusion favorable  to  a  considerable  mass  of  porcelain.  In 
the  greater  number  of  cases  the  bridge  does  not  allow  of  a 
sufficient  mass  of  material  to  promise  avoidance  of  break- 
age.— S.  H.  VoYLFS,  Dental  Brief. 

A  Flux  for  Bridge-work. — Put  in  a  cup 

Boracic   acid    5J 

Ammonia    5ss 

Carbonate  of  ammonia  dwt.ss 

Bicarbonate  of  soda  dwt.ij 

Water     5iv 

Boil  until  fumes  of  ammonia  are  no  longer  given  off. 
Coat  the  piece  all  over  the  gold  with  the  flux.  Heat  over 
spirit  lamp  to  dry  it  on.  Give  a  second  coat  if  needed,  leav- 
ing no  spot  exposed.  Then  scrape  off  where  it  is  desired 
the  solder  shall  flow;  it  will  go  nowhere  else.  The  work 
will  come  out  as  bright  as  it  went  in  and  the  polished  sur- 
face will  not  be  corroded  or  blackened. — Western  Den.  Jour. 

Setting  a  Logan  Crown  with  Gutta-percha. — For  an  un- 
handed crown  cut  an  oval  shaped  piece  of  thin  baseplate 
gutta-percha,  perforate,  and  slip  it  over  the  dowel,  up 
against  the  crown.  Barb  the  dowel,  paint  with  a  solution 
of  the  baseplate  in  chloroform  or  eucalyptus,  and  wrap 
with  a  strip  of  warmed  gutta-percha,  which  is  readily 
molded  to  the  dowel  with  the  fingers.  Press  into  the  root, 
allowing  the  latter  to  be  wet  with  saliva  to  facilitate  re- 
moval. Trim  off  surplus,  heat  again,  and  try  repeatedly 
until  the  crown  can  be  pressed  nearly  to  place;  then 
moisten  canal  and  face  of  root,  and  the  gutta-percha  on 
the  crown,  with  eucalyptus,  and  press  gently  to  place. — 
S.  H.  Guilford,  The  Stomatologist. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  381 

Replacing  Porcelain  Facings. — For  replacing  a  broken 
porcelain  facing  the  pins  are  frequently  not  long  enough. 
They  may  be  elongated  by  placing  tubes  of  planous  gold 
(platinum  lined  with  gold)  over  the  pins;  invest  and  put 
under  the  blow-pipe  after  heating  gradually;  pure  gold  on 
the  inside  will  unite  with  the  platinum  pins.  Drill  holes 
through  the  bridge  to  accommodate  the  tube-pins,  and 
countersink.  Pass  the  tubes  through  and  grind  off  even 
with  the  surface.  The  ends  of  the  tubes  may  be  dilated  to 
fill  the  countersink,  and  the  space  filled  with  gold  foil. — G. 
W.  Melotte,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Recementing  a  Bridge  Without  Removal. — The  crown 
at  one  end  of  a  bridge  having  loosened  through  disintegra- 
tion of  the  cement,  a  hole  was  drilled  through  the  cap  to 
fit  rigidly  the  syringe-point,  through  which  warm  water 
was  injected  until  everything  was  clean.  Hot  air  was  then 
injected  until  crown  and  tooth  were  dry  and  warm.  The 
crown  was  then  pulled  down  as  far  as  possible,  and  with  a 
Siqueland  cement-syringe  cement  was  forced  in  until  it 
appeared  at  the  gum  margin,  when  the  crown  was  at  once 
pressed  into  place. — E.  S.  Lawton,  Items  of  Interest. 

Filling  Canal  of  Roots  that  Are  to  Be  Crowned. — Thor- 
oughly incorporate  paraform  (polymeized  formaldehyd) 
with  vaselin.  Fill  the  canal  with  this,  being  careful  not  to 
force  it  beyond  the  apex.  Push  a  gutta-percha  point  up  to 
the  apex  and  follow  with  others  until  filled.  The  excess  of 
vaselin  will  exude  with  the  cavity.  When  ready  to  insert  the 
pin  of  the  crown,  with  a  very  hot  burnisher  soften  the  gutta- 
percha opening  sufficiently  to  admit  the  post. — F.  B.  Law- 
rence, Western  Dental  Journal. 

The  Banded  Crown. — There  is  no  occasion  for  using 
such  a  thing  as  is  comm.only  known  as  a  Richmond  crown, 
though  a  Richmond  crown  minus  the  band  will  do  good 
service,  and  some  modification  of  a  bandless  Richmond 
crown  can  be  well  adapted. — Edw.  Eggleston,  The  Dental 
Era. 


382  Practical  Dentistry. 

Porcelain  Molars  in  Bridge-work. — In  all  suspended 
gold  crowns,  having  reinforced  the  shell  crown,  select  suit- 
able porcelain  teeth  and  wrap  with  thin  sheet  platinum,  first 
coating  the  platinum,  inside  and  out,  with  flux.  Place  small 
bits  of  22k.  solder  liberally  in  the  crown  and  insert  the 
platinum-wrapped  porcelain ;  direct  the  flame  to  the  bottom 
of  the  investment.  This  fills  the  great  desideratum — 
economy  of  gold  with  minimum  weight,  without  impairing 
strength  of  bridge. — I.  A.  Chapple,  Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

Crowning  Teeth  with  Live  Pulps. — Pulps  usually  die 
soon  after  the  tooth  is  crowned.  Some  attribute  this  result 
to  arsenic  in  the  cement,  but  I  am  inclined  to  believe  it  is  the 
phosphoric  acid.  If  carbolic  acid  or  nitrate  of  silver  were 
freely  applied,  there  would  be  less  danger  of  the  pulp  dying, 
but  the  most  satisfactory  plan  is  to  use  an  acid  which  will  not 
irritate  the  pulp.  The  better  way  is  to  use  gutta-percha  en- 
tirely.— D.  HuRLBUT  Allis,  International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Countersunk  Molar  as  a  Composite  Crown. — Pre- 
pare roots  with  surface  of  stumps  ground  down  level  with 
surface  of  gum.  Fit  pins  to  root-canals,  having  projection 
made  or  loop.  Burnish  platinum  disc  to  surface  of  stump, 
perforate  for  pins,  which  solder  to  place.  Grind  a  counter- 
sunk molar  to  as  good  a  joint  as  possible,  adjust  and 
wax  to  disc,  using  vulcanizable  rubber  to  fill  all  interstices; 
pack  in  any  ordinary  flask,  vulcanize  and  finish  up.' — 
Jas.  B.  Hodgkin,  Items  of  Interest. 

Setting  a  Logan  Crown. — In  cutting  the  root  off  follow 
the  line  of  the  root  or  you  will  have  a  disturbing  condition 
that  you  never  can  get  right.  Cut  so  that  in  placing-  the 
crown  you  can  see  the  joint  all  around ;  if  where  you  can  see 
it  you  can  certainly  fit  it  better  than  if  under  the  gum ;  if  the 
crown  part  is  too  large  it  is  easy  to  bevel  it ;  if  the  root  is  a 
little  too  large  it  is  very  easy  to  bevel  it.  It  leaves  a  self- 
cleansing  surface. — D.  J.  M'Millen,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  383 

Preparing  Roots  for  Crowning. — Before  opening-  the 
canal  fully,  or  using  broaches,  sterilize  cataphorically  by 
introducing  some  antiseptic,  as  argentic  nitrate  or  formal- 
dehyd,  into  the  canal,  then  turning  on  the  current  for  five 
minutes;  and  at  the  next  visit  remove  the  debris.  In  this 
way  we  get  rid  of  the  possibility  of  forcing  morbid  matter 
through  the  apical  foramen. — Wm.  St.  George  Elliott, 
British  Dental  Journal. 

Clasps  in  Removable  Bridgework. — The  clasp  should 
be  as  wide  as  possible  not  to  interfere  with  the  occlusion  or 
impunge  upon  the  gum,  as  the  narrower  the  clasp  is,  the 
closer  it  hugs  the  tooth;  and  the  closer  it  fits,  the*  more 
mechanical  abrasion  it  causes ;  and  the  more  abrasion,  the 
more  injury  it  does.  The  clasp  should  be  sustained  by 
frictional  contact  at  a  few  point  only. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Items 
of  Interest. 

A  Quickly  Made  Bridge. — With  models  on  articulator 
as  though  for  a  partial  plate,  articulate  plain  rubber  teeth 
in  the  space  to  be  bridged.  Remove  teeth  and  wax  and  in- 
vest in  plaster.  Place  rubber  ring  over  investment  and 
pour  Melotte's  metal  for  die.  Remove  teeth  and  wax  and 
with  shot  swaging  device  swage  a  piece  of  gold  that  can  be 
articulated  on  a  model  containing  crown.  Fill  with  solder, 
solder  to  crown,  and  bridge  is  finished. — A.  Owen,  Texas 
Dental  Journal. 

Investment  for  Gold  Casting  in  Bridge-work. — 

Plaster  of  paris  5  parts 

Plumbago    3  parts 

Asbestos  (grade  3)   6  parts 

Soapstone   (pulv.)    i  part 

This  gives  a  good  heat-resisting  investment  for  a 
modeling  compound  model,  for  occlusal  castings,  cusp  but- 
tons, etc.  The  plumbago  gives  a  fine  surface  to  the  cast- 
ing.— Cephas  Whitney,  Items  of  Interest. 


384  Practical  Dentistry. 

Logan  Crown  Without  Pin,  With  Amalgam  Attachment. 

— Cut  off  the  pin  and  grind  the  porcelain  level.  Having  a 
suitable  undercut  in  the  prepared  root,  roughen  the  surface 
of  the  hollow  in  the  crown  and  paint  it  with  chlorid  of 
gold.  Heat  the  crown  and  work  the  amalgam  in  with  a 
burnisher;  by  the  affinity  of  gold  for  mercury  the  amal- 
gam will  adhere  to  the  gold  surface.  At  once  place  the 
crown  on  the  root,  the  two  flat  surfaces  together. — W.  A. 
Capon,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Indications  for  a  Porcelain  Bridge. — The  indications  for 
a  porcelain  bridge  should  be  plenty  of  space  for  porcelain 
to  get  the  required  strength  to  withstand  the  force  of  masti- 
cation, as  we  are  entirely  dependent  upon  its  bulk  for  its 
strength.  We  must  also  consider  the  condition  of  the  teeth 
to  serve  as  abutments,  their  number  and  situation,  the  curve 
of  the  arch  and  most  important,  the  length  of  bite. — O.  M, 
Le  Cron,  Dentists'  Magazine. 

To  Obtain  a  Metal  Impression  of  a  Tooth  to  be  Crowned. 

— If  the  tooth  has  a  large  cavity,  fill  with  wax,  and  have 
the  patient  bite  to  get  articulation.  Trim  to  proper  shape. 
Take  plaster  impression,  and  make  plaster  model.  Cut  off 
the  tooth  to  be  crowned.  Pour  Melotte's  metal  in  the  rub- 
ber ring,  and  before  it  sets  place  the  plaster  model  of  the 
tooth  to  be  crowned,  cusps  down,  in  the  metal.  You  will 
then  have  an  exact  impression  in  which  to  stamp  gold  crown. 
— Chas.  H.  Sciver,  Items  of  Interest. 

Gold  Molar  Crowns. — Use  20-carat  gold.  No.  4  Ash's 
gauge,  joined  with  20-  or  i8-carat  solder,  and  i6-carat 
solder  for  adding  the  cap.  This  is  rather  more  difficult  to 
manipulate  than  fine  gold,  but  is  stronger  and  grips  the  root 
more  firmly,  so  much  so  that  in  many  cases  the  attachment 
would  be  almost  firm  enough  without  cement.  It  does  not 
stretch  and  lose  its  fit  after  trying  on  a  few  times. — J.  H. 
Babcock,  British  Dental  Journal. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  385 

To  Eeplace  Broken  Facings. — Grind  pins  on  backing. 
Then  drill  two  holes  to  receive  pins  in  facing,  the  facing 
having  been  ground  to  fit  backing.  Set  with  cement  and 
rivet  with  plate  punch  and  block  of  wood,  being  careful  to 
keep  wood  between  facing  and  punch.  By  carefully  turn- 
ing punch  with  point  in  contact  with  pins  the  facing  can  be 
made  as  firm  as  when  first  set.  Finish  pins  with  discs. — C. 
W.  SiEFKEN,  Dental  Brief. 

Bridge  Attachment — the  Carmichael  System. — Essenti- 
ally the  idea  is  to  cut  a  groove  axially,  on  the  mesial  and 
distal  surfaces,  extending  across  the  occlusal  surface.  A 
plate  of  metal  is  then  fitted  to  the  Ungual  or  palatal  sur- 
face and  into  the  groove,  making  a  secure  anchorage,  free 
from  metal  on  the  labial  surface,  and  with  no  mutilation 
of  the  teeth  or  pulp  devitalization. — J.  P.  Carmichael, 
Dental  Register. 

Crown-  and  Bridge-work — Millott's  Swaging  Method. 

— No  fusible  metal  is  used  in  this  new  method.  A  little 
ordinary  sealing-wax  is  dropped  upon  a  short  section  of 
round  brass  rod  and  placed  upon  the  form  of  the  die-plate 
or  the  natural  tooth  selected.  This  is  chilled  and  inserted 
in  one  end  of  a  brass  cylinder;  over  it  are  placed  a  disc  of 
gold  and  a  roll  of  soft  rubber.  A  longer  section  of  brass 
rod,  or  plunger,  is  introduced  into  the  other  end  of  the 
cylinder  and  the  parts  swaged  in  the  ordinary  way ;  done  in 
a  few  minutes  with  the  simplest  materials  and  with  no  tear- 
ing of  the  gold. — Dental  Register. 

A  Crown  Polisher. — A  convenient  method  for  holding 
crowns,  when  polishing,  is  to  soften  a  small  quantity  of 
modeling  compound,  shaping  it  to  a  point  and  pressing  it 
into  crown  while  warm.  You  can  hold  it  readily,  and  it 
also  prevents  any  possible  chance  of  changing  the  form  of 
the  collar  in  polishing  or  dropping.  When  polished,  pass  it 
through  the  flame  of  the  lamp  and  it  is  readily  withdrawn. 
— J.  F.  Wallace,  D.D.S.,  Canton,  Mo. 


386  Practical  Dentistry. 

Setting  Crowns  and  Bridges  with  Gutta-percha. — Set  all 

single  crowns  with  gutta-percha,  putting  it  around  the  pin 
and  around  inside  the  band.  Force  into  place  while  the  root 
is  moist,  so  that  it  can  be  readily  withdrawn  and  the  surplus 
trimmed  away.  Then  dry  the  root,  put  in  a  little  chloroform, 
and  put  crown  in  place.  A  bridge  can  be  set  equally  well. — 
Dr.  Belyea,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Banded  Crowns. — In  the  great  majority  of  cases  it  is 
wholly  unnecessary  to  have  any  band  whatever,  for  the 
reason  that  after  long-continued  experiment  I  have  reached 
what  I  believe  to  be  an  absolutely  irresistible  strength  in 
the  iridio-platinum  pin,  when  of  appropriate  size  and  exactly 
fitted  to  the  root.  That  strength  is  reached  by  a  20  per 
cent,  alloy  of  iridium  with  platinum. — N.  S.  Jenkins,  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

fridge-work:  the  Abutments. — A  favorite  form  of 
abutment  is  to  place  an  iridio-platinum  post  in  the 
enlarged  pulp-chamber  of  any  of  the  six  anterior  teeth  and 
then  back  up  the  tooth  after  the  manner  of  backing  a  facing ; 
trim  this  to  the  proper  shape  and  flow  solder  over  the  sur- 
face, making  the  backing  and  the  post  continuous.  This  is 
a  concealed  yet  very  strong  form  of  abutment. — Edw.  Eg- 
GLESTON,  Dental  Summary. 

Bridge  Abutment  for  Anterior  Teeth. — A  new  attach- 
ment especially  adapted  to  canines,  though  it  may  be  used 
on  centrals  and  laterals,  consists  of  a  gold  inlay  through 
which  runs  an  iridio-platinum  wire  post  fitting  into  the  root- 
canal  and  extending  approximately  to  support  the  bridge. 
It  is  confined  entirely  to  the  lingual  surface,  shows  no  gold 
and  offers  no  obstruction  to  a  close  bite. — John  O.  Mc- 
Call,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Restoration  of  Broken-down  Molars  with  Aluminum 
Cap. — Secure  good  fit  and  articulation  of  swaged  aluminum 
cap.  Make  proper  undercuts  in  dentin,  fill  cap  with  cement, 
and  press  to  place.     Worthy  a  place  in  crown-work  when 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  387 

something  less  expensive  than  gold  is  desirable.  Avoid  con- 
tact with  amalgam,  as  the  mercury  will  unite  with  the  alum- 
inum, causing  it  to  crumble. — A.  E.  Preston^  Dental  Cos- 
mos. 

Incisor  Crowns. — Instead  of  building  up  the  lingual 
wall  to  the  natural  contour  leave  it  concave,  to  enable  the 
lower  tooth  to  bite  into  the  hollow,  so  that  should  any  rising 
of  the  lower  teeth  take  place  it  would  drive  the  upper  root 
up  into  the  socket  rather  than  allow  it  to  be  pressed  out- 
ward, as  is  so  frequently  the  case  when  the  tooth  is  built 
up  to  the  original  shape. — G.  O.  Whittaker,  Journal  Brit- 
ish Dental  Association. 

Building  up  Broken-down  Molars  for  Crowning. — Fit  a 

band  of  40-gauge  copper  accurately  around  the  tooth  and 
cement  a  staple  of  rigid  metal  in  the  root-canals.  Pack  amal- 
gam around  the  staple  and  fill  the  band  full.  After  the 
amalgam  has  set  slit  the  band  and  remove  it.  A  gold 
crown  can  then  be  adjusted  in  the  usual  manner.  If  the 
roots  are  separated,  tea-lead  can  be  used,  as  compatible 
with  the  soft  tissues. — F.  H.  McIntosh,  Dental  Digest. 

Crowning  Live  Teeth. — Use  a  crown  with  band  and 
without  post  in  anterior  teeth  whenever  devitalization  has 
not  been  effected,  for  the  reason  that  in  all  cases  where  it 
can  be  done  upon  the  live  stump  the  danger  of  the  band 
coming  into  sight  after  a  year  or  two  does  not  exist;  it  is 
only  the  devitalized  root  that  lengthens  in  that  way,  and 
especially  in  the  mouths  of  patients  of  mature  years. — Geo. 
F,  Grant,  International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Bandless  Crown. — My  requirements  for  a  bandless 
crown  are  briefly  these:  small,  rigid,  flat,  or  square  post, 
equal  in  length  or,  if  possible,  longer  than  the  crown ;  root 
trimmed  within  free  margins  of  gum  and  with  convex  end; 
perfect  continuity  and  adaption  of  crown.  Set  with  gutta- 
percha or  chloro-percha  and  cement  to  allow  for  easy 
removal  of  pin  in  case  of  breakage. — F.  E.  Roach,  Dental 
Digest. 


388  Practical  Dentistry. 

Crowning  Lower  Molar,  with.  Split  Roots. — When  the 
two  roots  of  a  lower  molar  are  split  so  far  apart  as  to 
make  it  impracticable  to  draw  them  together,  band  each 
root  separately  and  join  the  proximal  edges  of  the  bands 
near  the  cutting  edge,  and  place  a  single  grinding  surface 
over  the  two,  thus  getting  the  rigid  support  of  both  roots, 
and  making  it  possible  to  cleanse  the  neck  of  each  root. — 
H.  J.  GosLEE,  Dental  Digest. 

Crowning  Molars  Which  Are  Decayed  Below  the  Gum 
Margin. — Place  pins  in  the  roots ;  press  wax  down  to  the 
bottom  of  the  cavity,  shaping  it  around  the  pins,  filling  up 
the  cavity  and  restoring  the  contour.  Remove  pins  and  wax, 
invest  in  plaster,  dry  out,  remove  the  plaster,  and  replace 
by  fusible  metal.  Try  in,  trim,  cement  into  roots,  and  it  is 
ready  for  a  collar. — Dr.  Williamson,  British  Dental 
Journal. 

The  Care  of  Dental  Bridgework. — Wearers  of  remov- 
able bridgework  should  be  advised  to  remove  and  carefully, 
but  thoroughly,  cleanse  the  fixture  before  each  meal,  and 
afterwards  also,  if  possible,  over  a  basin  partially  filled  with 
tepid  water  and  with  a  suitable  brush  and  a  good  soap.  It 
is  also  usually  best  to  remove  the  piece  upon  retiring,  place 
it  in  a  glass  of  water,  preferably  a  properly  diluted  antiseptic 
solution. — H.  J.  GosLEE,  Items  of  Interest. 

Crowning  Teeth  Having  Cavities  Extending  Under  the 
Gum. — Before  grinding  the  tooth  the  gum  should  be  pressed 
out  from  the  cavity  with  a  series  of  cotton  or  gutta-percha 
dressings,  the  cavity  made  retentive,  and  an  amalgam  fill- 
ing inserted  before  commencing  to  grind,  so  that  the  grind- 
ing may  make  a  continuous  and  smooth  surface,  and  no  ob- 
struction offered  to  the  band. — H,  Leonard  Darrell,  Den- 
tal Record. 

Painless  Crown-setting. — Paint  the  inner  surface  of 
the  crown  with  carbolic  acid,  ninety-five  per  cent.  Dry  the 
tooth  and  place  the  crown  in  position.    The  small  quantity 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  389 

of  carbolic  acid  which  will  escape  will  anaesthetize  the  gums 
by  leaving  the  crown  in  position  a  short  time.  A  little 
alcohol  will  overcome  the  caustic  effect  if  too  severe.  The 
crown  may  then  be  set  without  causing  pain. — F.  W.  Ste- 
PHAN,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Restore  Badly  Decayed  Root  for  Crowning. — Drill 
canal  as  for  pin ;  trim  orange  wood  stick  to  fit  canal ;  coat 
the  stick  with  thin  film  of  wax.  Having  the  canal  dry  and 
amalgam  mixed,  insert  the  waxed  stick  in  the  canal  and  pack 
amalgam  around  it,  filling  flush  with  gum  margin.  After 
amalgam  has  set,  remove  the  waxed  stick  and  proceed  as 
required. — C.  L.  Tool,  Dental  World. 

To  Repair  Broken  Pin  in  Logan  Crown. — File  the  por- 
tion remaining  in  the  crown  square  across;  invest  as  pre- 
ferred, and  solder  to  it  another  piece  of  platinum  pin,  using 
a  low  grade  of  solder  to  avoid  raising  to  a  high  tempera- 
ture. Fourteen  carat  is  perfectly  satisfactory.  Pins  that  are 
too  soft  may  be  strengthened  in  this  way. — P,  G.  Wood, 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Bridge  Attachment. — When  the  remaining  teeth  cannot 
be  ground  sufficiently  for  bands  without  destroying  their 
contour,  or  when  they  have  receding  gums  and  a  tendency 
to  be  loose  and  it  is  desirable  to  avoid  the  irritation  of 
bands,  place  gold  caps  over  the  cutting  edge  of  the  teeth, 
instead  of  bands  or  crowns  for  supporting  the  bridge. — 
C.  T.  Whinery,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Setting  Porcelain  Crowns. — Oxyphosphate  of  copper  is 
the  strongest  cement  for  setting  crowns.  The  objectionable 
black  line  at  the  joint  can  be  overcome  by  placing  some  slow 
cement,  mixed  rather  stiff,  on  the  buccal  edge  of  crown  and 
of  root.  Then  place  the  oxyphosphate  of  copper  cement, 
mixed  rather  thin,  on  the  lingual  edge  of  root  and  in  the 
root-canal.  Insert  the  crown,  and  the  stiff  cement  will  push 
back  the  thin  copper  cement  and  prevent  the  black  line  on 
the  buccal  side. — Chas.  A.  Clark,  British  Dental  Journal. 


390  Practical  Dentistry. 

Anterior  Abutments  in  Bridge-work. — When  it  is 
necessary  to  use  a  cuspid  or  bicuspid  for  abutment,  use 
the  method  devised  by  Dr.  Marshall,  cutting  a  groove  across 
the  back  of  the  tooth  and  down  each  side  of  it,  into  which 
a  piece  of  platinum  and  iridium  screw  wire  is  fitted.  Over 
this  burnish  thin  gold  plate  and  solder.  This  forms  the 
forward  abutment  of  the  bridge,  and  when  cemented  in 
place  shows  no  gold  in  front. — Dr.  Andrews.  International 
Dental  Journal. 

To  Remove  a  Crown  Without  Mutilating  the  Band. — 
In  case  of  pericementitis  with  a  crown,  which  it  is  desirable 
to  replace,  with  a  sharp  spear  drill,  lubricated  with  glycerin, 
drill  through  the  backing  at  a  point  over  the  pin.  Enlarge 
the  hole  slightly  with  a  round  bur,  and  with  a  wheel  bur 
cut  the  pin  free  from  the  cap,  when  you  can  work  the 
crown  off  without  mutilating  the  band. — R.  M.  Sanger, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Investing  Crowns  and  Caps. — The  interior  of  all  crowns 
and  caps,  unless  previously  well  filled  with  plaster,  should 
be  thoroughly  packed  with  the  investment  material  to  be 
used,  using  a  small  piece  of  wood  or  a  fine-pointed  spatula. 
If  not  perfectly  filled,  heat  becomes  concentrated  in  the  air- 
spaces and  materially  increases  the  liability  of  burning  or 
fusing  of  the  parts. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Items  of  Interest. 

Richmond  Crowns. — If  the  solder  has  failed  to  flow 
and  make  a  perfect  joint,  make  an  amalgam  of  gold  foil  and 
mercury  and  pack  it  into  the  joint.  Place  in  dry  plaster  of 
Paris  and  set  over  Bunsen  burner  to  heat  up  and  drive  off 
the  mercury;  then  finish  up  and  polish. — A.  C.  McCurdy, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Crowning  Live  Teeth. — Teeth  which  have  lost  their 
pulps  have  a  greater  tendency  to  recession  of  the  gum,  re- 
sulting in  an  elongated  appearance  of  the  tooth.  There  is 
some  condition  taking  place  in  the  pericemental  tissues  after 
the  pulp  is  destroyed  which  causes  this  peculiarity. — W.  H. 
Jackson,  Dental  Register. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  391 

A  Gold  Corner  on  a  Porcelain  Facing. — Grind  off  the 
corner  and  burnish  the  backing  over  the  corner;  remove, 
invest  and  solder  on  the  gold  corner.  Polish  and  replace 
on  the  porcelain.  By  this  method  you  do  not  require  a 
diamond  drill.  Admissible  only  in  a  mouth  where  other 
teeth  are  already  contoured  vi^ith  gold. — L.  A.  Stemler, 
Items  of  Interest. 

A  Wax  for  Carving  in  Crown  and  Bridge  Work. — 
Take  pink  gutta-percha  one  sheet,  and  one  sheet  of  paraffin 
and  wax  base  plate.  Melt  the  wax  with  dry  heat  and  stir  in 
the  gutta-percha;  when  thorovighly  mixed  pour  off  and  let 
cool.  This  is  superior  to  modeling  compound  in  crown, 
bridge  and  gold  inlay  work  as  it  carves  smoothly  without 
chipping  or  flaking,  and  if  trimmed  too  much  a  shaving 
may  be  added  with  a  warm  spatula. — C.  B.  Powell,  Brief. 

Preparation  for  Crowning. — All  old  amalgam  fillings 
should  be  removed  before  grinding  as  caries  may  be  rampant 
underneath;  these  cavities  should  be  refilled  with  either 
cement  or  amalgam  before  commencing  to  make  the  crown 
so  that  the  band  will  not  catch  on  the  sharp  edge  of  the 
cavity.  Always  complete  root  treatment  before  cutting  down 
tooth  or  grinding  it. — H.  Leonard  Darrell,  Dental  Record 

To  Repair  Gold  Crowns. — To  repair  crack  or  hole  in 
gold  crown  burnish  over  same  piece  22  or  24  karat  gold 
sufficiently  large  to  cover  space,  flow  upon  same  14  or  18 
karat  gold  solder,  place  it  upon  crack  or  hole  with  soldered 
portion  in  contact  with  latter,  hold  together  with  pliers,  heat 
gently,  and  the  patch  will  adhere  readily  to  crown. — J.  A. 
Richards. 

The  Occlusal  Surface  in  Crown-work. — If  you  will  take 
ordinary  paraffin  wax  and  melt  it  in  a  large  spoon  and  stir 
plaster  of  paris  into  it  while  it  is  in  a  molten  condition,  you 
will  find  that  it  will  make  one  of  the  nicest  carving  materials 
that  you  have  ever  used.  Make  it  plastic  by  heating  and 
apply  it  to  the  primary  crown  and  allow  the  patient  to  bite 
into  it. — J.  Q.  Byram,  Dental  Register, 


392  Practical  Dentistry. 

Banding  a  Tooth  in  which  there  is  an  Amalgam  Filling. 
— When  gold  is  used  for  banding  a  tooth  in  which  there 
is  an  amalgam  filling,  the  gold  may  become  permeated 
with  mercury  and  so  weakened  that  eventually  it  may 
break  up.  A  piece  of  platinum  foil  may  be  burnished  over 
that  part  of  the  band  which  requires  guarding,  and  soldered 
to  it  before  it  is  bent,  and  thus  obviate  the  danger. — A. 
Drake,  Dental  Record. 

Die  for  Gold  Crown  Work. — If  impression  material, 
prepared  by  mixing  12  ounces  fine  plaster  with  3  ounces 
fine  marble  dust  and  i  ounce  whiting,  is  used  for  the  im- 
pression, using  a  small  pinch  of  sulphate  of  potash  to  hasten 
the  setting,  a  fusible  metal  compound  of  5  parts  of  bismuth, 
3  parts  of  lead  and  two  parts  of  tin  can  be  poured  without 
delay. — W.  T.  Wallace,  Items  of  Lit  crest. 

Swaged  Cusps. — Press  the  plaster  model  of  cusps  into 
moldine  and  cast  a  cusp  button  of  pure  Watt's  metal.  When 
cool  carbonize  the  surface  by  igniting  a  small  piece  of  gum 
camphor,  wdiich  deposits  a  beautiful  layer  of  carbon.  Run 
the  counter  die  of  Alelatte's  metal.  Swage  the  gold  into  the 
counter  die  with  lead  and  then  use  the  button  to  bring  out 
the  fine  lines. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Dental  Review. 

The  Dowel  Crown. — The  ideal  dowel  is  made  by  using 
14  gauge  round  iridium  platinum  wire  which  is  flattened 
slightly,  then  filed  to  a  tapering  point,  producing  a  dowel  that 
requires  the  minimum  of  destruction  of  root  structure  and  is 
largest  at  the  junction  of  the  crown  and  root,  the  w^eakest 
point  of  this  kind  of  an  attachment. — J.  D.  White,  Dental 
Era. 

Bridge-work:  The  Impression. — For  bridge-work  a 
plaster  impression  is  always  indicated  because  the  employ- 
ment of  any  material  which  will  draw  perceptibly  in  remov- 
ing from  the  mouth  is  not  reliable ;  a  wax  "bite"  is  to  be 
preferred  to  modeling  composition  because  there  is  less 
danger  of  breaking  off  the  plaster  teeth  in  adjusting  to  the 
cast. — H.  J.  GosLEE,  Items  of  Interest. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  393 

Removal  of  Porcelain  Crown  Set  with  Gutta-percha. — 
When,  for  any  reason,  it  becomes  necessary  to  remove  a 
crown  that  has  been  set  with  gutta-percha  heat  the  crown, 
using  a  miniature  alcohol  lamp  made  by  passing  a  cotton 
string  through  a  medicine  dropper,  cutting  it  off  even  with 
the  tapering  end.  With  a  few  drops  of  alcohol  you  have  a 
flame  about  the  size  of  a  pin's  head. — R.  Eugene  Payne, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Bridge  Attachment. — In  a  bridge  extending  from  first 
molar  to  cuspid,  the  molar  bearing  a  gold  crown,  the  cuspid 
was  utilized  without  crowning,  as  follows :  A  post  having 
been  inserted  in  the  root-canal,  a  gold  inlay  was  placed  in  the 
lingual  surface  of  the  tooth,  the  inlay  being  constructed 
around  and  including  the  post. — Edna  M.  Thompson, 
Northwestern  Dental  Journal. 

Crowning  a  Live  Tooth. — The  secret  of  a  perfect  crown 
is  the  perfect  adaptation  of  the  band,  and  to  secure  this  re- 
quires considerable  time  and  unpleasant  work  in  removing 
enamel,  and  we  do  not  always  have  a  patient  who  will  stand 
this  severe  punishment,  while  death  of  the  pulp  is  very  apt 
to  follow,  caused  by  irritation  through  its  near  exposure. — 
J.  P.  RooT^  Western  Dental  Journal, 

Gold  Crowns. — As  an  abutment  for  bridge-work,  and 
for  restoring  posterior  teeth  very  badly  decayed,  the  gold 
crown  has  its  distinct  place,  but  not  for  use  when  skilful 
filling  would  do  all  that  is  necessary.  Its  legitimate  place 
is  in  connection  with  those  teeth  which  would  otherwise 
soon  reach  the  stage  which  would  condemn  them. — T.  A. 
Black,  Pennsylvania  Dental  Gazette. 

An  Inexpensive  Serviceable  Crown. — Having  prepared 
the  root  for  reception  of  crown,  select  a  plate  tooth  to  suit 
the  case  and  back  up  with  beeswax.  Warm  it  and  press  to 
place ;  trim  off  surplus  wax ;  invest  in  flask ;  open  up  and 
pack  with  Ash's  white  rubber  and  vulcanize.  Use  26- 
gauge  platinum  wire  for  pin. — J.  F.  Steele. 
26 


394  Practical  Dentistry. 

Investment  for  Soldering  Cap  and  Post  for  Crowns. — 

The  investment  for  soldering  metal  post  to  cap  may  satis- 
factorily consist  of  pumice  powder  merely.  Take  an  iron 
or  brass  ferrule,  fill  it  with  pumice  powder  pressed  down. 
Then  press  into  it  the  pin  and  cap,  drop  a  few  drops  of 
water  on  the  pumice,  and  the  flame  may  be  turned  on  at 
once. — H.  Baldwin,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Setting  Bridges. — Apply  dam  if  practicable,  and  coat  the 
pier  teeth  or  roots  wath  nitrate  of  silver,  either  by  direct 
application  or  by  cataphoresis.  Advantages  :  Sensitiveness 
is  obviated;  cement  adheres  more  surely;  if  the  cement 
washes  out,  or  if  the  band  does  not  cover  the  root  entirely, 
the  silver  nitrate  protects  it  thoroughly;  the  tooth  is  ren- 
dered aseptic. — Alex.  Jamison,  Dental  Review. 

The  Jacket  Crown. — When  it  is  desirable  to  preserve 
the  pulp  alive  and  a  certain  suspicious  degree  of  sensitive- 
ness remains  after  grinding  and  preparing  the  stump,  a 
protective  effect  is  gained  by  isolating  the  stump  with  a  rub- 
ber band  and  painting  with  a  strong  solution  of  nitrate  of 
silver.  When  subsequently  covered  it  seems  absolutely  safe 
against  future  accidents. — N.  S.  Jenkins,  Dental  Reviezu. 

Kemoval  of  Cemented-in  Crown-pin. — Apply  rubber- 
dam,  using  a  large  enough  piece  to  prevent  the  inhalation 
of  fumes  by  the  patient.  Wrap  a  wisp  of  cotton  on  a  broach, 
saturate  with  ammonia  water,  repeating  until  the  cement 
has  softened,  removing  it  with  an  old,  stiff  broach.  The 
length  of  time  depends  upon  the  solubility  of  the  cement, 
generally  from  one  to  two  hours  being  required,  when  the 
pin  may  be  removed  with  a  pair  of  pliers. — R.  Walter 
Starr,  Dental  Era. 

Mounting  Crowns. — In  proportion  as  the  decay  of  the 
root  to  be  crowned  extends  below  the  cervical  margin,  in  a 
still  greater  ratio  is  the  use  of  cement  contraindicated,  be- 
cause of  the  pain  to  the  patient,  the  difficulty  of  keeping  the 
root  dry,  and  the  liability  to  rapid  disintegration. — L.  J. 
Mitchell,  Dental  Review. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  395 

The  Diataric  Tooth,  in  Bridge-work. — The  use  of  dia- 
toric  teeth  in  bridge-work,  each  tooth  in  an  accurately  fitting 
gold  cup,  the  cups  soldered  together  at  the  proximal  surfaces 
with  a  piece  of  gold  plate  from  pin  to  pin  across  the  lingual 
aspect,  the  whole  overflowed  with  solder,  gives  a  maximum 
degree  of  strength  with  minimum  display  of  gold  and  an 
occlusion  well-nigh  perfect. — R.  M.  Sanger,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Bridging  Spaces  in  Soldering. —  ( i )  Rub  up  in  a  mortar 
equal  quantity  of  filings  of  an  easy-flowing  solder  and  filings 
of  the  gold  to  be  soldered,  with  borax  and  water,  making  a 
thick  paste,  with  which  pack  the  joint  to  be  soldered.  The 
particles  of  high-fusing  metal  serve  as  a  support  to  retain 
the  shape  of  the  mass,  the  low-fusing  solder  acting  as  a 
cement  to  unite  the  particles  and  bind  them  to  the  pieces 
being  soldered. — ^F.  W.  Sutphin,  Summary. 

Mounting  Crowns. — After  preparing  the  root  and  ac- 
curately adjusting  a  collar,  making  a  lap  joint  and  soldering 
with  pure  gold,  twenty-two  parts,  and  platinum,  two  parts, 
carefully  grind  the  neck  of  the  porcelain  crown  to  fit  into 
the  collar,  and  fuse  both  together  with  a  low-fusing 
enamel. — Robert  Huey^  Dental  Cosmos. 

A  Simple  Crown  for  Bicuspids. — Prepare  the  root  as 
usual  and  insert  a  pin  in  the  canal.  Take  an  impression 
and  grind  a  plate  or  rubber  tooth  to  fit.  With  pin  and  tooth 
in  position,  pack  a  good  amalgam  around  the  pins  and 
build  up  the  palatine  portion.  When  hard  polish  and  ce- 
ment into  the  root. — Dr.  V.  Nuki^  Southern  Dental 
Journal. 

Crystal  Mat  Gold  in  Bridgework. — In  soldering  the  as- 
sembled parts  of  a  bridge,  by  filling  the  interspaces  be- 
tween backings  and  crowns,  etc.,  with  crystal  mat  gold 
the  solder  may  be  flowed  across  where  desired.  It  will 
stay  better  where  it  is  placed  than  other  forms  of  gold,  and 
solder  will  flow  over  it  very  readily. — N.  H.  Bishop,  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 


396  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Replace  a  Broken  Facing  on  Bridge. — Remove  all 
pieces  of  porcelain;  grind  pins  of  selected  facing  down  to 
surface  of  porcelain,  and  with  copper  disc  wet  with  water 
and  covered  with  carborundum  powder  cut  a  groove  in  the 
facing  to  admit  the  pins  remaining  in  the  bridge,  making 
slight  undercuts  on  each  side  of  the  groove.  Clean  the  fac- 
ing and  pins  and  cement  to  place. — C.  C.  Bachman,  Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory. 

Broken  Pin  in  Root-canal. — When  a  pin  is  broken  flush 
with  or  below  the  root  end,  with  an  S.  S.  W.  trephine 
which  will  encircle  the  pin,  cut  out  the  cement  around  it. 
If  the  trephine  will  not  reach  to  the  end  of  the  pin  the  new 
crown  may  be  equipped  with  a  tube  of  the  same  bore  as  the 
trephine,  instead  of  a  pin.  A  crown  thus  fitted  is  strong 
and  can  be  cemented  very  satisfactorily. — Thos.  J.  Mc- 
Gernon,  Dental  Hints. 

Fitting  a  Band. — To  obtain  the  best  results  the  gingivae 
should  be  temporarily  dilated  and  receded  before  prepar- 
ing the  tooth  to  receive  a  band.  This  can  be  readily 
accomplished  by  twisting  absorbent  cotton  on  a  waxed 
ligature  and  tying  it  around  the  tooth  against  the  gingivae, 
the  day  before  operating. — R.  I.  Wenker,  Dental  Review. 

To  Remove  a  Cemented  Crown-post. — With  a  tiny  point 
drill  along  one  side  of  the  post  to  as  near  the  end  as  possible, 
carefully  avoiding  any  danger  of  perforation.  Next  insert 
spiral  broach  in  the  drill-hole  and  literally  saw  away  the 
cement  from  around  the  post.  It  is  surprising  with  what 
facility  a  cemented  post  can  be  removed  in  this  manner. — 
H.  B.  TiLESTON,  Dental  Summary. 

Removable  Facings. — Back  an  ordinary  facing  having 
pins,  one  above  the  other,  with  gold,  30  gauge,  and  bend  the 
pins  down  tightly.  Raise  the  gold  on  either  side  of  the  pins 
to  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  and  fill  in  the  V-shape  with 
solder.  Finish  to  desired  thickness,  burnish  a  piece  of  pure 
gold  to  the  backing,  and  stiffen  with  solder.  Can  be  used 
same  as  Mason  tooth. — A.  E.  Peck,  Dental  Review. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  397 

Adaptation  of  Crown  to  Root. — In  the  adaptation  of  a 
crown  it  is  of  vital  importance  that  continuity  of  crown  and 
root  be  obtained.  The  projection  of  either  crown  or  root, 
forming  an  irregular  surface,  will  act  as  a  mechanical 
irritant  to  the  gum  tissues,  affording  at  the  same  time  lodg- 
ment for  foreign  matter,  eventually  establishing  an  unsani- 
tary condition. — F.  Ewing  Roach,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Bridge  Abutments. — If  the  tooth  which  is  to  serve  as 
abutment  is  much  tipped  in  position,  instead  of  cutting 
away  correct  the  malposition  of  the  tooth,  as  is  done  in 
regulating,  bringing  it  into  an  upright  position,  thus  avoid- 
ing excessive  cutting  and  consequent  danger  to  pulp 
vitality.  The  bridge,  when  inserted,  will  hold  the  tooth  in 
position. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Stomatologist. 

Repairing  Hole  in  Gold  Crown. — If,  in  the  finishing 
process,  a  hole  is  made  in  a  gold  crown,  paint  the  outside 
with  a  thin  mixture  of  whiting,  except  around  the  hole. 
Plug  the  hole  with  gold-foil,  touch  it  with  a  drop  of  borax 
water,  and  put  a  bit  of  gold  solder  inside.  Fuse  with  blow- 
pipe, and  success  will  be  obtained. — E.  A.  Randall,  Do- 
minion Dental  Journal. 

Impressions  in  Crown-work. — For  taking  an  impression 
of  a  stump  prepared  for  a  crown,  a  shell  such  as  is  used 
for  a  seamless  crown,  and  which  can  be  placed  between  the 
stump  and  the  adjoining  teeth,  is  very  convenient.  Shape 
it  to  fit  the  gum  on  the  labial  and  lingual  sides  and  take 
the  impression  with  white  sheet  gutta-percha  well  warmed. 
— C.  H.  WoRBOGS,  Dental  Digest. 

Crown  Paste. — If  you  wish  to  lay  up  comfort  for  the 
future  and  would  avoid  one  of  the  pitfalls  of  the  whole 
science,  discard  every  material  for  posts  except  platinized 
gold  or  platino-iridium.  You  may  be  sure  that  all  others 
will  stretch  or  bend  or  corrode  or  do  anything  they  should 
not  do,  and  for  that  sin  of  small  economy  you  will  pay 
dearly. — Geo,  F.  Grant,  International  Dental  Journal. 


398  Practical  Dentistry. 

Crowning  Frail  Roots. — After  thorough  cleansing  and 
the  removal  of  as  much  decayed  dentin  as  is  deemed  safe, 
insert  a  gutta-percha  cone  at  the  apex;  then  heat  a  piece 
of  wire,  dip  it  in  wax  and  press  home  with  the  gutta- 
percha and  fill  the  canal  with  amalgam.  At  the  next  sitting 
remove  the  wire,  enlarge  the  opening  for  the  reception  of 
a  post  and  adjust  a  crown. — N.  M.  Chitterling,  Items  of 
Interest. 

To  Prevent  Adhesion  of  Cement  Under  Bridges. — To 

avoid  the  danger  of  getting  cement  under  the  saddle  of 
a  bridge,  cover  all  portions  where  'it  is  not  desired  to 
have  the  cement  stick,  with  gum  acacia  dissolved  in  water. 
If  cement  goes  where  it  is  not  wanted  the  gum  will  dis- 
solve from  underneath  and  the  cement  will  not  stick. — 
Geo.  W.  Whitfield,  Dental  Review. 

An  Amalgam  Crown. — Having  a  choice  of  plastic  mod- 
els of  crowns  of  natural  teeth,  select  one  of  correct  size  and 
shape,  burnish  quick-setting  amalgam  to  the  side  of  the 
model,  leaving  the  centre  hollow.  When  the  amalgam  has 
set  it  is  polished,  and  you  have  a  hollow  amalgam  crown 
which  may  be  set  upon  a  badly  decayed  root  with  quick- 
setting  amalgam. — Henry  Barnes,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

Broken  Pin  in  Root. — Choose  a  trephine  into  the  hollow 
of  which  the  fractured  pin  will  fit,  and  with  engine  carry  it 
as  far  up  as  desired.  Fit  into  the  groove  thus  made  around 
the  pin  a  tube  of  English  dental  alloy  and  solder  to  a  cap 
and  band  as  for  a  Richmond  crown.  A  tube  even  but  one- 
eighth  inch  long  gives  great  stability,  the  tube,  band,  and 
cap  giving  triple  grip. — John  Girdwood,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Removal  of  Broken  Crowns  Set  with  Cement. — Zinc 
phosphate  cement,  around  the  pins  of  broken  porcelain 
crowns,  can  be  disintegrated  by  the  application  of  ammonia 
water.  The  phosphoric  acid  leaves  its  combination  with 
the  zinc,  uniting  with  the  ammonia,  and  the  compound  falls 
apart. — E.  C.  Kirk,  International  Dental  Journal. 


Croivn-  and  Bridge-Work.  399 

Replacing  a  Broken  Logan  Crown. — When  the  porce- 
lain of  a  Logan  crown  has  broken  away,  leaving  the  post 
firmly  fixed  in  the  root,  a  Bonwill  crown  may  often  be  made 
to  serve  in  replacing  the  porcelain,  trimming  down  the 
Logan  post  and  fixing  to  it  the  post  of  the  Bonwill  crown. — 
Wm.  Hern_,  Journal  British  Dental  Association. 

Aseptic  Cement  for  Setting  Crowns. — It  has  been  my 
habit  for  years  to  add  to  the  cement  powder,  before  mixing, 
about  one-tenth  part  by  bulk  of  hydronapthol  powder.  This 
keeps  the  cement  aseptic,  thereby  preventing  odor,  and  it 
does  not  affect  the  strength  of  the  cement  in  the  slightest. 
— John  Girdwood,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Fitting  logan  Crowns. — Grind  root  below  level  of  gum 
all  around ;  enlarge  canal  to  receive  Logan  pin ;  insert  tem- 
porary pin  long  enough  to  reach  to  occlusal  edges  of  adjoin- 
ing teeth;  take  plaster  impression,  withdrawing  pin  with 
plaster.  Run  Mellotte's  metal  model,  withdraw  pin;  grind 
the  Logan  crown  to  fit  this  metal  model. — C.  J.  Sowle, 
Dental  Review. 

Molar  Crown  Restoration. — Anchor  pins  in  the  roots; 
pass  a  band  of  soft  steel  or  gutta-percha,  about  30-gauge, 
around  the  stump  and  draw  the  ends  tightly  together  with 
flat-nosed  pHers;  remove  and  solder;  contour  and  trim  to 
occlusion.  Replace  band  and  fill  with  alloy  to  contour.  At 
a  subsequent  sitting  give  final  contour  and  finish. — L.  P. 
Hall,  Dental  Digest. 

Investment  Material  for  Bridge-work. — An  investment 
material  that  will  not  check  or  break  is  made  from  asbestos 
rope  (to  be  had  from  any  dealer  in  plumbers'  supplies). 
Pick  it  to  pieces  and  place  in  the  water  to  which  plaster 
of  paris  is  to  be  added.  This  dries  very  quickly,  will 
not  change  form,  and  does  not  require  to  be  wired  or 
banded. — A,  G.  Smith,  Dental  Review. 


400  Practical  Dentistry. 

Gold  Crowns. — In  crown-work  an  alloy  of  gold  and 
platinum — twenty-two  pure  gold  and  two  of  platinum — is 
preferable.  It  is  quite  pliable,  a  strong  metal,  and  does  not 
show  so  much  in  the  mouth.  It  can  be  soldered  with  pure 
gold,  is  dense,  and  takes  a  good  polish. — William  True- 
man,  Iiitcniatioiial  Dental  Journal. 

For  Setting  Crowns. — Mix,  with  heat  and  careful  work- 
ing, one  part  of  gutta-percha  and  three  parts  of  vermilion. 
For  setting  porcelain  crowns  with  pin  extending  into  the 
root-canal,  or  gold  crown  and  cap,  this  will  be  found  thor- 
oughly resistant  to  the  action  of  the  fluids  of  the  mouth. — 
W.  H.  Rollins,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Painless  Removal  of  Tooth  Enamel. — Place  a  short  piece 
of  rubber  tubing,  fitting  tightly  around  the  tooth,  well  up 
on  the  gum,  and  leave  it  overnight  so  that  the  gum  will 
be  pressed  back.  The  enamel  may  then  be  removed  quite 
painlessly  and  without  causing  the  gum  to  bleed. — H. 
Hartman,   Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Setting  Crowns  with  Gutta-percha. — Fit  gutta-percha 
on  the  post  and  in  the  root,  and  get  proper  adaptation  of 
crown.  Dry  the  root  and  paint  canal  with  cajeput  or  euca- 
lyptus ;  dry  a  little  and  paint  again  with  chloro-percha. 
Paint  gutta-percha  on  post  with  chloro-percha;  warm  and 
drive  home. — W.  H.  Taggart,  Dental  Reznew. 

The  Logan  Crown. — For  the  majority  of  cases  the 
Logan  is  the  best  form  of  porcelain  crown,  and  by  burnish- 
ing the  plate  to  a  perfect  joint  to  the  end  of  the  root,  and 
filling  in  porcelain  between,  we  have  one  of  the  very  best 
crowns  that  can  be  made. — C.  L.  Hungerford,  Western 
Dental  Journal. 

Gold  Crowns. — Stamp  cusps  of  thin  soft  platinum,  trim 
to  size  and  articulate.  Melt  full  of  gold  scrap  of  any  desired 
grade.  The  platinum  color  will  disappear,  while  the  shape 
of  the  cusps  remains  intact.  If  any  platinum  appears  to  be 
exposed,  remove  in  the  finishing  process. — R.  E.  Sparks, 
Dominion  Den.  Jour. 


Crozun-  and  Bridge-Work.  401 

Success  in  Crown-work. — Utility  and  permanent  success 
depend  mainly  on  two  things :  ( i )  the  perfection  of  the 
joint  with  the  root — that  is,  the  fit  of  the  band  and  the 
perfect  exclusion  of  moisture  during  cementation;  (2) 
the  perfection  of  continuity — that  is,  its  lateral  contact  with 
its  neighbors. — J.  H.  Babcock,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Bridge-work  Without  Display  of  Gold  or  Pulp  Devital- 
ization in  Anchorage  Teeth. — An  ordinary  plate  facing  is 
backed  in  the  usual  way,  and  soldered  to  an  iridium,  plati- 
num wire  previously  bent  and  fitted  into  slots  in  the  adjoin- 
ing teeth.  Set  in  cement,  and  strengthen  by  building  over 
the  anchorage  wires  with  cohesive  gold. — Arthur  G. 
Smith,  Dental  Review. 

Gutta-Percha  for  Mounting  Bridgework. — The  use  of 

gutta-percha  for  mounting  fixed  bridgework  is  becoming 
more  and  more  general  in  proportion  as  its  advantages  are 
recognized  and  its  manipulation  mastered,  the  advantage 
offered  lying  mainly  in  the  comparative  ease  with  which  the 
bridge  may  be  removed  in  the  event  of  necessity,  and  with- 
out injury  to  the  abutments. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Items  of 
Interest. 

An  Emergency  Crown, — Cut  from  German  silver  wire 
a  suitable  length  for  the  post.  File  one  end  to  a  point,  and 
flatten  the  other  end,  notching  it  to  go  between  the  pins  of 
a  rubber  tooth.  Place  in  position  on  the  prepared  root  and 
press  softened  wax  around  post,  pins,  and  end  of  root.  Re- 
move carefully,  invest,  and  complete  with  fusible  metal. — L. 
C.  JoNES^  Dental  Cosmos. 

"Taking  the  Bite"  for  Crowns  or  Bridges. — For  the  pur- 
pose of  taking  bites  for  crown  and  bridge  work,  etc.,  model- 
ing compound  fills  an  important  place,  as  it  is  easy  to  manip- 
ulate, sets  sufficiently  hard  to  prevent  its  being  readily  bent, 
and  does  not  break  when  forced  to  a  thin  edge  as  does 
plaster. — J.  F.  Wessels,  Dental  Brief. 


402  Practical  Dentistry. 

Backing  Richmond  Crowns. — Why  should  such  heavy 
backings  be  used?  If  soft  platinum — about  i/iooo,  as  used 
in  inlay  work — be  burnished  nicely  around  all  the  edges 
after  soldering  and  finishing  the  case,  we  get  splendid  mar- 
gins, and  the  danger  of  checking  is  almost  eliminated. — J, 
P.  NiCHOL,  International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Seamless  Cap. — It  is  possible  with  seamless  meth- 
ods to  make  a  cap  which  needs  no  trimming  or  fitting  in 
the  mouth,  but  to  do  this  the  root  must  be  carefully  prepared 
with  all  overhanging  enamel  removed.  Then  fit  and  contour 
a  copper  band,  using  copper  because  easier  to  work  than 
gold. — J.  Austin  Bucknell,  Dental  Era. 

To  Give  a  Satin  Finish  to  Gold  Crowns. — After  the 
crown  has  been  polished,  gold-plate  it — not  to  hide  any 
defect  which  there  may  be  in  the  case,  for  plating  would 
only  render  them  more  conspicuous,  but  to  give  a  smooth, 
satin  finish  impossible  to  obtain  by  other  means. — John 
Egbert  Nyman,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Soreness  of  Gingivae  after  Crown  Setting. — If  the  sore- 
ness is  persistent  slip  over  the  tooth  a  ring  cut  from  rubber 
tubing.  Remove  carefully  the  next  day  and  spray  the  parts 
with  tepid  water  and  you  will  in  all  probability  find  a  mi- 
nute nodule  of  cement.  Remove  and  the  gum  will  rapidly 
heal. — B.  J.  Cigrand,  Dental  Revieiv. 

Gutta-percha  in  Bridge-work. — Make  it  a  rule,  when 
making  a  fixed  bridge,  to  set  it  if  possible  with  gutta-percha 
cement  and  engage  with  the  patient  to  come  back  two  or 
three  times  a  year  to  take  ofif  the  bridge  and  reset  it.  The 
patient  is  benefited  thereby  more  than  we  can  tell. — Dr. 
Thompson,  Dental  Register. 

Crown  "Work:  Platinum  Bands. — One  point  I  wish  to 
bring  out  is  the  tolerance  of  the  gimis  to  platinum  bands 
and  bridges.  The  gums  do  not  recede  but,  on  the  contrary, 
embrace  the  band  and  are  perfect  in  color  and  cleanness. — 
Harry  F.  Hamilton,  International  Dental  Journal. 


Crozvn-  and  Bridge-Work.  403 

Bridge  Work  and  Rigg's  Disease. — It  is  astonishing  how 
firmly  a  few  loose  roots  will  support  a  bridge.  A  bridge 
constructed  with  special  reference  to  the  diseased  roots  tends 
to  tighten  them,  and  by  holding  the  teeth  rigid  does  much  to 
eradicate  the  disease. — Howard  T.  Stewart,  M^ississippi 
Dental  Association,  1900. 

Removing  a  Post  from  Root-canal. — In  drilling  out  a 
post  from  a  canal  it  is  about  as  safe  to  proceed  slowly  and 
use  up  a  few  burs  in  cutting  the  pin  itself,  rather  than  drill 
around  it  to  loosen  it;  there  is  too  much  danger  of  per- 
foration in  the  latter  procedure. — Chas.  E.  Parkhurst,  In- 
ternational Dental  Journal. 

Soldering  Gold  Crowns. — Make  a  saturated  solution  of 
borax  by  boiling  until  no  more  will  dissolve.  When  the 
solder  is  wanted  to  flow,  moisten  with  this  solution,  and  it 
will  run  like  a  flash.  Mix  yellow  ochre  to  a  creamy  con- 
sistency for  painting  the  parts  to  be  protected  from  solder. — 
John  T.  Usher,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Seamless  Crowns. — In  the  construction  of  seamless 
crowns  the  use  of  cement  is  preferable  to  plaster  for  the 
model,  as  it  is  stronger  and  can  be  polished  after  it  is  carved. 
A  fine  vent-hole  put  through  the  model  assures  a  perfect  cast 
when  it  is  dipped  into  the  hot  metal. — C.  H.  Warboys,  Den- 
tal Register. 

Shaping  Root  for  Crowning. — Never  use  disks  upon 
the  root,  anywhere  below  the  gum  margin,  on  account  of  the 
danger  of  having  grit  in  the  tissues  surrounding  the  root. 
This  is  the  cause  of  much  of  the  subacute  gingivitis  found 
about  teeth  that  have  been  crowned. — ^John  E.  Nyman, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Fitting  Bands  or  Caps. — When  decay  extends  below 
the  gum  margin,  pack  a  little  cotton  saturated  with  chloro- 
percha  in  the  portion  below  the  gum.  The  band  can  sub- 
sequently be  easily  and  accurately  fitted,  and  you  can  see 
your  work. — C,  O.  Hood,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


404  Practical  Dentistry. 

Enameling  Gold  Caps. — Use  the  Jenkins  porcelain  to 
enamel  gold  caps ;  it  is  easily  flowed  over  the  gold.  It 
is  necessary  to  make  holes  in  the  gold  crown ;  split  the 
crown,  and  the  porcelain  flows  right  along,  just  like  plaster 
through  a  lath  partition. — F.  K.  Ledyard,  Pacific  Dental 
Gazette. 

Crowning  Live  Teeth. — There  is  only  one  time  when  it 
is  permissible  or  excusable  to  crown  without  destruction  of 
the  pulp.  That  is  in  old  age.  when  there  is  a  receded  pulp 
and  the  tooth  is  consequently  not  sensitive  or  liable  to  death 
from  other  causes. — J.  P.  Root,  JVcstcrn  Dental  Journal. 

Bending  Pins. — A  good  many  porcelains  are  broken  by 
using  the  burnisher  in  bending  down  the  pins.  If  you  take 
the  pin-roughening  pliers  and  mash  the  pin  it  is  easy  to  bend 
it  down  without  crowding  too  hard  against  the  facing. — 
J.  P.  XiCHOL,  International  Dental  Jour)ial. 

Replacing  a  Broken  Crown. — When  it  is  impracticable 
to  remove  the  pin  from  the  root,  run  a  drill  or  trephine 
around  the  pin,  make  a  tube  of  platinum  to  fit  the  post 
and  solder  to  cap  as  for  a  Richmond  crown,  proceeding 
as  for  any  other  crown. — E.  E.  Cruzen,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Swaging  Platimim  Saddle  for  Porcelain  Bridge. — In 
case  an  absolutely  perfect  adjustment  does  not  result,  heat 
the  counter-die  as  warm  as  can  be  held  in  the  hand,  and 
place  in  counter  a  piece  of  base-plate  gutta-percha  and 
swage  again;  the  saddle  will  fit  perfectly. — W.  H.  Taggart, 
Dental  Revien'. 

Setting  Crowns. — In  setting  crowns  if,  before  the 
cement  is  used,  the  stump  is  brushed  over  with  a  little  copa- 
line  varnish,  it  will  not  make  any  difference  in  the  setting 
of  the  cement  and  will  prevent  any  bad  action  of  the  acid 
or  arsenic  that  might  be  in  the  cement. — H.  J.  Moore.  Den- 
tal Review. 


Crozi'H-  and  Bridge-Wor'k.  405 

No.  120  Rolled  Gold  in  Crown-  and  Bridge-work. — 
Always  use  No.  120  rolled  gold  for  backing-  up  teeth,  for 
the  base  of  crown,  for  stamping  up  cusps,  and  for  the  base 
of  cast  fillings  or  hood  abutments. — C.  L.  x\lexander,  Den- 
tal World. 

Failures  in  Bridge-work. — Faulty  articulation  will 
oftentimes  play  havoc  Avith  what  might  otherwise  have  been 
a  perfect  piece  of  work.  The  occlusion  with  the  teeth  in 
the  opposing  jaw^  has  ever}1;hing  to  do  with  the  success  of 
bridge-work,  and  nothing  short  of  perfection  in  this  par- 
ticular will  answer. — F.  E.  Logax,  Dental  Register. 

Mounting  Crowns  and  Bridges.^Give  the  preference 
to  cement,  but  always  observe  the  precaution  of  coating 
the  inside  of  crowns  and  the  post  with  a  thin  film  of  chloro- 
percha  or  gum  shellac  before  the  cement,  to  facilitate  re- 
moval in  case  of  necessity. — H.  J.  Goslee,  Dental  Register. 

Crowning  Teeth.  With.  Live  Pulps. — Painting  the  crown 
with  several  coats  of  shellac  before  putting  on  a  cap  with 
cement  lessens  the  liability  to  death  of  the  pulp.  The  shel- 
lac also  helps  to  hold  the  cement. — J.  B.  Hodgkin^  Dental 
Digest. 

Cleaning  Gold  Crown  Bridges  or  Eegulating  Appli- 
ances after  Removal  from  the  Mouth. — Place  them  for  a 
short  time  in  a  saturated  solution  of  sodium  dioxid.  This 
will  destroy  the  offensive  accumulations  usually  present  and 
render  them  aseptic  and  easy  to  polish. — W.  C.  Smith, 
Dental  Review. 

Bridge-work. — Study  carefully  the  natural  in  order  to 
imitate  most  successfully.  Select  as  the  goal  as  close  an 
approximation  as  possible  to  that  given  by  the  donor  of 
"every  good  and  perfect  gift" — namely,  a  perfectly  natural 
artificial  occlusion. — R.  B.  Howell,  Dental  Register 


4o6  Practical  Dentistry. 

Trimming  Roots  for  Crowns. — To  control  bleeding 
tincture  of  iodin  is  preferred,  for  it  penetrates  deeply  and 
contracts  the  vessels,  while  some  agents  advised  only  coagu- 
late the  blood  at  the  surface. — H.  C.  Meriam,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

To  Lessen  the  Danger  of  Cracking  Porcelain  Facings. — 

Coat  the  teeth  with  shellac.  Under  high  temperature  this 
forms  a  protecting  film  of  carbon  on  the  facing  and  lessens 
the  danger  of  cracking. — J.  E.  Nyhan,  Dental  Review. 

Gutt-percha  for  Setting  Crowns. — Why  not  set  all 
crowns  with  gutta-percha?  If  it  is  good  for  bridges,  it 
must  be  better  for  crowns.  The  red  base-plate  seems  to  act 
best. — Dental  Reznew. 

Selection  of  Porcelain  Facings. — You  will  often  get 
more  artistic  results  if  you  match  in  shade  the  same  tooth  on 
the  other  side  of  the  mouth,  than  if  you  attempt  to  match 
the  adjacent  teeth. — John  E.  Nyman,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Relieving  Pain  After  Setting  a  Crown  or  Bridge. — The 
pain  caused  by  setting  a  crown  or  bridge  may  be  alleviated 
almost  instantly  by  the  free  application  of  campho-phenique 
upon  the  gum. — H.  A.  Cross,  Dental  Review. 

Impression  of  Root  End. — Place  a  projecting  wooden 
peg  in  the  c?.nal  and  pack  gutta-percha  around  it,  forcing 
the  gum  out  of  the  way.  The  pin  will  come  away  with  the 
impression. — R.  W.  Starr,  American  Dentist. 

Setting  Crowns. — Although  a  little  more  difficult,  it  will 
be  found  much  more  satisfactory  in  the  end  if  crowns  are 
set  with  gutta-percha  instead  of  cement. — C.  T.  Barker, 
International  Den.  Journal. 

A  Cement  Syringe  to  be  Used  in  Setting  Crowns  and 
Bridges. — After  mixing  the  cement  to  the  right  consist- 
ency, place  in  syringe  and  eject  into  the  canal. — H.  L. 
Crittenden,  Dental  Reviw. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  407 

An  Emergency  Crown. — The  old  style  pivot  tooth  can 
be  quickly  placed  in  position  and  made  remarkably  secure 
by  using  cement  in  the  crown  and  root,  observing  the  pre- 
caution to  keep  the  wood  perfectly  dry  in  order  to  insure 
union  with  the  cement. — Den.  Weekly. 

To  Bend  a  Crown-post. — Grasp  the  post  with  a  pair  of 
crown-contouring  pliers.  The  convex  jaw  of  the  pliers 
forces  a  portion  of  the  post  into  the  concave  jaw,  thus  bend- 
ing it  without  strain  on  the  crown, — R.  W.  Starr. 

The  Bandless  Crown. — If  in  fitting  the  bandless  porce- 
lain crown  to  the  root,  the  same  care  is  taken  as  in  fitting 
a  band,  the  operator  can  reproduce  the  natural  crown  of 
the  tooth  in  every  way,  a  crown  as  near  perfect  as  any 
crown  can  be. — U.  M.  Richardson,  Dental  Review. 

Cementing  on  Bands  and  Crowns. — Dry  the  tooth  and 
paint  with  shellac  varnish  before  applying  the  cement.  This 
gives  durable  adhesion,  and  should  the  cement  dissolve  the 
shellac  will  protect  the  tooth  and  prevent  decay  under  the 
band. — W.  G.  Lance,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Polishing  a  Gold  Crown. — To  prevent  marring  a  gold 
crown  when  polishing,  fill  it  with  modeling  compound,  and 
while  it  is  still  soft  insert  the  end  of  a  stick  or  instrument 
handle  into  it.     When  finished,  soften  the  composition  and 

remove. — Dental  Hints. 

To  Stiffen  a  Platinum  Pin. — Platinum  and  platinoiri- 
dium  at  times  are  too  weak  for  posts,  whether  plain  or 
threaded.  To  strengthen  and  stiffen  either,  flow  over  the 
entire  surface  a  thin  layer  of  18  or  20  carat  gold  plate  or 
solder. — R.  W.  Starr. 

Crown  Pins. — We  know  that  the  farther  into  the  ground 
a  fence  post  is  placed  the  more  secure  it  is.  So  also,  the 
deeper  into  the  root  we  put  the  pin,  the  more  secure  becomes 
the  attachment,  and  the  whole  root  bears  the  shock  of  any 
strain. — R.  L.  Simpson,  Dental  Cosmos. 


4o8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Porcelain  Crowns. — A  band  set  in  a  groove,  cut  in  the 
face  of  the  root,  gives  the  strength  of  a  collar,  without  ex- 
posure of  gold,  irritation  of  tissues,  or  shaping  up  of  root, 
as  in  the  reception  of  an  outside  band. — Wm.  Ernest 
Walker,  S.  Br.  A'tl.  Den.  Asso. 

Measuring  Root-canals. — The  round  rubber  zcaste  made 
by  using  the  punch  on  the  rubber-dam,  if  pierced  by  a 
broach,  can  be  readily  adjusted  to  any  length,  and  makes 
a  neat  little  marker. — M.  A.  Mason,  Indiana  Den.  Jour. 

Setting  Logan  Crowns. — Gilbert's  antiseptic  balsam  var- 
nish applied  to  a  Logan  crown,  and  also  to  the  stump  of  the 
root  before  setting  the  crown,  greatly  assists  in  its  retention. 
— H.  B.  HiNMAN,  Ohio  Journal. 

Flaws  in  Bridge  Soldering. — When  a  flaw  occurs  dust 
a  particle  of  flux,  clean  out  the  depression  with  an  inverted 
cone  bur,  and  fill  with  crystal  gold. — A.  W.  Thornton, 
Dental  Revieiv. 

Spraying  the  Gum. — Try  spraying  the  gums  with  ethyl 
chloride  around  the  root  of  a  tooth  that  you  are  preparing 
for  a  crown. — R.  Walter  Starr. 

Removable  "Fixed  Bridges." — If  the  inside  of  all  caps 
and  crowns  is  painted  with  chloro-percha,  removal  in  case  of 
accident  is  greatly  facilitated. — Dr.  Richards,  Dental  Re- 
view. 

Sealing-wax  in  Crown-work. — Sanford's  "No.  2  Red 
American  Express"  possesses  all  the  requirements  of  a  seal- 
ing-wax suitable  for  crown-work. — O.  H.  Simpson,  West- 
ern Dental  Journal. 

Soldering  Bridge-work. — Do  not  use  low-grade  solder 
on  a  crown  or  bridge.  It  contracts,  pits,  oxidizes,  and  makes 
weak  construction. — W.  Spaulding,  Dental  Record. 

A  Deodorizer. — To  destroy  the  unpleasant  odors  from 
an  old  crown  or  bridge,  dip  them  in  electrozone ;  they  will 
be  deodorized  immediately. — Dental  Reviezv. 


Crown-  and  Bridge-Work.  409 

Crowning  Badly  Decayed  Roots. — Secure  anchorage  in 
the  root  by  means  of  a  screw  post ;  build  amalgam  around  it 
and  restore  the  shape  of  the  root.  When  hard,  polish  and 
then  fit  the  band  as  usual. — Dr.  Cooke^  International. 

A  Temporary  Crown. — Solder  a  wire  to  an  ordinary 
rubber  tooth.  Contour  and  retain  the  crown  with  gutta- 
percha.— J.  H.  Kennerly,  Dental  Digest. 

27 


CHAPTER  III 

(PART    II) 


ORTHODONTIA 


Simplified  Construction  of  Regulating  Plates. — Make  the 
plate  a  little  thicker  than  usual,  and  after  vulcanizing  attach 
the  springs,  wires,  levers,  etc.,  by  drilling  two  holes  from 
one-fourth  to  one-half  inch  apart,  and  with  a  bur  make  a 
groove  on  the  palatal  side  between  the  holes  of  sufficient 
depth  to  receive  the  wire  so  that  the  surface  will  be  level 
when  the  wire  is  in  place.  Thread  the  end  of  the  wire 
through  one  hole  and  back  through  the  other,  and  with  a 
pin-hole  punch  compress  the  wire  until  the  angles  firmly 
grip  the  plate ;  thus  rendering  it  a  fixture.  By  drilling  new 
holes  and  inserting  new  springs,  etc.,  one  plate  will  be  suffi- 
cient to  meet  all  exigencies  until  the  deformity  is  corrected, 
when  the  retaining  wire  may  be  adapted  in  the  same  way. — 
E.  Brandon  White,  Dental  Review. 

To  Rotate  a  Tooth  with  Silk  Thread. — The  portion  of 
thread  that  forms  the  noose  to  grip  the  tooth  must  not  be 
waxed;  if  waxed  it  will  slip  its  hold.  Before  applying, 
double  the  thread,  cover  about  half  an  inch  at  the  fold  with 
thumb  and  forefinger,  and  wax  from  this  portion  out  to  the 
free  ends.  Put  a  double  noose  of  the  unwaxed  portion  of 
the  silk  around  the  tooth  to  be  rotated  and  tie — first  a 
surgeon's  and  then  a  granny  knot,  drawing  as  tightly  as 
possible.  Coil  the  threads  two  or  three  times  around  the 
root  in  the  direction  the  tooth  is  to  be  rotated,  stretching  the 
thread  till  it  will  yield  no  more,  and  make  your  fastenings. — 
W.  J.  Younger. 

411 


412  Practical  Dentistry. 

Orthodontia :  Dia^osis. — A  proper  diagnosis  of  each 
case  requires  not  only  a  definite  appointment  for  examina- 
tion of  the  mouth,  but  the  taking  of  impressions  at  that  sit- 
ting, and  postponement  of  decision  as  to  plan  to  be  followed 
until  the  casts  are  studied.  The  patient  should  then  be  seen 
again,  and  the  decision  arrived  at  from  the  study  of  the 
casts  tested  by  a  further  study  of  the  face. — S.  E.  Daven- 
port, International  Dental  Journal. 

A  Factor  in  Failures  in  Tooth  Regulation. — The  part 
played  by  the  lower  anterior  teeth  is  an  important  factor  in 
the  regulation  of  protruding  superior  teeth.  Failure  to  give 
the  former  due  consideration  is  often  the  cause  of  failure  to 
secure  permanent  good  results.  If  entirely  freed  from  oc- 
clusion, the  teeth  will  be  more  likely  to  stay  where  they  are 
put.  The  lower  incisors  and  cuspids  will  often  have  to  be 
shortened,  drawn  back,  or  even  forced  back  into  the  alveolar 
process,  or  they  ma}-  force  the  superior  teeth  forward  again. 
— H.  \\'.  :Morgax.  ' 

The  Use  of  Silk  Thread  in  Regulating. — There  is  a 
popular  fallacy  extant  that  silk  thread,  in  common  with  other 
threads,  tightens  with  moisture,  but  this  is  a  mistake,  for 
moisture  does  not  contract  silk.  The  silk  must,  at  the 
moment  of  applying,  be  stretched  till  it  will  yield  no  more; 
then  tie  quickly.  It  is  the  contractility  of  the  thread  after 
being  stretched  that  gives  it  its  wonderful  power.  The  silk 
should  be  well  waxed ;  this  increases  its  textile  strength  by 
uniting  the  minute  fibers  on  the  sides  of  the  filament. — A\\  J. 
Younger. 

Regulating  Without  Appliances. — Where  the  bicuspids 
are  to  be  moved  forward,  or  the  centrals  or  laterals  spread, 
open  slightly  with  separator  and  place  cement  between  the 
teeth;  when  this  has  hardened  remove  the  separator  and 
leave  the  cement  in  situ  for  several  days.  Repeat  as  often 
as  necessary  until  the  teeth  attain  their  proper  places.  This 
is  not  expensive  to  the  patient  and  causes  less  annoyance 
than  regulating  appliances. — W.  H.  Reabin. 


Orthodontia.  413 

Preventive  Treatment  in  Orthodontic  Practice. — At  the 
fourth  of  fifth  years  of  age  you  can  very  often  see  that  you 
will  have  malocclusion  ;  why  not  take  steps  to  prevent  it  ?  It 
is  better  to  have  the  teeth  erupt  in  their  proper  positions 
than  to  push,  pull  or  shove  them  into  position  after  they  have 
taken  an  abnormal  one.  If  at  four  and  a  half  or  five  years 
there  are  no  spaces  between  the  anterior  teeth  there  will  not 
be  room  for  the  permanent  incisors.  A  little  stimulation  at 
that  age,  simply  in  the  lower  arch,  will  widen  both  the  lower 
and  the  upper  if  the  upper  teeth  have  well-defined  cusps. — 
I.  Lowe  Young,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Prevention  of  Irregularities. — The  proper  thing  to  do 
is  to  start  far  enough  back  to  prevent  irregularities.  As 
soon  as  the  first  permanent  molars  and  the  permanent  cen- 
tral incisors  are  in  place  every  effort  should  be  directed 
toward  keeping  them  in  their  proper  places  To  this  end 
the  intervening  deciduous  teeth  should  be  kept  in  their 
respective  places  until  nature  removes  them  to  make  room 
for  their  successors.  Watch  them;  fill  them  if  necessary, 
but  do  not  allow  them  to  be  removed  prematurely.  If  this 
is  done  there  will  be,  as  a  rule,  no  irregularities  in  the 
permanent  teeth. — Geo.  B.  Clement. 

A  New  Retaining  Appliance. — A  simple  retaining  ap- 
pliance which  combines  the  requirements  of  security,  clean- 
liness and  comfort,  is  the  device  of  Dr.  George  C.  Ains- 
worth.  It  consists  of  anchor  bands  with  small  tubes  at- 
tached to  the  buccal  sides,  into  which  are  inserted  the  ends 
of  a  labial  wire  bent  at  right  angles  to  itself,  and  which  is 
continuous  around  the  arch,  thus  holding  all  the  teeth  that 
have  been  moved  out,  while  the  labial  wnre  holds  the  front 
teeth  in.  It  is  securely  cemented  in  and  is  worn  without 
discomfort,  while  the  labial  wire  is  removable  at  will,  being 
readily  readjusted  by  the  patient. — International  Dental 
Journal. 


414  Practical  Dentistry. 

Jumping  the  Bite. — An  inclined  plane  for  jumping  the 
bite  and  fixing  the  occlusion,  which  is  automatic  in  its  action, 
requiring  no  attention  from  patient  or  operator,  and  which 
is  both  cleanly  and  effective,  is  made  of  a  fairly  heavy  piece 
of  platinized  gold  plate  soldered  to  bands  of  seamless  tubing 
encircling  the  upper  central  incisors  and  firmly  cemented 
on,  with  a  round  lug  wire  resting  on  the  ends  of  the  laterals, 
the  gold  being  dressed  away  from  the  palatal  side  of  the  lat- 
erals as  much  as  possible. — Geo.  C.  Ainsworth,  Inter- 
national Dental  Journal. 

Orthodontia. — While  there  is  no  one  best  rule  for  regu- 
lating all  cases,  there  is  generally  one  best  way  of  accom- 
plishing the  highest  results  in  a  given  case.  The  highest  aim 
should  be  to  accomplish  not  only  the  greatest  possible  degree 
of  beauty  in  facial  form,  but  also  an  improvement  in  mental 
expression  through  the  form.  Movers  of  teeth  there  may  be 
many,  but  of  moulders  of  the  face,  to  the  highest  possible 
benefit,  there  are  not  so  many. — John  Natting  Farrar, 
Dental  Record. 

Loss  of  Deciduous  Teeth. — If  a  temporary  tooth  is  lost 
prematurely  through  decay  the  space  should  be  maintained 
until  the  permanent  tooth  erupts,  otherwise  the  teeth  that 
are  mesial  and  distal  to  this  tooth  will  migrate  until  they 
fill  the  space  partially  or  completely  and  there  will  be  no 
room  for  the  eruption  of  the  permanent  tooth  and  it  will 
either  erupt  in  malocclusion  or  remain  imbedded  in  the  al- 
veolar process. — T.  J.  Bradford,  Dental  Summary. 

Diagnosis  in  Orthodontia. — Diagnosis  is  of  equal  and,  if 
possible,  greater  importance  than  treatment,  for  it  must 
govern  each  and  every  step  that  follows.  On  diagnosis 
should  depend  each  hour  in  the  treatment,  and  each  ap- 
pliance used — its  form,  structure,  temper  and  tension,  even 
to  the  last  retainer.  On  the  result  of  diagnosis  must  de- 
pend, to  no  small  extent,  the  appearance  and  even  the  health 
of  the  patient  for  the  rest  of  his  life. — Edw.  H.  Angle, 
Items  of  Interest. 


Orthodontia.  415 

The  Countersunk  Nut  in  Orthodontia. — The  teeth  being 
banded  and  a  bar  soldered  on  the  outside  of  the  teeth,  a  hole 
is  drilled  through  the  bar  opposite  the  tooth  to  be  moved, 
and  counterbored  to  allow  the  nut  to  enter  flush  with  the 
face  of  the  bar.  A  bolt  is  then  soldered  to  the  band  around 
the  tooth  to  be  moved,  passing  through  the  hole  drilled  in 
the  bar,  and  the  nut  turned  on.  As  the  bolt  comes  through 
the  nut  by  the  movement  of  the  tooth,  the  end  is  ground 
down  smooth.  There  is  no  limit  to  its  use  except  the  ingen- 
uity of  the  operator. — W.  W.  Shryock,  Item<s  of  Interest. 

Regulation  Plates ;  the  Bradner  White  Method. — In  this 
method  of  construction  no  attachments  whatever  are  vulcan- 
ized into  the  plate,  the  latter  being  made  about  a  line  thicker 
than  where  springs,  wires,  screws,  etc.,  are  vulcanized  in. 
For  the  attachment  of  these,  holes  are  drilled  through  the 
plate  and  a  groove  made  on  the  lingual  side  to  receive  the 
protruding  ends  of  the  wires  which  are  bent  and  compressed 
until  the  angles  firmly  grip  the  place.  One  plate  with  a 
change  of  springs  is  usually  sufiicient  to  meet  the  exigencies 
of  any  case. — Dental  Reviezv. 

Tooth  Regnilation. — The  question  has  been  asked,  "How 
long  will  a  tooth  that  has  been  moved  from  its  original  posi- 
tion have  to  be  retained  in  its  new  position  before  it  will 
become  firm  and  remain  where  it  has  been  put?"  The 
answer  is :  As  soon  as  cusping  with  the  occluding  tooth  is 
well  established  the  moved  tooth  will  stay  where  it  is  put. 
This  implies  that  the  tooth  has  been  put  into  the  position 
designed  by  Nature  for  that  tooth;  otherwise  the  cusping 
which  should  hold  it  in  place  will  not  be  accurate. — E.  A. 
BoGUE,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Prevention  of  Irregularity. — When  deciduous  teeth  are 
lost  before  the  permanent  teeth  are  ready  to  erupt,  to  pre- 
vent the  adjacent  teeth  from  traveling,  or  tipping,  insert  a 
vulcanite  plate  to  occupy  the  space  of  the  lost  tooth,  cutting 
it  away  from  time  to  time  to  accommodate  the  erupting 
tooth. — Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


4i6  Practical  Dentistry. 

A  Case  in  Regulating. — In  a  case  in  which  a  lower  in- 
cisor was  considerably  within  the  arch,  without  sufficient 
space  between  the  teeth  to  allow  it  to  be  moved  forward 
into  place,  the  mal-placed  tooth  was  fitted  with  a  platinum 
cap,  cemented  to  the  tooth  and  a  little  porcelain  tooth  baked 
to  the  outside  of  it,  so  as  to  stand  in  line  between  the  other 
teeth.  Wedges  on  either  side  of  the  artificial  tooth  will 
push  the  adjoining  teeth  sideways  until  room  is  made  for 
the  mal-placed  tooth,  when  it  will  be  brought  forward  into 
position. — Dr.  Pury,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Malocclusion:  Why  Correct  Early? — There  are  many 
reasons  why  a  case  should  be  started  early.  Among  others, 
the  cartilaginous  condition  of  the  alveolar  process  causes  it 
to  yield  readily  to  pressure ;  the  sockets  of  the  teeth  are 
very  large  and  often  there  is  no  septum  of  bone  between  the 
alveoli.  There  is  little  or  no  pain  if  the  case  is  properly 
handled  at  an  early  age.  The  patient  will  not  be  so  sensi- 
tive about  the  looks  of  appliances,  nor  will  retainers  have 
to  be  worn  so  long. — T.  J.  Bradford,  Dental  Summary. 

Premonition  of  Irregularity. — When  a  child  reaches  the 
age  of  four  a  very  important  change  takes  place.  When 
everything  goes  on  regularly  and  the  blood  supply  is  good, 
there  should  be  quite  marked  separation  between  the  anterior 
teeth.  If  this  separation  does  not  take  place,  and  the  child 
does  not  lose  its  baby  face,  we  may  prophesy  future  deform- 
ity, and  should  study  the  case  carefully,  correcting  what  may 
be  wrong  in  nourishment,  exercise,  etc..  often  thus  avoiding 
mechanical  interference. — Eben  M.  Flagg,  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

Regulating  Cases:  Our  Small  Patients. — One  or  two 
visits  from  the  little  patient  is  best  before  putting  on  any 
appliances.  This  not  only  gives  the  operator  time  to  study 
the  case,  and  the  habits  of  the  patient,  but  aids  in  dispelling 
the  fear  that  usually  accompanies  a  patient  on  the  first  visit. 
To  dispel  fear  at  the  start  is  half  the  battle. — J.  N.  Mc- 
Dowell, American  Dental  Journal. 


Orthodontia.  417 

Impressions  in  Orthodontia. — The  impression  having 
been  removed  from  the  mouth  and  thoroughly  dried,  the 
small  pieces  are  united  to  the  larger  ones  by  a  cement  made 
of  celluloid  cut  with  equal  parts  ether  and  alcohol.  The 
larger  pieces  are  united  with  wax  outside  the  tray.  To 
obtain  a  smooth  model  the  impression  is  first  coated  with 
orange  shellac  varnish  which  should  penetrate  the  impres- 
sion deeply,  when  dry  followed  by  a  second  coat  of  thin 
shellac,  with  a  final  coat  of  sandarac  varnish. — B.  Abell, 
Dental  Register. 

Orthodontia:  The  Time  to  Begin  Treatment. — Correct 
and  early  diagnosis  and  treatment  begun  as  early  as  five 
years  will,  in  many  cases,  avoid  and  prevent  serious  cases 
that  in  later  years  would  prove  most  difficult  to  treat  with 
perfect  success.  The  most  serious  cases  of  malocclusion  are 
clearly  indicated  in  temporary  teeth,  and  may  be  diagnosed 
as  early  as  three  years.  Watch  them  and  prevent  growing 
deformities. — Varney  E.  Barnes,  Dental  Summary. 

Retention  of  Regulated  Teeth. — The  harder  the  teeth 
are  to  move,  the  more  difficult  they  are  to  retain.  In  one 
very  obstinate  case — "a  right  central  playing  leap-frog  with 
the  left" — the  tooth  persisting  in  starting  back  to  its  original 
position  after  three  months  wearing  a  retaining  appliance, 
with  a  sharp  bistoury,  all  attachment  between  the  tooth  and 
tissues  (but  not  quite  to  the  apex)  was  cut  loose;  there  was 
no  further  trouble. — W.  J.  Younger. 

Orthodontia  and  Rhinology. — The  intimate  relationship 
and  the  interdependence  of  these  two  specialties  is  not  alone 
a  matter  of  neighborhood  relation,  but  dates  back  to  a 
common  embryological  development.  The  naso-frontal  proc- 
ess which  enters  into  the  formation  of  the  intermaxillary 
portion  of  the  upper  jaw  also  has  an  important  part  in  the 
formation  of  the  septum  and  bridge  of  the  nose.  The  pala- 
tine plates,  too,  forming  the  roof  of  the  mouth  and  the 
floor  of  the  nose  are  common  to  both  specialties. — Royal 
S.  CoPELAND,  Items  of  Interest. 


4i8  Practical  Dentistry. 

Orthodontia:  Spreading  the  Maxillae. — In  very  young 
patients,  before  the  cuspids  and  bicuspids  liave  come  in — at 
seven  or  eight  years  of  age — by  spreading  the  maxillae  the 
unerupted  cuspids  and  bicuspids  are  moved  while  still  em- 
bedded in  the  bones,  and  will  come  in  in  perfect  alignment, 
straighter  and  more  firmly  fixed  in  their  sockets  than  if 
forced  into  occlusion  after  eruption. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Nickel  for  Regulating  Appliances,  etc. — The  five-cent 
nickel  coin  metal  makes  excellent  bands  for  regulating  ap- 
pliances. It  can  be  rolled  as  thin  as  the  Angle  bands ;  it 
solders  easil}'-  with  silver  solder  or  i8K  gold.  It  also  makes 
excellent  screws  and  nuts.  Cut  in  narrow  strips  it  makes 
excellent  strengtheners  for  rubber  plates,  similar  to  the  Hall 
white  metal  bars. — N.  H.  Keyser,  Dental  Office  and  Labora- 
tory. 

Retaining  Appliances. — The  process  of  resorption  is 
much  more  rapid  than  that  of  rebuilding;  hence  the  neces- 
sity for  the  retaining  appliance.  The  rate  of  difference  is 
almost  one  to  three.  Hence  if  it  should  take  from  six  to 
eight  months  to  get  the  teeth  in  position,  they  should  be 
held  there  at  least  a  year,  if  not  longer,  according  to  the 
age  of  the  patient. — H.  S.  Vaughan,  Dental  Digest. 

Extraction  in  Tooth  Regulation. — In  cases  for  correc- 
tion, where  rows  of  the  permanent  teeth  have  been  extracted 
by  dentists,  there  is  not  a  single  one  that  helped  the  case 
one  iota;  on  the  contrary,  the  cases  were  so  mutilated  that 
perfect  results  could  not  be  obtained  unless  the  extracted 
teeth  were  replaced  by  prosthetic  means. — T.  J.  Bradford, 
Dental  Summary. 

Diagnosis  in  Cases  of  Retained  Deciduous  or  TJnerupted 
Teeth. — Sciagraphy  is  of  the  utmost  benefit  in  these  cases, 
as  by  this  method  positive  diagnosis  can  be  made  and  abso- 
lutely scientific  treatment  take  the  place  of  what  would, 
without  it,  be  pure  guess-work. — C.  Edmund  Kels,  Jr., 
Items  of  Interest. 


Orthodontia.  4^9 

Regulating  Plates. — In  the  construction  of  regulating 
plates  covering  the  bicuspids  and  molars,  the  masticating 
surface  should  be  made  as  effective  as  possible.  A  com- 
fortable bite  is  obtained  by  closing  the  opposing  teeth  into 
the  waxed-up  plate;  then  cover  with  tinfoil  and  close  the 
teeth  again  to  press  the  foil  into  the  bite-marks,  and  flask. 
The  bite-marks  can  be  roughened  with  an  engine  bur. — 
E.  A.  CouNCELL,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Extraction  vs.  Expansion. — Nature  intends  the  full 
number  of  thirty-two  teeth  to  be  present  in  every  mouth. 
Extraction  interferes  with  nature's  wise  plans  and  nearly 
always  makes  a  perfect  result  impossible.  Expansion  of 
the  dental  arch  is  very  much  easier  to  accomplish  than  any 
proceeding  in  which  extraction  plays  a  part.  Therefore 
expand;  don't  extract. — Western  Dental  Journal. 

Prevention  in  Orthodontia. — Treatment  at  an  early  age, 
such  as  about  the  time  of  the  eruption  of  the  first  permanent 
molars,  or  even  earlier  in  some  cases,  is  largely  preventive, 
a  short  painless  operation  being  necessary  to  correct  a 
developing  malocclusion,  thus  preventing  a  more  severe 
one  by  such  early  and  timely  interference. — H.  A.  Pullen, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Jumping  the  Bite. — When  the  lower  molar  is  behind 
the  upper  the  irregularity  can  never  be  reduced  until  the 
bite  is  jumped  so  as  to  allow  the  upper  molar  to  strike  behind 
the  lower.  By  placing  anything  on  the  upper  tooth  that  will 
make  an  incline  the  patient  cannot  thrust  the  jaw  back,  and 
will  thus  be  compelled  to  keep  it  in  its  true  position. — Eben 
M.  Flagg,  Items  of  Interest. 

Retention  after  Regulation  of  Widely  Separated  Cen- 
tral Incisors. — After  drawing  them  together  I  drill  a  hole 
in  each  tooth  just  in  front  of  the  cingulum  and  make  a  little 
staple  that  just  reaches  into  the  holes,  hooking  it  in  so  that 
the  spring  of  the  teeth  holds  it.  Fill  with  amalgam.  Teeth 
so  held  have  remained  in  position. — Thos.  Fillerbrown. 


420  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Brass-wire  Ligature  in  Orthodontia. — The  spring- 
ing backward  and  forward  of  a  tooth  during  its  movement 
into  correct  alignment  is  the  source  of  nearh^  all  the  pain 
and  soreness  experienced  in  regulating.  With  the  wire  liga- 
ture the  relinquishment  of  pressure  is  but  rarely  necessary, 
while  with  fibrous  ligatures  each  renewal  necessitates  the  re- 
lease of  the  tooth  and  consequent  inevitable  irritation. — 
Edw.  H.  Angle,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Models  in  Orthodontia. — A  good  set  of  models  is  the 
first  step  in  attempting  to  treat  any  case  of  malocclusion. 
They  should  be  in  pairs,  even  should  the  malocclusion  be 
confined  to  a  single  tooth  in  one  jaw.  We  cannot  study 
a  case  thoroughly  from  the  mouth  only.  Models  give  us 
cues  to  the  causes  as  well  as  methods  of  treatment,  and  we 
cannot  err  seriously  if  we  have  good  models  to  study  at 
leisure. — Dr.  Watson,  Dental  Register. 

Retention  of  First  Permanent  Molars. — When  those 
teeth  are  extracted  before  the  eruption  of  the  second  molars, 
the  mouth  will  not  open  so  fully,  and  all  the  other  teeth  will 
be  liable  to  suffer  with  pyorrhoea  alveolaris.  The  two  points 
gained  by  the  retention  of  these  teeth  until  the  second 
molars  are  erupted  are  elongation  of  the  bite  and  symmet- 
rical facial  expression. — C.  C.  Harris,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Orthodontia  as  a  Training  School. — It  seems  to  me 
that  those  who  decide  not  to  bother  with  regulating  cases 
deprive  themselves  of  the  advantages  of  one  of  the  best 
training  schools,  in  which  patience,  quick  thought  and  a 
readiness  for  emergencies  are  taught  more  effectually  than 
by  any  other  department  of  our  work. — S.  E.  Davenport, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

What  to  do  with  Retained  Deciduous  Teeth. — We 
should,  in  the  absence  of  certain  knowledge,  hesitate  to  re- 
move retained  deciduous  lateral  incisors,  their  retention  often 
indicating  that  their  successors  are  non-extant.  Retention 
of  temporary  cuspids,  however,  often  result  from  impaction 
of  the  permanent  teeth. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  Interest. 


Orthodontia.  421 

Massage  for  Contracted  Arches. — For  contracted  arches, 
also  for  prognathous  upper  or  lower  jaws,  much  can  be  ac- 
complished by  massage,  gently  yet  thoroughly  manipulating 
the  parts  several  times  a  day,  having  the  nurse  or  mother 
properly  instructed,  thereby  saving  expensive  and  tedious 
regulating  later  in  life. — Clark  R.  Rowley,  Dental  Reg- 
ister. 

Orthodontia:  Photographs.— I  would  urge  you  to  take 
photographs  of  each  case.  One  practical  reason  for  this  is 
that  after  a  long  course  of  treatment,  during  which  a  child's 
features  have  been  altered  very  gradually,  parents  are  apt 
to  forget  the  initial  condition  and  fail  to  appreciate  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  change  which  has  been  effected.  Casts  do  not 
appeal  to  them  as  does  a  photograph. — J.  D.  Babcock, 
British  Dental  Journal. 

Models  in  Orthodontia  Treatment. — ^A  good  set  of  mod- 
els is  the  first  step  in  attempting  to  treat  any  case  of  mal- 
occlusion. We  cannot  study  a  case  thoroughly  from  the 
mouth  only.  Models  give  us  cues  to  the  causes  as  well  as  to 
methods  of  treatment,  and  we  cannot  err  seriously  if  we  have 
a  good  model  to  study  at  leisure. — Dr.  Watson,  Dental 
Register. 

Orthodontia  and  Rhinology. — Orthodontia  is  becoming 
recognized  as  a  necessity  in  nose  and  throat  treatment.  In- 
stead of  the  removal  of  the  turbinated  bones  to  give  room 
in  the  nasal  tract  the  better  way  is  to  expand  the  dental  arch, 
which  will  normally  enlarge  the  nasal  space  and  promote 
better  breathing  by  purely  natural  means. — Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Regulating  Plates. — Iridio-platinum  is  much  cleaner 
than  German  silver ;  there  is  no  oxidation  and  we  do  not 
have  to  take  nearly  as  much  care  as  with  German  silver. 
German  silver  is  much  more  unclean  than  the  rubber  plate, 
in  my  hands. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of  Interest. 


422  Practical  Dentistry. 

Orthodontia:    Depressing    Teeth    in    Their    Sockets. — 

It  is  better  to  grind  off  interfering  front  lower  teeth  than 
to  run  the  risk  of  distrubing  nutrition  to  the  pulp  by  com- 
pression. It  does  no  harm  whatever  to  grind  the  ends 
of  such  teeth  if  it  is  done  carefully.  If  they  are  sensitive 
it  should  be  done  a  little  at  a  time  with  intervals  of  several 
weeks  between. — J.  N.  Farrar,  International  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

Early  Regnilation. — If  taken  early,  the  roots  of  the 
permanent  teeth  are  not  fully  formed,  the  alveolus  is  very 
tender  and  soft,  and  as  much  movement  has  been  obtained 
under  these  conditions  in  three  or  four  days  or  a  week  as 
could  be  got  at  sixteen  or  eighteen  in  as  many  months,  and 
that,  too,  without  danger  to  the  dental  pulp  because  of  the 
ample  apical  foramen. — E.  A.  Bogue,  British  Dental  Jour- 
nal. 

Early  Orthodontic  Treatment. — Early  treatment  is  a  ne- 
cessity, not  only  because  of  the  certainty  of  permanent  re- 
tention afforded  by  a  firm  and  sufficient  deposit  of  alveolar 
structure  after  the  treatment,  but  because. the  development 
of  some  of  the  very  recurrent  and  even  incurable  forms  is 
thus  avoided. — B.  E.  Leischer,  The  Dental  Era. 

Age  for  Correction  of  Malocclusion. — Just  as  soon  as  it 
is  manifest  that  there  will  be  a  malocclusion^  take  the  teeth 
in  hand  for  prevention  or  correction.  We  thus  assist  Nature 
to  reach  the  right  proportion,  so  that  the  teeth  may  have  the 
relative  positions  intended  by  natural  laws. — T.  J.  Bradford, 
Dental  Summary. 

Early  Regulation. — No  matter  what  the  operation,  early 
treatment  is  always  advisable,  the  less  number  of  permanent 
teeth  erupted  making  the  operation  easier  and  shorter  be- 
cause of  the  lesser  resistance  to  be  overcome  and  because 
of  the  cartilaginous  nature  of  the  process  at  early  age. — 
Herbert  A.  Pullen,  Items  of  Interest. 


Orthodontia.  423 

The  First  Molar  in  Orthodantia. — If  the  first  molar  does 
not  erupt  normally  all  of  the  other  teeth  will  be  irregular, 
and  it  also'  regulates  the  bite.  The  study  of  all  cases  of 
malocclusion  should  begin  with  the  position  of  this  tooth, 
and  remember  that  the  lower  arch  is  the  most  important 
at  every  stage  of  the  work.  Early  attention  is  most  impor- 
tant, as  each  day's  delay  makes  matters  worse  for  the  pa- 
tient.— Edward  H.  Angle,  Dental  Digest. 

Time  Allowance  in  Regulating  Cases. — After  we  have 
done  all  that  is  possible  in  the  correction  of  an  irregularity 
time  must  be  allowed  for  nature  to  grow  up  to  the  new  con- 
dition. *  *  *  *  Accurate  retention  for  a  certain  time 
is  absolutely  necessary. — E.  A.  Bogue,  International  Dental 
Journal. 

To  Prevent  Crowding  and  Irregularity  of  the  Teeth. — 

Institute  very  early  a  system  of  mouth  massage,  instruct- 
ing the  mother  or  nurse  to  rub  the  inside  of  the  infant's 
jaws  systematically,  but  gently,  thus  aiding  in  their  develop- 
ment, and  giving  more  room  for  the  teeth. — C.  L.  Boyd, 

Dental  Register. 

Cementing  Bands  on  Conical  Teeth. — Some  teeth  are  so 
conical  that  cement  will  not  hold  regulating  bands  in  place. 
To  overcome  this  difficulty  dry  the  tooth  to  be  banded  and 
paint  it  with  a  thick-setting  varnish  (sandarac  or  shellac). 
Then  cement  the  band,  and  it  will  stay  in  place. — C.  E. 
Klotz,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Preparation    of    Steel    for    Regulating    Appliances. — 

When  formed  to  the  desired  shape,  steep  in  chlorid  of  zinc 
and  then  in  pure  molten  tin.  No  oxidation  will  then  take 
place;  its  tension  is  improved,  and  it  can  be  united  to  any 
other  metal  by  pure  tin,  using  the  chlorid  of  zinc  as  a  flux. 
If  imbedded  in  vulcanite  it  will  not  cause  disintegration. — 
D.  Genese,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


424  Practical  Dentistry. 

Nickel  for  Regulating  Bands. — Can  you  suggest  some 
economical  substitute  for  German  silver  to  be  used  in  bands 
in  regulating  cases?  A  nickle  rolled  out  to  the  proper 
thickness  serves  the  purpose  far  better  than  German  silver. 
It  is  better  in  color,  and  remains  so;  is  somewhat  stronger, 
and  can  be  soldered  with  the  greatest  ease. — R.  W.  Starr, 
Dental  Brief. 

Correcting  Irregularities.  Why? — The  true  reason  for 
correcting  irregularities  is  that  children  may  have  a  better 
masticatory  apparatus  for  the  comminution  of  food  and 
thereby  give  to  their  descendants  a  better  developed  jaw 
and  normally  arranged  teeth.  Proper  occlusion  is  the  most 
essential  requirement. — R.  B.  Howell,  Dental  Register. 

Nuts  in  Regulating  Appliances. — It  is  an  excellent  plan 
to  taper  off  the  end  of  the  screw  slightly,  so  that  when  the 
nut  is  taken  in  the  tweezers  it  will  readily  slip  on  to  the 
end  of  the  screw,  which  is  not  the  case  when  the  threaded 
portion  is  cut  ofit"  square. — W.  Matthews,  Dental  Record. 

Cementing  on  Bands  in  Regulating  Cases. — In  putting 

on  bands  the  teeth  should  be  smeared  with  cement  as  well  as 
the  bands ;  this  is  imperatively  necessary  to  prevent  the  devi- 
talization of  the  teeth  on  which  the  appliances  are  placed. 
Too  much  care  cannot  be  taken  in  regard  to  this. — C.  F. 
Allan,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Impression  Taking  in  Orthodontia. — We  cannot  get  the 
models  too  perfect  if  we  would  secure  scientific  results  in 
treatment.  They  should  be  as  carefully  made  as  though 
they  were  to  adorn  the  niches  of  the  most  famous  art  gal- 
leries.— N.  S.  HoFF,  Dental  Registe>r. 

India  Rubber  Bands  for  Regulating,  etc. — With  pinch- 
ers of  various  numbers  and  a  flat  leaden  block,  you  can 
punch  out,  from  either  thick  or  thin  rubber-dam — according 
to  strength  required — bands  which  will  be  found  more  satis- 
factory than  those  cut  from  rubber  tubing. — A.  T.  Coucher, 
Jour.  British  Association. 


Orthodontia.  425 

Plaster  Models  in  Orthodontia. — In  fitting  cribs,  by  the 
Jackson  method,  to  the  models,  the  plaster  teeth  should  al- 
ways be  scraped  a  little  to  secure  a  tighter  fit  when  the  crib 
is  finished  and  placed  in  the  mouth. — C.  E.  Klotz,  Domin- 
ion Dental  Journal. 

Malocclusion:  Diagnosis. — The  careful  observer  may 
detect  irregularities  in  the  positions  of  the  temporary  teeth 
that  are  sure  indications  of  malpositions  among  the  perma- 
nent teeth  that  are  not  yet  erupted. — E.  A.  Bogue,  Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 

When  to  Regulate. — It  is  asked:  "What  is  really  the 
best  age  to  regulate,  after  eruption?"  Just  as  soon  as  the 
crown  can  be  got  hold  of  to  put  an  apparatus  on ;  the  age, 
of  course,  differs  slightly  with  different  individuals. — E.  A. 
Bogue,  British  Dental  Journal. 

Advantages  of  Regulation  by  Means  of  Ligatures. — 

They  take  up  less  room  than  any  appliance  that  can  be  de- 
vised; they  are  so  easy  in  action  that  a  child  will  tolerate 
them ;  a  tooth  can  be  rotated  upon  its  axis  without  disturb- 
ing its  relation  to  other  teeth. — W.  J.  Younger. 

Regulating  Springs. — Gilded  piano  wire  is  most  satis- 
factory for  springs  attached  to  regulating  plates  as  it  does 
not  corrode,  nor,  in  many  mouths  does  it  even  tarnish;  it 
is  also  exceedingly  springy  and  is  easily  worked. — E,  Brad- 
NER  White,  Dental  Review. 

Aids  in  Orthodontia. — The  surgical  severing  of  the 
fibres  of  the  peridental  membrane  promises  to  yield  results 
of  much  benefit,  while  the  surgical  removal  of  bone  in  ad- 
vance of  moving  teeth  affords  a  means  of  hastening  other- 
wise protracted  operations. — Herbert  A.  Pullen. 

Cemented  Bands. — Where  bands  are  to  be  cemented 
to  the  teeth,  the  teeth  should  be  covered  with  some  resinous 
substance,  to  avoid  the  chemical  action  of  the  cement  upon 

the  enamel. — Ch.  Wilson,  Dental  Cosmos. 
28 


426  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  First  Permanent  Molars. — Point  out  to  parents  that 
as  the  child  has  twenty  fingers  and  toes,  so  also  it  has 
twenty  deciduous  teeth.  They  will  be  less  likely,  when  the 
first  permanent  molars  appear,  to  mistake  them  for  decid- 
uous teeth. — J.  R.  Lowe,  JVestern  Den.  Jour. 

Malocclusion:  Diagnosis. — The  careful  observer  may 
detect  irregularities  in  the  positions  of  the  temporary  teeth 
that  are  sure  indications  of  malpositions  among  the  perma- 
nent teeth  that  are  not  yet  erupted. — E.  A.  Bogue,  Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 

Protrusion  of  the  Deciduous  Teeth. — It  is  a  well-known 
fact  that  very  little  pressure  or  stimulation,  at  the  age  of 
four  or  five,  will  accomplish  more  than  ten  times — I  might 
say  fifty  times — that  amount  of  stimulation  later  in  life. — 

Dr.  Young,  Items  of  Interest. 

Malocclusion:  Early  Treatment. — Watch  the  little  ones 
and  prevent  growing  deformities.  Don't  wait  until  the 
permanent  teeth  erupt  and  the  mischief  is  done.  If  there  is 
not  room  for  erupting  teeth  in  a  too-slowly  growing  jaw, 
make  room,  and  see  how  nature  will  help  out. — Varney  E. 
Barnes,  Dental  Summary. 

Springy  Wire  for  Regulating  Appliances. — The  gilded 
piano  wire,  size  A,  English  gauge,  is  the  most  satisfactory 
wire  for  regulating  springs,  when  not  vulcanized  in  a  plate, 
as  it  does  not  corrode,  and  in  many  mouths  does  not  even 
tarnish. — E.  Bradner  White,  Dental  Review. 

Cementing  Bands  in  Regulating  Cases. — Paint  the  teeth 
which  are  to  be  banded  with  shellac  varnish.  Wait  till  it 
dries,  and  then  cement  the  band.  It  sticks  like  glue. — J.  B. 
HoDGKiN,  Dental  Digest. 

To  Remove  Oxid  from  German  Silver  Regulating  Appli- 
ances.— Hydrochloric  acid,  cold,  full  strength,  may  be  used 
to  remove  oxid  from  German  silver  regulating  appliances. — 
V.  E.  Barnes,  Dental  Summary. 


Orthodontia.  427 

In  Regulating  Teeth  the  precaution  should  be  observed 
not  to  use  too  much  pressure ;  it  may  cause  the  death  of  the 
pulp,  or  produce  a  case  of  acute  apical  pericementitis. — Den- 
tal News. 

The  Correction  of  Irregularities. — The  "Nature  Cure" 
for  the  correction  of  irregularities  is  a  popular  delusion.  It 
is  as  pernicious  as  it  is  ignorant  advice. — H.  A.  Pullen, 
Items  of  Interest. 


CHAPTER  IV 

(P  ART    II) 


GENERAL  INFORMATION 


Some  Things  to  Eremember. — While  Babbitt  metal  has 
all  the  necessary  qualities  for  a  dental  die,  it  must  be  from 
a  proper  formula,  namely,  copper,  one  part ;  antimony,  two 
parts;  tin,  eight  parts.  This  can  be  had  at  the  dental 
depots.  Much  of  the  ordinary  Babbitt  metal  of  commerce 
has  some  lead,  which  ruins  it  for  dental  dies.  Pure  lead 
cannot  be  poured  upon  a  proper  Babbitt  metal.  The  melt- 
ing-point must  be  reduced  by  addition  of  one-sixth  tin. 
This  must  not  be  poured  hot  as  it  comes  from  the  heater, 
but  stirred  until  it  begins  to  attach  to  the  sides  of  the  ladle. 
— L.  P.  Haskell,  Dental  Brief. 

Swaging  Aluminum. — In  swaging  aluminum,  it  being 
soft,  it  is  apt  to  tear  over  margin  of  the  ridge.  To  prevent 
this,  cut  away  the  portion  of  the  counter-die  which  fills  into 
the  depressions  or  undercuts  of  the  die.  In  preparing  a 
model  for  moulding,  take  pains  to  flare  the  sides  all  around 
so  it  will  drop  readily  from  the  mould.  If  it  even  then  fails 
to  drop,  jar  the  edge  of  the  flask  on  the  margin  of  the 
moulding-box.  There  is  never  any  necessity  for  lifting  it 
from  the  mould.  Do  not  use  the  Bailey  flasks  for  moulding, 
as  they  are  too  small  and  bad  in  shape.  Have  a  sheet-iron 
flask  made  five  inches  in  diameter  and  three  inches  deep. 
For  packing  the  sand  use  a  potato  masher,  the  handle  around 
thr  sides,  and  the  large  end  on  top. — L.  P.  Haskell,  Dental 
Brief. 

429 


430  Practical  Dentistry. 

Swaging  Plates. — The  horn  mallets  should  have  the 
pointed  end,  which  is  useless,  cut  off  about  one  inch  and 
filed  rounded,  as  that  is  the  proper  end  to  use,  the  large  end 
being  too  large  for  the  palatal  surface.  In  swaging  a  gold 
or  a  platinum  plate  do  not  hesitate  to  slit  the  front  and  lap, 
because  it  facilitates  swaging,  and  there  is  no  possible  ob- 
jection to  it.  On  the  other  hand  it  is  a  real  advantage,  be- 
cause many  a  gold  plate  has  broken  through  this,  the  weak- 
est part  of  the  plate,  so  that  by  cutting,  lapping  and  solder- 
ing it  is  strengthened  one  hundred  per  cent.  In  wiring  a 
plate  or  for  holding  two  pieces  of  metal  together,  use  wire 
clamps,  about  three-quarter  inch  long,  made  of  ordinary 
iron  wire,  bending  with  flat  pliers  the  sides  close  together 
but  leaving  a  loop  for  spring.  The  ends  may  be  flattened. 
All  plates  can  and  should  be  worn  higher  over  the  cuspid 
teeth,  and  the  gum  made  fuller  than  elsewhere,  if  one  de- 
sires to  restore  the  usual  depression  arising  from  the  ex- 
traction of  the  cuspids. — L.  P.  Haskell,  Dental  Brief. 

The  Light  About  the  Dental  Chair.— The  light  at  the 
operating  chair  may  be  very  much  improved  in  the  late 
afternoon  or  on  dark,  hazy  days  by  using  white  linen  cur- 
tains as  reflectors.  The  principal  one  is  an  ordinary  roller 
shade  fastened  at  the  top  of  the  window  casing,  the  curtain 
to  be  the  full  width  of  the  window  and  of  sufficient  length 
to  allow  of  its  being  drawn  out  over  the  operating  chair, 
above  the  operator's  head,  and  attached  to  some  fixed  point 
in  the  wall  or  screen.  The  spring  in  the  curtain  fixture, 
if  left  uncaught,  will  be  sufficient  to  keep  the  curtain  taut. 
This  curtain  with  its  glazed  white  surface  sloping  down- 
ward and  backward  from  the  top  of  the  window  opening 
will  direct  the  rays  of  light  upon  the  operating  field  instead 
of  permitting  them  to  be  dispersed  into  the  room.  The 
system  of  curtains  may  be  carried  much  farther  to  a  good 
advantage.  Broad  white  curtains  may  be  attached  to 
brackets  swinging  at  right  angles  to  the  window  frame, 
and  adjusted  at  an  angle  that  will  direct  the  light  rays  as 
desired. — Fred.  C.  Brush,  Dental  Brief. 


General  Information.  431 

Studding  to  Arrest  Abrasive  Process. — Studding  as  an 
operation  is  very  simple,  rapid  and  efficient,  and  the  pro- 
cedure is  as  follows :  In  the  absence  of  a  better  set  of  in- 
struments, use  the  instruments  known  as  the  How  drill 
and  taps,  and  the  iridioplatinum  post-metal  made  for  the 
How  crown  system.  The  drills  are  made  in  three  sizes,  and 
the  post  wire  is  threaded  to  correspond  with  the  drills  and 
taps.  After  selecting  and  desensitizing  the  tooth  to  be  op- 
erated upon  drill  and  tap  as  many  holes  as  required — from 
two  in  the  laterals  to  four  or  six  in  the  molars ;  about  one- 
sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  depth.  The  post  wire  is  cut  with 
the  Clapp  saws  a  trifle  longer  than  the  hole  is  deep,  and 
with  the  same  instrument  cut  a  groove  across  end  of  screw 
to  engage  the  driver ;  dip  the  screw  in  a  rather  soft  mix  .of 
cement  and  run  it  home.  After  the  cement  is  hard,  trim  it 
off  flush  with  the  surface  and  polish. — J.  C.  Curry,  in 
Dental  Brief. 

Consultation  Among  Dentists. — In  all  cases  of  doubtful 
diagnosis,  uncertainty  respecting  proper  treatment,  or  when 
a  fatal  termination  is  feared,  the  physician  avails  himself  of 
the  aid  and  counsel  of  his  fellow  practitioner.  In  like  man- 
ner consultation  should  constitute  an  important  factor  in 
the  direction  of  an  acceptable  aid  to  our  success.  Not  that 
our  opinions  or  our  proceedings  are  of  such  a  character  that 
they  involve  a  question  of  life  or  death ;  not  that  we  are  in- 
capable in  a  general  way  of  doing  the  best  we  know  how 
under  the  circumstances ;  but  that  we  may  by  thus  deliber- 
ating do  better  than  we  previously  knew  how,  and  having 
done  this  we  should  have  the  frankness  to  admit  the  same. 
The  consultation  of  the  dentist  must  of  necessity  differ  from 
that  of  the  physician ;  it  need  not  be  a  hurried  consideration 
of  symptoms  and  signs,  followed  by  extreme  or  heroic 
treatment,  but  instead  of  this  it  may  be  a  deliberate  weigh- 
ing of  the  facts,  and  this  should  be  the  primary  function  of 
most  dental  societies.  It  is  chiefly  at  the  meetings  of  these 
organizations  that  our  consultations  should  take  place. — 
I.  N.  Broomell,  Dental  Brief. 


432  Practical  Dentistry. 

Eequirements  to  Practice  Dentistry  in  the  Various 
States. — In  the  following  States  and  Territories  a  dentist 
must  have  a  diploma  from  a  recognized  dental  college  and 
also  pass  the  State  board  examination :  Alabama,  Arizona, 
Arkansas,  California,  Colorado,  Connecticut.  Delaware,  Dis- 
trict of  Columbia,  Florida,  Georgia,  Idaho,  Illinois,  Indiana, 
Iowa,  Maine,  Mississippi,  Montana,  New  York,  New  Hamp- 
shire, New^  Jersey,  New  Mexico,  Ohio,  Pennsylvania,  Rhode 
Island,  South  Carolina,  Vermont,  Virginia,  Washington, 
West  Virginia,  Wyoming.  In  the  following  States  a  di- 
ploma from  a  recognized  dental  college  w-ill  permit  one  to 
practice  dentistry  without  taking  the  board  examination,  but 
a  license  must  be  secured  from  the  proper  authorities  :  Kan- 
sas, Kentucky,  Michigan,  Missouri,  Nebraska,  Nevada, 
North  Carolina,  North  Dakota,  Oklahoma,  South  Dakota, 
Tennessee,  Texas,  Utah.  In  the  State  of  Wisconsin  a 
license  is  granted  to  those  who  have  a  diploma  from  a  den- 
tal college  demanding  a  four-year  course  of  seven  months 
each.  In  Missouri,  South  Dakota  and  Utah  a  board  exami- 
nation is  granted  to  any  person  who  has  served  a  certain 
number  of  years  under  a  private  preceptor.  If  the  exami- 
nation proves  satisfactory  a  license  is  granted,  the  same  as 
if  the  applicant  possessed  a  college  diploma.  In  the  follow- 
ing States  any  person  desiring  to  practice  dentistry  may  take 
the  board  examination,  and  a  license  will  be  granted  if  the 
examination  proves  successful :  Alaska,  Kansas,  Massa- 
chusetts, Nevada,  Oklahoma,  Tennessee,  Texas. — Dental 
Brief. 

Treatment  of  Infected  Teeth  with  Simple  Periostitis. — 

Cleanse  the  canal  of  all  debris,  inject  hydrogen  peroxid, 
then  close  canal  with  cotton  pellet.  At  the  next  sitting 
cleanse  again  and  dry ;  insert  a  few  fibres  of  cotton  sat- 
urated in  forty  per  cent,  formaldehyd,  or  with  broach 
pump  in  a  drop  of  formol.  Leave  in  the  canal  a  fibre  of 
cotton  soaked  in  five  per  cent,  formalin.  At  the  next  sit- 
ting insert  a  paste  of  iodoform  and  five  per  cent,  formol, 
and  fill. — L.  Ouinton,  Dental  Cosmos. 


General  Information.  433 

Carving-wax  for  Crown-  and  Bridge-work,  and  Other 
Uses. — Take  pink,  base  plate  gutta-percha,  one  sheet,  and 
one  sheet  of  pink  paraffin  and  wax,  the  same  as  that  used 
for  waxing  base  plates.  Melt  the  wax  with  dry  heat  and 
then  put  the  gutta-percha  in  and  stir  until  the  gutta-percha 
is  melted,  then  pour  out  onto  a  plate  and  let  cool.  The  com- 
mon beeswax  makes  just  as  good  a  product,  only  the  color 
is  lighter.  Be  sure  and  use  dry  heat  for  this.  Keep  at  a 
high  temperature  all  the  time ;  if  it  takes  fire  blow  it  out. 
The  best  vessel  I  find  for  melting  it  is  a  granite  dipper  with 
a  long  handle,  stirring  with  a  steel  spatula  until  the  gutta- 
percha is  melted.  This  material  is  to  take  the  place  of 
modeling  compound  and  plaster  in  crown,  bridge  and  gold 
inlay  work. — C.  Boyd  Powell,  Dental  Brief. 

Root  Formation  as  Indicated  by  the  Crown  Contour.-— 
Crown  with  rounded  outline  and  small  neck — roots  small 
and  curved  outward  from  the  neck  and  inward  toward  the 
apex — describing  the  segment  of  a  circle;  the  larger  the 
neck,  the  larger  the  roots,  with  the  same  general  out- 
line. Crown  with  square  corners  and  small  neck;  roots 
spreading  outward  from  neck  to  apex;  the  larger  the  neck 
the  more  pronounced  this  form  of  roots.  A  rounded  con- 
tour of  crown  indicates  a  turning  in  of  the  roots.  Square 
contour  of  crown,  spreading  roots.  Where  there  is  me- 
chanical abrasion  the  tooth  will,  as  a  rule,  be  found  to  be 
firmly  braced  with  strong  spreading  roots,  holding  the 
tooth  solidly  immovable  and  resisting  the  impact  of  mas- 
tication.— Geo.  B.  Clement. 

To  Prevent  Rusting  of  Drills. — I  keep  my  drills  in  a 
glass  cylinder  in  the  bottom  of  which  is  placed  a  pledget 
of  absorbent  cotton  saturated  with  lysol  and  the  oil  used  in 
the  Edison  battery,  equal  parts.  Bury  the  heads  of  the  drills 
into  the  mass  and  seal  up  with  the  cork  of  the  bottle.  A 
pinch  of  sodium  bicarbonate  sprinkled  in  the  mass  will  aid 
by  its  neutrahzing  effect  if  acids  have  been  used  in  the 
canals. — T,  J.  Fernandez,  Dental  Cosmos. 


434  Practical  Dentistry. 

Examination  of  the  Teeth. — The  first  step  in  a  real  ex- 
amination of  the  teeth  is  to  get  them  clean.  Not  only 
should  all  calcareous  deposits  be  removed,  but  the  teeth 
should  have  every  stain  and  discoloration  polished  off  if 
possible.  In  no  other  way  can  every  surface  be  brought 
to  view  and  imperfections  certainly  noted.  One  should 
hesitate  to  pronounce  upon  the  number  or  extent  of 
cavities,  probable  cost  of  operations,  etc.,  unless  first  per- 
mitted to  put  the  mouth  in  proper  condition  for  an  ex- 
amination. It  should  be  a  rule  without  exception  that 
thorough  cleaning  shall  precede  a  series  of  operations. — 
Garrett  Newkirk,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 

To  Open  Bite  Permanently — "Cap  Fillings."— Where, 
for  any  reason,  it  is  desirable  to  open  the  bite  permanently, 
to  avoid  crowning  molars  with  living  pulps,  adjust  "cap  fill- 
ings" as  follows :  Grind  occlusal  surfaces  nearly  to  a  plane, 
take  impression,  and  strike  up  plate  of  nearly  pure  gold, 
about  32-gauge,  to  which  solder  a  second  plate  to  thicken  it. 
Drill  pin  holes  in  the  centers  of  the  four  sides  of  the  molar 
plane  surface,  thereby  avoiding  the  cornuse  of  the  pulp. 
Drill  corresponding  holes  in  the  reinforced  gold  plate,  to 
which  solder  platinum  pins.  Unite  in  the  plate  properly 
articulated  cusps.  Set  with  cement.  By  this  method  the 
approximal  surfaces  of  the  teeth  are  not  marred,  and  the 
relation  of  the  gums  to  the  necks  of  the  teeth  undisturbed. — 

M.   F.   FiNLEY. 

A  Cause  of  Pulp  Congestion. — A  condition  which  is  not 
overcome  or  removed  by  any  known  method  of  pulp  cap- 
ping is  the  irregular  surface  in  the  wall  of  dentin  enclosing 
the  exposed  pulp.  The  edges  of  the  break,  even  should  they 
be  smooth,  will  act  as  an  irritant  under  the  constant  arterial 
pressure,  and  stasis  in  the  pulp  circulation  must  ensue.  No 
degree  of  success  can  attend  the  operation  of  pulp  capping 
unless  the  continuity  of  the  chamber  is  restored  and  a  com- 
patible surface  left  against  which  the  pulsating  pulp  can 
rest  and  remain  in  a  physiological  state. — M.  C.  Marshall, 
Dental  Era. 


General  Information.  435 

Aching  Pulps  in  Teeth  Already  Filled;    Prognosis. — A 

pulp  aching  and  covered  by  a  filling  may  be  considered 
as  a  morbid  tissue,  and  prognosis  will  depend  upon  the 
conditions  found  on  removal  of  the  filling.  It  is  important 
to  carefully  note  the  first  exudation  from  the  pulp  as  it  is 
uncovered.  If  a  drop  of  pus  should  escape  it  shows  that 
infection  is  already  present,  and  pressure  ansesthesia  should 
not  be  attempted  at  the  first  sitting;  instead,  a  dressing 
which  will  be  both  sedative  and  antiseptic  in  character 
should  be  applied.  Usually  the  escape  of  pus  and  the  slight 
hemorrhage  alleviate  the  suffering,  and  with  the  antiseptic 
treatment  the  forcing  of  septic  material  through  the  apex 
is  avoided.  When  there  is  no  pus,  prognosis  should  be 
favorable. — R.  Ottolexgui,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Tempering  Swiss  Broaches. — Place  a  dozen  or  two  in 
a  glass  tube  and  draw  the  temper  to  a  deep  blue  over  an 
alcohol  lamp  or  a  Bunsen  burner.  The  glass  protects  them 
from  currents  of  cold  air,  allows  them  to  cool  slowly,  and 
enables  one  to  see  the  color  of  the  steel. — S.  G.  Perry,  Inter- 
national Dental  loitrnal. 

Care  of  the  Oral  Tissues. — Of  equal  importance  with 
the  brushing  of  the  teeth  is  the  brushing  and  cleansing  of 
all  mucous  tissues,  i.  e.,  gums,  tongue,  cheek  and  lip  muscles, 
and  the  palate  tissue.  This  may  be  accomplished  by  a  stiif- 
hristled,  fiat-surface  tooth  brush,  with  which  the  gums  are 
massaged  with  a  rotary  motion,  brushing  the  lower  gums 
upward,  and  the  upper  gums  downward,  toward  the  necks 
of  the  teeth. — Burton  Lee  Thorpe,  The  Medical  Brief. 

Care  of  the  Teeth  During  Illness. — The  teeth  of  inva- 
lids may  be  treated  with  silver  nitrate  with  the  result  of 
inhibiting  decay  for  several  years.  After  the  restoration  of 
health  I  have  filled  the  cavities,  and  have  been  able  to  note 
that  no  progress  has  occurred  in  the  decay  during  the  period 
of  ill  health. — J.  Morgan  Howe,  International  Dental  lour- 
nal. 


436  Practical  Dentistry. 

Color  in  Implantation. — In  all  natural  inlays  or  im- 
planted teeth  the  part  inserted  will  take  on  the  color  of  the 
adjoining  teeth  or  the  adjoining  part.  That  is  a  peculiarity 
in  implanted  teeth ;  but  you  must  use  a  tooth,  or  section  of 
tooth,  of  the  same  temperament  as  that  upon  which  you  are 
working.  For  instance,  if  a  tooth  is  of  a  bilious  tempera- 
ment, or  a  nervous  temperament,  you  want  to  use  one  of 
that  temperament,  not  take  the  tooth  of  a  bilious  tempera- 
ment for  an  operation  upon  the  tooth  of  a  nervous  tempera- 
ment.— Dental  Brief. 

Tooth  Polisher. — Tecum  fibre  is  a  most  efficient  article 
for  polishing  the  proximal  surface  of  the  teeth,  being  fine, 
strong,  and  charged  by  nature  with  grit — silex,  like  the 
cortex  of  a  reed.  It  can  be  drawn  between  the  most  closely 
set  teeth  with  the  aid  of  a  little  vasehn  in  extreme  cases ;  this 
does  not  seem  to  impair  its  efficiency. — Dr.  Brockway, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Hypertrophied  Gum  Tissue. — Trichloracetic  acid  applied 
to  hypertrophied  gum  tissue  overlying  the  cervical  border 
of  deep-seated  cavities  accomplishes  three  things, — viz., 
checks  the  bleeding,  shrinks  the  tissues,  and,  by  producing  a 
white  eschar,  lights  up  the  cavity  to  an  appreciable  extent. 
— G.  B.  Squires,  Items  of  Interest. 

Carbonized  Cotton. — This  is  a  good  quality  of  pure  anti- 
septic, absorbent  cotton,  saturated  with  boric  acid,  placed  in 
an  iron  retort,  which  is  then  slowly  raised  to  white  heat,  the 
cotton  being  gradually  reduced  to  carbon.  When  dry  it 
readily  crumbles  and  is  difficult  to  work,  but  in  combination 
with  oxpara  it  works  very  satisfactorily  as  a  canal-filling 
material. — A.  F.  Strange,  American  Dental  Jonrnal. 

Tempering  Fine  Steel  Instruments. — The  temper  can 
be  drawn  from  heavy  tools  by  direct  contact  with  the  heat, 
but  finer  instruments  should  be  treated  through  some  me- 
dium, and  for  this  purpose  use  asbestos  over  gas,  gaso- 
lin  or  alcohol  flame.  The  finer  the  instrument  the  thicker 
the  medium. — W.  A.  Brown  lee.  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 


General  Information.  437 

Spence  Metal. — Spence  metal  is  composed  of  sixty  parts 
of  sulphid  of  iron  and  forty  parts  of  sulphury  the  fusing 
point  is  225°  F.  It  is  of  great  value  when  used  as  an 
articulating  model,  by  minimizing  the  attrition  of  the  an- 
tagonistic surfaces,  which  results  when  teeth  of  porcelain 
are  brought  into  repeated  contact  with  teeth  of  a  plaster 
model. — International  Dental  Journal. 

Importance  of  Regular  Attention  to  Children's  Teeth. — 
As  the  recuperative  power  of  the  dental  tissues  is  null,  and 
as  premature  extraction  will  bring  permanent  disfigure- 
ment, it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  we  should  be  able  to 
interfere  before  any  permanent  damage  is  produced,  and 
to  oppose  with  all  the  means  at  our  command  those  dis- 
orders which  intelligent  care  would  often  prevent. — 
Edmond  Rosenthal,  Dental  Brief. 

Relief  of  Facial  Neuralgia. — The  two  nerves  endowed 
with  the  greatest  number  of  tactile  nerve-endings  are  the 
fifth,  supplying  sensation  to  the  antero-lateral  head  and 
face,  and  the  median,  supplying  the  fingers.  The  motor 
areas  of  these  nerves  in  the  cortex  overlap,  the  fibres  cross- 
ing in  the  cord.  This  being  the  case,  it  has  been  found 
that  if  the  hand  opposite  the  side  of  the  head  or  face 
affected  by  neuralgia  is  placed  in  a  basin  of  water  as  hot 
as  can  be  borne,  the  impression  received  in  the  cerebral 
cortex  dominates  the  impression  produced  by  the  pain,  and 
immediate  relief  ensues. — W.  G.  Belt,  Medical  Sentinel. 

Sharpening  Instruments. — Cut  discs  an  inch  and  a  half 
in  diameter  from  emery  paper,  Nos.  00  and  ^2,  and  place  in 
alternate  layers  to  about  half  an  inch  in  thickness,  upon  a 
disc  of  tin  slightly  smaller,  and  fasten  on  a  screw  mandrel. 
On  the  disc  of  coarse  paper  bring  the  instrument  to  desired 
shape;  tear  off  this  disc  and  finish  the  sharpening  on  the 
finer  grit.  In  this  way  a  keen,  even  edge  can  be  given  to  the 
instrument  in  a  very  short  time. — F.  J.  Patterson,  Dental 
Review. 


438  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sodium  Perborate. — The  preparations  of  HjOj  usually 
employed  possess  the  disadvantage  of  being-  acid  in  reac- 
tion. Sodium  perborate  offers  advantages  of  the  highest 
order.  It  is  of  alkaline  reaction  and  perfectly  stable  and 
can  be  preserved  indefinitely  even  when  exposed  to  the  air 
or  kept  in  unstoppered  bottles.  One  kilogram  contains  104 
grains  of  active  oxygen,  which  becomes  available  on  mix- 
ing with  distilled  water.  It  may  be  used  in  solution  or  in 
powdered  form,  as  when  in  contact  with  the  tissues,  in- 
flamed or  normal,  a  sufficient  amount  of  humidity  is  always 
present  to  cause  the  evolution  of  oxygen. — L'Odoiitologie. 

Hygiene  of  the  Gums. — To  have  good,  satisfactory,  mas- 
ticating teeth  the  gums  must  receive  friction,  through  the 
food  in  eating  or  through  rubbing  in  some  manner  to  insure 
perfect  circulation.  Teeth  without  gums  are  denuded  teeth, 
and  in  many  cases  they  are  useless  teeth.  The  proper  care 
of  the  gums  from  the  personal  standpoint  is  of  as  much 
importance  as  the  care  of  the  teeth  themselves. — A.  W. 
Harl^^n,  Items  of  Interest. 

Sensitive  Dentin. — Operative  procedure  plays  a  most 
important  part.  A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  instrument 
used,  perfect  manipulation  as  well  as  speed,  all  play  leading 
parts.  To  work  rapidly  one  needs  faultlessly  sharp  instru- 
ments ;  the  excavator  and  the  bur  should  be  as  carefully 
examined  as  the  cavity.  No  obtundent  will  give  perfect 
satisfaction  unless  these  details  are  carefully  considered. — 
K.  J.  Schumann,  Items  of  Interest. 

Painless  Operations. — When  you  do  not  wish  to  use 
cocain  solutions  or  other  drugs  that  are  liable  to  be  poison- 
ous, take  a  pair  of  pointed  pliers  and  dip  in  a  solution  of 
chloral-camphor  and  pass  it  gently  around  the  root  of  the 
tooth  (freed  from  blood  and  saliva),  and  an  operation  that 
is  usually  very  painful  will  in  many  cases  be  entirely  pain- 
less, in  others  almost  so,  and  you  have  no  bad-smelling  drug 
in  the  mouth. — A.  \V.  Harlan,  Den.  Review. 


General  Information.  439 

The  Sense  of  Touch. — In  certain  operations  the  highest 
development  of  the  sense  of  touch  is  not  only  important 
but  vital  as  well.  For  instance,  in  the  treatment  of 
pyorrhcea  alveolaris,  the  removal  of  minute,  deep-seated 
deposits  which  cannot  be  seen  must  precede  the  cure.  The 
sense  of  touch  is  here  as  important  as  the  sense  of  sight  to 
the  porcelain  worker.  In  this  treatment  the  other  senses  are 
secondary  to  the  sense  of  touch,  which  is  absolutely  mental 
in  its  highest  form. — H.  C.  Spencer,  Dental  Cosmos. 

"Dental  Odors." — Iodoform,  carbolic  acid,  creosote,  oil 
of  cassia  or  of  cloves,  and  other  highly  volatile  substances 
add  to  the  office,  in  many  sensitive  patients,  more  repug- 
nance than  they  already  have  from  fear.  Spraying  the  entire 
breadth  and  length  of  the  operating-room,  fumigating,  so  to 
speak,  with  a  weak  solution  of  spirits  of  lavender,  disguises 
these  odors  admirably  by  the  aid  of  compressed  air,  and 
makes  the  room  smell  sweet  and  fresh. — Geo.  Zederbaum, 
Dental  Register. 

Treatment  of  the  Patient. — The  dentist  is  too  apt  to 
centre  attention  on  the  tooth,  regarding  the  patient  as  a 
rather  tiresome  appendage,  a  necessary  nuisance.  All 
treatment  should  be'planned  with  due  regard  to  the  age, 
state  of  health,  and  power  of  endurance  of  the  patient,  and 
carried  through  with  the  infliction  of  the  least  possible 
amount  of  discomfort  or  distress. — J.  H.  Babcock,  Dental 
Record. 

Quick  Separation  Contraindicated  in  Teeth  to  he  Filled 
with  Amalgam. — When  amalgam  is  used  quick  wedging  is 
contraindicated  in  any  but  small  fillings.  Unless  the  teeth 
are  kept  apart  sufficiently  long  to  overcome  the  tendency  to 
immediately  resume  their  normal  position,  any  contouring 
will  be  destroyed ;  possibly,  indeed,  the  filling  may  be  broken 
up  and  disintegrated  by  the  teeth  springing  together  as  soon 
as  the  wedge  is  removed. — D.  Linley  Palmer,  Dental  Brief. 


440  Practical  Dentistry. 

Choice  of  Filling  Material. — In  deciding  upon  the  filling 
material  for  filling  a  given  cavity,  there  should  be  taken  into 
consideration  the  size,  depth  and  location  of  the  cavity,  the 
structure  of  the  tooth,  the  supporting  tissues,  and  the  actual 
physical  condition  of  the  patient,  and  let  the  selection  be 
based  upon  logic. — C.  N.  Thompson,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Mouth  Breathing. — Mouth  breathing  is  a  very  potent 
and  common  contributory  cause  of  phthisis,  and  in  many 
cases  this  pernicious  habit  is  formed  as  the  result  of  carious 
teeth  in  early  life.  The  child  is  afraid  to  close  its  jaws, 
and  not  only  acquires  the  habit  of  bolting  its  food,  but  also, 
to  avoid  possible  painful  contact  of  the  teeth,  keeps  them 
open  sufficiently  to  part  the  Hps,  and  commences  to  breathe 
through  the  aperture  thus  formed. —  F.  Lawson  Dodd,  Brit- 
ish Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

Adhesion  of  Cements. — The  matter  of  extreme  dryness 
of  dentin  surface  is  over-emphasized  as  a  preparation  for 
cementing  an  inlay.  After  thorough  cleansing  of  ex- 
traneous substances,  such  as  mucus,  etc.,  we  should  then 
thoroughly  moisten  the  surface  with  the  liquid  of  the 
cement  we  are  about  to  use,  or  possibly  better,  some  plain 
syrupy  phosphoric  acid,  securing  the  displacement  of  oil  in 
all  inequalities  of  the  surface,  removing  all  possible  surplus 
by  air  blast  or  absorbents.  Success  depends  on  having  no 
excess  of  liquid. — W.  V.  B.  Ames,  Dental  Hints. 

Action  of  Arsenic  on  Soft  Tissues — Antidote. — In  the 
tincture  of  iodin  we  have  an  antidote  of  which  the  action 
is  so  certain  and  prompt  in  arresting  inflammation  and 
ulceration,  caused  by  the  accidental  contact  of  arsenic  tri- 
oxid  with  the  gums  and  cheek,  that  I  regard  it  almost  as  a 
specific.  If  those  who  use  arsenic  estimate  at  their  full  value 
the  terrible  ravages  that  may  be  caused  by  it,  and  know  how 
easily  they  may  be  arrested,  it  is  inexcusable,  if  not  criminal, 
to  permit  a  case  to  go  on  to  necrosis  of  the  bony  structure. 
— A.  N.  Dick,  Pacific  Med.  Den.  Gazette. 


General  Information.  44^ 

Death  from  Alveolar  Abscess. — When  not  caused  di- 
rectly from  extraordinarily  high  temperature,  death  from 
alveolar  abscess  is  due  to  septicemia — the  direct  result  of 
poisoning  of  the  general  system  by  products  absorbed  from 
the  area  of  suppuration.  Deaths  from  this  cause  should  be 
reported  in  our  dental  journals. — G.  V.  Black,  North- 
•western  Dental  Journal. 

Tooth-massage. — It  is  to  my  mind  a  question  whether 
it  is  advisable  by  excessive  use  of  pumice  to  rub  away  the 
enamel  cuticle  at  points  of  the  tooth  which  are  susceptible 
to  decay  as  I  have  found  that  the  destruction  of  this  mem- 
brane involves  an  increase  of  susceptibility  of  the  tooth  to 
decay. — W.  D.  Miller^  British  Dental  Journal. 

Difficult  Eruption  of  Third  Molars. — Prompt  excision 
of  the  entire  hood  of  gum  tissue  is  called  for.  The  resec- 
tion of  the  gum  should  be  so  thorough  as  to  completely  ex- 
pose the  four  sides  of  the  tooth;  the  blood-letting  itself  is 
beneficial.  In  a  large  percentage  of  cases  the  tooth  can  be 
brought  into  proper  alignment  and  occlusion  and  under 
such  circumstances  there  is  no  valid  excuse  for  its  extrac- 
tion.— M.  L.  Rhine^  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pulpless  Deciduous  Teeth. — For  little  children,  when 
you  cannot  be  as  thorough  as  you  would  wish,  I  use  carbolic 

acid  and  iodin  in  equal  parts  covered  up  indefinitely  with 
gutta-percha.  This  in  cases  where  they  simply  will  not 
have  anything  else  done. — H.  N.  Jackson,  Dental  Review. 

Carbolic  Acid  in  the  Treatment  of  Burns. — Applied  to 
the  normal  tissue  pure  carbolic  acid  acts  as  an  escharotic, 
but  on  a  burned  surface  its  escharotic  action  is  neutralized 
by  the  albumin  effusion  delaying  coagulation,  local  anaes- 
thesia of  the  peripheral  nerves  taking  place.  The  general 
result  is  the  aseptic  exclusion  of  air  and  coagulation  of  the 
serum  effusion,  the  healing  process  taking  place  with  less 
suffering,  and  in  a  shorter  time,  than  of  any  other  method. — 
J.  L.  MuENCH,  Medical  Nezus. 
29 


442  Practical  Dentistry. 

Clean  Burs. — Burs  are  easily  cleaned,  without  dulling 
cutting  edges,  by  being  held  against  a  revolving  wheel  of 
soft  wood  such  as  is  used  for  carrying  pumice  in  polishing 
plates. — Dental  Hints. 

Removal  of  Tartar  by  Lactic  Acid. — Acids  can  only  be 
regarded  as  adjuvants  to  instrumentation.  They  cannot  be 
depended  upon  alone  to  completely  remove  the  deposit. 
Lactic  acid  has  certain  advantages  not  possessed  by  sul- 
phuric acid ;  it  is  less  escharotic  in  proper  dilution  and  has 
the  decided  advantage  of  directly  dissolving  the  calcareous 
salts  without  chemically  decomposing  them  and  forming 
insoluble  compounds. — E.  C.  Kirk,  Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Care  of  Creosote. — To  retain  the  full  strength  and 
medicinal  qualities  of  creosote,  it  must  be  kept  in  a  bottle 
of  white  glass,  sealed  with  a  glass  stopper,  and  placed 
where  it  may  receive  the  light  of  the  sun.  If  kept  in  a 
dark-colored  bottle,  hidden  away  from  daylight,  it  de- 
teriorates.— B.  J.  CiGRAND,  Dental  Hcadlii^ht. 

Adrenalin. — The  action  of  adrenalin  in  stimulating  the 
heart  and  therefore  in  resuscitating  a  patient  who  is  suffer- 
ing from  heart-failure  under  an  anaesthetic  is  extremely 
valuable.  In  addition  to  the  use  of  the  other  agents  we  have 
it  will  no  doubt  render  the  operating-table  much  more  safe 
than  it  has  been  in  times  past. — Joseph  Head,  Items  of 
Interest. 

Care  of  Hypodermic  Syringe. — This  little  instrument 
should  never  be  allowed  to  become  dry,  this  evidently  being 
the  cause  of  the  annoyance  which  you  experience.  As  a 
preventive,  put  a  few  drops  of  glycerin  in  the  syringe  after 
using  it;  this  will  keep  the  leather  soft  and  will  act  as  a 
lubricant  to  the  instrument.  In  case  you  neglect  to  do  this 
and  the  leather  is  dry,  soften  it  by  immersing  in  cold  water 
(never  in  hot  water  for  this  purpose),  then  allow  it  to  re- 
main in  a  glycerin  bath  for  some  time. — Dental  Brief. 


General  Information.  443 

To  Increase  the  Durability  of  Oxyphosphate  of  Zinc 
Fillings. — Add  oxid  of  iron,  in  the  form  of  the  finest  rouge, 
to  the  oxid  of  zinc  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  the 
former  to  six  or  ten  of  the  latter,  shaking  the  two  powders 
together  in  a  test-tube.  The  dark  red  color  is  no  objec- 
tion to  its  use  in  many  places. — Wm.  Rollins,  International 
Dental  Journal. 

Alveolar  Abscess  in  Deciduous  Teeth. — One  of  the  sim- 
plest problems  we  have  to  meet  is  the  treatment  of  an  ab- 
scessed deciduous  tooth.  Protect  the  mouth  with  bibulous 
paper;  then  fill  the  pulp  cavity  with  carbolic  acid,  ninety- 
five  per  cent.  Cover  it  with  gutta-percha  and  gradually 
force  it  down  into  the  cavity,  when  the  carbolic  acid  will  be 
forced  through  the  canal.  Apply  alcohol  imm.ediately  to 
neutralize  the  acid. — J.  N.  Crouse. 

To  Prevent  Rust. — Paraffin  oil  is  the  best  preservative 
against  rust.  The  most  convenient  way  of  applying  it  is  to 
dissolve  one  part  of  the  oil  in  200  parts  of  benzin,  plung- 
ing the  instruments  into  the  solution  after  being  thoroughly 
dried  and  warm.  Allow  the  benzin  to  evaporate  in  a  dry 
room. — Medical  Standard. 

Death  from  Alveolar  Abscess. — ^A  young  man,  who  had 
always  been  delicate,  complained  of  toothache  and  it  was 
found  that  an  abscess  had  formed  in  the  jaw.  This  was 
lanced  and  morphia  was  injected,  but  the  young  man  sud- 
denly collapsed  and  later  on  died.  "(Edema  of  the  glottis, 
due  to  cellulitis  of  the  neck,  consequent  upon  a  decayed 
tooth,"  was  the  verdict  of  the  Coroner's  jury. — Denial 
Record. 

Formalin  Cement. — Mix  equal  parts  of  formalin  and  the 
phosphoric  acid  with  which  the  zinc  oxid  is  incorporated. 
Dawson's  cement  is  preferable,  as  it  is  non-sticky.  For  fill- 
ing pulp  chambers  after  pulp  amputation. — Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 


444  Practical  Dentistry. 

Removal  of  Gum  Tissue  Over  Third  Molar. — I  use  a 
rotary  trephine  knife  in  the  engine,  and  it  works  well.  The 
beauty  of  it  is  you  not  only  cut,  but  you  take  your  chips 
with  you.  I  use  a  local  application  of  guaiacol  on  the 
surface  first. — W.  A.  Price,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

A  Counter-irritant. — I  instruct  my  patients  to  mix  a 
little  ginger,  red  pepper  and  mustard,  and  sprinkle  a  little 
on  the  fleshy  part  of  a  raisin,  and  then  roast  the  raisin. 
This  is  an  easy  method  of  making  a  capital  capsicum  plaster 
in  case  of  emergency.  It  acts  like  a  charm  generally,  and 
is  more  effective  than  the  roasted  raisin  by  itself. — H.  E. 
Roberts,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Check  Flow  of  Saliva. — In  filling  lower  third  molars, 
when  it  is  found  impracticable  to  place  rubber-dam,  the  an- 
noyance of  excessive  flow  of  saliva  may  be  overcome  by  the 
administration  of  sulphate  of  atropin,  yf  gr.,  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  before  appointment.  The  mouth  will 
be  found  dry,  though  not  uncomfortably  so. — H.  Otis 
LoQUE,  Southern  Dental  Journal. 

To  Clean  the  Mixing  Slab. — A  piece  of  wet  pumice- 
stone  will  remove  cement  from  the  mixing  slab  with  neat- 
ness and  dispatch. — Geo.  M.  C.  Barnard,  Dental  Digest. 

Treatment  of  Tooth  with  Fungous  Growth  of  Pulp. — 

Crystals  of  trichloracetic  acid  applied  to  pulp  and  left  five 
minutes ;  growth  removed  with  sharp  spoon  excavator ; 
cavity  wiped  with  phenol-sodique,  and  dressing  of  iodin 
applied  to  stump  and  sealed  with  temporary  stopping  oi 
gutta-percha.  After  three  days  iodin  dressing  renewed, 
and  at  the  third  sitting — one  week  from  the  first  treatment — 
the  balance  of  the  pulp  was  removed  almost  painlessly.  The 
canals  were  cleansed  with  sterilized  broaches,  injected  with 
hydrogen  peroxid,  and  a  temporary  dressing  of  iodoform  and 
oil  of  cloves  sealed  in.  The  canals  were  filled  a  week  later, 
followed  by  permanent  filling  three  days  after. — J.  R.  Mar- 
tinez, International  Dental  Journal. 


General  Information.  445 

Coloring  Cements  to  Match,  the  Tooth. — Use  a  num- 
ber of  highly-colored  lead-pencils.  To  get  the  required 
shade,  the  pencil  is  passed  a  few  strokes  over  the 
ground-glass  slab;  the  necessary  amount  of  liquid  is  then 
poured  on  the  slab  and  thoroughly  incorporated  with  the 
pigments.  The  powder  is  then  added  and  thoroughly 
mixed.  An  absolutely  white  oxid  of  zinc  powder  is  best 
to  start  with  as  a  basis,  tinting  with  blue,  green,  or  red 
pencils,  shading  with  the  black  lead-pencil. — M.  Belchur, 
Dental  OiHce  and  Laboratory. 

Obliterated  Canals. — It  has  been  held  that  no  danger 
could  arise  from  an  undisturbed  "obliterated"  canal,  but  the 
contrary  has  been  my  experience.  I  have  found,  within 
one-half  of  a  line  of  the  apical  foramen,  an  open  canal  con- 
taining pus,  showing  the  presence  of  pathological  germs. 
*  *  *  Is  it  not  possible  that  microorganisms  can  move 
along  the  line  of  the  obliterated  canal  down  to  the  point 
where  an  open  canal  presents  itself  and  infect  it? — J.  H. 
WooLEY,  Dental  Review. 

Recurrence  of  Decay. — There  is  seldom,  if  ever,  a  recur- 
rence of  decay  about  an  inlay,  whether  porcelain  or  gold, 
where  we  have  a  thin  line  of  cement,  practically  no  line  at 
all,  the  cement  will  not  wash  out.  If  the  line  is  sufficiently 
large  to  allow  of  washing,  with  the  disintegration  of  the 
cement  the  inlay  will  loosen  and  drop  out  before  decay  has 
a  chance  to  set  in,  while  under  apparently  good  gold  fillings 
decay  will  frequently  be  found  going  on  beneath  the  gold. — 
O.  L.  Le  Cron,  The  Dental  Record. 

Dental  Odors. — Drug  odors  add  to  the  office,  in  the 
mind  of  many  sensitive  patients,  still  more  repugnancy  than 
they  already  have  from  fear.  It  is  my  habit  to  spray  a  weak 
solution  of  spirits  of  lavender,  fumigating,  so  to  speak,  the 
entire  breadth  and  length  of  the  operating  room.  Com- 
pressed air  does  this  admirably;  the  room  smells  sweet  and 
fresh  and  the  air  is  by  far  more  agreeable. — Geo.  Zedu- 
HANNE,  Dental  Digest. 


446  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cataphoresis — The  Negative  Pole. — I  do  not  have  the 
patient  hold  the  negative  pole  in  the  hand,  as  the  hand  is 
calloused  and  affords  great  resistance  to  the  current.  I 
attach  the  negative  pole  to  a  piece  of  air-chamber  metal, 
about  five  inches  long  and  one-and-a-half  wide,  covered  with 
linen  cloth  and  cotton,  and  placed  around  the  neck  of  the 
patient. — S.  L.  Strickland,  Pacific  Stom.  Gazette. 

Salivation. — Potassium  chlorate,  55  per  cent.,  is  better 
for  the  mouth  where  mercury  has  been  used  than  anything 
I  know.  It  counteracts  the  action  of  germs,  will  heal  up 
ulcerations  and  prevent  salivation.  We  meet  this  condition 
right  along,  and  possibly  50  per  cent,  of  the  dentists  treat 
it  as  pyorrhea. — I.  M.  Rosenthal,  Dental  Summary. 

Sodium  Dioxid. — Sodium  dioxid  is  chiefly  employed  in 
dentistry  as  a  bleaching  agent,  but  will,  through  its  alkaline 
and  caustic  properties,  obtund  sensitive  dentin.  The  only 
safe  way  to  use  sodium  dioxid  for  either  purpose  is  to  make 
a  saturated  solution  in  water,  as  much  heat  is  generated, 
sometimes  accompanied  by  ignition,  when  the  dry  powder 
is  brought  in  contact  with  moisture  in  a  tooth. — Dental 
Brief. 

Aluminum  as  a  Whetting  Agent. — Though  a  metal, 
aluminum  possesses  the  structure  of  a  fine  stone,  has  a 
strong  dissolving  power,  and  develops  upon  use  for  honing 
an  exceedingly  fine  metal-setting  substance  of  greasy  feel, 
while  showing  great  adhesion  to  steel.  Knives,  etc.,  treated 
with  it  quickly  obtain  such  a  fine  razor-like  edge  that  even 
the  best  whetstone  cannot  produce  a  like  result. — Medical 
Times. 

The  Essential  Oils. — The  application  of  the  essential 
oils  should  be  preceded  by  thorough  dehydration  of  the  hard 
dental  tissues  by  means  of  alcohol  and  warm  air,  but  the 
use  of  heat  after  the  oils  have  been  carried  into  the  tooth 
is  not  only  useless,  but  is  detrimental,  as  the  effect  of  the 
application  is  diminished  in  proportion  to  the  amount  vola- 
tilized.— Julio  Endelman,  Dental  Cosmos. 


General  Information.  447 

Cataphoresis — The  Negative  Electrode. — I  do  not  put 
the  negative  on  the  wrist,  but  place  it  in  the  mouth.  It  is 
made  of  a  copper  bah  placed  under  the  rubber-dam.  To 
hold  the  electrodes  in  the  mouth,  I  use  an  apparatus  some- 
thing like  the  gag  used  when  giving  gas.  It  is  placed  with- 
in the  jaws  and  has  a  universal  motion,  so  that  the  positive 
electrodes  can  be  placed  wherever  desired. — Dr.  Elliott, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Clean  Smooth-surfaced  Instruments. — Score  a  block 
of  soft  pine  to  the  depth  of  three-eighths  of  an  inch  and 
fill  the  cuts  with  fine  pumice  in  one-half  and  chalk,  rotten 
stone  or  rouge  in  the  other  half.  Force  tarnished  or 
coated  instruments  into  one  of  the  cuts,  and  hone  back 
and  forth  until  the  extraneous  matter  is  removed.  Re- 
serve one  portion  of  the  cuts  for  instruments  and  for  gold 
work. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Green  Stain. — Green  stain,  so  commonly  occurring  upon 
children's  teeth,  disintegrates  the  tooth-structure  and  should 
be  removed.  This  can  be  easily  done  with  a  rubber  disc 
and  pumice,  moistened  with  hydrogen  dioxid. — G.  P.  Men- 
dell,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Tooth  Preservation. — If  a  tooth  is  filled  with  cement 
and  the  surface  protected  with  a  thin  layer  of  gold,  we  have 
a  filling  which  will  preserve  the  tooth  better  than  any  other ; 
there  will  be  no  yellow  showing  through  thin  enamel  walls, 
no  thermal  changes  affecting  the  pulp;  it  will  not  disinte- 
grate by  means  of  the  acids  of  the  mouth,  but  will  form  a 
water-tight  plug  and  keep  its  shape  with  an  edge  as  perfect 
as  any  filling  yet  devised. — C.  E.  Brown,  The  Dental 
Record. 

Steel  Instruments. — Medicaments  injurious  to  steel  in- 
struments may  be  carried  to  place  in  root-canals  on  absorb- 
ent cotton  and  pressed  up  with  a  sharpened  wood  toothpick 
which  has  been  soaked  in  cassia,  which  renders  it  elastic. — 
S.  J.  Fernandez,  Dental  Cosmos. 


448  Practical  Dentistry. 

Bleaching  Stained  Enamel  of  Live  Teeth. — Isolate  with 
rubber-dam  and  tho roughly  desiccate  the  tooth.  Apply  over 
the  stain  cotton  soaked  in  pyrozone  (twenty-five  per  cent, 
solution)  and  drive  pyrozone  steam  into  the  enamel  by  the 
application  to  the  cotton  of  a  broad,  flat,  hot  instrument, 
until  the  enamel  is  thoroughly  infiltrated.  Nascent  oxygen 
being  let  loose  within  the  enamel  itself,  a  distinct  whitening 
is  perceptible.  The  most  troublesome  stains  are  encountered 
between  the  ages  of  twenty-five  and  forty,  when  the  hot 
instrument  can  be  used  with  comparative  ease. — Joseph 
Head,  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Saliva. — It  is  a  fact  worth  noting  that  each  healthy 
individual's  saliva  is  not  dangerous  to  himself,  even  in 
wounds  elsewhere  than  in  the  mouth,  though  this  secretion 
would  be  perilous  to  another  individual.  Probablv  the 
reason  for  this  is  a  continual  inoculation. — R.  H.  M.  Daw- 
barn,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Cocain  and  its  Antidote. — A  successful  antidote  must 
antagonize  the  paralyzing  effect  of  cocain  upon  the  heart, 
blood-vessels,  respiration,  etc.  It  should  comprise  in  its 
physiological  action  the  merits  of  digitalis  or  strophanthus, 
belladonna,  ergot,  calabar  bean,  etc.  In  its  effects  upon 
the  circulation  and  respiration,  volasem,  which  is  an  ex- 
tract of  violet,  resembles  the  principal  action  of  these 
drugs.  Its  effect  is  manifested  so  quickly  and  surely  that, 
with  it,  any  required  strength  and  amount  of  cocain  can 
be  safety  used. — G.  Lenox  Curtis,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Capsicum  Bags. — Capsicum  bags  should  be  made  with 
one  side  of  rubber,  to  protect  the  cheek ;  the  other  of  muslin, 
to  permit  the  fluids  of  the  mouth  to  enter,  dissolve,  and  act 
on  the  tissues  covering  the  root  or  roots  of  the  teeth  against 
which  the  muslin  side  of  the  bag  is  placed.  The  so-called 
capsicum  plasters  sold  by  drug  stores  are  not  very  strong, 
and  are  really  worthless  for  the  purpose  of  counter-irrita- 
tion.— Leo  Greenbaum.  International  Dental  Journal. 


General  Information.  449 

A  Reinforced  Wedge. — This  form  of  wedge  is  particu- 
larly applicable  for  cases  wherein  it  becomes  necessary  to 
wedge  across  wide  spaces,  as  in  regaining  the  space  of  a 
missing  tooth.  It  consists  of  the  usual  piece  of  cotton- 
wood  which  has  been  compressed  with  the  pliers  or  vise 
and  carved  to  the  desired  size  and  shape.  Through  the 
wedge  thus  prepared  a  hole  is  drilled,  and  into  it  is  threaded 
and  compressed  a  large  piece  of  ordinary  separating  rubber. 
The  principle  of  it  is^  that  after  the  wood  has  expanded  to 
its  limit  it  will  relieve  the  pressure  on  the  rubber,  which 
will  attempt  to  resume  its  original  shape,  thus  forcing  the 
sides  of  the  wedge  farther  apart. — Frederick  Crosby 
Brush,  Dental  Brief. 

Protection  of  Soft  Tissues  when  Applying  Arsenic. — 

In  all  cases  requiring  the  application  of  arsenic  protect  the 
gum  by  isolating  the  tooth,  using  the  rubber-dam  when- 
ever possible,  and  the  next  best  material  in  its  stead  in  cases 
when  the  rubber  cannot  be  used — which  cases  are  very  few. 
My  choice  of  the  other  materials  is  in  the  following  order : 
Absorbent  rolls,  small  antiseptic  doilies,  or  a  small  pad  of 
bibulous  paper,  held  in  place  on  the  buccal  and  lingual  sur- 
faces of  the  gum  clo^e  to  the  neck  of  the  tooth  with  firm 
pressure  by  the  thumb  and  fingers  of  the  left  hand;  and 
everything  being  ready  this  need  not  be  removed  until  the 
operation  is  complete. — Frederick  I.  Bartlett,  Dental 
Brief. 

Bleaching  with  Sodium  Dioxid. — Adjust  dam,  place 
platinum  about  the  tooth,  and  with  warmed  white  gutta- 
percha form  a  pocket  about  the  cavity,  and  with  small  gold 
or  platinum  spoon  place  sodium  dioxid  powder  in  the  cav- 
ity, forcing  it  down  with  a  glass  instrument.  Drop  dis- 
tilled water  upon  it  and  cover  with  a  platinum  ribbon,  forc- 
ing the  generated  oxygen  into  the  dentin.  Repeat  if  neces- 
sary. Burnish  a  paste  of  precipitate  calcium  phosphate  and 
distilled  water  into  the  lower  third  of  the  root  and  against 
all  exposed  dentin.  Use  light-colored  cement  as  basis  for 
the  filling. — J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Revietv. 


450  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painful  Eruption  of  Third  Molars. — In  the  treatment 
of  gingival  and  buccal  inflammation  due  to  the  pathologic 
eruption  of  the  third  molar,  the  careful  application  of  Nord- 
hausen  sulphuric  acid  decreases  the  pain  and  reduces  the 
inflammation,  and  is  easier  to  carry  out  than  the  customary 
deep  lancing  of  the  overlying  gum  flap.  Observe  strictly 
the  precautions  usual  with  caustic  agents  within  the  mouth. 
Its  action  should  be  limited  to  a  definite  area. — Pierre 
Robin,  La  Revue  de  Stomatologie. 

Caries  or  Necrosis. — There  is  a  distinct  difl^erentiation 
between  caries  and  necrosis,  and  when  necrosis  has  ensued 
no  operation  should  be  made  until  a  line  of  demarcation  has 
established  itself.  In  other  words,  no  surgical  interference 
with  the  part  should  be  made  until  the  line  of  demarcation 
has  made  it  safe.  In  case  of  caries  it  is  quite  a  diflferent 
thing.  We  can  use  our  curette  or  bur  and  remove  the 
carious  bone  without  hesitation. — C.  E.  Bentley,  Dental 
Rezicw. 

Tempering  Steel  Tools. — Two  cold-chisels,  heated  to  a 
cherry-red  and  tempered — the  one  in  a  solution  of  carbolic 
acid  and  the  other  in  water — were  set  to  work  on  extra  hard 
wrought  iron.  It  was  found  that  the  one  tempered  in  water 
became  notched  after  a  short  time,  while  the  one  tempered  in 
carbolic  acid  remained  perfectly  intact. — M.  LEV.^T,  The 
Engineer. 

Dental  Decay. — Miller  says  there  are  four  ways  in 
which  we  can  counteract  or  limit  the  ravages  of  dental  decay. 
First,  by  hygienic  measures  to  secure  the  best  possible  de- 
velopment of  teeth ;  second,  by  repeated,  though  systematic, 
cleansing  of  the  oral  cavity  and  the  teeth ;  third,  by  prohibit- 
ing or  limiting  the  consumption  of  such  food  and  luxuries 
as  rapidly  undergo  acid  fermentation ;  fourth,  by  the  proper 
and  intelligent  use  of  antiseptics  to  destroy  the  bacteria,  or 
at  least  to  limit  their  number  and  activity. — H.  C.  Register, 
Items  of  Interest. 


General  Information.  451 

Broken  Broach  in  Root-canal. — Make  no  effort  to  re- 
move it  by  instrumentation,  but  at  once  fill  the  canal  with 
sulphuric  acid  (50  per  cent,  solution),  and  fill  the  crown 
cavity  or  pulp  chamber  with  sodium  bicarbonate  solution. 
As  the  alkali  makes  its  way  rootward  successive  explosions 
of  carbonic  acid  gas  will  occur,  and  eventually  gas  will  be 
formed  beyond  the  broken  broach,  and  the  latter  will  come 
up  into  the  crown  cavity  in  a  boiling,  frothy  mass  of  mat- 
ter.— J.  R.  Callahan,  Indiana  Dental  Journal. 

Remote  Results  of  Diseased  Deciduous  Teeth. — M.  Pari- 
naud  has  shown  that  very^  slight  dental  lesions,  especially 
at  the  age  when  the  deciduous  teeth  are  being  lost,  may  be 
the  starting  point  of  osseous  and  periosteal  disease  of  the 
lower  border  of  the  orbit,  and  of  fistulas  in  the  region  of 
the  lachrymal  duct  and  the  lower  eyelid;  also  of  periostitis 
of  the  nasal  canal.  Intimate  relations  exist  between  the 
canine  tooth  and  tfie  orbital  and  lachrymal  regions. — Alph. 
PiCKiN,  La  Monde  Dentaire. 

Nitrate  of  Silver  Fibre. — Soak  long-fibre  absorbent  cot- 
ton in  a  saturated  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver.  Allow  the 
water  to  evaporate  and  repeat  the  soaking  twice.  When 
dry  it  is  ready  for  use,  in  a  convenient  form  for  applying 
underneath  the  gum  margin  or  in  pyorrhcea  pockets.  A 
small  pellet  may  be  placed  in  a  shallow  cavity  to  arrest 
decay,  etc. — John  I.  Hart,  Dental  Digest. 

Cataphoresis — In  Bleaching. — The  discolored  tooth  was 
a  great  disfigurement.  I  found  the  canal  putrescent,  treated 
it  and  filled  the  upper  portion  with  gutta-percha.  I  used 
25  per  cent,  pyrozone  in  the  pulp  cavity  and  applied  the  posi- 
tive electrode.  The  patient  could  feel  a  little  tingling  sen- 
sation about  the  apex  of  the  root.  In  ten  minutes  the  pa- 
tient had  turned  on  twelve  volts.  In  a  few  moments  I  could 
see  the  tooth  turning  white.  In  twenty  minutes  the  dis- 
coloration was  entirely  removed. — F.  L.  Platt,  Pacific 
Stoni.  Gazette. 


452  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painless  Operations. — From  the  patient's  standpoint, 
painless  operations  may  mean  larger  fees  to  pay,  but  not  in 
such  proportion  as  to  make  them  less  desirable.  They  may 
contribute  to  his  good  health,  more  comfort,  more  nerve 
strength,  more  happiness  and  more  durable  work.  From 
the  dentist's  standpoint,  it  will  be  so  profitable  in  every  way 
that,  almost  without  exception,  he  would  leave  the  practice 
of  dentistry  rather  than  return  to  his  former,  more  painful 
methods. — W.  A.  Price,  Dentists'  Magazine. 

Bleaching  Teeth — Cataphoresis. — So  far  we  have  all 
been  bleaching  with  pyrozone,  with  "the  cart  before  the 
horse."  We  have  made  use  of  the  positive  electrode  in  the 
tooth.  Experiment  has  demonstrated  that  the  negative  elec- 
trode should  be  substituted.  This  is  in  accord  with  the  law 
of  electrical  osmosis — the  electrically  disrupted  free  oxygen 
of  the  pyrozone,  being  electro-negative,  will  seek  the  posi- 
tive pole. — F.  W.  Low,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Gutta-percha  as  a  Filling  Material. — Gutta-percha 
makes  a  foul-smelling  filling  and  is  the  worst  of  any  to 
finish  up,  but  there  is  no  doubt  in  my  mind  but  that  it  is 
the  best  preservative  of  any  of  the  filling  materials  used  to- 
day. An  old  gutta-percha  filling  smells  bad  and  looks  bad, 
but  it  saves  the  tooth  structure. — Chas.  H.  Gerrish,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Massage  of  the  Gums. — In  inflammation  of  the  gums, 
and  other  disturbed  circulation  about  the  gingivae,  massage 
with  the  ball  of  the  finger  will  be  found  very  useful.  It 
presses  the  blood  out  of  the  distended  capillaries,  hurries 
the  circulation  in  the  sluggish  blood-vessels,  gives  tone  to 
the  whole  local  territory,  reestablishing  the  nutrient  currents 
and  promoting  resolution  in  inflammation. — W.  E.  Barrett, 
Dental  Weekly. 

Aid  to  the  Saliva  Ejector. — A  small  piece  of  wet,  anti- 
septic gauze  placed  over  end  of  the  saliva  ejector  will  prevent 
the  tissues  from  being  drawn  in. — E.  C.  Kroeck,  Dental 
Brief. 


General  Information.  453 

"Dry  Socket." — In  a  case  of  extreme  pain  in  the  face 
and  in 'the  teeth  of  both  maxillse  resembhng  pulp  irritation, 
following  extraction  of  a  third  molar,  examination  two  days 
later  showed  the  alveolus  from  which  the  tooth  had  been 
removed  to  be  devoid  of  normal  coagulum  and  the  bone 
bare.  The  socket  was  filled  with  a  stiff  dough-like  paste 
made  of  orthoform  combined  with  oil  of  sesame  and 
glycerin.  This  gave  nearly  immediate  reliefj — Interna- 
tional Dental  Journal. 

To  Preserve  Rubber-dam. — Fill  a  Mason  jar  with  pure 
(boiled)  water,  adding  a  few  drops  of  an  antiseptic.  Im- 
merse a  loose  roll  of  rubber-dam,  in  an  upright  position, 
shaking  all  the  air  out  from  between  the  folds  before  screw- 
ing on  the  top.  Have  it  full  to  overflowing  to  exclude  all 
air.  For  use,  cut  off  the  desired  amount,  dry  and  rub 
down  with  talcum  powder. — A.  P.  Tscherner,  Dental  Era. 

Separating  Rubber  as  a  Wedge  for  the  Matrix. — By 

putting  a  little  vaselin  on  the  rubber  it  can  be  stretched 
out  and  slipped  between  the  matrix  and  the  adjacent  tooth, 
forcing  the  matrix  to  place  along  the  cervical  margin,  yet 
yielding  enough  to  allow  the  filHng  material  to  cover  the 
margin  at  that  point  and  still  spread  the  teeth  enough  to 
allow  you  to  give  the  natural  contour. — C.  J.  Sowle,  Dental 
Digest. 

Cement  Limitations. — No  manufacturer  knows  how  to 
make  a  cement  for  the  dentist  who  doesn't  know  how  to  mix 
it,  and  won't  learn.  As  the  worst  bread  may  be  made  from 
the  best  flour,  so  an  inferior  cement  may  be  made  from  the 
best  materials.  You  must  select  the  best  cement  and  you 
must  mix  it  right. — Dental  Brief. 

A  Very  Dense  Cement. — Dr.  Dunn,  Sr.  (Florence,  Italy), 
incorporates  a  small  amount  of  porcelain  dust  (pounding  old 
porcelain  teeth  fine)  with  cement.  Makes  a  very  dense  fill- 
ing, with  a  hard,  flint-like  surface,  especially  useful  on  masti- 
cating surfaces. — Am.  Den.  Weekly. 


454  Practical  Dentistry. 

Silver  Nitrate:  Caution. — The  use  of  silver  nitrate  in 
the  mouth  requires  caution.  In  case  of  accident  its  action 
upon  soft  tissue  can  be  almost  instantaneously  checked  by 
promptly  applying  sodium  chlorid,  thus  forming  the  insol- 
uble silver  chlorid.  Extemporaneously,  nitrate  of  silver 
may  be  prepared  by  dipping  a  silver  wire  into  nitric  acid 
and  thus  applying  it  to  the  tissues. — Hermann  Prinz,  Den- 
tal Digest. 

Mercurial  Poisoning  a  Warning. — Dentists  are  fre- 
quently in  the  habit  of  shaking  the  expressed  mercury  from 
freshly  mixed  amalgam  upon  the  office  floor.  These  little 
globules  of  mercury  w^ill  roll  under  the  adjacent  furniture 
or  become  lodged  in  the  folds  of  the  carpet  and  the  curtains, 
and  their  evaporation  may  bring  about  a  local  mercurial 
poisoning. — Hermann  Prinz,  Dental  Era. 

To  Remove   Gutta-percha  Points  from   Root-canals. — 

Roughen  the  point  of  an  Evans  root-canal  dryer;  heat  the 
bulb  and  pass  the  point  slowly  into  the  canal.  Cool  the  bulb 
with  a  wet  sponge,  and  on  removing  the  point  the  gutta- 
percha will  come  with  it. — R.  B.  Gentle,  Indiana  Dental 
Journal. 

Prevention  of  X-Ray  Burns. — A  sheet  of  aluminum,  if 
grounded  and  placed  between  the  tube  and  the  patient,  will 
prevent  the  burn,  while  interfering  in  no  way  with  the 
X-Ray  phenomena. — C.  L.  Leonard,  Journal  Am.  Med. 
Association. 

Oxalic  Acid  for  Bleaching. — A  strong  solution  of  oxalic 
acid  introduced  in  a  cavity  and  the  use  of  a  hot  air-syringe 
will  bleach  a  tooth  as  quickly  as  any  other  agent.  To  take 
away  the  effect  of  the  acid  use  carbonate  of  potassium 
afterward. — Dr.  Lichel,  Stomatological  Gazette. 

Antidote  for  Chloroform  Poisoning. — Dilute  hydro- 
cyanic acid  is  the  quickest  and  most  efficient  antidote  to 
chloroform  poisoning.  A  full  dose  should  be  dropped  from 
a  drop-tube  on  the  back  of  the  tongue. — Journal  of  Medi- 
cine. 


Genera!  Information.  455 

TJninflammable  Celluloid. — If  two  solutions — one  of  one 
part  ordinary  celluloid  in  ten  parts  of  acetone — the  other  of 
two  parts  powdered  chlorid  of  magnesium  in  six  parts  of 
alcohol — are  made  each  into  a  paste,  and  then  carefully 
mixed  and  dried,  an  uninflammable  celluloid  is  obtained. 
— Chemist  and  Druggist. 

Peridental  Abscesses. — Many  peridental  abscesses,  fol- 
lowing la  grippe  with  antral  inflammation,  which  will  not 
yield  to  ordinary  treatment,  will  succumb  to  electricity,  the 
positive  pole  being  applied  over  the  Gasserian  ganglion,  the 
negative  pole  being  held  in  the  hand  of  the  patient. — R.  H. 
HoFHEiNz,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Acute  Inflammation  of  the  Peridental  Membrane. — Be- 
ing assured  that  the  apex  of  the  root  is  open,  or  filled  only 
with  moisture,  in  all  cases  even  before  the  formation  of  pus, 
place  in  the  pulp  chamber  a  piece  of  solidified  formaldehyd 
the  size  of  a  pin  head  and  seal  in ;  relief  will  come  immedi- 
ately or  within  a  few  hours,  all  causes  of  congestion  being 
completely  killed. — F.  B.  Lawrence,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

Odontalgia. — A  good  remedy  for  odontalgia  is  chlore- 
tone  dissolved  in  oil  of  cloves.  Twenty-five  per  cent,  of 
chloretone  will  make  about  a  saturated  solution.  The  well- 
known  sedative  effect  of  oil  of  cloves,  combined  with  the 
local  anaesthetic  and  antiseptic  action  of  chloretone,  makes 
this  combination  particularly  effective. — C.  H.  Oakman, 
Dental  Reziezv. 

Glycerin  and  Rosewater. — A  bottle  of  glycerin  diluted 
to  half  strength  with  rosewater  should  be  kept  on  hand 
constantly.  Applied  to  the  patient's  lips  before  operating 
it  overcomes  any  tendency  to  become  sore.  Smeared  over 
the  holes  in  rubber-dam  it  facilitates  passage  between  the 
teeth  and  is  much  less  objectionable  than  soap  or  vaselin. — 
Dental  Reviezv. 


456  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painful  Erupting  Third  Molars. — Eucalyptol  and  aristol 
paste  packed  under  the  inflamed  tissue  over  an  erupting 
third  molar  will  be  found  beneficial.  Hot  carbolized  water 
thrown  upon  the  inflamed  tissue  before  applying  the  paste 
will  often  cause  a  cessation  of  the  pain. — A.  H.  Peck, 
Dental  Review. 

Value  of  Old  Eubber. — Old  rubber  dam  is  worth  ten  to 
twenty  cents  a  pound ;  old  bicycle  tires  are  worth  from  six 
to  eight  cents  a  pound ;  old  rubber  shoes  ten  cents  a  pound. 
Old  rubber  tubing  that  has  hardened  from  oxidation  is 
worth  nothing. — Alex.  Macpherson,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Hemorrhage. — Calcium  chlorid,  in  doses  of  from  eight 
to  sixteen  grains,  every  two  to  four  hours,  should  be  tried 
in  all  forms  of  persistent  hemorrhage,  especially  hem- 
optysis, hematuria,  etc.  This  salt  increases  the  coagula- 
bility of  the  blood,  but  if  used  more  than  three  days 
consecutively  it  has  the  opposite  effect. — Medical  Brief. 

The  Tooth-pick. — Whether  the  use  of  the  tooth-pick 
is  vulgar  or  not  depends  on  the  manner  of  its  use.  It  has 
a  valuable  function  and  should  not  be  banished  from  proper 
use.  It  is  a  valuable  aid  in  dislodging  impacted  food  which 
might  injuriously  affect  the  gums,  or  if  left,  undergo  de- 
composition, resulting  in  offensive  odors  and  dangerous 
chemical  reagents. — Dental  Register. 

A  Simple  Protector  for  the  Hot-air  Syringe. — The  metal 
portion  or  end  of  the  syringe  may  be  covered  with  a  piece 
of  white  rubber  tubing  of  the  same  diameter ;  the  tubing  to 
be  about  an  inch  shorter  than  the  metal  end.  When  in  use, 
the  tubing  is  to  be  drawn  up  on  the  metal  toward  the  bulb, 
exposing  the  tip  for  heating;  after  which  the  tubing  is 
pushed  out  so  as  to  cover  the  point,  thus  confining  the  heat 
and,  being  a  non-conductor,  effectually  preventing  the  burn- 
ing of  the  lips  or  mucous  tissue. — Frederick  Crosby 
Brush,  Dental  Brief. 


General  Information.  457 

Removal  of  Scar  from  an  Old  Abscess. — The  simplest 
way  is  to  dissect  off  the  tissue  from  where  it  is  artificially 
attached  to  the  bone  and  pack  it  away  with  gauze,  holding 
the  scar  tissue  out  a  little  more  than  level  with  the  sur- 
rounding parts  until  healing  occurs.  Massaging  the  part 
and  occasionally  using  the  electric  battery  will  aid  in  the 
removal. — Dental  Digest. 

Saws  for  the  Dental  En^ne. — Very  good  saws  can  be 
obtained  by  attaching  rachets  from  old  watches  to  the  end 
of  engine  points.  They  are  of  the  highest  tempered  steel, 
with  saw  edges  and  well  sharpened,  of  various  sizes  and 
thicknesses.  Any  jeweler  can  afford  to  furnish  them 
mounted  for  about  ten  cents  each. — J.  C.  Schuller,  Items 
of  Interest. 

Excessive  Flow  of  Saliva. — In  case  of  excessive  flow  of 
saliva  (especially  when  the  operation  is  to  be  upon  a  lower 
molar)  prescribe  a  dose  of  atropin  sulphate  (1-120  grain) 
three-quarters  of  an  hour  before  the  appointment.  This 
salt  of  atropin  has  a  much  better  effect  on  the  secretion  than 
the  ordinary  alkaloid. — H.  Otis  Logue^  Stomatologist. 

Bleaching  a  Tooth. — Clean  and  dry  the  cavity.  Then 
wet  carefully  with  distilled  boiled  water.  With  a  white-pine 
stick  whittled  to  a  long  slender  point  carry  dry  peroxid 
of  sodium  powder  into  the  cavity,  feeding  it  in  until  the  in- 
terior gets  frothy.  Keep  it  up  until  the  tooth  is  bleached, 
say  thirty  minutes.  Wash  out  with  carbonate  of  soda  one 
to  one  hundred,  and  pack  with  calcium  phosphate 
(Bulkely),  using  distilled  water  to  make  a  paste.  Fill  with 
cement  and  cover  with  gold. — Dental  Review. 

Chloro-percha  and  Cotton. — A  few  of  the  uses  found 
for  chlora-percha  and  cotton :  to  retain  medicated  applica- 
tions and  exclude  moisture  in  the  treatment  of  odontalgia; 
to  wedge  the  teeth ;  to  force  the  gum  back ;  to  assist  in 
retaining  clamps  in  position. — C.  O.  Hood,  Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 
30 


45^  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Gums;  Clinical  Diagnosis. — A  dull  purple  red, 
commencing  one-fourth  inch  from  the  gum  margin  and 
running  into  the  cheek,  can  usually  be  removed  by 
thoroughly  cleansing  the  teeth  and  massaging  the  gums 
frequently;  but  if  this  treatment  fails,  we  may  be  sure 
there  is,  or  will  be,  exostosis,  especially  when  there  are 
neuralgic  pains  in  the  temples,  connecting  back  to  the 
teeth. — Levi   C.  Taylor,  Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Disintegration  of  Cement  Fillings. — The  principal 
cause  of  the  failure  of  cement  fillings  is  the  dissolving  away 
of  the  cement  under  the  free  margin  of  the  gum,  possibly 
due  to  acids  or  alkaloids  formed  by  bacterial  fermentation 
of  enclosed  food-stuff.  Keep  the  mouth  clean,  wash  out 
as  much  as  possible  all  bacteria  and  unused  food-stuff, 
and  then  our  teeth  and  our  cement  fillings  will  last  longer. — 
J.  E.  HiNKiNS,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Escape  of  Arsenic  from  Cavity. — To  prevent  escape  of 
arsenic  from  cavity,  cut  a  small  disc  of  medium  stiff  paper; 
coat  one  side  lightly  with  sandaric  varnish  and  apply  the 
coated  side  directly  on  the  drug.  By  smoothing  the  edges 
carefully  it  effectively  seals  the  cavity  and  lessens  liability 
of  pressure  on  the  pulp. — A.  L,  Blackburn,  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

Tincture  of  Benzoin  in  Dental  Practice. — If  from  any 
cause  the  process  has  been  exposed,  pain  can  be  instantly 
relieved  by  covering  the  exposure  with  a  pellet  of  cotton 
saturated  with  tincture  of  benzoin.  The  application  is  also 
valuable  in  relieving  painful  eruption  of  third  molars. — G. 
A.  Kennedy,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Zinc  Oxyphosphate  a  Preserver  of  Pulp  Vitality. — In 
large  simple  cavities  on  the  buccal  or  occlusal  surfaces  of 
the  molars,  it  is  my  belief  that  the  vitality  of  the  tooth  is 
more  surely  conserved  by  filling  the  cavity  at  least  two-thirds 
full  of  oxyphosphate  of  zinc  cement,  prior  to  the  insertion 
of  gold  or  amalgam. — Wm.  Dwight  Tracy,  Dental  Brief. 


General  Information.  459 

"Boxings." — Instead  of  making  porcelain  inlays,  gold 
inlays,  or  immense  gold  fillings,  Dr.  George  Allan  makes  a 
light  hollow  "box"  of  very  thin  gold,  fitting  the  cavity  as 
accurately  as  possible,  perforated  at  the  bottom  with  many 
small  holes  and  filled  with  oxyphosphate,  which  also  cements 
the  "box"  into  place. — Dental  Reviezv. 

Shrinkage  of  Chloro-percha. — Chloro-percha  should  be 
supplanted  by  a  mixture  of  gutta-percha  and  eucalyptus; 
the  solution  is  easily  made,  and  with  the  aid  of  a  little  heat 
is  always  ready  for  use.  It  is  a  splendid  lubricant  and  anti- 
septic.— G,  L.  Bush,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Cleaning  and  Renewing  Corundum  Points  and  Wheels. 
— Soak  in  a  saturated  solution  of  washing-soda,  but  not 
more  than  three  or  four  hours,  or  the  shellac  will  soften, 
A  bath  of  warm  water  will  then  bring  back  their  cutting 
surface  equal  to  new. — Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Asso- 
ciation. 

Making  Drills  and  Taps. — In  making  taps  for  the  pur- 
pose of  making  nuts,  after  the  thread  is  cut  in  the  previously 
annealed  wire,  the  end  is  filed  in  three-sided  fashion,  thus 
giving  a  better  cutting  point  than  the  customary  four-sided 
one. — C.  E.  Klotz^  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

The  Odor  of  Rubber-dam. — To  overcome  the  disagree- 
able odor  of  rubber-dam  sponge  it  with  warm  water,  dry, 
and  dust  with  slightly  scented  borated  talcum  powder. — 
Stomatologist. 

Inlays  for  Pulpless  Teeth. — If  a  pulpless  tooth  has  an 
inlay  and  the  tooth  becomes  dark,  bleach  the  tooth,  leaving 
the  inlay  in  place. — Dr.  Hugo  Franz,  Dental  Review. 

Pad  for  Gold-foil,  Pellets,  etc. — ^A  piece  of  velvet  is 
much  better  than  chamois  skin  for  spreading  gold-foil  and 
pellets  on.  It  will  not  absorb  moisture  in  damp  weather, 
and  the  gold  is  much  easier  picked  up  with  the  plugger. — 
Dental  Hints. 


460  Practical  Dentistry. 

Malignant  Disease  of  the  Maxilla;  Early  Diagnosis. — 
A  simple  test,  which  has  in  a  number  of  instances  given 
me  early  warning,  is  found  in  the  power  which  mahgnant 
growths  sometimes  manifest,  of  decalcifying  for  a  con- 
siderable distance  the  otherwise  seemingly  healthy  bone 
which  surrounds  them  and  upon,  or  in  which,  they  are 
growing. — R.  H.  M.  Dawbarn. 

To  Clean  Rusty  Instruments. — Fill  a  suitable  vessel  with 
a  saturated  solution  of  stannous  chlorid  (chlorid  of  tin) 
in  distilled  water.  Immerse  the  rusty  instruments  and  let 
remain  in  the  solution  over  night.  Rub  dry  with  chamois 
after  rinsing  in  running  water,  and  they  will  be  of  a  bright 
silvery  whiteness. — Dental  Digest. 

Mouth-breathing. — Mouth-breathing  may  be  largely 
counteracted  by  the  develoj^ment  of  the  muscles  of  mastica- 
tion, which,  in  the  time  of  sleep,  will  keep  the  jaws  closed, 
while  weak  muscles,  which  are  never  used  in  mastication, 
constantly  relax  during  sleep  and  the  mouth  is  bound  to 
drop  open. — Fred.  B.  Noyes,  Dental  Review. 

Tooth  Bleaching;  Sodium  Dioxid,  Test  for. — Sodium 
dioxid  is  easily  decomposed  by  water  with  caustic  soda  and 
oxygen,  and  much  of  that  procured  from  wholesale  druggists 
is  nothing  but  caustic  soda.  To  test  the  quality  place  in  a 
dry  test-tube  about  fifteen  grains  of  the  powder  and  add 
from  fifteen  to  thirty  minims  of  water.  If  efficient  for  tooth 
bleaching  purposes,  enough  oxygen  should  be  generated  to 
kindle  a  glowing  splinter  held  in  the  mouth  of  the  tube. — 
J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

The  Deciduous  Molars. — If  thoroughly  exposed  the 
pulps  will  die,  but  probably  painlessly,  and  the  tooth  may 
remain  comfortable  for  some  time.  If  the  deciduous  sec- 
ond molars  can  be  held  in  place  at  almost  any  cost  until  the 
first  permanent  molars  have  come  through,  and  are  well 
articulated,  this  should  be  done. — C.  Edmund  Kells, 
Welch's  Dental  Journal. 


General  Information.  461 

To  Prevent  Deterioration  of  Peroxid  of  Hydrogen. — To 

prevent  the  gradual  loss  of  the  excess  of  oxygen,  keep  the 
bottle  inverted  in  a  vessel  of  water,  keeping  only  a  very 
small  quantity  in  a  small  glass-stoppered  vial  for  immediate 
use. — G.  F.  Bush,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

Broaches  of  Uniform  Temper. — A^illiner's  needles  are 
placed,  point  down,  in  a  thin  metal  screw-top  bottle,  with 
a  few  holes  bored  in  the  top  to  allow  for  expansion  of 
air.  The  bottle  is  grasped  at  the  top  with  a  small  pair 
of  soldering  tongs,  bent  to  grasp  it  firmly,  and  placed  bot- 
tom down  over  a  Bunsen  flame.  When  the  right  color  comes 
the  bottle  is  withdrawn  from  the  flame  and  allowed  to 
cool,  which  it  will  do  but  slowly,  as  glass  is  a  poor  con- 
ductor and  the  holes  admit  but  a  small  amount  of  air. — 
H.  C.  MuRiANE,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Keep  Hypodermic  Needles  Open. — Procure  a  fine 
steel  wire,  such  as  a  fine  E  mandolin  string,  which,  if  neces- 
sary, can  be  cut  down  with  emery  paper  to  fit  opening  in 
the  needle.  After  sterilizing  the  needle  in  boiling  water, 
string  it  on  the  wire,  and  after  running  it  up  and  down 
once  or  twice,  it  will  leave  the  inner  surface  dry  and  pol- 
ished.— H,  A.'  BoYSEN,  Dental  Brief. 

Chemical  Test  for  Sodium  Peroxid. — Place  about  one 
gramme  sodium  dioxid  in  a  clean,  dry  test-tube  and  add 
one  or  two  cubic  centimetres  of  water.  If  the  chemical 
is  effervescent  enough  oxygen  will  be  generated  sufficient 
to  inflame  a  glowing  splint  held  at  the  mouth  of  the  tube.— 
J.  P.  Buckley,  Dental  Review. 

A  Connter-irritant. — Mix  a  little  ginger,  red  pepper, 
and  mustard,  sprinkle  a  little  of  the  mixture  on  the  fleshy 
part  of  a  split  raisin,  and  roast  the  raisin.  This  is  an  easy 
method  of  making  a  capital  capsicum'  plaster  in  case  of 
emergency.  It  acts  like  a,  charm  generally,  and  is  more 
ffj^e^tive  than  the  roasted  raisin  alone. — H.  E.  Roberts, 
International  Dental  Journal. 


462  Practical  Dentistry. 

The  Oil-stone. — As  a  lubricant,  use  one  part  glycerin 
and  two  parts  alcohol.  This  will  keep  the  surface  clean 
and  sharp-gritted.  Oil  gums  up  the  stone. — H.  W.  Steele, 
Items  of  Interest. 

Removal  of  Broken  Broach. — Saturate  the  cavity  and 
canal  with  twenty-five  per  cent,  pyrozone.  In  a  difficult 
case  saturate  a  pledget  of  cotton  with  the  pyrozone  and  in- 
troduce it  into  the  cavity,  sealing  with  gutta-percha  or  san- 
darach.  Leave  in  tooth  three  or  four  days,  when  the  broach 
will  be  rusted  and  almost  eaten  up. — B.  J.  Cigrand,  Dental 
Dige.<>t. 

Cataphoresis — Injurious  Effects. — I  cannot  conceive  that 
an  intelligent  use  of  the  process  can  lead  to  ill  results. 
There  certainly  seems  none  to  be  anticipated  in  dentin  or  in 
the  pulp.  I  have  as  yet  seen  no  instance  in  which  I  could 
trace  an  undesirable  sequence  as  to  the  effect  of  either  the 
current  or  the  cocain. — H.  W.  Gillett,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Soldering  with  the  Electric  Furnace. — A  nice  way  to 
solder  a  Richmond  crown  or  a  small  bridge  is  to  use  a  Jen- 
kins miniature  furnace ;  this  puts  the  blaze  on  the  under  side 
of  the  investment,  thus  causing  the  solder  to  flow  nicely 
around  the  facings. — F.  B.  Wiesner,  Dental  Brief. 

Alcohol  an  Antidote  to  Carbolic  Acid  Burns. — Bathing 
the  parts  injured  by  carbolic  acid  affords  immediate  relief 
from  pain,  and  the  skin  soon  assumes  a  healthy  color.  This 
widens  the  field  of  usefulness  of  this  most  powerful  germi- 
cide, as  it  enables  us  to  use  its  full  strength  without  danger 
of  caustic  effect. — H.  A.  Klein,  Journal  of  the  American 
Medical  Association. 

Why  Fillings  Fail. — After  the  rubber-dam  is  adjusted 
wash  the  tooth  with  alcohol.  Neglect  of  this  precau- 
tion is  one  reason  why  fillings  fail,  for  when  a  piece  of  gold 
comes  in  contact  with  tooth  surface  which  is  not  absolutely 
clean,  it  will  not  cohere. — J.  W.  Cormany,  Dental  Digest. 


General  Information.  463 

To  Remove  a  Pin  from  a  Root-canal. — Bur  away  the 
cement  from  around  the  pin  with  a  fine  spear-point  fissure 
drill,  being  careful  not  to  cut  the  metal  itself.  Grasp  the 
pin  with  the  sharp-nosed  pliers  used  for  bending  the  pins 
of  artificial  teeth,  and  twist  the  pin  slightly  to  disintegrate 
the  cement,  when  the  pin  will  come  away  with  but  little 
effort. — R.  M.  Sanger,  Items  of  Interest. 

The  Oil  Stone. — Oil  stones  improve  with  age  if  kept 
clean  and  well  lubricated,  but  deteriorate  if  neglected  and 
allowed  to  dry  out  any  length  of  time.  When  fully  saturated 
it  is  in  its  best  condition,  but  if  not  cleaned  the  oil  thickens 
and  forms  a  coating  on  the  surface.  Kerosene  oil  in  time 
hardens  a  stone  and  changes  its  quality;  a  saturated  solu- 
tion of  caustic  potash  in  water  is  preferable.  Sperm  oil  is 
considered  the  best  for  edges. — B.  Bannister,  Dental  Sum- 
mary. 

Gutta-percha  Canal  Points;  Shrinkage. — Given  a  canal 
stopped  at  the  end  and  water-tight,  air-tight,  and  serum- 
tight,  there  will  be  no  appreciable  shrinkage  of  these  solid 
gutta-percha  points,  softened  enough  with  chloroform  to 
allow  them  to  slip  to  the  apical  portion  of  the  canal. — C.  L. 
HuNGERFORD,  Western  Dental  Journal. 

Tin  Cement. — Tin  cement  is  a  mixture  of  zinc  oxid 
and  precipitated  tin.  Mix  with  any  good  cement  liquid 
and  use  the  greatest  amount  of  powder  that  the  liquid  can 
be  made  to  take  up;  remove  from  slab  and  work  in  more 
powder  by  kneading  between  the  fingers  to  the  consistency 
of  thick  putty.  It  will  be  very  adhesive.  Coat  the  instru- 
ments with  vaselin  to  prevent  clogging.  When  set  it  is 
very  hard  and  of  a  dull  steel  color ;  when  burnished  a  bright 
metallic  lustre  is  produced. — F.  C.  Brush,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Remove  the  Odor  of  Iodoform  from  the  Hands. — 

Vinegar,  applied  freely  to  the  hands  after  they  have  been 
cleansed  with  soap  and  water,  will  effectually  remove  the 
odor  of  iodoform. — Medical  Review. 


464  Practical  Dentistry. 

Gum  Massage. — In  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris 
direct  the  patient  to  smear  the  ends  of  two  or  three  fingers 
with  vaselin,  to  an  ounce  of  which  has  been  added  two  grains 
of  menthol.  Rub  the  gums  surrounding  the  affected  teeth 
with  the  finger  tips  thus  anointed  twice  daily,  for  five  minutes 
at  a  time. — Geo.  F.  Eames,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Check  the  Flow  of  Saliva. — A  piece  of  ordinary  ab- 
sorbent cotton,  twice  the  size  of  a  pea,  saturated  in  sandarac 
varnish  and  placed  over  the  mouth  of  Steno's  duct,  with  a 
large  piece  of  bibulous  paper  to  hold  the  cotton  in  position, 
will  check  the  flow  of  saliva  sufficiently  to  allow  the  treat- 
ment of  superior  molars  or  the  insertion  of  a  simple  filling. 
— C.  B.  Coleman,  Items  of  Interest. 

Dental  Engine  Cord. — The  cord  used  as  lacing  for 
ladies'  bicycles,  which  can  be  obtained  at  all  bicycle  supply 
stores,  is  nicely  woven,  and  can  be  had  at  about  a  cent  a 
yard.  It  is  much  better  and  more  firmly  woven  than  the 
cord  supplied  by  dental  dealers,  which  soon  wears  out. — E. 
S.  Gaylord,  in  Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Sharpen  Hypodermic  Needles. — First  pass  the  cleans- 
ing wire  through  so  that  it  will  protrude  at  both  ends.  Then, 
with  corundum  wheel  in  engine,  grind  off  the  point  of  needle 
and  the  wire  at  the  same  time,  then  push  the  wire  through 
from  the  other  end,  carrying  all  debris  with  it. — J.  B. 
Spooner,  Dental  Digest. 

A  Cheap  Moldin. — The  clay  to  be  obtained  from  art 
stores,  mixed  with  glycerin,  makes  a  good  article  of  moldin. 
It  can  be  mixed  with  water,  but  dries  out  quickly  and  re- 
quires mixing  for  each  time  of  using. — Am.  Den.  Weekly. 

Pericemental  Inflammation;  Leeches. — Frequently  after 
inserting  a  gold  filling  in  front  or  side  teeth  with  all  pos- 
sible precaution,  thermal  changes  will  produce  inflamma- 
tion. I  have  completely  arrested  the  trouble  by  a  liberal 
application  of  leeches,  even  after  discoloration  has  occurred. 
— U.  Smith,  Pacific  Dental  Gazette. 


General  Information.  465 

Silver  Nitrate  Solution. — There  is  no  better  way  of 
keeping  silver  nitrate  solution  convenient  for  general  use 
than  the  method  suggested  by  Dr.  McNaughton;  that  is, 
keeping  a  bottle  nearly  full  of  cotton  saturated  with  a  strong 
solution  of  silver  nitrate,  moistening  pellets  of  cotton  for 
use  by  pressing  them  against  the  saturated  solution  in  the 
vial. — J.  Morgan  Howe,  Items  of  Interest. 

Cataphoresis  Bleaching  with  Pyrozone. — 25  per  cent, 
pyrozone,  being  an  ethereal  solution,  is  a  very  poor  conductor 
of  the  electric  current.  Add  to  it  an  equal  amount  of  warm 
water  to  which  has  been  added  a  grain  of  sulphid  of  zinc. 
Evaporate  the  ether  by  gentle  heat  till  you  no  longer  get  the 
fumes.  It  will  then  be  an  aqueous  solution  and  ready  for 
use. — J.  E.  Nyman,  Dental  Review. 

Compressed  Air. — No  office  is  complete  and  up  to  date 
in  every  sense  of  the  word  without  a  compressed-air  sup- 
ply, hot,  warm,  or  cold,  for  the  operating-room,  the  ex- 
tracting-room,  and  the  laboratory.  It  will  be  found  in- 
valuable in  preparing  sensitive  cavities,  drying  out  the  cav- 
ity and  the  field  of  operations,  blowing  out  chips,  cooling 
off  modeling  compound  or  wax  impressions  before  re- 
moval from  the  mouth,  the  appHcation  of  liquid  or  powder 
medication  to  parts  remote  from  sight  or  reach,  spraying 
in  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea,  etc. — Geo.  Zedubaum,  Dental 
Register. 

To  Sharpen  Engine  Burs. — A  suitable  disk,  mounted  in 
the  engine — preferably  an  electric  engine — and  a  watch- 
maker's eyeglass,  form  all  the  equipment  necessary,  while 
the  time  taken  in  sharpening  a  bur  is  less  than  half  a 
minute.  You  can  sharpen  all  the  burs  used  in  a  day,  and 
make  them  absolutely  sharp,  in  five  or  ten  minutes.  Use 
a  ruby-gem  disk  about  an  inch  in  diameter,  thin  and  cone- 
shaped.  Hold  the  bur  between  the  thumb  and  index  finger 
of  the  kft  hand  and  rotate  slowly  as  each  blade  is  gone 
over. — W.  St.  Geo.  Elliott,  Items  of  Interest. 


466  Practical  Dentistry. 

Protection  from  the  Breath  of  Patients. — With  the  nomi- 
nal object  of  preventing  the  breath  exhaled  from  the  nostrils 
of  a  patient  from  moistening  the  gold,  cut  a  piece  of  paper 
to  slip  under  the  folds  of  the  rubber-dam  that  covers  the 
upper  lip,  and  bend  it  in  front  of  the  nostrils  to  form  a  fun- 
nel, conducting  the  breath  exhaled  from  the  nostrils  away 
from  the  olfactories  of  the  operator  as  from  the  seat  of 
operations. — A.  F.  Merriman,  Jr.,  Pacific  Gazette. 

To  Clear  the  Abscess  Syringe  Point. — Hold  the  metal 
point  over  an  alcohol  or  gas  flame  until  the  mat  chars  the 
debris  which  caused  the  stoppage.  Air  pressure  from  the 
bulb  will  force  it  out  and  clear  out  the  point. — Am.  Den. 

Weekly. 

Tooth  Preservation. — If  all  gold,  amalgam,  and  cement 
finings,  about  which  secondary  caries  exists,  would  fall 
out,  the  affected  teeth  would  be  better  served  than  with 
fillings  remaining  hanging  in  undercuts  and  concealing  the 
carious  areas.  Porcelain  fillings  must,  on  account  of  the 
way  they  are  inserted,  soon  loose  their  hold  when  second- 
ary decay  penetrates  the  depths  of  the  cavity;  this  adds 
greatly  to  the  value  of  porcelain  as  a  preservative  filHng. 
— Alfred  Korbitz,  International  Dental  Journal. 

"Bad  Breath." — To  remove  from  the  breath  odors  from 
whiskey,  tobacco,  etc.,  nothing  is  more  efficient  than  hydro- 
gen peroxid  in  five  parts  of  rose  water. — E.  J.  Kempf, 
Indiana  Medical  Journal. 

Kemoval  of  lodin  Stains. — A  solution  of  hyposulphate 
of  sodium  will  remove  iodin  stains  from  clothing  or  skin. 
— J.  G.  Emmering,  Dominion  Den.  Journal. 

Bleeding  Gums. — To  obviate  bleeding  of  the  gums  in 
crown  and  bridge  work,  apply  a  25  per  cent,  solution  pyro- 
zone.  This  acts  as  a  styptic,  one  or  two  applications  ren- 
dering the  gum  perfectly  dry  for  from  ten  to  fifteen  min- 
utes.— Conrad  E.  Wittlaufer,  Den.  Practitioner. 


General  Information.  467 

Making  Matrices. — Dr.  Emil  Schreier  recommends  the 
use  of  gold-beater's  skin  under  the  gold  foil  to  aid  in  carry- 
ing the  matrix  into  deep  cavities.  In  the  absence  of  gold- 
beater's skin,  which  is  not  always  readily  obtainable,  fine 
China  silk  answers  very  well,  but  a  very  sheer  muslin  is  even 
better,  as  it  can  be  used  wet  and  will  thus  temporarily  adhere 
to  the  underside  of  the  gold. — R.  Ottolengui,  Items  of 
Interest. 

To  Prevent  Saliva  and  Tooth  Polishing  Powders  from 
Working  Back  Into  the  Hand-piece. — One  of  the  cup-shaped 
rubber  disks  used  for  polishing  purposes,  removed  and 
placed  on  the  shank  of  the  instrument,  obviates  this  diffi- 
culty ;  a  ring  of  wire  soldered  on  the  shank  will  prevent  the 
disk  from  working  back  towards  the  point  of  the  instru- 
ment.— Chas.  O.  Kimball,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Formaldehyd. — Don't  use  the  formaldehyd  paste  which 
is  mixed  with  vaselin.  When  formaldehyd  is  in  a  moist 
state  it  is  escharotic;  also  toxic,  and  getting  it  through  the 
apex  or  on  the  gum  will  give  trouble.  When  dry  its  caustic 
and  toxic  properties  virtually  cease.  Use  it  in  that  form 
(Leininger's)  and  not  in  the  tube  paste  form. — Dr.  Law- 
rence, Preston  Dental  Journal. 

Restoration  of  Contour. — No  service  that  I  have  ever 
performed  for  patients  has  been  recompensed  by  such 
gratitude  as  the  remedying  of  the  evil  effects  of  separation, 
thus  making  the  patient  comfortable,  and  in  some  cases  re- 
storing lost  health  that  was  apparently  due  entirely  to  lack 
of  means  of  masticating  the  food. — ^J.  N.  Grouse. 

Annealing  Gold. — The  presence  of  moisture  in  the  air 
always  affects  the  alcohol  flame  because  of  the  great  affinity 
which  alcohol  has  for  water.  An  undue  humidity  in  the 
operating  room  often  results  in  a  vitiated  flame  which  shows 
a  yellowish  tinge.  The  flame  from  a  Bunsen  burner  is 
more  reliable,  but  it  also  will  give  variable  results.  An 
electric  annealer,  with  machine-rolled  pillets  will  develop  a 
more  perfect  cohesion. — M.  L.  Ward,  Dental  Digest. 


468  Practical  Dentistry. 

Extraction  and  Replantation. — There  are  many  cases 
in  which  extracting  and  replantng  offers  the  easiest,  the 
quickest,  the  least  painful,  and  the  most  satisfactory  way  to 
cure  abscessed  teeth.  Immediate  relief  from  pain  is  secured, 
inflammation  rapidly  subsides,  all  necrosed  bone  can  be  re- 
moved with  absolute  certainty,  the  canal  can  be  filled  per- 
fectly and  you  have  a  complete  guarantee  that  all  the  usual 
causes  of  abscess  have  been  eliminated. — W.  D.  Cowan, 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

For  Fever  Blisters  on  the  Lip. — Paint  with  flexible  col- 
lodion and  salicylic  acid,  twelve  grains  to  the  ounce. — O.  L. 
Peak. 

Sensitiveness  of  Peridental  Membrane. — This  is  often 
occasioned  through  sensitive  dentin ;  the  tooth  having  been 
favored  during  mastication  has  become  sensitive  from  disuse. 
In  such  cases  the  tooth  should  be  filled  temporarily  with 
some  plastic  and  the  patient  told  to  bring  them  into  full  use. 
After  a  few  weeks  or  month  malleting  may  be  borne  with 
ease. — Wm.  L.  Ellerbeck,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Tooth  Implantation. — The  successful  implantation  of  a 
recently  extracted  tooth  depends  mainly  upon  the  condition 
of  the  pericementum.  Extracting  and  immediately  re- 
planting a  sound  tooth,  it  is  possible  to  obtain  complete  re- 
generation of  the  pericementum ;  clinically  this  may  occur 
when  a  sound  tooth  is  extracted  by  mistake  and  replanted 
without  delay.  Pulp  restoration,  though  not  a  constant  oc- 
currence, cannot  be  considered  within  the  range  of  im- 
possible phenomena  when  the  operation  has  been  performed 
under  strictly  aseptic  precautions. — Mendel-Joseph  and 
Sassonville,  L'Odontologie. 

The  Saliva  and  the  Teeth. — Dr.  C.  Risa  has  been  able 
to  confirm  the  views  of  other  investigators  to  the  effect  that 
there  is  a  distinct  relationship  between  dental  caries  and  the 
alkalinity  of  the  saliva,  and  that  a  high  alkaline  reaction 
constitutes  the  best  means  of  combating  the  development  and 
progress  of  caries. — The  Lancet. 


General  Information.  469 

The  Care  of  Creosote. — To  retain  the  full  strength  and 
medicinal  qualities  of  creosote  it  must  be  kept  in  a  bottle 
of  white  glass,  sealed  with  a  glass  stopper,  and  placed  where 
it  may  receive  the  light  of  the  sun.  If  kept  in  a  dark-col- 
ored bottle,  hidden  away  from  daylight,  it  deteriorates. — 
B.  J.  CiGRAND,  Dental  Headlight. 

Implantation  a  Permanent  Operation. — Natural,  sound 
teeth,  implanted  for  a  patient  under  sixty  years  of  age,  will 
remain  firm  and  serviceable  for  five  years,  with  chances 
greatly  in  favor  for  lasting  ten.  You  do  not  expect  more 
from  other  operations ;  why  more  from  implantation  ?  Do 
not  deprive  patients  of  the  benefit  of  implanted  front  teeth 
simply  because  they  may  not  last  a  lifetime. — Robert  E. 
Payne,  Dental  Digest. 

Sterilized  Water — New  Five-minute  Process. — Bromin 
added  to  water  will  kill  all  the  pathogenic  germs  in  it  in 
five  minutes,  the  addition  of  ammonia  will  neutralize  the 
bromin.  Water  100;  bromin  20;  potassium  bromin  20  for 
each  liter  of  water.  Neutralize  with  an  equal  amount  of 
9  per  cent,  ammonia.  The  water  is  then  perfectly  clear,  the 
taste  is  scarcely  altered ;  the  amount  of  bromin  remaining  is 
so  small  that  it  aifects  neither  the  taste  nor  health. — 
Schaumburg  Deutsche  Med.  Woch.  {Jour.  Am.  Med. 
Ass'n). 

Diagnosing  the  Presence  of  Pus. — The  application  of 
heat  relieves  pain  resulting  from  simple  acute  inflammation, 
but  has  the  opposite  effect  when  suppuration  is  present.  A 
valuable  hint  in  solving  the  question  of  the  presence  or 
absence  of  pus.— D.  K.  Lewin,  Therapeutic  Gazette. 

The  Hand  Mallet. — To  secure  the  greatest  density  in  a 
gold  filling  a  thirty-second  of  a  sheet-pellet  should  be  given 
forty  blows  with  the  hand  mallet ;  a  sixteenth,  eighty  blows ; 
an  eighth,  one  hundred  and  twenty  blows  of  the  mallet. 
This  gives  a  dense  filling  that  takes  a  high  poHsh  and  retains 
it. — J.  V.  CoNZETT,  Dental  Review. 


470  Practical  Dentistry. 

Silver  Nitrate  Stains. — The  silver  nitrate  stain  is  very 
superficial.  Hard  or  healthy  enamel  will  not  stain ;  only 
decayed  or  softened  enamel  takes  the  stain.  Tincture  of 
iodin  will  assist  in  removing  the  stain  from  the  teeth.  This 
treatment,  following  the  application  with  hard  polishing, 
will  make  any  tooth  harder,  whiter  and  brighter.  Should 
the  silver  nitrate  be  accidentally  brought  into  contact  with 
the  hands  or  face,  tincture  of  iodin,  followed  with  aqua  am- 
monia, will  remove  it. — Wm.  Conrad,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Bridge-work  in  the  Cure  of  Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris. — The 

six  anterior  lower  teeth  are  probably  the  most  difficult  to 
reproduce  satisfactorily  in  porcelain.  They  are  often 
abraded,  and  so  stained  that  when  they  have  occupied  posi- 
tions not  in  regular  alignment  a  more  pleasing  result  can 
be  obtained  by  inserting  the  natural  crowns,  amputated 
from  their  roots,  in  the  metal  framework  of  a  bridge. — 
W.  V.  B.  Ames,  Dental  Cosmos. 

To  Prevent  the  Accumulation  of  Tartar. — Take  a  glass 
of  water  with  a  pinch  of  alum  in  it  and  rinse  the  mouth 
freely  once  a  day.  It  is  harmless  to  the  teeth  and  keeps  the 
gums  in  good  condition  where  previously  there  was  a  heavy 
accumulation  every  month  or  six  weeks. — C.  N.  Peirce, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Copper  Amalgam. — It  does  succeed  at  times,  and  when 
it  does  succeed,  it  succeeds  wonderfully  well;  no  material 
when  successfully  used  so  thoroughly  prevents  decay. 
When  it  fails  to  arrest  decay,  it  fails  so  abominably. — E.  C. 
Kirk,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Choice  of  Instruments. — Avoid  stocking  too  many  com- 
plicated and  intricate  instruments,  as  they  are  often  the 
cause  of  considerable  waste  of  time.  A  few  well-selected 
instruments  that  you  know  how  to  use  are  far  better  than 
a  larger  number,  with  whose  use  you  are  unfamiliar. — H. 
Leonard  Dorrell,  Dental  Record. 


General  Information.  471 

The  First  Permanent  Molars. — The  mouth  of  every 
child  should  be  thoroughly  examined  by  a  competent 
dentist  before  the  sixth  year  molars  make  their  appear- 
ance, and  as  soon  as  the  crowns  of  these  teeth  are  laid 
bare  they  should  be  washed  and  made  perfectly  clean — 
aseptic — and  the  surface  covered  with  a  good  cement,  so 
that  all  imperfections  may  be  thoroughly  sealed.  With 
this  treatment,  and  the  teeth  carefully  watched,  they  will 
sometimes  be  good  teeth  for  fifty  years.  If  the  cement 
washes  out,  renew  it  as  often  as  necessary  until  they  have 
passed  the  period  of  susceptibility  and  are  immune  to 
caries. — J.  Y.  Crawford. 

Saliva  Tubes. — Saliva  tubes,  if  of  glass  should  be  of 
clear  glass;  the  only  object  in  using  colored  glass  is  the 
concealment  of  dirt.  Immersion  in  strong  hydrochloric  or 
sulphuric  acid  and  subsequent  rinsing  will  keep  them  bright ; 
boiling  makes  glass  tubes  cloudy.  Metal  tubes  should  be 
boiled;  there  is  no  other  way  of  dealing  with  them.  A 
supply  of  clean  tubes  may  be  kept  in  a  weak  solution  of 
lysoform  in  "a  covered  glass  dish. — J.  H.  Babcock,  British 
Dental  Journal. 

Difficult  Eruption  of  Third  Molars. — Prompt  excision  of 
the  entire  hood  of  gum  tissue  is  called  for.  The  resection 
of  the  gum  should  be  so  thorough  as  to  completely  expose 
the  four  sides  of  the  tooth;  the  blood-letting  in  itself  is 
beneficial. — M.  L.  Rhein,  International  Dental  Journal. 

The  Tonsils. — As  a  station  for  the  deposit  of  morbific 
germs  the  tonsil  stands  before  any  organ  in  the  body.  It 
is  subject  to  direct  local  infection  from  food,  liquids  and  air. 
Its  projecting  body  and  open-mouth  crypts  are  peculiar  fac- 
tors for  stopping  all  organisms  from  lungs  or  alimentary 
canal.  *  *  *  Nature  has  protected  the  human  body  against 
the  invasion  of  germs  by  placing  those  great  lymphatic 
guardians  over  the  entrance  thereto. — W.  F.  Chappell. 
Medical  Record. 


472  Practical  Dentistry. 

Toothache. — Toothache  due  to  pregnancy  or  debility 
should  be  treated  with  maximum  doses  of  calcium  hypo- 
phosphite. — Medical  Progress. 

Supporting  a  Sore  Tooth  While  Drilling. — Instead  of 
supporting  a  tooth  by  ligature  to  prevent  pain  while  it  is 
being  drilled,  take  modeling  compound,  soften  it  and  make 
a  splint  for  both  lingual  and  buccal  sides  of  the  teeth  to  sup- 
port the  sore  tooth  while  drilling.  This  will  prevent  jar- 
ring, and  also  prevent  pressure  on  the  inflamed  peridental 
membrane. — T.  L.  Gilmer,  Dental  Brief. 

Consideration  for  the  Patient. — The  compound  tincture 
of  aconite  and  iodin,  applied  to  the  gums  after  the  removal 
of  the  rubber-dam,  will  serve  in  a  measure  to  ameliorate 
that  "used-up"  feeling  of  the  mouth  which  too  frequently 
follows  oral  manipulations. — L.  Van  Orden,  Pa.  Med.  Den- 
tal Gazette. 

The  Teeth  of  Young  Patients. — Gutta-percha,  having 
the  least  power  of  conducting  heat  and  electric  currents,  as, 
of  all  filling-materials  yet  employed,  perhaps  the  best  for 
proximal  cavities  in  incisors  and  cuspids  of  young  patients. 
Paint  the  whole  surface  of  the  cavity  with  a  solution  of  rosin 
and  chloroform.  This  serves  a  double  purpose.  It  covers 
the  surface  of  the  sensitive  dentin  with  a  coating  that  pro- 
tects the  dentinal  fibrillse  from  irritation  and  it  affords  a  glue 
or  cement  for  fastening  the  gutta-percha  to  the  walls  of  the 
cavity. — L.  G.  Noel,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Sodium  Dioxid. — Sodium  dioxid  is  chiefly  employed  in 
dentistry  as  a  bleaching  agent,  but  will,  through  its  alkaline 
and  caustic  properties,  obtund  sensitive  dentin.  The  only 
safe  way  to  use  sodium  dioxid  for  either  purpose  is  to  make 
a  saturated  solution  in  water,  as  much  heat  is  generated, 
sometimes  accompanied  by  ignition,  when  the  dry  powder 
is  brought  in  contact  with  moisture  in  a  tooth. — Dental 
Brief. 


General  Information.  473 

A  Substitute  for  Collodion. — Dr.  Bullett  calls  attention 
to  a  new  preparation,  that  takes  the  place  of  collodion.  It 
is  a  solution  of  celluloid  in  acetone.  It  is  readily  soluble, 
will  dry  in  a  few  minutes;  its  adhesive  quality  is  greater 
than  that  of  collodion,  but  it  does  not  become  very  hard. — 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

The  Roentgen  Ray  in  the  Diagnosis  of  Obscure  Cases. — 

When  the  cause  of  disturbance  cannot  be  found  by  any 
ordinarily  careful  observation,  the  Rontgen  Ray  may  be  of 
great  service,  as  in  case  of  hypertrophy  of  the  cementum, 
impacted  teeth,  unerupted  teeth,  etc. — Dr.  Eami^s,  Inter- 
national Den.  Jour. 

The  First  Permanent  Molar. — When  cavities  are  found 
in  the  crowns  of  the  first  permanent  molars,  shortly  after 
eruption,  it  is  advisable  to  fill  with  a  high-heat  gutta-percha 
if  the  patient  is  very  nervous  and  afraid  of  pain.  This  will 
often  last  until  the  patient  can  bear  more  thorough  prepara- 
tion of  the  cavity. — Items  of  Interest. 

Pulp  Nodules;  Diagnosis. — I  have  noticed  a  good  deal 
of  change  in  the  color  of  a  tooth.  *  *  *  You  will  find 
when  the  pulp  chamber  is  filled  with  secondary  deposits 
that  the  tooth  is  badly  discolored,  very  readily  perceptible 
to  even  a  casual  observer. — F.  N.  Brown^  Dental  Review. 

What  the  Dentist  Should  Not  Do. — He  should  never  ap- 
proach a  patient  without  a  clean  napkin  in  one  hand  and 
a  mouth-mirror  in  the  other.  He  should  never  undertake 
an  operation  of  filling  until  all  salivary  calculus  has  been 
removed,  the  teeth  thoroughly  cleaned,  and  the  gums  made 
healthy. — E.  T.  Darby,  Pennsylvania  Dental  Journal. 

For  Sore  Lips. — Collodion  is  very  useful  as  an  appli- 
cation to  sore  lips  before  beginning  to  operate ;  it  takes  out 
the  soreness,  protects  the  lips,  which  heal  rapidly  after  the 
application.  Applied  to  wounds  on  the  hands,  it  reduces 
the  danger  of  infection ;  washing  will  not  remove  it. — W.  J. 
HE:\rpriiLL,  Dental  Digest. 
31 


474  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Prevent  Odors  from  Medicine  Bottles. — Keep  bottles 
containing  drugs  with  objectionable  odor  on  a  glass  slab, 
and  over  each  bottle  invert  a  small  glass  tumbler. — T.  Led- 
YARD  Smith,  Items  of  Interest. 

An  Antiseptic  Cement. — In  mixing  cement,  work  in  a 
mixture  of  equal  parts  oil  of  cloves  and  carbolic  acid,  or 
equal  parts  guaiacol  and  eucalyptol.  This  gives  a  purely 
antiseptic  filling,  and  is  especially  good  for  root-canal  filling 
and  setting  crowns  and  bridge-work. — Geo.  B.  Clement. 

Prevention  of  Tartar. — Rinse  the  mouth  freely  once  a 
day  with  water  in  which  a  pinch  of  alum  has  been  dis- 
solved. It  is  harmless  to  the  teeth  and  keeps  the  gums  in 
good  condition,  preventing  the  accumulation  of  tartar. — C. 
N.  Peirce,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Hygiene  in  the  Office. — Never  use  a  napkin  or  towel 
about  the  mouth  except  in  case  of  freely  flowing  blood, 
as  in  extracting.  Use  paper  napkins  or  bibulous  paper. 
It  is  nicer  and  more  economical.  Your  laundry  may  not 
be  as  clean  as  it  should  be,  or  as  you  may  think. — O.  B. 
Love,  Texas  Dental  Journal. 

A  Salve  for  "Cold  Soret.^' — An  excellent  application  for 
the  familiar  cold  sore  on  the  lips  is  a  six  per  cent,  solution 
of  cocain  in  glycerin  and  camphor  water. — H.  C.  Boen- 
NiNG,  M.D.,  in  the  Stomatologist. 

To  Prevent  the  Clouding  of  Mouth  Mirrors. — Smear  a 
thin  layer  of  ordinary  soap — soft  but  not  moist — over  the 
surface  of  the  mirror;  then  polish  with  a  dry  cloth.  How- 
ever much  the  mirror  may  be  breathed  on,  the  surface  will 
remain  bright  and  clear. — Gilbert  E.  Seaman,  Journal  Am. 
Med.  Association. 

Belief  of  Nausea  after  Ether  Aneesthesia. — Sipping  hot 
water  seems  to  be  the  remedy  of  greatest  value.  Also,  to 
counteract  both  the  nausea  and  the  taste  of  ether  sucking 
slices  of  lemon  gives  great  relief. — F.  H.  Westmacott, 
Journal  of  the  British  Dental  Association. 


General  Information.  475 

To  Prevent  Moss  Fibre  Gold  from  Adhering  to  the  In- 
strument.— If,  in  using-  smooth-faced  pluggers,  the  gold 
sticks  to  the  instrument,  rub  it  on  a  piece  of  pure  block  tin, 
and  the  gold  plating  will  disappear  from  the  instrument 
and  the  gold  will  not  adhere  for  some  time;  after  a  while 
repeat  the  rubbing. — Homer  Almon,  Dental  Review. 

Sensitive  Dentin — Cataphoresis. — There  is  a  class  of 
patients  for  whom  complete  anaesthesia  of  the  dentin  is 
essential.  It  is  one  of  the  greatest  surprises  of  our  practical 
experience  to  find  how  man  after  man  has  given  up  the  use 
of  the  cataphoric  apparatus  for  this  class  of  patients.  The 
results  are  so  satisfactory  where  I  find  it  necessary  to  obtain 
complete  anaesthesia  that  it  is  a  mystery  to  me  that  men 
are  willing  to  give  it  up  for  something  that  alleviates  the 
pain,  it  is  true,  but  that  does  not  remove  the  sensation. — M. 
L.  Rhein,  Cosmos. 

Peridental  Inflammation,  Cataphoric  Treatment. — To  a 

saturated  solution  of  potassium  iodid  add  about  one-fifth 
the  quantity  of  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  the  tinctures  of 
iodin  and  aconite.  Saturate  a  pledget  of  cotton  with  this 
mixture,  and  by  means  of  the  rubber-cup  electrode  apply 
to  the  inflamed  gum.  About  one  milliampere  of  a  ten-cell 
current,  continued  not  longer  than  five  minutes,  will  reduce 
the  inflammation,  the  pain  quickly  subsiding ;  there  is  seldom 
a  recurrence. — J.  M.  Fogg,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Sterilized  Waxed  Ligatures. — Silk  thread,  sizes  A,  B, 
C  or  D,  may  be  sterilized  and  waxed  on  the  spool  by  soak- 
ing in  a  solution  of  wax  containing  i  per  cent,  formalde- 
hyd  (added  in  the  form  of  paraform — nearly  solid  formal- 
dehyd).  Place  the  spools  in  the  wax  in  a  porcelain  lined 
dish  having  a  tight  fitting  cover,  and  keep  in  a  water  bath 
for  six  hours.  Take  the  spools  out,  dry  with  sterilized 
towel,  and  place  in  a  case  in  which  is  kept  pieces  of  pumice 
stone  saturated  with  formaldehyd. — A.  C.  Hart,  Items  of 
Interest. 


476  Practical  Dentistry. 

Diamond  Burs. — Soft  iron  burs  of  various  sizes,  well 
charg-ed  with  diamond  dust,  cut  rapidly  and  smoothly  when 
kept  wet  with  water  of  the  right  temperature,  and  require 
only  a  light  touch  to  do  the  work.  Nervous  patients  can 
easily  bear  a  diamond  bur  in  places  where  the  use  of  an 
ordinary  bur  would  be  impossible. — N.  S.  Jenkins,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Normal  Occlusion. — There  are  three  points  of  the  face 
that  are  in  the  circumference  of  a  circle  described  by  the 
compass  with  the  condyle  as  the  centre.  These  three 
points  are  (1)  the  point  of  the  chin,  (2)  the  tip  of  the 
nose,  and  (3)  the  frontal  eminence,  the  condyle  with  the 
point  of  the  chin  and  the  frontal  eminence  forming  an 
equilateral  triangle. — W.  O.  Talbot. 

Abnormal  Space  Between  the  Superior  Central  Incisors. — 
This  is  frequently  due  to  an  abnormal  attachment  of  the 
frenuin  labii,  which  will  be  found  to  be  thickened,  with  its 
attachment  to  the  gingivae  continued  through  between  the 
incisors.  Simply  severing  this  ligament  will  sometimes  be 
sufficient,  but  a  deep  incision  with  a  cautery  knife  at  white 
heat,  splitting  the  cord,  offers  the  advantages  of  contraction 
of  tissue.  The  tissue  should  of  course  be  anaesthetized  be- 
fore making  the  incision,  carefully  avoiding  wounding  the 
peridental  membrane,  operating  only  upon  the  abnormal 
tissue ;  a  cleaning  should  precede  the  cautery.  The  teeth 
can  then  be  drawn  together  and  mechanically  supported  for 
several  weeks — or,  it  may  be,  months. — E.  H.  Angle,  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

Testing  the  Saliva  for  Acid.— If  metals  of  a  different 
potential  on  the  ends  of  wires  which  are  in  series  with  the 
milliamperemeter  are  placed  in  the  mouth,  if  the  saliva  is 
acid  it  will  cause  the  generation  of  a  galvanic  current  which 
will  deflect  the  needle  according  to  the  amount  of  acid.  If 
the  saliva  is  neutral  or  alkaline,  there  will  be  no  deflection. 
The  amount  of  deflection  shows  the  degree  of  acidity. — 
Thos.  p.  Hinman,  Items  of  Interest. 


General  Information.  477 

Inflammation  of  the  Antrum:  Diagnosis. — Fetor  of  the 
breath  may  lead  us  to  suspect  inflammation  of  the  antrum ; 
the  presence  of  a  dead  tooth  increases  the  probabiHty  of  cor- 
rect diagnosis.  One  way  of  confirming  this  consists  in  the 
injection  into  the  root-canal  of  a  syringe ful  of  hydrogen 
dioxid,  which,  in  the  presence  of  pus,  effervesces,  the  foam 
being  easily  detected  on  blowing  the  nose,  the  peculiar  noise 
produced  by  the  effervescence  being  easily  heard  by  the 
patient. — Oscar  Amoedo^  Dental  Cosmos. 

Why  Pulps  Die  Under  Metal  Crowns. — This  may  occur 
under  two  conditions ;  decay  occurring  about  the  cervix 
through  ill-fitting  of  the  crown,  or  through  thermal  changes 
transmitted  through  a  body  of  dentin  too  slight  in  extent 
to  protect  the  pulp  and  this  only  in  cases  where  the  crown 
has  been  too  liberally  denuded  of  enamel  and  dentin.  For 
this  there  is  certainly  no  necessity. — S.  H.  Guilford,  Stom- 
atologist. 

Pulpless  First  Molars. — A  long  experience  and  observa- 
tion of  these  teeth  and  the  results  that  follow  the  removal  of 
the  pulp  show  me  that  most  of  those  teeth  are  lost,  if  not 
immediately,  within  ten  or  twelve  years  pretty  certainly. 
The  tissues  of  the  teeth  mostly  break  down  early;  the 
enamel  will  peal  off  from  the  dentin,  and  the  whole  thing 
go  to  pieces. — G.  V.  Black,  Dental  Review. 

Drawing  the  Temper  of  Jewelers'  Broaches. — Lay  them 
on  a  piece  of  German  silver  plate,  cover  with  pulverized 
pumice  to  prevent  oxidation,  and  raise  the  plate  to  a  red 
heat.  Broaches  which  were  stiff  and  brittle  before  an- 
nealing become  soft  and  tough. — Dr.  Herndon,  Pacific 
Dental  Gazette. 

Comfort  of  the  Patient. — In  filling  a  large  sensitive 
cavity  with  amalgam,  warm  the  plugger  or  burnisher  each 
time  you  use  either.  In  finishing  a  gold  filling  run  the  bur 
before  use  into  a  bit  of  beeswax  and  coat  the  disk  with  vase- 
lin. — F.  M.  Smith,  International  Dental  Journal. 


478  Practical  Dentistry. 

Cavities  Extending  Below  the  Gum  Margin. — Remove 
hypertrophied  tissue  with  the  lancet,  and  with  chloropercha 
and  cotton  press  the  gum  away  and  separate  at  the  same 
time.  The  cavity  can  be  subsequently  filled  with  very  little 
trouble.  Without  this  preparatory  work  it  will  be  very 
difficult  to  apply  the  rubber-dam  to  exclude  moisture. — 
Geo.  Hood,  Dental  World. 

Recession  of  the  Gums. — When  there  is  a  tendency  to 
recession  of  the  gums,  if  the  teeth  are  cared  for  properly 
by  frequent  polishing  and  massaging,  not  only  will  the 
teeth  be  retained  but  the  gum  will  change  from  the  whip- 
cord edge  to  a  thin  edge  hugging  the  tooth  closely,  with 
sufficient  retraction  to  come  nearly  or  quite  to  its  normal 
position,  especially  in  your  patients. — L.  C.  Taylor,  Den- 
tal Cosmos. 

Formagen  Paste. — The  formaldehyd  in  this  paste  is 
said  to  have  a  peculiar  action  upon  septic  pulps,  and  to  de- 
stroy germs  in  infected  pulp  horns.  The  writer's  expe- 
riences, thus  far,  are  favorable  to  its  use  in  contact  with 
softened  dentin.  Engenol  is  an  ingredient  in  this  paste. 
When  infection  is  suspected,  it  is  worthy  of  trial. — Otto  E. 
Inglis,  Stomatologist. 

The  Natural  Tooth  Crown. — The  value  of  a  pulpless 
tooth  should  not  be  estimated  from  the  condition  of  the 
natural  crown,  as  it,  with  present  methods  for  permanent 
crown  restoration,  is  the  least  important  part  of  the  tooth. 
The  root  and  its  surroundings,  that  upon  which  the  perma- 
nent comfort  and  retention  of  the  tooth  depends,  should 
always  form  the  basis  of  judgment  and  diagnosis. — D.  D. 
Smith,  Dental  Digest. 

Wood  Alcohol  for  Annealing. — Wood  alcohol  may  be 
used  for  annealing,  but  the  gold  should  be  placed  on  mica, 
and  held  over  the  flame  to  avoid  the  soot  that  would  be  de- 
posited if  the  gold  were  passed  through  the  flame. — B.  H. 
Teague,  Am.  Den.  Weekly. 


General  Information.  479 

Pulp  Nodules  Diagnosis. — There  is  one  sure  sign,  if 
you  can  see  the  patient  when  the  paroxysm  of  pain  is  on, 
and  immediately,  before  it  passes  off,  tap  the  teeth,  you 
will  always  find  extreme  sensitiveness  in  the  affected  tooth 
until  the  pain  ceases.  In  a  few  seconds  it  passes  off  and 
you  cannot  discover  that  one  tooth  is  more  affected  than 
the  other. — J.  N,  Crouse,  Dental  Review. 

Cleansing  the  Fountain  Spittoon. — The  drain-pipe  of 
the  fountain  spittoon  is  liable  to  become  very  offensive.  To 
purify  it,  place  some  tablets  of  formaldehyd  (paraform)  in 
an  open-mouth  bottle  filled  with  water.  Place  in  a  sand- 
bath  and  the  water  will  absorb  the  gas  until  you  get  a  forty- 
per  cent,  solution.  Pour  this  through  the  spittoon  and  you 
will  never  have  any  stench  from  it. — F.  B.  Lawrence, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 

Cracks  in  the  Enamel. — After  inserting,  as  we  thought, 
a  perfect  gold  filling,  a  suspicious-looking  crack  may  sud- 
denly appear  in  the  enamel.  This  is  due  to  the  expansion  of 
the  gold  in  response  to  the  heat  engendered  in  polishing 
the  filling,  in  other  words,  the  expanding  plug  of  gold  has 
burst  the  unyielding  walls  of  the  cavity,  and  so  surely  as 
the  gold  will  contract  again  on  cooling,  so  surely  must  it 
leave  a  space  between  itself  and  the  walls  of  the  cavity. — 
C.  E.  Brown,  Dental  Record. 

To  Effect  Painless  Removal  of  Enamel. — Place  over  the 
tooth  a  short  piece  of  rubber  tubing.  Leave  it  on  over 
night  and  the  gums  will  be  pressed  back  so  that  removal 
of  enamel  may  be  effected  quite  painlessly  and  without 
causing  the  gums  to  bleed. — Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

To  Prevent  Profuse  Flow  of  Saliva. — A  dose  of  sul- 
phate of  atropin  (1-120  gr.)  three-quarters  of  an  hour  be- 
fore operating  will  secure  a  very  convenient  though  not 
uncomfortable  dryness  of  the  mouth,  lasting  from  four  to 
five  hours. — H.  Otis  Longue,  Southern  Dental  Journal. 


480  Practical  Dentistry. 

Sponge  Tin. — Sponge  tin  is  of  invaluable  assistance 
in  gold  filling,  since  it  may  be  mechanically  united  with  or 
welded  to  any  brand  whatever.  The  cavity  need  have  no 
undercuts ;  packed  in  sponge  tin  nearly  to  the  margin ;  upon 
this  condense  a  layer  of  unannealed  sponge  gold,  then  a 
layer  of  annealed  sponge  gold  and  finish  with  annealed  gold 
foil  or  cylinders. — Arthur  Sciieuer,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Contouring. — Tooth  form  should  be  held  secondary  to 
the  contouring  of  the  interproximal  space,  the  guarding  of 
which  should  be  the  first  consideration.  The  form  of  the 
tooth,  or  even  its  full  occlusion,  is  of  less  importance.  The 
health  of  the  tooth  and  its  surroundings  is  the  first  con- 
sideration.— G.  V.  Black.  Dental  Rezieze. 

Compressed  Air  in  Dentistry. — By  turning  a  stream  of 
compressed  air  on  a  filling  you  can  allow  the  disc  to  make  as 
many  as  a  thousand  revolutions  per  minute,  if  you  wish, 
without  causing  an}-  discomfort  to  the  patient. — W.  A. 
PIeckard.  Indiana  L>ental  Jonriial. 

Scaling  Sensitive  Teeth. — Prepare  equal  parts  of  iodid 
of  potassium  and  of  iodin  crystals  in  a  saturated  aqueous 
solution.  Also  a  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  sulphate  of 
zinc.  Mix  together  equal  parts  of  the  supernatant  fluid 
from  the  solutions  and  apply  to  the  sensitive  surfaces. — E 
A.  BoGUE,  Items  of  Interest. 

Oral  Symptoms  of  Diabetes  Mellitus. — The  so-called 
"dry  sockets,"  the  rapid  collection  of  soft  yellow  calca- 
reous deposits  about  the  teeth,  a  specific  form  of  pyorrhoea 
alveolaris,  and  a  peculiar  sour-wine  odor  from  the  mouth 
are  typical  pathognomonic  symptoms  of  diabetes  mellitus. 
— Hermann  Printz,  Dental  Era. 

Glass-capped  Medicine  Bottles. — To  insure  easy  removal 
of  glass  caps  from  medicine  bottles  smear  the  ground  sur- 
face of  the  neck  with  vaselin. — A.  E.  Mi m mack.  Dental 
Forum. 


General  Informaiion.  481 

Insufficient  Mastication, — In  the  use  of  food-stuff  not 
requiring  mastication  there  is  no  stimulation  of  the  circula- 
tion of  blood  and  lymph ;  no  exercise  of  the  teeth  and  alveo- 
lar processes;  no  cleansing,  but  rather  a  clogging  of  the 
teeth;  no  exercise  of  the  salivary  glands  nor  exhaustion  of 
their  contents,  which  remain  unchanged;  no  nerves  are 
excited  by  exercise,  and  no  gain  in  the  tone  of  the  surround- 
ing organs. — W.  L.  Jeffersox,  British  Dental  Jour)ial. 

Receding  Gums. — Apply  glycerite  of  tannin  to  spongy 
gums  as  a  tonic  astringent  lotion.  It  reestablishes  the  nutri- 
tive function. — Dental  Register. 

Cementing  Attachments  to  Natural  Teeth. — Gutta- 
percha is  most  satisfactory.  Shrinkage  in  the  hardening  is 
not  detrimental.  For  some  reason,  a  loose  attachment  of 
gutta-percha  is  not  accompanied  by  decay  and  softening, 
as  a  loose  attachment  of  oxyphosphate  would  be. — ^W.  V.  B. 
Ames,  Dental  Digest. 

Care  of  Children's  Teeth. — I  never  insert  a  filling  in  a 
child's  tooth  the  same  day  that  I  prepare  the  cavity,  my 
theory  being  that  the  preparation  of  the  cavity  acts  as  an 
irritant,  more  or  less.  I  prefer  to  always  insert  a  dressing 
which  will  restore  the  tooth  to  its  normal  condition. — J.  E. 
Forsyth,  Australian  Journal  of  Dentistry. 

Fillings  versTLS  Crowns. — A  filling  leaves  the  cervical 
portion  of  the  tooth  perfect  as  nature  left  it,  with  nothing 
to  cause  irritation  at  the  gum  margin.  The  most  perfectly 
fitting  crown  cannot  be  left  so  absolutely  free  from  any 
source  of  irritation.  Even  an  amalgam  filling,  costing  but 
from  one  to  three  dollars,  is  worth  more  to  the  patient  than 
a  gold  crown. — W.  Buzzell,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Hydrogen  Dioxid. — To  prevent  the  acid  reaction  of 
hydrogen  dioxid,  when  about  to  use  it  mix  with  an  equal 
volume  of  lime-water.  It  will  be  equally  effective  and  not 
escharotic. — Dental  Register. 


482  Practical  Dentistry. 

Antidote  for  Tincture  of  Aconite  Root. — In  a  case  of 
accidental  poisoning,  the  patient  having  swallowed  tincture 
of  aconite  with  which  the  gum  over  the  roots  of  a  large 
molar  was  being  painted,  twenty  drops  of  laudanum,  the 
dose  repeated  after  a  few  moments — with  ammonia  by  in- 
halation— the  patient  being  laid  on  the  floor,  brought  him 
around  all  right  in  about  thirty  minutes.  This  antidote  is 
not  given  in  the  books. — A,  W.  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

The  First  Permanent  Molar. — I  should  endeavor  to 
save  the  first  permanent  molar,  even  if  I  had  to  crown  it 
early  in  life,  and,  above  all  things,  I  should  aim  to  keep  it 
sufficiently  built  up,  either  by  crowning  or  filling,  so  that  it 
will  hold  the  jaws  apart  and  add  character  to  the  face. — C. 
N.  Johnson,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

The  Teeth  and  Dyspepsia. — The  various  ferments  pro- 
duced by  bacteria  may  have  an  important  effect  in  the 
causation  of  dyspepsia,  and  this  may  be  one  of  the  reasons 
why  these  cases  are  so  intractable  when  the  mouth  has  not 
been  put  in  a  thoroughly  healthy  condition. — W.  H.  Wil- 
liamson, Scottish  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal. 

Suprarenal  Powder;  Bleeding  from  Tissues  Around 
Loose  Teeth. — Touch  the  soft  parts  with  suprarenal  powder, 
and  bleeding  is  instantly  checked.  No  soreness  is  produced, 
nor  is  there  any  odor.  It  is  absolutely  harmless.  It  controls 
the  tendency  to  bleeding  of  the  gums  on  brushing.  Marvel- 
ous results  in  nose-bleed,  which  is  instantly  checked. — E. 
H.  Raymond,  Dental  Review. 

Compressed  Air  in  the  Treatment  of  the  Gum. — To  dry 

the  gum  in  the  posterior  portion  of  the  mouth,  throw  com- 
pressed air  directly  on  the  spot  a  few  seconds,  securing  the 
desired  result.  Then  apply  the  medicament  and  you  get  im- 
mediate results,  air  pressure  driving  the  medicines  deep  into 
the  tissues.  In  this  manner  the  application  of  counter- 
irritants  is  made  easy. — S.  Freeman,  International  Dental 
Journal. 


General  Information.  4^3 

Protection  of  the  Mucous  Membrane. — To  protect  the 
soft  tissues  in  the  treatment  of  pyorrhcea  alveolaris,  apply 
oleostearate  of  zinc  and  pack  cotton  and  bibulous  paper 
around  the  teeth. — Robert  Good,  Dental  Cosmos. 

The  Mouth  as  a  Source  of  Infection. — I  do  not  regard 
the  mouth  as  so  dangerous  a  source  of  infection  as  some 
recent  writers  seem  to  have  done.  The  tissues  of  the  mouth 
are  more  resistant  to  the  encroachment  of  pathogenic  germs 
than  other  parts  of  the  body;  the  fact  that  they  are  sub- 
jected to  the  presence  of  these  growths  so  continually  is 
the  probable  reason  for  it.  But  these  are  systemic  condi- 
tions lying  over  and  beyond,  influencing  these  local  condi- 
tions and  infections  that  are  as  yet  but  vaguely  known. — G. 
V.  Black,  Dental  Review. 

Suprarenal  Capsule. — The  dental  application  of  the  su- 
prarenal capsule  is  largely  confined  to  the  region  of  the 
gingival  margins  of  the  gums.  As  a  reducer  of  hemorrhage 
its  action  is  both  speedy  and  certain,  from  one  to  two  minutes 
being  all  the  time  necessary  to  stop  bleeding.  There  are  no 
ill  after-effects. — Elliott  R.  Carpenter,  Dental  Review. 

Nickel-plated  Parts. — One  of  the  best  methods  known 
for  keeping  bright  the  nickel  work  about  the  office  is  to 
wet  a  rag  with  a  solution  of  hypo-sulphite  of  soda,  and  wipe 
the  article  with  it,  drying  with  a  soft  towel,  and  then  rubbing 
it  with  a  piece  of  chamois. — Bulletin. 

The  Mouth  Mirror. — A  thoughtful  and  cleanly  operator 
will  never  think  of  placing  a  mouth  mirror  in  the  mouth  of 
a  patient  without  first  placing  it  in  pure  alcohol,  there  to 
remain  until  needed.  It  can  then  be  dipped  in  water  and 
dried  with  a  napkin. — E.  M.  Kapitan,  Dental  Review. 

Holding  Loose  Teeth  in  Place. — Of  the  various  materials 
in  use  for  this  purpose  silk  is  only  temporary,  unless  it  is 
paraffined ;  silver  wire  corrodes  too  rapidly.  My  own  formula 
is  sixty-seven  parts  silver  and  thirty-three  parts  gold  for 
wire  of  twenty-seven  gauge.  This  gives  both  strength  and 
the  germicidal  effect  of  the  silver. — A.  W.  Harlan,  Review. 


484  Practical  Dentistry. 

Painful  Eruption  of  Third  Molar. — Chloretone  is 
very  useful  for  those  cases  in  which  the  gum  tissue 
is  highly  inflamed  and  before  pus  has  formed,  and  while 
the  condition  is  still  most  painful.  Instead  of  resorting  to 
the  use  of  the  knife,  which  often  aggravates  the  inflamma- 
tion, most  marked  results  will  follow  the  application  of 
chloretone. — C.  H.  Oakman,  Dental  Review. 

Hot  Carbolic  Acid. — In  cavities  in  soft  and  immature 
teeth,  and  with  partially  devitalized  pulps  which  still 
cling  to  the  walls  of  the  root-canals  with  obstinate  tenacity, 
and  where  gangrened  pulps  have  brought  teeth  to  the  very 
verge  of  abscess,  we  have  in  hot  carbolic  acid  a  therapeutic 
agent  of  great  potency.  Its  combination  with  other  agents, 
as,  for  instance,  cocain,  may  greatly  extend  its  field  of 
usefulness. — N.  S.  Jenkins,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Silver  Nitrate  Stains. — The  silver  nitrate  stain  is  very 
superficial.  Hard  or  healthy  enamel  will  not  stain :  only 
decayed  or  softened  enamel  takes  the  stain.  Tincture  of 
iodin  will  assist  in  removing  the  stain  from  the  teeth.  This 
treatment,  following  the  application  with  hard  polishing,  will 
make  any  tooth  harder,  whiter  and  brighter.  Should  the 
silver  nitrate  be  accidentally  brought  into  contact  with  the 
hands  or  face,  tincture  of  iodin,  followed  with  aqua  am- 
monia, will  remove  it. — Wm.  Conrad,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Bone  Absorption  Around  Root  Apex. — The  nature  of 
the  absorption  can  to  some  extent  be  determined  by  the 
nature  of  the  discharge.  If  it  is  thin,  watery,  yellowish, 
with  little  granules  of  bone  mixed  in,  you  can  be  pretty  cer- 
tain that  caries  of  bone  exists ;  if  thick,  rich  pus,  simple  ab- 
sorption ;  if  it  is  yellow,  streaked  with  blood,  no  granules, 
you  can  count  on  a  roughened  root-end,  which  should  be 
confirmed  by  exploring  .  through  the  external  opening. — 
Elgin  Mawhinney,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Irritated  Gum  Tissue. — The  soreness  following  the  use 
of  clamps,  etc.,  may  be  overcome  by  painting  the  gum  with 
tincture  of  calendula. — Dental  Cosmos. 


General  Information.  485 

To  Remove  a  Pin  Cemented  in  a  Root-canal. — Cut  out 

the  cement  around  the  pin  as  far  as  expedient  and  apply 
aqua  ammonia  to  decompose  remaining  cement,  protecting 
the  gum  with  rubber-dam.  Rinse  mouth  occasionally  with 
warm  water.  If  a  crown  with  pin  cemented  in  be  left  over 
night  in  a  bottle  of  aqua  ammonia,  the  cement  will  be  found 
a  perfect  mush  and  the  pin  easily  removed. — Wm.  B  Mead, 
Dental  Cosmos. 

Sterilizing  Bibulous  Paper  Wads. — Wads  which  are 
rolled  between  the  fingers  will  seldom  be  found  to  be  ster- 
ile. I  have  been  in  the  habit  of  preparing  a  large  quantity 
of  them,  soaking  them  in  a  solution  of  thymol  in  alcohol, 
drying  them,  and  keeping  them  in  a  jar  free  from  dust. 
They  are  then  not  only  aseptic,  but  antiseptic.  Dry  heat 
is  unsatisfactory. — W.  D.  Miller,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Removing  laboratory  Stains. — Dry  the  hands  thor- 
oughly and  rub  them  well  with  oil,  which,  getting  into  all 
the  fissures  of  the  skin,  will  loosen  all  dirt  and  grit,  then 
wash  the  hands  twice  with  some  good  soap  to  remove  both 
oil  and  dirt.  This  will  leave  the  hands  clean  and  prevent 
from  chapping  in  winter. — F.  M.  Fulkerson,  Dental 
Digest. 

Arsenical  Paste. — The  addition  of  five  per  cent,  of  lamp- 
black to  your  arsenical  paste  makes  it  easy  to  detect  any 
particle  that  may  get  outside  the  cavity.  It  does  not  in- 
terfere in  any  way  with  the  efficacy  of  the  paste. — G.  V. 
Black,  Dental  Reviezv. 

Care  of  the  Eyes. — Colored  glasses  should  always  be 
worn  when  doing  bright  and  glaring  work  with  blow-pipe 
and  porcelain  furnace. — Dental  Hints. 

To  Reflect  Light  in  the  Mouth. — Paint  the  dam  around 
and  between  the  teeth  with  "Japanese  wing" — enamel  white. 
Moisten  the  paint  with  50  per  cent,  alcohol,  giving  one  or 
more  coats  as  required.  The  paint  comes  in  small  tablets, 
is  clean,  pure  and  odorless. — J.  R.  Bell,  Dental  Digest. 


486  Practical  Dentistry. 

To  Clean  Saliva-ejector  Tubes. — If  a  drop  of  lactic  acid 
is  put  in  the  glass  tube  and  swabbed  out  with  a  bit  of  cotton 
fastened  on  binding  wire,  it  will  dissolve  the  salivary  de- 
posits in  the  ejector  tube,  solving  the  difficulty  in  keeping  the 
glass  tubes  bright  and  clear. — R.  E.  Gilson,  Pacific  Gazette. 

Gomphiasis. — In  gomphiasis,  the  loosened  round  teeth 
of  advanced  age,  the  osseous  tissue  is  involved,  and  it  is 
absolutely  imperative  that  the  teeth  in  their  bony  sockets  be 
given  immobility  or  rest,  the  factor  in  bringing  about  normal 
relations.  Proper  dieting  will  tend  to  correct  the  difficulty, 
although  prosthetic  appliances  properly  constructed  are  al- 
ways a  decided  benefit. — P.  J.  Cigrand,  American  Dental 
Journal. 

Fastening  Handles  to  Instruments. — Prepare  a  mixture 
of  equal  parts  pumice  and  finely-powdered  rosin.  Heat  the 
tang  of  the  instrument  and  push  it  home  while  warm.  Old 
pieces  of  corundum  stone,  pulverized,  answer  the  same  pur- 
pose.— M.  Charbouneau,  in  Archives  Nationales. 

Compressed  Air  in  Dentistry. — After  giving  nitrous  oxid 
or  any  other  general  anaesthetic,  the  patient  is  revived 
quickly  by  the  application  of  a  strong  force  of  compressed 
air  directed  squarely  toward  the  face. — George  Zederbaum, 
Dental  Digest. 

Eemoval  of  Gum  Tissue  from  Over  Third  Molars. — Use 

a  rotary  trephine  knife  in  the  engine ;  it  works  well.  The 
beauty  of  it  is  you  not  only  cut,  but  you  take  your  chips 
with  you.  Use  a  local  application  of  guaiacol  on  the  sur- 
face first. — W.  A.  Price,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

To  Prevent  "Gagging." — Bromidin,  in  half  teaspoonful 
doses  every  four  hours  for  two  days  before  operating,  be- 
numbs the  sensory  nerve  tips  of  the  buccal  cavity  and  thus 
facilitates  taking  impressions  of  adjustment  of  rubber-dam, 
otherwise  impossible,  because  of  the  annoying  gagging  pe- 
culiar to  some  individuals. — Virginia  Medical  Semi-Monthly. 


General  Information.  487 

To  Prevent  Rust  in  Hypodermic  Needles. — Keep  them  in 
a  tightly  corked  bottle  of  gasolin.  When  wanted,  blow 
through  the  needle  with  hot-air  syringe,  then  dip  in  alcohol, 
and  the  odor  will  disappear. — Dental  Register. 

Tltilize  Your  Old  Burs. — The  best  kind  of  a  drill  is  made 
from  an  old  cross-cut  fissure  bur.  Grind  on  the  two  opposite 
sides  only,  shaping  to  a  chisel  edge,  leaving  the  serrations 
on  the  edges. — H.  G.  Logan,  Dental  Review. 

The  Esthetic  in  Operative  Dentistry. — I  believe  in  grind- 
ing away  as  far  as  it  is  possible  all  pits  and  irregularities, 
sharp  broken  points  of  cups,  defects  natural,  congenial  or 
acquired  in  teeth,  and  rounding  and  smoothing  them  up. — 
A.  L.  HuNGERFORD,  Westem  Dental  Journal. 

To  Eemove  Rust  Stains  on  Instruments. — Coat  the 
instruments  with  a  mixture  of  potassium  cyanide  i  part, 
soft  soap  I  part,  prepared  chalk  2  parts,  water  to  make  a 
paste.  After  removal  of  the  paste  coat  with  oil. — Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

Teeth  for  Implantation. — Natural  teeth  that  are  being 
held  in  reserve  for  implantation  should  be  kept  in  a  ten  per 
cent,  solution  of  boroglycerin  in  distilled  water,  to  an  ounce 
of  which  add  one-half  drachm  of  melted  carbolic  acid. — 
Dental  Review. 

Facial  Neuralgia. — In  many  cases  relief  will  be 
promptly  experienced  from  holding  the  hand  opposite  to 
the  affected  side  in  water  as  hot  as  can  be  borne.  The 
method  is  so  simple  that  it  can  be  readily  tried  in  every 
case,  and  if  without  benefit  no  harm  will  follow, — W.  C. 
Belt^  Med.  Sentinel. 

To  Make  a  Finger-hold  for  Broaches. — Ordinary  Don- 
aldson broaches  may  be  changed  to  handy  broaches  for 
molars  by  cutting  off  half  the  stem  or  handle  and  dropping 
two  or  three  drops  of  ordinary  sticky  wax  on  the  end  to 
form  a  globule  or  finger-hold. — J.  C.  Montgomery. 


488  Practical  Dentistry. 

Examination  of  the  Teeth. — Each  tooth  should  be  men- 
tally isolated  from  every  other  tooth,  and  as  carefully  exam- 
ined as  though  it  were  the  only  one  in  the  mouth.  Proceed 
thus  with  one  after  another  until  all  have  been  examined. — 
E.  A.  BoGUE,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Gum  Massage. — In  the  treatment  of  pyorrhoea  alveolaris 
massage  of  the  gums,  when  the  soreness  leaves,  is  an  ex- 
cellent thing,  using  a  little  powdered  sulphur  on  the 
fingers. — Robert  Good,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Cataphoresis. — Inflamed  Conditions  of  Pulp  and  Peri- 
dental Membrane. — The  application  of  the  continuous  gal- 
vanic current  gives  relief  by  producing  anaemia  of  the  parts. 
No  medicament  required. — John  S.  Marshall,  Dental 
Cosmos. 

Setting  of  Cement. — The  least  sprinkling  of  pulver- 
ized borax  will  retard  the  setting  of  oxyphosphate.  Part 
of  a  drop  of  hydrochloric  acid  will  hasten  it. — Dental  Nezvs. 

Fungous  Growths. — Protargol  and  largin,  the  newer  sil- 
ver preparations,  are  valuable  in  the  treatment  of  fungous 
growths.  They  will  not  stain  the  tissues  except  after  pro- 
longed use. — A.  W,  Harlan,  Dental  Review. 

To  Cleanse  the  Cement  Spatula. — Very  fine  emery  cloth, 
such  as  jewelers  use,  is  found  very  effective  for  cleaning 
cement  spatulas  and  other  instruments  where  a  polished  sur- 
face is  desired. — J.  M.  Brimacombe,  Dental  Review. 

Stained  Instruments. — The  discoloration  or  coating 
which  results  from  frequent  sterilization  by  boiling  may  be 
removed  by  rubbing  the  instruments  with  a  cloth  saturated 
with  an  aqueous  solution  of  prepared  chalk,  ammonia  and 
alcohol. — J.  Q.  Byram,  Dental  Review. 

Gingival  Inflammation. — If  ligatures  have  worked  up 
and  inflamed  the  gingival,  remove  and  direct  a  spray  of 
pyrozone  upon  the  inflamed  area.  The  inflammation  will 
soon  disappear.— Dr.  DeichxMILler,  Paciiic  Dental  Gazette. 


General  Information.  489 

Preserving  Gutta-percha. — Gutta-percha  for  filling  pur- 
poses may  be  preserved  in  good  condition  for  years  by  keep- 
ing it  in  a  solution  of  table  salt. — Dominion  Journal. 

To  Clean  Files  Used  in  Rubber  Work. — Hold  them  in 
the  jet  of  steam  which  escapes  from  the  top  of  the  vulcanizer 
when  the  pressure  is  above  fifty  pounds. — Dominion  Dental 
Journal. 

Sterilization  of  Rubber-dam,  etc. — Rubber  stands  boil- 
ing best  if  it  is  in  a  boric  acid  solution. — Journal  American 
Medical  Association. 

To  Improve  Oil  Stones. — Smear  a  flat  block  of  wood 
with  glycerin  and  fine  pumice  and  rub  the  stone,  face  down, 
till  all  traces  of  previous  usage  have  disappeared.  To  ruin 
an  oil  stone,  clean  with  kerosene. — Odontograph. 

Normal  Salt  Solution. — By  normal  salt  solution  is 
meant  a  solution  of  six  parts  of  sodium  chlorid  in  one  thou- 
sands parts  water. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

Swedish  Toothache  Drops. — Clove  oil,  cajeput  oil,  of 
each,  ID ;  chloroform,  5 ;  acetic  ether,  5 ;  menthol,  3 ;  cam- 
phor, I.    Dissolve. — Oesterr.  Zeits.  fUr  Pharm. 

Broken  Nerve  Broaches. — Nerve  broaches  broken  ofif 
in  a  root-canal  can  be  easily  removed  after  a  dressing  of  25 
per  cent,  pyrozone,  applied  on  cotton,  has  been  left  in  the 
canal  for  a  few  days. — S.  L.  Walton,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Remove  Broken  Donaldson's  Broaches  from  the  Pulp 
Canal. — Remove  by  means  of  a  magnet  made  from  a  small 
instrument. — British  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

An  Aid  to  the  Saliva  Ejectar. — A  small  piece  of  wet, 
antiseptic  gauze  placed  over  end  of  the  saliva  ejector  will 
prevent  the  tissues  from  being  drawn  in. — E.  C.  Kroeck. 

To  Remove  Wax  from  Utensils. — When  pans,  wash 
basin,  etc.,  get  waxy,  clean  with  kerosene. — G.  C.  Brown, 
Western  Dental  Journal. 


490  Practical  Dentistry. 

Neuralgia. — Equal  parts  of  benzoin  and  oil  of  pepper- 
mint rubbed  on  the  aflFected  part,  or  sprinkled  on  a  cloth 
wrung  out  of  hot  water,  in  many  cases  acts  like  a  charm. — 
Pacific  Medical  Gazette. 

Saliva-ejector  Tubes. — Keep  glass  tubes  for  saliva  ejec- 
tion clean  by  permitting  them  to  stand  in  a  w'eak  solution 
of  sulphuric  acid. — W.  G.  Ebenole,  The  Dentists'  Maga- 
zine. 

Broken  Nerve  Broach. — In  case  of  a  broken  nerve  broach 
in  canal  with  end  protruding  through  apex,  fill  the  canal 
and  open  through  the  alveolus  with  round  bur  and  remove 
the  point. — E.  A.  Peaker,  Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

To  Drill  Glass  or  Porcelain. — Moisten  an  ordinary  drill 
with  a  mixture  of  tAvo  parts  of  oxalic  acid  and  one  part 
of  turpentine.  Keep  the  mixture  in  a  tightly  corked  bottle. 
— Dental  Hints. 

A  Preventive  of  Grating  the  Teeth  During  Sleep. — Open 
the  bite  at  night  by  means  of  caps  fitting  over  the  bicuspids 
and  molars. — Items  of  Interest. 

To  Remove  Blood  Stains. — Soak  in  warm  water  to  which 
has  been  added  tartaric  acid.  No  soap  is  necessary. — 
Medical  Times. 

Formaldehyd:  An  Antidote. — Should  formaldehyd  drop 
on  the  tongue,  cheeks  or  lips  swab  with  cotton  dipped 
in  grain  alcohol.  This  will  allay  the  burning  sensation. — 
J.  H.  Hanning,  Items  of  Interest. 

To  Clarify  Wax. — Melt  in  a  hot-water  bath  :  remove  and 
bring  to  a  slow  boil  and  break  into  it  a  fresh  egg;  stir 
until  thoroughly  cooked.  Strain  through  cheese-cloth,  and 
the  wax  will  be  as  clean  and  pure  as  when  first  bought. — 
Items  of  Interest. 

A  Cement  for  Fastening  Handles  and  Ferrules. — Equal 
parts  of  rosin  and  brick  dust  make  a  good  cement  for  fasten- 
ing handles  and  ferrules. — Pacific  Journal. 


General  Information.  49^ 

Kemoval  of  Silver  Nitrate  Stains  on  Teeth.— Apply 
iodin,  changing  the  nitrate  into  the  iodid  of  silver ;  then  ap- 
ply ammonia,  leaving  the  tooth  stainless.— H.  C.  Register, 
International  Dental  Journal. 

Removal  of  Iodin  Stains  from  Garments. — Dampen  the 
spots  on  the  cloth,  cover  with  dry  bicarbonate  of  soda.  Re- 
new the  soda  till  the  spot  is  removed. — Dental  Brief. 

To  Remove  Silver  Stains  from  the  Fingers. — Dip  the 
fingers  in  a  mixture  of  eight  parts  copper  sulphate,  two 
parts  hydrochloric  acid,  and  ninety  parts  water.  Then  wash 
in  a  sodium  hyposulphite  solution,  and  rinse  with  clear 
water.  In  case  of  cuts  or  abrasion,  dilute  the  acid  still 
further. — Western  Druggist. 

Bums  from  Acids. — If  from  carbolic  acid  apply  absolute 
alcohol  at  once;  if  from  hydrofluoric  acid  apply  a  strong 
solution  of  bicarbonate  of  soda.  Never  use  these  acids  with- 
out having  at  hand  some  agent  to  stop  their  action  im- 
mediately in  case  of  accident. — D,  C,  Dental  Review. 

To  Remove  the  Odor  of  Iodoform. — Wash  the  hands  in 
soap  and  water;  rinse  with  dilute  aqua  ammonia,  after 
which  use  lemon- juice  or  cider  vinegar.  This  will  com- 
pletely destroy  the  offensive  odor, — Eclectic  Medical  Jour- 
nal. 

Removal  of  Calculus. — When  hemorrhage  interferes 
with  the  removal  of  calculus,  pack  a  little  dry  powdered 
suprarenal  capsule  under  the  gingiva.  This  will  secure  a 
bloodless  field. — E.  R.  Carpenter,  Dental  Digest. 

Local  Styptic. — For  hemorrhage  from  congested  gums, 
apply  dry  powdered  suprarenal  capsule  directly  to  the  tissue. 
Leaves  no  soreness. — Dental  Review. 

To  Soften  Celluloid. — If  strips  of  celluloid  are  dipped 
in  hot  alcohol  they  become  very  soft  in  two  or  three  min- 
utes, while  after  fifteen  minutes  they  are  as  stiff  as  before 
immersion. — Journal  of  the  American  Medical  Association. 


492  Practical  Dentistry. 

Tooth  Bleaching-. — The  brown  discoloration  following 
the  death  of  a  pulp  and  the  diffusion  of  hemaglobin  into  the 
tubular  structure  of  the  dentin  may  be  removed  by  the  pro- 
longed action  of  etherial  pyrozone,  followed  by  strong  oxalic 
acid. — E.  C.  Kirk,  Dental  Cosmos. 

Diseased  Gums. — When  the  gums  are  inflamed,  soft  and 
spongy,  and  swollen,  the  ten  per  cent,  solution  of  suprarenal 
extract,  applied  on  cotton  three  times  a  day,  will  speedily 
accomplish  a  cure. — J.  Robert  Megraw,  Western  Dental 
Journal. 

To  Remove  the  Odor  of  Iodoform. — Use  spirits  of  tur- 
pentine on  the  hands  or  instruments.  Added  to  the  wash 
water  in  using  soap,  it  makes  it  very  efficacious. — Le  Pro- 
gres  Medicale. 

Canker  Sores. — Use  a  saturated  solution  of  salicylic 
acid  in  alcohol,  for  canker  sores,  drying  the  gum  well 
before  applying. — C.  F.  Rodgers,  Dental  Digest. 

Gingival  Hemorrhage. — In  a  bad  case  of  gingival  hem- 
orrhage the  gums  were  painted  with  turpentine,  and  the 
oil  given  internally,  with  the  result  that  blood  ceased  to 
flow  from  the  gums,  and  no  longer  appeared  in  the  urine. 
— Dental  Digest. 

To  Preserve  Hydrogen  Peroxid. — Take  out  a  small 
quantity  for  immediate  use.  Then  tightly  cork  the  bottle 
and  keep  it  standing  inverted  in  a  vessel  of  water. — 
Dominion  Dental  Journal. 

A  Substitute  for  Gold. — A  new  metal  which  seems  to 

have  the  requisites  of  gold,  while  less  costly,  is  composed  of 

Silver    3-53 

Platinum    2.40 

Copper    II. 71 

It  is  elastic  and  takes  a  most  brilliant  polish,  is  not  acted 
on  by  the  fluids  of  the  mouth,  and  answers  the  same  pur- 
poses as  gold.  (Translation.) — B.  J.  Cigrand,  Dental  Di- 
gest. 


General  Information.  493 

The  Protection  of  Nearly  Exposed  Pulps. — After  the 
removal  of  the  leathery,  decomposed  dentin,  the  layer  of 
softened  dentin  nearest  the  pulp  probably  contains  lactic 
acid,  which  should  be  neutralized  by  saturating  with  mild 
solution  sodium  bicarbonate,  or  weak  ammonia  water,  or 
5  per  cent,  sodium  dioxid.  Hydrogen  dioxid  in  lo  per 
cent,  neutral  solution  may  be  sufficient  for  surface  disin- 
fection, but  it  is  well  to  saturate  the  layer  with  an  antiseptic 
which  may  remain  in  situ.  Dry  with  alcohol  and  warm 
air,  and  saturate  with  oil  of  cloves  or  eugenol.  Wipe  out 
excess,  and  again  dry.  Varnish  with  the  following,  giving 
second  or  third  coat : 

U.    Beta  napthol    I  gr. 

Methyl  alcohol  20  drops 

Added  to  I/2  oz.  bottle  of  "Cavitine"  varnish. 

The  acid  of  zinc  phosphate  cannot  pass  through  this 
varnish.  Place  asbestos  or  waxed  paper  over  floor  of  cav- 
ity before  last  coat  of  varnish  has  completely  dried.  Intro- 
duce zinc  phosphate,  and  if  doubtful,  complete  fiUing  with 
temporary  stopping,  and  wait  a  few  days. — Otto  E.  Inglis, 
Stomatologist. 

Tic  Douloureux. — Henry  Bordier  considers  electricity 
the  most  favorable  method  of  treatment  for  neuralgia. 
Apply  the  galvanic  current,  sixty  to  eighty  milliamperes, 
for  an  hour  daily,  in  trigeminal  neuralgia,  using  aluminum 
or  platinated  copper  electrodes.  Two  cases,  men  of  fifty- 
nine  and  sixty-nine,  are  reported  in  detail,  both  cured  per- 
manently.— Journal  de  Pracs. 

B.    Aluminun  plate    6  parts 

Zinc    I  part 

Phosphor   tin    3  parts 

Flux :  stearic  acid. 

Useful  for  strengthening  seamless  aluminum  crowns, 
preventing  wearing  through  on  occlusal  surface. — Dental 
Summary. 


494  Practical  Dentistry. 

For  Relief  of  Reflex  Pains  from  Diseases  of  the  Pulp. — 

IJ.    Acetanilidi    grs.viii. 

Phenacetin     grs.xv. 

Caffeine  citrate   grs.xv. 

Misce  et  ft.  pulv.  No.  viii. 

Sig. — One  to  be  taken  every  two  hours. 

The  combined  coal  tar  products  act  in  perfect  harmony, 
while  the  toxic  properties  are  more  or  less  neutralized,  while 
smaller  doses  are  more  powerful  in  the  combination. — Leo 
Greenbaum,  International  Dental  Journal. 

To  Keep  the  Hands  Soft  and  White. — To  counteract 
the  effects  of  frequent  immersions  in  antiseptic  solutions  the 
following  will  be  found  one  of  the  very  best  of  formulas : 

^.    01.   rosae    gftt.  xv 

Glycerin    Sj 

Spts.  Myrcise  5  "J 

01.  cajuput   gtt.  XX 

M. — Apply  at  night  before  retiring,  first  washing  the 
hands  thoroughly  in  hot  water.  In  cold  weather  apply  be- 
fore going  out. — Journal  American  Medical  Association. 

Alloy  Cement. — For  the  alloy: 

Silver  40 

Tin     60 

Platinum     3 

For  the  cement : 

Oxide  of  zinc   200 

Borax    5 

Silex    8 

Glass    6 

With  phosphoric  acid  to  dissolve  to  the  consistency  of 
glycerin. 

Of  the  cement  and  the  alloy  equal  parts,  mixed  and  pre- 
pared as  an  ordinary  zinc  phosphate  filling.  It  has  all  the 
qualities  of  any  cement  and  also  presents  a  metallic  surface, 
a  good  non-conductor.  While  attaching  itself  to  the  tooth 
like  an  ordinary  cement  it  is  practically  a  metal  filling. — C. 
B.  Parker,  Dental  Cosmos. 


General  Information.  495 

A  Valuable  Styptic. — A  styptic  of  great  value  is  pre- 
pared as  follows : 

Tr.  benzoin i  oz. 

Alum 2   oz. 

Aqua 20  oz. 

Mix  and  boil  six  hours  in  a  glazed  earthen  vessel,  adding 
hot  water  to  compensate  for  evaporation.  Filter  and  keep 
in  well-stoppered  bottles.  A  drop  of  this  fluid  poured  in 
a  glass  containing  human  blood  produces  instant  coagula- 
tion.— M.  E.  LeGalley,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

Foetor  of  Breath  from  Decayed  Teeth. — 

B.    Thymol grs.  viii 

Alcohol    5  i 

Glycerin  3  iv 

Formaldehyd  (40  per  cent,  solution)  . . . . .  gtt.  viii 
Aquse  q.  s.  ad  5  "i 

Use  as  a  mouth  wash. 

— Maryland  Medical  Journal. 

For  Relief  of  Reflex  Pains  in  the  Face  from  Disease  of 
the  Pulp.— 

5.    Antipyrin, 

Phenacetin, 

Quinin  sulphate, 

Powdered  ginger   aaSss 

Caffeine  citrate    grs.xv. 

Misce  et  ft.  pulv  No.  iii. 
Sig. — One  every  two  hours. 

—Leo  Greenbaum,  International  Dental  Journal. 

Pulp  Devitalization. — A  caustic  paste  that  is  painless 
and  anaesthetic: 

5^.    Arsenous  acid    l.o 

Nirvanin    i.o 

— Robert  Marcus,  Dental  Register. 


496  Practical  Dentistry. 

Malarial  Periostitis. — 

^.    Acetanilid, 

Quinin,    aa  gr.  xxiv 

lodin  sulphate,  gr.  i 

SiG. — Make  into  twelve  powders  or  capsules  and  take  one  every 
two  or  three  hours. 

■ — J.  R.  McGraw,  Western  Dental  Journal. 


Plating  Without  Battery. — 

Crystallized  pyro-phosphate  of  sodium    .  .  80  gms. 

Hydrocyanic  acid,  12  per  cent   8  gms. 

Crystallized  gold  chloride   2  gms. 

— Dental  Brief. 


RK501 


